Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

CFO — the new horizon

fiogf49gjkf0d

CFO

Introduction :


Organisations in the recent years are struggling to withstand
pressures from various quarters like compliance, auditors, capital markets,
shareholders and so on. These are over and above the usual day-to-day business
pressures. Take the case of US companies. The southward-moving economies,
mounting oil prices, falling currency, and increasing cost pressures have
already put US managements under tremendous stress. To top it, the hanging sword
of SOX coupled with obsessed auditors is making every quarter a strained
experience for the whole organisation.

Noticeably Chief Financial Officer — CFO — is at the centre
of all this stress and strain. The expectations from the CFO have undergone a
sea change in the last decade. While internal expectations are at the same
intensity, the external pressures from regulators and capital markets are
growing day by day and quarter by quarter. Just beyond crunching numbers, all
these internal and external stakeholders expect a CFO to deliver lot more value
for the organisation. While these dynamics are changing dramatically, the CFOs
have to handle their own financial organisations, who like other parts of the
business, resist any changes that are needed to face these pressures and
challenges. Looking at the various global organisations, I feel, the success of
the CFOs lies in how they handle these external and internal expectations and
how do they bring about the transformation within their own financial
organisations to cope with these changes.

Obviously, this means that the business requires not only a
competent leader heading the finance function, but also a competitive leader to
lead the business activities. The finance organisation is uniquely positioned to
direct some of the uncomfortable activities that the current regulatory and
external stakeholders expect because otherwise no one will do them.

Value creation :

In the given era, the business, externally and internally
expects the CFO to create huge and unique value for the company. The value, as
widely understood, gets created by having effective capital structure, setting
expectations for the investors, setting stretch goals for revenues and
profitability, so that the business meets its all long-term aspirations.
However, this happens not only under dynamic but sometimes volatile
circumstances.

The decisions on capital structure in the past used to be
long-term decisions. But in the given era, with globalisation and capital and
debt markets becoming smart and open, one has to keep a constant check on the
optimisation of capital structure. In a country like India where the laws reduce
the flexibility of such decisions (like buyback and issue of own equity, etc.),
the role of CFO gets tougher as the competition faced is of a global nature.
Thus in given constraints and framework the CFO has to perform more skillful and
non-standard financial engineering models to ensure that the business gets
optimum capital structure at all the times.

The same situation is faced on managing investors’
expectations. The capital markets around the world are coming closer and the
investors’ expectations are becoming almost similar from a business in the USA
and the one from India. The investors, if are giving higher multiple to your
company than a similar one in the USA or Europe, they have to be convinced about
the reason for such higher valuation of your business.

This brings the growth story. In IT industry, or now I would
now name it as Knowledge Industry (KI), the 30% growth story is impressive all
along to the global FIs, but to sustain these growth numbers at a billion $ +
top lines is a different challenge that no CFOs in India had faced before. The
CFOs are expected to create these values.

While doing that role, internally, the CFO has to maintain an
effective rhythm in the business thru participation in business planning and
review sessions. During this process, the CFO has to expose the areas of
underperformance in the business to ensure that overall growth and value do not
have a drag. This requires a lot of political and tactical skills. Weeding out
the dead log from the organisation in the current era is very critical and
crucial for survival of the organisation and the CFO has a lot of value to add
in this area.

Creating competitive edge :

As I said earlier, in the given volatile situation of the
markets and economy, every CFO has to ensure that the finance organisation that
he or she leads, has to have competent people that will give the business
competitive advantage. This needs attracting and retaining people with excellent
financial skills who are good at numbers and also technically sound. With all
kinds of GAAPs and clarifications and commentaries coming on such principles,
the CFO’s life has become more complicated. The hand-tied auditors and audit
committees add more complexities by their indecisiveness and tendency of keeping
themselves guarded in any eventuality. The CFO is truly trapped within business
objectives, regulatory interpretations and illusive shackles created by others.

This needs the CFO to benchmark each of the finance function
constantly. The basic benchmarks should be on performance on delivering
reasonable and adequate returns on capital deployed to the stakeholders.
Unfortunately, there are only few metrics available today to judge and measure
the quality and competency of finance personnel. Still, one has to form its own
metrics for the quality of the people in the finance organisation. As CFO, I
would always see if my people are in demand in the market. If one of the senior
persons leaves and joins as a CFO of another company at double the salary, I
take it as a benchmarking exercise of the quality of my people. They must be
good if one of them goes as a CFO of another organisation at double the pay !

Another way to judge the quality of output is to encourage people to participate in awards. Say, Institute of Chartered Accountants’ award for best-presented annual report. Such competitions provide an urge to improve quality of the output like annual report of the company.

Highest integrity of each finance team member is also one of the critical factors to achieve competitive edge. In the current environment, it is important that there should be zero tolerance for non-compliance. Controls are not only needed in substance but also in form. For example, if you have internal review meetings, the minutes of the same need to be recorded and circulated, action items must be tracked and completed to ensure that all the adequate controls are in place and are followed adequately.

No surprises:

This is the dream that every CFO has and wants to achieve. Business and markets give you enough surprises. What you hate to have is more surprises coming from your own organisation, from auditors and from the audit committee. Thus constant liaison with auditors and the audit committee has no substitute. Every non-business as usual (BAU) matter must be informed to these entities immediately to avoid last minute surprises to either side. This ensures a healthy relationship between all the stakeholders !

Internally, anticipating issues before they arise is essential. The CFO must have a list of peculiar transactions that may give rise to any non-BAU issues. Such issues need to be attacked on a war footing in time to avoid the quarter-end surprises. If you have number of subs in multiple countries reporting their numbers in different currencies and GAAPs, your responsibility goes up multifold as each of such sub, its GAAP and reporting currency has many surprises stored at the time of consolidation. The interpretation of GAAP provisions and their respective treatments in books can vary so much that quarter-end consolidation can become truly a nightmare! This requires a tight forecasting schedule and ability of the business to forecast accurately. In spite of spending hours on calls with the business people on forecast numbers, outlooks and budgets almost every week, there is a huge scope for a surprise and one has to have a plan to deal with such situations wisely and sometimes bravely. Revenue recognition or impairment of intangibles or compensated leave provision are some of the areas that can give last-minute surprises in US GAAP. Foreign Exchange Accounting has its inheritant element of surprise on the last date of a quarter. The CFO has to learn to pass thru these situations.

Complex life:
While the CFO is busy adding value to business and creating competitive advantage to the business and avoiding surprises, the ever-changing laws and demanding auditors and audit committees (especially those coming under laws like SOX !) makes life of the CFO and his organisation more complex. Indian companies are going global, and preparing accounts with different reporting currencies, different GAAPs, consolidations under Indian GAAP and also mostly US GAAP, and lastly every quarter with ‘deadlines’, Most of my CFO friends truly experience the meaning of ‘Dead’ line! Truly, life has become too complex.

I think it is time to question what is the value of publishing the quarterly numbers. Modern businesses are too complex to be evaluated on just one-quarter numbers and get in to enormous discussions on QoQ and YoY numbers, LTM numbers and so on. Other than audit firms and TV business channels and media, no one (especially investors/shareholders) stands benefited! It loses quality and adds complexity of numbers at the heavy cost of health of finance/accounts organisation of each listed company. Further, we add to our complexity by giving guidance for the next quarter and try to achieve it or beat it with no regards to global market dynamics (not capital markets) of our own Industry.

I think all of us bring of the same fraternity should make a serious attempt, to see that we get a stable set of GAAP rules which do not have multiple interpretations, leave some space for the CFOs’ integrity and discretion, rather than asking auditors to interpret GAAP rules (AS) (as if they are Vedas and only the auditors have right to interpret them! !); stop this quarterly business and make it half-yearly and move as early to IFRS to have common rules for global subs and consolidations of accounts. There are number of areas where the same transaction gets treated differently in different parts of the world. Even OECD countries do not have common understanding of the accounting treatment of similar transactions. Compensated leave, intagibles, ESOP accounting are some of such areas. IFRS, I believe, will bring these complexities and confusions to an end. In the USA, number of multinationals have found a solution otherwise! They have started publishing ‘Non-GAAP’ numbers with a management statement that these numbers are not audited but the management feels that they represent ‘true picture’ of the business !

The problem that I see is, in all this intellectual exercises and professional egos, all of us have forgotten that the main purpose of the reporting is to elucidate the current shareholders and prospective investors about the affairs of the company and allow them to have more educated judgment on the future performance of the company they have invested in or want to invest. In the bargain, not only have we made our lives complicated, but also made these numbers almost indecipherable to all stakeholders.

I feel, this is not impossible, though difficult.What we need is to put brains of professional accountants, CFOs, and regulators together to see how we ultimately help to create a value for our business, how we bring competitive advantage to our business without making life unnecessarily complex by bringing some common standards and compatible accounting practices that give all global stakeholders some same and meaningful information at reasonable intervals. I can only hope, we will reach there one day and it may not be just Utopia!

Chartered Accountants in the 21st Century

fiogf49gjkf0d
Chartered Accountants in the 21st Century“It’s not the strongest of the
species that survive, nor the most intelligent, but those most responsive to
change”

The 21st century will be unique as we will see the balance of
economic power shift to Asia from the western world which has dominated the
previous 400 years. With India and China growing at over 9%, for the first time
in human history, we will see 40% of the world population experiencing growth at
this level with multiple ramifications in every sphere. Asia will also reap the
benefits of a demographic transition as it has a very young population, with
lesser dependence, growing in a high-growth ecosystem. At the same time, the
developed world is seeing the rise of an ageing population, with increased
dependence and social security costs.

Advances in technology, creation of the World Wide Web,
massive reduction in costs of telecommunications and the democratisation of
travel is creating linkages, totally shaking up national markets. Transnational
flow of capital has reduced the ability of nations to control their currency and
their own economy, creating an interdependence never seen before. Free flow of
capital has led to the rise of giant transnationals, which today make up 60% of
global trade and command huge resources. Because of the wide diversity of
ownership and business, the world has become much smaller than we can imagine.
Cross-border movement of national persons is creating new risks and new
opportunities. In a world driven by innovation, the only true competitive
advantage would be the capability and talent of the human resources that every
nation or business entity can command.

The global economy is being driven by the knowledge
revolution. Knowledge transcends boundaries, while businesses transform from
being multinational to transnational. The world has now become a global village.
Collaboration, networking, mergers, consolidation, and partnerships, all are
creating an interdependent world.

In this knowledge era, our success depends on what we know
and what we do with what we know and in what we need to excel. Those who are
able to take advantage of these changes will pioneer the creation of wealth and
the advent of new business models.

Changing Indian scenario :

So, welcome to change and welcome to growth.

India has led this change globally, growing at 9% p.a. for
the last four years. The rapidity of the change, and the opportunities that it
has thrown up, has tremendously increased opportunities for every profession and
also created a global market for services. The demand for Chartered Accountants
(CA) both in the profession and in industry has led to shortages with massive
increases in compensation. The profession needs to reflect on the opportunities
and take full advantage of growth. Because of the global nature of the change,
one also needs to scan the globe for trends and prepare oneself in terms of
increasing competence levels.

Industry is in need of complex specialised services and is
being forced to look elsewhere and this is becoming a matter of concern. The
growth of the BPO/KPO sector providing global services, has brought in massive
use of technology to deliver services and over a period of time created a large
pool of talent, unheard of anywhere else. In the short run, this has led to a
severe shortage of talent and large increases in compensation, creating room for
other professionals to run in. Professional practice is suffering with over 85%
of new members joining industry and large-scale flow of talent out of the
system. This, along with the increased demand from industry would lead to
consolidation of practices and reshape the profession. Small enterprises are
deprived of the services of CAs, impeding their growth, calling for new policy
responses. Welcome to the 21st century.

CAs are also becoming CEOs of local and transnational
enterprises, creating role models of the future.

The Chartered Accountant is India’s best known and most
widely respected professional. It represents years of business studies, work
experience, and the highest standards of professional ethics and objectivity.
But it is based on the model of yesterday and needs to reshape to meet the needs
of tomorrow. It should not be a profession of historic glory, but rather should
write its own history in this new era.

Role of CA :

Because of globalisation CAs are providing specialised
services in all areas that their global compatriots in developed nations
deliver, such as International Accounting, International Taxation, Business
Valuation, Cross-border structuring and Mergers and Acquisition, Investment
analysis, etc.

Some areas which are in great demand are discussed below.

(1) Financial Analysis :


Analysis of routine and non-routine transactions and
preparing analyst’s reports for various equity research firms, provide inputs
for the credit rating agencies, creating the basis for merger/business
combination decisions, etc.

CAs having a sound financial knowledge and analytics, and a
deep understanding of generally accepted accounting principles, are able to
comprehend transactions including benchmarking the policies adopted by the
company against the best in industry.

(2) International Tax and Domestic Management :


As companies globalise rapidly, demand for international tax
services and use of DTT’s is growing multifold. Domain expertise in
international tax laws is becoming a hygiene factor. Such services are becoming
the basis of determining business outcome in firms and have moved away from
playing the role of a traditional interface. Specialisation in complex areas
such as Transfer Pricing is of great value.

In the domestic area, reduction of tax rates and advent of
technology have changed the face of traditional tax planning. With exponential
growth in the services sector, complexities in indirect taxes such as service
tax are on the increase calling for tax strategies to drive business.

(3) Risk Assessment :


Risk management has become the prime focus in Boardrooms round the world. The recent sub-prime crisis has demonstrated the need for more stringent risk management practices and elevated the practitioners to a much higher level. CAs have become reviewers of system design, indentifying deficiencies and advising management on more efficient systems.

International regulations like SOX compliance have opened an area of services, from designing of internal control processes, mapping risks, establishing benchmarks and indentifying processes to mitigate them. Internal Auditors have been empowered through strong corporate governance practices to report directly to the Audit Committee, post-discussion with management, which provide them with the authority together with the responsibility to carry out their functions in the truest sense.

(4)    Experts in International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS):

The world is moving rapidly to a single set of high-quality global standards for accounting, increasing access to capital and enhancing comparability of performance. CAs have to rapidly enhance their expertise in accounting to prepare themselves. The advent of a global IFRS would expand the market for services, with the entire globe being the playfield. Most countries in the world are short of specialised accounting talent and unable to cope with the growth of their economies and are sourcing talent from outside. The transition to a single IFRS globally also creates unprecedented opportunities to our CAs.

(5)    Management   Accounting:
The drive to use real-time information for business decision-making has exponentially increased demand for management accounting in firms. With the capital markets becoming increasingly short-term and analysts’ attention focussed on quarterly results, this area is expected to grow rapidly in future. Budgeting, performance evaluation, cost management, and asset management to increase returns are creating a pull factor. Management accountants have become part of executive teams involved in strategic planning or development of new products.

(6)    International Finance and Currency Management:
With the increasing convertibility of the rupee, firms are borrowing globally to reduce cost of capital and to grow more rapidly. Capital has ceased to become a constraint and exposure to international finance, capital markets and currency management is determining success of CAs. This is also driving the need to have competency in compliance and reporting, as capital is raised from different markets and the regulatory need increases.

(7) Investment Banking and Financial  Services:

Investment banking is dominating the financial services landscape. Never has the world seen such a surfeit of capital and such low interest rates. Developed countries are forced to have low interest rates to keep their consumption going, increasing liquidity and thereby opportunities for investment banking. Sadly, the best global talent is gravitating to this area, reducing innovation in the sciences. The growth of hedge funds has increased volatility in the commodities markets, increasing costs for ordinary people. As this industry offers a fascinating and fast-paced growth to CAs, a change in outlook is called for. The traditional financial services area including financial consultancy services, advice and negotiation with regard to mergers and acquisitions, formulation of nursing programmes and rehabilitation packages for revival of sick units is also seeing growth.

(8) Corporate Finance and  Control:

Corporate finance and control is fast emerging as a specialised function in many companies and the routine accounting function is being delinked from the finance function. Role of CA in corporate finance revolves around mobilisation and utilisation of financial resources for short-term and long-term purposes from domestic and overseas markets through a proper mix of debt and equity, with the goal of optimising returns. Treasury management has become an integral part of corporate finance.

(9) Investment Management:

With low interest rates and increased liquidity, the capital markets and the money markets have witnessed the introduction of new instruments and intense interplay of demand and supply which have increased the volume of activity. Investors increasingly entrust their funds to mutual funds, creating demand for portfolio managers. A portfolio manager’s job is very challenging since it involves the balancing of risks and rewards through skillful shuffling of the portfolio and maximising the return on investment. With significant growth of the mutual fund industry, the demand for portfolio managers will further escalate.

(10) Functional Specialists and Partners in Information Technology:

Multinational companies with globally dispersed operations require enterprise resource planning (ERP) solutions for optimising their organisational functions. These include designing efficient supply-chain management systems, designing financial systems to obtain information across the organisation seamlessly. A CA with his financial expertise can partner with software engineers in designing and customising these systems to cater to each client’s requirement. This is a high-demand emerging area with global opportunities.

(11) KPO/BPO and  ITES :

In a country that has become the breeding ground for the BPO industry, finance and accounts (F&A) outsourcing is fast attracting CAs. While BPOs are cashing in on the Indians’ affinity to numbers, a global work culture, coupled with a much better remuneration, is luring accounts graduates and CAs towards the offshoring wave.

The potential applications of KPOs tend to be much more advanced and wider than Information Technology or Business Process Outsourcing. Compared to other business models, KPOs require high domain expertise. Speed of response is also very important, without compromising the quality of products or services.

The key areas that are outsourced in KPO include business analytics, asset accounting management, financial analysis, payroll management and financial research & investigations. It is evident that there  are a number  of lucrative opportunities for CAs who are willing to take advantage of this market.

It is worthy of mention that the US has developed an xml-based language for financial reporting language called eXtensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL),which provides a tag with a standardised definition to each data element in the financials. This would also bring in KPa opportunities for India.

The BPO/KPO industry has the potential to create a further shortage of accounting skills in India, as their exposure to the global market makes India the accounting office of the world.

Skills & competencies:

Indian CAs have proven themselves to be amongst the best in the class globally. The Institute has developed a Competency Framework to map the full range of competencies expected of a Chartered Accountant at the point of admission to membership.

CA Competencies = Skills + Knowledge + Attitudes

These competencies have been developed by Indian CA profession over many years and have recently been revised to reflect the needs of the public and the profession for the 21st century.

The CA Competency Map defines the level proficiency candidates must demonstrate in each of the competency areas to qualify for their designation. The new CA Competency Map sets out specific expectations for CAs in competency areas of specific domain competencies and personal attributes.

CAs cannot stop learning upon obtaining their degree and attaining membership to the profession. The responsibility to deliver and keep one-self competent to deliver starts from that day. Their responsibilities include :

(1) Being    innovative:

In today’s world knowledge is power. Success will go to those who survive downturns through constant innovation. Hence, the learning process will have to be continuous. CAs have to ensure effective continuous professional learning.

(2)  The power of technology:

Adopting newer technology is a pre-requisite to faster and accurate processing. A CA cannot afford to waste time in performing mundane functions as such businesses are looming under the threat of obsolescence. With the e-revolution in the financial sector, audits have gone online, internal controls are being tested off-site, desk-top due diligence is being done and thus the profession has to evolve new strategies for analysing the potential weakness in each of these systems for tackling many of the white-collar crimes that could be part of an automated society.

(3) Specialisation :

Specialisation is the need of the hour. CAs will have to distinguish themselves with their skills. They can build their expertise in areas such as taxation, auditing, cyber laws, IS audit, corporate finance, international taxation and international accounting standards.

(4) Building soft skills:

Acquiring soft skills such as communication skills, interpersonal skills and managerial expertise has become very critical for being a good CA. CAs need to have good negotiation skills to communicate financial implications with clarity at strategic t level.

(5) Leadership:

New members of the profession are the leaders of tomorrow. They need to groom themselves to take business decisions and should not restrict themselves to financial areas. They should build themselves as well as the profession towards a truly world-class standard.

Role of ICAI:

ICAI, as the professional body for Indian CAs, would need to reshape its role to playing a more global role in changing the global financial architecture. It has to focus more on preparing its members to the new challenges, take the lead in developing the profession in the emerging markets and participate in global forums to set standards.

Certain areas where ICAl can play a pivotal role in enhancing the quality of members are :

  • Intensive courses and certifications in the areas of international accounting standards, XBRL, international taxation, business valuation and other specialised areas. These should be conducted by eminent persons in the profession.

  • Internal activities of ICAI including the project being undertaken should be available on the ICAI website. Minutes of the meeting should be well documented and comments received on draft publications should also be available on the website.

  • ICAI should encourage exchange programme for members of different countries to share ex-periences and learn from global practices.

  • Tie-ups should be made with all international bodies for enabling members to access international research materials, publications and global best practices.

  • Provide executive education courses for non-finance professional in areas of common interest.

  • Raise sufficient funds for research for matters which are issues faced by a large number of entities.

  • Involve in extensive collaborations  with global corporations for placement with lucrative offers to make this a very covetable profession.

  • ICAI should enter into reciprocity arrangements with other countries for global acceptance of the degree.

Last but not the least, Indian CAs should be looked upon as the best accounting professionals of the world. To achieve this goal, ICAl has to market its potential in the global markets, convincing global corporations to receive their accounting and au-diting services from India.

Conclusion:

India’s GDP is expected to grow from US $ 1.2 trillion to US $ 2.5 trillion in the next ten years and to US $ 5 trillion by 2028. It is a time of unprecedented growth and opportunity. Every year India itself needs at least 25,000 new chartered accountants and the number will only grow further as the economy grows. The entire globe is looking to India to get the accounting talent to lubricate the global markets. All of us should be prepared for the global markets with skills comparable to the best in the world. CAs have to lead India in this century. Posterity will not judge us kindly if we do not rise to the occasion.

As Peter Drucker once said “One cannot manage change. One can only be ahead of it”.

The decade ahead

fiogf49gjkf0d

The decade ahead

In the period of more than fifty years that has elapsed since
I qualified as a Chartered Accountant, the only constant has been change.
However, what has not been constant is the rate of change which has been
accelerating at an ever faster rate. More significant developments have taken
place in the world of the accountant in the last decade than in the preceding
four decades and it is reasonable to assume that this rate of change will
accelerate even more in the coming decade.


It is not easy to predict change, but those who do not
anticipate change and plan accordingly, do so at their peril. While we may not
be able to identify the exact nature of the changes which will take place in the
coming decade, it is possible to identify some of the underlying trends which
will cause change and consider their possible consequences.

The first and perhaps the most significant trend is the all
pervasive impact of information technology. IT changes not merely the methods by
which financial information is produced, but can significantly influence the
content of that information, its form and its frequency of presentation, as also
the role of the auditor.

Information technology makes it possible for information to
be produced, analysed and collated very fast and this will generate demands for
financial information to be prepared and presented to shareholders on an
on-line, real-time basis. The annual general-purpose financial statement as now
produced in the form of the annual report may well disappear. In fact we are
very fast reaching the stage where, as a cynic when referring to the annual
report put it, “Analysts do not need it and shareholders don’t read it”.
Electronic filing of myriad statutory reports with regulatory authorities will
also become the order of the day and audit firms will have to increasingly
embrace automation in their auditing processes totally to handle this.

There will be a fundamental shift in the objective of audit.
Arithmetical accuracy of data generated through electronic systems will be taken
for granted and emphasis will shift to the validity of the input data and the
meaningful evaluation of the outputs generated. Higher level skills will
therefore be needed to make the resultant value judgments.

The development of the eXtensible Business Reporting Language
(XBRL) will be greatly accelerated. XBRL assigns a tag to each individual data
item in financial information containing contextual information such as
accounting period, company name, currency of use, etc. This makes it possible to
identify, extract, exchange, manipulate and report data quickly and easily. XBRL
will revolutionise financial reporting by making it possible for anyone who
wants to use financial information to analyse it, re-use it and exchange it in
any desired form. This can improve the transparency of financial statements and
returns filed with regulatory authorities and XBRL filings will become
mandatory. Already in the UK, XBRL filings have been made mandatory for all
corporate tax returns by 2011.

Significant progress has already been made in the development
of XBRL software throughout the world. The International Accounting Standards
Committee Foundation has developed IFRS-GP and software has been developed to
tag companies’ reported data and to validate the accuracy of self-tags for SEC
filings in the US. In India also, the project for XBRL development has been
assigned to a sub-committee of SEBI’s Standing Committee on Disclosure and
Accounting Standards (SCODA).

A second significant trend which can be identified is the
impact of globalisation in general and the development of international
standards of accounting and auditing in particular. India’s emergence as one of
the fastest growing members of the world economy carries with it the necessity
that it should rapidly align its financial systems with international practices.
Adoption of international accounting standards by 2011, as announced, is an
essential step in that direction. However, there are certain
aspects of this decision which need to be considered.

First, there is the oft-repeated complaint that accounting
standards are increasingly becoming too academic and divorced from practical
considerations. It is said that because of this approach, financial outputs are
often at odds with economic reality. It is also claimed that accounting
standards are becoming more complex. That there is merit in this claim is
obvious from the fact that the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)
itself has recognised the need for reducing complexity in some standards. Thus,
it has recently issued a discussion paper on ‘Reducing complexity in reporting
financial instruments’. This paper argues that the many ways of measuring
financial instruments may be one main cause of complexity and while the
long-term goal should be measuring all types of financial information in the
same way, there will have to be an intermediate approach which must (a) provide
relevant and easily understood information; (b) be consistent with the long-term
measurement objective of fair value; (c) increase the number of financial
instruments measured at fair value; (d) not increase complexity, and (e) be
significant enough to justify the costs of the change.

Second, there is the growing debate between principle-based standards as proposed by IASB and rule-based standards as in US-GAAP. Both carry certain risks. The SEC in the U.S. argues that principle-based standards carry the risk of poor judgments which could be second-guessed by hindsight, whereas rule-based standards provide clarity and ensure risk. However the Enron, Worldcom, etc. debacles clearly show that rule-based standards are not free from risk as they can be easily circum-vented. The more -fundamental objection to rule-based standards, however, is their unsuitability as a basis for international standards. Rule-based standards are derived in the context of the environment in which they are developed and a rule which is appropriate in one jurisdiction may be wholly inappropriate in another jurisdiction with a different environment. In order to develop a single international standard, IASB and FASB are progressing along the road of convergence of IFRS with US-GAAP, but there is increasing concern that what may finally emerge willbe principle-based standards with rules.

But by far the most important  area of concern  is the growing trend towards ‘fair-value’ accounting in international standards. As a long-term goal, the concept of ‘fair-value’ accounting is unexceptional. It significantly enhances the role of financial information as a tool for making investment decisions and it obviates the ‘movement’ errors which occur when the values of assets and liabilities change over a period of time. However, there are significant difficulties in determining fair value and when fair value is based on estimation and guesswork, ‘measurement’ errors can occur.

IASB has in November 2006 issued a discussion paper titled ‘Fair Value Measurement’ which incorporates a definition of fair value as “the price that would be received to sell an asset or transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date”. This borrows the definition used in a standard issued by FASB two months earlier, but the important difference is that whereas the term ‘fair value’ is used restrictively in US-GAAP to cover financial instruments and business combinations, it is used more extensively in IFRS to cover most assets and liabilities.

The big problem is that in practice, and certainly in developing countries like India, there often does not exist a market in which orderly transactions can take place between participants. Therefore ‘fair value’ will have to be estimated by the preparers of financial information and these values would be subject to the significant risk of ‘measurement’ errors, both deliberate and in good faith. Auditors also could become more dependent on managements’ judgment and as Warren Buffet has so aptly put it, marking to market could well become marking to myth.

Globalisation also will have an impact on the regulatory framework of the auditing profession. In the U.S., the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) established under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act is required to exercise oversight over overseas audit firms which audit U.S. listed companies or their subsidiaries wherever located. PCAOB teams have already started examination of audit firms in India. In a recent interview, the Head of Audit Regulation of the European Commission has said that the Commission is consulting on how to deal with auditors from non-EU jurisdictions – ‘third countries’ – who audit third-country entities listed in EU regulated markets. The question is whether third-country auditors should be subject to registration requirements and over-sight by EU member states or whether reliance could be placed on the third-country audit registration and oversight authorities. Clearly in making that decision, an important consideration will be the level of public oversight in the regulation of the profession and pressure will mount for this oversight to be by a public regulator and not by the Institute.

A third significant trend which can affect the profession is the growing importance of corporate governance and its impact on the role of audit. The failure of major corporations like Enr on , Worldcom, etc. in the U.S., Royal Ahold in the Netherlands, Parmalet in Italy, etc. has highlighted the fact that corporate responsibility is the central issue which business needs to address. While this has resulted in a spate of regulatory pronouncements and statutes whereby policy makers seek assurance that business delivers sustainable and responsible outcomes, it also demands that business policies are supported by accurate and reliable information and the systems, processes and strategies that produce that information and that there is independent assurance in this area. This is a growing concern which will provide both future risk and opportunity for the profession and also re-define  the role of audit.

An auditor has two roles, first, to provide assurance regarding the reliability of financial information as the basis of investment decisions, and second, to give an opinion on the stewardship performance of the management. Traditionally the profession has given prominence to the first role and largely ignored the second. However in the changed environment, the roles will reverse. Auditors will be required to increasingly give assurance to shareholders on the ‘stewardship’ aspect rather than on the ‘decision usefulness’ aspect. This will mean that shareholders will want greater information and assurance on the risks and uncertainties that affect numbers in the financial statements arising from subjective judgments by management regarding revenue and cost recognition. Therefore, emphasis will shift from an opinion merely on the true and fair aspects of financial statements to value judgments on the existence and adequacy of controls and the relationship between finance and risk.

Risk management willbecome a major area of concern for managements and consequently for the auditor. He will need to examine and evaluate the methods by which managements identify risk, and devise and administer methods by which risks are controlled, managed and reported. He will no longer be able to avoid responsibility for failure to detect high-level collusive fraud and will need to devise new approaches to deal with it. He will need to be more pro-active, that is, identify work which is needed and do it before being asked to and will need to ensure that the work he does is relevant and valuable to the client. Managements will also have to accept greater Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) including in areas of sustainable growth and the auditor will need to audit and monitor these initiatives. All of this will mean that auditors will have to possess wider skills, greatly increase their productivity and create multi-disciplinary firms.

A final trend which we need to recognise is the impact of restructuring in the profession. There are two major themes which will inevitably change the structure of the profession. The first is the growing process of consolidation within the profession, and the second, the continued ability of the profession to attract talent.

The decade which has ended has seen a process of consolidation within the profession whereby the Big-8 have become the Big-4 and a second level of international firms have grown significantly in size. In this process, smaller firms have found it difficult to continue independent existence and have scrambled to join the international firms. The growing dominance of these big international firms and particularly the Big-4 has raised concerns of regulators in many countries. In a recent survey of the investor community in the UK, 25% of the respondents were concerned that the lack of competition could be risking audit quality. However, a third of the same respondents also said that if there was a switch away from a Big-4 firm, they would review their investment decisions.

There have been demands for regulation to restrict this dominance, but clearly that is not the answer. The solution appears to be for second-tier firms to consolidate into larger entities and offer meaningful competition to the Big-4. To create this ‘reputational competition’ they need a better understanding of what constitutes a ‘great firm’. It has been claimed that the outstanding characteristics of a great firm are :- (a) significant sustainable profitable growth; (b) the right type of client base providing the right type of work at the right fees; and (c) the ability to attract and retain quality people. It is also claimed that to acquire these characteristics, these consolidated second-tier firms will need to address certain fundamental issues, namely, (a) the need for a well-planned strategy for the future; (b)    acquisition  and retention  of high-quality staff; (c)    leadership at all levels within the firm; (d) concentration on service lines in which the firm excels and avoidance of service lines where it does not; and (e) understanding client expectations and surpassing them.

An equally important aspect is a change in mindset. The profession must give up its dependence on work where it has a protective position and must no longer expect work as a matter of right. Rather it must be willing to sustain its business development through competition, both within and without the profession. Only then will it force itself to take steps to acquire a ‘reputational’ advantage through a track record of first-rate work.

The most crucial factor which will affect the profession’s future will however be its ability to attract and retain talent. With globalisation and a fast growing economy, one of the major constraints for the economy will be the shortage of talent and the resultant competition for it. Institutes in other countries have already addressed this issue and taken proactive action. Thus in the UK, the English Institute introduced some time back a system whereby training for an associate who is not in practice is extended to employers in several countries, including a proposed extension to India. In March 2006, it launched the Pathway Programme which enables professionals with other accountancy qualifications and five years experience also to obtain an associate qualification after passing an ‘examination of experience’. Finally, it has modified its examinations syllabus to enable entrants to take the examination in phases. Many other Institutes may follow this example and the ‘articleship’ system as we know it may no longer remain as the only vehicle for entry into the profession and audit experience may soon become an optional requirement.

If the profession has to address adequately the challenges created by the trends we have identified, the two key drivers which will be needed in the coming decade will be quality and integrity.

The Financial Reporting Council in the UK recently published a paper on ‘Promoting Audit Quality’ and a framework which admirably summarises the key drivers of audit quality. These are (a) culture within the firm; (b) skills and personal qualities of – 1 partners and staff; (c) effectiveness of the audit process; (d) reliability and usefulness of audit reporting; and (e) ability to respond to factors outside the control of auditors affecting audit quality.

Confidence in the auditor’s integrity is fundamental to his work. To inspire this confidence, he must be seen to be honest, truthful and fair, compliant with the concept of social responsibility, open and concerned with the interests of all stakeholders and demonstrative of taking corrective action where necessary. Integrity has to be underpinned by moral values and demonstration of scepticism, per-severance and ability to withstand pressure in the face of opposition.

As I look back over the last fifty years, I share a feeling of satisfaction that I have been part of a profession which has grown so fast and with so much success. It has done so because it has recognised early and been able to adapt better and faster than many other professions to the changing aspects of business and to exploit the opportunities which this changing aspect has offered. I have no doubt that in the coming decade, we will continue to remain the most dynamic seekers of new business opportunities if we continue to exhibit the qualities which have made this possible, namely, continually updated skills, integrity, social responsibility and strong regulation which protects the ‘brand equity’ of the Chartered Accountant.

Role of the Professional in the 21st Century

fiogf49gjkf0d

Role of the Professional in the 21st Century

The Society which was born in the middle of the 20th century
has, in the beginning of the 21st, very appropriately dedicated the next issue
of its very popular and informative magazine to the ‘Role of the professional in
the 21st Century.’ One often speaks of a person being professional in his work.
This would normally denote particular efficiency in handling the matter
entrusted to him. However, one sometimes speaks of a person as being a ‘true’
professional and by this, one refers to him as a role model, not only in
experience, learning and dedication which he displays in handling professional
assignments, but also his character, rectitude, honesty, fairness and impeccable
integrity. At a time like the present when newspaper reports speak about a
professional having allegedly bribed a member of the Income-tax Appellate
Tribunal and the two having been detained, it is these latter qualities which
assume great importance.


Of course, there is another way of looking at the subject and
interpreting it as referring to the very wide role which a professional plays
today on account of the various opportunities before him — opportunities which
were non-existent, say, 20 years ago. The role of the Chartered Accountant has
become all pervasive and he is a vital link in the businessman’s operations. He
is no longer just an auditor but advises him on management and business
practices, computerisation and concluding large business deals. Indeed, auditing
is today looked upon as the less preferred alternative. This is perhaps because
it requires great courage on the part of the Chartered Accountant to certify
that what the client has done or proposes to do is not in keeping with the law
or good accounting practice. On the other hand, in other fields of his practice
he helps the client whilst as an auditor he looks after, inter alia, the
interest of the shareholder. So also with the advocate — appearance in Courts,
which was the mainstay of his professional practice is no longer so. Advice on
day-to-day matters relating to business and personal affairs of clients as well
as drawing up or settling complicated deeds to provide for the ever increasing
needs of business and arbitration proceedings have overtaken Court practice. In
this writer’s opinion there is, however, nothing so challenging and satisfying
as persuading a Bench to accept your client’s view, particularly if it is an
unorthodox view. However, it all depends on an individual’s approach. Everybody
does not relish a steak !

The ultimate test of the role of a professional is the
standing and the respect he commands and the value which people put on the way
he handles matters and not the number of matters he handles. In England,
previously they had amateurs and professionals playing the game of cricket and
the annual match at Lords used to be called ‘Gentlemen v. Players’, the
amateurs being the gentlemen. The captain of the English team would invariably
be a cricketer who qualified as an amateur (gentleman). (Len Hutton, later Sir
Leonard Hutton, was the first exception just about the time that the Society
started functioning.) This is no longer so. The annual match is discontinued.
One wonders whether this is because the gentleman has gone out of the game! In
my view a professional attains his ultimate role if he qualifies as a gentleman
professional and not just a successful or prominent professional.

In one way of looking at it, the qualities which a
professional must possess to discharge his role with distinction have remained
the same over time. After all, the Ten Commandments do not change from time to
time. They are enduring and of universal application. Nevertheless times are
changing — the 20 : 20 culture has replaced the flavour of a test match in
popular thinking. So also the general concept of a professional has undergone a
change. Advertising by a professional was, and is taboo in India. However, it is
rampant in the United States of America where one may find at a department store
handouts which one can pick up about the achievements of a lawyer and I presume
also of an accountant. At some international airports one finds posters or
hoardings with a photograph of the leading professional in a professional firm
who has achieved success and prominence in his field. Even in the UK today,
barristers are permitted to bring to the notice of the public their speciality
of practice but not a reference to cases won by them. The rule against
advertising in India is so strict that Rule 36 of the Code of Conduct framed by
the Bar Council of India specifically provides that the stationery of a lawyer
should not indicate that he is or has been a President or a member of the Bar
Council or any association or that he has been associated with any person or
organisation or any particular cause or matter or that he specialises in any
type of work or that he has been a judge or an advocate-general. Strictly
speaking therefore, the letterhead cannot state ‘formerly a judge of . . .’ The
Chartered Accountant is subject to equally stringent condition against
advertising. The classic view is that the client must seek out the professional
and not that the latter fishes for clients.

The other malaise is the publicity which professionals seek
by constantly voicing their views in the press in response to mobile requests.
The views are often based on newspaper reports or TV announcements without
having actually seen in black and white what they comment upon. This is, of
course, less reprehensible than the case of the politician who recommends
banning of a publication which he admits in a blase manner that he has not
read !

A prevalent practice today is for a professional to make
presentations to would be clients to show his particular expertise and sometimes
with a view to the client retaining him or his firm at the expense of the
professional currently working for him. This to me appears unsavoury. Of course,
the other point of view is that the client is a customer and it is proper that
he be made aware of the alternatives available just as a businessman advertises
the superior quality of his products.

It is urged in defence that a new entrant in the profession cannot get known unless he is permitted some degree of advertisement. Insofar as the presentations are concerned, the truth is that it is not the new and junior member who indulges in them, but the well-established and seasoned professional even though he does not have to fish for clients! Insofar as the junior and new entrant is concerned, there are several avenues open to him to get himself known. He can write articles in the professional as well as in the lay press, he can accept speaking engagements and he may even take up an assignment as a lecturer, all of which will give his image an exposure. This is particularly applicable to professionals practising in the ( fields of accountancy, law, management, etc. Indeed, the Society is a great place for a new entrant to have his voice heard. The Society as well as several other professional bodies encourage new and budding professionals by offering them speaking and writing engagements. In life there is always a right and a wrong way of doing things.

It is also to be borne in mind that a professional is not in the business of selling goods. Sethi J. observed in Saxena v. Sharma, 2000 7 SCC 264,  “The professional obligations of a lawyer are to be distinguished from the business commitments followed by the trading community.” Vivian Bose J. in the case of Mr. G, a Senior Advocate of the Su-preme Court, AIR 1954 SC 557, pithily observed that the restraints which a lawyer is subjected to are a part of the price he pays for the privilege of belonging to a close and exclusive club, their integrity, dignity and honour shall be above the breath of scandal. There is a very important, firm and distinct line between a business and a profession, a line which unfortunately gets blurred as time passes. Some observations of the Supreme Court – would appear to make this line vanish. In Barendra Prasad Ray v. ITO, 129 ITR 295, the Supreme _ Court equated a business connection as also covering a professional connection. To the same effect is the observation of Rowlatt J. in Christopher Barkar & Sons v. IRe, (1919) 2 KB 222 wherein he observed that “All professions are businesses, but all businesses are not professions.” The observations have to be read in context and bearing in mind the issue involved. For example, in the Supreme Court case the issue was whether an Indian solicitor had a business connection with the barrister engaged by him. It would indeed be a sad day if no distinction is visible between a businessman and a professional. What distinguishes a profession from a business is that a profession has a code of conduct to which its members are subject and breach whereof would result in a disciplinary action. However, no written code of conduct could possibly cover all contingencies. Ultimately, the question to be asked is whether the conduct in question is that of a true gentleman. Often adherence to the unwritten code of conduct is more important because the written code is there for all to see. As very pithily observed in an old film ‘Seven Brides for Seven Brothers’, one has to honour an unwritten contract because the written contract can always be enforced.

Bose J. stated in AIR 1954 SC 557 that a professional “is expected at all times to comport himself in a manner befitting his status as ‘an officer and a gentleman.’ In the Army it is a military offence to do otherwise … though no notice would be taken of ungentlemanly conduct under the ordinary law of the land and none in the case of a civilian. So here, he (the advocate) is bound to conduct himself in a manner befitting the high and honourable profession to whose privileges he has been admitted; and if he departs from the high standards which that profession has set for itself and demands of him in professional matters, he is liable to disciplinary action.” It is for this reason that S. 21(3) of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 imposes a punishment not only for professional but also for ‘other’ misconduct.

In business, the driving force is money. That ought not to be the case in a profession.  In the Preamble to the Standards  of Professional  Conduct  and Etiquette formulated  by the Bar Council of India and reported in the journal  section  of 68 Bom.  L.R. 72 it is stated “An advocate shall, at all times, comport himself in a manner befitting his status as an officer of the Court, a privileged member of the communitp, and a gentleman, bearing in mind that what may be lawful and moral for a person who is not a member of the Bar, or for a member of the Bar in his non-professional capacity may still be improper for an advocate. Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing obligation, an advocate shall fearlessly uphold the interests of his client, and in his conduct conform to the rules hereinafter mentioned both in letter and in spirit. The rules hereinafter mentioned contain canons of conduct and etiquette adopted as general guides, yet the specific mention thereof shall not be con-strued as a denial of the existence of others equally imperative though not specifically mentioned.”
 
What applies to a lawyer equally applies to any other professional. The introduction to the publication on code of conduct issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India sets out that the overriding motto has to be pride of service in preference to personal gain.

An illustration which may bring out the difference that there should be in the approach of a professional and of a businessman is provided by what should be their respective reactions to the fact that a particular act or transaction which has scope to yield monetary gain may be visited with a penalty if held to be impermissible. The businessman may ask what is the extent of the penalty and if factoring in the quantum thereof would still make the transaction acceptable from the business point of view, then he may take the penalty in his stride. On the other hand, the professional would (should 7) say that a penalty would imply a breach of the law and an act which imposes a penalty must be avoided even though financially viable. My views may, of course, be regarded by the new and not so new entrants to the profession as archaic, but then I have been brought up in a culture where it was considered improper for Counsel to carry visiting cards and certainly not proper to distribute them to all and sundry at professional meetings. Today, this is regarded as essential ‘networking.’ Indeed, in some large and well-known firms abroad and perhaps in India also, the senior-most partner essentially confines his activities to client nursing and client development rather than client attendance. The worth of a partner is judged by the money he pulls in and not the quality of his work.

By saying that in the 21st century money is the measure of success, I do not mean that a profes-sional must not charge what he feels is his proper remuneration for the time spent by him and the effort put in by him over a period of years in attaining excellence. After all, he devotes his time and there is no mechanism by which the time ordained to him in this world can be extended. At the same time if a matter deserves his attention, he should not refuse the assignment because the client is not in a position to pay his fee or that he only accepts work from corporate clients.

Most unfortunately,  it is not wholly unknown that the professional may tell a client or accept the sug-gestion of a client to raise his fees or perhaps even gross up the fees for the component thereof which is to be used to bribe on behalf of the client. The client assumes the role of an ‘innocent abroad’ as his accounts only show the payment of a profes-sional fee. I may be pardoned for saying that it is like a businessman who retains an assassin to get rid of a competitor and does not pull the trigger himself. Of course, this ‘refinement’ does not have to be practised where the client or the professional has access to the other type of money !

It is also unfortunate that sometimes in India one reads in magazines interviews with professionals where they flaunt the success achieved by them in handling certain cases, even revealing the names of the clients. Confidentiality of the client’s affairs is equally important in the 21st or even in the 25th century as in the earlier times.

Today, the aspect of a contingent fee has assumed importance. The rules governing the American Bar clearly permit the charge of a contingent fee i.e., a fee based on success. In India, this is not per-mitted both to the chartered accountant and the lawyer. One must, of course, recognise that the charge of a contingent fee does serve a purpose as it enables an indigent person to avail of professional services without himself being out of pocket. The main reason for discouraging the levy of a contingent fee is that it gives to the professional a personal interest in the litigation which may lead to his not being fair to the Court, Tribunal or Authority before whom he appears or to his adversary. This breeds the class of ambulance lawyers – who chase an ambulance to offer their services to the injured in an accident or to the heirs of the deceased! As in all things in life, one has to balance two competing viewpoints. Old-fashioned as I am, I would vote for ‘no contingent fee,’ which is also the view clearly expounded by the Supreme Court of India in AIR 1954 SC 557 referred to above.

Over the last 15 years, a sea change has taken place in the quantum of the professional fee charged. This is in line with the globalisation of the Indian economy because foreign professionals charge a fee infinitely more than do their Indian counterparts. It is not as if the calibre of the foreign professional is any superior to that of the Indian. One result of this is that the problem of ‘kick back’ has unfortunately increased. The kickback could be to the employee of a corporation or an employee in a professional firm or even to a partner in a professional firm. This is undoubtedly unethical. It is however, not just a recent development as even in the old days it was not unknown that budding I counsels shared their fee with the managing clerk in an attorney’s office, who had the disposing power over a brief. An interesting issue is posed by Clause (2) of Part I in the First Schedule to the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 which enumer-ates as a misconduct the payment directly or indirectly of any share or commission in the fees or profits of a chartered accountant to any person other than a member of the Institute. Obviously, the permissive payment is to a member of the Institute who does professional work for the chartered accountant. I do not know whether as worded it would permit payment of a simple kick-back to a member of the Institute! I am sure, it would not as it would come within the all-embracing principle of conduct not becoming a professional (Chartered Accountant). I may only add that though the fees charged have multiplied, the professional must not overlook that there are several cases where free counsel and work is necessary.

In order to fulfil his role of being a good professional, the person must maintain his total independence. If the professional is on the Board of Directors of a company, he should not perform professional services for the company as one does not know when there may be a conflict of interest in his role as a professional and his role as a director of the company who has to look after the interest of the shareholders. In the USA, strict rules of the Sarbanes Oxley Legislation are meticulously applied. Insofar as the legal profession is concerned, Rule 8 of the Code of Conduct prescribed by the Bar Council of India provides that a lawyer who is a director shall not appear for the company of which he is a director. Unfortunately, these rules are sometimes flouted even by the highest. Sometimes they are skirted by putting forward a dummy professional as being in charge!

There is a misconception in the mind of the lay public that a professional ought not to accept an assignment on behalf of a person who in public perception is perceived to be guilty of the charge levied against him. This is totally wrong. The function of a professional is to put forward without mis-representation of facts the case of his client. The professional is supposed to be better suited by training to articulate his client’s view. He should not bend to the public diktat not to appear for a particular person. The person may have a perfectly good defence though at first blush it may seem improbable. The only exception where he may decline to appear is where there is some conscientious objection to his canvassing a particular point of view and not because he feels the client is guilty of the misdemeanour he is charged with, unless, of course, the client has confessed to the profes-sional his wrongdoing. In our system it is for the judge to adjudicate.

One must also distinguish between a professional person’s argument in a matter and his opinion.
The opinion has to be what he feels is the correct position on facts and in law. His arguments  have to be what  is most  advantageous   to his client without factual misrepresentation.  He cannot be a judge and decline to urge a point which he feels may not be acceptable.  On the  other  hand,  his opinion  has to be what it is stated to be, namely, his view of the correct position in law on the given facts. The ultimate tribute is when, say, an officer says that  the  assessee  should  obtain  an opinion from XYZ as his opinion  will really be what  he believes to be true.

A very important professional development in the r 20th century insofar as India is concerned is the advent of foreign professional firms. As per present regulations, neither in the field of chartered accountancy nor of law can a foreign professional, who does not have the necessary Indian qualification or a foreign qualification recognised by the concerned apex body, practise in the field of chartered accountancy or law. The view is that to practise a profession does not merely mean ap-pearance in the Court or before an authority, but also performing any function which the said pro-fessional can perform. The writer feels that the right of a foreign professional to practise should be completely on a reciprocal basis. If the Indian professional can practise in that foreign country, then the professional of that country should be allowed to practise in India under the same terms and conditions. With the opening up of the economy, this is an issue which has assumed considerable importance. Here again one sometimes regrettably sees a surrogate practice being carried on. A fallout of increasing globalisation is that if a foreign company has an Indian associate, the audit of the associate company sooner or later gets transferred to the associate concern of the foreign company’s auditor. The homebred auditor is replaced not because he is less efficient or wanting in professional attainment, but because he does not have the necessary ‘connection.’ This is an unfortunate development per se. The defence, of course, is that this practice encourages uniformity of audit approach.

There is only one further aspect of the matter which requires to be considered. What are the special skills which the 21st century dictates for the professional? The first one which comes to mind is that one must train one’s memory to remember the relevant case law and facts. When one is arguing a matter before an authority and a question is put, it is in that split second that the professional must be able to provide the answer. This is particularly so when arguing before the Tribunal or a Court. Such response is possible if he has trained his memory to recall at pleasure the relevant case law on the subject. It is the 21st century computer mania which is a strong deterrent to the cultivation of a memory. Why should I strain myself when the information is available on the click of a button? A similar situation is reflected in the inability of the present generation to total mentally three sets of figures. The calculator is a great crutch. The other attribute which is required to be developed is the ability to put the argument in a succinct form. Gone are the days when judges had time at their disposal to hear lengthy arguments. One has to hit the target in the shortest possible time. Above all, one has to develop intuition and a sense of the moment. With the increasing workload one must know what to look for and what to ignore. As an auditor, a Chartered Accountant should learn by instinct to determine which aspects of a client’s accounts require particular scrutiny. Again a speedy reaction to a question is often called for. A client rings up with a question and expects a prompt response. One should be careful not to commit oneself if one is not sure of the position as later the response given by him may be held against the professional if it turns out to be inaccurate. Particular care has, therefore, to be taken in furnishing opinions, specially in writing, as years later what has been opined may be referred to and commented upon adversely. This is the reason why furnishing a written opinion is so much more difficult than arguing a matter. It is also more time-consuming than preparing for an appeal. Above all in the present era of tension and fast living, the professional must develop a sense of detachment and humour. He should not get carried away by ful-some praise showered on him. He must remember that it is only as long as he delivers that the client will hanker after him.

It is a wise man who said that if you want to find out how important you are, take a bucket and fill it with water, put your hand in it up to your elbow, pull it out and the ‘hole’ that remains is the measure of how you will be missed. You may splash all you please when you enter, but stop and you will find in a minute that it looks just the same as before!

I have, in this article, confined myself to the professions of accountancy and law as these are matters of prime interest to readers of this magazine. However, there is the profession of medicine which perhaps affects all of us intimately in our personal life. (Classically the three learned professions are the professions of divinity, law and medicine.) The doctor is the last resort when it is a matter of life and death. It appears to me to be unfortunate that today in the medical field there is over-specialisation. For every limb in the human body there is a specialist and sometimes he looks at the matter only from his point of view and not from a holistic point of view. Very soon we may have a specialist for the thumb or the little finger! Today pathological and mechanical tests have overtaken the innate diagnostic skill which the physician of old possessed. Of course, this is an offshoot of mal-practice litigation fears – fears to some extent fuelled by members of the legal profession. The great role of the doctor is that he administers to human beings and not to corporates as do high-flying members of the other two professions and this is also reflected in their respective professional fees !

In the ultimate analysis in determining whether a professional has fulfilled his role, one has to determine what he has contributed to the profession. His individual brilliance is undoubtedly to be complimented, but what is to be admired is how he passes on the knowledge which he acquired to another and trains him to enrich the profession. Unlike in the case of a businessman, a professional himself trains his article clerks, or juniors, as the case may be, to be independent and there is nothing so satisfying for the true professional as to see those whom he has trained shine in the profession and preferably even outshine him! The profession gives us much and the only way one can repay the debt is by putting others in the field. To be labelled a successful professional is not necessarily a compliment, but to be called a true professional is !

Smallwood v. Revenue and Customs Comrs (2010) EWCA Civ 778 (Court of Appeals)

Smallwood v. Revenue and Customs Comrs

(2010) EWCA Civ 778

(Court of Appeals)

Facts of the case:

This article is based on the judgment of the Court of Appeal of the UK. The case relates to capital gain earned by Mr. & Mrs. T. Smallwood (TS) during the tax year ended on 5th April 2001 (tax year comprised period 6th April 2000 to 5th April 2001). They were domiciled and residents of the UK.

In the year 1989, TS had made settlement for the benefit of himself and his family members (‘the Trust’). The Trust held certain assets, bulk of which comprised shares of two listed companies of the UK.

In April 2000, the trustee of the Trust was a Jersey company (L). The trustee was advised to dispose of the shares of listed UK companies which had appreciated considerably in value and to diversify the trust investment. Had the shares been sold by the Trustee directly, capital gain earned would have triggered significant taxation in the hands of the settlor (TS) in the UK. This is because the UK tax provisions permit taxation of income of a trust in the hands of the settlor if he himself happens to be a beneficiary of the trust.

As against the general provision permitting taxation of income in the hands of the settlor, the UK statute also has a provision which mandates assessment of trust income in the hands of the trustee if at any time during the tax year, the trustees are resident of the UK. As a result, the trust was advised ‘Round the World’ tax scheme by K, according to which (a) for part of the year, residence of its trustee was to be shifted to Mauritius (treaty favoured jurisdiction) by appointing a Mauritius-based corporate trustee (KM) in place of L, and (b) thereafter to be shifted to the UK before the end of the year by resignation of KM and appointment of LTS. This was to ensure that shares of UK companies were disposed of by the Trust while trustee was resident of Mauritius and therefore assessment in the name of the Trustee would permit the Trust to enjoy benefit of the UK-Mauritius treaty.

The following is the schematic description of the scheme.

In the return of income, TS claimed the capital gain on sale of shares as exempt, by claiming advantage of the DTAA between the UK and Mauritius.The claim was rejected by H.M. Revenue and Customs (HMRC), as a result of which the taxpayer appealed to the Special Commissioners.

The Special Commissioners held that residential test had to be applied for a given tax year. The Trust had dual residence and the tie-breaker test of Article 4(3) resolved in favour of the UK since Place of Effective Management (POEM) was in the UK. Factual finding and conclusion of the Special Commissioners were as follows:

    (i) POEM is not defined in the DTA; it is the place which is the centre of top-level management; that is, where the key management and commercial decisions are actually made.

    (ii) In this case the key decision was to dispose of all the shares in a tax-efficient way.

    (iii) The facts surrounding the appointment of KM leads one to the view that the real top-level management, or the realistic, positive management of the Trust, remained in the United Kingdom.

    (iv) It was a representative of K who approached KM and told them about the tax planning proposals and set out the basis of their appointment.

    (v) Although KM’s duties as trustee were laid down in legislation and in the trust deed and KM would only act within the context of what it was allowed to do, and the representative of KM stated on examination that the sale of the shares was not a condition for KM to accept the appointment as trustee and that the trustees only wished to receive appropriate advice and recommendations, nevertheless, it was also accepted by the representative that eventually as part of the tax planning exercise the shares would be sold at some time.

    (vii) All the actions of KM in Mauritius were carried out correctly and were properly documented. The appropriate meetings took place there and the necessary resolutions were passed. However, this merely meant that the administration of the Trust moved to Mauritius, but the ‘key’ decisions were made in the United Kingdom.

    (viii) The decision to sell the shares on the particular day was taken by the directors of KM at the telephone meeting; however, this only meant that if, for example, the price of the shares had fallen to a level as a result of which no gain would be realised on their disposal, the shares would not have been sold, but would have been retained and perhaps sold later. This was a lower-level management decision as there was no doubt that the shares would be sold; the real top-level management decisions, or the realistic, positive management decisions of the Trust, to dispose of all the shares in a tax efficient way, had already been, and continued to be, taken in the United Kingdom. The ‘key’ decisions were made in the United Kingdom.

    (ix) The state in which the real top-level management, or the realistic, positive management of the Trust, or the place where key management and commercial decisions that were necessary for the conduct of the Trust’s business were in substance made, and the place where the actions to be taken by the entity as a whole were, in fact, determined between 19 December 2000 and 2 March 2001, was in the UK.

On appeal by taxpayer to the High Court, the decision of Special Commissioners was reversed. The High Court adopted ‘snap-shot’ view of residential status and concluded as under at para 44:

    (i) The Commissioners erred in creating a simultaneous residence for the trustees.

    (ii) The correct analysis is that there were three periods of successive residence in the relevant UK tax year — Jersey, Mauritius and then the UK.

    (iii)    Article 13(4) gives the right to tax capital gains to the state in which there was residence at the time of the disposition.
    (iv)    That state was, at that date, Mauritius.
    (v)    Since there were no two jurisdictions vying for a claim of residence in that period, there is no tie for Article 4 to break.
    (vi)    Accordingly, Mauritius has the right to tax and the UK does not.

    The matter finally went to Court of Appeals. The Court, inter alia held (by majority) that on the primary facts which the Special Commissioners found, the POEM of the Trust was in the UK in the fiscal year in question. The scheme was devised in the UK by TS on the advice of K. The steps taken in the scheme were carefully orchestrated throughout from the UK. It was integral to the scheme that the trust should be exported to Mauritius for a brief temporary period only and then be returned, within the fiscal year, to the United Kingdom, which occurred. TS remained in the UK. There was a scheme of management of the trust which went above and beyond the day-to-day management exercised by the trustees for the time being, and the control of it was located in the UK.

    The Court of Appeal also adjudicated on a number of other issues. This Article is confined to treaty-related issue of POEM and does not deal with other issues which had an interplay of domestic law and treaty provisions.

    Inferences:

    From the judgment, the following inferences can be drawn:
 

  (i)    A formal resolution by board of directors does not establish that POEM is where the Board passes the resolution.
  
(ii)    The Board minutes are not conclusive as to where the POEM is.
 (iii)    If a scheme is devised at a particular place from where the steps in the scheme are orchestrated, it is that place where the scheme is devised/orchestrated is where the POEM is situated.
   
(iv)    Such scheme of management goes beyond the day-to-day management exercised by the Trustees for the time being and the control of it is located at a place where the scheme if devised. If a particular decision is taken in place ‘X’, then its implementation in other place ‘Y’ where the corporate trustee is situated does not make the other place the POEM. The POEM is situated where the key decisions are made.

    OECD/UN Commentaries:

    The OECD Commentary on Article 4(3), India’s observation to the OECD Commentary and the UN Commentary on A. 4(3) are reproduced below:

    OECD Commentary (2005) on Article 4(2):

    The place of effective management is the place where key management and commercial decisions that are necessary for the conduct of the entity’s business are in substance made. The place of effective management will ordinarily be the place where the most senior person or group of persons (for example a board of directors) makes its decisions, the place where the actions to be taken by the entity as a whole are determined; however, no definitive rule can be given and all relevant facts in these circumstances must be examined to determine the place of effective management.

    OECD Commentary (2008) on Article 4(3):

    “24. As a result of these considerations, the ‘place of effective management’ has been adopted as the preference criterion for persons other than individuals. The place of effective management is the place where key management and commercial decisions that are necessary for the conduct of the entity’s business as a whole are in substance made. All relevant facts and circumstances must be examined to determine the place of effective management. An entity may have more than one place of management, but it can have only one place of effective management at any one time.”

    India’s Observation to OECD Commentary on Article 4(3):
    “11. India does not adhere to the interpretation given in paragraph 24 that the place of effective management is the place where key management and commercial decisions that are necessary for the conduct of the entity’s business as a whole are in substance made. It is of the view that the place where the main and substantial activity of the entity is carried on is also to be taken into account when determining the place of effective management.”

    UN Commentary on Article 4(3):

    “10. It is understood that when establishing the “place of effective management”, circumstances which may, inter alia, be taken into account are the place where a company is actually managed and controlled, the place where the decision-making at the highest level on the important policies essential for the management of the company takes place, the place that plays a leading part in the management of a company from an economic and functional point of view and the place where the most important accounting books are kept.”

    Indian Perspective:

    The Indian perspective is explained separately for:
    (a)    the period up to 31st March 2012 (the last date up to which the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’) will remain in force), and
    (b)    the period from 1st April 2012 (when the Direct Tax Code (DTC), assuming it will be enacted in the form in which the Bill is presented, will come into force).

    Income-tax Act, 1961:
    There is no definition of POEM in the Act. For the purposes of DTAAs, it has been held as follows by Tribunal/Authority for Advance Rulings (AAR):
    (i)    P. No. 10 of 1996, In re (1996) 224 ITR 473(AAR):
    In this case the Authority dealt with the issue of determining POEM for two companies. In the case of the first company, it was contended that the POEM is in Mauritius on account of the following facts:

            The company has two resident directors of appropriate calibre to exercise independence of mind and judgment.

  •             The company’s secretary is a resident in Mauritius;

  •             The registered office is in Mauritius;

  •             Banking transactions will be channelled through the Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporations;

  •             Accounting records will be maintained in Mauritius in accordance with the Companies Act, 1984;

  •             Board meetings will be held in or chaired from Mauritius;

  •             All statutory records, such as minutes and members’ register, will be kept at the registered office;

  •             The company has an ordinary status.

    The Authority observed that it is difficult to say that the effective management of the affairs of the company is not in Mauritius in the above situation unless there are facts to at least prima facie indicate that such control emanates elsewhere than from Mauritius.

    In case of the second company, the Authority observed that the POEM of a company is the place where its board of directors takes the decisions; the position would remain the same even if the board would rely, to a considerable extent, on advisors if these advisors are not decision-taking bodies and regardless of the delegation, the company remains responsible for all decisions and acts of any delegate as if it has been done by itself.

    (ii) P. No. 9 of 1995, In re. (1996) 220 ITR 377(AAR)

    The Authority held that the word ‘Place of ef-fective management’ refers to place from where factually and effectively, the day-to-day affairs of the company are carried on and not to the place in which may reside the ultimate control of the company (shareholder).

    (iii)    DLJMB Mauritius Investment Co., In re (1997) 228 ITR 268 (AAR):

    The applicant contended that its place of effective management was situated in Mauritius under Article 4(3) of India-Mauritius Tax Treaty on account of the following facts:

  •             At least two directors of the company were resident in Mauritius and such directors had appropriate caliber to exercise independence of mind and judgment.

  •             The company secretary of the company was resident in Mauritius.

  •             The registered office of the company was in Mauritius.

  •             Banking transactions were channeled through an offshore bank account in Mauritius.

  •             Accounting records were maintained in Mauritius in accordance with the Mauritian Companies Act.

  •             Director’s meetings were held in Mauritius.

  •             All statutory records, such as minutes and members’ register were kept at registered office.

  •             The auditors were Mauritian residents.

  •             The company had a Mauritian custodian for its assets.

  •            The company was regulated by the Mauritius

    Offshore Business Activities Authority of Mauritius (MOBAA).

  •             The company was required to report on a quarterly basis its investments operations to MOBAA.
  •             The company was subject to such enactments and conditions as may from time-to-time be adopted Mauritian authorities in relation to investment funds, collective investment schemes and conduct of investment business.

  •             The company was incorporated for investment in Indian companies and investors from different jurisdictions were investing in the Mauritian company and directors in the company were appointed from different jurisdictions.
  •             Dividends were remitted from India to the Mauritian company.

    The Authority quoted the observations in P. No. 9 of 1995, In re (1996) 220 ITR 377 (AAR) [see(ii) above] and held that the said reasons were equally applicable. Accordingly, it held that the POEM of the applicant was in Mauritius. It did not comment on the aforesaid factors pointed out by the applicant.

    (iv)    Integrated Container Feeder Service v. JCIT, (96 ITD 371) (Mum.):

    The appellant, a shipping company incorporated in Mauritius and carrying on activity of operating ships in international traffic from India contended that its POEM was in Mauritius. The Tribunal observed that:

    The term ‘place of effective management’ has neither been defined in DTAA, nor defined in Income Tax Act, 1961. Therefore, the said term should be understood in its natural meaning. It is plausible to say that the words ‘place of effective management’ refer to a place from where factually and effectively the day- to-day affairs of the company are managed and controlled and not to the place in which may reside the ultimate control of the company. In the context of the Company, it observed that it refers to a place where ships are put into service.

    It held that the company’s POEM was not in Mauritius on the following grounds:

  • No business activity was carried out in Mauritius.

  • The directors’ meetings were held in Mauritius only as a necessary formality to maintain its corporate status and to obtain tax residency certificate.
  •  The owners were from Dubai and entire business correspondence was made from Dubai.
  • Operating instructions were received only from Dubai.

  • The place of management was in UAE since all the staff, officers and captains were sitting in Dubai.

    The Tribunal observed that determination of the existence of effective management at a particular place is a question of fact which has to be determined according to facts of a particular case and that the certificate from Mauritian Authorities that the company’s POEM is in Mauritius is not sufficient.

    (v)    Saraswati Holding Corporation Ltd. v. DDIT, 16 SOT 535 (Del.):

    The appellant executed power of attorney in favour of Indian residents who conducted transactions through stock-brokers in India. The Assessing Officer held that the appellant had its POEM in India on the following grounds:

  •             The POA holders were in India; they were entitled to carry on activities on behalf of the appellant and that decisions regarding investments were taken by them.

  •             The share transactions were either concluded through one share-broker in India (V) who was managing investments of the appellant or through other brokers, in which case V was kept updated.

  •            The shares were being purchased and sold within a short span of three to four days and such decisions required close monitoring of the mood of the market.

    The Tribunal held that the reasons assigned by the Assessing Officer were insufficient to come to a conclusion that POEM of the appellant was in India. It observed that:

    The law is well settled that control and management of affairs does not mean the control and management of the day-to-day affairs of the business. The fact that discretion to conduct operations of business is given to some person in India would not be sufficient. The word ‘control and management of affairs’ refers to head and brain, which directs the affairs of policy, finance, disposal of profits and such other vital things consisting the general and corporate affairs of the company.

    It held that the place of effective management was not in India on account of the following reasons:

  •             The POA merely empowered the persons in India to conduct the day-to-day affairs of the company.

  •             Directions were issued by the two non-resident shareholders as evidenced by the telephone bills recording the calls made to India from time to time.

  •             The board of directors of the appellant had passed a resolution whereby the authority to take decisions was only with one of the two non-resident shareholders.

    (vi)    SMR Investments Ltd. v. DDIT, 2010 TII 66 ITAT Del-Intl:
    In this case, the orders for sale of shares held by the appellant were placed by a shareholder holding 99% of the shares in the appellant and who was a resident of India. The telephone calls were made from India. The appellant was asked to furnish the passport of the shareholder to verify whether the telephone calls were made from India or not. The passport was not furnished in spite of various opportunities. The AO held that it is the actual place of management of a company and not the place where it ought to manage and control the company that determines the POEM and accordingly he held that the appellant was resident of India. The appellant filed passport copies of a former director of the company and contended that from the passport it was clear that the director was in Mauritius on the dates on which the Board meetings of the Appellant were held. An affidavit of the director was also placed on record. Accordingly, the appellant indicated that the effective control was in Mauritius. The Revenue doubted the authenticity of the signatures. In view of this, the Tribunal restored the matter to the AO for examining the authenticity of the documents and deciding the issue afresh/ de novo. The facts and the Tribunal’s decision suggest that the Tribunal accepted that it was not the place where the orders were placed but the place where the board meetings were held that decided the POEM.

    DTC:

    The DTC Bill proposes to introduce a definition of POEM as follows:

    “(192) ‘place of effective management’ means —

    (i)    the place where the board of directors of the company or its executive directors, as the case may be, make their decisions; or
    (ii)    in a case where the board of directors routinely approve the commercial and strategic decisions made by the executive directors or officers of the company, the place where such executive directors or officers of the company perform their functions.”

    Summary:

    The OECD Commentary of 2008, specifically re-moves the reference to the board of directors. It reiterates the emphasis on the place where the decisions are made in substance. The UN Commentary provides for a number of circumstances to be taken into account for determining the POEM. It also uses the word ‘actually manage and control’ suggesting that it is the place of actual management which is relevant. The Commentary also states that the place that plays a leading part in the management of the company from economic and functional point of view is also a circumstance to be considered. It is not clear from this, whether the Commentary alludes to top management or the day-to-day management. It is also not clear as to how the place where the accounting books are kept could constitute a circumstance in deciding the POEM.

    5.2 So far as the judgment in Smallwood is concerned, it provides a useful guidance in inter-pretation of POEM, a concept which will acquire paramount significance in the DTC regime. A finer reading of the judgment reveals that the Court has accepted both OECD and UN Commentary’s (partly) understanding of concept of POEM. It has given weightage to the place where key and real topmost-level decisions were made in substance and held that place to be POEM. This place need not necessarily be the same place where Board meetings are conducted. In the Court’s view, the place where the whole tax planning scheme was orchestrated constituted the POEM.

    In the Indian context, the AAR/Tribunals have taken diverse views on the matter?: On the one hand it has been held that the place where the board of directors takes the decision is the POEM. On the other hand it is also been held that POEM refers to a place from where the day-to-day affairs of the company are managed and controlled. Again, factors other than the directors e.g., Company Secretary, Registered Office, etc. have also been considered to hold that the POEM was in Mauritius. Further, the Tribunal has held that the POEM refers to the place where all the employees were based and from where the revenue generating assets (ships) are put in service. In that case, the Tribunal went behind the Board meetings.

    It appears that:

    (a)    the POEM is at the place where the key man-agement decisions are actually taken. This is also supported by the dictionary meaning of the word ‘effective’ as ‘existing in fact, actual’ (www.thefreedictionary.com) and ‘real’ [see Worley Persons Services Pty. Ltd., In re (2009) 312 ITR 273 (AAR) interpreting ‘effectively connected’].

  

(b)    the place where the day-to-day affairs of the company are carried on does not constitute its POEM;
   
(c)    the factors such as company secretary, regis-tered office may not be relevant in the overall scheme of determination of POEM;
 
  (d)    the POEM is not necessarily at a place where the employees are based;
   
(e)    ordinarily it is the place where the board meet-ings are held is the POEM. However, this is a rebuttable presumption. If facts reveal that key management decisions are really or are actually taken at a place other than the place where board meetings are held and the board merely follows instruction or works within the framework provided by other person, then the POEM will lie at a place from where such other person instructs;
  
(f)    for the above, the onus would be on the Tax Department to prove that POEM lies at a place other than the place where board meetings are held. Some facts which may be relevant in deciding whether POEM lies at the place where the Board meetings are held or at some other place are:
   
(i)    Minutes of board meeting: Whether minutes provide evidence of elaborate discussion at the time of passing a particular resolution;
 
  (ii)    Composite of directors on the board:
    Their reputation, qualification, experience, attendance in board meetings, etc.
   
(iii)    Documentation of commercial rationale behind taking a particular decision.
   
(iv)    Residency of directors. If meeting are held through audio/video conferencing reason for their physical absence.
    (v)    Power of Attorney (POA) under which some functions of Board are delegated: Whether such POA is under the authority of the board and there are sufficient checks and control whereby actions taken by the attorney holder are monitored and controlled.

Mentoring of Articled Students – the Need of the Hour

Mentoring

What is meant by Mentoring?


Mentoring, as defined by the Encarta Encyclopedia, means
“serving as a guide, counselor and teacher for another person, usually in an
academic or occupational capacity”. Some professions have “mentoring programs”
in which newcomers are paired with more experienced persons who advise them and
serve as examples as they advance. Schools sometimes offer mentoring programs to
new students or students having difficulties. Mentorship refers to a
developmental relationship in which a more experienced or more knowledgeable
person helps a less experienced or less knowledgeable person — someone who can
be referred to as a protégé, or a mentee — to develop in a specified capacity.

The term ‘mentoring’ is, therefore, wider than training or
teaching; it entails providing guidance and direction at a personal level that
is often missed out in the Indian scheme of education, but is so critical for
higher levels of education and development! “Mentoring is a process for the
informal transmission of knowledge, social capital and the psychosocial support
perceived by the recipient as relevant to work, career or professional
development; mentoring entails informal communication, usually face-to-face and
during a sustained period of time, between a person who is perceived to have
greater relevant knowledge, wisdom or experience (the mentor) and a person who
is perceived to have less (the protégé).” (Bozeman, Feeney, 2007).

How is mentoring relevant to the CA profession?



The CA
profession provides a unique opportunity to its members to nurture budding
professionals, usually referred to as ‘articled students’. Articled students
generally venture into the world of Chartered Accountancy at a tender,
impressionable age, generally between 18 to 21 years. For most, this is their
first introduction to work and to some extent, ‘real life’. The experiences and
values that they imbibe during these years of articleship stay with them for the
rest of their lives. It is also their first exposure to the real world, where
they apply their knowledge to real life situations in a significant manner.


In recent years, the lives of articled students in Mumbai
have become stressful because of a variety of reasons ranging from long
commutes, long hours of work, balancing between the regime of coaching classes
and the demands of work, college attendance and examinations and an all-round
pressure to perform in exams and at work. The relationship between the student
and the principal has also changed from the ‘guru-shishya’ relationship to the
‘employer-employee’ relationship, with the principals using the articled
students as cheap resource. The principals, at times, forget their role of
grooming the students who work under them for three years to become
professionals. The ‘me first’ attitude of the current world, manifested in both
the principal and the student is also not conducive to a healthy
principal-student relationship.

It is in this context that mentoring gains relevance for the
CA profession; effective mentoring would lead to well rounded professionals,
greater respect for the principals and also enhancement to the image of the
profession by ensuring that the new entrants are professionally nurtured.


Where does BCAS come into the picture?


BCAS as an Enabler for Effective Mentoring

BCAS has always been an incubator of new ideas and an
initiator of novel initiatives. In the context of mentoring, BCAS has decided to
launch a unique initiative: Mentoring Articled Students. The objective of this
initiative is to build bridges where there are walls — to help members to start
thinking of articled students not as their workers but as a responsibility and a
privilege. This initiative entails creating a framework for mentoring articled
students that will lead to grooming and nurturing young minds beyond the
technical skills required for the profession — in the areas of communication,
self management, purposeful living and constant learning. It also entails
providing support to members who wish to ‘mentor’ their articled students by
providing a ready-to-use framework by organizing mentoring sessions in areas
where specialized guidance is required, and compiling a ‘mentoring guide’ for
use by the members.

The objective of this initiative may be summarized as:




§
Creating awareness amongst the members for the need to ‘mentor’ articled
students.



§
Preparing a ‘Framework for
Mentoring’ that can be implemented by an interested principal.



§
Creating awareness among
articled students to focus on holistic development during articleship that
stretches beyond technical training, such as developing inter-personal
communication and presentation skills, inculcating habits of reading, engaging
in purposeful activities and becoming a life-long learner.


This initiative envisages that while mentoring will be an
internal process between the principal and the student, BCAS will complement
individual efforts by providing a framework for mentoring and periodic updates
to the principals, and also by arranging group sessions for the students where
leading professionals from different fields will be invited to share their
experiences and knowledge with the students.

An Invitation to Participate
in this Unique Initiative


Recognizing that mentoring of articled students is the need
of the hour, BCAS commits itself to be a catalyst in this area and becomes an
enabler in promoting this noble cause — for the students of today are the
Chartered Accountants of tomorrow, and the Chartered Accountants of tomorrow are
the future of our profession.

So, come join us, to pioneer a mentoring movement for the students of our
profession.

Interview – Justice Ajit P. Shah

InterviewJustice Ajit P. Shah recently
retired as Chief Justice of the Delhi High Court after a term of 2 years. Prior
to that, he was Chief Justice of the Madras High Court for over 2 years and a
judge of the Bombay High Court for almost 13 years. He is regarded as one of the
finest judges. During his long tenure as a judge, he passed various landmark
judgments pertaining to right to information, rights of disabled, environment
and homosexuals. Hailing from a family of lawyers and judges, he is known for
his forthright and progressive views. In interaction with the BCA Journal, he
dwelt upon a variety of issues pertaining to law and the legal system.

Challenges before Judiciary :


BCAJ
What are the major problems and challenges faced by the judiciary (and judges
in particular) today
?



APS Our legal system and judicial apparatus suffer from a
number of ailments. Our courts at all levels are burdened with dockets that are
bursting at seams. Around three crore cases are pending in the lower courts and
the High Courts. Our procedures tend to convert every litigation into a process
which puts more stress on the form rather than on the content. Our tools and
techniques of court management, docket management and case management continue
to be archaic and still depend on the advice of ‘generalists’ rather than
managerial expertise. Alternative Dispute Resolution system we all love to talk
about also seems to be reducing into more tokenism rather than becoming a potent
tool to make a real impact. Criminal justice administration perhaps remains the
most neglected area where the truth is (more often than not) the casualty and
where reform or rehabilitation seems to be the last priority. The courts are
able to dispose of on an average only 19% of the pending criminal cases. Around
two lacs undertrials are actually in prisons. The state of the prisons and
lock-ups is a cause of grave concern. Overcrowding in prisons is a rule rather
than an exception. These are some ground realities that cannot be brushed under
the carpet. They individually and collectively point to our failure at some
levels in discharging our obligation to provide good governance through an
effective legal system.


BCAJ The Government as well as the judiciary has been
talking about backlog of cases. What are the causes of delay ? Is the main cause
inadequate number of judges ? How far are the advocates and lawyers responsible
for delaying the proceedings ?



APS Yes, we have been talking about backlog of cases for
a long time but unable to find a solution to this gigantic problem. There are
many causes for delay and one of the main causes is certainly the lack of
adequate number of judges. The Law Commission in its 120th Report recommended
that the strength of judges per million population may be increased from 10.5 to
50 judges. The present judge strength in India is 14 per million population
(approx.). The Vision Paper published by the Law Ministry talks of appointment
of 15000 ad hoc judges in the subordinate courts and running courts in three
shifts. More than eight months have passed but no progress has been made. The
idea of appointment of 15000 ad hoc judges at one go and running the courts in
shift system is basically flawed and is impracticable and unworkable. The
establishment of Gram Nyayalayas has not made much progress due to lack of
support from the State Governments. The need of the hour is to plan gradual
increase in the strength of judges. The infrastructure provided to the judges in
most of the States is inadequate and in some places it is virtually
non-existent. There is a need for firm commitment of the Central and the State
Governments for making available the necessary infrastructure and financial
resources to the judiciary.

No amount of reforms would be meaningful unless the Bar joins
as partners in the stakes involved. Unfortunately, willingness of the lawyers to
embrace reforms seems to be amiss. Kathryn Hender from the Law School University
of Wisconsin posed a very serious question in an article begging for an answer
in the title itself as to whether the legal community represents ‘gentlemen of
change or unchanging gentlemen’. Professor Madhava Menon writes about the fear
psychosis in the judiciary or political class when it comes to confronting the
Bar which is vastly responsible for the major ill of the system, namely, delay,
cost and corruption. Adjournment culture, strikes and boycotts by the lawyers
have virtually paralysed the judicial system. There should be a concerted effort
from the Bench and the Bar to eliminate this menace. Administration of justice
is a joint venture in which lawyers and judges are equal participants. This is
all the more reason why both must take the stick for the ills that plagued the
judicial system and why they must share the responsibility for reforms.


BCAJ In your opinion, what steps need to be taken to
address the delay in disposal of matters ?



APS The first and foremost priority is to increase the
number of courts. This could be achieved in a phased manner in the next four or
five years. Secondly, as suggested by the Jagannadha Rao Committee it would be
necessary to assess the impact of every new legislation in terms of the burden
it would put on the judicial system. The burgeoning load of cheque bouncing
cases is a glaring example of lack of planning. In Delhi out of the pendency of
9 lac criminal cases, more than 6 lac cases are u/s.138 of Negotiable
Instruments Act. In 2009, Delhi Courts disposed of around 1.6 lac such cases, of
which only 400 were disposed of through a trial and the rest were disposed of
either by settlement or withdrawal. Perhaps these cases can be tried in shift
system even by appointing ad hoc judges. The Government should also consider
taking out petty criminal cases from the regular judicial system, so that judges
can concentrate on more serious cases pertaining to the law and order.

Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) has been the buzzword for the past two decades. Mediation is now increasingly used as an adjunct to the litigation system in the US and in several other western countries. This is not a marginalised phenomenon, but has been introduced as a case management imperative. Unfortunately, after the build-up of a positive public opinion and securing general cooperation of the Bar (which was originally very resistant) for the past few years, there is a downslide trend which is very disturbing. Mediation centres were set up through missionary zeal of judges who also developed a cadre of trained mediators to run them. Latest statistics signal waning enthusiasm on the part of the judges reflected in steadily declining references and the rate of settlements (For example, the Bombay High Court and the Madras High Court). The Delhi High Court is one of the few courts where mediation policies are being successfully implemented. Especially District Court Mediation Centres are doing extremely well with reported success rate of 15 to 20% of the total filing.

One of the important tools of ADR in use for many years now is the forum of ‘Lok Adalat’. The problem with this forum is that the proceedings are dominated by judges both as organisers and presiders. Correspondingly, the role of lawyers is notably diminished, compared to regular courts. There is a need to revamp the Lok Adalat organisation making it more participative including the robust support from the Bar.

Reforms in many fields remain incomplete unless they also utilise modern technology. It is not right to run the court system in the 21st century using a system which is developed in the 19th century. The courts must take advantage of the new technologies and adapt new ways of working. However, full potential of computers has not been fully and optimally tapped. There is no thought about reaping the real benefits of computerisation by redefining our needs and re-engineering our processes. The entire case information system ought to aim for providing a comprehensive management to exploit the available human resources fully.

The Delhi High Court has achieved significant success in full utilisation of information technology and at least two e-courts (paperless courts) are functioning in the Delhi High Court and one e-trial court has become functional for the first time in India. The Delhi Government fully backed the High Court in computerisation process. The technology involved, if put to optimum use, will virtually revolutionise the case management. It all boils down to change of the mindset and adaption to rapidly advancing technology.

The Delhi High Court, in one of its initiatives undertook the task of examining the issue of arrears. The Committee of Hon’ble Judges analysing the data scientifically, came out with certain concrete suggestions with regard to the distribution of business amongst various benches, suggested clear targets and change in the rule of procedure. The changes introduced in wake of the report have given encouraging results within a year.

Judicial appointments :

BCAJ Do you feel that the system and procedures for appointments of higher judiciary is sound ?

APS India is perhaps the only country in the world where the judiciary makes the appointments to itself. In the Second Judges’ case, a larger Bench of the Supreme Court reversed the view in SP Gupta’s case and declared that the word ‘consultation’ appearing in Article 142 of the Constitution should be read to mean ‘concurrence’, thereby vesting the CJI with the final say in the mater of appointments. The power so vested in the judiciary would be exercised through the collegiums consisting of the CJI and two most senior colleagues. In the Third Judges’ case, the Court slightly altered the process by directing that the CJI shall make a recommendation to appoint a Judge of the Supreme Court in consultation with four senior-most puisne judges of the Supreme Court and insofar as the appointments to the High Courts are concerned, recommendation must be in consultation with the two senior-most judges of the Supreme Court.

There is a considerable controversy about whether the Court has not amended the language of the Article by purporting to interpret it. This new dispensation of appointment and transfer of judges laid down by the Supreme Court has not been well received in India. The Bar and other sections of the society have been critical of this. For example, Mr. T. R. Andhyarujina has said : “A collegium which decides the matter in secrecy lacks transparency and is likely to be considered a cabal. Prejudice and favour of one or other member of the collegium for an incumbent cannot be ruled out.” Justice Krishna Iyer has described the pro-tem collegiums — “an egregious fabrication, a functioning anarchy”.

Vesting the power of appointment only in the executive or the self-selection by the judges are both fraught with difficulties. Hence, the trend now in modern constitutions, is to entrust the power of recommendation for judicial appointments to an independent council or commission. Such a council or commission is composed of representatives of institutions closely connected with administration of justice. The civic society also gets adequate representation. Such councils are now functioning in England, Wales and South Africa. The 1998 European Charter on the Statute of Judges also recommends selection by independent commission where at least 50% of the members should be sitting judges. In the USA, a candidate nominated by the President for appointment to the Supreme Court has to face public hearings conducted by the Senate.

BCAJ Unfortunately, of late, corruption seems to have crept into the judicial process as well. What are the probable causes of this ? Are the judges underpaid so that they are lured ? What needs to be done to arrest this trend ?

APS There is no point in saying that there is no corruption in the judiciary. Corruption has definitely crept in the lower judiciary and in some States it has reached disturbing levels. The higher judiciary also cannot be said to be completely free from corruption, though, in my opinion, it is marginal. Former CJI S. P. Bharucha has publicly stated that nearly 10% of the judges of the superior judiciary are corrupt. At present, two High Court judges are facing impeachment proceedings. I may also refer to the infamous incident of ‘cash at door’ in another High Court. Surprisingly, no further action was taken in spite of the report of an in-house committee indicting a sitting judge. I am not prepared to accept that this phenomenon has anything to do with the salary structure of the judges. Salaries of the judges have vastly improved after the VI Central Pay Commission. The problem, according to me, lies with the flawed selection process. Further, the process of impeachment is extremely tedious and has not proved to be effective against erring judges. Perhaps, time has come to devise a new procedure for disciplining judges without in any manner compromising the judicial independence.

Tribunalisation :

BCAJ Do you think that the creation of various tribunals being resorted to by the Government will undermine the quality of the judicial process ? Have the tribunals generally done good work ? Have they reduced the burden on the courts or have they, in fact, become one additional forum for litigation ?

APS In a recent judgment of the Supreme Court in Union of India v. R. Gandhi, the validity of the constitution of National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) and National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) has been upheld. One of the questions before the Supreme Court was whether the ‘wholesale’ transfer of powers as contemplated by the Companies (Second Amendment) Act, 2002 would have offended the Constitutional scheme of separation of powers and independence of judiciary and to what extent the powers of judiciary and High Court (excepting judicial review under Articles 226-227) can be transferred to tribunals. Though the Apex Court upheld the constitution of the NCLT and NCLAT, further directions were given to the effect that only judges and advocates can be considered for appointment as judicial members. Certain other directions were given protecting the tenure, salaries and perks of the members of the tribunal. As per the direction of the Apex Court, the selection of the members has to be made by a committee presided over by the CJI or his nominee.

The argument generally advanced to support the tribunalisation is that the court functions under archaic and elaborate procedural laws and highly technical evidence law and all litigation in courts can get inevitably delayed which leads to frustration and dissatisfaction amongst litigants. On the other hand, tribunals are free from shackles of the procedural laws and evidence law. They can provide easy access to speedy justice in a ‘cost-affordable and user-friendly’ manner. But, in India unfortunately tribunals have not achieved full independence. The secretary of the concerned sponsoring department sits in the selection committee for appointment. When the tribunals are formed they are mostly dependent on their sponsoring department for funding, infrastructure and even place for functioning. In L. Chandra Kumar, the Supreme Court observed that the tribunals have been functioning unsatisfactorily because there is no authority charged with supervising and fulfilling their administrative requirements. The tribunals constituted under different enactments are administered by different administrative departments of the Central and State Governments.

In R. Gandhi’s case, the Supreme Court has extensively referred to the Leggett Committee Report, which was submitted to the Lord Chancellor of Great Britain in March, 2001. Some of the important recommendations in the report are that the members of the tribunal would be independent persons, not civil servants. They should resemble courts and not bureaucratic boards. There is a need to rationalise and modernise the tribunals by creating more coherent framework for their functioning. All tribunals should be supported by a tribunal service i.e., a common administrative service which would raise their status, while preserving their distinctiveness from the courts. The Supreme Court has urged the Central Government to consider and implement the key recommendations of the Leggett Committee. In the absence of these reforms, the objective of forming these tribunals would not be achieved and, as stated by you, they would be merely one additional forum for litigation.

Arbitration and mediation :

BCAJ In our practice, we see that when a matter is referred to arbitration panel comprising of retired judges, it gets prolonged like a trial in the court itself. Will arbitration in commercial matters by panel comprising of persons who have expertise in the commercial matters be more effective and speedy than the panel of retired judges ?

APS The use of arbitration has taken on staggering proportions in international arena. The full potential of arbitration has not been realised in India. The basic problem lies in the system of ad hoc arbitration. According to critics, many arbitrators are not familiar with the practice of arbitration or how to effectively conduct arbitration process. Lawyers are often not trained in the law and practice of arbitration. There is a tendency among them to prolong arbitrations, seek unnecessary adjournments. One of the critics commented that often retired judges are appointed as arbitrators who, by virtue of long tenure on the Bench, have got accustomed to tedious rules pertaining to procedure and evidence. As a result, arbitrations become battle of pleadings and procedure, with each party trying to stall, if it works to their favour. The Parliamentary Standing Committee’s Report of 2003 highlights that there is absence of accountability of arbitrators, huge pendency of cases, no rules as to who can be appointed as arbitrators or regarding their views, time limit for making an award or consequences of not making an award within the time limit.

The need of the hour is institutionalisation of arbitration in India, along the lines suggested by the Parliamentary Standing Committee Report. The Ministry of Law and Justice has published a consultation paper suggesting extensive amendments to the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. One of the proposed amendments is to S. 11 whereby the Chief Justice, instead of choosing an arbitrator may choose an institution and such institution shall refer the matter to one or more arbitrators from their panel. As a result of the decision of 7-Judges Bench judgment in SBP Company v. Patel Engineering Limited, the provisions contained in Ss.(4), Ss.(5), Ss.(7), Ss.(8) and Ss.(9) of S. 11 with regard to appointment of arbitrators by any person or institution designated by the Chief Justice rendered totally ineffective. I hope that with the amendment institutionalised arbitration will develop in India.

The Delhi High Court has started an arbitration centre in its own precincts. The endeavour is to create a system that would ensure expeditious disposal of the matters referred to arbitration. The Centre has state-of-the-art infrastructure and elaborate rules have been laid down to govern the mattes referred to it. The panel of arbitrators of the Centre includes not only retired judges but also eminent chartered accountants, engineers, architects, etc. Incidentally, I may also mention that some of the other amendments proposed by the Law Ministry would be able to clear the confusion created by the recent Supreme Court judgments and make the implementation of the Act smooth and effective. Lok Sabha has passed the Commercial Division of High Court Bill, 2005 which provides for constitution of arbitration division in the High Courts to deal exclusively with arbitration cases.

BCAJ Courts,  tribunals  (e.g.,  CLB)  often  informally ask parties to settle the matter by negotiations. Will statutory recognition to this help in reducing the backlog? What can be done to promote and make effective the alternate dispute resolution mechanism ?

APS I fully agree that there is an urgent need to introduce provisions on the lines of S. 89 of the CPC for tribunals like CLB, DRT, etc. S. 89 itself requires an amendment to bring clarity in the process of mediation and conciliation. Mediation and court-supervised mediation in particular, has become more common place in the US and in many countries. The procedure has become increasingly a standard practice. Court-ordered mediation has proved to be a very good way to involve and commit lawyers and participants to the mediation process, because in essence they have no other choice. In the UK penalties in terms of cost can be imposed on parties that refuse to mediate on unreasonable and unsatisfactory grounds. With the active support of the Bench and the assistance of trained mediators, many of the matters can be resolved in CLB or even in DRT.

Right to Information :

BCAJ The RTI Act has been servicing the citizens fairly well. No doubt it has some deficiencies. Huge controversy is on between the Government (DoPT, Ministry of Personnel, Public Grievances and Pensions) and citizens, between Sonia Gandhi and PM and so on. What are your views on this issue ?

APS The right to access the information has been described as a right to citizenship or a right to humanity. All major human right conventions such as UDHR, ICCPR, incorporate specific provisions on the right to information. By a series of decisions of the Supreme Court, (State of UP v. Raj Narain and S. P. Gupta v. Union of India), the right to information is held to be implicit in the guarantee of free speech and expression under Article 19(1)(a) of the Indian Constitution. In a recent decision in Secretary General Supreme Court of India v. Subhash Chandra Aggarwal, the Delhi High Court has held that the right to information is embedded in Article 14 (equality), Article 19(1)(a) (free speech and expression) and Article 21 (life and liberty). The right to know and freedom of information are inalienable components of freedom of expression and participation in public affairs.

Corruption is now recognised as violation of human rights and one of the objectives of right to information is eradication of ineffective and corrupt governance. UNDP has reported decline in ‘Human Development Index’ (HDI) in more than thirty countries, which affects ordinary man. Therefore, it is really necessary that the ordinary man is enabled to participate in the process that affects his daily life and is empowered with the information to play an effective role in policy making and legislative decision making. With access to information, poor people can begin to organise themselves to form groups to be able to influence the decisions that affect them.

Some of the most serious violations of human rights and fundamental freedoms are justified by governments as necessary to protect the national security. It is therefore imperative to enable people to monitor the conduct of the Government to participate fully in democratic society by giving them access to Government-held information and to limit the scope of restrictions of freedom of expression that may be imposed in the interest of national security. Without free access, the common man is likely to feel ‘powerless’, ‘alienated’ and ‘left out’.

Any attempt to dilute the RTI Act must be discouraged. The Government machinery must now learn to live with the information regime.

BCAJ The CJI has been advocating for exemption of judiciary from the application of RTI Act. As per the press reports the CJI has pointed out that the ‘independence of the higher judiciary needs to be safeguarded in the implementation of the RTI Act’. What are your views on this ?

APS Independence of judiciary cannot be separated from judicial accountability. The guarantee of judicial independence is for the benefit of the people and not the judges. It is neither a right, nor a privilege of the judges. An accountable judiciary without any independence is weak and feeble and independent judiciary without any accountability is dangerous. The usual recommendations for increasing accountability in general are not very different for the judiciary than they are for any other public institution. The total transparency in the judicial system can be achieved

    (a) by a transparent system of selection of judges, publicised criteria and discussion on their applications, and (b) transparency of internal operations and their subjugation to pre-established rules, use of resources, salaries, judicial standards of behavior and evolution etc. and (c) functional system for registering complaints for institutional operations or behavior of individual trust. As observed by the Delhi High Court, well defined and publicly known standards and procedures complement, rather than diminish, the notion of judicial independence. The former CJI in subsequent interviews clarified that he is not in particular against the application of the RTI Act to the judiciary, but his reservation is only to the disclosure of information relating to the appointments. As stated earlier, the present system of appointments is opaque and shrouded in secrecy, there is need to bring total transparency even in the procedure for appointments to the superior courts.

BCAJ Under the RTI Act, ‘Information’ includes information relating to any private body which can be accessed by a public authority under any other law for the time being in force.

Considering this, can one access documents of public companies, especially public utility companies as ‘information’ ?

APS The term ‘information’ is widely worded and includes information relating to any private body which can be accessed by a public authority under any law for the time being in force. Right to information is defined to mean information accessible under the Act, which is held by or under the control of any public authority. In Secretary General, Supreme Court of India v. Subhash Chandra Aggarwal, the Delhi High Court gave a broad meaning to the word ‘held’ to mean the information which has been created, sought, used or consciously retained by a public authority. Both the provisions will have to be read together and the applicant will not have any right to access the information of any corporations or public utility companies unless it is held by the public authority within the meaning of S. 2(j) of the RTI Act.

BCAJ What changes could be made in RTI Act for furthering its objectives?

APS From the screened system of governance protected by the Official Secrets Act, we have taken more than 70 years to enact the Right to Information Act. We cannot really say it is a voluntary movement towards openness, this is more a reaction to the unstoppable global trend towards the recognition of the right to information. Ideally the Act should also apply to the corporations and MNCs which are engaged in public utility services. NGOs, educational institutions, charitable trusts, and trade unions should be just as accountable and as transparent as the Government in a developing democracy. The involvement of MNCs in human rights violations and generating hazards is well documented. The Bhopal gas tragedy is a glaring example of violation of human rights at the hands of MNCs. Corporations produce wealth; they also produce risk, both to humans and to the eco system. Further the Act provides for sweeping exemptions, there is no mechanism to deter the delay or refusal in granting information, there is no scope for intervention in spreading awareness. . . . . suo moto or proactive duty on the part of the authorities to furnish information, information is given only on demand. Notwithstanding all these, it is a great move towards the access.

Criminal justice system :

BCAJ In criminal matters the conviction rate is said to be rather low. Is it that investigations are shoddy or do we need to review the way courts consider the evidence ?

APS First, let me give some statistics. On an average about 60 lac crimes are registered in each year in the States and Union Territories. 1/3 of these are IPC crimes and the rest are offences under Special and Local laws. Under the CrPC, as it exists today, the investigation of a criminal offence is by the police, whose duties are the maintenance of law and order. The strength of the police force over the years (from 1995 onwards) has remained between 12 and 13 lac, and they are expected to handle virtually unimaginable workload.

In India, not even 45% of the people charged with IPC offences, including mob violence, are ultimately convicted. In other countries like the UK, France, the USA and Japan, the conviction rate for similar offences is over 90%.

Huge number of criminal cases are pending for years together. When they are placed before Magistrates or Sessions Courts at the stage of evidence, due to excessive lapse of time, the witnesses are either dead or have left to some other place or their whereabouts are not known to the prosecution. There are many causes for failure of prosecution and delay is certainly the main cause.

The Malimath Committee’s report has suggested many reforms and although one may not agree with all the recommendations, at least some of them were excellent, but not implemented by the Central Government. For example, the Committee recommended that there should be a separate investigation wing with experienced police officers trained in forensic methods of investigation to be in charge of the investigation, leaving the law and order to be dealt with by a separate and distinct enforcement wing.

Plea bargaining was an important recommendation by the Malilmath Committee, which has been partially accepted but its implementation is far from satisfactory. The Malimath Committee also recommended stringent action against perjury. It has recommended to States for providing more infrastructures to the investigating machinery, especially in regard to accommodation, mobility, connectivity, use of technology, training facilities, etc. It has emphasised that forensic science and modern technology must be used in the investigation, right from the commencement of the investigation. There are some excellent suggestions like representation to victims or if he is dead, to his legal representatives and creating a victim compensation fund. Even after passage of more than ten years, there is not much progress on these recommendations. It is a pity that the much-needed police reforms are not taking place in spite of specific directions of the Supreme Court.

Fraud and Audit

Article

Preamble :



After the Enron debacle, auditing all over the world has come
under the scanner. The age-old saying that ‘an auditor is a watchdog and not a
blood hound’ is being re-examined, if not questioned. Legislation which seeks to
lay a greater emphasis on detection and reporting of fraud by auditors has been
introduced all over the globe. In this context, the article examines an
auditor’s duty as regards detection and reporting of fraud. It examines the
causative factors that led to Enron’s bankruptcy and some of the subsequent
legislation in India and ICAI’s pronouncements affecting an auditor’s duty and
responsibility towards the issue of fraud. For this purpose, the relevant
clauses in the Companies (Auditors Report) Order, 2003 (CARO), the Auditing and
Assurance Standard (AAS) 4, and certain observations made in a recent High Court
judgment in Maharashtra (Note 3) have been considered
. To get an
international flavour, the article also examines the findings of the O’Malley
Report (Note 1) on audit effectiveness. To make this study more interesting, the
new enhanced role of the auditor is examined with the help of a case study
.

Comparison of auditing scenarios before and after the turn of the
millennium :

In the last decade, two things have impacted the auditors’
role a great deal : (a) The rapidly evolving IT environment, and (b) the Enron
debacle in 2001. E-commerce and computerisation in all walks of life, for all
the conveniences offered, have made business practices and business models more
complex. New business models have sprung up as commerce transcends not only
distances, but also time zones, currencies, and countries. Data volumes are huge
and products with incredible technical specifications are introduced every other
day. Consequently, the audit scenarios in this rapidly changing IT environment
have become far more challenging. Amidst this, the Enron bankruptcy (as well as
the fall of several other corporate giants during the 2001-02 period), brought
the auditor’s role under the scanner. Panic buttons were pressed all over the
world and new legislation and statutory pronouncements enhancing the role of
auditors were announced. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act came into force in 2002 with
revolutionary reporting and disclosure requirements in audited accounts. For the
first time the CEO and CFO were obligatorily required to attest the financial
statements and also comment on existence of fraud. World over, questions were
raised about the performance of the auditors. Undoubtedly, the auditor’s role
was questioned. Auditing practices, and auditing standards were revisited to
make auditors address the issue of fraud, thereby emphasising the need for
greater audit effectiveness. In order to understand the auditor’s role from the
point of view of detection and reporting of fraud, it would be useful to conduct
a simple case study.

Case Study of a ‘Van Sales’ — business model :

Consider a business model applying the ‘Van Sales’ method of
selling Fast Moving Consumer Goods (FMCG). This model was conceived by a company
with a view to reach out to geographically far-flung untapped areas of potential
demand. The model required deployment of a fleet of multiple trailer vans
stacked with FMCGs like soaps, toothpastes, gels, creams, biscuits, etc. The van
crew would consist of a driver and a sales representative given a specific
route, (which could be hundreds of kilometres long in the country), to find
retailers, shops and other buying entities to sell the products. Both cash and
credit sales were permissible within policy norms. These sales operations were
monitored through palm-top computers and small portable printers provided to
salesmen in the vans. Each palm-top was linked to the main central server at the
head office. The salesmen made efforts to maximise their sales by approaching
retailers/shops and buying outlets spotted all along the route. The sales
deliveries, invoices and collection receipts were raised at the remote locations
by the salesmen using the palm-top computers and printers provided. The palm-top
sales system had well-designed controls built in to monitor credit limits, sales
returns, discounts, and promotion/festival/season offers. Each van would return
to the main warehouse to replenish its stocks and deposit the collections after
a tour was completed. In addition, all the vans were required to report, all
together, once in a year at one central place to facilitate stock verification,
which was carried out by the management. In such a business model, how does the
auditor perceive his role and what kind of audit procedures does he apply ?

Conventionally, an auditor would apply the following
procedures :

(a) Review and vouchsafe sales, receivables and inventory
data furnished to him at the head office, through the central server,

(b) Carry out tests of the sales application software for
evaluation of controls,

(c) Apply substantive tests to ensure compliance with
rates, discounts, etc., and terms and conditions in sales policies,

(d) Apply substantive tests to ensure that collections
deposited at the warehouse by the van crew were deposited into the bank,

(e) Observe the annual stock verification procedure of
stocks in vans, and,

(f) Debtors’ scrutiny and call for confirmations from
debtors.


Would the foregoing tests be enough for him to express an opinion on the correctness of the sales, collections, and debtors? A couple of decades ago, the foregoing audit plan would have been considered adequate. Unless some serious indication or sign of fraud came up in his routine audit, or was brought to his notice, the thought of a possible fraud or misuse would not even have crossed an auditor’s mind. In other words, he would not be specifically hunting for such a sign or indicator of fraud, nor would he even consider discussing with his team the possibility that any process or control could be exposed or circumvented to commit fraud. However, in the current auditing scenario, the above procedures would not be adequate. An auditor has a duty to consider the overall business model with ‘professional scepticism’ to understand its vulnerability and then apply appropriate audit procedures to maximise his chances that any sign or indicator will be spotted. For example, in the above case study, the auditor would have to consider the business model and its control systems with professional scepticism. If he does this, he will immediately realise that a business of this kind is fraught with several significant risks of revenue loss in myriad ways.

Huge geographical distances within which the van stocks move, virtually unmonitored and unchecked, along with sales to parties with unknown credentials expose the business model to risks of stock shortages, pilferage of cash or stocks, fictitious sales, unaccounted sales returns, teeming and lading of collections, abuse or misuse of vans for personal purposes or parallel business, etc. Countless other kinds of misuse could take place. While drafting his audit plan, the auditor cannot be completely impervious to these possibilities and merely carry out the tests stated above, on data given to him. He has to think of and apply various customised tests to address all the business risks envisaged. If he does not do this, fraud will occur and devastate a business as happened in Enron’s case. The failure of the auditors of Enron to detect irregularities and/or their apparent will-ingness to support some questionable transactions, permitted wrongful accounting practices and diluted or misleading disclosures and eventually brought Enron to bankruptcy. Corporate governance was at its nadir and exposed that audit effectiveness was very low. It would be immensely useful to study some of the findings in the Enron investigation.

Insights from Enron bankruptcy:

There is a very comprehensive report tabled on February 1, 2002 by Enron’s Special Investigative Committee (Note 2), which had a mandate to examine in detail certain transactions as regards their nature, what went wrong, why they took place and who was responsible. This report provided not only valuable information about the possible causative factors which led to Enron’s bankruptcy, but also insights of immense value to auditors, such as issues relating to accounting practices, corporate governance, audit effectiveness, management over-sight and public disclosures. Much of the subsequent legislation such as the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, 2002, and other acts and auditing standards around the world were based on the revelations in this report. Some of the major revelations are summarised below as they are relevant to the subject matter of this article:

1.    The auditors’ and legal advisors’ role. The report revealed that the legal advisors of Enron and their auditors had actually reviewed these transactions and had even cleared them. The report did not actually go to the extent of stating that the auditors had participated in the wrongdoing. However, a reader can draw his own conclusions about this aspect from the meaningful disclosures about the enormous fees paid to them during the relevant period. Auditors billed US$5.7 million for advice for these transactions alone, above and beyond the regular audit fees. At the minimum, there was gross negligence on the part of the auditors.

2.    Corporate Governance failure.
The report clearly indicated that the Board failed to stop or deter transactions of conflicting interest to Enron. The Chief Financial Officer (CFO) and the Chief Accounting Officer (CAO) had dual and conflicting interests in the suspected transactions. The Board was aware, at least about the CFO’s interest, yet it failed to exercise sufficient checks and controls to ensure that all dealings were above board, fair and equitable to Enron interests.
 

3.    Ineffectiveness of audit procedures to spot malicious ‘off-balance sheet’ transactions. Auditors ignored the implications of transactions with entities referred to as ‘Special Purpose Vehicles’ (SPVs) which were created to enable Enron to camouflage its losses and debts and remove them from Enron’s balance sheet. SPVs with whom such transactions were effected were adroitly portrayed as external independent entities (which they were not), so that it was possible to conceal Enron’s losses and debts, without the necessity of disclosing these in Enron’ sown financial statements. These SPVs were, in fact, entities owned and controlled by Enron’s own employees.

4.    Ineffectiveness of audit procedures to spot book entries. The report pointed out that the management resorted to ‘complex structuring of transactions that lacked fundamental economic substance’. In simple words – book entries were created without basis and in contravention of accounting principles, possibly like ‘hawala’ entries commonly referred to in India.

5.    Misleading Disclosures.
The disclosures in the reports were ‘obtuse, and did not com-municate the essence of the transactions’. The disclosures were made to ‘downplay the significance of related-party transactions, and in some respects, to disguise their substance and import’.

If one considers the possible business risks in the above case study and the Enron fraud there are a lot of similarities. In the above case study, the overall business risk could be quite high. The SPVs in the above case study could be fictitious retailers and creative book entries could be fictitious sales, the creative accounting treatment could be use of teeming and lading practices and perpetrating other sales, collection and inventory accounting manipulations. The conventional audit plan would not necessarily expose these frauds.

Thus, concerns of audit effectiveness were raised in India too, and the auditor’s role and CARO and ICAI’s auditing standards have been revised. The relevant clauses of these pronouncements have been examined below:

1.    Auditing Assurance Standard –  AAS 4 :

This is a specific auditing and assurance standard pronounced by the ICAI (effective from April 1, 2003), relating to an auditor’s duty as regards ‘fraud and error’ in financial statements. This standard states that the primary responsibility for the prevention and detection of fraud and error rests with both (1) those charged with governance, and (2)    the management of an entity. The standard also spelt out the auditor’s enhanced responsibility and laid down expectations of a far more penetrative audit than ever before in the past. The salient features of this AAS 4 are:

(a)    An attitude of professional skepticism. No longer can an auditor rely merely on any management representation. In effect, he must obtain evidence that either agrees with, or, brings into question the reliability of management representations. An auditor must adopt, necessarily, an attitude of professional sk ticism that will enable him to identify and properly evaluate matters that increase the risk of a material misstatement in the financial statements resulting from fraud or error. He now has to examine and question the management’s influence over the control environment, industry conditions, and operating characteristics and financial stability.

(b)    Importance of teamwork in conducting an audit. The standard also expresses the importance of teamwork. In planning the audit, the auditor should discuss with other members of the audit team, the susceptibility of the entity to material misstatements in the financial statements resulting from fraud or error.

(c)    Perform additional, extended orcommensurate audit procedures where fraud is suspected. When the auditor encounters circumstances that may indicate that there is a material misstatement in the financial statements resulting from fraud or error, the auditor should perform procedures to determine whether the financial statements are materially misstated.

(d)    Reporting obligations When the auditor identifies a misstatement resulting from fraud, or a suspected fraud, or error, the auditor should consider the auditor’s responsibility to communicate that information to management, those charged with governance and, in some circumstances, when so required by the laws and regulations, to regulatory and enforcement authorities also.

(e)    Where an auditor has obtained evidence that fraud exists, even materiality is not a point for consideration for communicating this matter to the appropriate level of the management timely.

Thus as per AAS 4, an auditor has to virtually move heaven and earth to satisfy him-self while carrying out an audit, that no serious red flags exist. If they do exist, he has to necessarily apply appropriate procedures to confirm his suspicions or dispel his doubts, about the existence of fraud. In case there is evidence of fraud, then, even materiality is not a factor for consideration – the matter of fraud has to be communicated to the appropriate level of management on a timely basis and he has to even consider reporting it to those charged with corporate governance.


CARO also casts a sigmficant responsibility on the auditor which has been considered next.

2.    Clauses of CARO relating to reporting of fraud by auditors:

Clauses 4(iv) and 4(xxi) of CARO are very important for auditors, especially with regard to their duty towards fraud. 4(iv) requires an auditor to report whether there are adequate internal control procedures commensurate with the size of the company and the nature of its business, for the purchase of inventory and fixed assets and for the sale of goods. What is significant is that the auditor is expected to report whether there is a continuing failure to correct major weaknesses in internal control. The key phrase is ‘continuing failure’. The continuing failure could stem from incompetence or fraud, but either way the auditor cannot ignore the possibility of existence of fraud. If he reports such a continuing failure but not a fraud, and if fraud is discovered later, the auditor may find himself in an unenviable situation to escape the responsibility for not carrying out appropriate audit procedures and also perhaps for not reporting the fraud. Clause 4(xxi) is even more serious, in that, it actually casts a direct responsibility on the auditor to report whether any fraud on or by the company has been noticed or reported during the year; if the answer is affirmative, the nature of the fraud and the amount involved have to be indicated. Here too, it is pertinent to note that materiality is not a factor for consideration by the auditor. If a fraud has been noticed or even reported, he has no choice but to report its nature and the amount involved. Furthermore, by virtue of being an auditor, and the very definition of audit as explained later, his duty does not end merely in mentioning that a fraud was noticed or reported; as an auditor his role automatically requires him to carry out an investigation and apply such other checks and verifications so as to enable him to be satisfied that the fraud is not isolated and that it does not have any other implications on the financial information he is expressing an opinion on.

Thus, CARO clearly spells out the duty of the auditor towards fraud detection and reporting.
In the recent past, an auditor’s duty towards fraud detection was further accentuated by the High Court in a recent judgment given below.

3. Sales Tax Practitioners’ Association (STPA) of Maharashtra v. the State of Maharashtra (Note 3):
This case is also very relevant to this article because it examines the definition of audit and concludes that detection of fraud is of primary importance in an audit. While considering the petition of the STP (refer note 3 for details) the High Court examined the very definition of audit. After considering certain definitions, it concluded that the word audit has a specific connotation in the matter of examination, investigation and auditing of. accounts, where detection of fraud is of primary importance. One of the definitions of audit referred to is that of R A Irish in his book ‘Practical Auditing’. It says that an audit may be said to be a skilled examination of such books, accounts and vouchers as will enable the auditor to verify the balance sheet. The main objects of an audit are: (a) to certify the correctness of the financial position as shown in the balance sheet and the accompanying revenue statements, (b) the detection of errors and (c) the detection of fraud – the detection of fraud is generally regarded as being of primary importance. The High Court also observed ‘The object and purpose of compulsory audit is to facilitate the prevention of evasion of taxes, administrative convenience …. “. It is a specialised job which can be undertaken only by a person professionally competent and trained to audit. Thus, auditors are expected to possess skills which could act as even a deterrent for tax evasion fraud. However, the High Court, also accentuated the risks accompanying the privileges: “The Chartered Accountant, by his very privileged status exposes himself to the consequences of civil liability for negligence, liability for professional misconduct in disciplinary proceedings under the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949, and sometimes to criminal liability under the Penal Code.”

Thus the above judgment clearly emphasises that an auditor’s role includes fraud and error detection and detection of fraud is of primary importance and that the auditor is exposed to severe penal consequences for non-performance of his duty.

4.    Insights from the O’Malley Report:

Thus far, this article has reviewed the auditor’s role within the domain of the Indian legislation and the ICAI’s pronouncements. It would be useful to examine some views from the international arena too. In this regard, there can be nothing better than the O’Malley Panel Report (Note 1). The Panel made some important revelations about the auditor’s role towards fraud. The Panel recommended that auditors should perform some ‘forensic-type’ procedures on every audit to enhance the prospects of detecting material financial statement fraud. Audit work would be based and directed to detect and find the possibility of dishonesty and collusion, overriding of controls and falsification of documents. Auditors would be required, during this phase, in some cases on a surprise basis, to perform substantive tests directed at the possibility of fraud. The Panel recommendation also calls for auditors to examine non-standard entries, and to analyse certain opening financial statement balances to assess, with the benefit of hindsight, how certain accounting estimates and judgments or other matters were resolved. The intent of this recommendation is twofold: to enhance the likelihood that auditors will be able to detect material fraud, and to establish implicitly a deterrent to fraud. This can be achieved by greater audit effectiveness which would pose a threat to perpetrators in successful concealment of fraud. The Panel also advocated stronger standard setting for auditors. It observed that the Auditing Standards Board should make auditing and quality control standards more specific and definitive to help auditors enhance their professional judgment. The Panel recommended that audit firms should review, and where appropriate, enhance their audit methodologies, guidance, and training materials; and peer reviewers should ‘close the loop’ by reviewing those materials and their implementation on audit engagements and then reporting their findings.

Audit firms should put more emphasis on the performance of high-quality audits in communications from top management, performance evaluations, training, and compensation and promotion decisions.

The auditor’s enhanced role towards fraud:

In the past, the issue of fraud was a ‘once in a blue moon’ phenomenon for auditors. There was no compulsion for an auditor to keep an eye open for red flags or warning bells, or even to under-take extended audit procedures in areas where potential red flags were noticed. Therefore, the actual reporting of fraud in any report ‘was rare. Furthermore, auditors had limited digital tools and techniques, nor any specialised training to be able to conduct interviews, mathematical data pattern analysis, nor did they have trained investigators to carry out field inquiries. The scenario changed completely after the Enron debacle and the advances in IT. Society’s expectations increased and auditors have started using sophisticated software, digital tools and have done further research and training to address the issue of fraud. Risk-based auditing plans and fraud risk detection is now a component of all audit plans.

Considering all the  foregoing, consider the case study of the van sales business once again. Is the auditor concerned about all the business risks envisaged – stock shortages, pilferage of cash or stocks, fictitious sales, unaccounted sales returns, teeming and lading of collections, abuse or mis-use of vans for personal purposes or parallel business, etc. ? Yes, the auditor must necessarily recognise these risks, and based on the issues brought out in AAS 4, CARO, O’Malley Report and the High Court judgment, an auditor cannot complete his audit of this business merely on the conventional audit plan detailed earlier. In order to really provide a meaningful opinion on the van sales operating results, an auditor would have to supplement the conventional audit plan with at least the following :

1.    Process study and Gap Assessment: The control environment of the entire business model has to be studied and examined by the auditor. Complete process walk through study of the van sales process has to be carried out by the auditor to identify vulnerabilities and gaps in the controls. An overall gap assessment of unaddressed risks must be conducted. In the case study illustrated, an auditor would have to study all the built-in controls in each of the processes on a typical route of a sales van. For example, he must study all the processes such as loading the van, scheduling the route, visiting the retailers, raising invoices, and issuing collection receipts, accepting sales returns and submitting an account, at the end of the day.

2.    Teamwork: Have a brainstorm session for designing appropriate audit tests and procedures with all the members of the team to address the risks, corresponding controls in place and gaps identified in step 1 earlier.

3.    Testing of controls: Based on steps 1 and 2 above, and other appropriate audit tests to address the risks would have to be applied including surprise tests at warehouse, visits to some retailers, and covert observation of van sales operations by having observers on the route.

4.    Additional IT tests of palm-top computer/ printer controls for sales invoicing and issuance of cash receipts to address the issue of fictitious documents.

The above is not an exhaustive list – it is merely an indication of the penetrative approach which an auditor must adopt. Depending upon his findings, he may need to report errors/fraud or control weaknesses in CARO. As per the CARO reporting requirement if these weaknesses have been continuing persistently without being addressed by the management, it may stem from fraud and therefore needs appropriate tests and verifications. The auditor needs to decide at what level of management he needs to report the issue of fraud, and perhaps to the audit committee as well. In such a case, as per the O’Malley Panel, forensic-type procedures may also be necessary, which may include multi-dimensional trend analysis of sales and collections, examination of palm top logs for changes, deletions, alterations, warehouse stock discrepancies, etc.

Conclusion:

While the duty of detecting and preventing fraud lies primarily with the management, the auditor’s role is not insulated from this issue. Auditors cannot be a substitute for the enforcement of high standards of conduct by management, but, auditors can be an important factor in promoting high standards’. Auditors must possess the discipline, fortitude and ability to stand up to management or to an audit committee or board of directors. They need to be able to say, “No, that’s not right!” where deemed essential. The O’Malley Panel called on all individual professional auditors to heed this message’: “Only quality audits serve the public interest, and the public is the auditor’s most important client.”

Back to basics — Audit

Article

What is Audit :


Audit is an independent examination of financial information
of any entity when such an examination is conducted with a view to expressing an
opinion thereon. Audit is supposed to provide credibility to the accounts
presented. Audits are conducted for different purposes. Internal or management
audit objective is to aid management or owner of an entity to ascertain specific
aspect of an entity or may be for overall comfort of the management.

Evolution of Audit :

Previously business of an enterprise was run by owners
themselves. But with the increase in scale and complexity of operations,
ownership and management of the business was separated. In earlier days business
was conducted with own resources, without the help of funds borrowed
from outsiders. Now the proportion of borrowed funds utilised in the business
has increased and is in multiples of own fund. As a result, there are different
stakeholders for an enterprise, such as shareholders, lenders, employees, etc.
All the stakeholders are interested in protecting their own interest. With the
emphasis on governance, audit has gained much more importance. Audit is no more
conducted merely for statutory compliance. Expectations from audit by the
management, independent directors, investors and regulators have increased.

A change in nature and scale of operations has also resulted
into a change in the manner of record keeping. Enterprises have shifted from
manual records to computerised system of book keeping. Most of the records are
now kept in computerised format. Certain important controls are built in the
computerised system itself. With the opening up of the economy, exposure of
domestic businesses to the world market has increased. It has given rise to
substantial foreign currency transactions, various types of financial
products/instruments and different way of addressing the fund requirement. As a
result, accounting has also become much more complex. To deal with some of the
complexity, number of accounting standards have been introduced/revised which
are mandatory.

The new challenges have obviously brought a change in the
audit approach as well. To bring uniformity in audit and to maintain its
quality, various standard auditing practices have been prescribed by The
Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI). In all, there are more than
35 Auditing and Assurance Standards which have been issued by ICAI. With a view
to converge them with the International Standards, recently they have been
renumbered and are now called Engagement & Quality Control Standards. These
auditing standards are guide to an auditor for conducting an audit in an
effective manner. It also provides elaborate procedures and tools for conduct of
audit.

In spite of this, worldwide many enterprises are suddenly
folding and many of them have gone into liquidation. When such an event happens,
role of the auditor is always questioned and in many cases auditors are found to
have committed lapses in their work. The question which arises is whether all
these auditing standards and using modern techniques have improved quality of
audit ? I believe that it has not yielded expected results as the basics of
the audit are either forgotten
or not applied properly. In the subsequent
paragraphs, I have discussed certain basics which should not be forgotten in the
new era. In my view, these basics need to be applied along with the modern
techniques of ‘audit’ to improve quality of audit.

Basics of Audit :

1. Cut-off procedure and checking :


Cut-off is a process by which one accounting period is
separated from another. It is important to have proper check of cut-off
documents to make sure that there is no over or understatement of revenue or
expenses. In the computerised environment it is difficult to check ‘cut-off’
procedures. It is important to understand the accounting software used and
control in the system by which no new transactions can be entered after the
cut-off date. It is important to check certain physical records such as
invoices, purchase orders, receipts and issue notes with the entry in the
computer software. To meet the stricter time deadline, one should not compromise
checking of ‘cut-off’ procedures.

2. Control in the Computerised

Environment :

One should not blindly rely on the accounting software used
in the preparation of financial statements. In-built checks and balances in the
accounting software should be examined and it is necessary to confirm that they
meet the internal control norms. It is also necessary to ascertain other
software packages which interact with the accounting software and one must
ensure that there is no possibility of unauthorised intervention. It is also
important to keep record of changes made in the accounting system and their
implication. In case there is a weakness noticed in the computer system, manual
controls exercised to overcome the same should be verified. In manual record
keeping any changes made in the records are apparent, while in case of
computerised system it is not so. It is important to check the history file
created by the system to ascertain changes made in the record.

There is a general feeling that computer-generated statements
will not have any totalling error and will capture all the relevant items. Many
times this results into an error. It is therefore important to confirm that
relevant fields are properly captured in totalling. Simple technique like hash
total will ensure that relevant items are properly considered.

3. Prudence :


With the emphasis of fair value accounting in the modern world, accounting prudence is forgotten. The importance of prudence is highlighted only when something goes wrong. One should always keep in mind prudence even at the time of fair value accounting. In other words, when one is calculating fair value of assets or liabilities, prudence should be giVen importance and in the shadow of fair value, assets should not be overvalued or liabilities should not be undervalued. One should remain conservative in recognising revenue and in case of uncertainty, should follow the principle of postponing the revenue till the time certainty of its recovery is established. At the same time probable loss or expense should be recognised in the financial statements and should not be reversed till the time probability exists of its materialising. As India is preparing for conversion of its accounting standards to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), it is also moving towards fair value accounting and in this journey it is important to keep the principle of prudence alive. With the recent financial crisis the world is facing, a debate has already started in the United States and Europe about blind acceptance of fair value accounting.

4. Substance over Form:
This concept is quite important in current scenario. With the advent of various structured products in the financial market, it is important to understand the intrinsic nature of a product. Without this understanding, there can be fatal error in accounting. In-depth understanding of the product is required before one judges its accounting treatment. Many times, implication of certain clauses in such agreements are not known even to the management of the company and in the process they are not aware of risks the organisation is exposed to. It is the duty of the auditors to go into the important terms and conditions of such products and if necessary, make management aware of the substance and its implication. In a situation where audit firm does not have internal expertise in understanding such products, one should not shy away from taking help of another fellow member or an expert. Many frauds happen when substance is different than form. Auditors need to keep in mind that form of instrument should not over-shadow its substance. An audit team needs to have proper training, so that such instances can be detected to make appropriate adjustments in accounting.

5. Professional Judgment:
With so many quality control (auditing) standards and importance given to documentation, audit is becoming a rule-based exercise and many times lacks proper application of mind. Here, I am not trying to undermine importance of documentation. It is important to have proper documentation to prove that proper audit was conducted and to avoid charge of negligence. At the same time, professional judgment is also important, which is gained by experience. Professional judgment is an art and is an important element of any audit.

An experienced auditor is aware of the need to develop a rapport with key personnel of the organisation without compromising independence. It is important to have constructive conversation with key employees in departments other than finance. Many times such interaction gives important clues to something wrong happening in the accounting. A Latin meaning of the word ‘Audit’ is ‘he hears’ and this quality of hearing others is important part of audit. The acquisition of technical knowledge and skill, no matter how extensive, will take one so far and no further. Good auditors are those who have developed their intuitive skills in a manner that technical knowledge can be applied in a given situation. Professional judgment is also to be applied in ascertaining that audit findings are material enough to affect true and fairness of the financial statements presented. For materiality, one should not merely go by percentage of profit or sales, but should apply his professional judgment for correct reporting on the financial statements.

Substantive Tests:

Substantive test is one of the important audit tests performed. It is a test of transactions and balances, and other procedures such as an analytical review, which provides audit evidence as to the completeness, accuracy and validity of financial information contained in the accounting records. The nature, extent and timing of the tests are determined by the degree of reliance which the auditor can place on the internal and operational controls.

Successful of audit depends upon proper selection of samples. Nowadays, substantive tests are conducted in a routine manner. Samples are chosen on the basis of random number selections. What is missing is proper designing of substantive tests. There should be intelligent selection of samples based on the review of main ledger accounts and after conducting analytical review. One should also remember that vouching has its place in audit, though this method of audit testing is time-consuming. By vouching the auditor goes behind the accounting records and traces the entries to their source. Where the internal controls system is weak, vouching may not be effective as the information may have been purposely entered and may be contrary to the facts. In case of a reasonable internal control in place, vouching should be carried out of key operational areas.

Before I conclude I would strongly recommend that the auditor should ensure that the business carried on by the auditee is authorised by its objects clause and the various authorities within the company operate within their sanctioned prescribed limits.

Conclusion

The challenge is to have a blend of basic and modern techniques for an effective audit. Basics of audit should not be forgotten whilst implementing modern audit techniques and approach.

WHISTLE-BLOWER POLICY : A STEP TOWARDS BETTER GOVERNANCE

Article

Background:

Securities Exchange Board of India (‘SEBI’) has prescribed
the listing agreement that is required to be executed between a stock exchange
and a company whose securities are to be listed
on that exchange. Clause 49 of the listing agreement is titled ‘Corporate
Governance’ and lays down the principles of Corporate Governance that are
required to be followed by the listed company. In addition to a list of
mandatory requirements that a listed company is obliged to comply with, there
are a few non-mandatory requirements that have been specified in terms of
Annexure I D of the specimen listing agreement. One such non-mandatory
requirement relates to ‘Whistle-blower Policy’. This article aims
to explore the meaning of ‘Whistle-blower Policy’, the rationale of making it a
part of the Corporate Governance Code (though not mandatory at present) and the
usefulness of such a policy in ensuring better governance.

Corporate Governance Code:

Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement of Stock Exchanges
places a non-mandatory requirement for listed companies in India to adopt a
Whistle-Blower Policy. The specific recommendation, placed in Annexure I D to
Clause 49 specifies that:


(i) The company will establish a mechanism for employees
to report to the management concerns about unethical behaviour, actual or
suspected fraud or violation of the company’s code of conduct or ethics
policy.

(ii) The mechanism must provide for adequate safeguards
against victimisation of employees who avail of the mechanism.

(iii) The mechanism must also provide, where senior
management is involved, direct access to the Chairman of the Audit
Committee.

(iv) The existence of the mechanism must be appropriately
communicated within the organisation.

(v) The Audit Committee must periodically review the
existence and functioning of the mechanism.


While this is a non-mandatory requirement, the company also
has a mandatory requirement to disclose, in its report on corporate governance,
the extent of adoption of such non-mandatory requirements. Numerous companies
have adopted the Whistle-Blower Policy in their organisations in their quest to
uphold the highest governance standards or in the fear of being considered late
entrants to the ‘well-governed companies’ club’!

A similar provision for protection of whistle- blowers is
found in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, which forms part of the United
States Federal Law. S. 806 of this Act protects employees who provide
information or assist in an investigation from discharge, demotion, suspension,
threats, harassment or any form of discrimination. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act has
now increased the protection provided to whistle-blowers. The provisions have
made it clear that retaliation against whistle-blowers will not be tolerated. It
is now a criminal offence to retaliate against whistle-blowers, carrying
penalties from a large fine to 10 years in prison.

This raises questions such as — What is really meant by a
whistle-blower policy? And, how does it lead to better governance?

A logical starting point would be to examine the key
components of whistle-blower policy. There are four broad components of
whistle-blower policy:




  •  A
    whistle blower



  •  A
    wrongful or unethical practice



  •  An
    authority



  •  A
    policy




The Four Components of a Whistle-Blower Policy:

A whistleblower:

“A whistle-blower is a person who raises a concern about
wrongdoing occurring in an organisation or body of people. Usually this person
would be from that same organisation. The revealed misconduct may be classified
in many ways; for example, a violation of a law, rule, regulation and/or a
direct threat to public interest, such as fraud, health/safety violations, and
corruption. Whistle-blowers may make their allegations internally (for example,
to other people within the accused organisation) or externally (to regulators,
law enforcement agencies, to the media or to groups concerned with the issues).”

(Source: en.wikipedia.org)

A Wrongful or Unethical Practice:

There are various grievance or complaint mechanisms that are
instituted by organisations. The wrongful practice or unethical conduct that is
sought to be covered under the whistle-blower policy is expected to be grave and
serious in nature, and may involve several parties. These practices may concern
serious disregard to the law of the land (e.g., dealing in narcotics
without a licence), a crime against human rights (e.g., child
trafficking, dealing in human organs), corruption of a high order (e.g.,
supply/use of substandard or expired medicines in a hospital), compromise of the
organisational values (e.g., bribery, unfair trade practices) and similar
serious acts. It is clear that trivial issues or unfounded claims should not be
escalated through this policy.

An Authority:

The policy defines a specific process to be followed for
escalation of information regarding the wrongful or unethical practice. The
person/authority to which the communication may be sent, the manner of sending
communication and the manner in which the information received would be dealt
with is clearly defined in the policy. It is felt that the management is often
the last in the knowledge-chain where a rampant wrongdoing is concerned, as the
employees and other stakeholders are not sure who to report to and not secure as
to how it would impact their relationship with the organisation. Thus, the
authority which deals with the information provided by a whistle-blower must be
independent, senior and responsible — and the policy must provide for
confidentiality of the information as well as the identity of the informer.

A Policy:

A whistle-blower policy is thus an internal policy on access to the appropriate designated authority, by persons who wish to report on unethical or improper practices. The policy is intended to create a platform for alerting the management of the company or those charged with the Governance of the company about potential issues of serious concern, by ensuring confidentiality, protection and expedient action. The Corporate Governance Code in India specifically states that the whistle-blower must have a direct access to the Chairman of the Audit Committee for reporting on wrongdoings by the senior management.

The Response of Corporate India:

Corporate India was slow to respond to the non-mandatory requirements of Clause 49 in general, and the clause relating to the whistle-blower policy in particular. A regulatory recommendation is a law in the making, and it is heartening to find that an increasing number of companies are now realising the need to pay heed to these non-mandatory requirements. A peek at some of the corporate governance reports that form part of the annual reports of companies reveals the status of adoption of this non-mandatory requirement?  (refer Table).


Impacts of unblown whistles — a couple of instances:

A few instances of worms in Dairy Milk bars were reported in Maharashtra, following which ad campaigns roping in Big B and revamping of packaging took place as an effort to win back their eroded image and consumer confidence. This cost Cadbury a good Rs.150 million on packaging expenses and 15% up on advertisement costs.

Coca-Cola India has been fighting a legal battle over allegations that its largest plant in India, at Plachimada has been responsible for environmental damage in the area. In a major step towards holding Coca-Cola accountable for damages it has caused in India, the State Government of Kerala decided to move forward with the formation of a tribunal that will hear and award compensation claims against the Coca-Cola Company. The Kerala State cabinet’s decision is based on the report and recommendations of a high-power Committee which released a report on March 22, 2010 holding Coca -Cola responsible for causing pollution and water depletion in Plachimada in the State of Kerala in southern India. Using the ‘polluter pays principle’, the high-power committee had recommended that Coca- Cola be held liable for Rs. 216 crore (US $ 48 million) for damages caused as a result of the company’s bottling operations in Plachimada.”

(Source?: http://www.indiaresource.org/campaigns/coke/)

Cadbury’s worm battle and Coke’s water contamination combat are classic examples of unblown whistles. If timely alerts were sent out through internal whistle-blowing the companies could have perhaps saved themselves of serious brand tarnishing and grave financial blows.

Whistle-blowers of Global Acclaim:

  • Sherron Watkins of Enron, Coleen Rowley of FBI and Cynthia Cooper of WorldCom awarded ‘The Persons of the Year 2002’ by ‘Time Magazine’ are classic examples of whistle-blowers in America.

  • Sherron Watkins was the Enron Vice-President who wrote a letter to Chairman Kenneth Lay in the summer of 2001 warning him that the company’s methods of accounting were improper. In January, when a Congressional subcommittee investigating Enron’s collapse released that letter, Watkins became a reluc-tant public figure, and the Year of the whistle-blower began.

  • Coleen Rowley was the FBI staff attorney who caused a sensation in May with a memo to FBI Director Robert Mueller about how the Bureau brushed off pleas from her Minne-apolis, Minn., field office that Zacarias Mous-saoui, who is now indicted as a September. 11 co-conspirator, was a man who must be investigated.

  • One month later Cynthia Cooper exploded the bubble that was WorldCom when she informed its board that the company had covered up $?3.8 billion in losses through the prestidigitations of phony book-keeping.

Whistle-blower Policy and Corporate Governance:
Some Thoughts:


Would you blow the whistle?

Mere bringing in the whistle-blower policy in an organisation does not necessarily result in successful functioning of the whistle- blower mechanism. It has to be put into action by creating awareness, propagating the policy, and assuring that no reprisal would be met against the whistle-blowers.

To safeguard themselves from the consequences of reporting a wrongdoing known or observed, employees across organisational hierarchies are tight-lipped and fearful to blow whistle against their colleagues, their business associates (vendors, customers, etc.) or their higher ups. Employees consider silence as golden in the wake of surviving in the workplace. This is detrimental to both the individual and the organisation.

Employees being closer to the organisation would be in a better position to uncover corporate mis-behaviour. Corporates need to decide whether they would welcome alerts through internal whistle-blowing and take corrective actions internally or be faced with the implications of unsolicited alerts from external sources, thereby endangering their goodwill and reputation.

The Association of Certified Fraud Examiners have highlighted five reasons for ‘Why Employees Don’t Report Unethical Conduct’:

  • No corrective action
  • No confidentiality of reports
  • Retaliation by superiors
  • Retaliation by co-workers
  • Unsure whom to contact

Several corporate collapses like Enron, WorldCom, Satyam, Global Trust Bank, UTI scam, Siemens bribing scam in Germany to gain contracts, Harshad Mehta and Ketan Parekh scam, have quaked up the investors’ reliance on governance. This has surfaced the need for reinforcement of a mechanism to escalate misconduct to the appropriate authorities at the right time.

Benefits of a whistle-blower policy:

There is no doubt that in today’s fast-paced world and mega corporations, institution of a whistle-blower policy is not a corporate luxury, but an organisational necessity. The benefits of such a policy are many:

  • Fostering good governance by encouraging employees to escalate deceitful actions by colleagues/ seniors/third parties.
  • Promotion of the organisational values thus nurturing a culture of openness in workplace.
  • Sending a clear message that severe action will be taken against unethical and fraudulent acts.
  • Dissuading employees from committing fraud by instilling fear of unfavourable consequences when caught.
  • Early alerts to diffuse a potentially larger disaster.

How to make the Whistle-Blower Policy a success?

The success of the Whistle-Blower Policy largely depends upon various factors viz. the level of tone at the top and the signals that its sends down the level, organisational philosophy and code of conduct; whistle-blower policy campaigning, orientation and awareness in the organisation.

The Whistle-Blower Policy should clearly state that:

  • Anonymity of the informant will be maintained.
  • The authenticity of the information will be confirmed and there will be no reprisal for reporting the information.
  • Appropriate and disciplinary action will be taken after investigation and on confirmation of the information.

While the regulatory requirement may lead to introduction of a Whistle-Blower Policy on paper, whether it is imbibed in spirit or not is determined by the tone at the top.

Tone at the top:

The tone at the top has a cascading effect on organisational pyramid downwards. Unless the organisational philosophy and the leadership positively encourage ethics and integrity, employees may assume that aiding in mounting revenue for the organisation is more a priority than ethics.

It is thus important that the leaders of organisation clearly communicate the organisational philosophy, values and code of conduct to be followed by each employee. Similarly, paying lip service to the whistle-blower policy is not enough; as employees and stakeholders are not encouraged to blow the whistle unless there is a serious commitment to it by the leadership.

Wrap-up:

The utility of whistle -blower policy is not only for private corporations but also larger organisations and Government bodies. The recent news coverage on inadequate preparation of infrastructure for the Commonwealth Games, 2010 has rocked India. The authors humbly submit that a well implemented national whistle-blower policy would have perhaps helped in giving early alerts of the impending fiasco and would have gone a long way in protecting the country from loss of credibility in the international arena.

Demystifying XBRL

Article

Since the inception of the
Internet, many technologies have been tried as Electronic Data Interchange (EDI)
enablers to move financial information and data between computer systems. In
today’s world information is the key to success for any organisation. Greater
efficiency or advantageous position against competitors can be achieved
depending on how much information and how quickly information can be obtained.
For example, investors and investment analysts want to use their own analytical
tools using the financial data made available by the company or data aggregators
like Bloomberg. They have to copy & paste such information manually. Finance
managers need to compile financial information from different departments into a
spreadsheet for decision-making. However, the format of information may be
different among the different systems. As a result, far more time is needed in
the financial domain for producing the required information and getting the
information ready for analytical purpose. With the creation of eXtensible
Business Reporting Language (XBRL), a new vista is opened.


About XBRL :

It is the language for
electronic communication of business and financial information between
businesses and over Internet. XBRL is an open standard and is freely available
standard language based on eXtensible Mark-up Language (XML) for creating
business reports. As a language, it does not intend to modify any of the
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) but to present them in a
suitable format which eases out further analysis and comparison. It can contain
both financial information such as balance sheet, profit & loss account or cash
flow statement and non-financial information, such as sustainability reports,
regulatory reports, loan applications, etc.

XBRL is composed of
specifications about how to structure business and financial data and a common
framework for structuring and naming business and financial information. XML
provides the structure for the data. XBRL Taxonomies define, relate and classify
different business concepts using the list of elements or Tags. Instance
Documents contain the actual facts for financial reports.

Why XBRL ?

There are many organisations
including regulatory bodies that post financial information on the Internet. At
present financial information is generally presented on the Internet in a static
format such as Hyper Text Mark-up Language (HTML) or Portable Document Format
(PDF). These two are the universal languages for web browsers. Both HTML & PDF
are static formats which can enable a person regardless of his physical location
to access relevant financial information easily. However, HTML & PDF Formats are
no better exchange of financial information than ‘Copy & Paste’. They do not
enable “Electronic Data Interchange” (EDI) of financial information. So, the
problem with this system is that the data is not readable by computer systems.

These static formats
i.e.,
HTML & PDF mean that a person is required to access a single file and
then read the information page by page. Any further interaction with the data
requires the user to either ‘Copy & Paste’ or ‘Re-key’ the information or
otherwise render it in an appropriate format for any further use.

Let us take an example,
suppose we want to compare the Net Profit of ten companies for a period of, say,
ten years, then you may need to access 100 discrete files, search in each one
for the required information and then, if found, extract the relevant
information. Thus, interacting with a large population of static data to analyse
it or to input it to a ‘Software Package’ for further processing is a tedious
job. It is time consuming, expensive and error prone also.

However, if such information
is made dynamic, then it would be possible to automatically interact with the
relevant data and avoid the inherent usage costs and increase the quality.

XBRL offers a way to make
financial information dynamic.

XBRL and Business Reporting
Supply Chain :

To resolve the problem of
providing reusable access to timely, accurate, relevant and discoverable
financial and business information, a market-driven open standard consortium,
XBRL International has evolved XBRL. XBRL International connects various
participants in ‘Business and Financial Reporting Supply Chain’ (see figure
below) in the development of a standard-based solution for business and
financial information that is universally open, industry-driven and
internationally endorsed.

Business and Financial
Reporting Supply Chain


XBRL Components:

Tags1:

XBRL tag is a computer code that represents one concept. XBRL uses tags to describe data. For example <Assets> 100</Assets>, the word Assets together with the brackets “<” and “>” is called a tag, and “<…>” is called opening tag and “</….>” is called closing tag.

Taxonomy1:

Taxonomy in general means a catalogue or a set of rules for classification. In XBRL, Taxonomy is a dictionary, containing computer readable definitions of business reporting terms as well as relationships between them and links connecting them to human-readable resources (metadata). A typical Taxonomy consists of a schema (or schemas) and linkbases.

Instance Document1:

An Instance Document is a business report in XBRL format. It contains tagged business facts whose definition can be found in the schema (or schemas) that the Instance Document refers to, together with the context in which they appear and unit description.

How does XBRL work?

Instead of treating financial information as a block of text, XBRL provides a computer-readable tag to identify each individual piece of data. A business reporting document becomes ‘intelligent’ data, allowing the exchange of business reporting data by encoding the information in a meaningful way. XBRL tags give data identity and context which can be understood by a wide range of software applications. It also allows data to interface with databases, financial reporting systems and spreadsheets.

Advantages of XBRL:

XBRL users span over all commercial, business and industrial establishments, the accounting professionals, data aggregators, investment Companies, banks, regulators and all users having a stake in financial statements and reporting. With XBRL, coding the same database can be used for meeting the information needs of all without any need for reprocessing and re-keying. XBRL is so designed that it can be used for distributing financial information in any format viz. HTML documents for web, printed reports and statements, electronic filing with securities and market regulators like SEBI in India and SEC in the USA. It is reliable, efficient, cost-effective, computer-readable, requiring no data entry again and again which is the most time-consuming, expensive and unreliable. Data once converted in the XBRL format can be easily processed by computers.

Since, XBRL provides an XML-based framework it can be used globally for creating, exchanging and analysing financial reports across all software formats.

It is the XBRL Tool that takes care of different software formats and converts the financial state-ments into the XBRL form. Therefore, almost any organisation can benefit from XBRL.

Companies can have their own internal reporting also in XBRL. Let us start with the basic information about a company. With companies going global it has become necessary to standardise financial reporting, not only within the country but across the globe so that we can have comparable and consistent financial data across space and time. A company’s own management can mine the data to reflect different aspects of the company’s working, carry out comparison with competitors and industry leaders and use it as a powerful MIS tool. An investment analyst through the use of XBRL would have timely data across companies to form meaningful conclusions and economists can have consistent information of sufficient granulation to make forecasts and run models. For bankers and credit rating agencies this will obviously be a huge bonanza enhancing the quality of their credit analysis.

The new-generation tools used for improving the decision-making process in the financial domain such as Business Activity Monitoring, Digital Dashboards, Business Intelligence Tools, Data Warehousing and Data Mining are adopting XBRL. An important improvement is for auditors, as XBRL enables continuous auditing. XBRL allows auditors to generate reports within a much shorter time frame as compared to the traditional model.

Worldwide status:

XBRL International which is a non-profit organisation, looks after the promotion and development of XBRL around the world. Some 500 plus organisations are members of XBRL International which include bodies like International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), The Institute of Chartered Accountants of England & Wales, Canadian Institute of Chartered Accountant (CICA), CA Bodies of Australia, Netherlands, Ireland, Singapore, New Zealand, International Federation of Accountant and many others are members of XBRL International. In addition, from the corporate world, Bank of America, Deutsche Bank, Dow Jones, Fujitsu, General Electric, Hitachi, IBM, Microsoft, Moody’s Oracle and SAP to mention a few are members of XBRL International. XBRL International has created local jurisdictions in each country where XBRL is already in use or is under development. There are 50 such local jurisdictions.2

IFRS Foundation has released IFRS Taxonomy 2010 on April 30, 2010. IFRS Foundation has also released IFRS Taxonomy 2010 Guide containing guidance on how to use IFRS Taxonomy 2010 from both an accounting and XBRL technology perspective.

India status:

XBRL India which is the provisional jurisdiction of XBRL International in India is looking after the promotion and development of XBRL in India. The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) is involved in XBRL India. India has just embarked upon XBRL standard. RBI which is the Regulator for all banks in India has implemented XBRL-based reporting for Capital Adequacy data (RCA – II Return) and has also released taxonomy for two more returns, namely, GPB Return and Form A Return. RBI has plans to convert other returns also on XBRL. * As per Media Reports, the Ministry of Corporate Affairs has also taken a decision to implement XBRL-based reporting for all companies in India from April 1, 2011. However, a notification to this effect is still awaited. SEBI is also planning to develop a platform for XBRL-based filing by all listed companies in India.

XBRL — The future of accounting:

From technical point of view, XBRL is replacing other previously defined XML standards for describing financial information and business reports during the last few years such as FpML, RIXML, or ebXML. A reason for this is the wide support from across the world. This will result in the next wave of innovation in ‘Enterprise Financial System’ because of the impact of XBRL on accounting, financial reporting and business intelligence. IT folks around the world are talking about three waves of innovation in XBRL. The first wave is of ‘Preparatory Software & Services’. This has to happen first as the companies start looking for software to convert their financial statements on XBRL format due to regulatory requirements. The second wave will be of ‘Analytical Tools’ for ‘Investment Analysis’ purpose. The third wave will be ‘Internal Systems’ in which one set of accounts is created that is used for investors, regulators and internal reporting purpose. In the next wave of XBRL-driven innovation, data will flow from operational systems all the way through consolidated internal reporting to external reporting to investors and regulators. This will enable regulators to get the transparency that they mandate and companies to get better internal business information/management information system (MIS).**

References:

(1)    Eva Reyes, Daniel Rodrigues & Javier Dolado: Overview of XBRL technologies for decision-making in Accounting Information Systems.
(2)    Federation of European Accountants: Extensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL) — The Impact on Accountants and Auditors.

(3)    Liv Watson: Enhancing Capital Markets Transparency & Trust.
(4)    Mike Willis — The Language of Accounting in a Digital World.

HR Management in the Accounting Practice

Implementing the basic elements of HR Management can deliver powerful results for any size of firm — small, medium or big.

The secret lies in weaving this discipline of management into the everyday running of our practices.

The need for HR management :

    People are the key ingredient of a professional practice. This is true whether the firm employs 10, 100 or 1000 people.

    Most accounting practices struggle to employ and retain people. The gap between demand and supply is the most obvious reason why finding enough people (leave aside good talent) is so difficult. The problem is accentuated because different sectors (with very different paying capacities and glamour quotients) now compete for the same talent pool.

    Retaining people is an equally big challenge because new employment opportunities (at significantly higher salaries and other perquisites and attractions) are opening up every day.

    The result is that at most times we are short-staffed. Because of attrition we are unable to build and maintain a stable team with steadily improving skill sets. This results in upward delegation, putting the proprietor/partner and senior staff under constant execution and delivery pressure. There is the constant stress of missed deadlines and mistakes in delivery. This leaves us with little time and mind-space to grow and qualitatively improve our practice . . . and of course achieve the elusive work-life balance.

What we want :

    As employers, we all want people who have the right attitude and appropriate and adequate skill sets to work for us. We would like to have a work environment in which our people enjoy working. We want our people to be committed to the Firm. And of course, we are concerned about salary cost since it is the biggest item on our profit and loss account.

    And what employees (and articled clerks) want is professional development through learning and exposure, recognition for their work, a healthy work environment and of course, fair remuneration.

    On the face of it, there is close congruence between the employer’s and employee’s needs which should guide our behaviour and actions to meeting these needs.

Reality check :

    However, the truth is that most of us are so busy with day-to-day execution issues that we don’t pay any conscious attention to the people aspect of our practice. Its not that we don’t care or we don’t want to do it. We do. But our efforts in this direction are often passive, unfocussed, unstructured and sporadic.

The essential elements of HRM :

    The basic objectives of HR management are :

  •         Hiring the right people
  •         Retaining them
  •         Growing them

    The following are the key processes of HRM that would help meet these objectives :

        Recruitment and selection :

Writing clear job descriptions for each position : This is the foundation of good selection and performance management since it brings clarity to what exactly to expect from each position in the organisation. A good job description looks at all aspects of the job. In an accounting practice, the aspects could be clients, service delivery, people and growth and profitability. The specific expectations under each aspect can then be spelt out for each level of staff.

Identifying competencies required for each job/position : Using the job description we can identify the skills and competencies that would be required in order to meet the expectations of that role. Examples of skills and competencies are : expert knowledge of accounting — Accounting Standards and presentation of financial statements (in Schedule VI format), ability to supervise teams, and good report writing ability.

Systematic selection process : At the best of times, selecting people is a tricky business. Not only should the person we select be technically competent, s/he should also be a good fit for the practice in terms of attitude and temperament. Hiring mistakes are costly. An incompetent person puts delivery at risk, an undisciplined person sets a bad example to other staff, an aggressive and rude person can put client relationship at serious risk, and so on. Hence, having a systematic approach to hiring is critical to reduce the risk of a bad choice. A simple three-step process could be :

Initial screening based on CVs and job descriptions : Screening CVs in the context of your expectations help to filter out those that are obviously not a good fit for the position, either in terms of education or in terms of experience and exposure or perhaps even attitude.

 Written tests for assessing technical ability : A good way to shortlist candidates is to put them through suitable tests that establish at least the baseline competency required for the job. After all, it would be a waste of time to interview everyone who applies for the job or whose CV is prima facie suitable.

Interview: This is the most important tool in selection, since it is an opportunity to assess the candidate face to face. Simply put, a good interview is one in which you find out whatever you need to know of the candidate in terms of the position in the shortest possible time. The thing to guard against is focus sing too much on technical knowledge at the expense of other attributes that are Decessary for the job. Needless to say, to get the most out of an interview, even the interviewer must plan and prepare carefully!

Performance management:

Training & Development: Development of people cannot be left to chance. It is also not the responsibility only of the employee. The organisation has (at least) an equal interest in ensuring that its people grow. This growth is in terms of technical competence, management ability and emotional maturity. While some skills and competencies can be taught (and learnt), others are acquired through experience. Again, there are technical skills and ‘soft’ skills. Whom to teach what? And who will teach? How? While these are no doubt tricky questions with no easy answers, the following approach may help to show the way:

  • Identify the skill gap for each person in your team. Job descriptions and competencies for each job can be a good point of reference to determine skill gaps.

  • Based on the skill gaps you have identified, determine the training that would need to be provided. Also choose carefully the format you will use. For example, while ‘classroom’ training is the easiest to deliver, there is a risk that it tends to be theoretical and if not delivered well, is ineffective. On the other hand, workshops and focussed case studies are much more effective, but they need careful preparation and skilful facilitation. Coaching and men toring are useful where you need to focus on the individual development of certain members of your team .

  • Deliver the training and TEST the participants. Needless to say, delivery of the training is the heart of the matter. This necessarily has to be effective and efficient. Short sessions of 60 to 90 minutes tend to be more effective than all-day sessions. The trainer’s preparation is critical for ensuring effectiveness. Also, the more participative the session, better is the retention of knowledge. It is very important to test the participants’ knowledge absorption by conducting a test (maybe multiple choice answers) or quiz. Of course, the ultimate test of effectiveness is how well the person actually applies his/her learnings at work!

Appraisals and feedback:

Feedback is a very powerful tool for people development and performance enhancement. While it is human nature to give feedback (usually in the form of criticism and often in public) when things go wrong, such feedback is counter productive in the long term. Also, contrary to normal practice, feedback should also be given when things go right! Feedback works best when it is given close to the event and is objectively given. While positive feedback should be given in public, negative feedback (as a general rule) should be given behind closed doors.

Even if the feedback is provided on an ongoing basis, formal performance appraisals should be conducted at least once a year. It is an opportunity to pause and objectively assess each person’s performance in all its aspects. Here again, using the job description and competencies helps to bring objectivity. In order to make the process transparent, it is useful to get each person to first do a self appraisal and then for the reporting senior to do an independent assessment which is then discussed with the staff member in a one-on-one meeting. Formal appraisals help to identify people with growth potential, training needs for strong as well as underperformers and provide an objective input for deciding on increments and promotions.

However, the one thing that we need to guard against is the ‘halo’ effect that influences the appraisal. ( The ‘halo’ effect means being un-duly influenced by recent events rather than taking the full year’s performance into consideration).

Compensation  and rewards:

Fixed remuneration i.e., monthly salary: Given that this has a direct bearing on the practice’s profitability, most of us are instinctively good at it. However, one may like to be conscious of the following:

  • Since hiring takes place throughout the year, distortions creep into the salary structure. These need to be addressed during the annual increments.

  • Guard against the ‘halo’ effect described above.

  • Our insecurity in respect of staff on whom we are excessively dependent and its impact on their remuneration.

  • Giving in to requests (demands) for higher pay by some employees. While this may, in the short term, retain the person, in the long term it will be seen as unfair by those who are not as aggressive.

Variable remuneration i.e., performance-linked bonus: Most firms pay an annual bonus to their staff. However, it is not very common to link the bonus to performance. Consequently, the bonus becomes an expectation of the staff and therefore loses its influence as a motivation for better performance. If the bonus payment can be clearly linked to performance, it can indeed become a powerful driver for those with real ability. However, a very important condition for implementing such a scheme is that there be clearly defined performance expectations and performance measurements in place. In view of the issues involved in implementing a variable pay scheme, it is not recommended for very small practices and at the early stages of HR management.

Promotion: Done for the right reasons and in the right manner, promotions are a very visible recognition of a person’s abilities and send a powerful message to all staff. On the other hand, done for the wrong reasons or without an objective assessment of the person’s abilities, it sends out an even more powerful negative message ! Hence the points to keep in mind are:

  •     Have clear reasons why the person is being promoted. Assess objectively the person’s capability to handle the new role. Else, you will neither get the role performed satisfactorily, nor will you be able to retain the person – s/he will soon be frustrated and leave.

  •     Communicate the promotion within the organisation (an email announcing the promotion is one way of doing it) giving in brief the background of the person, his/her key achievements in the earlier role and what the new role and responsibilities will be.

  •     Do ensure that the promotion actually results in a bigger role and is not just a change of designation.

Recognition (e.g., awards for exsra-ordinarq performance, special achievement, etc.) : Done for the right reasons and in the right manner, this can be a very powerful motivator for employees. It is not the monetary value of the award that is important, but rather the public acknowledgement of the achievement. Also, objectivity and consistency are key, else the recognition is seen to be hollow and insincere.

 HR administration:

HR administration is the grease on which staff matters run. If not carried out efficiently and in a timely manner, they can result in staff dissatisfaction that can have serious repercussions for the practice. The basic elements are:

  •  Payment of salaries: Timely and correct payment


  •     Leave management: Clear leave policy, applied consistently, records updated promptly and balances struck regularly


  •     Maintaining  employment.  records of staff


  •     Statutory  compliances (PF, ESI, profession tax, etc.)

    Leadership:

For people to perform, it is essential that they have a good feeling about themselves and their organisation and they have a sense of purpose i.e., they feel that they are doing something worthwhile. This is the softest and most intangible element of HR management because it deals with people’s feelings, their emotions. It is also the most difficult but most important element. It needs to be created at the top – at the level of the proprietor or partners of the practice. Only if you yourself feel good about yourself, your practice and your organisation, will you be able to create the ‘feel good factor’ in your organisation. Every person has a different style for dealing with people. Hence there is no one-size-fits-all formula for motivational leadership. It is not important how you do it. But that you do, is. These are some general pointers:

Communicate with your people, share plans to the extent they affect the team. Give them visibil-ity so they know where they are going. This is very important for creating a sense of purpose, one of the key ingredients of ‘feel good’.

Be in touch with your people. Sense their level of motivation. The ability to understand body language is a big asset. Sensitivity and a genuine concern for people are imperative. Employee engagement activities like lunches/dinners, celebrating birthdays and festivals, picnics, etc. are an excellent way to not only give your people a break and an opportunity to de-stress but also to be one with them and to know them in an informal setting.

Celebrate successes. It is what we strive for. So when it comes, it needs to be recognised and welcomed. Else we will take it for granted and eventually lose the joy of achievement.

Show strength and courage in difficult times. Tough times are inevitable. It is in such times that staff actually look to their leaders for direction.

Hence the ‘tone at the top’ will really determine whether the team will rally behind you and put in that extra effort or whether they will look for their self interest and eventually drift away.
 
Give feedback. The powerful message it gives is this: ‘I have been noticed. What I do matters. Someone is interested enough in me and my work to tell me when I go well and when I don’t’. Without feedback, we feel neglected and unwanted.

The challenges  and why we don’t  do it:

1. It’s a big breakfrom the past: In the past (till about 15 years ago), the demand-supply gap for articled clerks and qualified staff ensured that staff was more or less readily available. By and large, clients’ expectations did not go beyond the very basic and the nature of work was such that the proprietors/partners did not have to rely very heavily on their staff for ‘brainware’ – they essentially needed their staff to do the ‘grunt’ work. So hiring, retention and building skills was not much of a constraint and was consequently did not get any serious attention.

2. We don’t have the mindset for this: Perhaps this is a legacy from the past – the point made above – and is the biggest stumbling block. Most of us are too focussed on the technical aspects of our core areas of work and think of HR functions as esoteric, fancy and ‘soft’.

3. I don’t have the time for this: This is a variation of the above.

4. My practice is too small for this: Certainly, this is a seemingly valid argument. Small practices are typically run with fairly informal structures and processes. The personal style of the proprietors/ partners has a dominating influence in the manner in which the practice is run. They are able to stay on top of things and drive the practice by the seat of its pants. In these practices, management ‘happens’ and is not something you need to do consciously,leave alone recognise its distinct facets. We tend to think of ‘formal’ management as relevant to companies and businesses, not to professional practices.

5. I am not trained for this or I don’t know what to do and how to do it
: Our professional training (as articled clerks and the CA syllabus) does not give us any exposure to or training in management skills. Almost all our general management skills are self-taught and acquired from experience and reading. And HR management hardly ever comes on to our management radars.

6. I cant afford  it:  We  have  a feeling  that  ‘this probably costs a lot of money’ and in any case ‘is nice to have, but is not really essential for my practice’.

Busting the challenges:

The economic, social and professional environment has changed dramatically. Survival and success in the profession therefore demands that we look at managing our practices in a more business-like manner, managing all aspects of the practice (of which the technical or delivery aspect is only one) competently.

Given the benefits that good HR management can bring, spending time on this is an investment and not a cost. Initially, it does need extra effort (as any change does) but once set up properly, it is by and large ‘maintenance-free’.

How formal your HR management is will essentially be determined by the size of the practice and your own management style. What is important however, is to have the ‘HR mindset’ and to keep HR management firmly in the radar of practice management.

HR management (like all management) is essentially common sense and does not necessarily require formal training. Certainly, knowledge of basic HR functions would be a big help but is not a pre-requisite to get started.

Very importantly, none of this costs large sums of money. Like we said earlier, it will require an investment – of your time, mind space and common sense.

Ok, now  where do we go from  here?

Once we recognise the reality of the ‘people challenge’ and have dealt with our reasons for ‘Not Doing It’, we are ready to face the task at hand.

Getting started is a four-step process. Here are some questions to get you started:

1. Do I feel the need for HRM  in my practice?  This will test your  need  and its intensity.

2. Do I really want to implement HRM ? This will be your statement of resolution.

3. Why do I want to implement HRM ? This will test your clarity of purpose and also help to identify the ‘pay-offs’ that you expect.

4. Which elements of HRM should I implement? This will depend on the specific needs of your organisation. Your answer to 3 above will give you pointers to identify this. The section ‘Essential Elements of HRM’ above will also help to set this agenda.

5. How do I do it ? Once your reasons for implementing HRM are clear and you have set the agenda, it will then boil down to the actual implementation. The following tips may be useful:

a) Keep it simple. Don’t make a grand design. Don’t aim for the most ideal HRM practices. Do what you believe is right for you and your organisation.

b) Prioritise. Take small steps. Don’t take on too much at one time. Take what matters most first and implement it. Let it start working. Then move on to the next items.

c) Be disciplined. Once you have taken the plunge, stick to the task. Your efforts will take some time to show results, but they will. Have patience … and faith!

End Note:

Adopt HR management practices. They are simple. They are common-sense. Don’t think your practice is too small for it. Don’t be intimidated by the jargon. What is important is that YJU genuinely care for your people and that you have sincerity of purpose and discipline.

You are bound to reap the obvious benefits discussed earlier in this article. But more than that, you will experience the joy of watching people develop and grow, not by accident, but systematically and by design!

Role of morality and estoppel in the delivery of justice

Article

Intended or not, an influence, or a dis-proportionate bearing
of supplementary factors on the process of legal adjudication could result in a
deviation from the set precedents of judicial thought. One such concept
discussed here is Morality, as understood in common parlance. The other
is the legal premise of Estoppel.


Morality, ethics, equity and Dharma :

Equity, an offspring of morality, is described as the quality
of being fair, impartial, and equal. Equity is a system of law, a body of legal
doctrines and rules developed to enlarge, supplement, or override a narrow rigid
system of law. The roots of morality and the allied concepts of ethics and
equity, in the Indian context, may be traced to the timeless principle of
Dharma. For brevity sake, all these noble, lofty concepts are hereinafter
sometimes collectively referred to under the banner of ‘Morality’.

Morality and law :

Morality on one hand and law on the other may or may not have
commonalities at a given point of time; but there are certainly perceptible
differences. While the purpose of both is to achieve an orderly society based on
equitable discrimination, there are significant differences in the nature,
scope, extent and administration of the two. Most importantly, all illegal
activities may not qualify as immoral; all immoral activities are not per se
illegal. To quote an example, the Supreme Court, in the case of Gherulal
Parakh v. Mahadeodas Maiya and Others,
(AIR 1959 SC 781), observed that the
moral prohibitions in Hindu Law texts against gambling were not only not legally
enforced, but were allowed to fall into desuetude.

Morality, for instance the concept of Dharma, is on one hand
eternal, being fixed and sacrosanct in its basic principles; at the same time,
in its application at a point of time or under a set of circumstances, it is
evolving, inclusive and flexible, considering Kala (time), Desha (place) and
Sandarbha (situation). Evolution and change are attributes applicable to law
also. In the words of Roscoe Pound, a scholar, teacher, reformer, and Dean of
Harvard Law School, “The law must be stable, but it must not stand still“.
Pound strove to link law and society through his ‘sociological jurisprudence’
and to improve the administration of the judicial system and was viewed as a
radical thinker for arguing that the law is not static and must adapt to the
needs of society.

If so, does law include morality ? If yes, to what extent ?

The Indian Constitution incorporates in its preamble,
justice, liberty and equality. The Directive Principles of State Policy
are guidelines for creating a social order characterised by social, economic,
and political justice, liberty, equality, and fraternity as enunciated in the
Constitution’s preamble. Article 37 of the Constitution declares that these
principles shall not be enforceable by any court, but are nevertheless
fundamental in the governance of the country and it shall be the duty of the
state to apply these principles in making laws, so as to establish a just
society in the country. The Directive Principles of State Policy are
guidelines to the Central and State governments of India, to be kept in mind
while framing laws and policies. Thus, it may be said that the Indian
Constitution and the legislations, statutes and enactments thereunder
extensively embrace and comprehensively encompass within their folds, the
principles of Dharma, morality, ethics, equity and fair play, and if a residue
remains, it is intentional. Be it so, law, once codified by the Legislature is
presumed to inherently take care of these cherished principles without requiring
further additions.

Role of the judiciary :

If a statutory provision is open to more than one
interpretation, the Court has to choose that interpretation which represents the
true intention of the Legislature. Constitution entrusts the judiciary with
great power to declare the limits of the Legislature and Executive; Courts can
invalidate laws that run counter to the constitutional provisions. However,
morality is neither primary nor decisive here.

Can immorality, actual, alleged or perceived, influence the determination of
legality ?

The reader is bound to conclusively answer in the negative,
or rather, question the necessity of raising this issue, when the answer is well
settled and accepted. There is certainly no need to give citations or other
references to substantiate that as far as an act or omission is within the four
corners of established law, it is immaterial whether the same confines itself to
morality or not. However, simple as it may seem, there are notable instances
when morality seems to deceptively taint a decision as to legality or otherwise.
This may primarily be attributable to an appreciable and well-founded respect
for morality which unintentionally but unfortunately blurs the decision-making
process while determining legality.

Estoppel :

It may not be incorrect to say that Estoppel conceptually
derives its existence from the myriad labyrinths of morality, at least
partially. Estoppel is a legal rule that prevents somebody from stating or
claiming a position inconsistent with the position previously stated or held
out, especially when the earlier representation has been relied upon by others.
As per the Stroud’s Judicial Dictionary of Words and Phrases, the word ‘Estoppe’
comes of a French word estoupe, from which comes the English word
stopped, and it is called an estoppel, or conclusion. Summarising a host of
decisions, the Stroud’s Dictionary says, regarding estoppel by conduct or
representation, that the essential factors giving rise to an estoppel are :

(a) A representation or conduct amounting to a
representation intended to induce a course of conduct on the part of the
person to whom the representation was made,

(b) An act or omission resulting from the representation,
whether actual or by conduct, by the person to whom the representation was
made, and

(c) Detriment to such person as a consequence of the act or
omission.

While estoppel is no doubt an offspring of English law, which
was adopted by Indian law, innumerable instances can be found in ancient Dharma
in Indian scriptures which extol the virtues of estoppel, especially when
self-imposed. The popular acceptable disposition seems to be that once a
position or stand is taken, the person so doing is bound thereby and shall ‘at
any cost’, act and continue all future actions in accordance with such position
or stand.

Estoppel at any cost — at the cost of illegality ?

What if the primary position, which is sought to be adhered to following the rule of estoppel, is itself based on, or is alleged to be, or is a result of, an illegal act? Adherence to estoppel in such a case could mean negation of legality. In all fairness, the bar of estoppel cannot be claimed, alleged or raised by a counter party or respondent who has himself committed illegal acts, or could be genuinely alleged to have done so. Whether such allegation of illegality is genuine or not is to be determined on the facts and circumstances of each case. Simply stated, people living in glass houses should not throw stones at others.

Recent  Court  rulings:

What if a party to a contract claiming the contract to be illegal on specific grounds, is barred by the Court from doing so, on a reasoning presumably -” based on an alliance of morality and estoppel?

Consider the recent ruling of the Bombay High Court in [CICI Bank Ltd. v. Sundaram Multi Pap Ltd., (Company Petition No. 248 of 2008). Firstly, in ascertaining whether an agreement in question was binding in spite of it not being signed by one party thereto, the Court has held that the absence of the signature is not significant, since the said agreement has not been disputed by the other party and has been acted upon by both parties. Thus, it may be rightly inferred that by not disputing the agreement and by acting thereunder, the other party has ‘held out’ a position and is therefore estopped from questioning its existence now.

However, that being so, another defence by the respondent Company, was that the agreement in question is illegal, void, violative of its Articles of Association and not binding on it. The Court observed that prima acie, these contentions do not appear to be bonafide or substantial, in spite of being well aware that the Company had already filed separate suit(s) in this regard which were pending. More importantly, such observation was arrived at, not by subjecting the agreement to the tests of legality, but on the following grounds:

a) Resolution to generally execute agreements was passed by the Company

b) Agreement is signed by the authorised officer of the Company

c) The Company paid certain amounts and issued a cheque to the other party, and the other party also made a payment to the Company by crediting its bank account.

Further, the Court also directed the respondent Company to deposit the amount demanded from it by the petitioner.

Take another recent decision of the Madras High Court in Rajshree Sugars and Chemicals Ltd. v. Axis Bank Ltd. Mr. Justice V. Ramasubramanian, in his judgment, observed that the plaintiff claiming an agreement to be null, void, illegal or voidable had no qualms about the deal at the time of deriving a benefit or income therefrom, and compared the plaintiff to a horse which would open its mouth for food but close it for bridle.

By receiving certain benefits under an agreement or a contract, has the recipient party ‘held out’ that the same is legally binding? Even if he has so held out, does the same validate the agreement or contract merely by estoppel? Stating that such recipient, having enjoyed benefits, is morally bound to perform his obligation under the agreement or contract, can it be said that the same is legally binding? Is legality to be determined here with reference to the statute book, case laws, investigation and evaluation, or by merely looking into estoppel, morality, or the actions of the parties like passing generic resolutions or making payments purportedly in mistake of law?

Even applying  the rules  of morality  and estoppel, the consistent  principle  as laid  down  in various decisions  of Courts  appears  to be that the Rule of Estoppel would  apply when  a bona fide party to the agreement  or contract  has been  misled  by the position  held  out by the other.  In the decisions  discussed hereinabove,  it cannot in any manner be said that the party  receiving  benefit  under  such agreement  or contract  in question  has misled  the opposite  party  in any  manner.  Moreover,   receipt  of benefit is a subsequent  event post entering  into the agreemer;t  or contract,  whereas  the agreement  or contract is being questioned  as being void ab initio, that is, from its very inception, without reference to such subsequent event.

To add to our inference, the Indian Contract Act, 1872 could be pressed into service. S. 65 of the said Act deals with the obligation of a person who has received advantage under a void agreement or a contract that becomes void. It simply states that when an agreement is discovered to be void, or when a contract becomes void, any person who has received any advantage thereunder is bound to restore it, or to make compensation for it, to the person from whom he received it. This Section, which is based on equitable doctrine, provides for the restitution of any benefit received under a void agreement or contract. What if a counter is raised, that S. 65 would apply where the agreement is ‘discovered to be void’ or where the contract ‘becomes void’ and not to an agreement which is void from inception? The Supreme Court, in the case of Tarsem Singh v. Sukhminder Singh, (AIR 1998 SC 1400) has categorically held that this argument cannot be allowed to prevail. Further, S. 30 of the Specific Relief Act, 1941, states that on adjudging the rescission of a contract, the Court may require the party to whom such relief is granted to restore, so far as. may be, any benefit which he may have received from the other party and to make any compensation to him which justice may require.

Thus, to conclude, it is respectfully submitted that the legality or otherwise of an agreement or contract cannot be determined merely because a receipt of benefit thereunder, by default, binds the party to stick to morality and promissory estoppel.

All that is required of such party is to return all benefits received. The relevant yardsticks to determine the fundamental issue as to the validity of an agreement or a contract would be to apply the requirements of S. 10 of the Indian Contract Act – free consent, competence, lawful consideration and law-ful object. And of course, since the specific always overrides the general, such agreement or contract is to be cumulatively validated under all specific enactments, rules, regulations, guidelines or the like as may be applicable to it.

Potential Voting Rights — Impact on Consolidated Financial Statements

Consolidated Financial Statements shall be prepared by an entity if it has control over another entity. ‘Control’ under IFRS, being power to govern the financial and operating policies, covers within its purview even those entities that have been excluded under Indian GAAP. This article attempts to analyse the meaning and scope of the term — Potential Voting Rights — when determining control.

India, in the year 2011, joins the global accounting revolution : International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). It’s being defined as a revolution by many, because significant conceptual level changes are envisaged. One such concept that is evidenced in the piece that follows is substance over form. Recognising the core substance of the transaction over its legal form will indisputably bring an evolution in financial decision making.

It’s not that Indian GAAP does not recognise the importance of substance over form, but its true application will happen only under IFRS. One such instance is consideration of potential voting rights to determine existence of ‘control’ for the purpose of consolidation.

What is Potential Voting Rights ?

    An entity may own securities that are convertible into ordinary shares or other similar instruments that have the potential, if exercised or converted, to give the entity voting power or reduce another party’s voting power over the financial and operating policies of another entity.

    Some of the key instruments that are considered to have potential voting rights are as under :

    1. Equity share warrants

    2. Share call options

    3. Convertible preference shares

    4. Convertible debts

Defining control :

    Under IFRS, International Accounting Standard (IAS) 27 Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements defines Control as the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities.

    As per Indian GAAP — Accounting Standard (AS) 21 Consolidated Financial Statements, Control means

    (i) the ownership, directly or indirectly through subsidiary(ies), of more than one-half of the voting power of an enterprise; or

    (ii) control of the composition of the board of directors in the case of a company or of the composition of the corresponding governing body in case of any other enterprise so as to obtain economic benefits from its activities

    The above definition is in line with that given under the Companies Act, 1956.

    As per S. 4(1) of the Companies Act, 1956, a company shall be deemed to be a subsidiary of another if, but only if, :

    (i) that other controls the composition of its Board of directors; or

    (ii) that other :

  •      where the first-mentioned company is an existing company in respect of which the holders of preference shares issued before the commencement of this Act have the same voting rights in all respects as the holders of equity shares, exercises or controls more than half of the total voting power of such company;

  •      where the first-mentioned company is any other company, holds more than half in nominal value of its equity share capital; or

    (iii) the first-mentioned company is a subsidiary of any company which is that other’s subsidiary.

    Here, the expression ‘nominal value of its equity share capital’ means paid-up value of the equity shares and not its face value. The meaning is clear when it is read in conjunction with S. 87(1)(b) of the Companies Act, 1956 which provides that the voting rights in respect of a member holding equity shares in a company shall be in proportion to his share of the total paid-up value of equity shares of the company.

Exclusion of Potential Voting Rights under Indian GAAP :

    From the above definition, it can be seen that the Companies Act, 1956 considers nominal value of equity share capital and not potential shares/voting rights.

    Although AS 21 does not specifically exclude potential voting rights, Explanation to paragraph 4 of AS 23 Accounting for Investments in Associates in Consolidated Financial Statements states that the effects of potential voting rights are not to be considered for the purpose of determining control.

    Based on the above analysis and in light of law prevailing over standards, potential voting rights are not considered for determining control under Indian GAAP.

    However, the scope of IAS 27 is much wider as it considers the effects of potential voting rights.

Determining whether potential voting rights exist :

    In assessing whether potential voting rights contribute to control, the entity examines all facts and circumstances (including the terms of exercise of the potential voting rights and any other contractual arrangements whether considered individually or in combination) that affect potential voting rights, except the intention of the management and the financial ability to exercise or convert. The intention of the management and the financial ability of an entity to exercise or convert does not affect the existence of power.

    Example :
An entity holding 35% voting rights in another entity, but having options to acquire another 20% voting interest, would effectively have 55% current and potential voting interests. This may lead to consolidation as per IAS 27.

Currently exercisable or convertible:

An entity has control when it currently has the ability to exercise that power, regardless of whether control is actively demonstrated or is passive in nature. The existence and effect of only those potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible, including potential voting rights held by another entity, are considered when assessing whether an entity has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of another entity. Potential voting rights are not currently exercisable or convertible when they cannot be exercised or converted until a future date or until the occurrence of a future event.

Example:
Company H issues Foreign Currency Convertible Bonds (FCCB) with the condition that they are redeemable or convertible only after a period of 3 years. In this case, potential voting rights shall be assumed to exist only after completion of the 3 year lock-in period.

When potential voting rights exist, the proportions of profit or loss and changes in equity allocated to the parent and minority interests are determined on the basis of present ownership and do not reflect the effects of potential voting rights. That is, potential ownership may necessitate consolidated financial reporting, but income or loss allocation is still to be based on actual, not potential, ownership percentages.

Can one subsidiary have  two parents?

Potential voting rights are capable of changing an entity’s voting power over another entity – if the potential voting rights are exercised or converted, then the relative ownership of the ordinary shares carrying voting rights changes. Consequently, the existence of control is determined only after considering the existence and effect of potential voting rights. The definition of control in IAS 27 permits only one entity to have control of another entity. Therefore, when two or more entities each holding significant voting rights, both actual and potential, the factors are reassessed to determine which entity has control.

Whereas, under Indian GAAP, Explanation to paragraph 10 of AS 21 Consolidated Financial Statements states that both the entities should consolidate the financial statements of the controlled entity.

Potential voting rights held  by others:

Thus, an entity will not be able to conclude that it controls another entity after considering the potential voting rights held by it without considering the potential voting rights held by other parties. Consequently, an entity considers all potential voting rights held by it and by other parties that are currently exercisable or convertible when determining whether it controls another entity.

As can be seen above, Company B holds 45 lakhs current and 15 lakhs potential voting rights in Company O. Thus, company B holds in all 60 lakhs voting rights. Company D, in turn, holds SS lakhs current voting rights in Company O. However, this fact alone shall not lead to a conclusion that company B is the controlling entity. Company B must also consider the potential voting rights held by company D, if any.

Can non-convertible Preference Share Holders have potential voting rights?

A combined impact of IFRSs and legislations like the Companies Act may give rise to unique circumstances. For instance, in the Indian scenario, non convertible preference shares may have a role to play in determining control, as described below.

As per S. 87(2)(b) of the Companies Act, 1956, every member of a company limited by shares and holding any preference share capital therein shall, in respect of such capital, be entitled to vote on every resolution placed before the company at any meeting, if the dividend due on such capital or any part of such dividend has remained unpaid:

i) in the case of cumulative preference shares, in respect of an aggregate period of not less than two years preceding the date of commencement of the meeting; and

ii) in the case of non-cumulative preference shares, either in respect of a period of not less than two years ending with the expiry of the financial year immediately preceding the commencement of the meeting or in respect of an aggregate period of not less than three years comprised in the six years ending with the expiry of the financial year aforesaid.

As per S. 87(2)(c) of the Companies Act, 1956, where the holder of any preference share has a right to vote on any resolution in accordance with the provisions of this sub-section, his voting right on a poll, as the holder of such share, shall, subject to the pro-visions of S. 89 and Ss.(2) of S. 92, be in the same proportion as the capital paid-up in respect of the preference share bears to the total paid-up equity capital of the company.

Also, one must not forget that a security will be considered to have potential voting rights only if it is currently exercisable or convertible. As the cumulative/non-cumulative preference shares will have right to exercise voting power only on default by the company, as mentioned above, the shares shall be considered for the purpose of ‘control’ only when they are entitled to vote. In short, the cumulative/ non-cumulative preference shareholders shall not be considered to be having potential voting rights till they actually are eligible to vote.

Takeaways:

As defined above, ‘Control’ is the power to govern financial and operating policies of an entity. Voting rights cannot be considered in isolation to determine control. There are several other factors, not having been touched upon by this article, which may deserve consideration to zero in on the entity that has power to govern policies.

To conclude,  there are three important takeaways:

1. An entity has control when it currently has the ability to exercise that power

2. An entity shall consider all potential voting rights held by it and by other parties that are currently exercisable or convertible while determining whether it controls another entity

3. Income or loss allocation between parent and minority interests is still to be based on actual, not potential, ownership percentages.

Service Concession Arrangements — IFRIC 12/SIC-29

Article

Introduction :


Service concession arrangements apply to public-private
partnerships for execution of infrastructure projects for i.e., roads, bridges,
tunnels, etc. This interpretation will impact infrastructure companies in India
once they converge their financial statements from April 1, 2011. This
interpretation deals with accounting treatment to be followed by operator. This
article will deal with the concept enshrined in this interpretation as well as
accounting and disclosure norms to be followed by the operator. Considering
increasing thrust given by the Government for Public-Private-Partnerships (PPP)
for execution of infrastructure projects, this
interpretation will govern accounting by operators in future.

Service concession arrangements typically involve two
parties, grantor (government or public sector entity) and operator (private
sector entity). The operator constructs, upgrades, operates and maintains
infrastructure for a specified period of time. The operator is paid for its
services over the period of arrangement. Such arrangements are also known as
Build-Operate- Transfer (BOT) projects, a rehabilitate-operate-transfer or a
public-private concession arrangement.

This interpretation applies only if the following two
conditions are satisfied as provided in para 5 of this interpretation :

  • The grantor controls or regulates what services the
    operator must provide with the infrastructure, to whom it must provide them
    and at what price.

and

  • The grantor controls — through ownership, beneficial
    entitlement or otherwise — any significant residual interest in the
    infrastructure at the end of the term of the arrangement.

Accounting treatment :


  • Revenue recognition :



The operator shall account for revenue and costs relating
to construction services and upgrade services in accordance with IAS 11 :
Construction Contracts. The operator shall account for operation services in
accordance with IAS 18 : Revenue Recognition. The contract revenue is measured
at the fair value of the consideration receivable.

  • Operator’s rights over the infrastructure :



The arrangement does not convey the right to control the
use of public infrastructure and therefore infrastructure cannot be recognised
as plant property and equipment as per IAS 16. The operator has only access to
operate the infrastructure in accordance with the terms of contract on behalf
of the grantor. The assets provided by the grantor if form part of the
consideration payable by the grantor, then the same will be recognised as
plant property and equipment, measured at fair value at initial recognition.
In this case, the operator shall also recognise a liability in respect of
unfulfilled obligations it has assumed in exchange for assets.





  • Consideration
    receivable — Intangible asset or financial asset ?



This is one of the important accounting issues which has to
be dealt with by the operator for consideration received or receivable for the
performance of construction or upgrade services. This consideration received
or receivable shall have to be recognised at fair value. However, the
consideration may be rights to :

3 Financial Asset

3 Intangible Asset

Financial Asset :

The operator shall recognise a financial asset when it has an
unconditional right to receive cash or other financial asset from or at the
discretion of the grantor. The operator is said to have an unconditional right
when the grantor guarantees determinable amount or meets shortfall, if any,
between amounts received from users of public service and guaranteed
determinable amount even if the payment is contingent on the operator, ensuring
that the infrastructure meets specified quality or efficiency requirements (Para
16 of IFRIC 12).

The operator shall classify the financial asset either as a
loan or receivable, an available-for-sale financial asset or fair value through
profit and loss account (Para 24 and 25 of IFRIC 12). Generally, the entity
would classify the financial asset as a loan or receivable considering lesser
complexity involved and measure the same at amortised cost using effective
interest method in the profit or loss account.

Intangible Asset :

The operator shall recognise an intangible asset to the
extent it receives a right (a licence) to charge the users of public service.
The assets need to be recorded as per fair value of consideration receivable in
accordance with IAS 38 : Intangible Assets. The operator has a licence to charge
users of the public service and therefore meets the definition of an intangible
asset. In this case, the revenue is conditional and bears demand risk, unlike a
financial asset where operator is insulated from demand risk and guaranteed a
sum of money (Para 17 of IFRIC 12).

In case the operator is paid for construction services partly
by a financial asset and partly by an intangible asset, it will be necessary to
account for each separately and recognise the consideration received/receivable
at fair value. This situation may arise if the government partly finances the
project cost.




  • Resurfacing
    obligations :
    The operator’s resurfacing obligation arises as a consequence of use of the road during the operating phase. It is recognised and measured in accordance with IAS 37 : Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets i.e., at the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation at the end of the reporting period (Para IE 19 of IFRIC 12).


    •     Borrowing costs :


    The operator generally requires huge capital commitment and has recourse to debt funds for execution of infrastructure projects. IAS 23 : Borrowing Costs permits borrowing costs to be capitalised as part of cost of qualifying asset to the extent they are directly attributable to its acquisition, construction or production until the asset is ready for intended use or sale. The intangible asset meets the definition of qualifying asset as licence to charge public for use of infrastructure takes a substantial time for construction and up-gradation. A financial asset does not meet the definition of qualifying asset and hence the borrowing costs are not capitalised and the same are expensed as and when incurred (Para 22 of IFRIC 12).

    •     Amortisation of Intangible asset :


    The operator requires to account for an intangible asset in accordance with IAS 38 : Intangible Assets. IAS 38 provides for number of amortisation methods i.e., straight-line method, the diminishing balance method and the unit of production method. The method selected should reflect expected pattern of consumption of the expected future economic benefits embodied in the asset and the same should be applied consistently from period to period, unless there is a change in the expected pattern of consumption of those economic benefits.

        Disclosure norms :

    SIC-29 governs disclosure norms for operator companies and specifies appropriate disclosure that needs to be provided in the notes.

    All aspects of a service concession arrangement shall be considered in determining the appropriate disclosures in the notes. An operator and a grantor shall disclose the following in each period (Para 6 and 6A of SIC-29) :

    •     a description of the arrangement;
    •     significant terms of the arrangement that may affect the amount, timing and certainty of future cash flows (e.g., the period of the concession, re-pricing dates and the basis upon which re-pricing or re-negotiation is determined);


    •     the nature and extent (e.g., quantity, time period or amount as appropriate) of :


    •     rights to use specified assets;


    •     obligations to provide or rights to expect provision of services;


    •     obligations to acquire or build items of property, plant and equipment;


    •     obligations to deliver or rights to receive specified assets at the end of the concession period;


    •     renewal and termination options; and


    •     other rights and obligations (e.g., major overhauls);


    1.    changes in the arrangement occurring during the period; and

     2.   how the service arrangement has been classified.

     3.   An operator shall disclose the amount of revenue and profits or losses recognised in the period on exchanging construction services for a financial asset or an intangible asset.

    Relevant extract from published accounts : Illustrative Notes to Account from Consolidated Financials of Noida Toll Bridge Company Limited (NT-BCL) where they applied the interpretation of IFRIC 12 : Service Concession Arrangements for the year ended 2009. The Company has prepared their finan-cial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).

    Service Concession Arrangement entered into between X & Co, NTBCL and Grantor :
    A Concession Agreement entered into between the NTBCL, X & Co Limited and the New Okhla Industrial Development Authority, Government of Uttar Pradesh, conferred the right to the Company to implement the project and recover the project cost, through the levy of fees/toll revenue, with a designated rate of return over a period of 30 years concession period commencing from 30th December 1998 i.e., the date of Certificate of Commencement, or till such time the designated return is recovered, whichever is earlier. The Concession Agreement further provides that in the event the project cost with the designated return is not recovered at the end of 30 years, the concession period shall be extended by 2 years at a time until the project cost and the return thereon is recovered. The rate of return is computed with reference to the project costs, cost of major repairs and the shortfall in the recovery of the designated returns in earlier years. As per the certification by the independent auditors, the total recoverable amount comprises project cost and 20% designated return. NTBCL shall transfer the Project Assets to the New Okhla Industrial Development Authority in accordance with the Concession Agreement upon the full recovery of the total cost of project and the returns thereon.

    Revenue recognition — Operation services :                                                           Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the Group and the revenue can be reliably measured. Revenue comprises :

    Toll revenue :
    Toll revenue is recognised in respect of toll collect-ed at the Delhi-Noida Toll Bridge and the attributed share revenue from prepaid cards.

    Licence fee :
    Licence fee income from advertisement hoardings and office premises is recognised on an accruals basis in accordance with contractual obligations.

    Service charges :
    Service charges are recognised on accrual basis in respect of revenue recovered for the various business auxiliary services provided to the parties.

    Recognition of Concession Agreement as an Intangible Asset :

    Basis of accounting for the service concession :
    The Group has determined that IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangement is applicable to the Concession Agreement and hence has applied it in accounting for the concession.

    The directors have determined that the intangible asset model in IFRIC 12 Service Concession Arrangements is applicable to the concession. In particular, they note that users pay tolls directly so the grantor does not have the primary responsibility to pay the operator.

    In order to facilitate the recovery of the project cost and 20% designated returns through collection of toll and development rights, the grantor has guaranteed extensions to the terms of the Concession, initially set at 30 years.

    The Group has received an ‘in-principle’ approval for development rights from the grantor. However the Group has not yet entered into any agreement with the grantor which would constitute an assurance from the grantor to facilitate the recovery of shortfalls. Management recognises that the development right agreement when executed will give rise to intangible assets in their own right.

    Disclosures for Service Concession Arrangement as prescribed under SIC-29 Service Concession Ar-rangements — Disclosure have been incorporated into the financial statements.

    Significant assumptions in accounting for the intangible asset :

    On completion of construction of the Delhi -Noida Toll Bridge (6th February 2001), the rights under the Concession Agreement have been recognised as an intangible asset, received in exchange for the construction services provided. Construction costs include besides others, expenditure incurred and provisions for outstanding capital commitments on the Ashram Flyover, which was significantly completed on the date of recognition of the in-tangible asset. This section of the bridge was commissioned on 30th October 2001. The intangible asset received has been measured at fair value of the construction services as of Rs. 5,338,586,459 as on the date of commissioning. The Group has recognised a profit of Rs.1,548,095,840, which is the difference between the cost of construction services rendered (the cost of the project asset of Rs.3,790,490,619) and the fair value of the construction services.

    The Directors have concluded that as operators of the bridge, they have provided construction services to NOIDA, the grantor, in exchange for an intangible asset, i.e., the right to collect toll from road-users during the Concession year.

    Accordingly, the Group has measured the intangible asset at cost, i.e., the fair value of the construction services as at 6th February 2001, the date of completion of construction and commissioning of the asset.

    Key assumptions used in establishing the cost of the intangible asset are as follows :

    •     Construction of the DND Flyway commenced in 1998 and was completed on 6th February 2001. The exchange of construction services for an intangible asset is regarded as a trans-action that generates revenue and costs, which have been recognised by reference to the stage of completion of the construction. Contract revenue has been measured at the fair value of the consideration receivable. Hence in each of the years of construction, construction revenue has been calculated at cost plus 17.5% and the corresponding construction profit has been recognised through retained earnings.


    •     Management has capitalised qualifying finance expenses until the completion of construction.
    •     The intangible asset is assumed to be received only upon completion of construction. Until then, management has recognised a receivable for its construction services. The fair value of construction services have been estimated to be equal to the construction costs plus margin of 17.5% and the effective interest rate of 13.5% for lending by the grantor. The construction industry margins range between 15-20% and management has determined that a margin of 17.5% is both conservative and appropriate. The effective interest rate used on the receivable during construction is the normal interest rate which grantor would have paid on delayed payments.


    •     The intangible asset has been recognised on the completion of construction, i.e., 6th February 2001.
    •     The management considers that they will not be able to earn the designated return under the Concession Agreement over 30 years. The Company has an assured extension of the concession as required to achieve project cost and designated returns. An independent engineer had earlier certified the useful life of the Delhi- Noida Toll Bridge as 70 years. The intangible asset was being amortised over the same years on straight-line basis. Based on the independent professional experts’ advice obtained during the current year, the Company has reestimated the life of the bridge to be of 100 years. The method of amortization of the intangible asset has also been changed during the current year from straight-line to unit of usage method.

    Maintenance obligations :
    Contractual obligations to maintain, replace or restore the infrastructure (principally resurfacing costs and major repairs and unscheduled maintenance which are required to maintain the Bridge in operational condition except for any enhancement element) are recognised and measured at the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation at the balance sheet date. The provision is discounted to its present value at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. Development rights will be accounted for as and when exercised.

    Conclusion :
    Infrastructure companies were following different practices as regards accounting for service concession arrangements. However this interpretation will bring out uniformity in accounting practices to be followed by infrastructure companies. The key issues to be addressed are determination of fair value of consideration for construction services rendered, which requires proper valuation and income tax consequences.

The complementary nature of relationship between the legal profession and the CA profession in the past and the future 135

Article

I have stopped accepting invitations to give lecturers or
write papers. At the age of 76 and after a reasonably successful career, I can
possibly afford such a luxury. However, when Gautam Nayak, the Editor of the BCA
Journal asked me to write an article for the special issue of the Journal on the
occasion of the Diamond Jubilee of the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society, I
was tempted to accept the invitation, firstly being a fond reader of the
Journal, but really because of the subject on which I was asked to write.


During my long professional career spanning over five
decades, the nature of specialised work done by me has always brought me in
close contact with the accountancy profession, so much so that today I can claim
to have more personal friends in the accountancy profession as compared to the
legal profession. Possibly, this well-known fact has earned me the privilege of
being invited by the Society to write this article on the complementary nature
of relationship between the two professions in the past and in the future, as I
see it.

As G. P. Kapadia, who is acknowledged to be the father of the
CA profession in India, fondly put it, the legal profession and the CA
profession are sister professions which complement each other. I firmly believe
that neither can survive, exist or successfully practise without the active
help, support and co-operation of the other. Moreover, it is noticed that a
practising lawyer with accountancy qualifications or a practising chartered
accountant with legal qualifications has always been more successful as compared
to the others in the profession. The reasons are obvious.

Present scenario :

Presently, the sphere of work of CA firms has extended far
beyond the normal accounts, audit and taxation functions, and needs constant
legal inputs. Similarly, the work of law firms has increased as a result of
increasing mergers, acquisitions, trans-border transactions and complicated
financial structuring, needing constant support from CA firms. Consequently,
during the recent years CA firms and law firms have been working in closer
coordination with each other than ever before.

Both law and accountancy are venerable professions with old
and ingrained traditions. There are many similarities between the practice of
law and the practice of accountancy, particularly with respect to business and
corporate lawyers. Both accountants and lawyers play an integral role in the
smooth operation of trade, commerce and industry. Both are crucial to the
development and execution of the transactions that fuel industry and business
and thrive on reputation built after years of practice and expertise. On the
lighter side, both also have a relatively equal capacity to wreck havoc on the
financial sector in case they turn a blind eye to the fraudulent activities of a
client.

Dynamic changes in laws and the manner in which transactions
are entered into also play a vital role. Cross-border transactions have
necessitated the importance of international taxation and interpretation of
double taxation avoidance agreements/treaties. For such interpretation, lawyers
and accountants both have to advise their clients on the best way to solve any
problem, which may evolve during such transactions or better still, for carrying
out the most effective tax planning.

These days one sees at least three different trends in
working of a CA firm. Most of the CA firms have what is popularly known as ‘best
friend relationship’ with one or more law firms and all legal issues are dealt
with in consultation with lawyers. One also comes across CA firms who have
qualified legal personnel on their rolls or law firms who have qualified CAs
working for them. Though this is possible only at a junior level, it helps the
concerned firm to offer to its client services covering the other field. The
third trend which one notices these days (and which may in some cases prove
risky) is that even without qualified legal persons on its roll, some CA firms
offer extended services to the clients like purchase or sale of ownership
premises or drafting of documents like wills or trusts.

The scope of work of CA firms is no longer restricted to
accountancy, audit and taxation. Presently, CA firms render diverse other
services, which to some extent encroach legal field. No one can object to a CA
firm venturing to do legal work. However, it could lead to serious consequences
if CAs were to undertake drafting of complicated legal documents like wills or
trusts, which needs not just deep knowledge of law, but also expertise in
drafting, and which cannot be done merely by following precedents. The same
holds true also for lawyers who advise clients on complex taxation provisions
while drafting these complicated legal documents.

Recently, I came across a will containing some complicated
provisions, which was drafted by a senior Chartered Accountant. On the first
reading of the will, it was clear that the draftsman had followed some good
English precedent and used the normal legal terminology. However, on further
consideration I found some major flaws in drafting, which could have created
misunderstanding amongst the beneficiaries and possibly led to long-drawn
litigation. Luckily, the will was brought to me by the testator for
interpretation of some provisions and was suitably revised.

Future possibility :

In view of the current complementary nature in relationship
between two professions, future can only bring convergence.

Given the similarity and the interdependence between the two
professions, the need is for establishment of multidisciplinary firms so long as
separate firms are constituted for non-exclusive areas. In the context of
globalisation of services, establishment of firms formed by tie-up between
lawyers and chartered accountants would provide professionals from both the
professions a level playing field and strengthen the scope of services that can
be provided by them.

A major obstacle in the way of establishing such a multi-disciplinary firm is clause 2 of Chapter III Part IV of Bar Council of India Rules, 1975 which provides that, an advocate shall not enter into a partnership or any other arrangement for sharing remuneration with any person or legal practitioner who is not an advocate. The Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 provided similar regulation, which was later amended by the Chartered Accountants (Amendment) Act, 2006. The amended Act now makes an enabling provision permitting partnership with any person whose qualifications are recognised by the Central Government or the Council for purpose of permitting such partnership. Another hurdle to such establishment is S. 11 of the Companies Act, 1956, which restricts the maximum number of partners to twenty, which is to be done away with soon.

The future – as I see it – shows a distinct possibility of multidiscipline partnerships, with the necessary changes in the Chartered Accountants Act and the Advocates Act and blessings of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India and the Bar Council of India. One can visualise a partnership or LLP with top lawyers like Soli Dastur being in partnership with Y. H. Malegam or Bansi Mehta.

While some of the big international CA firms had tried to set up in-house legal cells, the experiment does not seem to have worked well so far. I do not see a day far when even multinational muitidiscipline partnerships (or LLPs) will enter the field. Imagine Deloittes or E&Ys of the world joining hands with AZBs or Amarchands of India to form a multidiscipline organisation. Whatever is said and done, one thing is certain that the two professions will always continue to have very close relationship, complementing and supplementing each other.

Is rotation of auditors an answer to Satyam episode

Background

    The question whether there should be a system of rotation of statutory auditors introduced to avoid repetition of Satyam episode has been raised in some quarters. In the past, the Government had tried to introduce this system by proposing amendments in the Companies Act on two occasions. However, these amendments could not be implemented as the Parliamentary Committees which examined these proposal rejected them in view of the strong protests from our members and the Institute. Investigations about the role of auditors in the Satyam episode are in progress. The reasons for the audit failure are not ascertained and, therefore, it would be premature to make this episode as illustrative. No definite conclusions can be drawn at this stage and it cannot be said that such episode will not be repeated if we introduce the system of rotation of statutory auditors through any legislation. It is reported that no developed country in the world has introduced this system.

Concept of rotation of statutory auditors

    The question of rotation of auditors has been considered in the past. In 1972, it was proposed to add clause (1B) in Section 224 of the Companies Act by the Companies (Amendment) Bill, 1972. This clause sought to introduce the concept of ‘rotation of auditors’. This was proposed with a view to bringing out disassociation of auditors from groups of companies, so that they may not have any temptation to shield shortcomings of the management from shareholders. It was also stated that this would achieve a more equitable distribution of audit work among younger members of the profession.

    There was lot of resistance from members when this proposal was sought to be introduced by amendment of the Companies Act. It was felt that such a proposal would put out of gear complete machinery in respect of audit of corporate sector by members of the accounting profession. It was also felt that this provision would not achieve the proposed objective. As a compromise, it was decided to represent to the Government that if ceiling on audits per member/partner is fixed, it would achieve the objective of wider dispersal of audit.

    The Joint Committee of Parliament appreciated the submissions made by the Institute. The Joint Committee took the view that a ceiling on audits would sufficiently serve to break the evil of continued association of auditors with groups of companies. It was decided to fix the ceiling at 20 as such groups generally consisted of more than 20 companies. It was also decided that out of these 20 companies, not more than ten companies should be having paid-up share capital of Rs.25 lacs or more. In the case of a firm of auditors the ceiling applied was on the basis of each partner in whole-time practice. On the above basis, the Companies (Amendment) Act, 1974, amended Section 224 of the Companies Act to provide for ceiling on company audits on the above basis.

Companies Bill, 1997

    The above provision worked with satisfaction for more than 20 years. Even in the Companies Bill, 1993 the concept of ceiling on audits was accepted. However, the Companies Bill, 1997 once again proposed to provide rotation of auditors in clause 180 (2). Under this clause, it was proposed to increase the ceiling on audits to 25 companies and also provide for rotation of auditors in such a manner that no company would be able to appoint or reappoint an auditor for more than five consecutive years.

    The Council of our Institute strongly opposed the concept of rotation of audit when the above Bill was under consideration. After an in-depth consideration of the matter at various forums in the profession all over the country, the Council came to the conclusion that the proposal relating to rotation of auditors was neither in the interest of the shareholders nor would it lead to better corporate governance and, therefore, it was not in the national interest. The Council, therefore, suggested dropping of the proposal on the following grounds.

    “The legislation in almost all developed countries does not contain any provision regarding rotation of auditors. On the contrary, the concept is that the position of the auditors should be strengthened and the option of the management to change them should be limited to the very minimum. This seems to be the concept behind the spirit of various provisions of the Companies Act in India, which provide for certain special proceedings if an auditor is to be removed or he is not to be reappointed at a general meeting.

    “The system of rotation can be evaded easily and will only result in practices like tie-up arrangements between auditing firms and splitting of existing firms. It would indeed be impossible to implement it in a manner that its perceived advantages are realised.

    “Rotation does not improve the independence of auditors. This is because the management plays one auditor against the other. It considerably reduces the chance of a strict and upright auditor to be appointed after his term, since the management (having been exposed to different auditors) would tend to opt for the ones who are considered more convenient.

    “Rotation of auditors will inevitably result in higher cost since new auditors will have to spend extra time in familiarising themselves with the nuances of the activities of a company. As a matter of fact, research has shown that modern business operations are becoming so complex that an auditor takes at least two years to really understand the intricacies of the input-output relationships and the economic realities behind the financial transactions. It is well known that audit failures are more in the first or second year of an audit. In more advanced countries, certain audit firms have actually developed special expertise in specific industries. The quality of audit will therefore definitely suffer if there is rotation of auditors.

    “The Council of the Institute is fully supportive of all initiatives meant to enhance the independence of the auditors. It genuinely believes that rotation of auditors will be a retrograde step unlike some of other initiatives in the Companies Bill, 1997, e.g. tightening up of provisions regarding disqualification of auditors and constitution of audit committees. The Council has in fact been constantly debating and enforcing a number of steps to improve the qualify of audit. A few initiatives being taken by the Council are (a) working out a system of peer reviews, (b) enforcing audit standards more stringently, and (c) ensuring that an auditor does not have interest in the organisation under audit.

The above Bill was referred to the Parliamentary Standing Committee for its consideration. In its report dated 27th July, 2000, the Committee has considered the suggestions received from the Institute and others and recommended that clause 180 (2) of the above Bill, relating to rotation of auditors, for giving stability to the appointment of auditors, be dropped.

That Committee, has, however, accepted the alternative suggestion made by the Institute that the system of appointment of joint auditors be introduced. The Committee has observed that with the acceptance of this suggestion, the effect will be that the Companies Act will be introducing, for the first time, the concept of joint auditors, which is prevailing in some of the advanced countries. This will ensure that the continuity in audit is not broken. It may be noted that the Companies Bill, 1997, ultimately lapsed and could not be passed.

Naresh  Chandra Committee  report

The Government of India appointed a Committee under the Chairmanship of Shri Naresh Chandra in August, 2002 to examine various issues relating to Corporate Governance. One of the. terms of reference related to examination of measures required to ensure that managements and auditors actually present a true and fair statement of affairs of companies. The whole effort of the Government was to improve corporate functioning and to improve corporate financial reporting. The Committee submitted its report in November, 2002. Besides considering the corporate governance issues, the Committee also considered the issues relating to statutory auditor – company relationship, steps to be taken to preserve independence of auditors, rotation of auditors, measures to improve corporate financial reporting, composition of board of directors, role of independent directors, strengthening the statutory provisions governing Chartered Accountants and other related matters.

On the question  of good corporate  governance,  the Committee observed that two corporate instruments that improve corporate governance are financial and non-financial disclosures and (ii) independent oversight of management. It was observed that independent oversight of management comprises two aspects. The first relates to the role of independent statutory auditors and the second relates to the role of independent directors.

The Committee observed that shareholders appoint auditors who are required to report whether the audited financial statements present a ‘true and fair’ view of the financial health of the auditee. Therefore, the quality and independence of
statutory auditors was fundamental to corporate oversight. While it was the job of the management to prepare the accounts, it was the responsibility of the statutory auditors to scrutinise the same and give an independent report on the same. Auditors have the skills to scrutinise complex accounts of today’s multi-divisional and multi-segmental corporations, but these skills will come to naught if the auditing firm did not have a strict arm’s length independent relationship with the management of the corporate body.

In order that auditors are able to preserve their independence, the Committee suggested that auditors should maintain arm’s length relationship with the management. The suggestions of the committee that the auditor should not (i) have financial interest in audit client, (ii) have business or personal relationship with the audit client, (iii) have undue dependence on the audit client, (iv) accept loans or guarantees from audit client, (v) have key management position within two years prior to his appointment and (vi) render certain non-audit services, were incorporated in the Companies Amendment Bill, 2003. Unfortunately, this Bill could not be passed by the Parliament.

The Committee considered the question of rotation of auditors and after detailed discussion with various bodies, came to the conclusion that there was no need to provide for rotation of auditors. It was stated that the Committee had not found sufficient international evidence favouring compulsory rotation of audit firms. Various independent accounting studies made available to the Committee indicated no discernible benefit from rotation. In fact, these studies universally indicated the opposite – that rotation tends to enhance the risk of audit ‘failures in the last year of the tenure of the outgoing auditor and the first two years of the new auditor. Even in the USA the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, 2002 (SOX Act) does not provide for rotation of auditors.

Given the international practice, the Naresh Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal, May 2009 Chandra Committee observed that there was no conclusive proof of the gains while there was sufficient evidence of the risks if the concept of rotation of auditors was accepted. However, the Committee was in favour of compulsory rotation of audit partners as provided in SOX Act in the USA.

According to the Committee, the partners and at least 50% of the engagement team (excluding the articled clerks and trainees) responsible for the audit of either listed companies or companies whose paid up capital and free reserves exceed Rs.10 Crores, or companies whose turnover exceeds Rs.50 crores, should be rotated every five years. Persons who are rotated in this manner can be allowed to return, if need be, after a break-up of three years.

Having emphasised the need for keeping arm’s length relationship with the management, the Committee considered the vexed question of who will audit the auditors? It is true, the auditor performs a critical role in informing the shareholders of the true and fair picture of the state of financial and operational affairs of a company. However, the ability to play this role will depend on the auditor’s knowledge, skills, independence, professional skepticism and integrity. For this purpose, there is a great need to regulate auditors effectively to ensure that they properly discharge their fiduciary responsibilities.

In India the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has been set up under the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 to examine and regulate the profession of Chartered Accountancy. The ICAI has set up a system of Peer Review of audit firms. The Committee considered the Peer Review Statement issued by ICAI and observed that this system was indeed a good one. However, the Committee felt that it was time to think of a very indigenous and refined arrangement to ensure the quality of attestation services performed by Chartered Accountants in relation to the technical standards prescribed for them. Although the Committee was satisfied with the above peer review statement which was a self-contained document and which addressed most of the issues regarding ‘who audits the auditors’, the Committee recommended establishment of a ‘Quality Review Board’ as an independent body outside the Council of the Institute. It may be noted that under Sections 28 A to 28 D of the Chartered Accountants Act, as amended in 2006, a Quality Review Board consisting of 5 members nominated by the Government and 5 members nominated by the Council of ICAI has been appointed.

The Companies Bill, 2008


The Companies Bill, 2008, has been introduced in the Lok Sabha on 23.10.2008 to replace the existing Companies Act, 1956. There is no proposal about rotation of statutory auditors in the Bill. However, some of the provisions are proposed to ensure that the independence of statutory auditors is not impaired. In brief, these provisions are as under:

“Special Resolution will be required if an auditor other than retiring auditor is proposed to be appointed.

“An auditor who has direct financial interest in the company or who receives any loans or guarantee from the company or who has any business relationship (other than an auditor) with the company cannot be appointed as auditor.

“A person whose relative is in employment of the company as a director or Key managerial personnel cannot be appointed as auditor.

“If a firm is appointed as auditors, only the partner of the firm, as authorised by the firm, can sign the audit report on behalf of the firm.

“An auditor cannot accept any other assignment from the company like accounting, book keeping, internal audit, design and implementation of any financial information system, actuarial services, investment advisory services, investment banking services, financial services and management services.

“Audit report shall state whether the financial statements comply with the accounting standards and auditing standards. It may be noted that the National Advisory Committee appointed by the Government will now be required to advise the Government about Accounting Standards as well as Auditing Standards. In other words, the auditors will have to comply with Auditing Standards laid down by the Government on the advice of the National Advisory Committee.

“Auditor shall have a right to attend every Annual General Meeting and shall have a right to be heard at such meeting on any part of the business conducted at the meeting.

“If the auditor makes default in complying with the provisions relating to reporting on the financial statements, provisions prohibiting rendering on other services, and allowing any person other than an authorised person to sign audit report, he shall be liable to pay fine of Rs.25,000 which may extend to Rs.5 lacs. If it is found that the auditor has knowingly or willfully contravened any of the above provisions, he shall be punishable with impairment for a term up to one year or with fine of Rs.1 lac which may extend to Rs.25 lacs or with both. It is also provided that in such cases, the auditor will have to refund the fees and also pay for damages to the company or to any other persons for loss arising out of incorrect or misleading statements of particulars made in the audit report.”

From the above provisions proposed in the Companies Bill, 2008, it will be noticed that these provisions are more stringent and are being introduced with a view to achieve the goal to improve/ strengthen the independence of statutory auditors and quality of audit. It must be recognised that the Government is keen to ensure that the independence of statutory auditors is not affected by any weakness in the corporate governance.

To sum up


Our Institute is a regulatory body and its function is to regulate training of articled trainees, conduct examinations, regulate and develop the profession. All our members are taught the importance of independence, integrity, objectivity, confidentiality, technical standards, professional behaviour and technical competence. Therefore, there is a strong presumption that our members are independent and will not succumb to any pressure. One of the reasons advanced in favour of rotation of statutory auditors is that statutory auditors will tend to lose their independence if they are associated with a particular company in that capacity for a long duration. There is no reason to doubt the competence of the Council of ICAI to ensure the virtues of independence, integrity, objectivity, etc. in the members of our profession. If a person qualifies our examination after completing the practical training without imbibing the above virtues, the Council should consider some other measures to improve the quality of education and training. If a member is independent by virtue of his training and qualification in the first three or five years of audit assignment of a company, he will always remain independent irrespective of his continued association with that company. If he has not imbibed the virtues of independence, integrity, etc. during his education and training period, he cannot remain independent even in the first year of his audit assignment even if rotation of statutory auditors is made mandatory.

Another probable argument by those who favour rotation of statutory auditors is that the younger members will get audits of large companies. This argument is also not valid, because the Institute’s representation before the Parliamentary Committee which was considering this amendment proposed in the Companies Bill, 1997, clearly states “the system of rotation can be evaded easily and will only result in practices like tie-up arrangements between auditing firms and splitting of existing firms”. The Institute has also observed in the above representation that “rotation does not improve the independence of auditors”. As stated above, several reasons are given by the Institute and it is possible that our members may adopt unethical means to secure assignments if compulsory rotation is introduced.

Our Institute has grown from strength to strength over 60 years. The reforms introduced in the field of education, training, CPE Programmes, Quality Review process, etc. have moulded our members to withstand pressures from outside. Therefore, the thinking that independence of members will be affected while discharging the attest function because of a long association with a particular client is not all justified.

From the above discussion it becomes evident that rotation of statutory auditors is not an answer to ensure independence of auditors and quality of audits. The steps taken to strengthen the education and training, ceiling on number of audits per partner, CPE Programmes, Peer Review, etc. are adequate at present. Further, the system of putting additional responsibilities on audit committee and independent directors will go a long way in ensuring independence of auditors and improving corporate governance. As suggested by various committees as well as the Council of the Institute, the system of joint auditors, rotation of partners and audit team of the audit firm can definitely improve the present position. It is also possible to introduce a system by which each audit firm should declare, while accepting the audit, as to under which partner the audit assignment is accepted. An audit firm cannot accept more than the specified number of audits per partner as permitted by the Companies Act. The audit firm should ensure that the audit report is signed only by that partner under whom the audit is accepted. In exceptional cases the audit firm can be allowed to make a change and assign the audit to another partner, subject to the specified number, after making disclosure for the same. In this manner it can be ensured that the system of appointing ‘Signing Partners’, which is in vogue in certain audit firms, at present, will be abolished. This system will ensure that each practising member of the Institute undertakes audit assignment of such number of audits, per partner, as permitted by the provisions of the Companies Act. This will improve the quality of audit.

Disallowances u/s.14A of Income-tax Act

Article

1. Background :


1.1 S. 14A has been inserted in Chapter IV of the Income tax
Act by the Finance Act, 2001, with retrospective effect from 1-4-1962. This
Section provides for disallowance of expenditure incurred in relation to income
which is not included in the total income of the assessee (i.e. exempt
income). The operative part of this Section reads as under :

“For the purposes of computing the total income under this
chapter, no deduction shall be allowed in respect of expenditure incurred by
the assessee in relation to income which does not form part of the total
income under this Act.”

1.2 Proviso to the Section was added by the Finance Act, 2002
w.e.f. 11-5-2001. It provides that the A.O. cannot reopen the assessment u/s.147
for any assessment year prior to A.Y. 2001-02 for this purpose or pass any
rectification order u/s.154 for prior years to disallow any such expenditure.

1.3 In the case of CIT v. Indian Bank Ltd., (56 ITR
77), Supreme Court had decided in 1964 that the condition for deductibility of
an expenditure does not depend upon its quality of directly or indirectly
producing taxable income and, therefore, there was no warrant for disallowing a
proportionate part of the interest referable to moneys borrowed for the purchase
of tax free securities. This principle was reiterated in the case of CIT v.
Maharashtra Sugar Mills Ltd.,
(82 ITR 452). In this case it was held that no
part of managing agency commission can be disallowed on the ground that it
partly relates to managing sugarcane cultivation, the income from which was
exempt from tax. Again, in the case of Rajasthan State Warehousing
Corporation v. CIT,
(242 ITR 450) the above principle was once again
reiterated by the Supreme Court. In this case, it was held that if business is
one and indivisible, the expenditure cannot be apportioned and disallowed to the
extent it may relate to income which is exempt from income tax.

1.4 It may be noted that the explanatory memorandum issued
with the Finance Bill, 2001, gives the purpose for which the amendment is made.
This reads as under :

“Certain incomes are not includible while computing the
total income as these are exempt under various provisions of the Act. There
have been cases where deductions have been claimed in respect of such exempt
income. This in effect means that the tax incentive given by way of exemptions
to certain categories of income is being used to reduce also the tax payable
on the non-exempt income by debiting the expenses incurred to earn the exempt
income against taxable income. This is against the basic principles of
taxation whereby only the net income, i.e., gross income minus the
expenditure, is taxed. On the analogy, the exemption is also in respect of the
net income. Expenses incurred can be allowed only to the extent they are
relatable to the earning of taxable income.

It is proposed to insert a new S. 14A so as to clarify the
intention of the legislature since the inception of the Income-tax Act, 1961,
that no deduction shall be made in respect of any expenditure incurred by the
assessee in relation to income which does not form part of the total income
under the Income-tax Act.”


1.5 From the above, it appears that only direct expenses
incurred for earning the income which is exempt will be covered by S. 14A. Even
in the decisions of the Supreme Court referred to above there is nothing to
infer that direct expenses incurred for earning exempt income is allowable.
Therefore, even in the absence of a provision contained in the new S. 14A law
was well settled. There is nothing in this Section to suggest that indirect
expenses will be disallowed.

1.6 In actual implementation of this provision, the
Income-tax Department has been taking the view that all items of income
(including dividend on shares and units of Mutual Funds etc. on which Dividend
Distribution Tax is paid) stated in S. 10 of the Income-tax Act are governed by
S. 14A. The intention of this legislation was to disallow only direct expenses
incurred for earning exempt income. In almost all cases even indirect expenses
are also being disallowed on proportionate basis. In order to ensure uniform
approach, S. 14A was amended by the Finance Act, 2006, w.e.f. 1-4-2007 (A.Y.
2007-08). By this amendment Ss.(2) and Ss.(3) were added in S. 14A to provide
that AO shall determine the amount of expenditure incurred in relation to the
exempt income in accordance with such method as may be prescribed by Rules. The
reasons for making this amendment in S. 14A are explained in Paras 11.1 to 11.3
of CBDT Circular No. 14/2006 of 28-12-2006.

2. New Rule 8D :


2.1 In exercise of the powers given in S. 14A(2) C.B.D.T. has
issued a Notification No. S.O. 547(E) on 24-3-2008 (299 ITR (ST) 88). This
notification amends the Income-tax Rules by insertion of a new Rule 8D providing
for a “Method for determining amount of expenditure in relation to income not
includible in total income”. Reading this Rule it is evident that the Rule
provides for disallowance of not only direct expenditure incurred for earning
the exempt income but also for disallowance of proportionate indirect
expenditure. This is clearly contrary to the main objective with which S. 14A
was enacted.

2.2 Broadly stated, the new Rule 8D provides as under :

(i) The method prescribed in the Rule is to be applied only if the AO is not satisfied with :

(a) The correctness of the claim of expenditure incurred for earning the exempt income made by the assessee or

(b) The claim made by the assessee that no expenditure has been incurred for earning exempt income.

(ii) The method prescribed in the Rule states that the expenditure in relation to income which does not form part of the total income shall be the aggregate of the following amounts :

(a) The amount of expenditure directly relating to income which does not form part of total income.

(b)In the case of interest on borrowed funds which is not directly attributable to any particular income or receipt, the amount computed in accordance with this following formula:

A*B/C

A = Amount of interest, other than the amount of interest which is directly attributable to the exempt income stated in (a) above.

B = The average of value of investment, income from which does not or shall not form part of the total income, as appearing in the balance sheet of the assessee, on the first day and the last day of the relevant accounting year.

C = The average of total assets as appearing in the balance sheet of the assessee, on the first day and the last day of the relevant accounting year. The term ‘Total Assets’ means total assets as appearing in the balance sheet excluding the increase on account of revaluation of assets but including the decrease on account of revaluation
of assets.

c) An amount equal to 1h % of the average of the value of investment, income from which does not or shall not form part of the total income, as appearing in the balance sheet of the assessee, on the first day and the last day of the relevant accounting year.

2.3 From the above Rule, it will be noticed that CBDT has, instead of prescribing a simple method, prescribed a complicated formula. By applying this formula, in most cases, expenditure which has no connection with earning the exempt income will get disallowed. Some of the issues relating to this New Rule require consideration:

    i) As stated in para 2.2(ii)(b) above, interest which is directly attributed to borrowed funds used for the purpose of earning taxable income or receipts will not be considered for disallowahce of proportionate interest u/s.14 A. Therefore, interest on term loan taken for purchase of Plant & Machinery, Motor car loan, amount borrowed for acquiring factory or office building or any other business asset will not be considered for such disallowance.

    ii) It is not mentioned that interest which is disallowable u/s.43B or u/s.36(1)(iii) will also be excluded. But it can be assumed that only such expenditure, which is otherwise allowable in the computation of total income, will be considered for disallowance u/s.14A.

    iii) In the above formula in para 2.2(ii)(b) above while explaining the terms ‘B’ and ‘C’ there is a reference to the average value of investments and total assets as per the Balance Sheet of the assessee. It is not clear as to what figures shall be adopted in the cases of non-corporate assessees, such as Individuals and HUFs who do no maintain books of accounts.

    iv) In explanation to the term ’12’ it is stated that for considering average value of Investments, we have to consider “Investment, income from which does not or shall not form part of the total income”. This will mean that even if there is no income from some or all of the investments, the average value of these investments will enter the formula for disallowance of proportionate interest. This will mean that in some cases where there is no income from such investments and no exemption from tax is claimed on any income, proportionate interest will be disallowed. In some cases, if income from some investments is say only Rs.1lac on which exemption is claimed, but disallowance of proportionate interest under the formula may work out to Rs.2 lacs.

v) While explaining the term ‘C’ it is stated that average of Total Assets as per Balance sheet should be taken. It can be assumed that items like (a) Preliminary Expenses not written off, (b) Deferred Revenue expenses, (c) Deferred Tax Assets, (d) Debit Balance of Profit & Loss AI c. etc., which do not represent any tangible or intangible asset, appearing in the Balance sheet of the assessee will be excluded from Total Assets.

    vi) Similarly, current liabilities which are to be deducted from current assets in the case of the company can be added while working out the amount of Total Assets.

    vii) The formula given in para 2.2.(ii)(c) above, states that amount equal to 1/2% of the average value of investments, income from which is exempt from tax, should also be disallowed ul s.14A. This provision is not at all equitable. Such disallowance is to be made with reference to average value of such investments from which exempt income is received or not. This disallowance has no relation to either the exempt income or to the expenditure claimed by the assessee. In many cases the amount worked out may exceed the exempt income or may exceed even the total expenditure (for taxable as well as exempt income) incurred by the assessee. If we take the illustration of a closely held Investment company it is common knowledge that the administrative expenses are nominal as compared to the value of the investments. In such cases, the amount to be disallowed under the formula will far exceed the total expenses. It is suggested that a very strong representation should be made for deletion of this part of the New Rule. In any event, it should be represented that the total disallowance under the formula should not exceed 5% of the income for which exemption is claimed.

 The validity of the New Rule 8D can be challenged on the ground that S. 14A authorises CBDT to prescribe the method for determination of expenditure incurred in relation earning the exempt income, but the method prescribed by this Rule only determines the notional cost for holding investments which mayor may not yield an exempt income. Such notional cost for holding the investment has no relationship with the actual expenditure incurred and claimed by the assessee. There-fore, the New Rule goes beyond the authority given to CBDT by S. 14A

2.4 As stated earlier, the above amendment giving power to CBDT to prescribe the method for determination of expenditure to be disallowed u/ s.14A was made by the Finance Act, 2006 w.e.f. AY. 2007-08. Therefore, the above method, as now pre-scribed by New Rule 8D, should apply to computation of income for AY. 2007-08 and onwards. However, there are certain judicial pronouncements which suggest that amendment made in S. 14A(2) and (3) made by Finance Act, 2006, is a procedural provision and, therefore, the method for computation of disallowable expenditure, whenever pre-scribed, will be applicable to all pending assessments for earlier years also. Reference in this connection  may be made  to the following  decisions:

(i) ACIT v. Citicorp Finance (India) Ltd., 108 ITD 457 (Mum.)

(ii) Kalpataru Construction Overseas (P) Ltd. v. DCIT, 13 SOT 194 (Mum.)

(iii) DCIT v. Seksaria Biswar Sugar Factory Ltd., 14 SOT 66 (Mum.)

(iv) Prakash Heat Treatment & Industries (P) Ltd. v. ITO, 14 SOT 348 (Mum.)

(v) DCIT v. Smita Conductors Ltd., 16 SOT 251 (Mum.)

(vi) Narotamdas Bhau v. ACIT,  15 SOT 629 (Mum.)

(vii) Conwood Agencies (P) Ltd. v. ITO, 15 SOT 308 (Mum.)

Contrary view has been taken in the case of Vidyut Investments Ltd. v. ITO, 10 SOT 284 (Delhi) where it is held that S. 14A(2) and (3) will only apply w.e.f. AY. 2007-08 and onwards.

Liability of Partners of Limited Liability Partnerships — is it Limited ?

Article

1. The Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008 (‘the LLP
Act’) was brought into force with effect from 31st March 2009 to permit
formation of Limited Liability Partnerships (‘LLPs’) in India. The main focus of
the LLP Act is to permit a partnership structure and at the same time, limit the
liability of partners which was heretofore unlimited under the provisions of the
Indian Partnership Act, 1932 (‘the Partnership Act’). This article discusses
briefly the limitation of liability of partners under the LLP Act as compared to
the limitation of liability of a shareholder of a limited company formed and
registered under the Companies Act, 1956 (‘the Companies Act’) and the manner in
which such liabilities are limited under the LLP Act.

2. A company formed and registered under the Companies Act is
a separate legal entity distinct from its shareholders and directors. The extent
to which the liability of shareholders of a limited company, formed and
registered under the Companies Act, towards the debts of such a company is
limited, is contained in the Memorandum of Association thereof. Accordingly, if
a company is limited by shares, a shareholder is not required to make any
contributions for the satisfaction of the debts of the company of any amount
over and above the amounts remaining due and payable on the shares held by him.
Such amount may be called up by the board of directors of the company in the
course of the day-to-day operations of the company or in the event of winding up
thereof, as the case may be. Where a company is limited by guarantee, a
shareholder is, upon a winding-up thereof, required to contribute the amounts
specified in the Memorandum of Association thereof for satisfaction of the debts
of such a company limited by guarantee. S. 426 of the Companies Act clearly sets
out the aforesaid position.

3. We now examine the provisions of the LLP Act in relation
to limitation of liability of the partners of an LLP. The LLP Act does not
specifically provide the manner in which liabilities of the partner would be
limited. However, the same can be deduced from several provisions of the LLP Act
as set out hereinafter.

4. S. 3 of the LLP Act, inter alia, provides that an
LLP is a body corporate separate from its partners, unlike a partnership firm
constituted under the Partnership Act, which has no separate legal existence. S.
4 of the LLP Act, inter alia, provides that the provisions of the
Partnership Act would not apply to an LLP. Ss.(3) and (4) of S. 27 of the LLP
Act, inter alia, provide that an obligation of the LLP whether arising
out of contract or otherwise is solely the obligation of such LLP and the
liabilities of such LLP are to be met out of the property of the LLP. Ss.(1) of
S. 28 of the LLP Act provides that a partner is not personally liable for any
obligation of an LLP solely by reason of being a partner thereof. Ss.(2) of the
said S. 28, inter alia, provides that such partner would be personally
liable for wrongful acts or omissions committed by him, but not those committed
by any other partner of the LLP. Therefore, in terms of the aforesaid provisions
of the LLP Act, a partner of an LLP is not personally liable for the obligations
of such LLP, except those arising as a result of his own wrongful acts or
omissions.

5. However, unlike the Companies Act, the aforesaid
provisions do not specifically indicate the circumstances and extent to which
any partner would be required to make contributions to the LLP. The provisions
in relation to such contributions are contained in S. 32 and S. 33 of the LLP
Act.

6. Ss.(1) of S. 32 of the LLP Act, inter alia,
provides that a partner may make contributions to the LLP in the form of
tangible or intangible property, money, promissory notes and the like. Ss.(2) of
S. 32 of the LLP Act, inter alia, provides that the monetary value of the
contribution of each partner is required to be accounted for and disclosed in
the manner prescribed. Rule 23 (1) of the Limited Liability Partnership Rules,
2009 (‘the Rules’), inter alia, provides that the contribution of such
partner is required to be accounted for and disclosed in the accounts of the LLP
along with the nature of contribution and amounts.

7. Ss.(1) of S. 33 of the LLP Act, inter alia,
provides that the obligation of a partner to contribute money or other property
or to perform services for an LLP is governed by the provisions of the limited
liability partnership agreement (‘the LLP Agreement’) executed between the
partners. The said provisions are broad enough to enable contractual
restrictions to be placed on the obligation of a partner to make contributions,
whether on incorporation of the LLP or dissolution thereof or at any time during
the continuance thereof. Therefore, generally speaking the LLP Agreement may
provide that a particular partner is required to contribute certain amounts upon
execution of the LLP Agreement or in the usual course of its business or for
that matter perform services in the course of the business of the LLP, but is
not required to contribute any amounts upon the winding-up thereof. The LLP
Agreement may also provide that a partner is bound to contribute certain sum
only upon winding-up thereof and not otherwise. The aforesaid clauses could, in
ordinary circumstances, be regarded as sufficient to restrict the liability of a
partner.

8. However, the LLP Act does not itself provide for the
circumstances in which the obligations of the LLP can be enforced against the
partners thereof and we need to consider as to whether provisions such as the
aforesaid are sufficient to protect the interests of a partner of the LLP
against any personal liabilities. We therefore examine the provisions of the LLP
Act which define the circumstances in which an obligation of a partner under the
LLP Agreement can be enforced.

9. It is obvious that an obligation in the LLP Agreement can be enforced against a partner by other partners being parties thereto. In addition thereto, Ss.(2) of S. 33 of the LLP Act, inter alia, provides that a creditor of the LLP which extends credit to or acts on an obligation described in the LLP Agreement may enforce the original obligation against such partner. The said Ss.(2) of S. 33 does not restrict the aforesaid right of the creditor to a circumstance in which the LLP is ordered to be wound-up, but appears to extend such right to the creditor in all circumstances. Therefore, an obligation of a partner to contribute any sum to the LLP can be enforced by a third party against such partner at any point of time and is not limited to the event of winding-up as in case of a company formed and registered under the Companies Act. Similarly, in case a partner has agreed to contribute any service to the customer or clients of the LLP, such an obligation may be enforced by the customer or client of the LLP against the particular partner of the LLP. Ss.(4) of S. 24 of the LLP Act in fact provides that the liability of a partner of the LLP to such LLP or its other partners or to third parties would not cease merely by virtue of his ceasing to be a partner of the LLP. Also, questions may arise as regards the contribution made by a partner at the time of setting-up of the LLP, which contributions are eventually refunded to the partner on account of profits made by the LLP. In such a case, it is necessary to consider as to whether the partner would be obliged to once again bring in such contributions in future, which have been refunded upon the LLP having made profits. All these aspects would have to be taken into account while drafting the LLP Agreement which may differ on a case-to-case basis.

10. To summarise the issue, the LLP Act is a very complicated piece of legislation. The LLP Agreement may need to take care of a large number of issues for protection of its members. Moreover, unlike companies formed and registered under the Companies Act, the LLP Act and the Rules do not prescribe the manner in which the liability of a partner of an LLP is limited. It is’ advisable and essential therefore that the LLP Agreement is carefully drafted by an experienced person so that the same contains all necessary provisions as per the LLP Act, so as to ensure that the liability of a partner thereof to make contributions to an LLP does not extend be-yond what is envisaged and the LLP remains as such in law and in spirit.

Accounting for financial instruments and derivatives — Part I

Article

Background :


Accounting Standards (AS) 30 and 31 have been issued by our
Institute and will come into effect from April 1, 2011 with early adoption being
recommendatory. AS-30 deals with recognition and measurement of financial
instruments (including derivatives). AS-31 deals with presentation aspects and,
in particular, with distinction between liabilities and equity. This distinction
can be complex where corporates issue instruments like convertible debentures
and foreign currency convertible bonds, which carry features of both debt and
equity. AS-32 deals with disclosures. Small and medium entities are exempted
from these Standards.

Chartered Accountants are likely to find these Standards
challenging in view of the sheer size (336 pages in all) and complexity of the
content as well as, in many cases, lack of exposure to the domain of derivatives
and complex instruments. The Barclays Bank Annual Report of 2007 is a 150+ page
document, more than one thirds of which is devoted to disclosures required under
the equivalent of AS-32 in the IFRS framework.

These three Articles propose to de-mystify the accounting of
key aspects of these important Standards.

Overview of AS-30 :

Financial engineering and innovation are increasingly making
inroads into the lives of common people. The annual GDP of the world is
estimated by experts to be in the region of $ 50 bio, while derivative open
positions are estimated to be more than $ 500 bio. Thus, the derivative world is
much larger than the ‘real’ world of real goods and real services.

Our own equity derivatives market daily turnover in Jan. 2008
was Rs.1 lakh crores per day as against an equity market turnover of Rs.25,000
crores (at that time). In a short span of less than 8 years, the derivative
market has grown to four times the underlying equity market. While on the one
hand, this proliferation of derivatives has created huge crises in the world,
including the subprime crisis, on the other hand, it has created huge challenges
for the accounting community which in many situations does not comprehend the
implications of such instruments on risk, on potential earnings, on actual
reported earnings and on recognition of assets or liabilities as a result of
such exposures.

AS-30 provides guidance on classification, initial
measurement, subsequent measurement and de-recognition of financial assets,
financial liabilities, derivatives and hedge accounting. Impairment of financial
assets, securitisation and guidance on fair valuation are also covered in AS-30.
Hedge accounting is a complex and vast area of literature covering fair value
hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges of net investment in foreign operations.

Financial instruments and key definitions :

A financial instrument is a contract that gives rise to a
financial asset for one entity and a financial liability or equity for the
other. A financial asset is :



  • cash



  •  equity instrument of another entity



  • a contractual right to receive cash or other financial asset from another
    entity



  •  a contractual right to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with
    another entity under conditions that are potentially favourable to the entity



  • certain contracts that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity
    instruments.



A financial liability is :



  • a contractual obligation to deliver cash or other financial asset to another
    entity



  • a contractual obligation to exchange financial assets or liabilities with
    another entity on conditions that are potentially unfavourable to the entity



  •  certain contracts that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity
    instruments.



Common examples of financial assets and liabilities :

Common examples of financial assets and liabilities are cash
and bank balances, accounts receivable and payable, bills receivable and
payable, loans receivable and payable, bonds receivable and payable, deposits
and advances. Contingent rights and obligations like in the case of financial
guarantees are financial assets or liabilities, notwithstanding the fact that
they may not be recognised on the balance sheet.

Finance lease receivables and payables are financial assets
or liabilities as these are blended amounts comprising principal and interest on
the lease. An operating lease contract does not represent financial assets or
liabilities as the contracted amount is indicative of future services to be
provided by the lessor. The amount already due to be received or paid under an
operating lease is a financial asset or liability.

Prepaid expenses, deferred revenues and warranty obligations
are not financial assets or liabilities as they represent the right to receive
goods or services and not cash. Income taxes and deferred taxes are not
financial assets or liabilities as they are not contractual obligations but
statutory obligations.

Initial measurement:

All financial assets and liabilities are required to be recognised at fair value at initial recognition. For financial assets and liabilities which are classified as at fair value through P&L, transaction costs are charged to P&L at the point of initial recognition itself. For other financial assets and liabilities, the carrying value at initial recognition includes transaction costs (which are added to or deducted from fair value as the case may be).

Example – if an entity buys equity shares of L&T for Rs. 1,500 and incurs brokerage and other transaction costs of Rs. 2, the carrying value of these shares will be Rs. 1,500 if these are classified as ‘fair value through P&L’ and Rs. 1,502 if these are classified as ‘available for sale’ securities.

Short-term receivables and payables with no stated interest rate are measured at invoice amount if the effect of discounting is immaterial.

Classification of financial assets  and liabilities:

Financial assets are classified into four possible categories and financial liabilities into two possible categories as summarised in the following table. The framework for subsequent measurement (which could be at fair value, cost or amortised cost), recognition of mark-to-market gains and losses and impairment testing principles are also provided.

The table below is subject to the principles  of hedge accounting which are discussed later in these Articles. When principles of hedge accounting are applied, the above recognition framework will be overridden by those principles.

Let’s now discuss each class of assets and liabilities in detail.

Financial  assets  at fair value through P&L:

Financial assets which are classified in this basket are carried at fair value in the balance sheet, with mark-to-market gains or losses being carried into the P&L. Fair valuation of such assets will result in earnings becoming volatile to the extent that such assets fluctuate in value from quarter to quarter. Financial assets held for trading belong here and so do derivatives which are not designated as hedging instruments. The Standard also permits management to designate qualifying financial assets into this basket in the following situations:

  • Such a designation may eliminate or significantly reduce a recognition or measurement inconsistency (accounting mismatch) that may arise by measuring assets and liabilities or recognition of gains or losses on different bases, or

  • A group of financial assets, liabilities or both is managed on a fair value basis and its performance evaluated on this basis.

Example – Finance company ABC issues a Nifty-linked debenture for Rs.500 crores. Debenture holders will be paid a return of upside on the Nifty over the next three years x 120%. If the Nifty falls over this period, holders will be paid back their capital. The company uses the amount collected to invest partly into its regular truck financing business and partly into Nifty-related instruments including derivatives. If Nifty moves up, it will be obliged to recognise its liabilities accordingly – in effect a fair valuation of liabilities based on Nifty will be necessitated. If its assets are recognised on cost, then an accounting mismatch will arise. It will be appropriate for the management to designate financial assets emanating out of the proceeds of these Nifty-linked debentures as ‘Fair Value thro P&L’.

Loans  and  receivables:

Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets that are not quoted in an active market. These should not be held for trading, nor should be designated at fair value through P&L or as available for sale by the entity.

Initial measurement of loans and receivables is at fair value plus transaction costs. Subsequent measurement is at amortised cost, except for short-term receivables which is at invoice amount if the effect of discounting is immaterial, if there is no stated interest rate in the invoice.

The concept of ‘amortised cost’ involves mathematical computations to which accountants are not accustomed in current practice and hence needs to be discussed in detail.

Example for amortised cost:

Your entity has provided a loan of Rs.25 lakhs at 12% interest (payable annually in arrears) and has collected a processing fee of Rs.1 lakh (4%) for this loan. The loan is repayable after 5 years (one bullet payment).

Regular interest income on the loan will be Rs.3 lakhs per annum (Rs.25 lakhs x 12%). The processing fee income of Rs.1 lakh is required to be amortised over the five-year tenor of the loan in a manner that the effective interest rate over this five-year period is constant.

If the cash flows of the loan are tabulated and an IRR function applied to these cash flows, the effective interest rate works out to 13.1412%. Thus the carrying value of the loan will be Rs.24 lakhs on day zero (Rs.25 lakhs disbursed minus Rs.1 lakh collected as fees). On this amount, income for year one will be computed as Rs.3.1539 lakhs. At the end of year one, the carrying value of the loan (at amortised cost) will increase to Rs.24.1539 lakhs (Rs.24 lakhs opening plus yield accrual of Rs.3.1539 minus collection of Rs.3 lakhs). This process will continue over the five-year tenor of the loan with carrying value becoming zero on repayment of principal at the end of the term.

Readers can imagine the complexity that financial institutions disbursing thousands of loans every year will face. In practice, loans are not repaid in bullet at the end of the tenor and could be repaid on a monthly basis, transactions happen every day and not neatly at the beginning of the financial year as in the above example (where IRR would not be adequate and XIRR would be called for), interest rates are not fixed but floating, processing fees vary, there are originat on costs apart from fees (which require similar amortisation treatment), contractual tenor is not the same as actual tenor in view of prepayments and sometimes rescheduling due to late payments and hence actual tenor is not known up front.

Worldwide Tax Trends Treatment of Tax Losses

No country stands immune to the global recession, even as the degree of its impact may vary. Companies world over are reeling under the brunt of declining revenues resulting in a consequential drop in bottomlines and even resulting in operating losses in some cases.

Though companies cannot often control the revenue or the top line in the current economic scenario, however, they may want to optimise the cash through cost control measures and efficient utilisation of incentives, such as tax losses.

In fact, some of the advanced tax jurisdictions provide for carry back of losses so as to utilise the available tax losses and thereby resulting in release of cash which is blocked in the form of taxes.

In the current times where several MNCs are facing the issue of operating losses (the term ‘operating losses’ for the purpose of this article denotes business losses) in various jurisdictions, it becomes imperative for them to evaluate the provisions on utilisation of tax losses in these jurisdictions so as to optimise the overall tax cost. Considering the above, this article contains a broad overview of provisions prevalent in certain key jurisdictions on utilisation of tax losses. However, it should be noted that there could be certain conditions prescribed under the respective tax laws which may need to be followed before offsetting the tax losses.

Before diving straight into the provisions prevalent in certain key jurisdictions on utilisation of tax losses, let us take a brief look at the relevant provisions prevalent in India.

India :

    Indian tax laws provide for a distinction between operating losses and capital losses. In the year of losses, operating losses can be set off against capital income. However, capital losses can not be set off against the operating income.

    Unutilised operating losses can be carried forward for a period of eight years to be set off against any future business income. Continuity of same business is not essential to set off carry forward operating losses.

    Unutilised capital losses can be carried forward for a period of eight years to be set off against future capital gains. Indian tax laws classify capital gains as long-term capital gains or short-term capital gains depending on the period of holding of the capital asset. Accumulated long-term capital losses can be set off only against long-term capital gains and not against short-term capital gains. However, carry forward short-term capital losses can be set off against any capital gains i.e., long-term or short-term capital gains.

    There are no provisions for carry back of tax losses to set off against the profit of earlier years.

Impact on carry over/utilisation of losses on change in ownership

    Generally, Indian tax laws do not provide for any condition for continuity of ownership for utilisation of accumulated tax losses except in case of companies in which public are not substantially interested (i.e., Private Limited Companies).

    In case of companies in which public are not substantially interested, there is a condition of continuity of a specified percentage of ownership in the year in which the losses are incurred and the year in which such losses are set off. There has to be a continuity of ownership of at least 51% in the year in which the losses are incurred and the year in which such losses are set off in order to set off accumulated tax losses.

    Indian tax laws provide for carry over of tax losses to the resulting company in the event of business reorganisation viz. merger and demerger. In case of a merger which meets with the conditions specified under the Income-tax Act, the carry forward operating loss of the merged entity is rolled over to the surviving entity/resulting entity. However, there are certain specified conditions especially with respect to continuity of the merged business which need to be met, so as to avail the carry over benefit.

    In case of demerger/hive-off, which meets the conditions specified in the Income-tax Act, the carry forward operating losses of the undertaking being hived off are transferred to the resulting company which can be set off against the profit of the resulting company. In the event, the carry forward operating losses do not pertain entirely to the undertaking being hived off, the carry forward operating losses of the demerged entity are allocated between demerged entity and the resulting entity on the basis of assets retained in the demerged entity and the assets transferred to resulting entity.

    The provisions on continuity of ownership discussed hereinabove do not restrict the carry over of operating losses in case of the aforesaid reorganisation.

Transfer of losses to other group entities

    Indian tax laws do not contain provisions for surrender/transfer of losses to other group entities for set off against their profit. In effect, Indian tax laws do not contain any provisions for group consolidation. Each of the group entities needs to file its tax return separately.

    After evaluating the provisions under the Indian tax laws, let us now look at the provisions on utilisation of tax losses prevalent under certain key jurisdictions.

United States (US) :

    Generally, US tax laws provide for a distinction between operating losses and capital losses. In general, capital losses can be set off only against capital gains and not ordinary income. Capital losses can be carried back for three years and carried forward for five years to be set off against capital gains in such years.

    Operating losses can be carried back two years and forward twenty years to offset taxable income in those years. Operating losses can be set off against business income as well as capital gains.

Impact on carry over/utilisation of losses on change in ownership

There is a limitation on the amount of operating losses that can be utilised to offset against taxable income on ownership change. This limitation is provided in Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code (IRC). Generally, an ownership change occurs when more than 50% of the beneficial stock ownership of a corporation in loss had changed hands over a prescribed period (generally three years). The three-year period can be shortened to the extent that the losses were incurred within the three year period or there was an ownership change within the three year period. Thus, Section 382 Limitation effectively prevents shifting of unfettered loss deduction from one group of corporate owners to a new group.

Generally, the limitation amount equals the value of the stock of the corporation immediately before the ownership change, multiplied by the long-term tax exempt rate. The long-term exempt rate changes monthly and is published by the Internal Revenue Service in the Internal Revenue Bulletin. Losses that cannot be deducted in a particular tax year due to aforesaid limitation can be carried forward.

In case of business reorganisation i.e., merger, generally, all the tax attributes of the merged corporation, induding net operating losses, transfer to the surviving corporation in a tax-free merger. The surviving corporation in a statutory merger can carry forward the net operating losses of the absorbed companies to reduce its taxable income in twenty subsequent tax years from the tax year in which the loss was incurred. Net operating losses can be carried back two years. Generally in case of merger, the net operating losses are not ‘ring fenced’. Such losses can be utilised against the income from business of the merged entity and the merging entity. However, such losses can not be offset against the income from business of the existing subsidiary of the resulting entity in case of consolidation. The limitation rules as discussed hereinabove would equally apply if there is a change in the ownership beyond a specified percentage pursuant to merger.

Transfer of losses to other group entities

US tax laws provide for group consolidation on fulfilment of certain stock ownership criteria. An affiliated group of US corporations may elect to determine its taxable income and tax liability on a consolidated basis.

Losses incurred by members of a group during the period of consolidation can be used to offset profits of other members of the group. However, losses incurred by a corporation prior to joining the group, referred to as separate return limitation year losses (SRLY losses), may not be used to offset profits of other group members or be carried back by such members to pre-consolidation taxable years. The SRLY loss rules also apply to built-in losses, i.e., losses realised during the first five years of consolidation to the extent attributable to assets with a value below adjusted tax basis at the time the member joined the group.

United Kingdom (UK) :

UK tax laws provide for a distinction between operating loss/trading loss and a capital loss. Generally, capital loss can be offset against capital gains of the same accounting period or can be carried forward indefinitely. However, capital loss cannot be carried back. Capital loss cannot be used to reduce the trading profits.

A trading loss incurred by a company in any accounting period may be set off against the total taxable profits (including capital gains) of the period and against the total taxable profits of an immediately preceding period, provided the same trade was then carried on. Losses can also be carried forward indefinitely for relief against future income from the same trade. Thus, losses can be set off only against the future profit from the same trade. Considering the above, a company with several trades or businesses may be required to keep separate accounts for each trade or business.

A company that ceases trading can carry back trading losses and offset them against profit of previous thirty-six months.

Impact on carry over/utilisation of losses on change in ownership

There is an important restriction on the carry-over of trading losses on a merger or acquisition if within any period of three years there is both a change in the ownership of a company and a major change in the nature or conduct of the trade carried on by the company to which the losses relate.

In case of change of ownership    of the company  and a major change in the nature or conduct of the relevant trade within a three-year period, trading losses otherwise available for carry forward are forfeited with effect from the date of the change of ownership.
 
Similar restrictions on the carryover of losses also apply if, at any time after the scale of activities in the trade carried on by the company has become small or negligible and before any considerable revival of the trade, there is a change in the ownership of the company.

The crucial issues that need to be considered in determining whether the above restrictions on the carry-over of trading losses apply on a merger or acquisition are: firstly whether there is a change of ownership and secondly whether or not there is a major change in the nature or conduct of the trade. There are specified provisions which define change of ownership for aforesaid purpose. The change of ownership is disregarded when the ownership is merely transferred between members of a 75% group.

The circumstances where there will be a major change in the nature or conduct of the trade for the purposes of these provisions are not exhaustively defined in the legislation. However, there are some indicative factors which can be used as reference to determine whether there is a major change in the nature or conduct of trade.

Transfer of losses to other  group entities

UK tax laws do not provide for tax consolidation. However, a trading loss incurred by one company within a 75% owned group of companies may be grouped with profits for the same period realised by another member of the group.

Germany:

German corporate tax laws do not provide for distinction between operating losses and capital losses. Capital losses are generally deductible.

However, capital losses resulting from transactions which are exempt from tax are not deductible. In particular, this rule applies to capital loss from sale of shares or from write-down on shares. This, effectively, means that the capital loss on sale of shares is not tax deductible.

Net operating losses of up to EUR 511,500 may be optionally carried back for one year prior to the year in which the losses have been incurred for corporate tax purposes. Remaining tax losses can be carried forward indefinitely. However, the amount of loss carried forward is restricted to EUR 1 million of net income in a given year. Any remaining loss can only be set off against up to 60% of the net income exceeding this limit. This essentially means that 40% of the net income exceeding Euro 1 million is subject to tax even if there are available tax losses (so-called minimum taxation). There is no condition of continuity of same business to set off accumulated tax losses.

Impact on carry over/utilisation of losses on change in ownership

The 2008 Business Tax Reforms introduced new rules regarding the treatment of tax losses on changes of ownership in the loss company. These rules are effective from 1 January 2008. Under the new rules, tax losses expire proportionally if, within a 5-year period, more than 25% of the shares of a loss entity are directly or indirectly transferred to one acquirer or an entity related to such acquirer. If more than 50% of shares are transferred within a 5-year period, the entire tax losses will be lost. The new rules include a measure under which investors with common interests acting together are deemed to be one acquirer for the purpose of these rules.

The German Bundesrat Committee has proposed some changes to the loss carry forward limitation rules. The proposed rule includes an insolvency restructuring exception. Under the restructuring exception, a change in ownership would not result in forfeiture of a loss carry forward if :

i) the transfer of shares in a loss corporation is part of a plan to make the loss corporation solvent, and

ii) the plan preserves the ‘structural integrity’ of the loss corporation’s business. A preservation of structural integrity is deemed to exist if :

o there is an agreement with the German Workers’ Council of the loss corporation
concerning the preservation of jobs and that agreement has been honoured; or

o the company continued to pay a certain amount of gross salaries over a period of five years following the change in own:rship; or

o the shareholders made significant contributions to the equity of the loss corporation.

The insolvency restructuring exception would not apply if the loss corporation’s business was already shut down at the time of the share transfer, or if during a period of five years following the share transfer the loss corporation discontinues its historic business and engages in a different business sector.

Under the proposal, the insolvency restructuring exception would become effective for the year 2008
and would apply (also retroactively) to all ownership changes that occurred between December 31, 2007, and December 31, 2010.

In the event of business reorganisation e.g., merger, carry forward tax losses of the transferring entity are forfeited and cannot be further used by the receiving entity.

In the event of a spin-off wherein a part of the business is hived off into a separate company, carry forward tax losses relating to the business which is transferred is generally forfeited. However, carry forward tax losses relating to the existing business which has not moved will remain intact and can be utilised subject to German change of ownership rules discussed hereinabove.

Transfer of losses to other group entities

German tax laws provide for the filing of a consolidated tax return for a German group of companies which allow losses of group companies to be offset against profits of other group companies. The German parent company must file

the consolidated tax return. Only German companies in which the German parent company holds the majority of the voting shares at the beginning of the fiscal year of the subsidiary can be included in the group consolidation. In order to achieve group taxation, a profit and loss pooling agreement must be concluded. The profit and loss pooling agreement requires that the controlled company transfers all its profits to the controlled parent and that the controlling parent actually covers the losses of the controlled company.

Losses of controlled company incurred prior to group taxation cannot be used for corporate income tax purposes as long as group taxation applies. Such losses can be offset against the future profits of the controlled company after group taxation has ended.

Australia:

Australian tax laws provide for distinction between capital loss and business loss. Capital losses are calculated using the reduced cost base of assets without indexation for inflation. Capital losses are deductible only against taxable capital gains and not against ordinary income. Capital losses can be carried forward indefinitely to be offset against taxable capital gains in future. Capital losses cannot be carried back.

Operating loss is excess of allowable deductions over assessable and exempt income for a particular year. Operating loss can be carried forward indefinitely to be offset against taxable income derived during succeeding years. Operating loss can be offset against both operating income as well as capital gains. Operating losses cannot be carried back.

Impact on carry over/utilisation of losses on change in ownership

Companies must satisfy greater than 50% continuity of ownership tests for voting power, rights to returns of capital and dividend rights (COT) in order to deduct its prior year losses. Where continuity is failed losses can be deducted if the same business is carried on in the income year (the same business test). Thus, if there is a change in ownership, prior year losses can be offset provided the same business is being carried on in the year in which the prior year losses are set off. The aforesaid tests are applied with modification in the event losses are utilised on group consolidation.

Transfer of losses to other group entities

A wholly-owned group of Australian companies can choose to consolidate for income tax purposes. Where a consolidated group is formed, the group is treated as a single entity during the period of consolidation. The subsidiary entities lose their individual tax identities and are treated as part of the head company for the purposes of determining income tax liability.

Under the tax-consolidation regime, the carry forward losses of companies forming part of a consolidated group may be used by the consolidated group, subject to the limitation-of-loss rules, which limit the amount of losses that can be used, based on -a proportion of the market value of the loss-making company to the consolidated group as a whole.

Generally, losses can be transferred to the group only if the losses could have been used outside the group by the entity seeking to transfer them. Once a subsidiary member of a group transfers a loss, it is no longer available for use by the subsidiary, even if the subsidiary subsequently leaves the group.

China:

Generally, Chinese tax laws do not provide for any distinction between operating losses and capital losses. Under the Enterprise Income Tax Regulation (EITR), losses are allowed to be carried forward for a maximum of five years without any restriction. However, losses may not be carried back.

Impact on carry over/utilisation of losses on change in ownership

Generally, there is no restriction on utilisation of accumulated tax losses in the event of change in ownership. The company can set off the accumulated tax losses even if there is a change in the shareholding of the company.

In the event of merger, the amount of losses of the pre-merger entity can be rolled over to the surviving entity provided the merger qualifies under Special Restructuring (SR) defined under the corporate tax laws. The quantum of loss that can be rolled over is confined to ‘x’ times the fair value of pre-merger entity, where ‘x’ is the interest rate of the longest-term national debt issued in that year.

Transfer    of losses    to  other  group entities

There is no group consolidation provision in China. Accordingly, losses of one group entity in China cannot be set off against the profit of another group entity.

Conclusion

While most of the advanced economies provide for carry back of losses and transfer of losses within the group entities through the group consolidation mechanism, these provisions are not yet incorporated under the Indian tax laws. India today is no longer an isolated economy. It is aligned and integrated with the world economy. Further, in the current economic downturn wherein companies globally are facing heavy pressure on margins resulting in operating losses in some cases, it is just that companies are given the benefit of utilising losses against their prior year profits and also against the profit of other group entities. Further, in the current scenario where Indian companies are facing liquidity crunch, it is essential that aforesaid provisions are implemented in the Indian tax code so that companies can optimise on cash through effective utilisation of tax losses. Considering this, time is now ripe that India adopts the well-accepted international tax concept of provision of carry back of loss and group consolidation in its tax code.

For comparative purpose, the key provisions on utilisation of tax losses in key jurisdictions are tabulated below:

Consolidated FDI policy-2010

Article

1. The Ministry of Commerce and Industry has issued a
‘Consolidated FDI Policy’
effective from 1st April, 2010. (Circular 1 of
2010)

The policy has consolidated into one document the entire
policy on foreign direct investment spread over various Press Notes. The past
Press Notes are rescinded. A fresh consolidated policy will be issued every six
months.

Though it states that there are no new measures in the
policy, there are a few provisions which did not exist earlier. In this article
I have mainly covered those issues which were not discussed earlier, and those
where there is additional or more clarity. I have covered the basic policy
provisions very briefly.

2. Basic FDI policy :


The basic policy for FDI is that foreign investment is freely
permitted in all sectors in India — except where there is a restriction. In some
sectors, FDI is totally prohibited like agriculture, retail trade, real estate,
etc. In some sectors, there are some conditions like NBFC, Construction and
Development, etc. However by and large, investment is freely permissible. On
investment, some compliances have to be completed.

If the investment is not under the automatic route, an
approval from FIPB or SIA is required.

Non-residents are required to invest at a price which is at
least equal to the value as per erstwhile CCI guidelines.

Transfer of shares is also under automatic route — subject to
compliance of the conditions laid down.

3. Legal background :


In the past, the foreign investment policy was issued as a
part of Industrial Policy. The Industrial Policy dealt with licensing and other
issues. Over a period by 2003, the Government titled the document as Foreign
Investment Policy, etc. In actual practice, ‘Industrial Policy’, ‘Foreign Direct
Investment Policy’, ‘Foreign Investment Policy’ have been used interchangeably.
There has never been a ‘Foreign Direct Investment Policy’ as such.

3.1 The Consolidated FDI policy has not been issued under any
law. It is a policy issued by the Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion
(DIPP) which is under the Ministry of Commerce and Industry.

DIPP issues Press Notes for amendments to the policy. The
legal framework is the Foreign Exchange Management Act and the regulations
issued under it. FEMA regulations lay down the law, and procedures. For Foreign
Direct Investment, FEMA Notification 20 is applicable. Generally the RBI issues
Notifications to amend the regulations in line with the Press Notes issued by
DIPP. However where the RBI has some differences or requires some
clarifications, FEMA regulations does not get amended.

On a few issues, there are differences between the FDI policy
and FEMA regulations.

3.2 Clause 1.1.9 of the Consolidated FDI policy states that
“The Circular consolidates FDI policy framework, the legal edifice is
built on Notifications issued by the RBI under FEMA.
Therefore, any changes
notified by the RBI from time to time would have to be complied with and where
there is a need/scope of interpretation, the relevant FEMA notification will
prevail.”


This is for the first time that a document states that it is
FEMA regulations which have the legal binding force. This is a clear provision
which is good. Where the Press Note (or Consolidated FDI policy) liberalises any
provision till the FEMA notification is amended, the liberalisation will not
have any effect. In such situation, one can approach the RBI with an
application. Generally the RBI would grant an approval, unless it has some
differences with DIPP on the liberalisation measures.

3.3 Clause 1.1.4 states that “the regulatory framework over a
period of time thus consists of Acts, Regulations, Press Notes, Press Releases,
Clarifications, etc.”. Thus according to DIPP, all communication from the DIPP
are a part of regulatory framework ! At times, there are clarifications given by
Ministers, or by DIPP on its website. Would they be a part of legal framework ?

It will be interesting to read the decision of Federation of
Associations of Manufacturers referred to in paragraph 6. The Delhi High Court
has said in case of policy matters, the Government is free to decide the meaning
it wants to adopt for various terms. In that case, the Government had adopted a
modern meaning of wholesale trading compared to the traditional meaning. That
time the meaning was not in the public domain. The Government gave its view by
way of an affidavit to the Court. The issue is that the Government can be more
upfront in providing its view.

3.4 FEMA Notification No. 20, states the following in
Schedule I, clause 2(1) :


“An Indian company, not engaged in any activity/sector
mentioned in Annex A to this schedule, may issue shares or convertible
debentures to a person resident outside India, subject to the limits
prescribed in Annex B to this schedule, in accordance with the Entry
Routes specified therein
and the provisions of Foreign Direct
Investment Policy,
as notified by the Ministry of Commerce and Industry,
Government of India, from time to time.”


As mentioned above, there has never been any Foreign Direct
Investment Policy as such. There has been an ‘Industrial policy’. Practically,
the document published by the Ministry of Commerce and Industries has been
referred to as the FDI policy.

3.5 The Consolidated FDI policy states that in cases of
interpretation, FEMA Notification will prevail. FEMA notification states that
investment will be permitted as per the limits stated in the schedule and the
FDI policy.

Which prevails — FEMA regulations or FDI policy ?

Take an example :

Chapter 4 of the Consolidated FDI policy lays down the policy
for deciding whether an Indian company is controlled and owned by Indian
residents and citizens. (Earlier the policy was laid down in Press Notes 2, 3
and 4 of 2009. These Press Notes now stand rescinded.) It states that if the
Indian company
in which there is foreign investment is owned or
controlled by non-residents to the extent of 50% or more,
it will be
considered as foreign investment. Any investment by such a company in another
Indian company will be considered as foreign investment. Sectoral caps will
apply.

Vice-versa, if the Indian company is owned and controlled
by persons who are Indian residents and citizens to the extent of more than 50%,

it will be considered as Indian investment. Investment by such a company in
another Indian company will not be considered for counting foreign investment.

A chart is given below to illustrate the issue :

Thus the Foreign Co. (F) owns directly and indirectly [through the JV Co. – (J)] total capital Rs.6,226 (3,626 + 2,600) of 62.26% in Defense production company (D).

In defence sector, foreign investment cannot exceed 26%. With the above structure, the investment can exceed 26%, although the control will be with the Indian Co. – I.

Is this permitted ?

A plain reading of FDI policy gives an impression that it is permitted. Investment in the above manner can take places in several sectors where there is a restriction or a sectoral cap.

However these provisions have not been enacted in FEMA regulations.

This is a situation where FDI policy is more liberal than the FEMA regulations.

The Consolidated FDI policy states that if there is any interpretation issue, FEMA will prevail. As such a provision is not there in FEMA, the investment cannot be made.

Under FEMA, it states that the investment is subject to provisions of the FDI policy. Can we say that the investment can be made ?

In my view, as the Consolidated FDI policy clearly states that FEMA will prevail, the investment cannot be made. (Also see paragraph 3.11.)

3.6 Take a situation where FEMA is more liberal than the FDI policy.

All sectors where there is no restriction, foreign investment can be made freely. Services sector is under automatic route under FEMA.

Under the erstwhile FDI policy before 31-3-2010 also, services sector was under automatic route.

The Consolidated FDI policy now states under clause 5.20 that FDI is allowed in specified ‘Business services’. Does this mean that other services are now no longer under automatic route ? (See paragraph 9.1 also for more discussion.)

3.7 Is it possible to take a view that only if the Consolidated FDI policy and FEMA regulations both permit, then only investment can be made ?

My personal view is as under :

Where FEMA permits an investment on automatic basis, a non-resident can make the investment. Where the FDI policy permits an investment, but FEMA does not permit it, then one needs to take an approval from the RBI/FIPB before making the investment.

3.8 Consider a situation where the non-resident wants to invest in ‘Cash and carry/Wholesale trading’. It is an activity which is permitted on automatic basis.

There were however controversies on the meaning of ‘Cash and carry/Wholesale’. One of the controversies was that whether goods sold on credit will be in line with ‘Cash and carry’. FEMA regulations do not explain the meaning of ‘cash and carry’. The Consolidated FDI policy now explains the meaning of this term. It states that normal credit terms can be given to the customers.

Thus investment can be made in this sector and normal credit can be extended to the customers. (See paragraph 6 for more discussion.)

Thus where FEMA is ‘silent’ on the meaning of any term, one should be able to rely on the FDI policy. In the case of Federation of Associations of Manufacturers, the Delhi High Court has stated that such issue is a policy matter. The Government is within its rights to formulate policy matters. If the Government decides to adopt a particular meaning of any business phrase, it can do so. If the Government has considered that normal credit terms are permissible, then the same are permissible.

3.9 Therefore in a situation where there is a clear conflict between FDI policy and FEMA, FEMA will prevail. Where it is an issue of understanding of particular terms, the clarification given by DIPP or FEMA will prevail.

3.10 One may appreciate that Consolidated FDI policy by DIPP is a policy level document, whereas FEMA is the legal document. Both have different objectives. The Consolidated FDI policy can be considered as the intention of the Government, whereas FEMA lays down the detailed rules. Unless a policy is enacted as a statute, it does not have the force of law.

3.11 With the FDI policy, a press release has also been issued. One of the paragraphs in the press release states that — “There are a number of issues related to FDI policy that are currently under discussion in the Government, such as foreign investment in Limited Liability Partnerships (LLPs), policy on issuance of partly paid shares/warrants, rescinding Schedule IV of FEMA, clarifications on issues related to Press Notes 2, 3 & 4 of 2009 and on Press Note 2 of 2005, as also certain definitional issues, etc. When a decision on these is taken, the Government decision would be announced and thereafter incorporated into the Consolidated Press Note subsequently.”

Thus there is recognition that there are some issues on which the Government thinking has still not been finalised.

In my view, Press Notes 2, 3 and 4 of 2009 are not operational as far as the automatic route is concerned. One can approach FIPB for a specific approval.
The Government is considering to scrap non-repatriable category of investment for NRIs. One will have to wait for the announcement.

Investment in an LLP is desirable. There will be issues of partners’ investment in capital, withdrawal of the same, payment of interest, etc.

Let us consider some specific issues dealt with by the FDI policy which have not been dealt with earlier.

    4. Investee entity :    
A non-resident can invest in an Indian company (on automatic basis). An NRI can invest in an Indian company on repatriable basis and non-repatriable basis. An NRI can invest in a partnership firm or a proprietory concern on non-repatriable basis. This policy continues under the Consolidated FDI policy.

Investment in other entities was not permitted. Now the Consolidated FDI policy is more specific.

4.1    Investment in partnership firm on repatriable basis :
Normally investment in partnership/proprietory concern is not permitted on repatriable basis. The only sector where there is a reference of investment in a firm is the defence sector (Press Note 2 dated 4-1-2002 and entry 5.9 of Consolidated FDI policy). The RBI had issued a Circular No. AP 39, dated 3-12-2003. As per the Circular, NRIs could invest in a partnership firm or a proprietory concern on repatriable basis after obtaining an approval from Secretariat of Industrial Approvals/RBI. The Circular also provides that persons of Non-Indian origin can invest in a partnership firm or a proprietory concern after obtaining an approval from the RBI.

In actual practice, the RBI is not granting any approval for repatriable investment in a partnership firm and proprietory concern.

The Consolidated FDI policy now provides that NRIs and persons other than NRIs can apply to the RBI [para 3.2.2]. The application will be decided in consultation with the Government of India. This is the first time that the FDI policy provides for a foreigner to invest in a partnership firm/proprietory concern. The criteria however has not been specified. One will have to wait and see whether the RBI/Government permits investment in a firm/proprietory concern and on what terms and conditions.

4.2 Trusts :

Para 3.3.3 prohibits FDI in trusts other than Venture Capital Fund (VCF). Investment in trusts was in any case not permitted. However, let us consider some issues.

4.2.1 Can an NRI or an FII invest in mutual funds which are formed as trusts ? So far they have been permitted to invest (Schedule 5 of FEMA Notification 20).

4.2.2 An NRI wants to set up a private trust in India. The trust is for his family members. Some beneficiaries are NRIs and some are Indian residents. The NRI settlor himself can be a beneficiary.

Can such a trust be settled ? Will such a settlement be considered as an ‘investment’ ?

At the outset one may observe that ‘settlement’ cannot be considered as ‘investment’. However there will be a transfer of assets to the Indian trust where a non-resident will have an interest. It requires an approval from the RBI. Now with a specific bar under the FDI policy, will it be possible to have an Indian trust with non-residents as beneficiary ? Will the RBI consider an application at all ? One will have to wait and watch.

The above situation is different from a situation where a non-resident wants to invest in the Indian economy through a trust. Consider a situation where an NRI settles funds in an Indian trust. The trust will have an NRI as a beneficiary. The trust will undertake portfolio investment/business activities. This is not permitted.

4.2.3 The personal status of the trust (whether it is a person), and its residential status are existing issues under FEMA. These are however beyond the scope of this article.

4.3 Other entities :

FDI is not permitted in other entities. Thus investment in Association of Persons is not possible.

A non-resident and an Indian resident have to jointly bid for a contract. The bidding may be done jointly. They may be even awarded the contract jointly. This is clearly permitted. Under the Income-tax Act, it may become an AOP. That is a different matter.

As long as there is no ‘investment’ to be made in the AOP, there is no restriction. In this kind of AOP, the parties only carry out the work jointly. The finances are independently managed by the investors. This is clearly permitted. As far as the non-resident is concerned, he may have to comply with the ‘project office’ rules.

If however the non-resident wants to ‘invest’ in the AOP, then it is prohibited.

    5. Securities in which the non-resident can invest in :

5.1    Convertible debentures and preference shares :

5.1.1 Prior to 1-5-2007, Indian companies could issue debentures and preference shares to non-residents which were partly or fully convertible into equity shares.

There were different views on how much of the face value could be converted into equity shares. Different offices of the RBI had given varying views on the amount which had to be converted into equity shares (ranging from 10 to 25% of the face value). However DIPP had a different view. According to DIPP, even if 1% of the face value was converted into equity shares, it was acceptable. With such an instrument, it was possible for a non-resident to invest in partly convertible debentures (PCDs) or partly convertible preference shares (PCPs). By having an option to convert only 1% of the face value, the investor could participate in the debt in India. Without the PCDs, it was difficult to participate in the debt.

India received a lot of foreign exchange in the form of FDI, ECB, and portfolio investment. The economy started heating up in 2007. Hence the Government banned partly convertible debentures and partly convertible instruments.

Only fully convertible debentures (FCDs) and fully convertible preference shares (FCPs) are now permitted.

5.1.2 There is however an issue of the price at which the FCDs and FCPs can be converted.

The basic policy is that Non-residents are required to invest at a price which is at least equal to the value as per erstwhile CCI guidelines (referred to as the ‘minimum price’). Therefore at what price the convertible debentures/preference shares should be converted. (This was an issue even when PCDs or PCPs could be issued.)

Broadly, there can be different alternatives for the price at which the instruments can be converted. These can be as under :
    i) The price of conversion could be the ‘mini-mum price’ of equity shares at the time of issue of FCDs/FCPs. It could be at face value in case of a new company or at a ‘minimum price’ in case of an existing company. This is the minimum price at which the non-resident has to invest.
    ii) The price of conversion could be decided at the time of conversion.
    iii) The third alternative is a variation of the second alternative. The basis of the price could be decided upfront depending on the profits which the company earns. The conversion period could also be a range of dates. It need not be a fixed date. The actual price could be worked out later. As in the second alternative, the ‘minimum price’ of conversion would be decided at the time of conversion.

5.1.3 The RBI held a view that the price could not be determined at the time of issue. It had to be determined at the time of conversion. Their argument was that if at the time of issue the prescribed price was Rs.10, and at the time of conversion after 3 years, the price was Rs.20, the non-resident must get the shares at Rs.20.

Recently at a conference, we were told that the price was to be decided upfront at the time of issue. This was the understanding from 2007 when PCDs and PCPs were banned ! In my view, when PCDs and PCPs were banned, there was nothing in the press releases and Circulars on the pricing issue.

5.1.4 The FDI policy states in clause 3.2.1 that the pricing of the capital instruments should be decided/ determined upfront at the time of issue of the instruments. Does this have any significance?

Does the ‘minimum price’ have to be determined at the time of issue ? Or only the basis for the ‘minimum price’ has to be determined ?

Does it have to be an exact amount, or can it be determined with reference to a basis like price to earnings ratio ?

The FDI policy states that the ‘pricing’ shall be decided/determined at the time of issue. ‘Pricing’ is a broader term. It is different from the term ‘price’. Pricing means basis of the price and not a certain number. Therefore if the basis of the price is determined, but the actual price is determined later, the condition should be considered as complied with.

However the RBI does not appear to have this view.
Let us consider an example below.

5.1.5    The ‘minimum price’ could be as under :

At the time of issue

Rs.
10

At the time of conversion into equity

Rs. 20

From investors’ point of view, there could be bona fide reasons for conversion at a ‘minimum price’ on the date of issue of FCDs/FCPs. They would consider their appreciation from the date of investment.

If the ‘minimum price’ is decided at the time of issue, then the investor will benefit. Consider further that the investor may receive interest on FCDs till the same are converted. In this situation, the investor will get interest, as well as the benefit of conversion at a lower price.

From issuer’s (investee company’s) point of view, there could be bona fide reasons for conversion at a ‘minimum price’ on the date of conversion of FCDs/ FCPs. If the ‘minimum price’ is higher at the time of conversion, the Indian company would not like to give away the shares at a lower price.

This issue has become a grey area. It requires more clarification from the RBI/Government.

In the share purchase agreements, it is advisable to provide that the price at which the FCDs/FCPs will be converted will be on a particular basis; however it will not be less than the price prescribed as per regulations under FEMA.

5.2 Prohibitions :
Apart from the FCDs and FCPs, no other instrument can be issued. It has been specifically stated that warrants and party paid shares cannot be issued.

    6. Trading :

6.1 FDI in trading activities is primarily prohibited. However trading for exports, Cash and Carry trading/ Wholesale trading (WT), single brand retail trading is permitted. (Press Note 4, dated 10-2-2006/clause 5.39 of Consolidated FDI policy.)

6.2 It will be interesting to note the meaning of ‘Cash and Carry’ as understood internationally.

The business format of cash and carry includes the following characteristics :
—  The seller sells on cash.
— Seller does not provide delivery services. The purchaser takes the goods himself. This is a major distinction between normal wholesale trading and cash and carry wholesale trad-ing.
— The volume of trade is not relevant. What is relevant is type of customer — whether he uses the goods for business, or for personal consumption. The customer should use the goods for business.

6.3 This understanding was never explained by the Government in the past. Initially there were several issues on which there was no clarity. Over time however some issues were clarified on the website of DIPP, or by way of clarification from DIPP on a specific request.

The meaning of WT as understood by DIPP is :
— The sale should be to a person who has sales tax number/VAT registration.
Say a hospital wants to buy medical sutures on wholesale basis. The hospital has registration numbers, under various Government authori-ties. Yet it is the ultimate consumer. Whether this was permitted or not was not clear.

— Sale should not be to an end user. i.e., The sale should be to an intermediary like distributor, etc.
— Sale should be on cash basis. Whether normal credit period as prevalent in the industry was permitted or not was not clear. On a specific request, DIPP clarified that normal credit pe-riod was permissible.

Subsequently, the Federation of Associations of Manufacturers had filed a writ petition in the Delhi High Court. In that case, the Government has given its understanding on the meaning of the term ‘Wholesale Cash and Carry trading’. The writ petition was filed mainly because the Government had permitted non-resident investment in B2B e-commerce. The Delhi High Court had said that this is a policy matter. If the Government in its wisdom adopts a modern meaning of ‘wholesale trading’ against a traditional meaning, then it is right in doing so.

6.4 The Consolidated FDI policy now explains this issue elaborately in clause 5.39.1.1. The important clarifications which the policy provides are as under :

— Sale of goods can be to distributors or inter-mediaries, and also to institutions and other professional business users. Thus the Indian company can sell computers in bulk to a person who wants to purchase them for office use.
The sale cannot be for personal consumption of the retail buyer.

Can sale take place to an individual Chartered Accountant in practice who will purchase, say, one box of papers for printing in his office ? Clearly this is permitted. The policy clarifies that — “The yardstick to determine whether the sale is wholesale or not would be the type of customers to whom the sale is made and not the size and volume of the sale.”

Thus essentially sale to end user for personal consumption is not permitted. Sale for busi-ness use is permitted.
Is a sale to a charitable trust or a hospital or an educational institution permitted ? Again the answer is that as these organisations will pur-chase for consumption during the course of their activities, the sale can be undertaken.

—  The policy provides for guidelines as under :
    a) All necessary approvals from Central/ State/ local Government should be obtained by the wholesaler.

    b) Sale to Government is permitted. Sale to person other than the Government will be permitted only when the ‘buyer’ fulfils any one of the following conditions :
    i) The buyer holds sales tax/VAT registration/service tax/excise duty registration; or
    ii) The buyer holds trade licences i.e., a licence/registration certificate/membership certificate/registration under the Shops and Establishment Act, reflecting that the buyer is itself engaged in a busi-ness involving commercial activity; or

    iii) The buyer holds permits/licence, etc. for undertaking retail trade (like tehbazari and similar licence for hawkers); or

    iv) The buyer is an institution having certificate of incorporation or registration as a society or registration as public trust for its self consumption.

    c) Full records of the purchasers including their registration/licence/permit, etc. should be maintained on a day-to-day basis.

    d) WT of goods is permitted among group companies. However, there are further conditions :

— such WT to group companies taken together should not exceed 25% of the total turnover of the wholesale venture.

— the wholesale made to the group com-panies should be for their internal use only.
However, say, for example, if the whole-saler proposes to sell the goods to a group company which is a retailer. Can it be done ? This is clearly a permitted transaction. It cannot be a situation that the wholesaler can sell goods to a 3rd party retailer, but not to its own group company which is a retailer. It is only if the sale to group company is for internal consumption that there is a restriction. However the manner in which the restric-tion has been provided, it seems that sale to group company is permitted only for self-consumption.

    e) WT can be done as per normal business practice. Credit facilities as per normal business practice can be given, subject to applicable regulations.

    f) A Wholesale/Cash & carry trader cannot open retail shops to sell to the consumer directly.
    
7. NBFC activities :
NBFC activities are permitted under automatic route. There are capitalisation norms for such companies. For fund-based activities, in case the non-resident investor wants to invest up to 100% of the equity capital, the minimum capital required to be brought in is US$ 50 mn.

For non-fund-based activities the capitalisation is US$ 0.5 mn. The Consolidated FDI policy now has stated that the following activities will be considered as non-fund based activities :

    a. Investment Advisory Services.
    b. Financial Consultancy.
    c. Forex Trading.
    d. Money Changing Business.
    e. Credit Rating Agencies.

    8. Transfer of shares :
Transfer of shares from an Indian resident to a non-resident is generally under automatic basis. [AP Circular 16, dated 4th October 2004 read with other Circulars]. However if the Indian company is engaged in financial services, and the transfer is from an Indian resident to a non-resident, automatic route is not available.

8.1 DIPP had issued a Press Note No. 4, dated 10-2-2006 stating that transfer of shares of an Indian company engaged in financial services sector will be on automatic basis.

However the RBI had not agreed to that issue. Therefore when the RBI issued the Notification No. 179, dated 22-8-2008 (with effect from 10-2-2006 — the date of DIPP Press Note No. 4), it still provided that automatic route is not available if the Indian company is engaged in financial sector.

Now the FDI policy again states that if the Indian company is engaged in financial services sector, automatic route will not be available.

8.2 The RBI has issued the Notification No. 131, dated 17-3-2005. It has defined ‘financial services’ as ‘service rendered by banking and non-banking companies regulated by the Reserve Bank, insurance, companies regulated by Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority (IRDA) and other companies regulated by any other financial regulator as the case may be.’ The Notification (No. 131) was issued with effect from 16-10-2004 (the date of issue of AP Circular 16, dated 16-10-2004).

Thus if the company is regulated by a financial regulator, automatic route will not be available.

    9. Business services :
Clause 5.20 provides that FDI up to 100% is permitted for business services under automatic route. However it states that FDI is allowed in “Data processing, software development and computer consultancy services; Software supply services; Business and management consultancy services, Market research services, Technical testing & Analysis services.”

Does this mean that FDI is not allowed in other business services ?

This kind of a clarification was not provided in FDI policy earlier. It is also not provided in FEMA Notification.

This cannot be the intention. Any sector where there is no restriction, is freely permitted (clause 5.41 of FDI policy). FDI in service sector has been permitted on automatic basis except in the areas where there is a sectoral cap (like courier services, ground handling services at airports, telecom services, etc.).

In any case, FEMA prevails in case of interpretation issue. Therefore in my view, FDI is freely permitted in ‘services sector’.

See paragraph 2 on the basic FDI policy.

    10. In a nutshell it is a good attempt to provide the entire policy in one document. To refer to various Press Notes spread over a few years is difficult. Some issues will always remain. Over time, these should be sorted out.

The Finance Act, 2008

Transfer pricing : Management fees — Are you following the best practices ? — Part II

Article

1. Background :


The previous issue of this article (see BCAJ, December 2008,
page 373) specified the criteria to determine whether an intra-group service has
been rendered by a related entity. Once it has been concluded that a service has
been rendered, the second of the two primary issues pertaining to intra-group
services needs to be addressed, namely, the amount to be charged for the service
rendered.1 This is in line with the fundamental concept of transfer pricing (i.e.,
the arm’s-length principle). In other words, a charge for intra-group services
between related parties should reflect the charge that would have been made and
accepted between independent enterprises in comparable circumstances.

2. Benchmarking the intra-group management fee charge :


As regards the selection of the most appropriate method for
benchmarking an intra-group management fee charge, it may be noted that the OECD
Guidelines indicate that the transfer pricing methods which can be used to
determine an arm’s-length transfer price for intra-group services could include
the comparable uncontrolled price (CUP) method and the cost-plus method.2
Sub-classifications of the cost-plus method are the direct charge method and the
indirect charge method.


2.1 Comparable uncontrolled price method3 :


The CUP method compares the price charged for services
rendered in a controlled transaction with the price charged for similar services
rendered in a comparable uncontrolled transaction under comparable
circumstances.4

In practice, services in the nature of intra-group support
services generally may not be rendered by the group service provider to any
third parties in India or abroad, nor would similar services under similar
circumstances be procured by the group service recipient from any third parties
in India or abroad. This is mainly because of the very nature of intra-group
services, in that they are in the nature of support services which the group
service provider would render only to the entities within the group.
Consequently, in general, no internal comparables may be available in practice.

Moreover, regard being had to the nature of intra-group
services generally provided, it might also be difficult to procure external
comparables from the public domain. Also in the context of intra-group services,
as services rendered by the overseas parent are generally in the nature of
support services, the CUP method would not be the most appropriate method.
Consequently, in the absence of internal or external comparables, the CUP method
is generally not selected as the most appropriate method from a transfer pricing
perspective for analysing the arm’s-length nature of transactions involving
intra-group services.


2.2 Cost-plus method5 :


The cost plus method tests the arm’s-length nature of a
transfer price in a controlled transaction by reference to the gross profit
mark-up (e.g., gross profits divided by cost of rendering services)
realised in a comparable uncontrolled transaction.

Given the facts that details about internal or external
transactions may not be available for the application of the CUP method, and the
costs incurred by the parent/group service provider inasmuch as are attributable
to its subsidiary/service recipient may be easily identified or computed, and
given the fact that details of margins of comparable companies from transfer
pricing databases would generally be available, the total cost-plus method
would, in practice, be the most appropriate method to benchmark intra-group
service transactions.

As mentioned earlier, there are two variants of the cost-plus
method — the direct charge method and the indirect charge method.

2.2.1 Direct charge method :


Under the direct charge method, associated enterprises are
charged for specific services. For example, the overseas subsidiary may be
directly charged for a two-day visit of a software engineer who is on the roll
of the parent company and who may have visited the overseas subsidiary’s site at
the latter’s request to render certain consultancy or advisory services. In such
a case, the parent company can charge the specific costs for these consulting
services with or without a profit mark-up (as the case may be), directly to the
overseas subsidiary. A third party would also, in all probability, proceed in
this way under similar conditions and circumstances.

The direct charge method is applicable primarily when
services can be specifically identified for cost attribution. In such
circumstances, the expenses of the specific support group responsible for the
service rendered can be directly attributed to the services rendered (for
example, in terms of hours, travel expenses, etc.).

2.2.2 Indirect charge method :


The indirect charge method is appropriate when the services provided and the costs attributable thereto relate to a number of different entities. For example, there may be situations when an MNE cannot attribute direct costs either because the associated costs of a service rendered are not easily identifiable or the costs are incorporated into other transactions between the related entities. In those circumstances, a cost allocation or apportionment method is used which often necessitates a degree of estimation or approximation. Essentially, the relevant controlled transactions may be aggregated if it is impractical to analyse the pricing or profits of each individual transaction, or if such transactions are so interrelated that this is the most reliable method of benchmarking the transactions against the arm’s-length out-come. An appropriate allocation and apportionment of costs incurred by the group member in rendering the service to a specific affiliate should be commensurate with the quantum of the service rendered.
 
2.2.3 Which method is appropriate – direct charge or indirect charge ?

From the above, it can be inferred that the direct charge method should be preferred over the indirect charge method in cases where the services rendered by the taxpayer to other group members:

  • are the same or similar to those rendered to un-related parties; or
  • can be reasonably identified and quantified.

However, in cases where a particular service has been provided to a number of non-arm’s-length parties and the portion of the value of the service directly attributable to each of the parties cannot be determined, it is possible to use the indirect charge method.

2.2.4 Identifying the cost base for the indirect charge method,’

For application of the indirect charge method, it becomes necessary to ascertain the chargeable cost base. In this regard, it is necessary to take all costs directly or indirectly related to the services performed.

2.2.5 Apportioning  expenses  included  in the cost base and selecting  the appropriate allocation key,’

Having identified the cost base, the next issue to be addressed is that of apportioning the cost among various service recipients.

There is no specific method or formula specified for allocating the centralised costs incurred. Therefore, if the portion of the value of the service directly attributable to each of the service recipients cannot be determined (e.g., where global advertisement campaign is intended to benefit all the related entities), an appropriate allocation key is used to al-locate the costs. Charges for services rendered are determined by allocating those costs across all po-tential beneficiaries using an appropriate allocation key. Even the tax authorities would be interested in assessing the arm’s-length nature of the allocation criterion, since the indirect allocation method is open to possible manipulation and is highly dependent on the nature and usage of the intra-group services. Hence, it becomes imperative to select the proper allocation key.

The choice of the allocation key should be made by giving due consideration to the nature of the service involved and the use to which it is put. Some examples of allocation  keys are as under:

  • allocation of department costs based on sales of the group;
  • time spent by employees performing intra-group services;
  • units produced  or sold;
  • number of employees;
  • total expenses;
  • space used;
  • capital  invested;
  • asset quantum;  and
  • a combination of the above.

When choosing an allocation key, the taxpayer should consider the nature of the services and the use to which the services are put. For example, if the services relate to human resource activities, the proportionate number of employees may be the best measure of the benefit to each group member.

2.3  Mark-up on costs:

2.3.1 Generally:

Having identified the cost base and the basis of allocation to various group companies, the issue of marking up costs is the next issue in any transfer pricing analysis for intra-group services. This is because, depending on the facts and circumstances, the tax authorities in the foreign subsidiary’s country of residence may not allow a mark-up on costs unless it is adequately substantiated. Similarly, there may be issues in the home country of the service provider if no mark up is charged on value added services. Therefore, the costs incurred for the provision of intra-group services needs to be properly examined with a view to determining whether a mark-up on the cost base is justifiable.

Based on the international tax practice generally followed, it may be noted that determining whether a mark-up is appropriate and, where appropriate, what should be the quantum of the mark-up, require careful consideration of factors such as :

  • the nature of the activity and the services rendered;
  • the significance of the activity  to the group;
  • the functional profiling and the characterisation of the intra-group transactions involved;
  • the relative efficiency of the service supplier; and
  •  
  • any advantage that the activity creates for the group.

Mark-ups on costs should be applied, if at all, only after taking into account all the facts and circumstances surrounding the provision of intra-group services. Wherever the mark-up is applicable, it must be substantiated as being at arm’s length with a thorough analysis of arm’s-length comparables.

2.3.2 Benchmarking    the mark-up:

In the case of certain value-added activities where a mark-up needs to be charged, the question arises as to how to compute the mark-up on such services. Determining whether a mark-up is appropriate and, where applicable, the quantum of the mark-up requires careful consideration of the factors referred above.

To determine the mark-up, one would have to run a search on a transfer pricing database that deals with financial details of potentially comparable companies. The objective of the search is to identify potentially comparable companies that render similar services and to ascertain the margins of such comparable companies. Such comparable margins could then be used as a benchmark for the mark-up on the intra-group services within an MNE. Generally, the appropriate comparables for such inter-company services should be third parties that offer services with similar risk profile and intangibles.

However, it may also be noted that transfer pricing is not an exact science and therefore, more often than not, the application of the most appropriate method or methods and the database search would produce a range of figures, all of which are relatively equally reliable. Therefore, the actual determination of the arm’s-length price based on arm’s-length margins would necessarily require exercise of good judgment.

3. Documentation:

In addition to the documentation requirement discussed in the earlier issue of this article (which primarily dealt with the documentation required to demonstrate the actual rendition/receipt of intra-group services and fulfilment of the benefit test), additional documentation which must be maintained to demonstrate the arm’s-length nature of the intra-group service charge is discussed hereunder.

Although the documentation to be maintained in each specific case must be determined based on all the facts and circumstances, at a minimum, it is generally advisable that the following documentation be maintained on file in relation to the arm’s-length nature of the management fee charge:

* the documentation    that the service provider  undertakes to supply in support of justification of the fee for the services rendered, e.g., copies of time sheets  or cost centre  reports;

* detailed fee accounts or invoices from the payee which include (1) full details of services rendered over the period covered by the charge, (2) confirmation that the fee calculation agrees with the service contract, and (3) any other documents supplied by the payee, which support the amount of the charge. In particular, any substantiating documentation which must be tendered in accordance with the contract of services;

* a certificate  from a CPA, if possible,  certifying the viability of the method for allocation and apportionment of costs among subsidiaries, and the authenticity of the cost apportioned to each entity;

* as noted above, where a fixed key is used under the indirect charge method, it is important to substantiate the cost basis and to have details on file to show which costs have been included/ excluded with a fixed-key method;

* where a mark-up has been charged by the service provider, and a benchmarking search has been carried out on the transfer pricing databases for finding potentially comparable companies, the following should form part of the documentation maintained:

  • description of the database, along with the limitations of the database, if any;

  • detailed description of the process used to search for potentially comparable companies on the database;

  • details of filters, qualitative or quantitative, applied to shortlist closely comparable companies: ‘.

  • criteria used to accept/reject potentially comparable companies found on the database;

  • precise reasons for accepting/rejecting the comparable companies;

  • adjustments, if any, made to account for differences between the functions performed, risks borne and assets employed by the comparable companies and the margins earned by the entity providing intra-group management services;

  • sensitivity analysis, if any, carried out in respect of these margins; and

  • actual workings of the margins of comparable companies, and the application of the margins of comparable companies to the transaction in question.

All in all, it can be noted that robust documentation is a pre-requisite for demonstrating the arm’s-length nature of the intra-group service charge.

4. Other issues impacting management fee policies in an international context:

Besides the above transfer pricing-related issues, there are also other issues which merit consideration while designing management fees policy from an international tax perspective. These include:

  • Applicability of Service Tax on the management fee charge

  • Applicability of VAT on the management fee charge in the foreign country

  • Constitution of a ‘Service PE’ under the tax treaty by virtue of services being rendered by employees or other personnel beyond a certain threshold (or even irrespective of a threshold in some of India’s tax treaties)

  • Withholding tax implications.

5. Conclusion:

Globally, tax authorities have adopted an increasingly proactive and more sophisticated approach to examining transfer pricing policies in respect of intra-group support services. The Indian tax authorities have already taken a cue from them and are following a similar and aggressive approach while examining intra-group services, especially when an Indian company is the recipient of services and management fee charge. Accordingly, Indian MNEs with subsidiaries abroad, and more importantly, foreign MNEs operating in India, are well advised to contemporaneously document their intra-group arrangements and practices in respect of support services, so as to prepare in advance for an inevitable transfer pricing examination. Because intra-group services are regarded by many as one of the most likely areas to be examined by the transfer pricing authorities, taxpayers that have not performed the necessary analysis and maintained adequate documentation run the definite risk of being audited (with the possible result that their income will be reassessed by those same authorities).

Experience shows that while formulating an intra-group transfer pricing strategy, many MNEs fail to work out the overall business strategy in tandem with various other pertinent international tax planning considerations. Formulating a comprehensive transfer pricing strategy for intra-group service transactions also requires a well-founded understanding of various international tax planning principles, detailed knowledge of applicable tax treaties, as well as a thorough understanding of the laws and practices in the home and host countries. The over-all message is that it is imperative to consider all of these factors in the course of designing a proper intra-group management policy.

All in all, the best strategy for any MNE having intra-group service transactions is to formulate the intra-group management fee policy (with the help of transfer pricing experts) in sync with the overall objectives of the group, taking into account various tax and non-tax considerations; and maintaining adequate documentation to present the best possible defence before tax and transfer pricing authorities of the home and host countries!

Classical Accountancy to IFRS (A bird’s-eye view) Part I

Article

I. Introduction :


1. These are challenging times in many respects. A global
financial meltdown in which India cannot escape without hurt, a gruesome
terrorist attack on 26/11 on the financial capital of India i.e., our
dear Mumbai, politicians’ continuous play and ensuing election and what not. In
the field of Accounting and Auditing also we are expected to start a new
reporting procedure, namely, IFRS. It is stated to be applicable from 1st April
2011. However in reality, one will have to start looking at the accounts in
accordance with IFRS requirements much earlier, say, from 1st of April 2009.

2. In this background, it is thought fit to take a bird’s-eye
view of the entire journey from the base of ‘Classical Accounting’ to the
present-day IFRS. I do not pretend to be an expert in the field of IFRS. I
however, being a Chartered Accountant and forever a student of accountancy, love
this subject and it is my intention to have glimpses of the journey right from
1200 to 2008. A study of history is not merely a study of the past events, but
often tends to be a proper guide for what is there in store for future.

3. I wish to cover this history as under :

(a) Bookkeeping and accounts for a trader.

(b) Accountancy problems of a machine age.

(c) Stakeholders demanded accounting policies and
principles.

(d) Early development of Accounting Standards.

(e) Development of IFRS.

(f) Conclusion.


II. Bookkeeping and accounts for a trader :


1. All of us have studied in the first year of college
lectures the golden rules of bookkeeping, leading us to various types of
accounts. Through the medium of real, personal and nominal accounts, we have
also learnt the basis of preparation of ledger account, periodical trial balance
and a statement of final accounts, namely, profit & loss account and a balance
sheet. These were taught as golden rules of bookkeeping and accountancy and have
stood the test of time for approximately over 800 years.

2. The earliest evidence of present-day bookkeeping traces
back some 800 years, to an Italian Banker. The Italian monk Luca Paciolo, for
the first time documented these bookkeeping principles. He did not claim to be
an originator or an author of the system, but only a describer of a practice to
write the books of accounts. Even the book that documents this ‘Bookkeeping’ is
a book ‘Summa’ which is essentially a book on mathematics, containing some 36
chapters on bookkeeping and accounts. Since it is a part of a book on
mathematics, the present golden rules of bookkeeping have been expressed in the
said book in the form of algebraic equations and not in descriptive narration.
Since every business transaction has a two-way effect, it was easy to put it in
the form of an algebric equation. Truly, mathematics is the mother of all
sciences.

3. The reason for giving a brief account of the otherwise
well-known origin of bookkeeping is to emphasise that :

(a) Certain principles are fundamental and are not subject
to the normal notion of ‘Change’.

(b) IFRS is making a sincere attempt to make the
figures in Comprehensive Income Statement (earlier equivalent of P & L A/c)
and Statement of Financial Position (earlier equivalent of Balance Sheet) more
mathematics-based and avoiding hypothetical figures based on assumptions. It
involves a lot of valuation, but again the valuation is based on
mathematical modules
.


4. In any event, the primary objective of bookkeeping and
accounts is to understand the results of business operations for a particular
period (either positive or negative) and to understand the position of assets
and obligations on a given date. Over a period of 800 years of bookkeeping and
accounts, this primary objective has also not undergone any change.

5. What has changed over the year however is the trade or
commerce in the following aspects :

(a) The nature of trade and commerce

(b) The volume and value of trade

(c) The geographical spread

(d) Entities carrying on the business.

(e) Number and groups of persons who need to know the
results of operations.


6. In early days, persons carrying on trade and commerce
across the globe were essentially individuals, although they might be
undertaking a Caravan in a group. Such an individual was adventurous and
enterprising, brave and astute, knowledgeable and intelligent, but was
essentially a loner and wanted to know the results of his operations for his own
calculations.

7. A simple double-entry bookkeeping for recording
transactions manually, leading to the preparation of final accounts of a trader
were sufficient for him to take future decisions. He was not required to
disclose the results of his operations to anyone except perhaps two other
dominant persons, whose patronage as well as blessings were considered important
by him. In today’s terminology these two persons could be described loosely as
stakeholders. These stakeholders were the kings of the regions he traded in and
of course the religious heads of the place he belonged to.

8. The king would demand mostly an ad hoc amount of
the booty depending on mutual needs and also the relative power enjoyed. The
share demanded in such a case hardly related to the results of operations, but
the trader knew his calculations and would pay depending on his business
profits.

9. The religious head, on the other hand exercised a lot of moral influence. Through the medium of ‘Confession’ according to the Christianity or in the name of Allah in Islamic traditions or in the name of ‘Dharma’ as per Hindu philosophy, voluntary contributions were made for the cause of religion by traders from time to time. I would, however, not call them stakeholders of a trader, but sharers of the income without there being an obligation to disclose the results of business operations. Essentially, therefore, simple bookkeeping sufficed for the businessman to know for himself where he stood.


III. Accounting problems of machine age:

The situation however dramatically changed with the discovery of engines and machineries for the purpose of trade because of the following developments:

a) Invention of machines creates the possibility of large-scale production. It was never a trading in simplicity, but it turned out to be manufacturing and or processing and trading on a very large scale.

(b) Development of banking system and monetary economics enabling a manufacturer and trader, to have a large volume for which large funds could be availed through multiple credit creation system described by the classical economists as multiplier effect of a bank deposit.

(c) Development of a joint stock company system of organisation creating a two-tier ownership – some people owned and managed a business; the others were passive owners through different types of stock and debt instruments.

(d) Establishment of a rule of law and administrative and judicial system to regulate the legal framework and a judicial system to oversee the administration having a nation-based sovereign sanction.

2. I have just noted the above four contributory factors without any historic elaboration, since our readers are well aware of these historic developments. However, the importance of all the above factors lies in the fact that the number of stakeholders in a business entity increased by leaps and bounds. The bookkeeping results were not only meant for the owner trader or sole proprietor him-self, but it was necessary to share the results of operations with larger number of persons. These large number of persons would come from different culture, speaking different language and also due to geopolitical and national differences, held different perceptions based on their own motives and objectives.

3. The mere bookkeeping and accounts was not enough, and the classification of income and expenses, classification of assets and liabilities became more prominent. At the end of the day, it is really a classification between Capital v. Revenue, either income or expenses. The classified capital expenditure occupied the assets side in a balance sheet, whereas the classified revenue expenditure occupied a place in profit and loss statement. Similarly classified capital receipt occupied the liability side of a balance sheet; the classified revenue receipt occupied the credit or income side of Profit & Loss Statement.

4. Although laws were made and the rules laid down, the difference between capitaland revenue, either expenditure or receipt has led to volumes of literature since the 17th Century till the beginning even of the 21st Century. So much so that various judicial and legal brains have tried this several times and still would conclude that the differences could be sorted out by long-drawn out arguments and litigations and equally efficiently by the toss of a coin.

5. This acute and fierce fight between capital and revenue arises basically because of ever conflicting interests of the stakeholders. The bare-bodied book-keeping and accountancy, fully transparent like naked human beings of early civilisation, started wearing clothes and more fancy clothes as the times changed. We have fancy clothes depending on an occasion like party, marriage or other ceremony, official function, sports, evening dress and what not. Similarly, our primitive bookkeeping and accountancy started wearing different clothes. The owner management was interested in showing its best operating results when it came to its own remuneration or when it wanted finance for its operations from financers like bankers or passive owners. It tried to pretend like a pauper when it faced the labour force which got more and more organised or the revenue collecting authorities created by legal frameworks.

IV. Stakeholders demand more transparency:

1. The large majority of passive owner stakeholders, the financial stakeholders were however not satisfied with the skeleton reporting, frauds and manipulations and window dressing of accounts. The owner managers were also equally skeptical in making complete disclosures for various reasons and this created a tug of war, a game of chess between them and selective disclosure followed.

2. The legal framework of a region invariably created an independent agency like that of an Auditor, who specialised in examining the books of accounts maintained in accordance with prescribed legal frameworks, and it really did its job to the best of its ability. The auditing profession has developed and adopted not only auditing procedures and standards but also participated in a great measure even for establishment of common language in accounts through the medium of accounting principles and policies. MAOCARO order in India in the year 1975 is only one such example.
 
3. In spite of this all-round development, accounting manipulations basically arising as a result of differing perceptions and conflicting interests of various stakeholders did take place from time to time and of various dimensions.

V. Development of Accounting Standards:

1. Land, labour, capital and enterprise were described by economists as the factors of production. Out of these, except for land, all other factors of production were and are always floating and capable of movement. In spite of various restrictions put forward by sovereign authorities, they would like to cross the barriers of any type put forward by any sovereign authority. For its relatively free movement, various stakeholders required that their stakes in a business entity are safeguarded for which the present system of accounting policies and principles are thoroughly inadequate.

2. In order to iron out the differing treatment to the same set of transactions, efforts were made for establishment of sound accountancy principles and policies. Similarly, the auditing profession was also required to adopt sound and well-documented reporting standards. These however were scattered and fragmented efforts and were sovereign specific. This created lot of problems for the scattered and diversified group of stakeholders and there was a demand for establishment of Accounting and Auditing Standards. As a result of this movement, Accountancy and Auditing Standards Boards were established by each sovereign power.

3. Even in India, ICAI set up its own Accounting Standards Board and started pronouncing Accounting Standards. The initial pace was of course very slow. Other countries specially the European countries set up various functional bodies and started pronouncing what is known as International Accounting Standards (IAS). These standards were not only followed in Europe, but even the Middle East and far-eastern countries also accepted them. The USA however created its own GAAPs and it considered its standards the best in the world. Anyone wanting to do business by using capital or technical know-how of the USA, was forced to con-vert his accounts in accordance with US GAAPs.

4. The pace of development was however very slow. These standards were initially only toothless tigers and powerful industrial lobbies hardly paid any attention to them, unless the standard was such as would suit their own policy. These AS in India or IAS were mostly based on intentions, permitted alternative treatment and were flexible to an extent to satisfy business entities. On the other hand US GAAPs were more rule-based and on the face of it appeared very stringent.

5. Although the growth of these standards took place, the last decade of the 20th Century also witnessed terrible business failures in the U.S.A. Another related development was that IAS and AS no longer remained toothless tigers, but acquired necessary bite because of legal compulsions.

VI. Development of worldwide IFRS :

1. The first decade of the 21st Century noticed severe expectation gap between the stakeholders and those who managed the business. Sarbanes-Oxley also played its part. Earlier business failures were also bothering everyone and a need was felt to have a worldwide common accounting language, along with stringent corporate governance provisions.

2. Even the US agreed to modify its own earlier tough stand and accepted in principle the world-wide common accounting language and IFRS has now evolved. Our country has also accepted gradual introduction of IFRS, to begin with, for listed companies.

3. We the Chartered Accountants, in the interest of our professional development, are required to accept them, study them and should take part in their proper presentation. There should be neither an ecstasy nor any agony in the use of a common language.


VII. Conclusion of Part  I:

1. An attempt is made to give a bird’s-eye view leading us to the present study of IFRS. The language is purposely kept a non-technical narrative with a scope for the readers to read a lot between the lines to fill up the historical details. Essentially, bookkeeping captured business transactions some 800 years back through mathematical module and we are once again through IFRS, embracing in a way a mathematical base for presentation based on what is known as fair valuation. In the next and concluding part, I propose to cover some broader macro issues and some example-based micro issues again in non-technical language.

2. While I am making more noise on mathematics when dealing with IFRS, let me share with you a story about the present financial crisis in a meeting on the Wall Street (Courtesy: Abhijit Phadnis). One person while talking in the meeting in an angered voice stated that after all, 25/5 = 5. An old man attending the meeting challenged the mathematical equation and stated that 25/5 = 14. Still more angered, the young man asks the old guy to prove. The old man comes to the board and explains his equation as under:

25/5 = 14 because
5/5 = 1
25-5 = 20
20/5 = 4

so, two divisions give an answer 14.

The young man got wild with this mathematical knowledge and said that 5 X 5 = 25. Prove your equation in a reverse way. The old man once again said that 5 X 14 = 25 as under:

5 x 1 = 5
5 x 4 = 20
5+20 =25

The lighter vein and a bit of a smile on your face apart, the truth is mathematics is pure, but twisted mathematics can give any answer. What has happened on Wall Street and everywhere in the present situation is all-round confusion, giving rise to a crisis which has given rise to erosion in confidence, leading to depression and doom. I only sincerely hope that IFRS does not get caught by twisted mathematicians in the field of fair valuations. Do you get me, my dear friends?

Article : World Wide Tax Trends — Thin Capitalisation

Article

There are broadly two ways in which a company may be
financed. One is by the issue of shares in the equity and the other is by
borrowing. The methods by which companies garner their capital affects the
taxation of corporate income. This arises because the computation of the taxable
income of the company and also that of the persons providing the capital are
both affected by the way in which that capital is provided.


In practice, companies are frequently financed partly by
equity contributions and partly by loans. The proportion of a company’s capital
which is financed by each method may well be determined by considerations which
arise from economic or commercial necessity and may have nothing to do with tax.
As a consequence of the fundamental difference between loan and equity capital,
however, the tax treatment of a company and the contributors of its capital also
necessarily differs fundamentally according to whether the capital is equity or
loan capital. With respect to the taxation of its income or profits, the basic
difference is that the shareholder’s reward — the distribution to him of
profits, usually in the form of a dividend — is not deducted in arriving at the
taxable profit of the company. Interest on a loan, however, is usually allowed
as a deductible expense in computing the taxable profits of the company paying
it (being effectively regarded as an expense of earning those profits).

Financial leverage is an important aspect in outbound tax
planning and the planning is typically aimed at effective use (deductibility) of
interest on debt incurred (whether third-party or internal) in conjunction with
a transaction. It may also be possible to claim deduction for interest in more
than one tax jurisdiction through judicious planning.

This can be illustrated as below :


The steps would include :



  • The Company in India takes a loan from external sources in India;



  • The Company in India funds the Intermediary Company with equity;



  • The Intermediary Company gives a loan to the Buy Company (a local company set
    up in the same jurisdiction as the target company for the purpose of
    acquisition). It also infuses equity into this Company;



  • The Buy Company, then acquires the Target Company.



The interest payments on and repayments of the debt are
generally serviced by the Target’s future cash flows, whereas, the debt is
secured by the assets of the Target and the assets of the Buy Company (which in
most instances is a pure holding company).

In the above illustration, it may be possible to claim a
deduction for the interest in India and also in Country B. Further, if tax
consolidation is possible in Country B, then interest costs of the Buy Company
can be offset against the profits of the Target Company. At best, the home
country would only be able to retain a withholding tax on interest payments,
which may again be mitigated or reduced through proper treaty planning.

The expression ‘thin capitalisation’ is commonly used to
describe a situation where the proportion of debt to equity exceeds certain
limits. Thin capitalisation legislation is a tool used by tax authorities to
prevent what they regard as a leakage of tax revenues as a consequence of the
way in which a corporation is financed. Financing a resident corporation with
debt is considerably more efficient from a tax point of view than financing with
equity. The difference in tax treatment is an incentive to provide capital to
the corporation in the form of debt instead of equity. If there are no thin
capitalisation rules, it is relatively easy for a non-resident to advance funds
to a resident corporation in a way that is characterised as debt, so that the
payments on the debt are deductible as interest payments. This is true for
controlling shareholders in particular, because they are probably indifferent to
the form in which their investment is structured, and thus are likely to be
guided by tax considerations when structuring the legal form of their
investment.

The object of Thin Capitalisation Regulations is to prevent the use of excessive ‘in-house’ loans which would be detrimental to the revenue of home country (where the borrower is resident), by reason of the fact that profits would effectively be shifted to the foreign lender, as the interest payments would be tax deductible in the home country.

Countries, through Thin Capitalisation Regulations ensure that the deductions for interest on debt owed to connected parties, is allowable in the home country as a deduction in the hands of the borrower, only if within the permissible limits. While financial leverage has, on its own standing, its own value, this is definitely impaired when interest is not deductible either wholly or partially.

Overview of the Thin Capitalisation Regulations in some key jurisdictions:

A wide variety of methods are used to deal with thin capitalisation in various countries. These approaches range from complex legislation to no specific thin capitalisation legislation at all.

Within this range {our general approaches may be distinguished: (1) the fixed ratio approach (2) the subjective approach (3) application of rules concerning hidden profit distributions; and (4) the ‘no rules’ approach.

The emphasis on the above factors or combinations of factors often varies from country to country. Measures taken by countries to limit excessive debt financing by shareholders are either based on specific legislation or administrative rules or on practice.

Under the ‘fixed ratio’ approach, if the debtor company’s total debt exceeds a certain proportion of its equity capital, the interest on the loan or the interest on the excess of the loan over the approved proportion is automatically disallowed and/or treated as a dividend. The ratio may be used as a safe-haven rule. In this backdrop it should be noted that countries which use the fixed ratio approach usually have specific thin capitalisation legislation.

The basis of the ‘subjective’ approach is to look at the terms and nature of the contribution and the circumstances in which the financing has been made and to decide, in the light of all facts and circumstances, whether the real nature of the contribution is debt or equity. Some countries using the subjective approach have specific legislation. Other countries use more general rules if these are available, such as general anti-avoidance legislation, provisions on ‘abuse of law’, provisions on substance over form. There are also countries that apply ‘hidden profit distribution’ rules to reclassify interest as dividends. In some of these countries the hidden profit distribution rules are applied along , with specific rules which limit the deduction of interest on loans from shareholders. The general principles of transfer pricing rules may also playa role in this respect. The underlying idea is that if the loan exceeds what would have been lent in an arm’s-length situation, the lender must be considered to have an interest in the profitability of the enterprise and the loan, or any amount in excess of the arm’s-length amount, must be seen as being designed to procure share in the profits.

This article provides an overview of the the Thin -‘” Capitalisation Regulations in five major world economies: France, Germany, the Netherlands, the United Kingdom (UK) and the United States (US).

While some countries, like France, have detailed regulations, others like the UK, do not specify a debt: equity ratio, but merely give the right to the Inland Revenue to challenge the interest deductions keeping in view the arm’s-length principle.

France:

Deductibility of Interest – an overview:

New Thin Capitalisation Regulations were introduced for the financial year beginning on or after January 1, 2007. Related party interest falling within the scope of the new Regulations is tax-deductible only to the extent that it meets two tests, which are applicable on a standlone basis at the level of each borrowing company, as opposed to a consolidated basis.

These tests are the Arm’s-Length Test and the Thin Capitalisation Test.

Conditions for disallowance:

Under the Arm’s-Length Test, the interest rate is capped to the higher of the following two rates:

• The average annual interest rate on loans granted by financial institutions that carry a floating rate and that have a minimum term of two year; and

• The interest rate at which the French Company ould have borrowed from any unrelated financial institution (for example, a bank) in similar circumstances.

The portion of interest that exceeds the higher of the above thresholds is not tax-deductible and must be added back to the French Company’s taxable income for the relevant financial year.

Under the Thin Capitalisation Test, the deductibility of interest may be restricted, even if the conditions specified under the Arm’s-Length Test have been met with.

Here, the interest paid in excess of the following three thresholds is not tax-deductible:
 
The Thin Capitalisation Regulations now stand combined with the General Interest Limitation rules.
 
•    The debt-to-equity  ratio threshold,  which is calculated in accordance with the following for- The Business Tax Reform (2008), introduced a new mula (The amount of interest that meets the concept for restriction of the interest deduction. The Arm’s-Length Test x 150% of the net equity of restriction applies regardless of whether the inter-the borrower at either the beginning or end of est is paid to a related party or an unrelated lender, the financial year. The total indebtedness of the such as a bank. French borrowing company resulting from borrowing from related companies);

•    The earning threshold, which equals 25% of the adjusted current income. The adjusted current income is the operation profit before deducting the following items: tax; related-party interest; depreciation and amortisation; and certain spe-cific lease rents;

The interest income threshold, which equals interest received by the French Company from related companies.

If the interest that is considered to be tax-deductible under the Arm’s-Length Test exceeds all three of the above thresholds, the portion of the interest that exceeds all three of the above thresholds is not tax-deductible, unless the excess amount of interest lower than Euro 150,000.The nondeductible portion of interest is added back to the taxable income of the borrowing entity. However, it can be carried forward for deduction in subsequent financial years. A 5% reduction applies each year to the balance of the interest carried forward to future financial years beginning with the second subsequent financial year .

Exemptions:
The above thresholds that limit the deductibility of interest do not apply if the French borrowing company can demonstrate that the consolidated debt-to-equity ratio of its group is higher than the consolidated debt-to-equity ratio of the French borrowing Company on a standalone basis (based on its statutory accounts). In determining the consolidated debt-to-equity ratio of the group, French and non-French affiliated companies and consolidated net equity and consolidated group indebtedness (excluding inter-company debt) must be taken into account.

Germany:
Deductibility of Interest – An overview:

The Thin Capitalisation Regulations now stand combined with the General Interest Limitation rules.

The Business Tax Reform (2008), introduced a new concept for restriction of the interest deduction. The restriction applies regardless of whether the interest is paid to a related party or an unrelated lender, such as a bank.

This new Regulation, which is effective for tax years beginning after 25 May 2007 and ending on after 1 January 2008, applies to companies resident in Germany, companies residing abroad but maintaining a permanent establishment in Germany and partnerships with German branch.

Conditions for disallowance:
The new rule disallows’ excess net interest expense,’ which is defined as the excess of interest expenses over interest income if such excess exceeds 30% of the earnings before (net) interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA).

Exemptions:
The limitation rule does not apply if any of the following conditions is satisfied:

•    The net interest expense is less than Euro 1 million;

•    The Company is not a member of a consolidated group (a group of companies that can be consolidated under International Financial Re-porting Standards);

•    The equity ratio of the German subgroup is equal to or higher than the equity ratio for the group as a whole, as shown on the balance sheet of the preceding fiscal year (so-called ‘escape clause’). A ‘group’ is defined as a group of entities that could be consolidated under IFRS, regardless of whether a consolidation has been actually carried out. The escape clause does not apply if any entity in the worldwide group has received loans from a related party not included in the group and if the interest paid on such debt exceeds 10% of the net interest expense.

The Netherlands:

Deductibility  of Interest –    An overview:

Since 1 January 2004, when the Thin Capitalisation Regulations first came into effect, there have been several amendments, such as broadening the definition of debt.

In general, in the Netherlands, interest expenses (and other costs) with respect to related party loans (or deemed related party loans) may be partly or completely disallowed if the taxpayer is part of a group, as defined under Dutch generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP /international financial reporting standards (IFRS). Further, even if an external debt is formally granted by a third party but is in fact owed to a related party, the Thin Capitalisation Regulations apply.

Conditions for disallowance:

The Regulations provide two ratios to determine the amount of excess debt.

Under the first ratio, which is a fixed ratio, the average fiscal debt may not exceed more than three times the Company’s average fiscal equity plus Euro 500,000. For the purpose of this ratio, debt is defined as the balance of the company’s loan receivables and loan payables. The balance sheet for tax purposes is used to determine the average debt and equity.

The second ratio is  the group ratio. When the Company files its corporate tax return, it may elect to apply for the group ratio. Under this alternative, the Company may look at the commercial consolidated debt-to-equity ratio of the (international) group of which it is a member. If the Company’s commercial debt-to-equity ratio does not exceed the debt-to-equity ratio of the group, the tax deduction for interest on related-party loans is allowed.

In certain circumstances, The Dutch Supreme Court has also in its judgements re-characterised loans as informal capital contributions.

The deduction of interest paid including related costs and currency exchange results, by a Dutch company on a related-party loan is disallowed to the extent that the loan relates to one of the following transactions:

•    Dividend distributions or repayments of capital by the taxpayer or by a related company or
a related  individual  resident  in the Netherlands;

•    Capital contributions by a taxpayer, by a related Dutch company or by a related individual resident in the Netherlands into a related company; or

•    The acquisition or extension of an interest by the taxpayer, by a related individual resident in the Netherlands in a company that is related to the taxpayer after this acquisition or extension.

Exemptions:

This interest deduction limitation does not apply  if either of the  following conditions are  satisfied:

•    The loan and the related transaction are primarily based on business considerations;

•    At the level of the creditor, the interest on the loan is subject to a tax on income or profits that results in a levy of at least 10% on a tax base determined under Dutch standards, disregarding the patent and group interest boxes (which offer certain tax concessions. However, effective from 1 January 2008, even if the income is subject to tax of at least 10% at the level of the creditor, interest payments are not deductible if the tax authorities can demonstrate it to be likely that the loan or the related transaction is not primarily based on business considerations. The measure described in the preceding sentence applies to loans that were in existence on 1 January 2008, with no grandfathering.

The United States:

Deductibility of Interest – An overview:
The US has thin capitalisation principles under which the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) may attempt to limit the deduction for interest expenses if a US corporation is thinly capitalised. In such case, funds loaned to it by a related party may be recharacterised by the IRS as equity. As a result, the corporation’s deduction for interest expense may be considered distributions to the related party and be subject to withholding tax.

Conditions for disallowance:

It can be said that the US adopts a facts-and-circumstances approach in determining whether or not a US corporation is thinly capitalised and whether an instrument should be treated as equity or debt.

While no fixed rules exist, a debt-to-equity ratio of 3 : 1 or less is usually acceptable to the IRS, provided the US corporation can adequately service the debt without the help of related parties.

However, a deduction is disallowed for certain ‘disqualified’ interest paid on loans made or guaranteed by related foreign parties that are not subject to U.S. tax on the interest received. This disallowed interest may be carried forward to future years and allowed as a deduction.

In addition under the US Treasury Regulations, interest expense accrued on a loan from a related foreign lender must be actually paid before the US borrower can deduct the interest expense.

Exemptions:
No interest deduction is disallowed under the above provision if the payer corporation’s debt-to-equity ratio does not exceed 1.5. If the debt-to-equity ratio exceeds this amount, the deduction of any ‘excess interest expense’ of the payer is deferred.

The United Kingdom:

 As mentioned earlier, the Regulations in the UK are broad based rather than specific. In other words, UK’s transfer pricing measures apply to the provision of finance (as well as to trading income and expenses). As a result, Companies are required to self assess their tax liability on financing transactions using the arm’s length principle. Consequently, the Inland Revenue may challenge interest deductions on the grounds that, based on all of the circumstances, the loan would not have been made at all, or that the amount loaned or the interest rate would have been less, if the lender was an unrelated third party acting at arm’s length.

European Union (EU) aspects of Thin Capitalisation Rules:

In the case of EU countries, the tax environment is subject to significant external influence in the form of the Ee Treaty and decisions of the European Court of Justice (ECJ). The ECJ decision in the Lankhorst-Hohorst has revived discussions on the compatibility of thin capitalisation rules with the non-discrimination principle of the EC Treaty. The ECJ held in that case that the German thin capitalisation rules which applied only to non-resident companies violated the freedom of establishment provision contained in Article 43 of the EC Treaty. A number of EU countries have thereafter decided to amend their thin capitalisation rules and extent their applicability to resident companies as well.

Thus, in any tax planning exercise involving a financial leverage, Thin Capitalisation Regulations must be taken into cognisance, especially if one of the objectives of such an exercise is to minimise the Global Effective Tax Rate.

Classical Accountancy to IFRS (A bird’s-eye view) Part II

ArticleI. Some macro
issues :

Accounting year :

1. Normally every sovereign state provides a legal framework
to decide about the accounting year. Every entity carrying on a business is
required to prepare the final accounts as understood by us for pre-defined
accounting year. Besides annual report to various stakeholders, collection of
tax revenue is also based on this pre-determined accounting year. In India, such
an accounting year is financial year starting from 1st April and ending on 31st
March. Earlier in India, sentimental luxury relating to choice of an accounting
year was given to every business entity. No longer is such a luxury permissible.

2. However, business entities are no longer national but one
invariably finds a multinational or a conglomerate of cross-border
holding/subsidiary and associate companies. When different countries have
different accounting years, there is a perpetual problem of consolidation of
group accounts. One will argue that a good business entity would be, in any
case, preparing quarterly accounts for presentation to various stakeholders.
Once quarterly accounts are made available, consolidation is merely an exercise
of year on year inclusion and exclusion of either one quarter or at the most two
quarters.

3. Year-end consolidation exercise, however, is not a simple
arithmetical affair but involves lot of work. The question is “What is the value
addition” as a result of this avoidable exercise ? When the world community is
accepting a common accounting language, should one not address this issue ? I
submit that at a macro level, it is necessary to have a debate and discussion
and the issue needs to be sorted out amicably. Government budget in our country
used to be presented in India at 5 p.m. on 28th February, every year, because
time zonewise it suited British colonial rulers for whom it used to be 11 a.m.
We continued this practice for almost over 50 years after independence. It is an
example of how in some convenient matters we choose to be rather causing
inconvenience perpetually.

II. Currency expression of accounting figures :


The illustrative schedule of Comprehensive Income Statement
and Statement of Financial Position as per IFRS are figures expressed in
thousands of currency unit. It would mean expressing the figures in millions and
billions and trillions. In India, we enjoy the luxury of expressing figures in
units, hundreds, thousands, lacs and even crores. There is no uniformity. Do we
wait for legal compulsion or would like to follow what is globally acceptable
and understood ? I submit that this apparently no impact area from the point of
view of results of operation needs to be changed so as to conform to the
International Standards.

III. Presentation of annual report :


An annual report is required to be presented to all the
stakeholders who are not necessarily shareholders. How should the annual report
look like ? Although it is a mandatory requirement as to what should appear in
annual report, there are companies which provide certain information on
voluntary basis. However, one finds a lot of diversity in use of paper, use of
type-setting, use of photographs, order of contents, etc. One must have come
across annual reports where not only the quality of paper is very poor, but the
type-setting is such that one cannot read without a binocular. This is the
information which the stakeholder is expected to read. I remember a couplet
written in the context of a prospectus and some of the poetic lines are as
under :

Before you invest, read the Prospectus,

It provides information, which is given to protect us.

Summarised in it are all the figures which are composed.

It contains all the risks to which you are exposed

Don’t you know where to start ?

Smaller the print, greater the hazard.

Well, I do not mean that in every case a small print is a
hazard (except to your eyesight), but standardisation in this apparently no
operational impact area is also necessary.

IV. Limitations of written figures :


1. Many times, the figures may not convey full meaning and
disclosure by way of written text without a legal compulsion may not be
forthcoming. I believe that even IFRS contains such areas. Alternatively, the
meaning would materially change with context explanation. Some years back, a
theatre personality was being interviewed on TV. A simple sentence of 3 words
‘Police caught thief’ was shown by him to have 3 different meanings depending on
which word you emphasise; and with different body language, he showed 10 more
meanings of a simple sentence of 3 words.

2. It is not the purpose of this article to write
specifically about what happened in Satyam. That would be a matter of a separate
article involving lot of debate and discussion and even perhaps a shock
treatment. However, I do reiterate that IFRS compliance is not much of a
difference qualitatively from classical accounting theory, but a classical
example of how to make simple things look extremely complex. And yet could be
far away from transparency, accountability due to window-dressing.

I write this because ‘Satyam’
claimed to be the first company to be IFRS compliant three years ahead of the
date of its applicability and its annual report for the year ended 31-3-2008 on
pages 125 to 167 contains complete conversion of accounts if IFRS is followed.



V. Adoption, adaptation and convergence :


1. News from USA :


The discussion between IASB and FASB continues. Just as we
have political and economic summits, the two bodies met and entered into what is
known as ‘Norwalk Agreement’ in 2002. At the end of the summit they made joint
announcements that they would undertake some joint research projects to iron out
difference between the two, some projects would be short term; others may take
little more time. In substance, they agreed that they should be together in long
term in defining and dictating (in a nice way — no pun intended) the world
accounting language. I am reminded of a famous satirical novel ‘Animal Farm’,
written by George Orwell where you get a message that “all animals are equal
but some are always more equal than others”
.

2. Process of unification :


As a part of a move to extend a co-operative hand, SEC in the USA will review the faithfulness and consistency of foreign private issuers IFRS compliant Financial Statements from 2005. SEC issued a statement around that time that if few areas are looked into, SEC will not insist on reconciliation of IFRS compliant accounts with US GAAP, for US listing. This would avoid multiple accounting presentations. On its part, IASB also modified its several standards in line with US GAAP. As a result of the process, IASB assumes that countries will adopt IFRS 11 as issued by IASB without any modification”. This is based on the theory that IASB adopts some US GAAPs; some areas are jointly researched and issued as new IASB, other complicated and complex areas would be soon investigated to iron out the differences and then world accounting language would be the same.

3. Position  in EU countries:

a) Countries in EU (European Union) have made IFRS mandatory for all listed companies and it is reported that starting 1st January 2005, 8000 EU listed companies  adopted IFRS and proposed listed companies will follow suit.

b) Beyond listed companies, however, there appears to be a lot of confusion. Out of EU countries, only Greece, Italy and Denmark (effective from 2009) require IFRS for individual accounts of listed companies and none of them require it for non-listed companies. Germany allows companies to provide individual accounts using IFRS, but still requires them to prepare primary statements following German National Standards. Newly joined 10 countries in EU also require annual statements according to their own national accounting standards – a system of dual accounting (national and international standards !). National pride continues and legal adoption is still delayed. Some countries would like to adopt IFRS one by one and not as a package. In Europe, there are IASB approved IFRS as well as EU endorsed IFRS, besides national accounting stan-dards. Each of these serve a different purpose for different state of stakeholders. Though statements continue to be issued from time to time, the picture is far from clear and although a road map is constructed, there is always a difference between a map on a paper which looks very clear, and the actual road which is not an expressway or freeway. It has lot of potholes, blockages and rough patches.

4. Indian scenario:

Our Institute (ICAI) is awakening members, holding seminars, workshops for them. What was a trickle in 2007-08, is likely to become a flowing stream, but with a restricted speed. The members are bound to follow ICAI with respect and would become as usual, studious students. The revenue departments, the company law department and various industry associations, however, are still not enthusiastic supporters. The recent ‘Satyam Episode’, where the company claimed to be the first to be IFRS compliant, would also come in the way of proper studies because lot of defense mechanism will have to be used in damage control exercise. Regulatory authorities also may put lot of hurdles with justifiable reasons. One of the principles of investigation is ‘Distrust the obvious’ and that would come in the way of smoother regulatory work for some time. Members of the public would say with one voice, “Let the accounts be basically transparent” – whether they are Indian GAAP compliant or IFRS compliant or US GAAP compliant can be examined later.”

VI. Micro level simple examination of a part of Accounting Standard:

1. Having examined some macro issues, let me turn attention to a specific Accounting Standard, namely, Revenue Recognition (AS-9) to examine the Standard with reference to :

    a) Accounting  Theory  and  Practice.

    b) IAS Standard.

    c) IFRS Requirement

2. Case study accounting theory and practice:

As a case study for the purpose of this examination, I have taken a very simple example of sale of goods on credit, pure and simple. ABC Ltd. has sold goods worth Rs.50 crores to 100 different customers. Since these are the goods manufactured by ABC Ltd., beside sales price, the actual invoices also include excise duty and Vat at 16% and 12%, respectively. The credit term is 30 days and interest is to be charged @ 18% p.a. for non-payment in time. I am not involving additional complications such as export sales or sales out of the state, in our own country, but both these may be having implications in collection of indirect tax revenue with exceptions and exclusions on specific grounds.

3. In such a scenario, the accounting theory and practice, which is age-old and based on common sense and business experience and wisdom has taught us that

(a) Revenue generated is to be taken to the credit of profit and loss account to the extent of Rs.64.96 crores.

(b) Amount  receivable  at the end of the year is to be shown sundry debtors on the asset side, under the heading current assets exactly to the same extent.

(c) Mercantile system of accounting is to be followed.

(d) Actual bad debts must be written off.

(e) Depending on experience, a provision must be made for doubtful debts.

(f) If there is a policy, a provision is to be made for discount on prompt payment of debtors.

(g) A businessman should be conservative, i.e., he should quickly recognise losses and expenses, but should be slow in recognising possible gains. Interest on delayed payments by debtors is normally accounted for on actual receipt basis.

4. In accordance with the above principles, the businessman would pass the accounting entries and each of the entries that he passes, there would be impact on the actual revenue to be recognised and also debtors in the form of current assets to be shown. The conventional presentation, however make all fluctuating adjustments on the debit side of profit and loss account, without touching the figure of revenue by way of sales recognised. However, in the case of presentation of debtors, on the asset side, he would make all the adjustment to the figure of debtors. Common sense, uniformly applied acquires the force of law and Sch. VI, Form of profit and loss account and balance sheet also required us to do the same thing over a number of years.

5. Other permutations and combinations of accounting entries would follow depending on varying degrees of a contract of sale (Basically governed by the Sale of Goods Act.) Theses variations as per the Sale of Goods Act would not materially be different than the accounting entries as mentioned in para 3 above. However, for the sake of completeness, they are just narrated below:

(a) Changes in delivery schedule.
(b) Conditional delivery subject to installation and inspection
(c) Sale on returnable/approval basis
(d) Hire-purchase sales.
(e) Sales where there is time-bound after-sales service and guarantee
(f) Consignment sale
(g) Transit insurance claim as a result of loss of goods.

VII. Requirements of AS-9 :

1. If one goes through the actual standard parameters, it has accepted the conventional wisdom in its complete form, except for the fact that it has tried to visualise as many different possibilities as possible. Such an attempt at detailing, to my mind, is an attempt to make every businessman an ‘Arjun’ who could pierce the eye of a moving fish, by looking at its mirror image. Alternatively it could also be contended to be an attempt to count feathers of a flying bird.

2. The only difference is treatment of Indirect Taxes like State-level Vat and Central Excise Duty. The guidance note issued by ICAI on treatment of State-level Vat tells us that no economic benefit is earned by an enterprise in collecting and paying Vat on behalf of State Government and hence from the total turnover, State-level Vat should be excluded and the payment thereof should also not be taken as expenses. In our above illustration, 6.96 crores being Vat collection will have to be excluded and the turnover should be shown at Rs.58 crores. Adjustment arising out of input credit on Vat should be made in the purchase of goods shown on the debit side of the profit and loss account.

3. In case of Excise Duty however, it has been held to be a manufacturing cost by the decision of various courts, but instead of showing it on the debit side of the profit and loss account, it is required to be shown as a deduction from the turnover. As a result, on the credit side, one is expected to show turnover at 58 crores less ED Rs.8 crores and the net figure of 50 crores is to be shown. In addition to this there would always be some difference in the opening and closing inventory of finished goods which must be inclusive of Excise Duty and the difference between closing and opening inventory. Excise Duty of finished goods should be shown either on the debit side or the credit side separately and should not be mixed with the turnover, or with Excise Duty deducted from it.

4. There is no requirement of fair valuation of debtors because debtors is not treated as a Financial Instrument. However, AS-l ‘Disclosure of Accounting policy’ would invariably contain a statement indicating that adjustments are made to the realisation probability of debtors based on past experience on grounds of conservative policy.

VIII. IAS and  IFRS requirement:

(a) Objective
(b) Disclosure policy
(c) Recording of transaction
(d) Presentation in final accounts

2. It is a nice way of presentation and makes understanding of a standard easy. IFRS and IAS is no exception and our AS also follows the same policy. Some standards are pure standards of disclosure, whereas in some standards one would come across a combination of all the 4 ingredients.

3. In IFRS and IAS, our conventional dear ‘Sundry Debtors’ and ‘Sundry Creditors’ of so many years would acquire a new name of ‘Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable’. They would acquire a new status of a ‘Financial Asset’ and since it is capable of being sold or bought in the market by way of securitisation, they would get a further status of a ‘financial instrument’. An instrument could be tangible or intangible and capable of being stated cost less estimated expenses of realisation or could be valued under ‘Valuation Rules’ in the absence of a market and could be valued at market value if there is an active market for it. So our figure of conventional ‘Sundry Debtors’ of yester-years would get a designer status due to different clothing and make up, and naturally its valuation would always present lot many difficulties.

4. It is not my intention to describe the entire dress material, but the essential thing appears to be a quick attempt to convert everything into an instrument so that it could be sold, it could be provided as a margin and could also be used for the purpose of leveraging, so as to have the fastest of turnover of these figures involving mark-to-market valuations. Most of the complications are the result of this exercise which is required to be carried on when we turn to IFRS. Such an exercise will require mathematical modules.

IX. Limitations and  reservations on IAS, IFRS :

Having examined a part of a standard AS-9 from a very limited angle, although it may be considered very late, I would like to express some limitations and reservations which are bound to be faced in the years to come and some of them could be listed as under:

1. The exercise in making a fair valuation is going to be a very subjective affair and what is described as fair value would be based on many assumptions incapable of remaining true in a dynamic business scenario.

2. Whereas common accounting language need not be a utopia, it should be a gradual process of adaptation one by one or a group of standards instead of a total adoption at one go from a predetermined date. Our ancestors have told us that one morsel of a food should be chewed 32 times before we take the second, so that the food is digested properly. If we gallop the food of these IFRS and that too imported food, we could be suffering from indigestion and all other diseases.

3. If substance over form is to be accepted as a proper understanding of a subject and if we want to prepare the accounts which are not only rule-based but based on the underlying intention, then there is no distinction between Excise Duty and state-level Vat. If the Vat does not have any economic benefit for an enterprise and therefore needs to be excluded from turnover and also as an ex-pense, then the same logic in substance can also be applied to Excise Duty. Different treatment for different elements of indirect tax appears difficult to digest and lot of time is wasted in trying to make these niceties in accounts rather than going into the business substance of the results of the operations. If only some more vigilance was shown by those connected with Enron, Worldcom or Satyam in finding the substance of the business rather than spending time in making the accounts IFRS compliant or US GAAP compliant, stakeholders at large would benefit and would curse the accounting less than what is done today.

4. Although there was a lot of pressure on our government and RBI to make the rupee fully convertible in late 90s including some intellectuals from our country, our RBI did not do it and we were spared from the currency crisis of late 90s in South-East Asia. This is the recent history. Most of our banking sector top brass taking decision is above the age of 40 and they do not fully understand currency derivatives and all other derivatives and mark-to-market mechanism fully. We are therefore substantially saved from the ‘Sub-prime’ crisis which has engulfed US and Europe although our country is also affected to some extent. People say that we were saved because of our relative ignorance in new financial instruments.
 
    5. There is another reason for advocating adaptation stagewise instead of adoption. The main reasons for reservation on a national basis emanates from a fear of tax laws. Fiscal policy in any country determines the taxation policy – whether direct or indirect. It is accepted in a pure Brahminical way that Accounting Standards are basic accounting principles and they cannot be in any way remain fluctuating with a yearly fiscal policy with conse-quential changes in tax laws. However one cannot afford to totally neglect the strong feelings of a business community to prepare accounts in compliance with taxation laws to avoid conflict and tax litigation. Even in Europe the national spirit and multiple accounting standards is the result of tax orientation of a nation. One cannot neglect this tax consideration altogether.

    6. The standard-setting exercise appears to be an intellectual exercise of bodies handed over to the fellow members without many times active support either from the Government or the business community. If it was not so, there would not have been such a resistance. How many years you have read notes on accounts stating that “Inventory of finished goods is exclusive of Excise duty. This is contrary to the Accounting Standard issued by the ICAI. However it has no impact on the profits of the year”. Business community was doing it only for the purpose of improving their ability to get higher working limits from the banks.

    7. Feelings expressed in above paras are not only the feelings as a CA, but these are the feelings heard from a small and medium-size business entity with which I have spent a lot of time. It is felt many times that the complicated standards are only a burden on the accounting profession, because the business entities do not many times see any value addition to the exercise, but their voice does not get heard under the weight of what is ‘Big’ in every sphere.

x. Conclusion:

1. It is not the intention of this article either to downplay the AS, IAS or the attempt at convergence to make IFRS the world accounting language. However, a mathematical model required visualising every possible situation is bound to be a complex exercise when the global business itself is very dynamic. It is not only dynamic in value and volume, but is also largely unpredictable and based on shifting sands of precarious nature and future. Moreover I refuse to believe that stakeholder in a globe is a dumb animal who needs to be fed every bit of a detail. One should believe in his intelligence to make proper adjustments required to safeguard his own stake subject to normal risk. In such a scenario, a gradual adoption after proper understanding may be a better alternative rather than full and complete adoption at one time. A longer court-ship and dating may be a better idea to a love at first sight and marriage. Otherwise, there could be more chances of a divorce petition or a discord affecting marital bliss.
 
2. Even in the absence of a common language, a true love and affection between a man and a woman could flourish and let Adam eat the prohibited fruit to get his Eve and suffer the consequences. This is not only true for love making between a man and a woman, but also is true for love and affection in every human being. What is required is a standard of human integrity and this is something which cannot be laid down in black and white in any common language but is something, which is required to be examined and felt on an ongoing basis. This requires avoidance of greed and fear and building a confidence level, irrespective of a language barrier. Do you get me my dear friends?

IFRS for SMEs in India

Article

Background :



Published by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)
on 9 July 2009, International Financial Reporting Standard for Small and
Medium-Sized Entities (‘IFRS for SMEs’) is a simplified version of full IFRS
aimed at responding to the compelling need expressed by both developed and
emerging economies for a rigorous and common set of accounting standards for
smaller and medium-sized businesses that is much simpler than full IFRSs. Prior
to its release, the standard-setters engaged themselves in comprehensive
dialogue with SMEs worldwide in order to ensure that the document finally
released would meet the needs and capabilities of small and medium-sized
entities (SMEs), which are estimated to account for over 95% of all companies
around the world.

Application :

The IFRS for SMEs has the potential to revolutionise and
harmonise financial reporting by private companies across the world. It remains
a stand-alone product that is separate from the full set of International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).

Thus, it is available for any jurisdiction to adopt whether
or not it has adopted the full IFRSs. Also it is incumbent upon each
jurisdiction to determine which entities should use the standard.

In particular, the IFRS for SMEs will :


  • provide improved comparability for users of accounts


  • enhance the overall confidence in the accounts of SMEs


  • reduce the significant costs involved of maintaining
    standards on a national basis, and


  •  provide a platform to growing businesses that are
    contemplating entering the public capital markets in due course of time and
    thus give them an opportunity to prepare themselves for adopting full IFRSs.


South Africa is an example of a country that required all
companies to use IFRS and has responded very positively to benefits for SMEs
proposed by the new standard. It had adopted the Exposure Draft which preceded
the IFRS for SMEs in October 2007 as a ‘Statement of Generally Accepted
Accounting Practice for SMEs in South Africa’ in a bid to reduce the reporting
burden on SMEs and provide them with a simpler accounting framework that was
easier to understand and apply than full IFRS. Further, it has quickly published
the final version of the IFRS for SMEs (without any change to the text) as a
‘Statement of Generally Accepted Accounting Practice’ with relevant entities
allowed to apply it for annual financial statements authorised for issue after
13th August 2009.

In India, the concept paper on Convergence with IFRS, issued
by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India aims to converge Indian
accounting standards to the equivalent of full IFRS for all public interest
entities effective 1st April 2011. In its present form, companies with turnover
exceeding Rs.100 crores or with borrowings in excess of Rs.25 crores qualify as
‘public interest entities’. This is expected to include a significant number of
unlisted entities. The concept paper refers to use of IFRS for SMEs only for
non-public interest entities.

Basis :

The principles enshrined in this standard have been derived
from IFRS foundation itself. However, so as to ensure that it addresses the
specific needs of users of SMEs’ financial statements and cost-benefit
considerations, many of the complexities inherent in the full IFRSs have been
removed. Furthermore a cost-benefit approach has been taken in developing the
IFRS for SMEs, with the emphasis being on easing the financial reporting burden
on private companies.

The key differences are enumerated below :


  • Topics not relevant to SMEs have been omitted.


  • Where full IFRSs allow accounting policy choices, the
    IFRS for SMEs allows only the easier option.


  • Many of the principles for recognising and measuring
    assets, liabilities, income and expenses in full IFRSs have been simplified.


  •  Significantly fewer disclosures are required.


  • The standard has adopted a simplified redrafting so as to
    facilitate ease of understanding and translation.


  • Moreover to further reduce the reporting burden for SMEs,
    revisions to the IFRS will be limited to once every three years.

Full IFRS

IFRS for SMEs

Numbered by
Standard


Organised by topic (e.g.,
inventories)

Around 3,000
potential disclosures


Around 300 potential disclosures

Around 2,800 pages
in length

Less than 230 pages

Updated several
times a year

Anticipated to be
updated on a 3-yearly basis

Unlike full IFRS, the IFRS for SMEs contains illustrative
financial statements and a disclosure checklist. With around only 300 potential
disclosure requirements, compared to 3,000 under full IFRS, the advantages of
the IFRS for SMEs in terms of the amount of time to be spent preparing the
financial statements are already clear. The point is underlined however, by the
Illustrative Financial Statements that the IASB has prepared to accompany the
Standard. At just 17 pages in length, they compare favourably to full IFRS
financial statements which often run to over 100 pages.

Omitted topics :

The IFRS for SMEs does not address the following topics that
are covered in full IFRSs :


  • Earnings  per share
  • Interim financial reporting
  • Segment reporting
  • Special accounting for assets held for sale.

Examples of options in full IFRSs NOT included in the IFRS for SMEs :

  • Financial instrument options, including available for sale, held-to-maturity and fair value options

  • The revaluation model for property, plant and equipment, and for intangible assets

  • Proportionate consolidation for investments in jointly-controlled entities

  • For investment property, measurement is driven by circumstances rather than allowing an accounting policy choice between the cost and fair value models
  • Various options  for government grants.

Conclusion:

The potential of this new standard is that SMEs catapult themselves to a position where stakeholders (lenders and investors) would be able to assess company performance from financial statements that use directly comparable, authoritative, internationally recognised principles, regardless of the company’s country of origin. Further this transition to IFRS framework for them would be at a significantly reduced cost, as the standard has endeavored to reduce the complexities in accounting for transactions and disclosure of financials as compared to full IFRSs.

Simple efforts to keep accountants ‘simple’

Article

Traditional perception about an accountant in business
parlance is something like spectacles on tired eyes, wearing white colored dhoti
and kurta, book of accounts traditionally known as Bahikhatas (red cloth-bounded
books) in hands. In traditional business houses and economy, Accountants were
regarded as the most authenticated and powerful persons of the organisation.
These traditional accountants, popularly known as ‘Muneem’ now seem to be the
saga of old era. However, there is not much change in the perception for an
accountant in an organisation. Even today, an accountant is perceived as a
person with minimum mental flexibility with risk-averse attitude. They are less
exposed to outside world, leading to deficiency in behavioural skill.


Peter Drucker was of the opinion in 1990 that accounting is
the most exciting and innovative working in Management today. But after 18 years
of this statement, accounting reporting mechanism has reached a state of
saturation and become stagnant. Nothing concrete in the accounting world has
happened for the last 10-12 years.

With the advent of new information technology and its
interface with business requirements, the role of a traditional accountant has
changed drastically. From Bahikhatas to software packages like Tally and now
from Tally to enterprise resource planning through Oracle, SAP, Hyperian, etc.
accounting has taken an entirely different shape taking care of the needs of
business in the fast-changing economy. There is paradigm shift in the roles,
responsibilities and perception for an accountant in an organisation. This is a
free economy and factors like geographical spread of a business, different
regulatory bodies to govern the business, rapid penetration of technology into
the business systems, expectation of management to have online information to
take timely and strategic decisions, etc. are now governing businesses more than
any other factors. An accountant is not an exception to this change mechanism.
Intense business and organisational pressure coupled with expected deliverables
have led all accountants to rethink and reshape their footing in the
organisation.

This is the period of transition and with globalisation of
economy, efforts to corner the functions such as accounting are wholeheartedly
attempted in the name of business opportunities, through mere compliance and
rework activities. This is the time where an accountant is wandering round the
corners of an organisation to keep his values alive and to keep pace with the
new-edge technology. With this kind of rapid changes in business places, a
traditional accountant is bound to become a rare species nowadays in India. This
situation would arise, unless accountants, organisation, professionals bodies as
well as the Government take a relook at the current practices. Everyone attempts
cost and productivity optimisation, but no one in the organisation talks about
the necessity of good book keeping that gives data integrity.

What should be done to keep accountants and accounting as
simple as possible from an accountant’s perspective ? Yes, a traditional
accountant always starts his daily organisation life with debit/credit and ends
the day with debit/credit. There are no innovative activities in his work
methods, other than accounts reconciliations, accounts scrutiny, etc. or some
reporting for cost controls. Here is an attempt to give some thoughts and raise
issues on measures required to enhance the role of an accountant from an
accountant’s perspective.

(1) National holiday :


For the last several years, accounting people of this nation
could never enjoy the national holiday on 2nd October, birthday of the father of
the nation Mahatma Gandhi. On this holiday, when all Government and other
companies enjoy holiday, accounts people in India work to complete half-yearly
accounts of organisations. They are helpless due to their commitments and
desired deliverables to their organisation. In fact they are even entitled to
overtime, allowance and they do not get a compensatory off in lieu of this
holiday. It is said that creativity starts in empty minds, therefore it is
desirable to give relief, so that all accounting people can enjoy the birthday
of the Father of Nation by one or other means.

(2) No more decimals :


Majority of companies (and especially banking companies)
raises its invoices/debit notes and other business instruments in fraction of
rupees. While accounting these debit notes/invoices in books of accounts,
accounting people have to give extra precaution on the decimal part of the
invoices. In case they commit mistakes to account for these debit notes/invoices
to the exact amount, these lead to reconciliation/payment problems. This is
leading all accounting people of this country to wear untimely spectacles. This
sometime delays the marriages of female accountants wearing spectacles.
Adjustments of these instruments in books require checking of calculations on
calculator. Rounding off of the business instruments will save the manual
efforts to use at least two keys on calculator. So it is desirable to provide
for compulsory rounding off of all business instruments in all business
transactions to save man-hours.

(3) Even and not odds :


Indians are habituated for the even and not odd ! Last year
budget imposed 1% higher education cess, thereby demanding imposition/deduction
of 3% cess on all tax liabilities of the organisation. In majority cases 3%
amount of cess never tends to be rounded of. So accounting people have genuine
reasons to urge the Government to hike cess from 3% to 4%. This will give
accounting minds of the nation bit relaxation in calculation of the cess and its
adjustments in books of accounts.

(4) Chart  of accounts:

The Excise Department generally asks companies to furnish information about Service Tax and Education Cess on Service Tax paid/charged during the period (Of course this period may go up to years). After all, it is their statutory privilege. However, this privilege of Excise Dept. creates embarrassing situation for accounts people. Finding out the amount of Service Tax and cess paid / charged with the amount of taxable services received/rendered is not an easy task. After all, accountants have to exactly round off the amount of Service Tax and cess levy / paid with taxable services rendered/received by the company. So, going one step forward, it would be prudent for all if the amount of cess is clubbed in the tax structure itself. Instead of charging cess in different heads it can be charged in one head only. This will reduce chart of accounts of all companies and all accounting people will have to reconcile lesser numbers of general  ledgers accounts.

(5) Natural resources:

Our corporate laws provide for quarterly board and audit committee meetings. Every quarter, accounting people of this nation have to prepare complete set of books of accounts by late sitting in office. Four times in a year, they have to take care of statutoryr audit team and directors. After all they have to arrange for their pleasant stay, good food, sight-seeing and valuable gifts. They have to be online on E-mails, cell phones, etc. for easy accessibility. If the Government reduces the mandatory requirement of audited books of accounts from 4 to 2, this will be of great saving to the valuable national resources. Most of all, this will give accountants an opportunity to go home in time and to share moments of life with their family and others. So by reducing the, number, the Government will be contributing to their family peace and country’s social development as well.

(6) TDS certificate and  C Forms:

Indian tax laws provide for issuance of Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) certificates within 30 days of deduction of tax. Similarly, C forms for the quarter are to be issued by the end of the next quarter. Earlier accountants were accustomed to issue yearly TDS certificates and C forms. Change in time frame has led all accountants to be followed up rigorously by their vendors. Issuing transaction-based TDS forms and quarterly C forms are adding to the manpower cost and paper cost to their company. Mere small mistake in issuing these two certificates leads all accountants being followed up by E-mails( post cards, faxes, and calls not only in office but a home as well. After all, issue of TDS forms, C forms demands a lot of reconciliations, clarifications, communications and resources. So if the Government provides for issuing annual TDS certificates and C forms, this will help all accountants. Of course, this will assist in role change of an accountant from ‘Accountant’ to an ‘Environmentalist.’

(7) Fringe Benefit Tax (FBT) :

The amount qualifying for FBT under Tax laws in case of conference fee is nil, while any amount spent to attend the conference like travel expenses are subject to FBT. Whenever company officials travel to attend seminars, accountants have to account for the conference fee and expenses incurred to attend the conference separately to reduce the FBT burden of company. This gives accountants additional pain to put two accounting entries after searchin complete set of expenditure sheet. In view of tills, if the Government brings the conference fee within the ambit of FBT, this will consolidate existing requirement of two separate accounting entries into one.


One may laugh on reading the above small efforts, but this is reality that needs to be accepted. In words of Ernest Oimnet, “Ideas are the roots of creation”. These are the ideas of an accountant. Yes, the minority voice of industry to which no one pays attention. This is the right time to raise the issues on a fronts. This is the start of the ringing of the beir. Business giants like Enron, World Com, Tyco International have collapsed due to non-confidence in the financial reporting system. Maintenance of data integrity in the different information technology environment will be the greatest challenge for an organisation in coming years. This is the time for both, the government and the business, to keep things simple. If business does not care for these things, business will suffer not today but surely tomorrow. Data integrity can only be achieved by letting accounts people be a bit relaxed. Allow accountants to spare some time for their thought process, so that they can devote time to create? better understanding of their roles to achieve organisational objectives and goals. The above small efforts on the government front will give accountants an opportunity to synergise accounting with organisational strategy and structure. After all, “For the experienced to survive, reality must be considered,” says, Charles B. Richardson. Simple but important, the above steps will help all accountants at large to keep them ‘Simple’.

GST — Issues and Policies

Article

Government without treasury is unknown in history. Government
raises revenue mainly through taxation or borrowing. Taxes matter both for the
government and the governed. We all know we need to pay taxes for public
services, but still most of us complain about taxes and avoid them, if possible.

2. Tax policy, its design and tax administration are the
reflection of the economic reality and the social and cultural factors of the
society. Tax policy of a country is shaped by ideas and interest, global
economic reality, administrative constraints, political institutions and
technological developments. A tax policy needs to delicately balance the
objectives of revenue, the need to facilitate economic growth and stability and
equity. Political economy necessitates balancing of growth and equity. Though
there is no alternative to growth, growth without equity is neither desirable
nor sustainable. A policy oriented towards growth cannot, therefore, ignore the
need to put in place measures to protect and ensure the welfare of the weak and
vulnerable sections of the population.

3. Evolving a tax policy and designing a tax system for a
fast developing and increasingly open economy is more challenging. India’s
international trade-to-GDP ratio exceeded 35%. The task becomes complex in view
of internationalisation of economic activities arising from globalisation and
liberalisation. Lowering the level of protection available to domestic
manufacturers of goods by reduction of customs tariffs, entering into free trade
agreements, both bilateral and multilateral, and liberalisation of international
trade have direct bearing on the competitiveness of the domestic industry and
thereby their very survival. These developments necessitate the need to tune the
tax policy in line with the changing economic environment without loss of time.
Tax reform in a globalised world has become a necessity for survival rather than
a matter of choice. The nation took a conscious decision to embark on the path
of fundamental tax reforms.

4. Indirect tax policy and system in India has been
undergoing fundamental changes. It is a well-accepted thinking that high tax
rates do not necessarily result into higher revenue, but are likely to
discourage compliance and distort economic activities. High tax rates may not
also seem to be an effective method to distribute income and wealth. Peak basic
rate of customs duty on manufactured non-agricultural products was reduced from
more than 300% in 1990–91 to 10% in 2007-08. During the same period, ad
valorem
basic excise duty was also reduced from 110% to the CENVAT rate of
14%.

5. The process of globalisation making competitiveness a
global issue and not a country-specific issue made many countries to reduce the
direct tax rates, both on corporates and persons, and customs tariffs and
simultaneously increase their reliance on domestic consumption taxes. In many
countries and regions, there is a shift from direct to indirect taxes.
Globalisation led to significant reduction in customs tariffs and consequent
reduction in reliance from customs revenue. During the period 1990-91 to
2007-2008, customs revenue has grown only by 404% as against 607% growth in
domestic consumption tax revenue. Ensuring the competitiveness of the tax system
is an inevitable response to the broader picture of global economic integration
resulting into global competition.

6. The Hon’ble Finance Minister in his Budget speech 2006
stated the intention to move towards comprehensive goods and service tax (GST)
by April, 2010. The scope of the Empowered Committee of State Finance Ministers
(ECFM) has been expanded to deal with issues relating to GST. The institution of
Empowered Committee of State Finance Ministers is one of the most successful
innovations in fiscal federalism. GST is considered to be the single largest tax
reform of the country in the domestic taxation. Adoption of Value Added Tax
(VAT) at the Central level and also by all the States for taxation of goods and
services has given enough confidence to all the stake-holders to move towards
GST at the national level.

7. Major problem afflicting taxation of goods and services
today is the tax cascading arising on account of the partial nature of the taxes
and also of multiple and overlapping taxes. Current tax structure results into
varying degree of taxes on goods and services depending upon the nature of
inputs used. No credit is allowed on CST paid on interstate sales. Even if the
statutory rate is the same, effective tax rate varies from product to product,
depending upon the quantum of hidden taxes paid on inputs and the structure of
production and distribution chain.

8. Indirect taxation in India, therefore, provides
opportunities for planning and arbitration. Simplified system of taxation
reduces the cost of compliance and cost of collection considerably and would
enable the business to plan its activities. GST reduces the scope for ad hoc
decisions and political compromises apart from reducing the compliance cost.

9. The core objective of GST is to remove barriers for trade
by creating a common national-level domestic market. A major reform of such
magnitude does require change of ideas, attitudes and mind-sets. This may cause
discomfort mainly on account of fear of the unknown. If one appreciates the
economic advantage of GST and appreciates its necessity in the context of the
global economic competition, then apprehensions and misgivings may not have any
place.

10. Consumption tax on goods and services on the basis of
value addition known as VAT or GST has been emerging as the tax of the future.
The global experiences support that VAT is the most effective mechanism to raise
revenue efficiently. The fact that more than 145 countries in the world across
the ideological spectrum adopted VAT to tax domestic consumption of goods and
services substantiates the view that VAT has now become a main feature of
indirect revenue system.

11. GST or VAT is a broad-based tax levied on multiple stages of production and distribution with the taxes on inputs credited against taxes on output. Revenue is secured by being collected throughout the process of economic transactions, but without distorting production decisions. It is collected at each stage of the transaction and the amount of tax is calculated on the prices of the goods and services at the rate applicable after deduction of the amount of VAT borne directly on various inputs used for providing output goods or services. Taxes collected at intermediate stages are only pass-through transactions. Collection of tax being at each stage of the transactions with input credit scheme, VAT has inherent incentive for tax compliance. Being a consumption tax imposed on goods and services, the tax burden is to be borne by ultimate consumers.

12. VAT is the single largest source of revenue in some countries and one of the most important sources in many more. Increase in VAT collection is not at the expense of income tax. VAT and income tax are in fact complementary to each other and one is not a substitute for other. VATis a simple way of collecting sales tax. No fiscal innovation is ever spread so widely in such a wide variety of countries.

13. GST designed with the objective of economic efficiency and neutrality requires:

  •     Harmonisation of tax base, tax rates, tax laws and procedures.

  •     To avoid cascading effect by providing credit of total amount of tax paid on inputs.

  •     To levy tax on destination  basis.

  •     To ensure  uniformity  in law and procedure.

14. The relevant questions to be responded while designing GST are, –

  •  Whether GST can address the fiscal tasks imposed by trade liberalisations and other economic factors?

  •  Whether a single GST in a federal country would affect the political equilibrium reflected in the country’s fiscal structures?

  •  Whether GST addresses the concern of vertical equity?

Equity and distributional effects of GST are matters of concern and academic debate. It is difficult to design VAT to meet the needs of vertical equity. However, experiences all over the world show that at present VATis the best form of general consump-tion tax available.

15. One of the critical areas in designing single GST is sub-national jurisdiction in levying of VAT. GST design in a federal country needs to take into account:

  •     the fiscal autonomy  of provinces;

  •     to use tax as an instrument to achieve social or economic objectives; and

  •     risk and  rewards  of ownership  of the tax.

16. Considering the revenue needs of provinces to meet their developmental objectives, provinces do expect sufficient fiscal space to mobilise revenue. The Constitution of India clearly demarcates the taxation power between the Centre and the States. GST model needs to strike a balance between harmonisation which is critical for economic efficiency and creation of common domestic market and fiscal autonomy of the Centre and the States required to discharge their obligations.

17. Though the desirable objective is broader base with lower rate, preferably single rate, the need to protect and ensure the interest of the economically weaker sections by way of exemptions, reduced rates or zero rates for basic services like food, medicines cannot be totally ignored especially in a developing or transitional economy. Equity aspects of VATare a matter of concern. It may be inevitable to introduce some degree of explicit progressivity within the VATsystem itself. In such cases, reduced rate is generally considered as the preferred choice. Minimising distortion and at the same time accommodating the different economic and social objectives is the real challenge for designing the GST system. However, experiences show that introducing specific measures inevitably creates complexities and resultant cost and goes contrary to the demand for simplification. It is also a challenge to balance the procedural requirements to eliminate the possibility of non-compliance and fraud and at the same time ensuring that the level of compliance cost does not affect the ability to compete. Ideal model may not be politically acceptable and administratively feasible.

18. Different forms of eST exist in different countries. What is important is designing an appropriate GST to suit the specific needs and environment and then running it efficiently. Differences among various GST systems indicate the objective reality of history and politics of member countries. European Union’s VAT is the much talked about VAT. However, there is a strong view that the Sixth VAT Directives of EU need major revision to cope with the realities of the expanded, more integrated and more developed EU of today.

19. The single-rate structure usually considered as an ideal and recommended by experts is followed only by Denmark among the EU countries. Most EU countries have a standard rate with two reduced rates. The average effective VAT rate as compared with the standard rate among EU member states varies widely and the percentage of variation is in the range of 8% to 32% of the standard rate. In EU, about  one-third  of the tax base is subject to non-standard  rates including  zero rate. Exemptions also vary  widely  from country  to country.  VAT in EU differs on many important  aspects. Variations are in relation  to the tax base, treatment  of foreign trade-origin or destination,  and the method  of collection.

20. GST model followed by New Zealand, Singapore and Australia with broad base and single rate is no doubt a clean model. But it may be difficult to replicate such model in a federal structure with strong identity of units and also in developing or transitional economies.

21. Despite differences, almost all the VAT models in the world follow the principle to tax consumption on destination basis and is applied on a transaction basis using the invoice – credit (output tax minus input tax) method basis. Origin-based income type VAT exists in Italy, Japan and some American states. China already initiated the process to have eST by the year 2013. Countries that do not have VATare US, Iraq, Iran, Cuba, some oil-rich countries and large number of small island countries basically in the Caribbean and Pacific.

22. Selectivity and discretion erode tax base and tend to create powerful special interest groups apart from introducing complexity in the system. Single national-level eST does avoid issues relating to interstate transactions. However in a democratic polity with federal structure and assignment of tax powers, it may be difficult to achieve, if not impossible, the ideal comprehensive value added consumption tax at the national level. The other model is taxing consumption at uniform rates across goods and services. This will avoid tax-induced distortions, bring simplicity and minimise the pressures for favourable treatment for some goods or services over others. However, fiscal autonomy warrants power to decide the tax rates to meet the revenue needs notwithstanding harmonisation of law and procedure.

23. Independent VAT applied simultaneously on the same tax base by two different and overlapping jurisdictions leads to high administrative and compliance cost. The only way in which sub-national units can effectively levy VAT is on origin basis. In such cases, if the rates are not uniform, results would be highly distortionary.

24. Destination-based consumption VAT through invoice-credit method requires physical border controls. In the absence of border controls, the alternative approach is to put through some form of clearing house mechanism to deal with the state transactions. Considering the magnitude of transactions, this approach requires a sound and extensive IT infrastructure.

25. One of the most critical VAT design issues is consideration of local conditions including support the level of the threshold limit above which firms . from trade and industry. Good GST design makes must register. One view is to set the threshold limit good VAT administration easier and bad design too high rather than too low. Dealing with a large makes good administration almost impossible. number of very small taxpayers inevitably results in
some loss in administrative efficiency. It is preferable to include all firms above a fairly high threshold in the tax base. The other view is that high threshold limit reduces the tax base and encourages growth of informal sector. A balanced and a pragmatic view needs to be taken. There are also challenges to make GST work in a system, which relies on self-assessment.

26. Desirable features of VATdesign such as single rate, zero rating instead of exemptions, refund of input tax credit, that cannot be adjusted against taxes due on outputs may not necessarily be feasible in the context of the economic realities. Features like more than one rate, few exemptions, and too high or too low thresholds may be inevitable at a particular point of time for successful adoption in the first place. However, experiences show that it is extremely difficult to remove such features at a later stage.

27. The clean system is critical in lowering compliance cost for business and administration cost for Government. The fundamental choice is between concessions to some with high rates or no concessions with low tax rates. This needs to be explained and communicated well so as to evolve a consensus.

28. VAT provides a competitive advantage to the country that implements it. It removes hidden taxes on exports. Many goods and services that bore no taxes are in fact have hidden taxes paid on most of their inputs. The resulting pattern of effective rates on products and industry vary widely and bear little relation to the Jegislativ,e intent. In India, the study shows that the tax incidence on different commodity groups varies widely. Elimination of exemptions and concessions reduces administrative cost as well as the influence of special interest groups on tax policy. Self-imposing nature of GST leads to increase in revenue productivity. VAT also strengthens the information base of the tax administration, resulting in improved compliance not only of VAT,but also of other taxes.

29. Critical factors for successful implementation of GST are political commitment, adequate and advance preparation, investment in tax administration, extensive public education programme and consideration of local conditions including support from trade and industry. Good GST design makes good VAT administration easier and bad design makes good administration almost impossible.

30. “Tax Administration is Tax Policy” says Milka Casanegra. The real tax system is that which is administered, not that which appears in the formal law. VATcan certainly be designed to fit into the tax administration of the country.

31. The most basic lesson learnt from international experiences in implementing GST is that doing it right is in most respects a matter more of art than of science. It is extremely critical to keep the administrative dimensions at the Centre rather than at the periphery while designing the GST system. Poor administrative system creates a wedge between theory and practice and thus encourages the spread of informal economy. A good policy is only as good as it is administered. It is important to keep in mind the administrative realities. Reform of the tax system is not a one-time affair. It is a dynamic process in which the responses are to be calibrated continuously.

32. Successful implementation of GST requires an effective consultative and communication process. Consultative process helps to improve the quality of decision-making. It may not be possible to have consensus with many interest groups and the public on all issues. As long as the decisions are fair and reasonable, and consistent with the stated core objectives, consensus develops after the decisions deliver satisfactory results. It is equally important to appropriately package the proposal.

33. There are no disagreements between the Centre and the States and trade and industry on the issue of common tax base, rates and laws and procedures. The issues are more on details and the mechanism required to achieve the stated objectives. Considering the consensus and the enthusiasm of the stakeholders and the appreciation of the necessity and economic benefits of GST, there is every reason to believe that the country is on the right path and will reach its destination.

Independent Directors — Corporate governance in challenging times

Article

While in most of the countries in the world, the top
executives are trying to survive their jobs and positions and while this is the
first time when maximum CEOs are hated by their shareholders, the independent
Directors are trying to run away from their current position. One of the reports
of Economic Times says that, since Satyam scandal and Nagarjuna case, “there are
over 500 independent directors in India who have resigned from their respective
positions on the Board citing reasons ranging from ill-health to work
pressures”. The resignation of one director or a succession of them,
particularly of independent directors, may indicate something untoward in terms
of corporate governance or commercial developments. Investors should be made
aware of these changes. There is almost a situation of fear-psychosis amongst
almost all Boards where Directors who hardly spend any time and who are hardly
paid anything are expected to perform much more with all the responsibilities
and liabilities of the CEO or an executive director. This is not to suggest that
there is something untoward in every Indian company where independent directors
have resigned in the past. That would be too rash a conclusion to draw. It could
also be the fear of potential liability. Independent directors are often
understandably fearful about this issue for two reasons :


(i) they are not involved in the day-to-day activities of
the company although they may bear some responsibility for the actions of
management; and

(ii) there are countless directions from which liability
could strike since directors are responsible (subject to exceptions) for
violation of various statutes by companies, particularly for the so-called
socio-economic offences.


There is ‘fear of the unknown’ on both these counts. Problem
is law has not changed since January 2009 but cases like Satyam and Nagarjuna
have made it amply clear that all independent directors can be vulnerable to get
arrested for no fault of theirs. The independent directors are indeed concerned
not about direct financial liability but the time, cost, lost opportunity and
reputational risk that accompany the mere initiation of legal action against
them, even if that action does not succeed in the court of law in the end.

India is not doing so bad as compared to global scenario on
Corporate Governance at macro level. New York consulting firm GMI rates about
4,000 companies worldwide on dozens of metrics related to corporate governance :
board accountability, financial disclosure, internal controls, shareholder
rights, executive compensation, and more. Each company is given a score between
1 and 10. The 58 Indian companies studied by GMI got an average rating of 4.91,
placing India 19th out of 38 countries on the list. Topping the table is
Ireland, with an average ranking of 7.55 for the 19 Irish companies assessed by
GMI. Canada, Britain, and Australia are right behind. India is No. 3 in Asia,
behind only Singapore and Thailand. And it comes out ahead of Belgium, Denmark,
and France. It’s also well above the emerging markets average of 4.09. Thus
while India is not doing so bad in the area of Corporate Governance and has
built up quite good investors’ confidence, what can be the reason for so many
independent directors quitting their jobs and companies finding its extremely
difficult to get good independent directors ?

Legal & Real position on Independent Directors :

Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement talks about the
independent directors. Thus every listed company in India has to follow the
rules and regulations on independent directors. The Company having non-executive
Chairman can have not less than one third of the Board’s strength as independent
directors. If, otherwise, the company has executive Chairman, it needs to have
not less than 50% of its Board’s strength as independent directors. The recent
change in the position is that if the non executive chairman is ‘related’ — as a
family member or employee of the promoter, the independent directors on the
board should be 50% of its strength. This change has put many Indian listed
companies in a fix. Most of the companies where the promoters hold minority
stake, had ensured that the Chairman is one of their ‘own’ persons in
non-executive capacity to keep the majority strength on the Board of non
independent directors. After this amendment or clarification from SEBI, such
companies mostly are looking for their ‘own’ independent Chairman just to ensure
that they maintain majority strength on the Board. This clearly shows that India
Inc is still not comfortable with true ‘independent’ directors and fear of
losing control hounds the promoters.

For this purpose, I may classify companies in three
categories.

1. Professionally managed companies

2. Family or Group owned companies

3. PSUs


I think the first category of companies are not finding it
difficult to get the independent directors as they are looking for true trouble
shooters and expert professionals to come on the Board whereby reputation of
both, the company and the director, will be elevated by such person coming on
the Board. Such directors are well remunerated and spend reasonable time in the
committees and the Board meetings, asking all odd questions and seeking
clarifications to ensure that the company does not knowingly take any decision
against the interest of any of the stake holders. There is a misconception that
independent directors are sitting on the Board only to take care of the minority
shareholders’ interest. Legally that may not be the correct position.
Independent directors are expected to use their experience and professional
skills to take care of the interest of all the stakeholders, i.e.
shareholders, suppliers, customers, employees, regulators and the society at
large. Thus decisions like payment of dividend need not be looked at if they
benefit majority or minority shareholders but need to be verified with general
principles of the dividend payments, cash outflows, payout ratios, etc.

The second categories of companies generally appoint their ‘own’, ‘known’, ‘friendly’ independent directors. These directors are expected to create least resistance in the Board meeting on any proposal that promoter may bring in. If the family or group does not hold majority stake in the company, they are more careful while appointing independent directors. Though. the law prescribes the criteria of independent directors, such promoters like to have supportive board members rather than trouble-shooters. Thus, though these companies seemingly comply with the Board composition requirements, the independent directors may not act independently as expected by law and regulators. The paperwork of the board may be kept compliant with all the laws and regulations but in spirit, the Board may not be performing their expected duties. The public shareholders need to be more vigilant while investing in such companies.

The third category is more interesting. As per earlier SEBI observation, maximum non compliant companies to clause 49 so far as Board composition is concerned, were PSUs. The enormous delays in appointing independent directors by respective Government departments or ministries on PSU Boards were quite glaring. Here the independent directors are ‘nominated’ by Government who also happens to be the majority shareholder of the Company. How can one be sure that such directors nominated by the majority shareholders can act as independent directors? This particular point was raised at a few forums in front of Government officials but is never satisfactorily answered to my knowledge.

SEBI as the custodian of the shareholders’ interest, appointed various committees to advise on the Corporate Governance. Kumarmangalam Birla Committee (1999), Naresh Chandra Committee (2002), Narayan Murthy Committee (2003). Every report added a few more suggestions on Board composition, Board Remuneration, Board meeting Pro-cedure, disclosure of Directors’ interests, code of conduct for the Board and definition of independent directors. However, the law has sufficient scope for the improvement based on practical difficulties. While all the committee reports have the same objective of improving corporate governance, what needs to change is the mindset of the promoters and the independent directors. Legally one may’ qualify’ as independent director but what is important is if such person indeed acts independently and asks right probing questions. I think, currently importance is given more to ‘form’ than ‘substance’ and that has its own repercussions. On one side the independent directors of Satyam get clean chit while those who were members of the Board of Nagarjuna in 1999 get arrested in 2009 !

Liabilities of the Board Members:

Every law needs to have punishments and liabilities prescribed to ensure that the law is complied with. The economies in United States of America thrived due to various reasons, but one of them was promoters and owners had limited liability. This allowed them to take risks in the business. Some failed but many flourished. Post Enron, the laws like SOX put the limited liability concept to an end. The CEO and CFO of the company now are personally liable for various things. More than the actual liability, the fact that one is vulnerable to such draconian fines and/ or arrests has literally made senior management paranoid about day to day business of the business that they run. No business can progress when the Board, CEO and CFOs are running business in paranoia. In India, we are entering similar scenario after the non executive Board members were arrested in 2009 for something to the best of their recollection happened in 1999 or prior to that. Satyam is another example. While the law and regu-lators moved very quickly against the culprits, the fraud was disclosed by the confession letter from one of the promoters. Till then, even the Board, the regulators and the auditors and senior management of the company and the market analysts, who tear your numbers every quarter, had not doubted that the company had serious problems to the extent of Rs.7000 crores. On the other hand, the company was growing normally and receiving corporate governance awards! I think both these instances have put many independent directors in dilemma. I have seen the changed atmosphere in the Board meetings post Satyam. The questions that are asked to the Auditors are as basic as if they verified Bank Statements! This fear is forcing many independent directors to resign from their position.

In the recent past, independent directors were perceived as playing a passive role in the company. The recent resignation phenomenon may not be because the directors suspect any messy stuff in the company but god forbids, if there are skeletons in the cupboard, your reputation is at stake. The job of the Directors is truly becoming difficult. For mere Rs.20,000 sitting fees per quarter, it may not be worth making one vulnerable to bad publicity, financial fines and may be arrest. In reality, as independent director, one spends a few hours in the quarter in the Board room. The audit committee spends a few more hours with CFO and Auditors and goes through what is presented to them. With their experience, they can ensure that there does not seem any apparent wrong in the numbers and there is no ground not to believe the numbers based on variances and QoQ and YoY analysis. In the current recessionary conditions, many directors may suspect that the managements and promoters may have more tempting reasons to take extra business risks and do any unacceptable adjustments in the numbers. Such  distrust might have made many sitting directors very uncomfortable. These circumstances taken together might have led to a situation where companies are finding very difficult to get independent directors on the board.

Having said that, the past track-record of directors being held liable for actions of the company favours independent directors. In an influential series of studies carried out across several countries (though not including India), it was found that the risk of liability on independent directors is far lower than what commentators and directors themselves believe. Even in a litigious society such as the U.S., it was shown that there were only a handful of cases where directors in fact had to make payments (and these include the high profile Enron and WorldCom settlements). The researchers show that these were cases where there was a ‘perfect storm’ scenario (e.g. where the company was in bankruptcy, the D&O insurance was inadequate, and so on), unlikely to occur in most circumstances. However, independent directors are indeed concerned not about direct financialliability but the time, cost, lost opportunity and reputational risk that accompany the mere initiation of legal action against them, even if that action does not succeed in the end. In the past the financial liabilities under company law were insig-nificant and in most of the cases, matters used to get settled between company secretary and the regulators without directors even being aware of it. However, now fear of arrest/imprisonment has really put a lot of scare in the minds of people. For example, the Chairman of the Audit Committee can be arrested for not attending the AGM. Empirical study may not reveal alarming examples in India in the past but the current instances make one feels vulnerable. On February 1 of this year the cn has made the representation to the Parliamentary Standing Committee on the subject suggesting that the liabilities of independent directors should be handled in a different way than that of the executive directors or non independent directors as independent directors are not involved in the day-to-day working of the company. Unless personally involved, there should not be any criminal liability attached to independent director.

Peculiar Indian  scenario:

In a few international studies, India was found culturally in a unique situation. I am sure countries like Japan also would fall under similar situation. The study observed that in most of the cases in India, Chairman/Chairperson of the Board is a very senior (both by age, stature or experience) and hence it is not considered prudent to question the Chairman in the meeting on any matter. This kind of culture restricts the independence of a director. If you are an independent director, and if you feel the decision that is sought by the Board is not in the interest of the stakeholders, you must raise the point and question the decision. In the process of Board discussion, you may get convinced or you may convince the board. But having no discussion as a part of the culture is very harmful for the corporate governance process in the company.

A similar situation is observed in the PSUs as well. If the independent director, appointed by the Government is a person junior to the Chairman (which is normally the case), he or she does not contradict or question the Chairman of the Board. His or her organisational hierarchy comes in the way and prevents him/her from questioning the Chairman in the Board meeting.

I have seen in some cases where such directors discussing a situation what they call ‘off line’. However, such practices are not healthy from corporate governance point of view. Such discussions also do not get recorded in the minutes of the Board and hence are forgotten about later. I feel, once you are sitting on the Board, you are personally responsible for all the acts of the Board and one must act to the best of his or her ability to ensure that healthy, transparent and useful discussions take place in the Board irrespective of your positions outside the Board.

Going  forward:

I think, globally, we have same issue on independent directors. The mind set of the person getting appointed as director must be of one to act without fear or favor. If in your professional capacity, you feel the company is not acting in the interest of the stakeholders, you must question such actions and ensure that they are recorded in the minutes. We may not overcome the problem overnight but to slowly get over this issue, I have following quick suggestions-:
 
1. Independent Directors must be appointed/ nominated by a separate meeting of the minority shareholders, not representing the majority investors. A separate meeting of such minority shareholders must be conveyed prior to the AGM to nominate such independent directors and AGM should formally appoint such independent directors. The majority shareholders should not play any role in such appointments directly or indirectly. Any vacancy of the Board seat between two AGMs may be filled in by other independent directors continuing on the Board like Additional Director.

2. To ensure that the independent directors spend adequate time, they must be compensated well. Mere sitting fees of Rs.20,000 is obviously not enough. Such fees can be capped based on profits of the company or can be a fixed sum.

3. Independent Directors should not get any options. Having options, generally may affect their independent status.

4. Chairmen of the committees must be a rotating position. At least in three years, a new member must be appointed as chairman of Audit /Compensation committee. Such provision would help a board to get new and fresh views.

5. Liability of independent directors should be distinguished from the executive directors and non independent directors. No criminal liability should be attached to independent director for the acts of the company or other executive directors unless the independent director has personally committed a willful criminal act. This obviates the situation where independent directors can not be arrested unless personally and willfully involved in a criminal act.

I feel, the above changes will bring some sanctity in the process and intent of having independent directors on the board.

Post Satyam, it is not only necessary that culprits are punished quickly but also the process is cleansed to achieve intended results that regains investors’ confidence in Indian Companies.

Code of Ethics — Disciplinary Mechanism of ICAI

1. Introduction :

    Readers may recall that part I of my article on this topic was published in the BCA journal for May 2009. In the first part, I discussed the broad para-meters such as — the importance of Code of Ethics (COE), important statistics about the disciplinary cases, reasons for delays in disposal, procedure adopted by the Council prior to the CA Amendment Act, 2006, criteria adopted by the Council, perception of various agencies towards the COE, types of punishments, and so on. I also narrated a few real-life instances of complaints. It is my experience that whenever our fellow members hear me on this topic, they confess that it is an eye-opener. Indeed, it makes one lose one’s sleep at least for a few nights. It calls for lot of awakening since people have realised the nuisance value of the complaint. The most unfortunate part is that our own members out of petty self-interests, rivalry, mean-mindedness etc., bring the other members into serious trouble. At the same time, all of us need to do lot of introspection.

2. Certain important changes :

    In recent years, there were quite a few changes brought about either by the Amendment Act, 2006 or by different Notifications/decisions of the Council. These are in respect of both — the substance as well as the procedure. A few highlights that directly affect an average practitioner are enumerated below :

    2.1 Clause (4) of Part 1 of Second Schedule earlier read as follows :

    ‘expresses his opinion on financial statements of any business or any enterprise in which he, his firm or a partner in his firm has a substantial interest, unless he discloses the interest also in his report;

    In the amendment, the last part — ‘unless he discloses the interest also in his report‘ is deleted. This means that now there is a blanket ban — and mere disclosure of interest is not a saving grace.

    2.2 Clause (12) of Part I of First Schedule pertained to undercutting of fees. Quite intriguingly, this has been omitted. Basic intention was to remove rigidity in this regard, since situations do change.

    2.3 Clause (7) of Part I of Second Schedule — the most important Clause — earlier read as follows :

    ‘is grossly negligent in the conduct of his professional duties’.

    Now the following words are added at the beginning :

    ‘does not exercise due diligence, or is grossly negligent’.

    It had been held by courts that this charge is not of ‘inefficiency’, but of gross negligence. Mere error or blunder or negligence is not ‘gross negligence’.

    2.4 Henceforth, internal auditor will not be eligible to be appointed as tax auditor (applicable for financial year 2009-10 and onwards).

    2.5 In the procedure,

    (a) Form of complaint (Form 8) is changed as Form I.

    (b) Filing fee raised from Rs.100 to Rs.2,500

    (c) In a restricted sense, withdrawal of complaint has been introduced.

    (d) For the first time, monetary punishment has been introduced.

3. The new system :

    The main elements of the erstwhile system were :

    (a) Complaint, written statement by respondent, rejoinder by complainant and respondent’s reply to rejoinder.

    (b) ‘Prima facie’ opinion about the ‘guilt’ — by the Council.

    (c) Reference to and hearing by Disciplinary Committee (Fact-finding report).

    (d) Final decision by the Council —

    re : Schedule I — ‘Guilt’ as well as ‘punishment’.

    re : Schedule II — Recommendation to High Court for deciding the guilt as well as the punishment.

    In the new system [refer The Chartered Accountants Procedure of Investigation of Professional and Other Misconduct of Cases] there will be :

    (a) Complaint, written statement and rejoinder — No second inning for respondent.

    (b) Decision regarding ‘prima facie’ guilt will be by the Director — Discipline. (DD)

    (c) If prima facie guilty, then enquiry will be by Board of Discipline (BOD) for Schedule I offence. For Schedule II, or for mixed case of Schedule I and II it will be by Disciplinary Committee (DC). No further reference to the Council.

    (d) Concept of ‘summary disposal’ introduced.

    (e) Aggrieved party can approach ‘Appellate Authority’. (AA)

    (f) If DD opines that there is no ‘prima facie’ guilt, DD has to seek concurrence from BOD or DC as the case may be.

    (g) For withdrawal also, DD has to seek concurrence from BOD/DC.

    In respect of all these stages, more rigid time schedules are prescribed. The power to grant extension of time is also restricted. This will speed up the disposal.

4. Constitution of BOD/DC/AA :

    Previously, all members of Disciplinary Committee were Chartered Accountants and Central Council members. Henceforth,

    BOD will consist of :

    Rule 21A(1) — The Council shall constitute a Board of Discipline consisting of :

    (a) a person with experience in law and having knowledge of disciplinary matters and the profession, to be its presiding officer;

    (b) two members one of whom shall be a member of the Council elected by the Council and the other member shall be nominated by the Central Government from amongst persons of eminence having experience in the field of law, economics, business, finance or accountancy;

    (c) the Director (Discipline) shall function as the Secretary of the Board.

    DC will consist of :

    21B(1) — The Council shall constitute a Disciplinary Committee consisting of the President or the Vice-President of the Council as the Presiding Officer and two members to be elected from amongst the members of the Council and two members to be nominated by the Central Government from amongst persons of eminence having experience in the field of law, economics, business, finance or accountancy;

Provided that the Council may constitute more Disciplinary Committees as and when it considers necessary.

AA will consist of:


Rule 22A:

 1) The Central Government shall, by Notification, constitute an Appellate Authority consisting of :

a) a person who is or has been a Judge of a High Court, to be its Chairperson;

b) two members to be appointed from amongst persons who have been members of the Council for at least one full term and who is not a sitting member of the Council;

c) two members to be nominated by the Central Government from amongst persons having knowledge and practical experience in the field of law, economics, business, finance or accountancy.

2) The Chairperson and other members shall be part-time members.

Thus, people from outside the profession will also now sit in judgment.

5. Under the old Act (prior to amendment in 2006) the Council had a power in terms of clause of Part II of Second Schedule to the Act, to issue Notifications. Under these Notifications, Council could provide that a breach of any of its Notifications would be regarded as a misconduct. Under the amended Act, such power is missing. As a consequence, Notifications issued between 1965 to 2004 stand repealed with effect from 8-8-2008.

In lieu of these, the ICAI has now issued ‘Council General Guidelines – 2008’ by a Notification dated 8-8-2008. These are published at page nos. 686 to 689 of CA journal of October 2008. More or less, these are the same ones as were issued between 1965 to 2004. (See page 333 of BCA journal, November 2008 ICAI  and  its Members)

Guidelines and self-regulatory measures can be found from page 313 to 327 in the publication Code of Ethics. – Revised edition published in January 2009.

The  Guidelines pertain to :

    i) Conduct  of a member  being  an employee.

    ii) Prohibition of appointment of member as cost auditor.
    
iii) Prohibition on expressing an opinion on financial statements of a relative.

    iv) Maintenance  of books  of account  by members,

    v) Ceiling on tax audit assignments (Max. 45 nos. other than clause (c) of S. 44AB of Income-tax Act, 1961)

    vi) Appointment of an auditor where undisputed audit fees of previous auditor are unpaid.

    vii) Maximum number of audit assignments under Companies Act, 1956 (overall ceiling of 30 nos. despite the ceiling/liberties specified in Companies Act). Members are required to maintain a register of audits done.

    viii) Ceiling on fees for other assignments of the same client whose statutory audit is done by a member.

    ix) Not to accept audit where member is indebted for more than Rs.10,000.

    x) Directions  on unjustified  removal  of auditors.

    xi) Minimum   audit  fees  in certain  cases.

CA Regulations 1988 have also  been amended.

Other recommended self-regulatory measures:

    i) Branch audit and joint audit vis-a-vis no. of partners.

    ii) Ratio between  qualified  and  unqualified   staff.

    iii) Disclosure of interest by auditors in other firms.

    iv) Ceiling on the fees. Interestingly the clause re-lating to undercutting of fees is being deleted.

The  Council in its  281st meeting held from 3rd October, 2008 to 5th October 2008 at New Delhi considered an issue arising from the Guidance Note on Tax audit u/s.44AB of the Income-tax Act, 1961 as to “Whether the internal auditor of an assessee, being an individual chartered accountant or a firm of chartered accountants can be appointed as his tax auditor”.

The Council decided that an internal auditor of an assessee, whether working with the organisation or independently practising chartered accountant or a firm of chartered accountants, cannot be appointed as his tax auditor.

The said clarification of the Council has been published in the January 2009 issue of ‘The Chartered Accountants’ Journal.

The said restriction has been relaxed by further clarification.

6. Miscellaneous  points:

6.1 In para 3.2 of Part I of this article (BCAJ May 2009), I had stated a few points which are regarded as not of much consequence while deciding a case. One more such irrelevant factor is the motive behind the complaint. In many cases, respondents vehemently argue as to how the motive behind the complaint is unscrupulous or bad; or merely to settle a score against some third party. The Council is very much aware of such motives whereby the disciplinary mechanism is taken undue advantage of. However, when it comes to examining a case on facts and merits, the Council’s hands are tied. It does not give much weightage to such factors. The existence of ‘guilt’ is to be decided in an objective manner.

Conclusion:

This topic is also like a big ocean. New systems and procedures are yet to get stabilised. Hearings under the new system are yet to commence. We have to wait and watch as to how things will develop in terms of mindsets of members of various committees, particularly non-CAs, speed of disposal and so on. I have many more things to share even in respect of the existing system. I can deal with certain specific issues if I get further opportunity. A feedback from the readers will also enable me to write in a particular direction. Till then I only wish that all our readers will always remain out of this vicious net.

Understanding Islamic Finance

Article

“All that we had borrowed up to 1985 or 1986 was around $ 5
billion and we have paid about $ 16 billion, yet we are still being told that we
owe about $ 28 billion. That $ 28 billion came about because of the injustice in
the foreign creditors’ interest rates. If you ask me what the worst thing in the
world is, I will say it is compounded interest”.


Former
President Obasanjo of Nigeria

after the G8 summit in Okinawa in 2000.


First the big question :

How is Islamic finance different from conventional finance ?
It looks the same; the result is often the same. What is the difference ?

Let’s take a real world comparison. Let’s take $ 10,000 for
instance and compare what a conventional bank can do with this and what an
Islamic bank can do.

First — The conventional bank :

The conventional bank finds a creditworthy customer and lends
at 5% interest. The bank is not particularly concerned about what happens to
this money other than that it gets repaid. The customer on the other hand has
already found a borrower willing to pay 7%. The borrower runs a small credit
co-operative for students and lends at 10%. One of these students is
enterprising enough to lend to his unemployed brother at 15% who has just
discovered the power of compounding interest and lends to street vendors at 25%.
We can go on. But you get the idea. There are poor people today paying upwards
of 40%.

The problem with artificial wealth creation based on interest
and the fact that you do not need actual cash to lend money means that the
original $ 10,000 could keep passing hands until we pump out over $ 100,000 of
artificial wealth. So how much actual cash is there ? Only $ 10,000. With
interest, we managed to turn $ 10,000 into much more. So are we surprised when
billions of dollars vanish into thin air ?

Second — The Islamic bank :

The Islamic bank only invests in actual assets and services.
It might buy machinery, lease out a car, or invest in a small business. But
throughout, the transaction is always tied to a real asset or service.

That is the difference between Islamic finance and
conventional finance. The difference between buying something real and borrowing
and lending something fleeting. What conventional finance enables is the ability
to sell money when there is no money; to sell assets before there are underlying
assets and to allow debts to grow unchecked while borrowers become more
desperate.

Interest creates an artificial money supply that is not
backed by real assets. The result is increased inflation, heightened volatility,
richer rich, and poorer poor.

It seems unbelievable but sadly it is typical. Developing
countries start off with relatively small loans and remain saddled with huge
amounts of growing debt for generations. This could be Nigeria, or any other
poor country. To give just one other example, during the years leading up to the
1997 Asian collapse, Indonesia’s foreign debt as a percentage of GDP was over
60%. So Nigeria is certainly not an isolated example.

UNICEF estimates that over one-half million children under
the age of 5 die each year around the world as a result of the debt crisis. But
as we have seen, it is not the debt that is the problem; it is the compounding
interest.

Nick the homebuyer :

In 2009, Nick lost his job, his house and all the money he
had spent paying off his mortgage. Let us consider that Nick availed a
Diminishing Musharakah (Partnership) facility with the bank.

Under a Diminishing Musharakah, the bank’s equity decreases
throughout the tenure of the financing, while the client’s ownership keeps
increasing throughout a series of equity purchases. Eventually, the client
becomes the sole owner.

Nick, having lost his job, would still have an equity stake
in an actual property that he could monetize.

Assume he purchased a $ 220,000 house and put down $ 20,000,
financing the remaining $ 200,000 from the Islamic bank. The finance is to last
20 years and the bank sets a 5% profit rate. For the sake of simplicity we will
make it 20 annual instalments. (Refer Table)

Year

Home buyer’s

Bank’s

Rent

Home
buyer’s

 

equity

ownership

 

payment

 

 

 

 

 

1

$10,000

$190,000

$10,000

$20,000

2

$10,000

$180,000

$9,500

$19,500

3

$10,000

$170,000

$9,000

$19,000

4

$10,000

$160,000

$8,500

$18,500

18

$10,000

$20,000

$1,500

$11,500

19

$10,000

$10,000

$1,000

$11,000

20

$10,000

$0

$500

$10,500

In the second column of the Table we have the homebuyer’s equity purchase, which is how much the buyer pays every year for buying the property’s actual equity. It is his way of increasing ownership in the property while diminishing the bank’s ownership as shown in the third column of the Table. The fourth column of the Table called rent is what the homebuyer pays the bank for the portion of the property he does not yet own, a number that keeps decreasing as the bank’s share keeps decreasing. The final column shows what the homebuyer pays in total every year.

At no time does the homebuyer pay any interest. And certainly at no time does any payment compound. The homebuyer pays for just two things: the house in incremental payments, and the rent for the portion of the house he does not yet own. Call it Islamic finance, ethical finance, or conventional finance; when banks take real ownership of an asset, what can only truly be called real risk, economics do not fall apart like a house of cards.

So how could Islamic finance have helped former President Obasanjo of Nigeria?

Using the $ 5 billion from their initial borrowing, Islamic banks could provide $ 5 billion of financing for infrastructure, literacy, healthcare and sanitation programmes to name a few.

An Islamic bank could have arranged for the $ 4 billion construction of a natural gas pipeline delivered to Nigeria for $ 5 billion using an Istisna financing.

Or taken an equity stake in a highway project and shared in profits and losses using a Musharakah partnership.

The next time one wonders whether Islamic banking is just dressed-up conventional banking, see if one finds a single major consumer bank that co-owns actual properties with their customers. An Islamic bank takes direct ownership of actual assets, whether for a long period such as in a lease or equity partnership, or for a short period, such as in a sale trade.

Simply put, Islamic finance permits equity, trade, and leasing, but forbids debt.

Principles guiding Islamic banks:

Islamic banking transactions must be:

  •     Interest free

  •     Risk shared

  •     Asset or service backed, and

  •     Contractual certain

  •     Ethical

The Islamic ban on interest is not new. For centuries banned by Christians and Jews, Islamic Law prohibits paying or earning interest irrespective of whether it is a soft development loan or a monthly consumption loan.

The Bible contains the following verse:

“If you lend to one of my people among you who is needy, do not be like the money-lender; charge him no interest.”
— Exodus 22:25-27

In March 2009, the Vatican came out with the following statement : “The ethical principles on which Islamic finance is based may bring banks closer to their clients and to the true spirit which should mark every financial service.”

Today, Islamic finance is no longer a niche market. With global assets estimated at USD 1 trillion, asset growth has kept steady in most countries at over 15% per annum. Apart from Muslim countries, Islamic finance has penetrated into countries like Singapore, China, Australia, Thailand, Canada, United Kingdom, France, Korea, Japan, Switzerland, and Luxembourg.

Conventional banks with extensive Islamic banking operations include Citigroup, HSBC, Deutsche Bank, UBS, ABN-Amro, and Standard Chartered.

Standardised accounting and product standards promulgated by the Accounting and Auditing Organisation for Islamic Financial Institutions (AAOIFI) provide regulated standards and common bases for global convergence. Islamic market indices like the Dow Jones Islamic Market Index comprise 69 country indices including India’s.

India is on the threshold of launching key Islamic finance initiatives with the Reserve Bank of India considering landmark policy changes. Companies like TATA AIG, Bajaj Allianz, and Taurus have already started to tap this segment of the market by offering Islamic-friendly products. With over 160 million Muslims in India, and with its strong position in global capital markets, India stands poised to become a major Islamic finance hub in the coming years.

Reminiscences about the profession

Article

The word ‘Reminiscences’ suggests remoteness in time unlike,
its synonyms ‘Recollections’ and ‘Remembrances’ which entail sequential
recalling of facts rather than disparate incidents. This subtle distinction
allows the latitude for selectivity, when penning ‘reminiscences’.


Reminiscences could be hazardous, but I agreed to write in
appreciation of BCAS’ role as a thought leader in our profession, and their
exemplary functioning, which reminds me of the hope expressed by Hon. C. D. Deshmukh, the first Finance
Minister of India in his speech inaugurating the ICAI that “this structure shall
house all that is noble and dignified in the profession of Chartered
Accountants”.

This narrative cannot begin without acknowledging a deep debt
of gratitude to two benefactors, Mr. V. D. Chowgule, and the Hinduja family, who
respectively facilitated my entry into Articles in London (1966) and passage
into industry (2002) gently, swiftly and with future prospects that could hardly
have been bettered.

Entry via UK :

An entry to ICAI membership in 1971 as a UK CA, under a
facility open up to mid 90s, and paradoxically shut during my own presidency,
gave me relief from examinations, and seemed almost providentially designed by
ICAI founding fathers, to set the duller lot free from the severer struggles
with Indian legislation, bestowing on me large leisure to brood over coming to
terms with Mumbai’s ground reality, on return from PW London Office.

Early ’70s :

On joining a large firm in India (1972), my first impressions
were of contrasts, difficult to reconcile. Firms with quality clientele to match
today’s multinational LLPs, but squeezed by an oppressive tax regime, worked in
rudimentary environments with non-existent creature comforts, the serene
antithesis of the later-day CA offices modelled after five-star lounges.
Unctuous peons donning traditional round black topis served feeble beverages —
reverentially to ‘Saabs’, obsequiously to ‘Seths’, deferentially to visiting
clients, and indifferently to other inmates.

CAs rode the high tide of sought-after tax expertise,
following doomed attempts by the business community to find cheer in the tax
regime then extant under the FERA-cum-Licence Raj, except through the most
abstruse tax planning, on a scale now hardly credible even to modern tax
planners.

The finest minds upon graduation craved Articles, enchanted
by the premium CA qualification. Some of the gems who trained during those
years, including under me, are today leaders of many sectors in India and
abroad, too numerous to recount.

Managers were deemed successful if staff rooms were empty
(there was no hot-desking then). It was seen as a sign of success (billable
hours was the main saleable product, as it is today) if the little ones were
ticking up chargeable hours in client offices, while the big ones turned
disputation into argument in tax offices, and escalated these before tax
Tribunals, — the latter appellate forum already under relentless surrender to
the rival black-gowned profession.

Seeds of slide :

Members of our profession were imperceptibly but irreversibly
consigning themselves to meaner and less rewarding rungs on the ladder of
representational work. When the enduring tale of our profession is eventually
written, the scribes shall have the unenviable task of scripting a durable
record of the price we paid for neglecting the two engines that could have
navigated us to greater prosperity and good fortune — presentation skills, and
language skills. The neglect of these skills virtually handed on a platter to
MBAs and other disciplines, traditional preserves, over which CAs could easily
have retained hegemony.

Inherent tragedy :

The inherent tragedy of the CA in India is that — the CA Act
keeps members from doing that which is not prescribed, whereas the Advocates Act
keeps non-members from doing whatever the black-gowned profession does. So the
CA Act shackles CAs while the Advocates Act shackles competition.

Extensions of accounting like costing, management accounting
and financial management had by 70s been popularised, covered by authoritative
ICAI pronouncements, and become common enough to be put to general account. The
concept of accounting had changed, from one of maintenance of books and tracking
asset changes, to complex resource allocations and forward looking measurements
that support decisions for the efficient maximisation of profit. These
specialisms were subsumed by management consultancy, which turned esoteric, and
gradually the more lucrative work was captured by brand names, mostly non-CAs,
able to win predatorily priced assignments, and function with impunity outside
any regulatory framework whatsoever.

Gradually, all perceived ‘value added’ domains moved away
from the core attest function.

Auditing :

Audits had progressed, beyond the’ post factum technique of validating profit or loss and asset changes, to prescriptive regulator-driven reporting regimes, notably the requirements of October 1973 obliging verifications of capacities, turnover, production and stock quantities categorised by licensed sublimits, to be published in Annual Reports; and MAOCARO 1975 (forerunner of current CARO) requiring explicit subjective judgmental statements that broke new ground, augmenting responsibility and chargeable hours to perform extra work, without commensurate rise in fees, because clients saw little benefit to their businesses from that work. Astute, information-hungry bureaucracy had spotted an ideal intermediary to cater to regulator needs at no cost. So, over the years MAOCARO items elongated like the legendary Hanuman tail. One benefit that flowed to the membership from MAOCARO was a formal resuscitation of Internal Audit.

ICAI formed an Audit Committee on 17th September 1982, the date, I entered the Council. The ICAI President retiring on that day had lectured me on book keeping two decades back at college. I wondered if his farewell symbolised departure of quality from those hallowed premises, but was reassured to observe the elders that stayed on in the Council. They were learned men, rather serious, looking as though they would never surrender to any form of mirth, except maybe a twitch of a smile, if elected President.

Accent was as much on redistribution of work as on creation of new work; ‘Tax Audit’ was a notable milestone in creation of new work. Curiously though, the more comprehending minds among the then seniors, were, at least initially, not enthused by this source of perennial new work – it was seen as too risky.

The pet themes in rationing audits were ‘rotation’ which was rumoured tri-annually, and ‘ceiling’ which was mooted more recurrently. The latter was eventually enacted at 20 audits per partner and the former dumped, not because this was a triumph of self preservation by the old guard, but because many rotationists had done so well over the decade, as to see life differently. In the first draft of the new Companies Bill, the proposed ceiling on large audits was misprinted as 2 instead of 20 per partner. The first copies arrived as I was hosting a dinner for a former ICAI President. He had just declined a dessert that I had offered to order. Together we noticed the unexpected steep diminution in the ceiling on large audits at 2 per partner, without realising it was a misprint. He lightened the gloom by announcing that he would change his mind, and have the dessert after all, as this might be among the last occasions that it would be on offer. Obviously I had been wrong about elders not having a sense of humour – they did!

The big scramble in audit was for empanelment to win audits of nationalised banks, insurance companies and PSUs. The appearance of a senior bureaucrat with dispensing powers at any gathering could metamorphose ‘service’ into ‘servility’. This may have been the first dent in a system which had earlier taught members to aspire, but not to grovel.

Hopes about uplifting audit as a deterrent to corporate quixotry, through a convergence of statistical sampling and unprecedented advances in information technology, died early . Technology and sampling were used to boost margins by justifying drastic reductions in work and costs, by many, but almost institutionalised by a large international organisation that collapsed some years ago causing much misery. Given the disability that an auditor can neither issue summons, nor examine on oath, nor disclose the most horrendous client sins except in a court proceeding, auditing is probably destined to veer towards forensic investigations with statutory support. Some international firms have made commendable progress in this, without formal backing.

The Licence Raj also required numerous attestations – there was a boom in what was referred in vernacular as ‘certificate work’. Agents scouted impecunious young CAs even deep into the mofussil to entice ‘certifications’ of illusory end users and fictitious consumptions of the costliest imports.

Fleeing  the  shackles:

Fault lay not with the hapless membership, but in the stagnant economy and archaic regulatory shackles that offered little opportunity, except perhaps through emigration. Thousands went west, and as many gravitated to the Gulf. They did well, and did their country and calling proud.

The Council contained competent and clean professionals. But in a closed economy, an unseemly proportion of time was drained on volumes of disciplinary cases punishing puny sins – no more than tiny ads, minor indirect solicitations, and acceptance of minuscule audits without prior NOCs, mainly by members struggling for the economic necessities of life. Large established wrongdoers, including CAs outside professional practices, were seldom booked.

Tax:

Before the blossoming of other specialisms, the absorption with taxation as a discipline was near total. When established CAs of that era crossed fifty years of age, it would not have been uncommon to see their interest in the finer points of fiscal interpretations sublimated to become the principal passion of existence, replacing all other zests. 1985 broke the tax spell and ushered in Financial Services which were already waiting in the wings to come centre stage.

Finance:

The risks assumed by financial institutions in ex-tending term loans soon brought forth a new breed of CAs to help borrowers satisfy the information needs of lenders. This work quickly extended to an appraisal of justifications for projects before committing funds. The ICAI published the Back-ground Material on Project Evaluation in 1988, but well before that, entrepreneurs increasingly saw CAs as facilitators and procurers of much-needed finance, rather than number crunchers peering at small print, while big picture concerns went unnoticed. The evolution of a learned but backward looking timid lot into a dynamic pack not lacking commercial nous, became agreeably evident.

Industry :

An important lesson the profession was learning; was, that sectors outside traditional audit, especially industry sector, would value as advisors only those professionals who were providers of solutions, not those who stopped short of a solution after finding the root of a problem, howsoever painstakingly researched that finding of the problem root may be. For many of us brought up in the traditional mould, this may have been a bitter pill to swallow. But it is important to bear in mind that if the perceptions of society about us professionals do not coincide with our self perception, then it is we professionals who become irrelevant, not society, nor those who hold the purse strings that generally influence the perceptions of society.

Standards    – ASB,  IASB & IFRS

The Council did take worthy initiatives in line with world trends. Accounting Standards Board was set up in 1977. But contrary to popular impression, our thrust, at least initially, was not market-driven. I was Chairman of ASB for some years, thereafter on Steering Committees of International Accounting Standards (IAS) and finally India’s nominee on the main Board of IAS for a full Term. I worked closely with Sir David Tweedie, later IASB Chairman, and luminaries from US, Europe and Japan. International Standard Setter meetings occurred in exotic places in the world, and at times went on for nearly a week. The scholarship and erudition round the table was so profound as to be intimidating. But the humility was amazing. I once complimented Jim Lisenring, Vice-Chairman of US FASB, that his oration on the subtler aspects of financial instruments was the most brilliant piece I ever heard; and he shot back “that proves you have not been around in the world enough”. Incidentally the divide on debatable issues between the two sides of the Atlantic was at least as wide as between the two sides of the Pacific. The Board included such experienced individuals as could elucidate the most intractable technical problems with astounding clarity using examples of transactions in a small shop. Belying the irrepressibly drab image of beancounters, some delegates regaled us with the wittiest after-dinner speeches.

Installation of IFRS, including in US corporations, may well represent the single biggest opportunity for ICAI members during the next decade.

Capital markets and Bank NPAs:

For much of our formative years, my generation was awed by an authority known as the Controller of Capital Issues that obliged industry to seek our pricey attestation on intricate application forms, designed to obstruct rather than facilitate, the issue of capital or bonus shares. This controller vanished overnight, a little before the new SEBI-sponsored arrangements were fully in place, leaving an interregnum during which a number of adventurous souls including CAs had more than their share of fun.

In one of his famous plays Shakespeare has written an oft-quoted line “let us kill all lawyers”. He was terribly wrong, not only because he exaggerated the foibles and banalities of the calling he named, but because he had never met merchant bankers before he wrote that line. Had he met merchant bankers, he may not have dished out this dire prescription to others.

One of the Managing Directors at Bear Stearns (which folded up later) led the Financial Analysts in the IASB in discussing many issues including derivatives, hedge instruments, options, off-balance sheet items, etc. She would sometimes ask me how she had come through, and I would reassure her that she had not exhibited the characteristics implicit in the sounds of her firm name i.e., ‘neither ‘Bear’ nor ‘Ste(a)rn(s)’. Uncannily though, I had then, and still have today, an instinct against some of the new fangled financial instruments, and particularly their accounting.

I have a foreboding of worse disasters to come, because the malaise is no longer confined to bankers and capital market intermediaries, but includes modern CFOs, some belonging to our own profession. So obsessed are the CFOs with ‘selling’ bankable balance sheets to Analysts and Investors and presenting their Business to audiences from an external perspective, that, an in-depth expertise in specialist areas like Risks including Tax risks, and Regulatory requirements, have become for them the least important areas of their work. This folly is compounded by the cordial assent which these incorrect priorities now seem to receive, even from the more comprehending minds, in Industry and Profession.

If I were asked to muse in retrospect, on who should be regarded as the biggest offender against financial discipline, I would not accuse the business community. On the contrary, given the spate of acquisitions abroad, the Indian businessman must be seen as a defender, not offender, by those who care about the Indian Economy.

Pre-liberalisation era curbed genuine entrepreneurship, denying the scarce foreign exchange to the worthy enterprise, while at times releasing it for the not so deserving. One instance may suffice to illustrate incondite loans in foreign exchange.

A consortium of nationalised banks had lent a humongous sum in US dollars to a project spear-headed from India with some foreign individuals as stakeholders. The project was located in an island in the Indian Ocean. Costs and Interests escalated and were additionally funded. The Banking consortium sent me to investigate. With the benefit of hindsight, it would appear this was done by the lead banker, more to allay the disquiet among some bankers in the consortium, than to ascertain what went on. I turned out to be a bad choice for them. In a show of excessive confidentiality, instead of the easier route via Bahrain, I was flown east-ward and then back on a long flight across the Indian Ocean westward. I think it was intended that I have a whale of a time for a week, and return home with a tutored report. My total rejection of any alcoholic stimulant on the island and a punctilious application of mind to Books and Records soon soured the pitch. As a professional, and as a human being, I was grieved to see an instance of how the scarce resources of a poor country seemed to have been applied by those appointed to guard those resources. On return, unsurprisingly I was cold shouldered, and received only superficial acknowledgement, with just one exception. One bank official had the courage to openly support my findings, and when these ran into a dead end, the grace to orally share his suspicion that the report had been dumped. This outstanding officer later rose to be Chairman of one of the oldest nationalised banks, partially reinforcing my faith in the survival of virtue in an ocean of compromise.

Tenure in Council:

I was re-elected five times to the ICAI Council over 16 years 1982-1998.

In 1994 I became Vice-President solely because, the councillors disenchanted with me were marginally less than the number disenchanted with the other contestant who was actually a far more deserving candidate than I was.

Jack of all:

Every few years, Council resolutions expanded the list of what could be includible as permissible work to be performed by CAs. Like troops attempting to hold more ground than what their supply lines could sustain, the spread became thinnest at the core. Adjacent competencies waxed, while traditional proficiencies may have waned.

Sadly, members in industry gradually saw our Institute activities as somewhat less relevant, and in later years, one was never certain how much of the participation at seminars, was spurred by mandatory CPE.

Weaning away:

Meanwhile tribes that were initially tiny, like Company Secretaries, Internal Auditors, and Financial Analysts made considerable headway. They cultivated, inter alia, better relationships with key officials in Ministries of immense relevance to the Professions. ICAI was more established, but may have been perceived as somewhat insular by those whose opinion mattered most, during critical phases of growth and development. There was a joke that our policy towards competition appeared to be to, first disregard, thereafter ban our members joining those bodies, and after such banning had conferred upon those bodies the halo of martyrdom that ensured their survival, consider mutual exemptions from examinable subjects.

Change:

Elections had always been an undercurrent in the Council, and with exponential growth in the number of members, elective merit loomed larger. Elected councillors, could be seen as outstanding CAs who happened to have good PR, or perceived as outstanding PR persons who happened to be CAs. Fortunately, sufficient numbers of CAs of great merit still obtain on the Council. Only time can tell how many of the challenges that came along – whether it be the electronic age, the growing role of rival disciplines, or more vitallythe avalanche of Foreign Service Suppliers post 1993 – were proactively met with foresight by those at the helm including me.

New Order:

A New Order evolved in which professional services organisations, some of whom are integral parts of international networks, endeavour to offer advice using a multidisciplinary business-focussed approach.

To view the New Order as unwelcome would be an exercise in misinformation and prejudice. The change heralded much that was good and some of it exceptionally good. First of all, the New Order destroyed oligarchies that had existed earlier. Equality of opportunity is a principle far better served by the New Order in the first decade of the 21st century than was ever served during the preceding half century. Equally importantly, aspiring talented CAs unable to flourish in their own practice can now join the very large establishments more easily than they could ever have become part of the erstwhile oligarchies. Besides, it is only the New Order that has made it possible for large numbers of CAs to receive pecuniary rewards far higher than those ever expected in the past. Moreover, under the current new dispensations, the large residue is annually shared locally with remarkable fairness, and reportedly with an equity that contrasts favourably with the skewed slopes for profit sharing ordained in the past. Finally and happily, the local top brass of all the new large CA establishments in India are overwhelmingly members of ICAI.

Shangri-la :

These reminiscences could hardly be complete without a kind word for those who encouraged my drift in a turbulent upheaval from profession to industry. But for this, I would have missed out on the most rewarding and happiest working years 2002 onwards, which at this moment of writing seem to grow richer by the day. From 1966 to 2002, for 36 years, I deprecated my role in Kipling’s words – “those who report on deeds performed by others are not equal to those that perform deeds worthy of being reported”. Now I am performing the deeds, and the uniquely benign Promoter Family I closely work for, have afforded me roles, in exciting realms of modern international business and wealth creation.

Profession — The Way Forward

ARTICLE

Introduction:


The decade ahead from now would be a promising period for
India as a nation and the role of the profession would assume an altogether
different magnitude and significance from what it was in the past. India would
be doing everything to transform itself into a developed nation by 2020. There
would be resurgence in the overall economic activity and buoyancy in many
sectors. As accounting and finance professionals, Chartered Accountants both in
Industry and practice, would have a pivotal role to play in multiple capacities
to promote the prosperity of the business houses and thereby facilitate the
economic growth of the nation. Sea change in the taxation and corporate laws
demands unlearning and relearning which would be a challenging task for us.
Technology would have a predominant role in many things the profession does and
technological tools would evolve to improve the operational efficiency of the
professionals.


Business advisory New facet of the profession:


Management consultancy practice and corporate advisory
services would assume greater proposition in the wide range of services to be
rendered by members of the profession. Mergers and acquisitions leading to
growth and expansion of businesses would be the order of the day. As part of the
expansion plan, many companies would go in for IPO to raise capital in the
domestic markets. Besides, Indian companies are going global by establishing
subsidiaries and acquiring businesses abroad. Indian accounting profession
should also think and act global. More and more corporate entities would be
raising funds in the versatile global markets and the authenticity of the
financial information as certified by the profession would therefore assume
paramount importance. Further, restructuring as part of business reengineering
could be of immense value addition to the business enterprises. Corporate
funding for new ventures as well as for diversification projects need to be
handled by the profession by providing back-to-back services. Therefore, the
profession need to empower itself in all these areas to cater to the
expectations and do effective hand-holding in execution of these various
strategic plans. An audit firm can render these services at a smaller scale
comfortably. When the size and magnitude are large, it would be better to create
a corporate entity so that with funding from various resources massive human
resource recruitment with wider horizons of expertise and capabilities becomes
feasible.

By virtue of S. 25 of the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949,
Chartered Accountancy practice cannot be in corporate form. But there is no such
restriction for consultancy practice. There are two ways of rendering the
above-mentioned non-exclusive services by the profession under the status of a
company. First methodology is to incorporate a corporate entity by obtaining
name approval and recognition from the Institute of Chartered Accountants of
India (ICAI). The second method is to establish a company without recourse to
ICAI. The difference between the first and the second approach is that in the
first option, a member of the profession holding Certificate of Practice (COP)
can become a managing director or executive director or be actively involved in
any other position in the company. Such a member can continue to carry on attest
function in the audit firm in which he is a partner and be eligible to train
articled assistants under him. In the second option, these advantages would not
be there and a member could at best be a director simplicitor or a
retainer/consultant of the company. Then the management of such a company would
be by others who could even be non-members of
the profession. If, in the second option, any member desires to actively get
associated in the day-to-day management of the company, then he has to surrender
the COP and cease to render assurance services or train articled assistants.
While a few members of the profession may opt to be with the audit firm, a few
others may take up positions in the company. The co-existence of an audit firm
and a corporate entity as indicated above, without breaching any of the norms of
the ICAI, would augur well to compete in the market with even business entities,
banks and other corporate bodies rendering such non-exclusive services.


IFRS convergence — The next big change in
reporting:


In-principle decision taken by the Ministry of Corporate
Affairs (MCA) is to the effect that India would not adopt IFRS as it is, but
would formulate Indian Standards corresponding to each IFRS in vogue. This
implies that ICAI has to re-issue Indian Standards corresponding to each IFRS.
The differences between IGAAP and IFRS need to be ironed out and those standards
shall thereafter be considered by the National Advisory Committee on Accounting
Standards (NACAS). The Standards would then be recommended by the NACAS to the
Government to be notified under the Companies Act as Indian IFRS. The advantages
in adapting Indian Standards to IFRS instead of adopting IFRS are as follows:

  • Wherever options
    are provided in IFRS either for recognition or measurement or presentation,
    Indian Standard can eliminate one or more of the options and retain what suits
    Indian entities.

  • Indian Standards
    can prescribe disclosures which are not contained in IFRS.

  • Indian Standards
    can use terminologies different from those used in IFRS, so long as the change
    does not result in deviation of the accounting principle prescribed in IFRS.

The above-mentioned differences would not be construed as
resulting in non-compliance with IFRS and India would still be perceived as an
IFRS-compliant country.

The next five years will be critical for the profession in
this area of practice as the phased implementation of convergence has been
announced by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs. The decision is to phase out the
converge during the period between 2011 and 2014 as given in table below:

Urban co-operative banks having networth not over Rs.200
crores; Regional rural banks; unlisted companies having networth below Rs.500
crores and SMPs are all outside the purview of convergence plan as of now.

The subject of IFRS being new and the expertise being limited, there are plenty of opportunities emerging for the profession in the nature of conducting training programmes; developing the processes and systems related to technology initiatives; transforming the accounting and financial reporting from I GAAP to IFRS and above all, in rendering advisory services. Even small firms and individuals can adopt IFRS as an area of specialisation. Knowledge of IFRS would be inevitable to discharge the attest function in a proper manner with reference to an entity that has followed IFRS-based Standards. Indian accounting profession, if equipped well, will have opportunity to render services not only on the domestic turf, but also across the globe as this is a potential KPO segment.

XBRL initiative — Technology in reporting: eXtensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL) is a new reporting methodology involving technology for better, faster and smarter presentation of financial information of an entity. XBRL enables preparers of the business reports to meet business reporting demands effectively and cost efficiently. XBRL facilitates the investors to decipher the figures in the balance sheet and other financial statements in a uniform and harmonious manner across the globe. As on date, about 11 countries have implemented XBRL. India is in the process of assuming jurisdiction and implementing this initiative by the end of this year for companies listed in stock exchanges. Many other countries are making significant progress in the adoption of XBRL. For this purpose, taxanomy, which is a kind of dictionary containing organised group of definitions that represent information found in a variety of business reports and the relationships of the items found in those business reports, is required to be prepared and adopted. Our profession can play a vital role in this whole exercise by associating with the Government, stock exchanges and the listed companies in the evolution of this facility in India and later in its effective implementation. Thereafter, financial statements uploaded by the listing companies with the stock exchanges using the XBRL platform would be more meaningful in meeting the expectations and information needs of the international stakeholders.

Phase I

From 1-4-2011

1.

Listed and unlisted companies with net worth
of over Rs.1,000 crores

 

 

2.

Companies in the sensex and nifty club and
companies listed in overseas

 

 

 

stock exchanges

 

 

 

 

Phase II

From 1-4-2012

 

Insurance companies

 

 

 

 

Phase III

From 1-4-2013

1.

Listed and unlisted companies with a net
worth of over Rs.500 crores but

 

 

 

less than Rs.1,000
crores

 

 

2.

Banking companies

 

 

3.

Urban co-operative banks having networth of
over Rs.300 crores

 

 

 

 

Phase IV

From 1-4-2014

1.

All listed companies with a net worth of
Rs.500 crores and less;

 

 

2.

Urban co-operative banks having networth
above Rs.200 cr but less than

 

 

 

Rs.300 crores

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Goods and Services Tax — All in one basket:

The Empowered Committee of State Finance Ministers is still grappling with the formulation of Goods and Services Tax (GST) model to be implemented in India. Just as the resentment and opposition that came from certain States for replacement of Sales Tax by VAT, GST is also receiving divergent reactions from various State Governments. In the year 2009, when the present government got re-elected, the tone and tenor of the announcement was such that GST would be implemented with effect from April 1, 2011 and there would be an attempt to introduce Direct Taxes code sometime thereafter. After comprehending the difficulty in generating a wide consensus among the State Governments on GST, the Finance Minister’s speech delivered while commending the Union budget 2010-2011 on 26th February, 2010 made the certainty and confidence in implementing Direct Taxes code, which is the sole prerogative of the Union Government, with effect from April 1, 2011 quite obvious but on introduction on the same date of the legislation governing GST only an earnest attempt has been assured. (paras 25 & 26 of the FM’s speech).
plunge into this field of services in a comprehensive manner. GST is proposed to encompass all the levies that are now imposed in the nature of Excise duty, Additional Customs duty (CVD), VAT, Service tax, Entertainment taxes, Octroi, Entry taxes, Luxury tax, Cess, Stamp duty, etc. Consequently, GST would be a significant contributor to the Government exchequer and the role of the profession in this branch of law, would accordingly become more important.

Direct Taxes Code — Redefining Income-tax Law: On 12th August, 2009, the draft Direct Taxes Code (DTC) Bill was released along with the discussion paper for public debate and comments. Many of the forums and the public, expressed anguish on select areas such as levy of MAT on gross value of assets of the companies, DTAA override, residential status of foreign companies, taxation of capital gains, Exempt-Exempt Tax (EET) provisions, General Anti-Avoidance Rules (GAAR), taxation of not-for-profit organisations and proposal to adopt 6% of the ratable value of a house property as the rental income, etc. The Honorable Finance Minister, assured to revisit these and other areas and that the DTC would be redrafted accordingly. On 15th June, 2010, the revised discussion paper on DTC has been released covering the changes made in eleven items, including the above-mentioned areas and response has been called for from public by 30th June, 2010. Most of the changes are welcome in nature. There could still be scope for representation in matters relating to certain aspects of capital gains, the concept of ‘controlled financial corporation (CFC)’ sought to be introduced for the first time and the increased scope of wealth tax imposing levy on all persons. It has also been indicated in the revised discussion paper that the threshold limits and slab rates originally proposed in the DTC may be calibrated in the Bill that would be introduced in the Parliament. The same would happen to the threshold limit in wealth tax is the indication.

Majority of our members in practice, especially in smaller places, specialise in taxation. There needs to be a paradigm shift in this segment of practice as the implementation of DTC would usher in a new era of taxation regime. Irrespective of the fact that DTC has few demerits, in comparison with the present legislation DTC certainly has many advantages to its credit in terms of simplicity and methodology of computation and procedures. Looking at positively, a substantial segment of the present judicial precedents would become irrelevant in the implementation of DTC. The only hope is that the room for fresh litigation under DTC may not be as fertile as it is under the existing legislation. It is good to note that in spite of the recession, the revenue collection on the direct tax front has seen a phenomenal increase. Lower tax levels and better compliance, it is expected, would propel the economy into a double-digit growth trajectory. The profession can gear up to translate this expectation into reality by enabling better compliance across wider section of the population.

LLPs and multi-disciplinary partnerships    — Globalisation and Diversification:

Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) as an entity has become a reality with the passage of the Limited Liability Partnership Act, 2008. The provisions of the Income -tax Act have also been amended to include LLP at par with a partnership firm under the Partnership Act, 1932 for taxation purposes. LLP has the distinct advantage of a company as it restricts the liability of the partners and at the same time preserves the operational flexibility of a partnership firm. Yet another advantage of a LLP is that there is no ceiling in the number of partners.

The concept of multi-disciplinary partnership (MDP) firm has also been recognised when the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949 was amended by the Chartered Accountants Amendment Act, 2006. The First Schedule of the Act [Clause (4) of Part I] was amended to permit members of the profession to enter into partnership with members of other profession as may be notified. The Council deliberated in the context of such amendment and recommended to the Government, way back in 2006-07, that the following professionals may be notified as eligible to be admitted as partners in a CA firm:

    Cost Accountant;
    Company Secretary;
    Advocate;
    Engineer;
    Architect; and
    Actuary

Once the relevant Notification is issued, MDP would become a reality and CA firms can admit the above class of professionals. Further, as and when ICAI enters into Mutual Recognition Agreement (MRA) with any professional body or institution situated outside India, members of ICAI will be in a position to enter into partnership even with members of such bodies/institutions.

At present the fragmentation of the profession is so obvious that there are 32,496 proprietary firms, 10,500 firms with 2 to 3 partners, 2,886 firms with 4 to 10 partners and hardly 186 firms with more than 10 partners. If the regulations are suitably modified and notified to permit CA practice to be carried on in the form of MDP which is a LLP, then the profession would witness rapid expansion and growth. There would be consolidation of small and medium firms to upgrade into large firms so that all such firms can become a one-stop solution provider. By the end of the next decade even if there are 10 Indian firms that have grown considerably big and expanded globally, either directly or through affiliation, it would augur well for the Indian accounting profession.

The profession should also address the risk of facing claims and litigations in the emerging scenario. As practiced globally, CA firms should evaluate the risk factors associated with their areas of practice and accordingly protect their interest by subscribing to professional indemnity policy.

Composition of membership — Equality in profession:
Basically, there are three categories of members from ICAI point of view. One, who hold membership but do not obtain COP since they are in full-time employment. Second, those who go in for employment, but take up practice on part-time basis by obtaining COP. Such category of members is eligible to render consultancy services but not assurance services. Third category are those who take up practice on full-time basis with COP. Considering the fact that those in part-time practice are primarily in employment and that they cannot carry on attest function, they are grouped, for our analysis, as being in employment. In any case, their strength constitutes less than 10% of the total strength of membership at any given point of time. In the eighties, most of the membership was in practice and only a small percentage of the members were in employment. With globalisation, liberalisation and privatisation from 1991 onwards, phenomenal increase in opportunities was witnessed in the manufacturing and service sectors for CAs resulting in more and more inflow into employment than in practice.

There are two revelations based on data as on 1-4-2009 that needs to be comprehended. First, the size of the members in employment is phenomenally increasing over the last decade leading to a situation where they constitute 54% and those in practice account for only 46%. Secondly, if the membership increase of 22,654 between 1-4- 2006 and 31-3-2009 is analysed, it is astonishing to note that 95.67% have taken up employment and the rest have entered full-time practice. Of course, those who are recruited by audit firms as employees are also treated as being in employment since they don’t obtain COP. A few decades down the line, the situation may be such that a significant portion of the members (say, about 80%) would be in employment and those in public practice may dwindle similar to what is prevalent in developed economies. Of course migration of Indian CAs to foreign countries may decline with India rapidly growing and the developed economies experiencing recession coupled with the fact that opportunities are reaching a point of saturation. Still the outflow to upcoming economies cannot be ruled out. On the growth front, if CA firms can increase their ability to pay at par with business enterprises, more talent could be drawn into the profession from the market. A day should emerge when CA firms compete equally with corporate entities at the campus placements organised by ICAI for recruiting CAs.

Another trend that is quite interesting is the steep increase in the composition of female members and also of girls pursuing CA curriculum. In 2000, the female members of ICAI accounted for about 8% which increased to about 12% in 2005 and in 2010 it is at 16% of the overall membership of about 165,000. Between 2000 and 2010, the growth of total membership is 71,142 out of which the female membership accounts for 18,397 (26%). In respect of student population, since inception of the profession in 1949 up to 1999, the inflow of girls used to be insignificant and that is why we had only 8% female members in 2000. But thereafter the scenario changed and the new curriculum introduced in 2006-07 accelerated the inflow phenomenally such that the female students now account for sizable number as seen below:

CPT: Female 129,432; Male 250,657 — Total 380,089 with the ratio 34:66;

PCC/IPCC: Female 71,157; Male 138,716 — Total 209,873 with the ratio 34:66; and

FINAL: Female 25,884; Male 97,427 — Total 97,427 with the ratio 27:73

As indicated above, at the entry level, the girls have registered a little over 1/3rd share in the total strength. This trend is bound to continue and with the passage of time the composition of the profession would include significant proportion of the female membership. This is another phenomenon the profession should encourage and factor in its growth profile.

Conclusion:

Besides providing assurance services and facilitating compliance of various laws, our profession can architect every business growth and expansion; advocate for business reengineering; doctor the revival of sick units; engineer viable business solutions; navigate the implementation of systems and procedures; pilot strategic plans and thereby author business success stories in the country. Profession should aim at achieving excellence in all its endeavours. Excellence is like the summit of a pyramid — the larger the base, the higher could be the summit. There are limitations to the excellence we can achieve on a narrow base. Therefore, the profession should broad base the range of services as indicated above with wider skill sets, standards and values. The quality and credibility of the profession should be such that we are in a position to build a pyramid of excellence, the summit of which is unmatched by that of any other profession. In matters of innovation and knowledge empowerment, let us swim with the flow of the current but in matters of values and principles let us stand like a rock as ultimately, it is the image and the reputation of the profession that would enable us to sustain, grow and excel.

Reminiscences of the profession in the Society

Article

In this article for the Special Issue on the occasion of the
Diamond Jubilee of the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society, I have been asked
to write my reminiscences of the profession in the Society. I passed in 1951 and
became a member of the Society, introduced by Ambalal S. Thakkar. I have tried
to cover my experiences, enjoyable moments and the travails undergone by me
during the long period of 57 years. I have also made observations about the
state of the profession from time to time and the manner in which it has changed
during the half century.


My most vivid recollection is of the Study Circle meetings,
which used to be held in the office of M/s. Shah & Co., Chartered Accountants as
the Society did not have its own office and the meetings used to be attended by
stalwarts like late S. P. Mehta, Senior Advocate and Chartered Accountants like
Sarvashri Ambalal Thakkar, Narandas Shah, Dhirubhai Bhatt, the first President
of the Society and others. The discussions were very useful and knowledgeable
for a beginner like me.

In those days, the important meetings were felicitation of
the President of the Institute, which were normally held at Radio Club in
informal atmosphere and constituted important source of information about the
Institute and its activities. The other annual feature was the talk on the
Budget by late N. A. Palkhivala. These meetings were held at the Greens Hotel,
which is now no more there. The attendance by the members was large but can-not
be compared to the meetings held in later years at the Brabourne Stadium by
Forum of Free Enterprise.

I also remember the first conference held by the Society at
Taj, which was attended by many senior members of the profession and many
subjects of professional interest were discussed at the conference. The meetings
were also addressed, amongst others by R. P. Dalal, who was earlier the member
of the Income Tax Appellate Tribunal and who humorously introduced himself as
out-standing member of the Tribunal after retirement from the Tribunal. The main
characteristic of the Study Circle and Lecture meetings was the informal
atmosphere in which they were held.

But the more notable feature of the Society was that normally
the President was selected by the Committee of the past Presidents taking into
consideration the erudition and leadership qualities of the person and was
respected by the members except on one or two occasions. This healthy tradition
is continued till today. There was scope for aspiring members of the Society to
work in honorary capacity as Committee members, Secretary and Treasurer and also
without being members of the Committee. The seeds of democracy and
responsibility as good professionals were sown by the members during their work
for the Society.

Another landmark stage was reached when the Society hired the
Office of Circle Literaire for its Study Circle and lecture meetings usually
held on Wednesdays. It was not necessary to know a single word of the French
language to attend the meetings there ! ‘60, Forbes Street’ became the famous
address of BCA Society for a number of years. The larger space gave a boost to
the Study Circle and lecture meetings and the publication of the Journal of the
Society, which was issued in cyclostyled form and which was the precursor of the
present ‘The Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal’ of the Society. One cannot
forget the services of Shyam Argade, as the editor of the Journal for a number
of years. The Study Circle and Lecture meetings gave opportunity, encouragement
and confidence to the new members to participate in the meetings. The meetings
of the Managing Committee were usually followed by dinner of the Committee
members and Past Presidents, which was frequently held at Ripon Club, Opp.
Bombay University.

But the real contribution of the Society to the profession
was by its leading role in representation to the authorities concerned on tax
matters and other professional problems relating to the Companies Act,
Partnership Act, etc. and the educational programmes like Seminars, Residential
Refresher Course, Workshops, etc., I remember the stormy meeting held at the
Greens Hotel to oppose tooth and nail the introduction of Rule to certify Income
Tax Return of the clients, a move fraught with danger to the professional filing
his clients’ Tax Returns.

One of the interesting features of the social activities was
the annual picnic of the members to Mahableshwar and Matheran, Lonavala, Pune,
Malavali Fort, etc. The present generation will not be able to believe that one
of the courses organised by the Society was at Mahableshwar for a charge of Rs.6
per day including boarding. Likewise, the annual social held more or less
regularly every year provided musical programmes including veteran Music
Directors like Naushad, not to mention the Qawali programme of Shakila Banoo
Bhopali on the boat cruise. A memorable event in one of these programmes was the
failure of the brakes of the car on ‘Ghat Road’ of Homi Banaji, one of the
amiable members and President of the Society. Likewise, the distinguished
gallery of the Presidents included personalities like late S. V. Ghatalia, S. N.
Desai, and E. C. Pavri besides the trinity of Shri Dinubhai, Shri Ambalal and
Shri Narandas.

The Society was the first to organise a Residential Refresher Course at Matheran under the Presidentship of P. N. Shah, which was inaugurated by S. P. Mehta whom the Society had accepted as the Hon. Member. The faculty included Bansi Mehta and I had the opportunity to write my first paper at the RRC on the evergreen subject of depreciation, which never depreciated in its value. Since then the Society has organised the course every year and is one of the most popular programmes, for which the enrolment is full within hours of the commencement and faster than some of the listed companies’ issues. This pioneering activity was followed by other professional bodies including Western Indian Regional Council of Chartered Accounts, Chamber of Tax Consultants and All India Federation of Tax Practitioners. It was in one of such programmes that I had contributed a paper on Public Trusts, which was repeated in sub-sequent courses and became a monograph on the subject, of which revised editions were brought out from time to time, the later ones being with Shariq Contractor and Gautam Nayak.

I had the good fortune to work as Treasurer and Secretary, and finally the President of the Society in the year 1963-64 along with R. J. Damanwala as Secretary, who was very meticulous about various activities. These positions gave me the basic training of presiding over the meetings of the members and various committees, the number of which was not very large at that time.

The growth and development of the Society compelled it to acquire the larger office at Dol-Bin-Shir. The bigger office but with a smaller lift gave boost to the meetings and library activity. One interesting feature of this office was that the office of that witty, principled Chartered Accountant, late Jal Dastur was in the same building involving greater participation by him. With the holding of Residential Refresher Courses at Bangalore, Pune, Aurangabad, Goa, Jaipur, Agra, Mount Abu and Indore, the Society became an All India Society which brought in new talent from younger members like Pinakin D. Desai, Kishor Karia and seniors like Y. H. Malegam, M. L. Bhakta, K. H. Kaji and others. The special invitees or the chief guests included the President of the Institute and persons from academic field like Prof. Rege of Bombay University. The scope of the subjects was extended to Indirect Taxes, Company Law, Computers, etc., so that the RRC became the hallmark of the Society. Another first was the RRC held at Dubai, which was participated by many local members also and meetings with Government officials and fol-lowed in the evening by Harbour visit, socials and dinners in Desert Safari.

The annual budget lectures were given by S. P. Mehta for a number of years and after his demise, are being given by Soli Dastur, Senior Advocate, whose popularity is evidenced by the fact that even the Birla Hall proved too small, compelling the Society to shift the venue to the architecturally beautiful hall of Swaminarayan Sanstha with a ca-pacity of more than 2000 persons. This was followed by annual half-day meeting on the Finance Act, after it was passed in Parliament. The mile-stone programme was the Silver and the Golden Jubilee conferences, the last being inaugurated by the President of the Institute and valedictory address by Shri Chidambaram, the present Finance Minister.

The next milestone in the Society’s history was the acquisition of new office premises at Churchgate Chambers, ‘A’ Road, Mumbai, further expanded by two premises in the same building. The larger office gave a further boost to the activities of the Society led by Narayan Varma, past President of the Society, with originality and number of new ideas for the growth of the Society and vision. The Society adopted the vision with the implementation of the goals set therein as its foundation. On his initiative the Society started educational programmes with the first such programme for management training jointly with Jamnalal Bajaj Institute. The success of this programme led to the launching of several new courses one after the other, namely, Professional Accountant, Internal Audit, Corporate Directors, Arbitration, etc. and also enhanced the value of the Chartered Accountants by giving them certificate for the training, approved by the University of Mumbai.

Shri Varma also gave a thrust to the activities of the BCA Foundation, a public trust established for help to the Chartered Accountants and the stu-dents, by very large collection for the Tsunami victims, by helping them to restore the schools in Tamil Nadu and development of computer programmes. Last but not the least, on account of his interest and enthusiasm, the foundation also devoted itself to the activities under the Right to Information Act, which proved to be a very pow-erful instrument in the hands of the people.

The publication activity received a big fillip with issue of marathon tax audit manual by five joint authors, Narayan Varma, Kishor Karia, Dilip Lakhani, Sunil Kothare and myself which helped the Chartered Accountants engaged in the task of carrying out tax audit. Likewise, many other publications were brought out on the subject of various aspects of Income Tax law, Accounting Standards, Auditing’ Standards, Service Tax, International Taxation, Computers, FEMA, Indirect Taxes, etc. The fantastic utility of more than fifty publications, revised from time to time enhanced the image of the Society as educational body.

The pre-budget and post-budget representations assumed great importance and were even followed by visits to Delhi for meeting with the Chairman and members of the CBDT and officials of the Finance Ministry. Similar representations were made on Company Law, Indirect Taxes, etc. The Society was recognised for appearance before the various committees appointed by the Government for ‘simplification’ and rationalisation, like the Choksi Committee, the Committee for Rationalisation of Tax Laws, the Kelkar Committee, Vanchoo Committee, etc.

The Society also organised Press Conferences when very serious problems were involved in Tax Laws and also participated in T. V. programmes after the presentation of the Finance Bill. The can-cerous corruption did not escape the attention of the Society, resulting in appointment of a small group comprising representatives of other professional bodies to provide machinery for fighting corruption, but unfortunately, due to inherent limi-tations, the group could not make much headway.

With the liberalisation and opening of the economy to international trade, FEMA and International Taxation became very important and Study Circles and other groups made special study of the subject with a view to equip the members to deal with issues arising therefrom and the need of foreign companies for attending to their work in India. Transfer pricing was not ignored and Conferences and special programmes were annually held to discuss the various issues.

The latest development in the field of education is to develop several modules on different subjects like Service Tax, TDS, etc., for the distant education programme and though, it may face teething trouble, it will succeed ultimately in its goal of educating Chartered Accountants as well as others. The idea has been picked up by other professional bodies also.

The role of the Society for the professional development has to be considered in the context of co-ordination and rapport with the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, our official body governing the profession. In the early 50s the Society was asked to consider whether it was necessary to continue and expand the Society and whether it was duplicating the work of the Institute. However, the majority of the members did not subscribe to this view, as they considered that the Society is performing useful role to supplement the activities of the Institute and not to supplant the official organisation, some of whose Presidents and Council members also were actively involved with the Society. Hence, every new President and Vice-President was invited to visit the Society for be stowing felicitations and discussing the professional problems with them. In addition, in some cases the President of the Institute also inaugurated the technical programmes or gave talks on current issues like Accounting & Auditing Standards. Thus, the rapport of the Society with the parent body has been excellent throughout the years.

The clinics started by the Society for guidance of members and the public for Charitable Trusts, Accounts and Audit, and Right to Information have been doing excellent work in the education of professional as well as others who attend the clinics and take advantage thereof to solve their difficulties. The other way of public education is to bring out booklets for exposition of the changes brought in by the Budget within three days in not only English but also Hindi and Gujarati languages, so that more than 40,000 copies are circulated to professionals as well as members of the public. likewise, the education of students is not overlooked by starting revisional classes for them and lower subscription for journal of the Society and attending other programmes at concessional rates.

The last lap of expansion has been acquiring the present premises at New Marine lines, equipped with facilities for library, computers, Conference Hall for about 100 persons over an area of about 2500 sq. ft.

I have been associated with the Society in different capacities as member of the Managing Committee and Core Group and Invitee as past President over more than 50 years and have been member of the various committees including Taxation, International Taxation, and Accounting & Auditing. life is an unending educational process, so that I continue to contribute to the activities of the Society by participating in its Seminars, Conferences, Brains Trust, RRC, etc. I had therefore, the opportunity to overview the growth and development of the Society from seven members to more than 8,000 members today. There is difference in professional life in the 50s and 60s of the last century when the laws and the practice were very simple, though effective. But today with the increasingly important role of the Chartered Accountant in the core subjects of Taxation and Auditing and the new fields of International Accounting & Auditing Standards, IFRS and International Taxation, FEMA, audits of Public Sector Companies, Banks and Insurance, with greater expectation by the C&AG and the new pastures of Government Accounting, Local Bodies and the whole gamut of Indirect Taxation covering Excise & Customs Duties, Modvat and Service Tax – the list is endless and the ever-increasing need for continuing professional education is amply served by the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society.

In view of the knowledge required on several fronts, the need of the hour is specialisation and bigger firms rendering services in all directions under one roof. This has witnessed even the amalgamation and mergers of the big eight firms into big four firms today and merger of other middling firms to cope with the need of the professional services, raising a question whether there is scope for proprietary or small firms of two or three members. But my observation of the small firms in U.S. and even European countries leads me to conclude that even the smaller firms have the scope for practising with the advantage of greater personal attention and intimate rapport with the clients and specialisation by the firms and partners only in some subjects. Time alone will show whether this prediction will turn out to be right or wrong.

Whether proviso to S. 147 curtails time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Income-tax Act ?

Background :

Recently the Bangalore Tribunal in the case of Maruthi Mercantile Pvt. Ltd. v. ACIT, (2009 TIOL 142 ITAT Bang.) has held to the effect that proviso to S. 147 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (hereinafter referred to as the ‘Act’) does not curtail the time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act. In said decision the learned AR relied upon the decision of the very Tribunal in the case of Amitronics Pvt. Ltd. (ITA No. 299-302/Bang./2003 dated 7-4-2006) and contended that no action can be taken after the end of four years from the relevant assessment year and as no action also includes completion of assessment, no assessment order can be passed after end of four years from the end of the relevant assessment year.

However, the Bangalore Tribunal following the decision of the Ahmedabad Tribunal Special Bench in the case of Gujarat Credit Corporation Ltd. v. ACIT, (113 ITD 133) held that limitation of four years applies to the initiation of reassessment proceedings and held that proviso to S. 147 of the Act does not curtail the time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act and consequently the reopening was held as valid.

The main reasons for rejecting the plea of the assessee in the said case were as under :

1. Proviso to S. 147 of the Act refers to only initiation/reopening of assessment/reassessment. It does not provide for an assessment u/s.147 of the Act.

2. For making an assessment u/s.147 of the Act, the AO is required to follow the procedures laid down similar to the assessment u/s.143 (3) of the Act and hence provisions of S. 147 of the Act are not separate code in itself.

3. Provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act are specific as against proviso to S. 147 of the Act.

Let us discuss each of the pleas of the ITAT Ahmedabad in details.

1. What is an assessment or reassessment ?

    1.1 With reference to the first contention of the Revenue that proviso to S. 147 of the Act does not deal with making an assessment, it would be necessary to find out the meaning of ‘assessment or reassessment’.

    1.2 Assessment is defined u/s.2(8) of the Act as ‘assessment includes reassessment’. In view of the fact that the word has not been appropriately defined under the Act, it would be necessary to look to the meaning of the word ‘assessment’ as held by several courts.

    1.2.1 The Apex Court in the case of S. Sankappa v. ITO, (1968) 68 ITR 760 has defined the word ‘assessment’. The Apex Court has observed that the word ‘assessment’ is used in the Act in a number of provisions in a comprehensive sense and refers to all proceedings, starting with the filing of the return or issue of notice and ending with determination of the tax payable by the assessee. Though in some Sections, the word ‘assessment’ is used only with reference to computation of income, in other Sections it has more comprehensive meaning mentioned above.

    1.2.2 The word ‘assessment’ is not confined to the definite act of making an order of assessment — Sir Rajendranath Mukerjee v. CIT, (1934) 2 ITR 71 (PC).

    1.2.3 In the normal sense ‘to assess’ means to fix the amount of tax or to determine such amount. The process of reassessment is to the same purpose and is included in the connotation of the term ‘assessment’ — ITO v. K. N. Guruswamy, (1958) 34 ITR 601 (SC).

    1.2.4 The word ‘assessment’ bears different meanings, and in one sense it comprehends the entire process of computation and levy of tax — Addl. ITO v. E. Alfred, (1962) 44 ITR 442 (SC).

    1.2.5 Based on the above interpretation given to the word ‘assessment’, it can be said that ‘assessment’ is not merely an act in itself but it denotes the entire processes. Even though the same word is to be interpreted in a most restrictive sense, it includes computation or determination of tax.

    1.3 From the above it would be noted that assessment is not merely passing an order but is a process; normally, assessment proceedings involve the following actions :

  •      Filing of return of income

  •      Review/processing of return of income

  •     Issuance of notice

  •     Service of notice

  •      Giving of opportunity of being heard

  •      Recording of the proceedings

  •      Passing of an order relating to the proceedings

  •      Service of demand notice, if any demand is raised pursuant to the said order.

    In statute generally separate provisions are prescribed for filing of return of income, processing of return of income, issuance of notice, so on and so forth till service of demand notice.

    1.4 As per S. 2(8) of the Act, assessment includes reassessment. Hence, whatever is stated above in respect of the word ‘assessment’ will also apply in respect of ‘reassessment’. It would thus be clear that reassessment includes not merely forming an opinion on escaped income or reopening of an assessment but also making an assessment.

    1.5 In addition to the above, it may be worthwhile to refer to specific provisions relating to re-assessment proceedings which have been enacted in S. 147 to S. 152 of the Act :

  •      S. 147 of the Act provides for assessment of escaped income.

  •      S. 148 of the Act provides for issuance of notice before starting of re-assessment proceedings.

  •      S. 149 of the Act prescribes time limit for issuance of notice for re-assessment.

  •      S. 150 of the Act prescribes time limit for issuance of notice for assessment or reassessment in pursuance of the order under an appeal.    

  • S. 151 of the Act stipulates that in case where assessment has been made u/s.143(3) or u/s.147 of the Act, notice u/s.148 of the Act would be required to be issued by an officer of a rank of ACIT1 or above and if the officer below the rank of ACIT issues notice, then sanction of JCIT2 would be required. Proviso to S. 151 of the Act states that no notice should be issued after the end of four years from the end of relevant assessment year unless CCIT3 or CIT4 is satisfied for the reasons recorded by the AO5 that the same is a fit case for issuance of such notice.

    S. 152 of the Act prescribes that tax on such income should be levied as if the income under reference has not escaped assessment.
 

From the above, it would be clear that special provisions dealing with the reassessment or recomputation have been prescribed u/s.147 to u/s.152 of the Act, which call for an assessment u/s.147 of the Act.

1.6 Reference may also be made to S. 153 of the Act, which prescribes time limit for completion of assessments. S. 153(1) refers to time limit for comple-tion of assessment u/s.143(3) of the Act, whereas S. 153(2) of the Act refers to completion of assessment u/s.147 of the Act.

1.7 S. 246A of the Act prescribes orders which are appealable before the Commissioner (Appeals). Clause (a) to Ss.(1) refers to the order of assessment passed u/s.143 (3) of the Act as an appealable or-der, whereas clause (b) to Ss.(1) refers to the order of assessment passed u/s.147 of the Act.

1.8 In the said Special Bench decision, the Ahmedabad Tribunal has relied upon Gujarat High Court decision in the case of Praful Chunilal Patel v. M. J. Makwana, ACIT (236 ITR 832). The ITAT in its decision in the case of Gujarat Credit Corporation Ltd. (supra) has stated that the additional ground raised by Gujarat Credit Corporation Ltd. is squarely covered by the decision of the Gujarat High Court. However, the ITAT Special Bench has erred inas-much as facts and the question before the adjudicating authority in each of the two cases. The case before the CIT(A) was validity of reopening of the assessment and meaning of ‘reason to believe’ when assessment u/s.143(3) of the Act has been concluded by the Assessing Officer, whereas the additional ground raised before the Special Bench talks about limitation on making assessment after end of 4 years from the relevant assessment year. Hence, reliance on the Gujarat High Court decision is totally mis-placed and the decision of the Gujarat High Court is totally distinguishable. In substance, the Gujarat High Court has dealt with a case when the Assessing Officer has reopened the completed assessment based on the point which was not discussed/dealt with in the regular assessment or was missed out by the Assessing Officer. Hence, to that extent the decision of the Gujarat High Court is not applicable to the facts and circumstances of the case of Gujarat Credit Corporation Ltd.

1.9 From the above, it would be clear that order of assessment is required to be made u/s.147 of the Act and assessment is not restricted to merely initiation of proceedings but includes actions up to and including service of notice of demand.

2. It may worthwhile to consider as to whether any other interpretation is possible ?

2.1 The intention of the statute has been explained by Explanatory notes to the Direct Tax Laws Amendment Act, 1987 as initiation of proceedings is required to be done within four years from the end of the relevant year. However, the wording of the provisions indicate the other way, hence this leads us to a situation as to whether a statutory provision can be given a meaning other than or rather broader than what was required/intended ?

2.2 One classic and interesting case before us is of interpretation given to the provisions of Chapter XII-H of the Act relating to fringe benefit tax. The Legislature has intended to tax only those expenses which are expended by the organisation and result into benefit to more than one employee of the organisation rather than one specified or identified employee so that deficiency in not being able to tax as perquisite can be cured. However, by virtue of the wording of the provisions of the Act, the intention has been lost and the scope has been broadened to include all such expenses which come within the listed category of expenses by virtue of deeming fiction created by using different language in the statutory provision.

2.3 The comparison with provisions of Chapter XII-H of the Act have been made with one specific reason that both the provisions, viz. provisions of S. 147 of the Act and provisions of S. 115WE of the Act refer to assessment.

2.4 In view of the above, if intention of the statute is not required to be given undue importance if the language of the provisions is clear, then the provisions of S. 147 should be interpreted to include all actions up to and including service of notice rather than merely initiation of proceedings.

Now reverting back to the issue of curtailing limitation period u/s.153(2) of the Act to the decision on the Ahmedabad Special Bench in the case of Gujarat Credit Corporation Ltd. v. ACIT, (supra), the Special Bench has decided that the proviso to S. 147 of the Act does not curtail the time limit prescribed under the provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act.

3. Whether provision of S. 147 of the Act is complete code in itself ?

3.1 The Apex Court in the case of R. Dalmia & Anr. v. CIT, 236 ITR 480 has held that provisions of S. 147 is not a separate code in itself. It goes on to say that as the assessment u/s.147 is to be made as per the procedure laid down u/s.143 or 144 of the Act, the same is an assessment u/s.143(3) r.w. S. 147 of the Act. With due respect to ITAT Special Benchs decision it may be stated that the entire issue has been misdirected in the sense that the issue was whether the phrase ‘no action’ denotes only initiation or also includes ‘making assessment’. By referring to the Apex Court’s decision which categorically stated that “in making assessment and re-assessment u/ s.147, the procedure laid down in Section subsequent to S. 139 including that laid down by S. 144B has to be followed”. Hence, if it can be inferred that following procedure leads to passing an order u/ s.143 of the Act instead of u/s.147, it will result in number of issues.

3.2 Only by adhering to the procedure prescribed will not alter the order to be passed. This can be explained very well by an illustration regarding deduction u/s.80IB of the Act. Deduction u/s.80IB of the Act is subject to compliance with certain conditions as specified u/s.80IA of the Act. This does not lead to an interpretation that deduction is effectively allowed or claimed u/s.80IA of the Act. The very nature of the deduction will remain un-changed with regard to deduction u/s.80IB of the Act, even though the same is subject to certain conditions prescribed u/s.80IA of the Act.

3.3 Similarly, following machinery procedures laid down subsequent to S. 139 of the Act up to 144B of the Act merely enable the AO to ask for certain information in certain manner as far as assessment u/s.147 of the Act is required to be done. However, the very nature of assessment will remain un-changed at reassessment or recomputation u/s.147. Moreover, the language of provisions of S. 147 of the Act clearly states that it covers in its scope “he may assess, reassess such income”.

3.4 Even the Apex Court in the decision of R. Dalmia & Anr. v. CIT, (236 ITR 480) has held that ‘procedure’ to be followed and has not commented anything on ‘action’. Provisions subsequent to S. 139 and up to and including 144B prescribe various Sections for procedure to be followed for making an assessment and also assessment provisions. However, the Apex Court decision requires that ‘procedure’ as contained in provisions subsequent to S. 139 of the Act up to S. 144B of the Act are required to be followed. Hence, the Apex Court has expressed its view only regarding ‘procedure’. Reliance is totally misplaced on the said decisions along with other decisions like Punjab and Haryana High Court, Andhra Pradesh High Court and Delhi Special Bench Decision when the Special Bench was dealing the word ‘action’ which is much wider in its meaning and application than ‘procedure’.

3.5 This leads us to the practice followed in gen-eral by tax authorities as well as assessees, when order is passed in respect of any reassessment pro-ceedings, the same is termed as order u/s.143(3) read with S. 147 of the Act. However, in light of the above discussion, the same should be order u/s.147 read with S. 143(3) of the Act. The above change of phrase is important as when we refer to the former phrase, it indicates the order is primarily passed u/ s.143(3) of the Act by observing procedure laid down as per S. 147 of the Act, however, the same is not correct as S. 147 of the Act is a separate code in itself. The very fact is indicated by the intention of the statute which has reference in many other Sections of the Act, which say ‘order of assessment/ reassessment u/s.147’. Hence, ideally, the order should be referred as order u/s.147 read with S. 143(3) of the Act as it provides procedures applicable to order passed u/s.143(3) of the Act.

4. Whether proviso to S. 147 is special provision or provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act ?

4.1 The Special Bench has held that as S. 153 pre-scribes time limit for various types of assessments/ reassessments and S. 147 of the Act are ‘subject to’ provisions of S. 148 to S. 153 of the Act, S. 153(2) of the Act is a special provision over proviso to S. 147 of the Act.

4.2 The Special Bench has relied on the phrase ‘subject to provisions of S. 148 to S. 153’ as used in S. 147 of the Act and held that the proviso to S. 147 is also subject to provisions of S. 148 to S. 153 including provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act. This leads us to the basic interpretation issue as to when any Section is made subject to provisions of some other Section, then the effect of such other Section is required to be given first, hence provisions of such other Section would override the basic Section which makes itself subject to other provisions of the Act.

4.3 Hence, when provisions of S. 147 of the Act are concerned, the assessment or reassessment u/s.147 of the Act should be done subject to provisions of S. 148 to S. 153 of the Act. Hence, before making as-sessment u/s.147, notice as required u/s.148 of the Act should be provided within the time limit pre-scribed u/s.149 and complying with other provi-sions of S. 150 and S. 151 if applicable. Tax should be levied in manner prescribed u/s.152 of the Act and the order of assessment u/s.147 of the Act should be passed in time prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act.

4.4 Proviso to S. 147 of the Act has been worded as under :

Provided that where an assessment U/ss.(3) of S. 143 or this Section has been made for the relevant assessment year, no action shall be taken under this sec-tion after the expiry of four years from the end of the relevant assessment year, unless any income charge-able to tax has escaped assessment for such assessment year by reason of the failure on the part of the asses-see to make a return u/s.139 or in response to a notice issued U/ss.(1) of S. 142 or S. 148 or to disclose fully and truly all material facts necessary for his assess-ment, for that assessment year. (emphasis supplied)

4.5 The proviso has been made applicable to the entire S. 147 of the Act, hence the same makes an exception to the entire Section. In view of this, whether ‘subject to’ has to be read first or proviso has to be read first and then to apply the other so as to restrict one by another.

4.6 Action u/s.147 is subject to provisions of S. 148 to S. 153 of the Act i.e., any action u/s.147 of the Act can be taken by satisfying the conditions and pro-cedures laid down u/s.148 to u/s.153 of the Act. This includes taking an action of completion of an assessment u/s.147 of the Act within the time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act. This applies to all the reassessment proceedings whether all the material and information relating to income which has escaped assessment have been disclosed by the assessee or not disclosed by the assessee.

4.7 However, the proviso provides for an exception to the reassessment made u/s.147 of the Act, which (i.e., reassessment) should be in conformity with the provisions/conditions laid down u/s.148 to u/s.153 of the Act, and state that such action (i.e., any action from initiation of proceedings to service of demand notice) should not be taken after certain time period.

4.8 This clearly indicates that even though action u/s.147 of the Act which requires making of an assessment or reassessment to be completed within time frame prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act, such action (which is in conformity with provisions of S. 148 to S. 153 of the Act) cannot be taken after the end of four years from the end of relevant assessment year. This means that any action u/s.147 of the Act is required to be in conformity with the provi-sions of S. 148 to S. 153 of the Act and hence whether proviso applies or not, all the reassessments need to be in compliance with provisions of S. 148 to S. 153 of the Act. In the cases where proviso is applicable due to the satisfaction of the conditions prescribed thereunder; the action which otherwise would have been validly taken up will now not been taken up.

4.9 Proviso restricts application of main Section which is also supported by the legal interpretation of application of ‘proviso’ in any tax statute.

4.10 Another issue raised by the Special Bench is regarding application of rule of special over general as S. 153(2) of the Act which provides for time limit for completion of the assessment, the same is a special provision and will override proviso to S. 147 of the Act which is general in its application.

4.11 S. 153 of the Act prescribes time limits for completion of assessments/reassessments under various provisions of the Act. S. 153(2) of the Act prescribes time limit for completion of assessment u/s.147 of the Act. Hence, any reassessment u/s.147 of the Act requires to be completed within the time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act if no other exception is provided thereto. Hence, provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act apply in all the reassessment proceedings irrespective whether assessee has disclosed all the material facts or not or whether assessment has been made u/s.143(3) or u/s.144 or u/s.147 of the Act.

4.12 This indicates that S. 153(2) of the Act is a general provision prescribing time limit for completion of the reassessment proceedings as far as application of or making of reassessment u/s.147 of the Act is concerned.

4.13 However, proviso to S. 147 of the Act provides for some exceptions for taking an action (which also includes completion of assessment as discussed above), where the following conditions are fulfilled :

i) The assessment for the concerned year has been completed u/s.143(3) or u/s.147 of the Act, and

ii) The assessee has not defaulted in any of the followings :

    a. Making return u/s.139 of the Act

    b. Making return in pursuance to notice u/s.142(1) of the Act

    c. Making return in pursuance to notice u/s.148 of the Act

    d. Disclosing fully and truly all material facts important for making assessment for the concerned assessment year.

4.14 Hence, if all the above conditions are fulfilled, the proviso would apply in respect of the reassessment being otherwise validly completed within the time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act. The proviso provides for an action (which includes completion of assessment as discussed above) within four years from the end of the relevant assessment year.

4.15 From the above, it is clear that as far as completion of reassessment is concerned, proviso to S. 147 of the Act is a special provision as compared to pro-visions of S. 153(2) of the Act. Hence, in the event any judicial authority holds that rule of special over general will apply, then also proviso will apply and proviso to S. 147 of the Act will override provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act.

5. If proviso to S. 147 overrides provisions of S. 153(2), it would result in absurdity :

5.1 Another issue raised by the Special Bench of Ahmedabad is regarding absurd results if proviso overrides provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act.

5.2 First and most important thing to be understood is when there does not exist any doubt and statute is clear in its words, the absurdity cannot be a ground to give another meaning to the provisions of taxing statute.

5.3 The answer to the issue raised by the Special Bench of Ahmedabad is regarding absurdity of statutory provisions if proviso overrides provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act, lies in change brought out vide the Direct Tax Laws (Amendment) Act, 1987 w.e.f. April 1, 1989.

5.4 The Tribunal has erred in not referring to the scheme of provisions of S. 147 and amendment brought in the said provisions of the Act vide the Finance Act, 1989 w.e.f. 1-4-1989. For better understanding of the provisions of S. 147 of the Act, provision existing and in force prior to 1-4-1989 u/s.147 and u/s.153(2) of the Act are reproduced.

5.5 Provisions of S. 147 and S. 153(3) of the Act need to be noted before and after amendment

5.6 From the above, we can note the following amendments (without referring to Departmental Circular as the same is not binding on the assessee) :

  •     Provisions of S. 147 of the Act had two sub-sections (a) and (b) to deal with two separate situations and similarly provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act had two clauses (a) and (b) to provide for time limits for both the situations separately.

  •     Provisions of sub-sections (a) and (b) of the S. 147 of the Act have been merged into one Section. Moreover, one may notice that the condition of S. 153(2)(a) of the Act is merely repetitive and has already been taken care of vide clause (b)(i) or (b)(ii) of S. 153(2) of the Act, hence the same has been removed in view of merger of two sub-sec-tions u/s.147 of the Act.

  •     Provisions of S. 147(b) of the Act refer to the situation where there is no mistake or omission on the part of the assessee to disclose all the materials truly and correctly and the same situation is envisaged by proviso to S. 147 of the Act with further reduction in scope of the proviso, the statute has provided for the condition that there should have been an assessment or reassessment u/s.143(3) or u/s.147 of the Act. Therefore, it can be said that proviso provides for the situation which was envisaged in provisions of S. 147(b) of the Act as the former is narrower in scope than the latter.

  •     Hence, for cases following u/s.147(b) of the Act, the time limit applicable in case of prior to amendment was 153(2)(b) of the Act was later of the two time limits which resulted into redundancy of condition mentioned in S. 153(2)(b)(i) of the Act as in the cases where all the materials are disclosed to the tax officer, reassessment will be initiated after end of 2 years only, which will result in applicability of condition prescribed u/ s.153(2)(b)(ii) of the Act as the same would only be later date than 153(2)(b)(i) of the Act.

  •     However, now one may say that out of the two time limits, only one remains in the S. 153(2) of the Act and the second condition of erstwhile S. 153(2)(b) of the Act has been made a part of the proviso to S. 147 of the Act. Interestingly, one may note that there is absence of phrase ‘whichever is later’ which was existing in provisions of S. 153(2)(b) of the Act. In light of absence of such phrase, we need to give harmonised construction to both the conditions so that none of the provisions become redundant.

  • This is also supported by the reason for amendment in provisions of S. 147 of the Act by amending Act, 1987 which says the same as ‘rationalisation’ of the provisions of S. 147 of the Act. Vide the Amending Act, 1987, new scheme of assessment has been inserted which has brought into practice assessment by exception i.e., the Assessing Officer will not be required to pass an assessment order in all the cases and will be required to pass assessment order only in cases where the case has been selected for scrutiny. Here, the rationalisation can be seen from the amended provisions of S. 147 of the Act also as reference to assessment order u/s.143(3) of the Act which was missing in earlier provisions have been introduced to restrict the application of provisions of S. 147 of the Act in the cases where the assessing officer has already exercised its power and right to investigate the claims of the asses-see over period of not less than 2 years. Hence, the amended provisions, supports the view by naming the same as rationalising the provisions of S. 147 of the Act as once the case of the assessee has been scrutinised u/s.143(3) of the Act and if there is no mistake on the part of assessee, then extra-ordinary or special provision should not apply to all the cases which otherwise get covered.

5.7 The above discussion clearly suggests that the provisions had been amended to give its proper effect. If we need to take an interpretation that time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act needs to be seen, the proviso to S. 147 becomes redundant and hence harmonised construction should be applied particularly when the phrase ‘whichever is later’ is absent in new amended provisions, we need to interpret the provisions in a manner which do not lead to redundancy in anyone of the two provisions, which imply that we need to read ‘whichever is earlier’ so as to give due weightage to both the provisions which give time limits for completion of assessment u/s.147 of the Act.

5.8 In view of above discussion, it would be logical to conclude that should the proviso to S. 147 prevail over provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act when the case of the assessee is squarely covered by the conditions prescribed under proviso to S. 147 of the Act. This is supported by the following logical and reasoned observations;

5.8.1 Phrase ‘no action’ as used in the proviso to S. 147 of the Act also includes completion of assessment as assessment is required to be completed u/ s.147 of the Act otherwise even provisions of S. 147 of the Act should not have used the words ‘subject to provisions of S. 148 to 153’ in which provisions of S. 153 of the Act refer to time limit for completion of the assessment/reassessment.

5.8.2 Proviso to S. 147 of the Act makes an exception or restriction to the applicability of provisions of S. 147 of the Act to a particular case, which if not so restricted could have been rightly been applied application.

5.8.3 Proviso to S. 147 of the Act is more specific than provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act as provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act apply to all the reassessment proceedings, however, proviso applies in specific cases where conditions prescribed thereunder are satisfied.

5.8.4 In light of the fact that amended provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act do not contain the word ‘whichever is later’, it indicates that we need to give harmonise construction to the provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act and proviso to S. 147 of the Act which contains the time limit which was existing prior to amendment in provisions of S. 153(2) of the Act.

5.8.5 When the statutory provisions are clear and unambiguous, natural meaning has to be given than the intended meaning as far as tax statute is concerned.

6. Conclusion :

In view of the above discussions on the contentions raised not by the Department but by the Tribunal, I can form only one and single opinion that provisions of S. 147 of the Act require making an assessment which include all the acts, procedure and actions from formation of reason to belief that income has escaped assessment till service of notice of demand relating to assessment framed u/s.147 of the Act. The provisions of S. 147 of the Act is a special provision enabling tax authority to take recourse against the assessee in specific situation and hence to take any action, the condition prescribed for the same needs to be fulfilled and hence assessment needs to be framed within the time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act read with proviso to S. 147 of the Act. Hence, the time limit for completion of the reassessment proceedings shall be earlier of the following two :
 

(i) Time limit prescribed u/s.153(2) of the Act; and

(ii)  When assessment has already been framed u/ s.143(3) or u/s.147 of the Act and assessee has disclosed all the material fully and truly, then within 4 years from the end of relevant assessment year.

Hence, I am of the opinion that the ITAT Ahmedabad has without appreciating the statutory provisions in its letter and to some extent spirit of the statute has interpreted as per the general under-standing which is completely not required where issue involved is interpretation of taxing statute is concerned. Hence, I am of the opinion that harmonious construction is required to be given to both the time limits so that none of them become redundant. Hence, here is not the question whether proviso to 147 overrides 153(2) or vis-à-versa, but here the issue is giving harmonious interpretation to both the provisions so that sanctity of both remains, which can be possible only through reading the phrase ‘whichever earlier of the two’ even though unwritten. Hence, the question started with has been answered in positive only to the extent of its final conclusion or otherwise it may be a situation when 153(2) of the Act may override proviso to S. 147 of the Act.

Clause 49 — The road ahead

Introduction :


It’s been some time now since Corporate Governance became
mandatory for listed companies in India vide Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement.
The post-Enron era has evidenced significant development in Corporate Governance
across the globe, though it is still evolving. The raison d’etre of
‘governance codes’ is the Agency Theory on which, the edifice of companies is
built. To what extent the existing model of Clause 49 has been successful in
addressing this Agency theory in India, is yet to be seen. However, there are
still certain areas where there is scope of improvement.

This article identifies and highlights areas wherein Clause
49 is in variance with international governance practices and also tries to
bring out certain inherent limitations in the existing clause. It tries to
highlight potential areas of improvement and articulate the next stage which
Clause 49 needs to embrace in order to improve the governance practice in India.

Splitting the roles of Chairman and CEO :

The basic objective of corporate governance is to segregate
the functions of governing the company and managing the company. This is done by
establishing a governing body (alias the Board) and giving it adequate
independence to direct and supervise the actions of management. To strengthen
its independence, the governing body is constituted through a mix of internal
and external parties. Board’s independence is a sine qua non for
effective governance.

Clause 49 does make demarcation between Governing Body and
Managing Body; this ensures independence to an extent. But at the end of the
day, the leader of both the bodies is the same person i.e., the CEO.
Unlike the Combined Code in the UK, Clause 49 does not mandate splitting of
roles of Chairman and CEO. So in effect, the person responsible for managing the
company is also responsible for managing the Board — which further implies that
the functions of managing and governing are effectively in the hands of the same
person, thereby violating the basic principle of independence and concept of
corporate governance.

In theory, the Board and the Chairman are responsible to
critically evaluate and challenge the actions of the management and the CEO. But
in a scenario where the Chairman of the Board and CEO of the company is the same
person, the Chairman becomes responsible for evaluating his own performance and
challenging his own decisions, which at first instance sounds grotesque, if not
impudent. Albeit, there are other members also on the Board along with CEO, who
are responsible for ensuring independence — combining or not splitting two roles
does jeopardize and weaken the Board’s independence, particularly in Indian
context, where the Board Meetings are largely influenced and driven by its
Chairman making Board Meetings person-driven instead of process-driven. It has
been often evidenced that such meetings are largely led by the Chairman,
undermining and suppressing the roles of other independent directors who often
are fairly new on the Board and thereby putting the Chairman-cum-CEO in further
advantageous position.

Clause A.2 of the Combined Code succinctly provides that
‘There should be a clear division of responsibilities at the head of the company
between the running of the Board and the executive responsibility for the
running of the company’s business. No one individual should have unfettered
powers of decision’.


It further states — The division of responsibilities
between the chairman and chief executive should be clearly established, set out
in writing and agreed by the Board. A chief executive should not go on to be
chairman of the same company. If exceptionally a Board decides that a chief
executive should become chairman, the Board should consult major shareholders in
advance and should set out its reasons to shareholders at the time of the
appointment and in the next annual report.


While the UK law makers do endorse that splitting of roles is
an indispensable component of Board’s independence, they further go to criticise
the consolidated model on the grounds that management might be more tempted, and
more able, to withhold information (which generally means bad news) from the
Board, thereby reducing its ability to assess the company’s performance.
Independence apart, many argue that one person can’t carry out two such
increasingly difficult jobs. Separating them frees the CEO to focus on running
the business and the Chairman to discharge the board’s expanding
responsibilities.

In the United Kingdom, about 95% of all FTSE 350 companies
adhere to the principle that different people should hold each of these roles.
In the United States, by contrast, nearly 80% of S&P 500 companies combine them
— a proportion that has barely changed in the past 15 years.

Clause 49 partly addresses the issue of independence by
mandating that if the Chairman is an executive director, at least fifty percent
of the Board members shall comprise of ‘independent directors’. In case, the
Chairman is a non-executive director, then the minimum number of independent
directors shall be one-third. However, the clause does not mandate that only an
independent director shall be chairman of the Board and that there should be a
clear division of responsibilities between the running of the Board and running
of the company’s business.

Suggestive prescription :

Separating the two roles in itself, is not the panacea for
making Boards more effective and even after such separation there is no
guarantee of improvement in the Board’s performance; however, such separation
will indubitably add to the Board’s independence and empower it to critically
challenge the actions of management and CEO. Clause 49 should mandate the
separation of the two functions; in other words, the Chairman of the Board and
CEO of the company shall be two distinct persons.

Mandating whistleblowing and empowering whistleblowers :

Whether one agrees or not, whistleblowers have a
crucial role to play in corporate governance and can save a corporate
titanic from hitting an ice berg by striking the bells at the right
time. The Enron saga and its downturn started with whistleblowers.

Clause
49 does have a provision for a whistleblower policy, but the provision
is recommendatory in nature. While many of large cap companies have
voluntarily formulated a whistleblower policy, not many companies listed
on stock exchange have a ‘whistleblower’ policy.

Even in those
companies which have implemented a ‘Whistleblower’ policy, it is evident
that the Policy, akin to many other policies, becomes a mere paper
document posted on company’s website. The Policy therefore, is
implemented in letter and not in spirit. There are very few instances on
record wherein the policy has been able to bring out the issues buried
underground and take apposite actions. In majority of companies, the
employees are either oblivious of such a policy or are not willing to
take its recourse and have selected silence as an option.

To boil down, there are two reasons for whistle-blowing not being effective in the Indian scenario

Firstly, having a formal whistleblowing policy is still not mandatory.

Secondly,
the existing corporate culture does not support or rather empower an
employee to stand up and blow the whistle – it is cultural and other
soft factors that impede an employee from coming forward and blowing the
whistle despite formal protection available under the policy.

Whistle
blowers normally lose their jobs and find difficult to get employment
elsewhere. Even in the U.S. Government, whistleblowers get shunted
(source: Financial Express, 12-5-2008).

The cultural deficit
exists because there is lack of adequate commitment and communication
from the Board and management who are reluctant to empower its employees
– in some cases, the reluctance is deliberate while in other cases it
is due to the fact that implementing such a policy requires change, and
any change, particularly cultural change, is difficult to implement.
While latter cases can be pardoned, the former cannot be; deliberate
reluctance from management and Board might be due to fear that such a
policy may act as a key to ‘Pandora’s Box’ and may become’ Achilles
Heel’ of the management by exposing its wrong deeds.

Suggestive prescription:
Following is the suggestive prescription to make whistleblowing an effective tool of corporate governance in Indian scenario.

Giving regulatory hue:
At
the outset,’ prescribing a ‘whistleblower’ policy should be made
mandatory. This will at least initiate formal adoption of the policy and
its implementation, at least in letter, if not in spirit. The auditors/
company secretary, while issuing certificate on corporate governance,
should be required to comment on the adequacy of such a policy.

Allow Anonymous Whistle Blowing:
Despite
the existence of formal policy and conducive culture, employees don’t
consider this tool as a preferred option to highlight wrongdoing within
the organisation. One way to overcome this impediment is to allow
anonymous whistleblowing. Under anonymous reporting, the whistleblower
is not required to disclose his/her identity at the initial stage. Being
anonymous provides an innate protection to the complainant.

This
mechanism however has a risk of impudent issues being reported to Board
and the Board may find itself being mingled among trivial issues which
could have been easily resolved by the management. Also, anonymous
whistleblowing is feasible only at the initial stage of screening of the
issue; once the investigation begins, the anonymous whistleblower
should be willing to come out and testify as a witness. As a matter of
fact the anonymous whistleblower in an anonymous complaint should offer
to do so. In the absence of his willingness, unless a prima facie case
exists, it is likely that the enquiry would be dropped.

Allowing external whistleblowing :
Enact
a law as in the Philippines, where there is a separate law called
‘Whistleblower Protection Act’, which provides legal protection to
whistleblowers for voicing against corruption practices within an
organisation.

Raise the issue with external independent agency,
like company’s auditors who whilst conducting their audit would take
cognizance of such an issue. However, the problem with the above model
is – once a fraud/corruption issue is reported to an external agency, it
becomes rhetoric and has the risk of sabotage to company’s reputation.

Extending Whistleblower policy to other stakeholders:
Whistleblowing,
as a tool to disclose misconduct and graft, is used in a restrictive
sense and embraces only employees within the company including
directors. Under the existing model of whistleblowing, it is only the
employees who are empowered to blow whistle.

An organisation
constitutes of several other stakeholders apart from employees and
includes suppliers, customers, government and local community. Quite
often these stakeholders are confronted with an act of corruption or
misconduct while dealing with the company, especially the suppliers and
customers. Such transactions are not reported by internal employees to
conceal their unscrupulous deeds. In such a scenario the external
stakeholders, say, suppliers or customers should have an opportunity to
disclose such scheming conduct to company’s governing body. There should
be some mechanism whereby even the external stakeholders have an
opportunity of blowing whistle to the Board of Directors.

The
mechanism suggested is akin to ‘grievance cell’ found in many companies,
where the customers have a right to file a complaint in case of any
dis-satisfaction. However, unlike a grievance cell, under this mechanism
an external stakeholder has the right to report any misconduct on the
part of company to the Board of Directors.

It is hoped that
extending the whistleblower mechanism to other stakeholders will promote
greater transparency in company’s conduct of business and improve its
value among the stakeholders at large.

Cons of the idea:

Despite
its benefits, the idea of extending whistle-blowing model to other
stakeholders has not been widely acclaimed. One contention is – what
would an external stakeholder gain by whistle blowing particularly when
he himself has benefited from such fraudulent conduct. However, the
argument against this contention is that corporate governance is meant
to protect interest of all the stakeholders and not just the
shareholders or employees; by disclosing solecism conduct he not only
benefits the company, but also protects his own interest and long-term
value; in fact, it becomes his ethical responsibility to make such
disclosure, as he is also economically associated with the organisation.

It
is also argued that the above mechanism may lead to trivial issues
being escalated and may in fact become a mode to express dissatisfaction
rather than expose misconduct. Embedded therein is also the risk of it
being deliberately misused by external stakeholders whose relationship
with the company has soured.

Evaluating performance of non-executive and independent directors:

The
primary role of non-executive and independent directors on the Board is
to critically challenge the actions and decisions of Executive Board
and management. Apart from maintaining independence and integrity, they
are also expected to provide fresh insights and bring their
competencies, thereby enhancing the value to stakeholders.

Evaluation of NED under Clause 49 is currently recommendatory. Such evaluation is necessary for the following reasons:

1. To determine whether a non-executive director has delivered on his/her expectations.
2. To determine whether he has contributed to enhance overall effectiveness of the Board.
3. To determine whether a particular director should continue on the Board.
4. To link remuneration of non-executive directors to their performance.

In
the current scenario, majority of the Indian companies do not have a
formal process in place to evaluate performance of non-executive
directors. The primary reason is that:

  • having a formal evaluation process is not currently mandatory
  • it is difficult to define/prescribe performance criteria objectively.


Suggestive prescription:

The
evaluation can be done by establishing a peer review committee which
should consist of Board members other than the director whose
performance is being evaluated. The peer review committee can meet on
periodic basis (say, on bi-annual or annual basis) to evaluate
performance of directors.

The following are the suggestive
criteria for evaluating performance of non-executive and independent
directors. The criteria are only illustrative and may vary depending on
requirement of each Board:


Practical Case: Infosys Technologies Limited
Currently,
there are very few companies in India which have voluntarily instituted
a formal mechanism for evaluation of non-executive members. For
instance – In Infosys, the performance of NED is evaluated through ‘peer
evaluation process’, wherein each external Board member is required to
present before the entire Board on how he has performed or added value;
the performance is evaluated on a scale of 1 to 10 based on set
performance criteria. The criteria used by Infosys are:

  • Ability to contribute to and monitor corporate governance practice

  • Ability to contribute by introducing international best practices to address top management issues

  • Active participation in long-term strategic planning

  • Commitment to fulfilment of director’s obligations and fiduciary responsibilities – this includes participation and attendance.

Conclusion:
The
aspects covered present potential pitfalls and areas of improvement in
existing Clause 49. While the suggestive prescriptions are not foolproof
and exhaustive, the purpose is to trigger a thought process and
initiate ‘deliberation’, which can lead to strengthening of corporate
governance.

Supreme Court decision in Dharmendra Textile Processors — Does it change the law on S. 271(1)(c) ?

Article

In penalty matter under the Central Excise Act, 1944 in the
case of Union of India & Others v. Dharmendra Textile Processors & Others,
(2007) 295 ITR 244 the Bench of two Judges of the Supreme Court doubted the
judgment of other two Judges of the Supreme Court in Dilip N. Shroff v. JCIT,
(2007) (291 ITR 519); but because one Coordinate Bench (which means the Bench of
the same strength of Judges) cannot over-rule the decision of another Coordinate
Bench, they recommended the formation of Larger Bench to the Hon’ble Chief
Justice of India. Accordingly, the matter was referred to the Larger Bench of
three Judges. The decision of the Larger Bench of three Judges is reported as
Union of India & Others v. Dharmendra Textile Processors and Others,
(2008)
306 ITR 277. In the said decision the Larger Bench held at page 302 that “the
object behind the enactment of S. 271(1)(c) read with the Explanations indicates
that the said Section has been enacted to provide for a remedy for loss of
revenue. The penalty under the provision is a civil liability. Willful
concealment is not an essential ingredient for attracting civil liability as is
the case in the matter of prosecution u/s.276C of the Income-tax Act.”

Thus, the Larger Bench disapproved the decision in Dilip
N. Shroff
(supra) and approved of what the Supreme Court held in
Chairman SEBI v. Shriram Mutual Fund,
(2006) 5 Supreme Court cases 361,
which held that “mens rea is not essential for imposing civil penalties
under the SEBI Act and regulations”.

Now the limited purpose of this article is to point out that
the decision of three Judges in Union of India v. Dharmendra Textile
Processors,
(2008) 206 ITR 277 is in conflict with the earlier three
decisions of three Judges of the Supreme Court and none of the earlier three
Judges’ decisions is considered by three Judges’ Bench of the Supreme Court in
Dharmendra Textile Processors, and therefore, the decision of
Dharmendra Processors
is per incuriam. Besides, the Coordinate Bench
(of three Judges here) cannot over-rule the decision of another Coordinate Bench
(of three Judges). Therefore, for the above two reasons, the decision of
Dharmendra
is not law under Article 141 of the Constitution of India. Let us
see those three decisions.

The earliest decision of these three decisions of three
Judges is Hindustan Steel Limited v. State of Orissa, (1972) 83 ITR 27.
The Tribunal had referred to the High Court the following question of law
u/s.24(1) of the Orissa Sales Tax Act, 1947 (corresponding to S. 256(1) of the
Income-tax Act, 1961) :

“Whether the Tribunal is right in holding that penalties
u/s.12(5) of the Act had been rightly levied and whether in view of the
serious dispute of liability it cannot be said that there was sufficient cause
for not applying for registration ?”

S. 12(5) was as follows :

“If upon information which has come to his possession, the
Commissioner is satisfied that any dealer has been liable to pay tax under
this Act in respect of any period and has nevertheless, without sufficient
cause, failed to get himself registered, the Commissioner may, at any time
within (five years) from the expiry of the year to which that period relates,
call for return U/ss.(1) of S. 11, and after giving the dealer a reasonable
opportunity of being heard, assess, to the best of his judgment, the amount of
tax, if any, due from the dealer in respect of such period and all subsequent
periods and may also direct that the dealer shall pay, by way of penalty, in
addition to the amount so assessed, a sum not exceeding one and half times
that amount.”

The High Court replied the question in the affirmative
against the assessee and the assessee appealed to the Supreme Court by Special
Leave. The Supreme Court itself framed the following relevant issue “whether
imposition of penalties for failure to register as a dealer was justified ?”
Justice J. C. Shah, the Acting Chief Justice, Justice V. Ramaswami and Justice
A. N. Grover constituted the Bench. The Court at page 29 of its judgment held as
under :

“Under the Act penalty may be imposed for failure to
register as a dealer : S. 9(1), read with S. 25(1)(a) of the Act. But the
liability to pay penalty does not arise merely upon proof of default in
registering as a dealer. An order imposing penalty for failure to carry out a
statutory obligation is the result of a quasi-criminal proceeding, and penalty
will not ordinarily be imposed unless the party obliged, either acted
deliberately
in defiance of law or was guilty of conduct contumacious
or dishonest, or acted in conscious disregard of its obligation
. Penalty
will not also be imposed merely because it is lawful to do so. Whether penalty
should be imposed for failure to perform a statutory obligation is a matter of
discretion of the authority to be exercised judicially and on a consideration
of all the relevant circumstances. Even if a minimum penalty is prescribed,
the authority competent to impose the penalty will be justified in refusing to
impose penalty, when there is a technical or venial breach of the provisions
of the Act or where the breach flows from a bona fide belief that the
offender is not liable to act in the manner prescribed by the statute. Those
in charge of the affairs of the company in failing to register the company as
a dealer acted in the honest and genuine belief that the company was not a
dealer. Granting that they erred, no case for imposing penalty was made out.”
(Italics to provide emphasis.)

It is worth noting here that this case of Hindustan Steel was not an appeal from the conviction by a Magistrate in prosecution u/ s.25 of the Orissa Sales Tax Act. It was an appeal arising from the order of penalty u/s.12(5) of the Orissa Sales Tax Act by the Assessing Officer. It will seem that in spite of the above typographical mistake or shall I say ‘slip of tongue’ of stating S. 25(1)(a) in the above quotation in place of S. 12(5), what the Supreme Court laid down as above was without doubt regarding S. 12(5) and not S. 25, because otherwise it will not describe proceeding to be quasi-criminal proceeding. Proceedings ul s.25 are criminal proceedings before a Magistrate and no Court will commit a mistake of describing them as quasi-criminal proceedings. Looking at the importance of the topic, it is worth emphasising the following from the above quotation from Hindustan Steel; “An order imposing penalty for failure to carry out statutoru obligation is the result of a quasi-criminal proceedings and penalty will not ordinarily be imposed unless the party obliged either acted deliberately in defiance of law or was guilty of conduct contumacious or defiance or acted in conscious disregard of its obligation.”

Therefore, according to the Bench of three Judges of the Supreme Court in Hindustan Steel, willful contravention is an essential ingredient of attracting liability to penalty. (contra Dharmendra.)

The second decision of three Judges of the Supreme Court in point of time is in the case of D. M. Manasvi v. CIT, (1972) 86 ITR 557, Justice K. S. Hegde, Justice P. Jagmohan Reddy and Justice H. R. Khanna constituted the Bench. This was a matter u/s. 271(1)(c) of the Income-tax Act, 1961. The Court stated at page 565 as follows:

“It cannot therefore, be said that there was no relevant material or evidence before the Tribunal to hold that the assessee had deliberately concealed the particulars of his income or has deliberately furnished inaccurate particulars of income.”

For the assessee, reliance was put on the observation of the Supreme Court in CIT v. Anwar Ali, (1970) 76 ITR 696 and it was argued that from the mere falsity of the explanation, it did not follow that disputed amount represented income and that the assessee had consciously concealed particulars of income or has deliberately furnished inaccurate particulars of income. Disposing of this contention, the Court observed at page 565 :

“In this respect we find that in the present case the inference that the assessee had consciously concealed the particulars of his income or had deliberately furnished inaccurate particulars is based not merely upon the falsity of the explanation given by the assessee. On the contrary, it is made amply clear by the order of the Tribunal that there was positive material to indicate that the business of Kohinoor Mills belonged to the assessee and the whole scheme was to disguise the profits of the assessee as those of a firm of four partners. The present is not a case of inference from mere falsity of explanation given by the assessee, but a case wherein there are definite findings that a device had been deliberately created by the assessee for the purpose of concealing his income. The assessee, as such can derive no assistance from Anwar Ali’s case.” (Italics by the author to provide emphasis.)

Therefore, according to decision of three Judges of the Supreme Court in the case of Manasvi also, deliberate concealment or deliberate furnishing of inaccurate particulars is the essential ingredient for attracting penalty u/s.271(1)(c).

The last decision in point of time of three Judges of the Supreme Court is Anantharam Veerasinghaiah& Co. v. CIT (1980) 123 ITR 457. The Bench was constituted by Justice N. L. Untwalia, Justice R. S. Pathak and Justice E. S. Venkataramiah. This too was a case of penalty u/s.271(1)(c). The Court made the following emphatic and clear statement of law at page 461 :

“It is now settled law that an order imposing penalty is the result of quasi-criminal proceedings and that the burden lies on the Revenue to establish that the disputed amount represents income and that the assessee has consciously concealed the particulars of his income or has deliberately furnished inaccurate particulars: CIT v. Anwar Ali (1970) 76ITR 696 (SC). It is for the Revenue to prove those ingredients before a penalty can be imposed. Since the burden of proof in a penalty proceeding varies from that involved in an assessment proceeding, a finding in an assessment proceeding that a particular receipt is income cannot automatically be adopted as a finding to that effect in the penalty proceeding. In the penalty proceeding the taxing authority is bound to consider the matter afresh on the material before it and, in the light of the burden to prove resting on the Revenue, to ascertain whether a particular amount is a revenue receipt. No doubt, the fact that the assessment order contains a finding that the disputed amount represents income constitutes good evidence in the penalty proceedings, but the finding in the assessment proceeding can not be regarded as conclusive for the purposes of the penalty proceeding. That is how the law has been understood by this Court in Anwar Ali’s case (1970) 76 ITR 696 (SC), and we believe that to be the law still. It was also laid down that before a penalty can be imposed the entirety of the circumstances must be taken into account and must point to the conclusion that the disputed amount represents income and that the assessee has consciously concealed particulars of his income or deliberately furnished inaccurate particulars. The mere falsity of the explanation given by the assessee, it was observed, was insufficient without there being, in addition, cogent material or evidence from which the necessary conclusion attracting a penalty could be drawn. These principles were reiterated by this Court in CIT v. KhQday Eswarsa and Sons, (1972) 83 ITR 369.;’ (Italics -and underlining by the author to provide emphasis.)

Thus, it is obvious that according to earlier three Benches of three Judges of the Supreme Court (i.e., three Co-ordinate Benches) willful concealment or willful furnishing of inaccurate particulars is an Essential Ingredient for attracting penalty u/ s. 271(1)(c), whereas the latest decision of the three Judges of the Supreme Court in Dharmendra Textile Processors holds to the contrary. In fairness to the Supreme Court it must be pointed out that none of the above three decisions of three Judges was brought to the notice of the Court and the matter proceeded as if only the Bench of two Judges had laid down that willful concealment or willful furnishing of inaccurate particulars is the essential ingredient of S. 271(1)(c) penalty.

Therefore, the bottomline is that the decision of the Supreme Court in Dharmendra Textile Processors & Others, (2008) 306 ITR 277 being of three Judges cannot and has not overruled the law laid down as above by earlier three judgments of three Judges (in other words by Bench of the same strength of Judges) and what came to be laid down by three earlier judgments continues to be the law of the land. Further, it must be pointed out that right from the times of the Bombay High Court decision in CIT, Ahmedabad v. Gokuldas Harivallabhdas, (1958) 34 ITR 98, for last 50 years the law was understood on identical lines as the above three Supreme Court decisions pronounced viz., willful concealment of income or willful furnishing of inaccurate particulars of income is the essential ingredient for attracting penalty.

What the Supreme Court itself pointed out in A.L.A. Firm v. CIT, (1991) 189 ITR 285 at page 307 in regard to the decision of G. R. Ramachari & Co. v. CIT, (1961) 41 ITR 142 (Mad.) is relevant because of the principle of stare decisis.

“The view taken by the High Court has held the field for about thirty years and we see no reason to disagree even if a different view were possible.”

The Supreme Court in a later decision (1995) 6 Supreme Court Cases 84 in the case of Gangeshwar Ltd. v. State of U.P. & Others, stated as follows:

“The understanding of S. 6 of the Ceiling Act by the High Court reflected in these two decisions, when none has been placed before us to the contrary, would require upholding on the principle of stare decisis, for if we go to reinterpret the provision contrarily, it would upset the settled position in the State insofar as this area of laws is concerned. Therefore, necessity of certainty and cold prudence requires us to uphold the orders of the High Court.”

Embedded Derivatives: seemingly innocuous contracts under the microscope?

Historically,
in India, a well-drafted contract could mean designing one’s financial
statements. Even if there is no specific need or desire to let contract terms
dictate how the balance sheet looks, it is clear that our accounting
pronouncements often fail to capture the true representation of the substance
of transactions. One such transaction is a contract containing embedded
derivatives.

Recognizing the
increasing usage of such complex contracts worldwide, a comprehensive solution
in the form of detailed measurement, accounting, presentation and disclosure
norms has been prescribed in International Accounting Standard (IAS) 39
Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement.

From India’s
standpoint, these specific norms for accounting of financial instruments are
expected to be one of the major impact on convergence with International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Come 2011, entities will have to exercise
diligence when drafting contracts, bearing in mind their accounting
repercussions. The implication can be best understood with an example: a vanilla
convertible debenture will no longer be merely disclosed as a ‘Secured Loan’
with its Terms of Redemption or Conversion in parenthesis. Now, based on its
substance and true economic effect, it will be accounted as two contracts- a
‘debt instrument with an early settlement provision’ and ‘warrants to purchase
equity shares’, with both elements being assigned their fair values.

This need not
be perceived as a conceptual whirlwind. By unlearning what has been learnt and
letting go of structured thinking, the exemplified explanation that follows
will be enlightening and would help understand the true meaning of ‘Substance
over form’!

Derivatives

As per IAS 39,
a ‘derivative’ is a financial instrument or other contract with all three of
the following characteristics:

a) its value changes in response to the change in an underlying variable
such as interest rate, commodity or security price;

b) it requires no initial investment, or one that is smaller than would be
required for a contract with similar response to changes in market factors; and

c) it is
settled at a future date.

Futures
contracts, forward contracts, options and swaps are the most common types of
derivatives. Examples of underlying relative to derivative contracts include:

  • Interest rates
  • Security prices
  • Commodity prices
  • Foreign exchange rates
  • Market indices
  • Other variables like sales volume
    indices created for settlement of derivatives
  • Non financial variables (for eg.
    climatic or geological condition such as temperature or rainfall)

Derivative
instruments may either be free-standing or embedded in a financial instrument
or non-financial contract.

Embedded derivatives

Literally, the
term ‘embedded derivative’ would lead one to believe that it is a derivative
embedded in another contract. However, an ‘embedded derivative is just a
modification of cash flows (the definition of derivative, as can be seen above,
focuses only on change in value).

IAS 39
describes an embedded derivative as ‘a component of a hybrid (combined)
instrument that also includes a non-derivative host contract—with the effect
that some of the cash flows of the combined instrument vary in a way similar to
a stand-alone derivative.’

To put it in
simple terms, embedded derivative is part of a host contract (a clause or
section) i.e. a contract feature which causes the cash flows from that contract
to be modified, based on any specified variable such as interest rate, security
price, commodity price, foreign exchange rate, index of prices or rates or other
variables which frequently change.

For example, an
Indian company enters into a sales contract with another Indian company,
creating a host contract. If the contract is denominated in a foreign currency,
such as USD, to be settled at a future date, an embedded derivative viz. a
foreign exchange forward contract is created.

In practice,
there are generally a handful of common types of host contracts that have
embedded derivatives.

When an
embedded derivative is required to be separated from a host contract, it must
be measured at fair value on balance sheet date, with changes in fair value
being accounted for through the income statement, consistent with the
accounting for a freestanding derivative. The host contract’s carrying value
initially is the difference between the consideration paid or received to
acquire the hybrid contract and the embedded derivative’s fair value.

If an entity
finds it difficult to determine the fair value of the embedded derivative, the
entity will have to fair value the entire contract with gains and losses
recognised in the income statement.

Instrument

Host Contract

Embedded Derivative

 

 

 

Equity Instrument

 

 

 

 

 

Irredeemable convertible preference shares

Ordinary shares/

Written call option

 

Equity shares

 

 

 

 

Debt Instrument

 

 

 

 

 

Convertible bond

Debt instrument

Call option on equity

 

 

securities

 

 

 

Callable Debt

Debt instrument

Prepayment Option

 

 

 

Leases

 

 

 

 

 

Lease payments indexed to inflation in a

Operating lease

Payment determined

with reference to inflation-related index

 

with reference

different economic environment

 

to inflation-related index

 

 

 

It is important to note that although the

 

 

requirement to separate an embedded

 

 

derivative from a host contract applies to

 

 

both 
parties to a contract, the account

 

 

ing treatments in the books of both the

 

 

parties might differ. For example, in the

 

 

above case, if the lessor and lessee are

 

 

in different economic environments and

 

 

the lease payments are determined with

 

 

reference to inflation-related index of the

 

 

lessor’s economic environment, only the

 

 

lessee would be required to separate the

 

 

embedded derivative

 

 

 

 

 

 

ARTICLE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

516 (2010) 41-B BCAJ

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Instrument

 

 

 

Host
Contract

 

 

 

Embedded
Derivative

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating lease payable in foreign currency

Operating lease

Foreign currency de

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

nominated
rent

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

payments– foreign ex

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

change forward contacts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contingent rentals based on related sales in

Operating lease

Contingent Rentals

 

 

operating lease contract

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Executory
Contracts

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchase/ sale of goods in foreign currency

Purchase/ sale

Foreign exchange

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

contract

 

 

 

forward contract

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Purchase/ sale of goods with option to make

Purchase/ sale

Option to make

 

 

payment
in alternative currenciesConvertible

contract

 

 

 

payment
in alternative

 

 

bond

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

currencies

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Is the
contract clas

NO

 

Would
it

be a
de

YES

 

Is it
closely related to

 

 

 

sified as ‘fair value

 

rivative if it was free

 

 

the host contract?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

through 
profit  or

 

 

standing?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

loss’

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NO

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Split & separately account

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accounting & Measurement – separation of embedded derivative from host contract

An embedded derivative is required to be separated from the host contract if, and only if all three conditions are met:

  •     the economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative are not closely related to the economic characteristics and risks of the host contract;

  •     a separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet the definition of a derivative; and

  •     the entire contract is not measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in income statement i.e. if the entire contract is fair valued, then separation of embedded derivative is not required.

These requirements are designed to ensure that mark-to-market through the income statement cannot be avoided by including – embedding – a derivative in another contract or financial instrument that is not marked-to-market through the income statement.

What does “Closely related” mean?

IAS 39 does not define ‘closely related’. Instead, the Application Guidance to the standard provides examples of situations where the embedded derivative is, or is not, closely related to the host contract (some of these examples have been discussed below).

In general terms, an embedded derivative that modifies an instrument’s inherent risk would be considered as closely related (such as fixed rate to floating rate swap – where the inherent risk of change in fair value of loan is modified to interest rate risk & where both the risks depend on the market rate of interest). Conversely, an embedded derivative that changes the nature of the risks of a contract would not be closely related (such as operating lease contract with contingent rentals based on related sales – where one risk of change in lease rentals is modified to risk of change in demand of a product, unrelated to the former risk).

Common Transactional Examples

Leverage embedded features in host contracts

Even if the embedded derivative is closely related to the host contract, it would have to be separated from the host if there is a ‘leverage’ effect. IAS 39 does not define the term ‘leverage’. In general, a hybrid instrument is said to contain embedded leverage features if the cash flows are modified in a manner that multiply or otherwise exacerbate the effect of changes in underlying.

Example Leverage embedded features

ABC Ltd. takes a loan with a bank. The contractually determined interest rate is calculated as [15 % – 3 X LIBOR]

Here, had the interest rate been [15% – LIBOR], the embedded derivate would have been said to be closely related to the underlying LIBOR rate and hence not separable. However, since the rate of interest depends on a multiple of LIBOR (called ‘leverage’ effect), the embedded derivate shall be separated.

Conclusion: Leverage embedded features – Separate accounting

Debt host contracts

The value of a debt instrument is determined by the interest rate that is associated with the contract. The interest rate stipulated is usually a function of the following factors:

  •     Risk free interest rate

  •     Credit risk

  •     Expected maturity

  •     Liquidity risk

Thus, the embedded derivatives that affect the yield on debt instruments because of any of the above factors would be considered to be closely related (unless they are leveraged i.e. or do not change in the same direction).

Example Issuer’s call option (similar to a loan payable on demand)

ABC Ltd. issues five year zero coupon debt for proceeds of Rs. 8 crores (face value of Rs. 10 crores). The debt is callable at face value in the event of a change in control.
 

The application guidance to IAS 39 explains that such options embedded are not closely related unless the option’s exercise price is approximately equal to the host debt instrument’s amortised cost on the exercise date.

Here, if the debt is called by the issuer, the option’s exercise price (face value) would not be the same as the debt’s amortised cost at exercise date.

Conclusion: Not closely related – Separate accounting

Example Pre-payment option

ABC Ltd. takes a fixed rate loan with a bank for Rs. 10 crores. It is repayable in quarterly install-ments. There is a pre-payment option that may be exercised on the first day of each quarter. The exercise price is the remaining capital outstanding plus a penalty of Rs. 1 crore.

An entity may opt to pre-pay if the potential gain (say fall in interest rate) from pre-payment is more than the penalty.

Here, as ABC Ltd. makes repayments, the amortised cost of the debt will change. Given the penalty payable is fixed, the option’s exercise price (outstanding principal + penalty) will always exceed the debt’s amortised cost (present value of outstanding prin-cipal) at each exercise date.

Conclusion: Not closely related -Separate accounting


Example Term extending option

ABC Ltd. issues 9% fixed rate debt for a fixed term of 2 years. The entity is able to extend the debt before its maturity for an additional 1 year at the same 9 % interest.

IAS 39 prescribes that such an option to extend the term is not closely related to the host debt instrument, unless there is a reset of interest rate to current market rate.

Here, ABC Ltd. can extend the term at the same interest rate and there is no reset to current market rates. Hence it is not considered to be closely related to the debt host. It is clearly a derivative that gives the option to the issuer to refinance the debt at 9% if the market rates are rising.
 
Conclusion: Not closely related – Separate accounting


Example Equity conversion features

ABC Ltd. invests in 10,000 debentures of XYZ Ltd. ABC Ltd. has the option to convert each debenture after 1 year into one equity share per debenture at Rs. 500.

ABC Ltd. perspective (investor)

Such an option represents an embedded call option on the issuer’s equity shares. Here, the host contract is the debentures and the underlying is the equity shares and equity is never closely related to debt.

Conclusion: Not closely related – Separate accounting

XYZ Ltd. perspective (issuer)

The written equity conversion option is an equity instrument.

Conclusion: Accounted as equity

Lease host contracts

Embedded derivatives may be present in lease host contracts, whether the lease is an operating lease or a finance lease. The approach for determining whether the derivative is closely related is similar to that used for a debt host.

As evident from the table above, rent payments determined with reference to local consumer price index and foreign currency denominated rent payments could represent embedded derivatives in a lease host contract.

It is to be noted that since lease host contracts are not financial instruments, the question of the con-tract being classified as ‘fair value through profit or loss’ doesn’t arise. Therefore, in such cases, if the embedded derivative is not closely related to the lease host, separate accounting would be mandatory.

Example Inflation indexed rentals

ABC Ltd. (India) leases a property in UK to XYZ Ltd. The rentals are paid in pounds and increase annually with the increase in inflation in UK.

As per AG 33(f) of IAS 39, an embedded derivative is closely related to its host lease contract if it is an inflation-related index (such as an index of lease payments to a consumer price index) provided

  • lease is not leveraged (inflationary adjustment in a lease contract does not have an effect of increasing the indexed cash flow by more than the normal rate of inflation) and

  •     the index relates to inflation in the entity’s own economic environment (i.e. the economic environment in which the leased asset is located)

Here, the rent payments will change in response to changes in the inflation index of UK. The embed-ded derivative is not leveraged and relates to the economic environment in which the leased asset is located. Therefore, it is closely related to the host lease.

Conclusion: Closely related -No separate accounting

Example Rentals based on sales

ABC Ltd. leases a property in India to XYZ Ltd. The rentals consist of a base rental of Rs. 100,000 plus 5% of the lessee’s sales.

As per AG 33(f) of IAS 39, lease contracts may include contingent rentals that are based on sales of the lessee. Such an embedded derivative is considered to be closely related to the lease host contract.

Conclusion: Closely related – No separate accounting

In the Indian scenario, though many lease contracts have an escalation clause that is an estimate of inflation, seldom is it directly related to an inflation index. Thus, we may henceforth be required to compare the escalation with the inflation index to decide whether the derivative is closely related.

Further, the termination clause in the lease agreement that allows the lessee to terminate the contract on payment of a penalty is also an embedded derivative. This situation is similar in substance with the prepayment option in debt instrument discussed above.

Executory contracts

Executory contracts are not financial instruments and are scoped out of IAS 39. However, the following executory contracts may contain embedded derivatives:

  •     Contracts to buy or sell non-financial assets

  •     Commitments to meet expected purchase, sale or usage requirements and expected to be settled by physical delivery

  •     Service contracts

Price adjustment features, inflation related features (similar to lease contracts) and volume adjustment features are examples of embedded derivatives in executory contracts.

Example Coal purchase contract linked to changes in the price of electricity

ABC Ltd. enters into a coal purchase contract that links the price of coal to changes in the prevailing electricity price on the date of delivery.

The coal purchase contract is the host contract. The pricing formula is the embedded derivative.

In assessing whether the embedded derivative is closely related to the host executory contract, it would be necessary to establish whether the underlying in a price adjustment feature is related or unrelated to the cost/fair value of the goods or services being sold or purchased.

Here, although coal may be used for the production of electricity, the changes in electricity prices do not affect cost or fair value of coal. Therefore, the embedded derivative (the electricity price adjustment) is not closely related to the host contract.

Conclusion: Not closely related Separate accounting

Example Variable penalty on non-fulfillment of buyer’s commitment

ABC Ltd. enters into a contract guaranteeing to purchase 50 cars for ‘own use’ from XYZ Ltd. during 2010. Subsequently, ABC Ltd. decides not to purchase the cars from XYZ Ltd. A penalty of 20% of the market price of the cars on the date of payment of penalty is charged.

A minimum annual commitment does not create a derivative as long as the entity expects to purchase all the guaranteed volume for its ‘own use’. However, if it becomes likely that the entity will not take the product and, instead pay a penalty under the contract based on the market value of the product
 

or some other variable, an embedded derivative will arise. On the other hand, if the amount of penalty is fixed or pre-determined, there is no embedded derivative.

Here, changes in market price of the cars will affect the penalty’s carrying value until the penalty is paid. Since it has become clear that non-performance is likely, the embedded derivative needs to be separated.

Conclusion: Not closely related Separate accounting

Reassessment of Embedded Derivative

International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) 9 Reassessment of Embedded Derivative, while addressing the question of whether separation is required to be reconsidered throughout the life of the contract, describes that an entity shall assess whether an embedded derivative is required to be separated from the host contract and accounted for as a derivative when the entity first becomes a party to the contract.

Subsequent reassessment is prohibited unless there is a change in the terms of the contract that significantly modifies the cash flows.

IFRS 9: Phase 1 of new standard to replace IAS 39

In November 2009, International Accounting Stan-dards Board issued IFRS 9 Financial Instruments on classification & measurement of financial assets. This Standard will eventually replace IAS 39 and is effective from 2013. Consequent to its introduction, once the new Standard is applied, majority of the contracts would be measured as a whole (i.e. host contract and embedded derivative) at fair value, and hence no separation would be required.

However, in India, ICAI has issued AS 30 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, which is based on IAS 39. From the Indian standpoint, all entities other than Small and Medium -sized Entities would have to apply the provisions of AS 30/ IAS 39. This implies that gaining knowledge of identification and separation of embedded derivatives is absolutely inevitable for all accountancy professionals.

Worldwide tax trends — Fiscal Consolidation or Group Taxation

Article

The business environment is increasingly dominated by complex
corporate group structures. This brings forth the desire to tax a group by
reference to its overall performance and not merely along its legal structure.
To meet this need, a few countries have in place a ‘fiscal consolidation’ or a
‘group taxation’ regime, which taxes the group as a whole.

There is no uniform basis adopted by various countries in
their approach. However, the underlying object is to permit offsetting of losses
against the profits of the group. While group taxation is popular within the
confines of a particular jurisdiction, in a few instances, foreign subsidiaries
are also covered. For success of such a regime, it is essential that it must be
simple to administer, flexible enough to take into consideration business
exigencies such as intra-group transactions and corporate restructuring, and
have low compliance costs. Additionally, anti-abuse provisions may also need to
be built into the provisions, especially if this regime provides for
cross-border consolidation.

Broadly, the mechanism of the group taxation regime can be
classified into three distinct categories :


à
Consolidation system : Here, the income at the level of each member
company is considered and the results are combined at a group level. As the
group operates as a single entity for tax purposes, the parent company is
liable to pay the tax on behalf of the entire group.


à
The group contribution system : Here, profitable companies within the
group are permitted to make tax deductible contributions to group companies
that have incurred losses. Usually each company in the group remains liable
for its own tax obligations and files its own returns.


à
Group relief model : This system enables transfer of tax losses from
one company in the group to another. Even though these models allow for the
netting of profits and losses within the group, each company in the group
files its own tax return and pays its own tax.


Some countries adopt the ‘all-in or all-out approach’ whereby
all member companies that come within the group definition have to be included
for the purpose of group taxation. However, in some other countries, ‘cherry
picking’ is allowed, where companies within a group can elect participation.

In the following paragraphs we have provided a broad and
general overview of the group taxation regime or its variant as it exists in a
few countries.

Austria :

Definition of a group :

A new group taxation regime has been introduced in Austria
from 2005. It permits the parent Austrian company to consolidate its taxable
income with that of its subsidiaries, provided the parent Austrian company holds
directly or indirectly at least 50% of the voting rights in the subsidiary
companies, since the beginning of the subsidiary’s fiscal year. Only
corporations (not partnerships) qualify as group members.

Mechanism :

In such instances, where the shareholding criteria is met,
the entire taxable income (profit or loss) of domestic subsidiaries is allocated
to the taxable income of the parent Austrian company, regardless of the
percentage of shareholding in the subsidiary. Thus, even if 50% or 75% is held
in the subsidiary company, the entire taxable income of the subsidiary is
allocated to the taxable income of the Austrian parent. An application that is
binding for three years must be filed with the tax authorities.

Cross-border tax consolidation is permitted, but it is
limited to first-tier subsidiaries, provided that the foreign entity is
comparable to an Austrian corporation from a legal perspective. Losses from
foreign group members can be deducted from the Austrian tax base, but only in
proportion to the shareholding. Profits of a foreign group member are generally
not included in the Austrian parent’s income. Provisions exist for prevention of
dual utilisation of foreign losses. For instance, foreign losses that have been
deducted from income of the Austrian group shareholder are added in Austria, if
the losses can be offset in the foreign jurisdiction at a subsequent time.
Consequently, if the foreign country takes into account the losses in the
sub-sequent years (as a part of a loss carry forward), the tax base in Austria
is increased by that amount in order to avoid a double dip. Foreign losses must
also be added to the Austrian income tax base if the foreign subsidiary leaves
the group. Relief is provided only in the event of a liquidation or insolvency.

Italy :

Definition of a group :

The group taxation regime was introduced in 2004. To qualify
for consolidation, more than 50% of the voting rights of each subsidiary must be
owned, directly or indirectly, by the common Italian parent company. Italian
parent corporations can elect consortium relief if they hold more than 10% but
less than 50% of the voting rights in their Italian subsidiaries.

Mechanism :

This regime allows the offsetting of profit and losses of
members of a group of companies. Italian tax consolidation rules provide two
separate consolidation systems, depending on the residence of the companies
involved. A domestic consolidation regime is available for Italian resident
companies only. A worldwide consolidation regime, with slightly different
conditions, is available for multinationals.

Where more than 50% of the voting rights of each subsidiary are owned, directly or indirectly, by the common Italian parent company, the tax consolidation includes 100% of the subsidiary company’s profits and losses, even if the subsidiary has other shareholders. For a domestic tax consolidation, the election is binding for three fiscal years. However, if the holding company loses control over a subsidiary, such subsidiary must be immediately excluded from the consolidation. To prevent abuse, tax losses realised before the election for tax consolidation can be used .only by the company that incurred such losses. For groups of companies linked by more than a 50%direct shareholding net value-added tax (VAT) refundable to one group company with respect to its own transactions may be offset against VAT payable by another, and only the balance is required to be paid by, or refunded to, the group.

Cherry picking is permitted. The domestic tax consolidation may be limited to certain entities, leaving one or more otherwise eligible entities outside the group filing election.

Further, Italian parent corporations can elect consortium relief if they hold more than 10% but less than 50% of the voting rights in their Italian subsidiaries. Under this election, the subsidiaries are treated as look-through entities for Italian tax purposes and their profits and losses flow through to the parent company in proportion to the stake owned. These profits or losses can offset the shareholder’s losses or profits in the fiscal year in which the transparent company’s fiscal year ends. Tax losses realised by the shareholders before the exercise of the election for the consortium relief cannot be used to offset profits of transparent companies.

In general, in Italy, intra-corporate dividends are 95% exempt (i.e., 5% of the dividends are taxable). In this context, it is pertinent to note that dividends distributed by an eligible transparent company are not taken into account for tax purposes in the hands of the recipient shareholders. As a result, Italian corporate shareholders of a transparent company are not subject to corporate income tax on 5% of the dividends received.

The election does not change the tax treatment of dividends distributed out of reserves containing profits accrued before the exercise of the election. Another benefit from consortium relief is that an eligible transparent company does not pay corporate income tax. The consortium relief election is binding for three fiscal years and requires the consent of all the shareholders.

Netherlands:

Definition of a group:
The group taxation regime was revised, effective from January 1, 2003. To elect for the same, a parent company must own at least 95% of the shares of a subsidiary. Both Dutch and foreign companies may be included in a fiscal unity if their place of effective management is located in the Netherlands. A permanent establishment (PE) in the Netherlands of a company with its effective management abroad may be included in a fiscal unity. A subsidiary may be included in the fiscal unity from the date of acquisition.

Mechanism:
This group taxation regime permits losses of one subsidiary to be offset against profits of other members of the group. As a Dutch parent company and its non-resident subsidiary cannot apply for a group tax consolidation if that subsidiary does not have a PE in the Netherlands, the Dutch Supreme Court has on July 11, 2008, requested a preliminary ruling from the European Court of Justice (ECJ).

The ruling relates to whether the group taxation regime is compatible with the freedom of establishment principle in the EC Treaty.

We need to trace back the reason for such referral. In Marks & Spencer’s case, the UK-based group sought to offset the losses incurred by subsidiaries in several member states against the profits derived in the UK. As the UK group relief system only allowed for surrender of losses from UK resident companies, Marks & Spencer was denied the offset of the losses incurred in the non-resident subsidiaries. Even though the UK restriction was justified based on merits of the case (requirement to preserve a balanced allocation of taxing powers between the member countries; the need to prevent a double use of losses and the right to counter tax avoidance), the ECJ held that its objectives could be attained by less restrictive measures.

Even as ECJ’s ruling in the Marks & Spencer case suggests that the restriction that limits the fiscal unity regime to companies with their place of effective management located in the Netherlands does not violate EU law, it now remains to be seen how the ECJ will view the Dutch regime.

United Kingdom (UK) :

Definition    of a group:

UK laws do not provide for group tax consolidation. However, a voluntary group relief system is available. In short, UK companies in a 75% or more economic relationship can opt to offset certain losses with profits for the same period realised by another UK company within the group.

Mechanism:

As mentioned above, a trading loss incurred by one company within. a 75%-owned group of companies may be grouped with profits for the same period realised by another member of the group. Similar provisions apply in a consortium situation; for this purpose, a UK resident company is owned by a consortium if 75% or more of its ordinary share capital is owned by other UK resident companies, none of which individually has a holding of less than 5%. However, the consortium-owned company must not be a 75%-owned subsidiary of any company.

In a 75%-worldwide group, the transfer of assets between group companies does not result in a capital gain if the companies involved are subject to UK corporation tax. This rule applies regardless of the residence status of the companies or their shareholders. The transferee company assumes the transferor’s original cost of the asset plus subsequent qualifying expenditure and indexation. However, under an anti-avoidance provision, if the transferee company leaves the group within six years of the date of the transfer of the asset, that company is deemed to have disposed of the asset at market value immediately after the start of the accounting period of departure or, if later, the original date of the transfer.

United States (U.S.) :

Definition    of a group:

A limited consolidation system exists in the US. In general, an affiliated group consists of a U.S. parent corporation and all other US. corporations in which the parent holds directly or indirectly at least 80% of the total voting power and value of all classes of shares (excluding non-voting preferred shares).

Mechanism:

An affiliated group of U.S. corporations (as described above) may elect to determine their taxable income and tax liability on a consolidated basis. The consolidated return provisions generally allow electing corporations to report aggregate group income and deductions in accordance with the requirements for financial consolidations. Consequently, the net operating losses of some members of the group can be used to offset the taxable income of other members of the group, and transactions between group members, such as intercompany sales and dividends, are generally deferred or eliminated until there is a transaction outside the group. Under certain circumstances, losses incurred on the sale of consolidated subsidiaries are disallowed.

Conclusion:

In today’s business environment, a group taxation regime, which permits offsetting of losses against the profits within a group, would provide relief to corporate entities. The above paragraphs provide a bird’s-eye view of the group taxation regime, as it exists in a few developed tax economies.

Keeping in mind the factors which need to be considered in designing such a regime, it would be much simpler to initially introduce a domestic consolidation regime in India. At a later stage, after giving consideration to anti-abuse issues, the mechanism could be extended to cover cross-border situations.

Worldwide Tax View — Substance over form : Where is the limit ?

Article

Introduction :


Laws and regulations are the intentions of legislators
captured in words. The challenge is to choose a formulation that captures such
intentions in a way that it is clear and covering exactly those situations that
are desired to be covered. The subjects to the law should be able to understand
the rules, and also to trust that once the rules are interpreted in the
appropriate way, it is clear which situation is covered by the rules and which
one is not. Thus, the subjects can accordingly structure their behaviour or in
other words : Choose the right form for their actions.

To ensure non-discriminatory enforcement of laws and
regulations, choosing a formal approach is very logical. It rules out
arbitrariness or at least mitigates the same. In other words, the form of a
situation — a transaction, determines the legal consequences. For long, most
countries have used the formal approach.

However, more and more countries have come to the realisation
that taxpayers were choosing forms for their transactions that led them to a
beneficial tax treatment. This may and does in practice, lead to undesired
behaviour. Especially in cases where the form of the transaction has no or
little connection with its actual substance and such form is chosen merely to
get a better tax result, the ability to look beyond the form may be justified.
An example could be where a parent company provides funding to its 100 percent
loss-making subsidiary company, without a repayment obligation, and without
charging interest. Calling such funding a loan, and not (quasi) equity, would
not do justice to the substance of the transaction.

What should be avoided, however, would be a requalification
of any transaction to a form that puts the taxpayer in the worst position.
Striking the balance is not easy.

The approach of a few countries towards the issue of
substance over form has been reflected below, to provide a better framework for
understanding the issue.

Country overview :

United States of America (US) :

The US has included several rules in its legislation to
codify the substance-over-form concept. Illustrations include : The rule on
conduit financing and on domestic reversed hybrid entities.

The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) is permitted to re-characterise
cross-border conduit financing transactions, including back-to-back loans which
are undertaken for tax avoidance purposes. Specifically, the IRS is authorised
to disregard an intermediate company in a multiparty financing arrangement if
the company is used as part of a tax avoidance plan, for example, if the company
is put in place to take advantage of reduced withholding under a US tax treaty.
In that case, the overall transaction will be analysed without recognition being
given to the conduit entity and the US domestic withholding rate or that of
another tax treaty will be applied.

The Domestic Reversed Hybrid rules, finalised in 2002,
provide a check on certain abusive double-dip financing arrangements between
related parties. If a payment from a domestic entity to a related Domestic
Reversed Hybrid entity is treated as a dividend under either US or foreign law,
and if the Domestic Reversed Hybrid entity makes a payment to a related foreign
interest holder which is deductible in the US and entitled to a reduced treaty
rate, then the payment by the Domestic Reversed Hybrid entity is treated as a
dividend. Thus, there will be no deduction and the treaty withholding rate will
be governed by the Article relating to dividends.

The IRS in the US and the US courts have consistently taken
the view that transactions are to be taxed according to their economic substance
rather than their legal form (Goldstein v. Commissioner, 364 F.2d 734 (2d
Cir. 1966).

In the matter of Burger King v. State Tax Comm’n, (416
NE2d 1024) (NY Ct. Apps. 1980), the Tax Commission assessed a restaurant sales
tax on purchases of packaging material. The assessment was based on the fact
that the restaurant did not charge its customers a line item on the receipt for
packaging. Based on this, the state argued, the packaging was not being ‘resold’
as required for exemption from sales tax. In ruling for the restaurant, the
court overlooked the form of the transaction (i.e., the absence of a line
item for packaging on the customer receipt) and looked to the substance to
determine if a resale had occurred.

The Supreme Court, in F. & R. Lazarus & Co., (308 US 252)
(1939)
, summarised the doctrine as follows : In the field of taxation,
administrators of the laws and the courts are concerned with substance and
realities, and formal written documents are not rigidly binding.

China :

The tax authorities introduced general anti-avoidance rules
effective from January 1, 2008. The Chinese tax authorities are authorised to
make adjustments to arrangements that can result in a reduction of tax payable
and which are made without any justifiable commercial or business reason.
According to the draft administrative regulations on special tax adjustments,
the following may result in the involved enterprise becoming a target of an
investigation : abuse of tax incentives; treaty shopping; abuse of form of
organisation; frequent trading with companies located in a tax haven; and any
other business arrangements without bona fide commercial purposes.

The form and substance of an arrangement will be reviewed.
The tax authority may redefine the arrangement based on the business substance,
cancel an enterprise’s tax benefits, and re-identify or reallocate revenue,
costs, income, losses and tax deductions between the involved parties. An
anti-avoidance case must be reported to the State Administration of Taxation
(SAT) for its approval.

Germany :

Under the German law (S. 42 of the AO – Tax Procedure Act) substance over form is applied if an in-appropriate legal structure is chosen that leads to a tax advantage for which the taxpayer cannot provide significant non-tax reasons.

A legal structure is considered inappropriate if the taxpayer or a third party generates a tax benefit that is not intended by the law. The amended Section also includes a clear hierarchy, i.e., specific anti-abuse rules according to applicable tax laws have to be applied on a step-by-step basis, after which the general anti-abuse provision can become applicable.

As the legal definition of ‘abuse of form’ is some-what vague, the German tax courts had established a long-term practice based on numerous cases regarding ‘base companies’ which are placed in a low-tax jurisdiction and have no or only insignificant substance.

The recent German anti-treaty-shopping rule (5. SOd EStG) increases the substance requirements for non-German companies to benefit from withholding tax relief, in particular with respect to dividends or royalties provided for by the double tax treaties (DTT) or EU directive. A foreign company is in general entitled to neither full nor partial tax relief if:

  • there are no economic or other relevant reasons for its interposition,

  • not more than 10% of its aggregate gross revenue for the relevant financial year is generated from the company’s own economic activities, or

  • it fails to participate in the open market place with business operations that are adequately equipped for the business purpose pursued by the company.

United Kingdom (UK):

In Furniss (H.M. Inspector of Taxes) v. Dawson, House of Lords, (55 TC 324) (1984) (AC 474), the case involved a disposition of shares by family members, who disposed of shares in two family companies to an investment company incorporated in the Isle of Man. The shares were subsequently sold to another company. The reason for interposing the Isle of Man company was to provide capital gains tax relief. On the question whether the two transactions were in substance a single transaction, it was held that: In ascertaining the substance of a transaction, the courts must look at the entirety of a composite trans-action if it appears that it was designed and intended to be carried through as a whole. The court is not bound to take each step in isolation in order to ascertain the legal rights and liabilities of the tax-payer at the beginning and end of each step. The court can and should have regard to the result which the transaction as a whole was designed to achieve. Further, the court may disregard a transaction and treat it as fiscally a nullity even though there is a change in the legal position of the parties before and after the scheme is carried through, if that change can be regarded as a mere change of form with no enduring legal consequences.

In  Commissioners    of Inland    Revenue    v. Duke    of Westminster (19 TC 490, 520,524) (1936) (AC 1), it was held, as is commonly used as supporting comment in various commentaries on substance-over form matters, that: Every man is entitled if he can to order his affairs so that the tax incidence under the appropriate Acts is less than it otherwise would be. If he succeeds in ordering them so as to secure this result, then, however unappreciative the Commissioners of Inland Revenue or his fellow taxpayers may be of his ingenuity, he cannot be compelled to pay an increased tax.

In WT Ramsay Ltd. v. Commissioners of Inland Revenue, (54 TC 101) (1982) (AC 300), it was held that: If it can be seen that a document or transaction was intended to have effect as part of a nexus or series of transactions, or as an ingredient of a wider transaction intended as a whole, there is nothing in the doctrine to prevent it being so regarded. It is the task of the court to ascertain the legal nature of any transaction to which it is sought to attach a tax or a tax consequence, and if that emerges from a series or combination of transactions intended to operate as such, it is that series or combination which may be regarded.

The above ruling provides a logical summary of addressing the legal nature of each transaction in a series of transactions.

First, it established that there is nothing in the Westminster principle which compels a consideration of individual transactions separately from a preconceived chain or series of transactions of which they form merely a part.

Secondly, it established that where one finds a series of preconceived transactions which are entered upon solely for fiscal purposes and are clearly interconnected and mutually dependent upon one another, one should look at the overall transaction to ascertain what has been and what was intended to be achieved.

Thirdly, it established that if what one finds on such a consideration is that nothing whatsoever has been achieved because the individual steps taken cancel one another out, one is entitled then to ignore the fiscal consequences which might otherwise have resulted from each of those individual steps considered in isolation. That represents the substance of the general principle deducible from the decision.

In conclusion, the fact that transactions may be circulating or are merely paper transactions is further not conclusive. Thus, where no commercial purpose in relation to the transactions is evident apart from tax avoidance which in the absence of the transactions would have been payable, the series of transactions should be looked at as a whole in relation to intention and motivation.

Netherlands:

It is generally accepted that artificial or simulated transactions may be ignored by the tax administration and the Courts of Appeals through a determination of the facts rather than the form (substance over form).

In addition, there are two specific provisions to combat tax avoidance or evasion (i.e., transactions the main purpose of which is avoidance or evasion of tax) :

The just levying provision (richtige heffing), under which the legal act in dispute may be ignored for tax purposes. This procedure is subject to prior approval by the Ministry of Finance and involves a lot of administrative work. Therefore, this procedure is not commonly used.

The abuse of law doctrine (jraus legis), which is not laid down in tax law but is an interpretation method developed in case law. Under this provision, the spirit of the law is decisive, rather than the exact wording. The transaction in dispute may be converted to the closest equivalent which does not give rise to an abuse of law. The abuse of law procedure can be used only as a last resort.

In general, the results of both  procedures are the same for the taxpayer.

In the recent Supreme Court decision (HR 17-10-2008,42954), the merger exemption for capital duty payment was denied, as it was held that interposing an English company for a short period of time, and based on a pre-determined step plan, lacks a real function.

From a series of Supreme Court decisions it can be deduced that abuse of law is present when the chosen structure is predominantly or exclusively motivated by tax savings and also is in contradiction with the meaning of the law. If the motivation is exclusively to save tax, and no commercial justification for the chosen structure exists, abuse of law can be present as well. However, if the legislature has recognised a tax-saving route, but deliberately did not close this route, the courts are not inclined to apply the abuse of law doctrine.

India:

The most important Indian case addressing the substance-over-form question is without doubt McDowell and Co. Ltd. v. Commercial Tax Officer, (154 ITR 148) (SC). The case was about a mitigation of sales tax by having the buyers separately pay the excise duty, whereby such excise duty would not be included in the taxable basis for sales tax.

The Commercial Tax Officer was of the view that the excise duty paid directly to the Excise authorities or deposited directly in the State Exchequer in respect of Indian liquor by the buyers before removing the same from the distillery could be said to form part of the taxable turnover of the appellant distillery for the purpose of the Sales Tax Act.

The Court, however, came to the conclusion that excise duty did not go into the common till of McDowell and did not become a part of the circulating capital. Therefore, the Sales Tax authorities were not competent to include in the turnover of the appellant the excise duty which was not charged by it but was paid directly to the excise authorities by the buyers of the liquor.

The Supreme Court took the view that tax planning was legitimate so long as it was strictly within the four corners of the law and any ‘colourable’ device or dubious methods to minimise tax incidence were not legally permissible.

The Court reaffirmed the view of English cases while examining a legally valid transaction, and held that the Revenue should proceed objectively and not hypothetically attribute ‘motives’ behind the taxpayer’s action.

In the case of the Commissioner of Income-tax v. A. Raman and Co, (67 ITR 11,17) (SC), it was stated that: The law does not oblige a trader to make the maximum profit that he can get out of his trading transactions. Income which accrues to a trader is taxable in his hands. Income which he could have, but has not earned, is not made taxable as income accrued to him. Avoidance of tax liability by so arranging commercial affairs that charge of tax is distributed is not prohibited. A taxpayer may resort to a device to divert the income before it accrues or arises to him. Effectiveness of the device depends not upon considerations of morality, but on the operation of the Income-tax Act. Legislative injunction in tax statutes may not, except on peril of penalty, be violated, but may lawfully be circumvented.

In the case Bank of Chettinad Ltd. v. Commissioner of Income-tax, (8 ITR 522), it was stated that: The tax authority is entitled and is indeed bound to determine the true legal relation resulting from a transaction. If the parties have chosen to conceal by a device the legal relation, it is open to the tax authorities to unravel the device and to determine the true character of the relationship. But the legal effect of a transaction cannot be displaced by probing into the ‘substance of the transaction’.

In Simon in Latilla v. I.R.C. (11 ITR Suppl. 78, 79) (HL), it was stated that: Tax planning may be legitimate, provided it is within the framework of law. Colourable devices cannot be part of tax planning and it is wrong to encourage or entertain the belief that it is honourable to avoid the payment of tax by resorting to dubious methods. It is the obligation of every citizen to pay their taxes honestly without resorting to subterfuges.

In CIT v. Abhayananda Rath Family Benefit Trust, (255 ITR 436) (Orissa HC), the assessee set up a trust for his minor son’s benefit. The income of the minor child from the trust was to be accumulated during his minority. In other words the income of the minor child from the transferred assets was not includible in the total income of the assessee. However, the contention of the Revenue that the trust has been created by the assessee for the purpose of avoidance of tax was rejected by the Court, as ‘Evading payment of tax’ is quite different from ‘tax planning’.

According to the Orissa High Court, a person may plan his finances in such a manner, strictly within the four corners of the tax statute that his tax liability is minimised or made nil. If this is done and observed strictly in accordance with and taking advantage of the provisions contained in the Act, by no stretch of imagination can it be said that payment of tax has been evaded.

In the context of payment of tax, ‘evasion’ necessarily means, ‘to try illegally to avoid paying tax’. But, as in the instant case, a trust has been created in accordance with law and creation of such a trust is not hit by any of the provisions contained in the Act.

Analysis:

It appears from the above, that there is no single approach towards the issue of substance over form. A clear tendency exists for tax authorities to try and counter any kind of undesired outcome (in their eyes) of a certain piece of legislation by applying the substance-over-form doctrine. This puts, more than in many other situations, a strong responsibility on the shoulders of the judicial system to protect the rights of the taxpayer.

The following common denominator can, however, be found in most countries: If a taxpayer has multiple avenues available to structure his transaction, he is free to choose the most tax-efficient avenue, provided a certain level of commercial justification for the choice exists, and tax considerations are not the only reason.

The OECD leaves it to the individual countries to introduce anti-abuse legislation, legislation that can be applied without interference by the OECD model convention (and vice versa). The OECD does subscribe to the concept of (economic) substance over (legal) form.

Looking at the current situation in India, the Indian tax authorities are clearly exploring the limits to the substance-over-form concept with their secondary line of argumentation in the Vodafone case, which involves an attempt to lift the corporate veil of the companies that were interposed between the Hong Kong ultimate parent and the Indian operating company. This seems to indicate that the tax authorities want to go beyond the earlier decision in the Union of India v. Azadi Bachao Andolan, (263 ITR 706) (SC), where the existence, and beneficial ownership for claiming benefits under the treaty between India and Mauritius, of a Mauritian group company were respected based on a valid certificate of residence of that company issued by the appropriate Mauritius authorities. From Mukundrary K. Shah v. Commissioner of Income tax, (143 Taxman 743) (Calcutta HC)t and Deputy Commissioner of Income tax v. GVS Investment (p) Ltd, (92 TTJ 706)( Delhi ITAT) a principle emerges that the corporate veil can be lifted only where the transaction is found to be sham, bogus or contrived. The corporate veil can be lifted so as to expose any person to liability, who has committed a fraud upon the public from their sheltered position. In addition, from Mafatlal Holdings Ltd v. Additional Commissioner of Income-tax, (85 TTJ 82) (Mumbai ITAT)1 and Additional Commissioner of Income-tax v. Nestle India, (94 ITJ 53) (Delhi ITAT), it is clear that the onus is on the tax authorities to prove that a transaction is sham or bogus, before resorting to lifting the corporate veil.

Conclusion:

The substance-over-form doctrine is used most often in an anti-abuse context by the tax authorities. This implies that it should be applied with care. It should also be applied in a consistent way. A requalification of only certain elements of a transaction, to come to the maximum tax cost for the tax-payer, will not do. The substance of the total trans-action structure should be reviewed. Only when the chosen form is illegal or legal, but lacking commercial reality and just aimed at receiving a beneficial tax treatment, a challenge based on the substance-over-form doctrine should succeed. And, also the tax authorities are required to stay within the four corners of the law.

Adoption of IFRS in India

Background :

    Users of financial statements have always demanded transparency in financial reporting and disclosures. However, the willingness and need for better disclosure practices have intensified only in recent times. Globalisation has helped Indian companies raise funds from offshore capital markets. This has required Indian companies, desirous of raising funds, to follow the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) of the investing country. The different disclosure requirements for listing purposes have hindered the free flow of capital. This has also made comparison of financial statements across the globe impossible. A movement was initiated by an international body called International Organisation of Securities Commissions to harmonise diverse disclosure practices followed in different countries. This would ease free flow of capital and reduce costs of raising capital in foreign currencies.

IFRS v. U.S. GAAP :

    The policy makers in India have also realised the need to follow IFRS and it is expected that a large number of Indian companies would be required to follow IFRS from 2011. This poses a great challenge to the preparers of financial statements and also to the auditors. There is an urgent need to understand the nuances in IFRS implementation. The biggest difference between U.S. GAAP and IFRS is that IFRS provides much less overall detail. Its guidance regarding revenue recognition, for example, is significantly less extensive than GAAP. IFRS also contains relatively little industry-specific instructions. Because of long-standing convergence projects between the IASB and the FASB, the extent of the specific differences between IFRS and GAAP has been shrinking. Yet significant differences do remain, any one of which can result in significantly different reported results, depending on a company’s industry and individual facts and circumstances.

    Some of the examples are :

    • IFRS does not permit Last-In, First-Out (LIFO).

    • IFRS uses a single-step method for impairment write-downs rather than the two-step method used in U.S. GAAP, making write-downs more likely.

    • IFRS has a different probability threshold and measurement objective for contingencies.

    • IFRS does not permit debt for which a covenant violation has occurred to be classified as non-current unless a lender waiver is obtained before the balance sheet date.

IFRS compliance in India :

Applicability of IFRS in India :

The convergence note of ICAI states that IFRS is applicable from 2011. IFRS in India would cover the following public interest entities in its first wave.

• Listed companies

• Banks, insurance companies, mutual funds, and financial institutions

• Turnover in preceding year exceeding 100 crores

• Borrowing in preceding year exceeding 25 crores

• Holding or subsidiary of the above

First-time adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards :

Applicability to Financial Statements :

• IFRS-1 is applicable to the following financial statements :

1. First annual financial statement in which the entity adopts International Financial Reporting Standards, by an explicit and unreserved statement of compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards.

2. Each interim financial report that the entity presents as part of its first annual financial statement in which the entity adopts International Financial Reporting Standards by an explicit and unreserved statement of compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards.

Period :

• The first IFRS reporting period for entities in India having accounting period beginning on 1 April would be 1 April 2011 to 30 June 2011. For an entity whose accounting period begins on 1 January, the first IFRS reporting period would be 1 January 2012 to 31 March 2012.

Date of transition :

• As per Institute of Chartered Accountants of India’s announcement, an entity in India should have its financials as per IFRS on 1 April 2010 which is the date of transition to International Financial Reporting Standards for entities whose accounting periods begin on 1 April. The entity is required to prepare and present opening IFRS statement of financial position as at the date of transition to International Financial Reporting Standards.

• An entity that presented financial statements in the previous year containing an explicit and unreserved statement of compliance with IFRS would not be a first-time adopter of IFRS even though it contains a qualified audit report.

Accounting policies :

• The entity cannot change its accounting policy during the periods presented in its first IFRS financial statements. For an entity whose accounting period begins on 1 April, the periods presented would be 1 April 2010 to 31 March 2011 and 1 April 2011 to 31 March 2012. No voluntary change in accounting policies is permitted during the period 1 April 2010 to 31 March 2012.

• The entity should adopt accounting policies that are in compliance with each IFRS effective as at 30 June 2011, if the entity prepares and presents an interim financial report or 31 March 2012.

• The adjustments due to changes in accounting policies from previous GAAP to International Financial Reporting Standards at the date of transition to International Financial Reporting Standards should be adjusted directly in retained earnings or a specific reserve such as IFRS transition reserve.

De-recognising of some old assets and liabilities :

The entity should eliminate previous GAAP assets and liabilities from the opening balance sheet if they do not qualify for recognition under IFRSs. [IFRS 1-10(b)] For example :    

  • IAS 38 does not permit recognition of expenditure on any of the following as an intangible asset: research, start-up, pre-operating, and pre-opening costs, training, advertising and promotion, moving and relocation if the entity’s previous GAAP had recognised these as assets; they are eliminated in the opening IFRS balance sheet.

  •     If the entity’s previous GAAP had allowed accrual of liabilities for ‘general reserves’, restructurings, future operating losses, or major overhauls that do not meet the conditions for recognition as a provision under IAS 37, these are eliminated in the opening IFRS balance sheet.

  •     If the entity’s previous GAAP had allowed recognition of reimbursements and contingent assets that are not virtually certain, these are eliminated in the opening IFRS balance sheet.

Recognition of some new assets and liabilities:

Conversely, the entity should recognise all assets and liabilities that are required to be recognised by IFRS even if they were never recognised under previous GAAP. [IFRS 1.10(a)] For example:

IAS 39 requires recognition of all derivative financial assets and liabilities, including embedded de-rivatives. These were not recognised under many local GAAPs.

IAS 19 requires an employer to recognise its liabilities under defined benefit plans. These are not just pension liabilities but also obligations for medical and life insurance, vacations, termination benefits, and deferred compensation. In the case of ‘over-funded’ plans, this would be a defined benefit asset.

IAS 37 requires recognition of provisions as liabilities. Examples could include an entity’s obligations for restructurings, onerous contracts, decommissioning, remediation, site restoration, warranties, guarantees, and litigation.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities would be recognised in conformity with IAS 12.

Reclassification:

The entity should reclassify previous GAAP opening balance sheet items into the appropriate IFRS classification. [IFRS 1.10(c)] Examples:

IAS 10 does not permit classifying dividends declared or proposed after the balance sheet date as a liability at the balance sheet date. In the opening IFRS balance sheet these would be reclassified as a component of retained earnings.

If the entity’s previous GAAP had allowed treasury stock (an entity’s own shares that it had purchased) to be reported as an asset, it would be reclassified as a component of equity under IFRS.

Items classified as identifiable intangible assets in a business combination accounted for under the previous GAAP may be required to be classified as goodwill under IFRS 3, because they do not meet the definition of an intangible asset under IAS 38. The converse may also be true in some cases. These items must be reclassified.

IAS 32 has principles for classifying items as financialliabilities or equity. Thus mandatory redeemable preferred shares that may have been classified as equity under previous GAAP would be reclassified as liabilities in the opening IFRS balance sheet.

Note that IFRS 1 makes an exception from the ‘split-accounting’ provisions of IAS 32. If the liability component of a compound financial instrument is no longer outstanding at the date of the opening IFRS balance sheet” the entity is not required to reclassify out of retained earnings and into other equity the original equity component of the compound instrument.

The reclassification principle would apply for the purpose of defining reportable segments under IFRS 8.

The scope of consolidation might change depending on the consistency of the previous GAAP requirements to those in IAS 27. In some cases, IFRS will require consolidated financial statements where they were not required before.

Some offsetting (netting) of assets and liabilities or of income and expense items that had been acceptable under previous GAAP may no longer be acceptable under IFRS.

Retrospective  adjustments:

An entity need not make retrospective adjustments for complying with all IFRS from the inception/ origination of asset/liability. An entity may opt for the following exemptions:

1. Not applying IFRS 3 to business combinations that occurred before 1 April 2010

2. Taking fair value at the date of transition or re-valuation done before transition date as deemed cost for property, plant & equipment, intangible assets and investment property

3. Recognise all actuarial gains and losses that are unrecognised at 1 April 2010, even though the entity follows corridor approach for recognising actuarial gains and losses

4. Ignore unrecognised cumulative translation differences at the date of transition

5. Need not separate liability and equity component of a compound financial instrument where the liability component is not outstanding as at 1 April 2010

6. Take the values of assets and liabilities of the subsidiary stated in the parent’s consolidated financial statements after removing consolidation adjustments where the subsidiary adopts IFRS later than parent

 7. Take the values of assets and liabilities of the subsidiary stated in its separate financial statements if the parent adopts IFRS later than the subsidiary

 8. Designate a financial asset as available for sale or at fair value through profit or loss and a financialliability as at fair value through profit or loss at 1 April 2010

 9. Not apply IFRS 2 to equity instruments that vested before 1 April 2010

 10. Apply transitional provisions in IFRS 4 to insurance contracts at 1 April 2010

11. Not add to or deduct from the cost of the asset for changes in existing decommissioning, restoration and similar liabilities as specified in IFRIC 1 that occurred before  1 April  2010

12. Determine as at 1 April 2010 whether an arrangement contains a lease on the basis of the facts and circumstances existing on 1 April 2010

13. Take transaction value as fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities

14. Apply transitional provisions in IFRIC 12 to Service Concession Arrangements at 1 April 2010.

 IFRS 1 prohibits retrospective application in the following cases:
    
1. Not apply de-recognition requirements of IAS 39 to transactions that resulted in de-recognition under previous GAAP and that occurred before 1 January 2004

2. Measure all derivatives at fair value at 1 April 2010

3. Designate derivative as hedge instruments from 1 April 2010.

4. Attribute to the owners of the parent and to the controlling interests even if this results in non-controlling interests having a deficit balance

5. Account for changes in parent’s controlling interest in a subsidiary that does not result in loss of control as equity transaction.

The adjustments to be made to the values of assets and liabilities at 1 April, 2010 reflect the changes in accounting policies. No adjustments are required for changes in estimates made under previous GAAP.

Set of financial statements:

An entity’s first IFRS financial statements should contain :

1. Three statements of financial position (i) As at 31 March 20P (ii) As at 31 March 2011 (iii) As at 1 April 2010

2. Two statements of comprehensive income (i) For the period ended on 31 March 2012 (ii) For the period ended on 31 March 2011

3. Two statements of cash flows (i) For the period ended on 31 March 2012 (ii) For the period ended on 31 March 2011

4. Two statements of changes in equity (i) For the period ended on 31 March 2012 (ii) For the period ended on 31 March 2011

Annual  reconciliation:

IFRS 1 requires the following reconciliation in that entity’s financial statements for the period ended on 31 March 2012 :

1. Reconciliation of equity reported under Inter-national Financial Reporting Standards and previous GAAP for (a) 1 April 2010 (b) 31 March 2011.

2. Reconciliation of total comprehensive income under International Financial Reporting Standards with that reported under previous GAAP for the period 1 April 2010 to 31 March 2011.

3. Explanation of material adjustments in the statement of cash flows – IFRS 1 requires reconciliations in that entity’s interim financial reports presented during the period 1 April 2011 to 31 March 2012 between International Financial Reporting Standards and previous GAAP.

Quarterly  Interim  reconciliation:

The reconciliation required for a quarterly interim financial report as at 30 September 2011 is:

1. Reconciliation of equity as at 30 September 2011between that reported under International Financial Reporting Standards and that re-ported under previous GAAP.

2. Reconciliation of total comprehensive income for the period ended 30 September 2011 and 30 September 2010 between that reported under International Financial Reporting Standards and that reported under previous GAAP.

3. Reconciliation of total comprehensive income for the year to date period ended 30 September 2011 and 30 September 2010 between that reported under International Financial Reporting Standards and that reported under previous GAAP.

4. Explanation of material adjustments to statement of cash flows for the period ended 30 September 2011 and 30 September 2010 between that reported under International Finanial Reporting Standards and that reported – under previous GAAP.

5. Explanation of material adjustments to statement of cash flows for the year to date period ended 30 September 2011 and 30 September 2010.

Warren Buffet. Is this statement valid ?

Article

In his annual Chairman’s letter to shareholders of Berkshire
Hathaway Inc for year 2001, Warren Buffet set out his perspective on financial
derivatives — particularly credit derivatives1, and concluded that “We try to
be alert to any sort of megacatastrophe risk, and that posture may make us
unduly apprehensive about the burgeoning quantities of long-term derivatives
contracts and the massive amount of uncollateralised receivables that are
growing alongside. In our view, derivatives are financial weapons of mass
destruction, carrying dangers that, while now latent, are potentially lethal”
.


The 2008 US Financial Crisis :

An overview :

Indeed, Warren Buffet’s words of wisdom in his 2001 letter to
shareholders seem almost prophetic in the wake of the catastrophic financial
meltdown that is redefining the landscape of global finance at the speed that
perhaps makes Hurricane Ike look like a minor high tide. The historic US
government takeover2 of twin mortgage buyers — Fannie Mae3 and Freddie Mac4 on 7
September, 2008, bankruptcy of the 158 years’ old Lehman Brothers5, acquisition
of the 94 years’ old Merrill Lynch6 by Bank of America on 15 September, 2008, US
Fed and US government $ 85 billion loan bailout of American International Group7
(AIG) on 16 September, 2008, and scrambling for capital or other survival kits
by the remaining two independent investment banks and financial brokerages in
the US market, namely, Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley, all in a matter of two
weeks, is unprecedented in the US — the sacred land of capitalism, where
nationalising private investors’ losses through taxpayers’ bailouts has been
sacrilege, ever since the establishment of the US Fed system after the Great
Depression in the 1930s.

And yet even this did little to stave off the financial storm
whose end is nowhere in sight. Much like the stages of a scenario of systemic
financial meltdown associated with this severe economic recession that Professor
Nouriel Roubini of the Stern School of Business at New York University outlined
in February 2008: “A vicious circle of losses, capital reduction,
credit contraction, forced liquidation and fire sales of assets at below
fundamental prices could ensue leading to a cascading and mounting cycle of
losses and further credit contraction. In illiquid market actual market prices
are lower than the lower fundamental value that they then have given the credit
problems in the economy. Market prices include a large illiquidity discount on
top of the discount due to the credit and fundamental problems of the underlying
assets that back the distressed financial assets. Capital losses then lead to
margin calls and further reduction of risk taking by a variety of financial
institutions that are then forced to mark to market their positions. Such a
forced fire sale of assets in illiquid markets leads to further losses that
further contract credit and trigger further margin calls and disintermediation
of credit. The triggering event for the next round of this cascade is the
downgrade of the monolines and the ensuing sharp drop in equity markets; both
will trigger margin calls and further credit disintermedia-tion . . . . . A
near-global economic recession could ensue as the financial and credit losses
and the credit crunch spread around the world. Panic, fire sales, cascading fall
in asset prices will exacerbate the financial and real economic distress as a
number of large and systemically important financial institutions go bankrupt.”


US Treasury Secretary Henry Paulson watched aghast on 17
September 2008 as his dramatic actions of rescuing Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and
AIG were met by worldwide stock market panic while inter-bank lending remained
stubbornly frozen. Running out of alternatives, on 21 September 2008 the Bush
administration led by Henry Paulson sent a draft of proposed legislation to the
US Congress asking for $ 700 billion in taxpayer money to get bad mortgage
assets off the books of troubled US financial institutions in a bid to end the
U.S. economy’s worst financial nightmare since the Great Depression. As a
measure of its relative size, this mother of all financial bailouts in modern
history, at $ 700 billion is approx 7.2% of the current outstanding US national
debt of $ 9.67 trillion9, about 24% of the 2008 US government budget outlay of
$ 2.93 trillion10, a tad over 5% of US GDP at $ 13.67 trillion (2007 est)11,
nearly 64% of India’s GDP at $ 1.09 trillion (2007 est)12, and 1.29% of World
GDP at $ 54.31 trillion (2007 est). Ironically, Henry Paulson, who previously
ran the world’s most powerful investment bank Goldman Sachs as its
free-marketeering former chairman now finds himself leading a nationalisation
programme that would make both Fidel Castro and Hugo Chavez blush ! Can the
government really take on the notorious financial instruments tied to sub-prime
mortgages, whose unfathomable loss of value has made the US credit crisis
self-perpetuating, and bury them in a vault funded by the taxpayer ? Time will
tell.

The on or off-balance sheet obligations of Fannie Mae and
Freddie Mac, the two independent government-sponsored enterprises (GSEs) is just
over $ 5 trillion. Together, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac own or guarantee about
half of the $ 12 trillion of mortgages in the U.S.13 The government accounts for
these GSEs as if they are unconnected to its balance sheet. Notably, their
obligations at over $ 5 trillion exceed 50% of current US national debt14. The
net exposure to US taxpayers is difficult to determine at the time of the
takeover and depends on several factors, such as declines in housing prices and
losses on mortgage assets in the future. Over 98% of Fannie’s loans were paying
timely during 200815. Both Fannie and Freddie had positive net worth as of the
date of the takeover, meaning the value of their assets exceeded their
liabilities16.

As Domnic Rushe17 points out, two things seem to be clear :
First, the economic influence of American presidents is severely limited.
Secondly, US financial markets have become so complex and reliant on highly
technical trading instruments that even some of the country’s best-known
economists declared themselves bewildered by the head-spinning turn of events.
“As an economist, I am supposed to have something intelligent to say about the
current financial crisis”, said Professor Steven Levitt, the author of
Freakonomics, a best-selling guide on the way markets work. “To be honest,
however, I haven’t the foggiest idea what this all means”18.

Foreign Exchange Reserves — What Do They Represent ?

Foreign Exchange Reserves

The thoughts expressed in this article emerged when the
global financial crisis was at its peak in the beginning of 2009. The focus is
on Foreign Currency Reserves. It all began with questions such as :





  •   What will happen if China withdraws its reserves from the USA ?



  •   Can China not invest its huge foreign exchange reserves in its own
    economy ?



The above questions are applicable globally. But China and
the USA, being the largest creditor and debtor in the world ideally represent
the global scenario. The article explores the concept of foreign currency
reserves and the related concerns.

Fundamentals :

What do foreign currency reserves of a country mean ?




  •   Does it mean ‘cash balance’ in other country’s currency ?



  •   Does it imply that the more the reserves, the richer is the country ?




Nature of foreign currency :

To cite an example, say China has exported goods and services
worth US $ 1,000 to the USA. Assume that these are net exports (export minus
import). This transaction has resulted in a liability for the USA and for China
it is a claim over the USA. Can China utilise this claim for its domestic
economy ? Or for investing in US treasury bills ? Or for any other purpose ?

To understand this, let us understand the nature of export,
import, payment, claim, etc. (Please note that dictionary definitions are not
relevant.)

Generation of claim :


Let us assume that Chinese residents have exported goods and
services to US residents for US $ 1,000. Chinese residents get US $ 1,000. That
is, Chinese residents get a claim over the US government. These Chinese
residents sell the currency or the claim to the Chinese government. The Chinese
government, in turn, pays Renminbis (RMB) to the Chinese residents. I.e.,
China buys the US $ claim from Chinese residents.

The corresponding effect is that the Chinese residents
substitute their claim over the USA, with claim over China. When any person
holds a currency of any government, it is a loan to the government, or a claim
over the government. All currencies are a ‘promises to pay’.

The Chinese residents utilise the RMBs for their expenses of
raw materials, labour, etc. The surplus will be used for investments,
consumption, etc. Effectively, the Chinese exporters pay for raw materials and
expenses to other Chinese residents. This is followed by further payments to
more Chinese residents and so on. Thus, all the RMBs received against US $ 1,000
get distributed amongst the Chinese residents. These residents will put the
money in the bank or mutual fund, which will invest in infrastructure, etc. It
may be noted that the claims being country-specific, it is immaterial whether
Chinese residents or Chinese government holds US $ claims. It is difficult (and
impractical) for individuals to get foreign exchange claims from other
governments. Hence such claims are normally held by governments.

Now, foreign exchange reserve is the Chinese government’s
claim over the USA. Can China invest these reserves in its infrastructure ? It
cannot. It has already been invested/utilised when Chinese residents sold their
US $ to Chinese government and utilised the RMBs for expenditure or investment.

Basically, what China has to do is recover the equivalent of
the claim from the USA. Claim can be expressed in different ways — it is an
intangible made up of confidence that the other country will settle the claim in
future; it is the goodwill; it is a paper entry.

Investment in treasury bills :

It is said that China is investing in US treasury bills. Why
is it doing so ? What else can it do ? When it invests in treasury bills, it is
really substituting non-interest bearing cash for interest bearing treasury
bills. It is assured of interest income till the USA settles its claim. Hence,
when we say China is investing in US treasury bills, it is not really investing
but is only substituting one claim with another; and it does not have a choice.

Can China withdraw its investment in the US treasury bills ?
This is consequential to investment. When it cannot really ‘invest’, it cannot
really withdraw. However, when it wants to withdraw its investment in the US
treasury bills, what can it do ? It can sell the treasury bills and regain US $,
and the cash claim still remains. Therefore, foreign currency reserves or
treasury bills are ‘claims’.

Withdrawal of reserves :

Can China withdraw the US $ reserves ? Prima facie it
cannot. As we have seen, US $ is only a claim. Withdrawal of reserves can happen
only if the currency is backed by something valuable like gold. Therefore, if
the USA has commodity equal to US $ 1,000, it can give that commodity against US
$ 1,000. As currencies are backed by promises or goodwill, investing in or
withdrawing from treasury bills really does not mean much. It can sell the claim
by way of these securities to another person, provided there is a buyer. This is
discussed in later paragraphs.

Sovereign Wealth Fund :

What is a Sovereign Wealth Fund (SWF) ? The foreign exchange
reserves of a country are invested abroad through special purpose vehicles known
as SWF. So if the Chinese government’s claim is converted into an SPV, it will
be called an SWF. SWFs invest in other country’s capital. In the example of
China, the SWF will either buy capital in the USA or sell US $ to buy capital in
other countries. SWFs are supposed to give better yields than treasury bills. In
an SWF one asset is converted into another asset — cash into treasury bills
which in turn is converted into investment through SWF.

If India were to set up a SWF and invest in other countries,
it will be borrowing and then investing elsewhere. By borrowing, one gets
foreign exchange, but that is not a true reserve. One cannot establish an SWF
out of borrowed capital. SWFs are usually set up by countries that have current
account surplus. Therefore it was a right decision by India not to establish an
SWF.

How does China settle its ‘claim’ over USA?

There are following ways:

    i) The USA exports to China goods/commodities worth US $ 1,000 (net). China may either buy goods and consume it; or may buy gold and hold it. However, if the USA does not have the goods or commodities that China requires, the account cannot be settled.

    ii) The USA sells China its capital — say China buys property and business in the USA. This way, China owns a little bit of the USA.

    iii) China sells its claim over the USA to someone else i.e., it sells US $ and buys other currency in the market. However, this means that it is buying another country’s claim in exchange of its claim over the USA. The other country is buying a claim over the USA. This does not absolve USA of its liability.

    iv) It buys capital in other countries and pays for it in US $ i.e., China uses its export surplus to buy capital in other countries and sell its US claim [combination of steps (ii) and (iii)].

    v) China writes off the claim.

The first two are the only ways to per se settle the account. The third and the fourth options do not really settle the account. The liability of debtor remains. The last option is not a desirable way of settling the account.

In actual practice all or some of the above happens continuously. The balances/claims keep changing. There is never a perfect settlement of claims. All countries simultaneously can never have an export surplus. Someone has to be a net importer at some time or the other.

When a person buys more than what he can sell and cannot pay, he has to sell his capital. If he doesn’t have capital, the amount is written off by the creditor. This rarely happens in case of countries over a long period of time. As time horizon is vastly different for individuals and countries, one may not be able to see things immediately and obviously.

If China wants to withdraw its reserves, it can only sell its claim to others — provided there are others who are prepared to buy. If there is no one prepared to buy, the supply being more than the demand, the value of US $ will depreciate. The situation is similar to any shareholder owning a major stake of a company’s stocks. If such shareholder sells, the value of shares goes down. In such a case value of his unsold share also comes down and he suffers.

Considering the above, the only way to settle the claim in the long term is — the net importing country becomes a net exporter or it sells capital. Those countries which have raw material or goods to sell may be able to do it. Arab countries have oil and hence are able to sell oil and have surpluses.

What happens to those countries that do not have raw materials or manufacturing sector necessary for generating export surplus? They can:

  •     Export services (It includes licensing of tech-nology, rendering services as employee or consultant, etc.)


  •     Sell tourism services


  •     Provide undesirable services like tax evasion facilities through tax havens, gambling, etc.


India imports goods for which it does not have exportable surplus. Therefore, it sells services — software services, etc. The services should be valuable enough to generate export surplus. In absence of a current account surplus, a country can sell capital. However, selling capital has its own issues.

What happens if a country cannot settle the claims?
If settlement runs over a long period of time and claims become large, then the creditor will demand either sale of capital or sale of goods with a hefty discount. (If a country is indebted, generally its goods and capital command a lower price.) Therefore, to generate export surplus, such country has to sell cheap — it has to devalue its currency.

A cheap currency should normally help a country to sell its goods and thus settle the claim. If it cannot generate export surplus, it has to sell capital. Does selling capital (accepting foreign investment) create a liability? In case of FDI, one can say that the country has sold capital and therefore the reserve is a true reserve. However, even FDI is a loan in one way, but it is better than ECB. In case of FDI, there are other issues like foreigners owning and influencing the country’s policy. This is particularly true when large corporate invests in a comparatively smaller country.

If the capital of a country is attractive, one can sell the same and treat the proceeds as reserve. Therefore many countries have liberal FDI policy. What makes a country’s capital attractive?? For example, capital in the USA may be more valuable than, say, in India or China. A number of factors contribute to this — security, clear ownership laws, perception, etc.

Despite China having a current account surplus, why is it that US $ is overvalued and Chinese RMB is undervalued?? There could be several reasons. One of them is perception and the other is time lag. As mentioned above, time horizons of individuals and countries are different. In case of countries it takes many decades before a perception is corrected or reversed. Just a current account surplus is not sufficient. If a country can generate a foreign exchange surplus by sale of capital, it contributes to appreciation of currency. The USA has been able to do that.

However, in spite of selling capital, if the claim cannot be settled, what happens? In such a case, the situation is similar to a bankrupt person. Both the creditor and debtor lose. The creditor loses the claim and the debtor loses his credit and is declared insolvent.

Confidence:

It all leads to the conclusion that ultimately what is the confidence of people in claims of others? Confidence is built up of due several things including perceptions. Perceptions keep changing. The USA enjoys the most confidence as it has several institutions and processes which other countries do not have. These include freedom, ownership of asset, dispute resolution mechanism, security, power of fighting difficulties, etc. Also living conditions are better in the USA.

However, this confidence of the USA is under threat. Unless it regains the confidence, it will not be able to maintain the value of its currency. All those countries who hold US $ as their reserves, will suffer losses. The only way in which the USA can settle its claim is that by cutting its expenditure and generating export surplus.

India’s foreign exchange reserves:

India has a current account deficit — its import of goods and services is more than its export revenues. Still India has a reserve of US $ 250 bn. What does this reserve represent? It represents sale of capital and borrowings. It must be remembered that foreign exchange reserves is only a bank balance (a claim). Only export surplus or current account surplus is a true reserve. Foreigners have invested in land, industry, etc. To that extent they are owners of India. When foreigners give loans (ECBs), they have a claim over the Indian government/ residents. The foreign currency that comes in through sale of capital (FDI) or by accepting foreign loans (ECBs) goes in to foreign currency reserve. But simultaneously, there is a liability for the country to refund the loan when due and pay the foreigner when there is divestment of FDI. In a way, therefore, FDI is also a liability for India as a whole. In practice, when countries sell capital it is not treated as a liability. But in the International Investment Position Reports, these are shown as liabilities.

Conclusion:

Foreign exchange reserves represent only claims. It does not represent wealth, unless one is confident of encashing it before its value is eroded. Only time will tell whether Chinese reserves are really valuable or not. The best situation is when the claims of countries remain within reasonable limits as it preserves the confidence. Both, large current account surpluses or deficits are not desirable for any country.

TDS is highly tedious

Article

Terminology used in this Article :


TDS is Tax Deducted at Source. This is a
misnomer. This is not a tax at all.

TDS is only a Tentative Deposit of Sum
which is later refunded or appropriated towards tax assessed and levied on
another. Till such time this is not tax and this is not Government’s money.

AT is Advance Tax. An assessee knows and estimates what he is
earning in the current year, for which he pays estimated tax. This is a tax
payment but TDS is not a tax payment, but only a Tentative Deposit
of Sum.

HIC is abbreviation for Honest Innocent Citizen.

Payee is the assessee on whose behalf a Tentative Deposit of
Sum is made with a bank.

The basic assessment procedure under the IT law is — an
assessee has to file the Return of Income, the computation of which is made by
deducting the expenditure from the income and the net income is to be taxed. A
net loss may also arise. It is the duty of the Department to make the
assessment, levy tax and collect the same.

The Department also envisages collection by way of Advance
Tax on the estimated income the assessee is earning in the current year.

The Income-tax Department is maintained to do the exercise of
assessment, levy of tax and collect. This governmental agency is expected to be
efficient in the matter of levy and collection of such taxes. Inefficiency and
lethargy should not be there and the governmental agency cannot shirk its
responsibility and shift such responsibility on the HIC.

Further, S. 269 mandatorily has made payments above Rs.20000
to be made only by cheques. Even though this is much against the law of ‘legal
tender’, when payments are made by cheques, the recipient automatically
discloses it in his accounts, which is to come to the notice of the I.T.
Department. It is difficult to suppress the same. If in spite it is suppressed,
the I.T. Department is to unearth the same.

‘Bonded Labour’ under the Bonded Labour System (Abolition)
Act, 1976 means ‘forced or partly forced labour under which a debtor enters into
an agreement with the creditor’. HIC is declared an ‘assessee in default’ and
thereby presumed legally a ‘debtor’ and the Government a ‘creditor’. Such a law
is against the Constitution and would be ‘bonded labour’ under the Bonded Labour
Abolition Act, 1976.

The following questions and answers would give a proper
appraisal of the issue :

(1) Can a HIC be mandatorily forced to undertake the work/labour
of collecting and remitting TDS into the bank much against his will and consent,
and that too without any consideration or remuneration ?

Whether such enforcing of work/labour is bonded labour which
would infringe the personal freedom and liberty of a HIC guaranteed under the
Constitution ?




Ans. : HIC are mandatorily forced and made responsible to
collect TDS and deposit in a bank, failing which such HIC is deemed an ‘assessee
in default’.

An HIC is to make payment for services and utilities availed
by him, which is his expenditure and liability. Unless such liability is timely
cleared, his business and business relationship suffers.

The provisions relating to TDS in the Income-tax Act run to
35 pages and the IT Rules to some pages. These are cumbersome and an HIC cannot
understand and follow them. Qualified auditors do not undertake this table work
as this is considered a clerical work. Clerks may be appointed, but they are not
trained and well versed. Moreover, it is not a work for a full-time clerk. If
part-time freelance clerks are employed, the business secrets cannot be kept.

Forcing a person and making him responsible to do a
particular work, namely, collecting and remitting TDS is practically an
‘enforced bonded labour, which infringes on one’s personal freedom and liberty
assured in the Constitution of India. No person could be compelled by any law to
undertake a particular work against his will and consent. This is against the
Constitution.

(2) What are the cumbersome procedures and services to be
complied with by such HIC ?



Ans. :

(a) Refer Income-tax Reckoner and determine how much tax has
to be deducted from each kind of payment made by HIC. Different services with
different tariffs need a competent assistant who can rightly understand them.
Several services fall under two categories and any decision becomes debatable.

(b) Two cheques are to be written, one for the payment less
TDS and the other for the TDS amount. If the magnitude of the business is more,
the volume of cheque writing multiplies.

(c) The TDS cheques have to be rightly entered in the TDS
challan. Writing of challans is now laborious and meticulous care is necessary,
as the computer Forms are cumbersome.

d) When the deduction  is made as per law, many recipients do not furnish their PA No. Either they have not obtained it or they have misplaced it. The HIC deductor has no power or authority to insist on their giving the PA No. Even if he discharges the responsibility of collecting and depositing in bank, the HIC is punished for the lack of PA No. of the recipient. This is not the mistake of the HIC, but punishment is provided u/s.206. This is ridiculous. The Government is keen to get the TDS money. The HIC collects and deposits it and discharges his function. The Government must be satisfied with such money deposited. The HIC should not be punished if the recipient does not furnish his PA No. when the address is given.

e) The TDS cheque written has to be sent to the bank with the challan filled and an assistant is to go to the bank.

f) When the cheque is received by the bank, acknowledgement is never given immediately, but deferred till the cheque gets encashed. An assistant has to go to the bank several times to collect the challan acknowledged. If the collection of the challan is forgotten, no proof will be available. Monitoring this is a cumbersome responsibility. When the challan acknowledgement is given by the bank, they scribble in the challan No., and it is not decipherable many a time. The assistant going to the bank is helpless.

g) The challan has to be collected and it is to be rightly placed in the file and safeguarded. ThIS requires a filing assistant. If this challan is missed, nuisance entails.

h) Within one month individual certificates have to be prepared and the number of forms for such purpose are so many and the right form and updated form has to be used. Such forms have to be purchased from the printers as and when required. An assistant has to go to buy this form and many a time the form is not readily available. Filling up this form is not easy by an assistant unless he knows his job.

i) In such certificates the Director or a responsible person has to sign even though he cannot be made to check the particulars contained in the form. This is to be counter-checked by another assistant. When the signatory of the certificate is authorised is another issue.

j) Once in three months the Quarterly Return manually with all the deduction details referring to each and every transaction is to be prepared, which is an elaborate and meticulous work.

k) The Quarterly Return details have to be fed in computer, which requires a software and a data programmer and the accuracy has to be checked. For any typographical mistake of the data programmer, the HIC is punished.

1) The acknowledgement for having filed the Quarterly Return has to be preserved. The Department on many occasions sends notices for not having received the same. Jurisdictional changes and jurisdictional clashes arise and notices are received, which have to be replied.

For so much of honorary work done by HIC incurring enormous expenses, he is always cornered as ‘Assessee in default’ – an irony of fate.

The fact remains, the Sections, the nature of transactions, the procedures, the multifarious forms, are so cumbersome, even the Income-tax Officials find it difficult to understand.

Irrespective of the onerous difficulties  unduly cast on the HIC, the writer suggests a simple remedy. TDS stamps can be sold in post offices. When payments are made by cash/ cheques, TDS stamps will also be issued along with, duly endorsed. Such stamps will be pasted in the Returns. Even this the Department will misplace. The assessee should always send a xerox and obtain acknowledgment from the Department. Cumbersome procedures can be avoided. If TDS stamps are not issued in time, interest is to be charged automatically by the Department at the time of assessment.

3) When such services are honorarily rendered, whether the HIe can be punished/penalised for any lapses?

Ans. : Rendering service in the interest of the country is to be appreciated and honoured. The TDS provisions and especially the recently introduced Section 40(1)(ia) are draconian and against all can-nons of law, justice, equity and fair play. Legally such laws cannot be sustained.

If the IT Department is not efficient to collect rightful taxes from an assessee, it cannot make an HIC ‘assessee in default’ in the place of the defaulting tax-payer who only has to be punished. Thereby, this provision amounts to letting off defaulters, Department and the assessees and punishing an HIe. There is no justice and equity in penalising HIe.

4) Whether such punishment or penalising be more than the punishment prescribed under law for the real defaulter or evader of taxes?

Ans. : Cases have now arisen that the punishment on the HIC is much more than the punishment prescribed for the real defaulter. The defaulter commits the crime, but the punishment prescribed for the defaulter is much less than the punishment prescribed for the HIC for failure to deduct Tentative Deposit and remit to the bank.

If an HIC makes a payment, and if he does not deduct tax at source, such payment is considered as income in the hands of the HIe. When the payment is made, the payee deducts his expenditure and pays income tax only on his net income. If the payee evades taxes, the punishment on this is very much less than the punishment given to the HIC when the total payment is considered as income in the hands of the HIC for no fault of him, which gets assessed at about 33%.
 
Several instances have come to light when agents, under law of agency, collect money and remit to their principal. Over-zealous officers consider that on such collection and payment by agents, tax should be deducted, failing which the entire payment made to their Principal is treated as income in the hands of such agent. All these penalties and punishments are not equitable as HICs are forced with such work and responsibility due to the indolence and inefficiency of Governmental agency in preventing tax evasion. Such an attitude by the over-zealous officers is driving HIC to the roads.

5) When taxes have been paid on the income by the payee, whether punishment for non-deduction of tax be imposed on the HIC ?

Ans. : When an honest payee has paid his taxes on all his income less his expenditure and given valid proof for the same, the proceedings and actions under law should be dropped. Duplication of payment of taxes arising on the self same transaction is unethical. The deductor should not be punished when the rightful payee has paid his taxes if this is proved by the payer. There is no legal sanction for such duplication in tax levy and collection.

6) Whether the payment made to the payee can be deemed as income of the HIC by any stretch of imagination?

Ans. : Agents render services for their principals, The law of agency applies between them. Some agents are authorised to collect by their principals. They collect in their name, on behalf of their principals. The principals receive the same and disclose in their accounts. The principals incur various expenses which are deducted from the receipts from their agents. Over-zealous officers insist that such agents should deduct tax at source from payments made by them to their principals. While there is no need for such tax deduction, the officers assess the sum total of amounts paid as income in the hands of the agents. While the principal is to pay tax on his net income, the agent is forced to pay tax on the gross income of the principal. This is totally ridiculous. The gross receipt of the principal cannot be deemed to be the income of the agent. The Section 40(1)(ia) has to be reconsidered.

Concluding, the Constitutional validity, equity and justice of the law relating to TDS needs a judicial review.

Relevance of Dharma in Corporate Governance

Article

The increase in the size and proportion of organisational
activities over the last century, should have actually led to a proportional
increase in the organisations’ responsibility towards the various constituents
who contribute towards the survival, success and growth of the organisation.
However this has not happened. As seen from the corporate debacles that have
occurred across the globe in the last decade and more, the focus of the top
management became skewed as they started focussing only on one of their
constituents i.e., the shareholders. As a result of this skewed focus,
organisations neglected other constituents of the organisation such as
customers, employees, suppliers, local community and society, government,
environment and the like who are integral to society and hence critical for the
organisation’s survival, growth and success. In other words importance of Dharma
is not realised in Corporate Governance.


The human body — An ideal example :

The best example to illustrate the need for a holistic
approach to business is the human body. Just as the hands, legs, head, face,
stomach and other external and internal organs are all parts of human body, the
various stakeholders of an organisation are parts of the society. Just as these
organs are all equally responsible for the effective functioning and good health
of the body, the well-being of all the stakeholders appropriately is necessary
for a successful organisation and a good society. If we focus only on and take
care of the face alone because it is most visible and neglect the other body
parts, it would be no good and rather damaging.

The human body itself is an example of perfect integration in
this regard. When a thorn pricks the foot, the eye waters, though they are so
distant. This is because the whole body is one whole and each part reacts to the
pain and joy of the other. Similarly the whole corporate organisation should be
treated as an integrated whole and the welfare of all the organisational
constituencies should be taken care of for the effective functioning and growth
of the organisation.

In a social setting, this can be considered as the Dharma
of the organisation.

Dharma and Dharmic Management :

The word ‘Dharma’ is a Sanskrit word and has no exact
equivalent in the English language. It defies a simple translation into English.
Though sometimes it is used as an equivalent for the word ‘religion’, it is not
only that. A number of words come very close to explaining its meaning. These
include — right action, truth in action, righteousness, morality,
virtue, duty, the dictates of God, code of conduct and others.

Hawley (1993) defines Dharma, Dharmic and
Dharmic Management
in his landmark work ‘Dharmic Management’. He states,
‘The concept of Dharma is affixed to integrity, drawing to it the
energies of goodness, spirit, and fearlessness, creating a sort of super
integrity. The word Dharmic is Sanskrit for deep, deep integrity — living
by your inner truth. Dharmic Management means bringing that truth with
you when you go to work every day. It’s the fusing of the spirit, character,
human values and decency in the workplace and in life as a whole.’

Dharma is not the same for all. It differs based on one’s age
and stage in life. The ancient Indian scriptures highlight a large variety of
differences in the nuances of Dharma based on Desha-Kala-Paristhiti
(place, time and circumstance). These various types of Dharma are :


? Vyakti Dharma — Related to the individual



? Grihastha Dharma — Related to the family life



? Samajika Dharma — Related to the society



? Rajya Dharma — Related to the nation



? Ashrama Dharma — Related to the stage in life viz. student,
householder or renunciant



? Varna Dharma — Related to one’s profession



? Kula Dharma — Related to one’s lineage



? Mata Dharma — Related to one’s religion



? Aapat Dharma — To be followed in times of danger/crisis



? Manava Dharma — One’s duty as a true human being


Hawley in the same seminal work makes his observations in
this context. He states, “Dharma is personal. It is not a one-size-fits-all
set of ethical standards. It’s an inner formula for only the individual. We each
have our own law, or Dharma, peculiar to ourselves. It’s as much a part of us as
our body is, probably more. As with any law, we have to comply with it or suffer
the consequences
.”

Again, one’s Dharma is determined by one’s stature and status
in one’s organisation and in society and one is expected to act in accordance
with that for efficient functioning of the society as a whole. In this regard
Hawley states that one’s present status and level of achievement, or role in
life, also affect one’s Dharma. An individual’s Dharma differs according to
where he or she is in life. The Dharma of the CFO, for example, is different
from the Dharma of the accountant. It’s not that the accountant is inferior and
the CFO superior. It’s just that they are in different places in life at this
moment. This will change with time. For now, the differing responsibilities and
leverage that each brings to the table of life earn each of them a distinct
Dharma.

Whatever may be one’s stature or status, position or
situation in life, true perfection is excellence in action. The Bhagavad Gita,
one of the most revered spiritual texts of India also highlights this. It states
— ‘Yogaha Karmasu Koushalam’, which means ‘True Yoga is Perfection in
Action’.

No matter what one’s duty in life, one must do it and do it well. Whether one is a minister or a clerk, no matter what one’s particular role, one must carry it out to the absolute limit of one’s capacity for excellence.

Individual Dharma and Organisation Dharma:

This Individual Dharma can be extended to the organisation as a whole and be termed as Organisational Dharma. This is because an organisation is nothing but a collection of individuals working together towards achieving certain common goals and objectives. Each of these are bound by certain rules and regulations based on the roles and responsibilities allocated to them and they have to achieve the commonly chalked out goals which are in the larger interest of the organisation keeping these in mind. In this light the organisation can collectively be said to have a Dharma.

The collective traits/virtues of an organisation, which are its unique features and characteristics are in recent times represented as the organisation’s vision, mission and core values statements. They are the essential fabric of the organisation and form the core of its culture. Many organisations have a credo or an organisation charter which they adhere to and follow at all times and under all circumstances. One such example is of the Johnson & Johnson credo which the company follows and sticks to even in times of the famous Tylenol crisis.

Management Dharma:

Just as the organisation has its own Dharma, so do the managers working within it have theirs. Their Dharma as individuals differs from their Dharma as managers working in the organisation. As managers, they are the representatives of the collective value system of the organisation and they are trustees of the organisational wealth. Hence, they too have a Dharma.

Hawley expresses a similar opinion. He highlights the fact, “There is a particular Dharma for managers because they are in the responsibility seat. Their actions impact other humans and affect the economic and physical well-being of the organisation and, beyond that, the well-being of the environment and even the planet. With that power comes a greater measure of accountability. Management Dharma, like individual Dharma, matches one’s life station. Managers can’t expect to take the bigger jobs and not take on a broader Dharma. The manager’s Dharma is more demanding, more obligated to rightness, more careful (i.e., more full of care).”

The recent concept of Servant-Leadership coined and defined by Robert Greenleaf highlights the same fundamental. It emphasises the role of a leader as a steward of the organisations’ resources (human, financial and others). It encourages leaders to serve others while staying focussed on achieving results in line with the organisation’s values and integrity.

A Dharmic Organisation and Trikaranashuddhi:

An organisation which can be called Dharmic or a truly ethical organisation or the one pursuing business ethics in its day-to-day practice is the one which tries to ensure to the extent possible, the welfare of all its stakeholders. The true purpose of an organisation as highlighted by a number of studies is to Pareto optimise the welfare of the organisational stakeholders, as they are the ones, who in reality contribute towards the long-term growth and sustenance of the organisation.

‘To ensure the welfare of all concerned’ has been the endeavour and a part of the Indian culture and tradition right from the very beginning. The Indian scriptures have always hailed the ideal of Sarvajana Hitaya, Sarvajana Sukhaya (for the benefit and welfare of all). The excerpt from the Kaivalya Upanishad given below gives an insight into the all-encompassing approach of the Indian culture which has enabled the Indian civilisation (the longest and the only surviving ancient civilisation) to survive the last 5000 years and more.

Swasti Prajabhya Paripalayantaam,
Nyayena Margena Mahim Mahisham
Gou Brahmanebhya Shubhamastu Nityam,
Loka Samasta Sukhino Bhavantu

[May all the Subjects and their Rulers be prosperous; May the Rulers rule on the Righteous Path; May the cows (resources) and the Brahmins (individuals desirous of right living) be safe always; May all the beings in all the worlds be happy.]

The great leaders who got freedom to India and laid down their lives for such a glorious cause and the founding fathers of the Indian Constitution, believed in such noble approach to existence. The following scriptural injunction has been engraved on the entrance wall of the Indian Parliament:

Ayam Nijah Parovaiti Ganana Laghu Chetasam,

Udara Charitaanaam Tu Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam.

(It is only petty-minded individuals who fail to rise above selfishness and keep counting that this is mine and that is yours; on the other hand the large-hearted ones treat the entire humanity as members of their own family.)

In the light of the above it can be said that the complete accord in the corporation’s thought, word and deed — ‘Trikaranashuddhi1’ i.e., its intention of ensuring stakeholders’ welfare, framing policies commensurate with the aforementioned and communicate the same across the organisation, and ultimately undertake activities for realising this intention, is the righteous conduct of the organisation — the Dharma of the company. The Vedic scriptures declare: ‘Manasyekam, Vachasyekam, Karmanyekam Mahatmanaam’ which means, ‘A great individual is the one whose thought, word and deed are in complete unity.’ The same can be extended to a great corporate entity. An organisation whose intentions, communication and actions are in complete unison can truly be called a Dharmic Organisation. It is such scriptural injunctions which inspire and prompt one and all to set high standards of righteous conduct and put into practice these exaltations in day-to-day lives, thereby ensuring the welfare of all concerned — whether at home or at work.

To sum it up, I quote Bhagavan Sri Sathya Sai Baba, Revered Chancellor, Sri Sathya Sai University, Prashanti Nilayam, Andhra Pradesh, “Business should not be swayed by excess profits and wealth maximisation for a few, but should realise the significance of social responsiveness. Therefore, corporate philosophy should be guided by Dharma (Righteousness). A business organisation is to be treated as a place of worship, wherein the entire workforce, by means of sincere work, offers worship to God.” (Source: Man Management: A Values-Based Management Perspective — Based on the Discourses of Bhagavan Sri Sathya Sai Baba)

References:

    Hawley, Jack (1993) Reawakening The Spirit In Work — The Power Of Dharmic Management, San Francisco?: Berett Koehler Publishers.

    Shashank Shah and A. Sudhir Bhaskar (2009) Corporate Stakeholders Management?: Why, What and How — A Dharmic Approach, Unpublished Book, School of Busi-ness Management, Sri Sathya Sai University, Prashanti Nilayam, Andhra Pradesh.

    Sri Sathya Sai Baba (2009) Man Management?: A Values-Based Management Perspective — Based on the Discourses of Bhagavan Sri Sathya Sai Baba, Sri Sathya Sai Students and Staff Welfare Society (Publications Division), Prashanti Nilayam, Andhra Pradesh.

Provident Fund contribution for International Workers

The Government of India has recently made fundamental changes in the Employees Provident Fund Scheme, 1952 and the Employees Pension Scheme, 1995 (collectively referred to as Indian Provident Fund schemes) which will impact the expatriates and the employers with whom they work in India.

Background :

    Before we discuss the details, it is important to understand the context in which these changes have been introduced. Indian employees are often deputed by their employers to different countries. These international assignments could be for a few months to a few years. The Indian assignees and their employers are generally required to contribute to the Social Security schemes of the host country. These contributions only add to the cost of the assignment without any corresponding benefit, as neither the employee nor the employer is generally able to withdraw the contributions on completion of assignment. Further, the employee is also generally not entitled to any benefits under the scheme on return to India due to the period for which contributions were made to the overseas schemes, not meeting the minimum required as per the social security law of the host country. Correspondingly, the expatriates working in India are generally not required to contribute to the Indian Employee Provident Fund and the Pension Scheme as their salaries exceed the threshold limit of INR 6,500 (USD 145) per month.

    These changes impact employers who have expatriates working for them in India, except for expatriates from the countries with which India has signed a Social Security Agreement (‘SSA’) and hence, these changes are likely to put pressure on other countries to sign SSAs with India.

    On the other hand, Indian companies and their employees working in countries with which SSAs have been signed are likely to benefit, as employees’ and employer’s contributions would be required to be made only under the Indian Provident Fund scheme and not under the host country schemes. This will reduce assignment cost for the Indian entities and enable them to be more cost effective in the competitive global environment.

Recent amendments in Indian Provident Fund Schemes :

International Workers (covers expatriates) :

    A new concept of ‘International Workers’ (‘IWs’) has been introduced which includes expatriates (foreign citizens) working for an employer in India and Indian employees working overseas.

    As per the Notification dated 1 October 2008 ‘International Worker’ means :

    “(a) an Indian employee having worked or going to work in a foreign country with which India has entered into social security agreement and being eligible to avail benefits under a social security programme of that country, by virtue of the eligibility gained or going to gain, under the said agreement;

    (b) an employee other than an Indian employee, holding other than an Indian passport, working for an establishment in India to which the Act applies;”

    The IWs are required to join the scheme from 1st November 2008. Relief has been provided in case of an ‘Excluded Employee’ which primarily refers to an IW coming from a country with which India has entered into an SSA.

    In this article, we have discussed the implications only with respect to the second category of IWs i.e. foreign nationals working in India.

    As per the Notification dated 1st October 2008 ‘Excluded Employee’ means

    “an International Worker, who is contributing to a social security programme of his/her country of origin, either as a citizen or resident, with whom India has entered into social security agreement on reciprocity basis and enjoying the status of detached worker for the period and terms, as specified in such an agreement.”

Amount of contribution :

    The IWs (other than excluded employees) are required to contribute 12% of their salary to the Indian Provident Fund scheme. Further, the employers are also required to match an equal amount i.e. 12% of salary as their contribution to the scheme.

Compliance requirements :

    Every employer is required to file a return in the specified form, giving details of the IWs including their nationality, basic wage, etc. within 15 days of the commencement of the scheme (i.e. 15th October 2008). The employers are also required to file a ‘NIL’ return in case they do not have any IW working with them.

    Employers are also required to file monthly returns (within 15 days of the close of the month) in the specified forms furnishing necessary details.

Social Security Agreements :

    India had earlier signed an SSA with Belgium and France and has recently signed Social Insurance Agreement with Germany. It is understood that India is in the process of signing SSAs with the US, Australia, Netherlands, Czech Republic, Spain, Portugal, Switzerland, Norway, Sweden and other countries.

    Key features of the SSAs :

  •      Employees on an assignment upto specified periods (Belgium and France — 60 months; Germany — 48 months with an extension of 12 months) are exempt from making social security contributions in the host country provided they continue to make social security contributions in their home countries.

  •      Employees on assignment for more than the specified period and making social security contributions under the host country laws will be entitled to export the benefits under the SSA to the home country on completion of their assignment or on retirement. However this is not provided under the Social Insurance Agreement with Germany.

    The Additional Central Provident Fund Commissioner (‘ACPFC’) has also issued certain clarifications with respect to these amendments and the Ministry of Labour has posted responses to Frequently Asked Questions (‘FAQs’) on their website clarifying the position relating to the IWs.

Key clarifications as per the ACPFC letter :

Payment of benefits: The payment of benefits in case of an IW holding other than an Indian passport and coming  from a country with which India has signed an SSA, shall be as per the provisions of the SSA.

Contributions required to be made in India:
All expatriates, except expatriates from Belgium (as the SSA with Belgium is effective from 1st September 2009) but including expatriates coming from France and Germany and holding foreign passports are required to contribute to the Indian Provident Fund schemes as the SSAs with these countries are not yet effective.

Withdrawal of Pension benefits under Employee Pension Scheme:
For the IW (holding other than an Indian passport) coming from a country with which India has no SSA, the withdrawal of benefit under Employee Pension Scheme shall be based on the principle of reciprocity.

Other key clarifications as per the FAQ:

  • An Indian employee shall be an employee, holding or entitled to hold an Indian passport and employed by a covered establishment.

  • The Provident Fund rules will apply irrespective of whether the salary is paid in India or outside India.

  • In case of a split payroll, the contribution is required to be made on the total salary earned by the employee.

  • Even where an IW has multiple country responsibilities and spends some part of his time out-side India, his total salary will be considered for Provident Fund contribution.

  • There is no minimum period of stay in India for triggering the Provident Fund compliances. Every eligible IW has to be enrolled from the first date of his employment in India.

  • The purpose of the visit would determine the Provident Fund compliance requirements for an individual. The type of visa may help in determining the purpose of visit to India e.g. a foreign national coming to India on an employment visa would be considered as working in India.

  • The cap on the salary for the purpose of Employee Pension Scheme and Employees Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme remains unchanged at Rs.6,500 as against no cap on salary for Provident Fund purposes.


Key issues:

Any change in legislation would generally lead to open issues which require further clarification. This notification leaves many questions in the minds of the employers and expatriates coming and working in India. Some of the issues which need to be addressed are:

Applicability to the establishment:

An issue that comes to mind  is whether PF would be payable by a foreign employee of an employer, who is otherwise not liable to PF for any reason, e.g. if the number of employees are less than 20. In this regard, it is pertinent to note that applicability of the PF Act is qua the ‘establishment’, i.e. only if the establishment is covered under the scope, will the Act apply. Typically, factories and establishments employing 20 or more employees are covered (as per recent press reports, this threshold may be reduced to 10 employees to enhance the coverage of the PF Act). As such, PF would not be payable by a foreign employee of an employer, who is otherwise not liable to PF under the Act on account of any reason, e.g. if the number of employees is less than 20.

Employer-employee relationship:

In most cases, expatriates are seconded to the Indian entity while continuing as legal employees of the home country employer entity. For the PF Act to apply, an Employee of an Establishment should be deputed to work ‘in’ or ‘in connection with’ the work of such an Indian ‘Establishment’ to which the provisions of this Act applies. In such cases, it may need to be further examined whether an employer-employee relationship exists between the expatriate and the Indian establishment. There is no formula for determining the existence of a master-servant relationship and courts in India have laid down various tests such as accountability, right to recruit, right to decide leave, right to terminate, to ascertain whether an employer-employee relationship exists.

‘Salary’ to  be considered:

Further, the quantum and manner of computing salary on which the contributions are to be based is also contentious. For example, in cross-border movement of employees, there could be different employment arrangements and services could be rendered in different jurisdictions, salary could be paid in different countries and also at times, by more than one employer. A question arises in all such arrangements on whether salary paid by the overseas entity would need to be taken into account for this purpose. If the IW is employed by the Indian establishment to which the PF Act applies and is rendering services in connection with the establishment in India, then a point that may need further examination is whether only the Indian salary which is covered by the Indian employment contract is to be considered. While, the FAQ has confirmed that total salary will have to be considered for PF, the legal position would need to be examined.

Contrary positions for income-tax purposes:

In certain cases, the Double Taxation Avoidance Agreements between countries provide exemptions to employees from double taxation of salary income in both countries, if the prescribed conditions are satisfied. Typically, these would be – duration of stay in India should be less than 183 days during the relevant period and the remuneration is paid by, or on behalf of, an employer who is not a resident of India i.e. implying that the overseas entity should be the employer.

Accordingly, in cases where the above-mentioned short-stay exemption is claimed, the overseas entity is considered as the employer for Income-tax purposes. As per the FAQ, PF would be payable by the Indian entity in its capacity of ’employer’ irrespective of the duration of stay in India. This would imply that the Indian entity is the employer for PF purposes. As a result, different positions would be adopted for the same individual under the Income-tax law and Provident Fund regulations and this may give rise to disputes and litigation.

Withdrawal of pension:

There are also issues around withdrawal of the balance at the end of the assignment. When an IW completes his assignment in India and leaves India to continue his employment abroad, he would be permitted to withdraw the accumulated PF balance.

However, the employer’s contribution to the Pension Scheme (i.e. 8.33 per cent of INR 6,500) can be withdrawn only subject to satisfying certain prescribed conditions such as:

  • Eligible service of 10 years or more and retirement on attaining the age of 58 years;

  • Early pension if rendered eligible service of 10 years or more and retirement or otherwise cessation of employment before attaining 58 years.

The withdrawal also depends on the principles of reciprocity with the home country of the IW where there is no SSA in place. Therefore, if the IW comes from the US, as an example, it would depend on whether the US would allow to freely repatriate such balance for Indians on completion of the assignments in the US.

Therefore practically, the withdrawal of the pension amount appears to be difficult.

Recovery by employer:

Another important point that arises is that, most expatriates are generally equalised on income tax and social security benefits, i.e. they would be guaranteed atleast the same net salary (after tax and social security deductions) while on assignment in India as they earned in their home country, prior to coming on assignment. On completion of the India assignment, the IW would receive the refund which consists of the employer and employee PF contributions and the interest thereon. As part of the equalization policy, the PF contributions may have been borne by the employer and hence, the expatriate may now be obligated to repay the employer this amount.

The PF Act protects the amount standing to the credit of any member in the Fund and states that this amount shall not be capable of being assigned or charged and shall not be liable to attachment under any decree or order of any Court for any debt or liability. Further, neither the official assignee appointed under the Presidency Towns Insolvency Act 1909 nor any receiver appointed under the Provincial Insolvency Act 1920 shall be entitled to or have any claim on any such amount even though the employer may have funded the employee’s PF contribution (in addition to the employer’s contributions). This poses problems of recoverability for the employer especially since the amount involved may .be significant considering it is nearly 24% of salary.

Tax  impact:

As most assignments are typically for less than five years, the withdrawal of the PF amount before completion of the five years may give rise to additional income tax implications.

In conclusion:

The laws in this regard are still evolving and there are a lot of open questions which need to be answered. Realistically, the SSAs may take a long time before they are effective and until then the cost of the assignment of the expatriates in India, along with the compliance requirements is likely to increase.

Transactions with Associated Enterprises — A new category of service tax payers ?

Article

Service tax law is amended from 10-5-2008 for casting
liability on transactions of taxable services with associated enterprises to pay
service tax even before the actual payment is received by the service provider.
For this purpose, Explanation (c) to S. 67 of Chapter V of the Finance Act, 1994
is amended and an Explanation is inserted in Rule 6(1) of the Service Tax Rules,
1994.

An attempt is made in this article to highlight the effect of
these provisions and the onerous responsibility cast on the taxpayers to
identify the transactions of taxable services between the Associated
Enterprises, a new category of taxpayers being introduced under service tax.

Service tax was hitherto payable on receipt of the value of
taxable service by the service provider. Even in case when the liability to pay
service tax is cast on the recipient of service, the amount actually paid by
such recipient triggered the liability. This means that so far, the liability of
service tax crystallised on what is known as ‘cash basis’ as distinguished from
‘accrual basis’ in accounting parlance.

Now, from the day the Finance Bill received assent of the
President i.e., from 10-5-2008, the liability is cast on the associated
enterprises to pay service tax even if the actual payment of value of taxable
service is not received/paid, as the case may be. ‘Associate Enterprises’ are
defined to take meaning from the Income-tax Act, 1961. This is a major deviation
in case of transactions between specified persons called as ‘Associated
Enterprises’ (AE) under the law. This amendment is introduced as anti-avoidance
measure, as the Government thought that tax avoidance takes place in case of
transactions of taxable services between the associated enterprises as service
tax is not paid, though it is recognised in the books of account as revenue or
expenditure by the concerned parties. This is clear from the clarification
issued by the Tax Research Unit (TRU) of the Government of India, dated 29th
February 2008. For better understanding the relevant portion of the said TRU
Letter is reproduced as follows :

“6. Transactions between Associated Enterprises


6.1 Service tax is levied at the rate of 12% of the
value of taxable services (S. 66). S. 67 pertaining to valuation of taxable
service for charging service tax states that value shall be the gross amount
charged for the service provided or to be provided and includes book
adjustment. As per Rule 6 of the Service Tax Rules, 1994, service tax is
required to be paid only after receipt of the payment.


6.2 It has been brought to the notice that the
provision requiring payment of service tax after receipt of payment are used
for tax avoidance especially when the transaction is between associated
enterprises.
There have been instances wherein service tax has not been
paid on the ground of non-receipt of payment even though the transaction has
been recognised as revenue/expenditure in the statement of profit and loss
account for the purpose of determining corporate tax liability.


6.3 As an anti-avoidance measure, it is proposed to
clarify that
service tax is leviable on taxable services provided by the
person liable to pay service tax even if the amount is not actually received,
but the amount is credited or debited in the books of account of the service
provider. In other words, service tax is required to be paid after receipt
of payment or crediting/debiting of the amount in the books of accounts,
whichever is earlier.
However, this provision is restricted to transaction
between associated enterprises. This provision shall also apply to service tax
payable under reverse charge method (S. 66A) as taxable services received from
associated enterprises. For this purpose, S. 67 and Rule 6(1) are being
amended.
(emphasis supplied)

In this context, let us examine the actual amendments :

Explanation to S. 67 (as amended) :

Gross amount charged’ includes payment by cheque, credit
card, deduction from account and any form of payment by issue of credit notes or
debit notes and book adjustment and any amount credited or debited, as
the case may be, to any account, whether called suspense account
or by any other name in the books of account of person liable to pay
service tax, where the transaction of service is with any associated
enterprise.”
(emphasis supplied).

Prior to the amendment, the explanation read as follows :

‘Gross amount charged’ includes payment by cheque, credit
card, deduction from account and any form of payment by issue of credit notes or
debit notes and book adjustment.”

Further, an Explanation to Rule 6(1) is introduced to bring
in line with S. 67, as a machinery provision :


ExplanationFor the removal of doubts, it is hereby
declared that where the transaction of taxable service is with any associated
enterprise, any payment received towards the value of taxable service, in such
case shall include any amount credited or debited, as the case may be, to any
account, whether called ‘Suspense Account’ or by any other name, in the books of
account of a person liable to pay service tax.”


It can be seen from above that the definition of ,gross amount charged’ u/ s.67 is expanded in case of transactions with AE to include debit or credit to any account including a suspense account, in the books of the person liable to pay service tax. Under the erstwhile provisions as amended by the Finance Act, 2006, the liability to service tax was attracted upon issue of debit note or credit note in the context of payment of consideration in relation to provision of taxable service. For example, if there already existed a deposit in the books of A in favour of B, and A renders a taxable service to B, the liability of payment of service tax would arise when a book entry of adjustment of deposit is passed to-wards the value of taxable services provided. However, if A and B are associated enterprises, then the liability to service tax arises the moment a bill is issued, irrespective of the fact that whether there existed any deposit or not. This is because issue of a bill would result into credit to an income head and the liability would trigger on accrual basis of accounting. Thus the concept of book adjustment in relation to transactions between AE is of much larger import than in case of unrelated parties. Thus an onerous responsibility is cast on an enterprise providing service to its associated enterprise. Further illustrations of such onerous responsibility of this amendment are given elsewhere in this article.

Let us now examine whether such amendment was absolutely necessary to curb the incidence of avoidance of tax as made out by the Government. Firstly, the Service Tax Law is designed to cast liability on receipt of payment. This only means that the liability not necessarily arises even as transaction is recognised as revenue/expenditure in the books of account. Secondly, the purported avoidance is already taken care of by introduction of Explanation to S. 67 and valuation rules by the Finance Act, 2006. As can be seen from the Explanation before the amendment, the gross amount charged included payment by way of issue of credit/debit note or accounting adjustments. Further, even supposing that someone tries to avoid the tax (not actually avoid but delay) by raising debit note to a sister concern’s account instead of the recipient of service (assuming that all three are AE), it will not only raise questions from audit and other compliances, but also service tax and penalty from 100% to 200% can be levied u/ s.78 for fraud, collusion, etc. with intent to evade payment of service tax and the limitation period extends to five years. Thus, enough provisions exist under service tax to take care of the situations envisaged by the Government to deal with tax avoidance.

The effect of the amendment is that in case of a transaction of taxable service with AE, all debits or credits or adjustments in the account shall be regarded as the payment received towards the value of taxable service. This means that the liability to service tax triggers immediately upon issue of a bill for taxable service in case of AE. The payability of service tax on such transaction then falls due on the immediately following due date. It can thus be said that the amendment results only into preponement of liability. The amendments can therefore be said to be not addressing the issue of tax avoidance, but effectively preponing the liability in case of transactions between the AE.

Issue  of identification of AE :

The taxpayer community in this country has heard of the concept of associated enterprises under Income Tax from 1-4-2002 when the special provisions relating to avoidance of tax were introduced to levy tax on international transactions on Arm’s-Length Price (ALP), in line with international practice by the Finance Act, 2001. Under Income Tax, the umbrella of coverage is confined to international transactions involving one or more non-resident parties amongst the parties to the transaction. However, in case of service tax, even the domestic transactions are covered and also there is no need of any non-resident person to be a party to the transaction of taxable service.

AE is very widely defined under S. 92A of the Income-tax Act. and takes into its ambit an enterprise which participates through one or more persons, directly or indirectly, or through one or more intermediatary in the management or control or capital of other enterprise and also one or a set of persons who commonly participate directly or indirectly or through one or more intermediaries in the management or control or capital of the other AE. In the following cases, one enterprise is deemed as Associated Enterprise in relation to other enterprise as it appears from S. 92A(2)

  • One enterprise holds directly or indirectly 26% or more percentage of voting power in other enterprise.

  •  One person or enterprise holds directly or indirectly 26% or more percentage of voting power in each of such enterprises.

  • When loan from one enterprise to the other enterprise constitutes not less than 50% of the book value of such other enterprise.

  • One enterprise  guarantees  not less than  10% of the total borrowings  of the other  enterprise.

  • When one enterprise or one or a set of persons appoints more than half of the board of the directors or the members of the governing board or one or more executive directors or executive members of the governing board of the other enterprise.

  • When manufacturing or processing or any business carried out by one enterprise is wholly dependent on the other enterprise on use of know-how, patent, copyright, trademark, licence, fran-chise or any other business or commercial right of similar nature or any data, documentation, drawing or specification relating to any patent, invention, model, design, secret formula or process belonging to the other enterprise or within the exclusive right of the other enterprise.

  •  90%  or  more  of  the  raw  material   or  the consumables  required  for the manufacture   or processing of the goods or articles carried out by one enterprise are supplied by the other enterprise or by such persons as specified by the other enterprise and the prices and the other conditions relating to the supply are influenced by such other enterprise.

  • Where the goods or articles manufactured or processed by one enterprise are sold exclusively to the other enterprise or to such persons as specified by the other enterprise and the prices and conditions related thereto are influenced by such other enterprise.

  • Where one enterprise is controlled by an indi-vidual and the other enterprise is also controlled by such individual or his relative or jointly by such individual and his relative.

  • Where one enterprise is controlled by HUF, the other enterprise is controlled by a member of such HUF or a relative of the member of such HUF or by such a member and his relative.

  • Where one enterprise is a firm, AOP or BOI, not less than 10% of interest in such firm or AOP or BOI is held by the other enterprise.

  • Where there exists between the two enterprises, any relationship of mutual interest as may be prescribed 1.

The word, ‘enterprise’ is defined under the Income-tax Act as a person including a permanent establishment of such person.

The word, ‘permanent establishment’ is defined u/s. 92F which includes a fixed place of business through which business of enterprise is wholly or partly carried out.

The term ‘relative’ is not defined under Service Tax or under Central Excise Act. However, the Income-tax Act defines ‘relative’ as ‘in relation to an individual, means the husband, wife, brother, or sister or any lineal ascendant or descendant of the individual’ [5. 2(41)].

From the above definition, it is clear that the coverage under these provisions is wide. However, under income-tax, only international transactions are relevant to capture the transactions between the AE and it is not difficult to establish such a relationship in the context of international transactions. Applying this principle in the context of domestic transactions, is a Herculean task. Had such transactions been confined to import or export of services, it would have been simpler to take recourse to transfer pricing regulations to determine who should be regarded as an AE in relation to the transactions of taxable service.

It therefore follows that the first issue would be to identify any enterprise being regarded as AE in relation to transaction of taxable service. In the context of domestic coverage, it may lead to absurd results, for example, a loan advanced by a bank, the amount of which exceeds 51% of the book value of the total assets of the borrower, such bank becomes AE of the borrower. We are all aware that normally the borrower’s margin is 30% while the bank borrowing can be to the extent of 70%. It is equally difficult to come out of the criteria under many other clauses and one is unknowingly and unintentionally roped in as AE of the other enterprise.

The provisions pertaining to AE are applicable to all kinds of entities i.e., not only companies but also to non-companies like individuals, HUF, partnership firms, AOP, Ba I, etc. In case of a partnership firm, BOI or AOP, in most of cases an individual or more than one individual holds more than 10% each. In case of an HUF, one or more individuals having control is very common. In such cases, all such entities will be covered as AE in relation to the other and will require payment of service tax on ‘accrual’ basis.

Let us take a case of a private or a public company, in which case also it is equally difficult to identify associated enterprise. Accounting Standard AS-IS issued by K’Al, requires every company to disclose their transactions with related parties. However, here we find that the persons covered under AS-IS are much more restricted than S. 92A of the Income-tax Act. This can be seen from the ‘relationship’ covered under AS-IS, a relevant portion of the Standard is given below:

“2. This Statement applies only to related-party relationships described in paragraph 3.

3.    This Statement deals only with related-party relationships described in (a) to (e) below:

(a)    enterprises that directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, control, or are controlled by, or are under common control with, the reporting enterprise (this includes holding companies, subsidiaries and fellow subsidiaries);

(b)    associates and joint ventures of the reporting enterprise and the investing party or venturer in respect of which the reporting enterprise is an associate or a joint venture;

(c)    individuals owning, directly or indirectly, an interest in the voting power of the reporting enterprise that gives them control or significant influence over the enterprise, and relatives of any such individual;

(d)    key management personnel and relatives of such personnel; and

(e)    enterprises over which any person described in (c) or (d) is able to exercise significant influence. This includes enterprises owned by directors or major shareholders of the reporting enterprise and enterprises that have a member of key management in common with the reporting enterprise.

4.    In the context of this Statement, the following are deemed not to be related parties:

(a)    two companies simply because they have a director in common, not with standing paragraph 3(d) or (e) above (unless the director is able to affect the policies of both companies in their mutual dealings);

(b)    a single customer, supplier, franchiser, distributor, or general agent with whom an enterprise transacts a significant volume of business merely by virtue of the resulting economic dependence; and

(c)    the parties listed below, in the course of their normal dealings with an enterprise by virtue only of those dealings (although they may circumscribe the freedom of action of the enterprise or participate in its decision-making process) :

(i)    providers  of finance;

(ii)    trade  unions;

(iii)    public  utilities;

(iv)    government departments and government agencies including government-sponsored bodies.”

The Accounting Standard defines control as a related party controlling more than half of the voting power in the other party. Significant influence is defined as one individual owning, directly or indirectly, 20% or more in voting power of any enterprise. It thus appears that the coverage is much more limited under the Accounting Standard than what is envisaged u/s.92A of the Income-tax Act. Therefore, the companies will have to devise a separate set of modalities to identify an AE for the purpose of payment of service tax.

Similarly, since the liability of service tax arises once the receipt of provision of taxable service crosses Rs.I0 lakhs, even small and medium enterprises shall have to formulate modalities to identify the AE in relation to the transactions of taxable services with them. Further, persons other than provider of output service, who are liable to pay service tax, like GTA service, also will have to formulate suitable modalities for identification of the AB.

As per one estimate, about 50% of the service tax payers have transactions of taxable service with AE. Such assessee may also have transaction of taxable services with other than AE. These assessees will have to make two kinds of computation in the same month or quarter, as the case may be, (i) for service tax payments in case of transactions of taxable service with AE, and (ii) in case of transactions of taxable service with other than AE.

The new provisions for carving out associated enterprises for such differential and harsh treatment have thrown up certain interesting questions for which no clarification is offered and no solution is in sight. Such issues are listed hereinbelow as brain-stormers.

(a) Export  of Service:

For the purpose of exemption under the Export of Service Rules, one of the conditions required to be satisfied is of receipt of the value of taxable service in convertible foreign exchange. In case of AE, the liability arises at the time of raising the bill and debit or credit to any account. In a case when the payment is received subsequently, though in convertible foreign exchange, it will be difficult for the person providing otherwise exempt service as export of service, to satisfy this condition. Urgent clarification for mitigating this genuine hardship is required.

(b) Cenvat    credit :
(i) In case of international  transactions:

A person liable to pay service tax on taxable service provided from outside India and received in India (import of service) from overseas AE, is required to pay service tax once he passes debit or credit or adjustment entry in the books of account. Such an assessee may not be required to pay for the value of import of service to his AE immediately upon provision of service (based on the terms of contract). However, mere payment of service tax without payment of value of service, may not entitle him claim of credit of input service tax paid, even though it is used for providing taxable output service or in manufacture of excisable goods, as the condition laid down in Rule 4(7) of the Cenvat Credit Rules 2004 is not satisfied.

(ii) In case of domestic  transactions:

ABC is having transaction of taxable  service with XYZ (AE) in July 2008 and pays service tax on that transaction. The amount of invoice issued to XYZ was adjusted in the running account of XYZ, as payment was not required to be made in view of credit balance lying in the account of XYZ.

In such circumstance, it will be difficult to claim Cenvat credit for XYZ in view of the fact that payment of taxable service is not made. For this purpose, ABC and XYZ may have to take extra precautions as follows:

(a)    ABC to inform XYZ about book adjustment in their account

(b)    XYZ to show corresponding adjustment in their books

(c)    XYZ will have to convince the CEO about this constructive payment.

May be for this purpose, it has to obtain ‘receipt’ from ABC or even a certificate of his Chartered Accountant.

(c) Memorandum entries for monthly closing of accounts:

In this fast-moving era, not only Indian subsidiaries of foreign companies but also internally related Indian companies are required to report their monthly results of profit or loss. In case of listed companies, quarterly results are required to be disclosed. In the process, such entities have to pass book entries of income/expenditure, whether called memorandum entries, suspense entries, etc. on the last day of the month. Such entries are reversed on the first day of the immediately following month. Whether such entries would also trigger the liability to pay service tax is a moot question.

(d) Invoices cancelled/amended on re-appraisal before payment:

An assessee provides taxable service to AE and issues an invoice for the value of taxable service. However, subsequently the value is re-appraised or negotiated and finally a lower amount bill is issued by the service provider. The whole exercise is over before making the payment of consideration. However, the payment of service tax is already made on the basis of invoice issued. Whether there is any recourse to adjust such excess payment of service tax in case of reduction in bill amount. It is a moot question, whether Rule 6(3) of the Service Tax Rules can be of any help in this regards.

(e) Amendment to the amount charged on the basis of change in Arm’s-Length Price (ALP) under the Transfer Pricing Regulations:

It may so happen that the amount charged for service provided is not accepted by the Transfer Pricing Officer for a similar service rendered in earlier year. On this account, it becomes necessary to change the current year’s pricing, and the invoice amount is altered (e.g., cost plus 15% model from cost plus 10% adopted earlier). Whether this kind of change will trigger service tax liability on additional amount charged and when service tax becomes payable on such additional amount.

Conclusion:

From the detailed analysis of the new provisions pertaining to the transactions between associated enterprises, it can be seen that they will add more complexities to the already controversial provisions of service tax. It will result in undue hardship for the taxpayers, particularly small companies, individuals, HUF, partnership firms, BOIs, AOPs, etc. On the other hand, the Department is ill-equipped to track such transactions, which is so difficult for even an honest taxpayer to do, so much so that a taxpayer may not mind paying service tax under the new provisions (on accrual basis), but may find it difficult to identify AEs in relation to the transactions of taxable service. So far, under the service tax, there were two types of assessees, one the provider of service and two, the recipient of service. Now, these provisions have introduced one more kind of person liable to pay tax, on what we call accrual basis.

Above all, the intended benefits appear to be far lesser as compared to the exercise the assessee and the Department have to undertake.

It appears that without realising the implications, the Government has in its overenthusiasm, imported the provisions from the Income-tax Act, which are of widest import and essentially framed for different purpose altogether. This only adds to the woes of the taxpayers under already overcomplicated service tax. Had the provisions been applied for international transactions, it would not have raised much dust. But by applying the same analogy to the domestic transactions, the Government has gone much overboard.

TDS on exempt incomes (especially agricultural income)

It is obvious that the TDS provisions are going to be expanded day by day even in the direct Tax Code era. In the process to recover more and more tax through this mode of recovery, in many cases tax is also deducted from incomes which are expressly exempt. Many cases are wandering the corridors of various courts of law on this ground. This is also reflected in the decided cases. It seems that the issue gets complicated with the increase of TDS coverage. It will be interesting to go through the law and the judge-made law on the issue.

Questions to be answered :

    To understand the intricacies of the issue we need to address the following questions :

    (1) To what incomes/payments TDS provisions especially S. 194I is applicable ? The question assumes importance because the words in the Explanation to S. 194I are :

    (i) ‘rent’ means any payment, by whatever name called, under any lease, sub-lease, tenancy or any other agreement or arrangement for the use of (either separately or together) any :

    (a) land; or . . . .

    This has created doubts about whether the land here includes agricultural land rent.

    (2) What is the nature of the Rent income received from Agricultural land ?

    (3) Whether the exempt income is covered under the TDS provisions ?

    (4) Whether tax treatment in the hands of the payer is relevant ?

Analysis of the questions :

1. What is agricultural land ?

    1.1 Agricultural land is not defined under the Income-tax Act. Hence we will have to rely on allied laws and interpretations by courts.

    1.2 Under The Bombay Tenancy and Agricultural Lands Act 1960, (BTAL) in clause (a) of S. 2(8) ‘land’ means :

        “(a) land which is used for agricultural purposes or which is so used but is left fallow, and includes the sites of farm buildings appurtenant to such land; . . . . .”

    1.3 Under the Income-tax Act, 1961, various Courts have interpreted agricultural land.

    The Delhi High Court said :

    “In order to come within the category of agricultural land, it must not only be capable of being used for agricultural purposes but should have been actually used as such at some point of time. A temporary non-user for agricultural purposes will not affect the character of the land but a permanent abandonment of user for agricultural purposes will affect the character of the land as agricultural land.”

    [Shri Shankar Lal v. CIT, (1974) 94 ITR 433, Delhi High Court.]

    The Kerala High Court states :

    ” ‘Agricultural land’, as we understand it, is land on which a prudent owner will undertake any of the processes of farming in its widest sense. The fact that a particular area is being used for agriculture may indicate that the land is agricultural in character. But a current user is by no means conclusive.”

    [Venugopala Varma Rajah v. CED, (1967) 64 ITR 358 (Ker.)]


    2.0 What is the nature of the rent income received from agricultural land ?

    2.1 The following discussion confirms that Rent received for renting out the agricultural land, and any such income derived from the said land is an agricultural income.

    2.2 Agricultural income is defined under the Income-ax Act, 1961 in clauses (a), (b) and (c) of S. 2(1A).

    Clause (a) of S. 2(1A) reads as :

“any rent or revenue derived from land which is situated in India and is used for agricultural purposes;”

    2.3 It is obvious that the rent derived from agricultural land is an agricultural income as per S. 2(1A) of the Income-tax Act, 1961.

    The Patna High Court has stated :

    “Rent is obviously an agricultural income which the landlord makes by reason of his having a proprietary interest in the land which he lets out to the tenant and the tenant pays it as a part of the consideration for the use and occupation of the land which he enjoys. The source of the income is the landlord’s superior interest in the agricultural land and, consequently, it is an agricultural income.”

    [Srimati Lakshmi Daiji v. CIT, (1944) 12 ITR 309 (PAT)]

    2.4 This is also confirmed by various Courts including the Supreme Court :

    (i) CIT v. Haroocharai Tea Co., (1978) 111 ITR 495 (Gau.)

    (ii) CIT v. Janab Haji Muhammad Sadak Khoyee Sahib, (1935) 3 ITR 1 (Mad.)

    (iii) CIT v. Raja Benoy Kumar Sahas Roy, (1957) 32 ITR 466 (SC)

    3.0 To what payments TDS provisions, especially S. 194I, are applicable ?

    3.1 TDS provisions are contained in Chapter XVII of the Income-tax Act, 1961 and cast a responsibility on the person responsible for payments. The incomes from which TDS is to be deducted and person responsible for paying are defined in S. 204 of the Act, which reads as follows :

“204. For the purposes of the foregoing provisions of this Chapter and S. 285, the expression ‘person responsible for paying’ means :

(i) in the case of payments of income chargeable under the head ‘Salaries’, other than payments by the Central Government or the Government of a State, the employer himself or, if the employer is a company, the company itself, including the principal officer thereof;

(ii) in the case of payments of income chargeable under the head ‘Interest on securities’, other than payments made by or on behalf of the Central Government or the Government of a State, the local authority, corporation or company, including the principal officer thereof;

(iia) in the case of any sum payable to a non-resident Indian, being any sum representing consideration for the transfer by him of any foreign exchange asset, which is not a short-term capital asset, the authorised dealer responsible for remitting such sum to the non-resident Indian or for crediting such sum to his Non-resident (External) Account maintained in accordance with the Foreign Exchange Regulation Act, 1973 (46 of 1973), and any rules made thereunder;

iii) in the case of credit, or as the case may be, payment of any other sum chargeable under the provisions of this Act, the payer himself, or if the payer is a company, the company itself including the principal officer thereof … “

3.2 It is obvious from the section itself that TDS is to be deducted from income chargeable under the Act. The portion in bold letters and underlined clearly shows this without any ambiguity.

3.3 The next question naturally comes is what is chargeable income under the Act.

3.4 Charge of income is stated in S. 4 of the Act and it states that tax shall be charged on the total income of the previous year of every person. Total income is defined in S. 2(45) and S. 5 of the Act. Hence income chargeable has to be decided as per S. 2(45) and S. 5 of the Act.

3.5 S. 2(45) defines ‘Total income’ and reads as under:

“total income means the total amount of income referred to in 5.5, computed in the manner laid down in this Act;”

S. 5 with  the heading reads:

“Scope  of total  income.

5. (1) Subject to the provisions of this Act, the total income of any previous year of a person who is a resident includes all income from whatever source derived which ….. “

Bombay High Court has interpreted the highlighted words .’Subject to’ in S. 5 as follows:

“The expression ‘subject to’ used in the opening portion of both Ss.(I) and Ss.(2) of S. 5 has to be read keeping in mind that S. 5 is intended to explain the scope of total income. Therefore, what the use of the said expression shows is that in considering what is total income u/s.5, one has to exclude such income as is excluded from the scope of total income by reason of any other provision of the IT Act and not that the other provisions of the IT Act override the provisions of S. 5.

[CIT v.  F. Y. Khambaty, (1986) 159 ITR 203 (Bom.)]

3.6 Hence, it is obvious that the TDS provisions are not independent of other provisions of the Act and whether the income is chargeable to tax under the Act or not has to be considered while deducting TDS.

4.0 Whether the exempt incomes, especially the Agricultural Rent income, is covered under the TDS provisions?

4.1 Rent of Agricultural land is an agricultural income as explained in Point Nos. 2.0 to 2.04 supra. Agricultural Income is exempt from income tax and is not to be included even in the total income.

4.2 Chapter In of the Act deals with incomes which do not form part of total income. Relevant S. 10(1) reads with its heading as:

“Incomes  not included in total income.

10. In computing the total income of a previous year of any person, any income falling within any of the following clauses shall not be included

(1) agricultural income;”

4.3 It is obvious that in computing the total in-come under the Act, incomes which are exempt u/ s.10 have to be excluded. Consequently they have to be excluded while applying the TDS provisions also. Hence, TDS is not to be deducted on payment of incomes exempted and excluded from the scope of total income under the Act.

4.4 Agricultural Rent is an agricultural income and clearly excluded from the scope of total income u/s.10(1) of the Act.

4.5 Even the parliament has given powers to tax agricultural income to the States only and not to the Union (Central Government).

“Reading entry 82 of the Union List and entry 46 of State List of the Seventh Schedule of the Constitution, it is clear that the Parliament is not competent to tax agricultural income. The expression ‘agricultural income’ occurring in the said entries has to be understood in the manner and in the sense defined in clause (lA) of S. 2.”

[J. Raghottama Reddy v. ITO, (1987)35 Taxman 298 (AP).]

4.6 It is obvious that Rent of Agricultural land is completely out of the purview of not only TDS provisions but even income-tax.

4.7 In another case before the Andhra Pradesh High Court in Andhra Pradesh Forest Development Corporation Ltd. v. ACIT & Anr., (2005) 272 lTR 245 the question was whether items of sale viz. bamboo, eucalyptus and pepper are forest produce or non-forest produce and that the petitioner is under an obligation to collect tax at the time of effecting sales.

The Court held that in order to attract the provisions of S. 206C it has to be examined whether items sold are forest produce or not – Legislature intends to apply this provision in respect of timber and other produce obtained from forest and not any produce and that if the produce i.e. bamboo, eucalyptus and pepper are forest produce, then only the provisions of S. 206C would be applicable and not otherwise.

4.8 Considering other incomes, various courts have taken a clear view that incomes which are not includible in total income (exempt) are clearly out of the TDS net.

4.9 High Court of Rajasthan had an occasion to test applicability of TDS provisions to interest paid to a non-resident in CIT v. Manager, State Bank of India, 13 DTR (Raj.) 294.

In this case during a survey conducted on the assessee bank, it was found that TDS was not deducted on interest paid to NRIs on deposits in In-dian rupees.

The AO did not accept the contention of the bank and levied penalty and ClT confirmed the same. But the Tribunal set aside the ClT’s order. In appeal to the High Court, the revenue contended that interest paid on TDRISTDR doesn’t fall u/s.10(15)(iv) (fa) of the IT Act, hence deduction was not admissible, and learned Tribunal has committed error in accepting appeals on this ground whereas the assessee contended that as per provisions of S. 10(15)(iv)(fa), interest income was exempt from taxable income. The provisions of S. 10(15)(iv)(fa), as it then stood were:

“(fa) by a scheduled bank to a non-resident or to a person who is not ordinarily resident within the meaning of Ss.(6) of S. 6 on deposits in foreign currency where the acceptance of such deposits by the bank is approved by the RB!.”

Relying on the observations of the Apex Court in the case of Transmission Corporation of A.P. Ltd. & Anr. v. CIT, (1999) 239 ITR 587 (SC) which has held that tax is to be deducted at source only on the sum on which income tax is leviable, and which income could be assessed to tax under the Act, the High Court held that STDR – Interest on TDR/STDR paid to non-resident Indians being exempt u/ s. 10(15)(iv)(fa), there was no question of deduction of tax at source.

4.10 Before the Gauhati High Court in Sing Killing v. ITO & Ors., 255 ITR 444, the question was – when the transactions entered into by the petitioner in respect of the forest lease situated in Sixth Schedule area and income arising therefrom is exempt from payment of income-tax u/s.10(26) whether collection of income-tax at source under the provisions of S. 206C was applicable.

Petitioner, a member of Scheduled Tribe, was granted a lease of a forest area specified in Sixth Schedule area. The ITO also granted a certificate to the petitioner certifying that he is not liable to pay income-tax u/s.10(26).

The Court held that, Entitlement of the petitioner to the benefit of S. 10(26) in respect of transactions arising out of the lease is not in doubt, S. 206C was not therefore applicable. If the income itself is exempted, any deduction/collection, on account of income-tax, at source, would be beyond the powers conferred by the provisions of the Act.

4.11 In a case to decide disallowance u/sAO(a)(ia) in case of legal fees paid in UK in connection with legal proceedings in UK it was held that where the provisions of Article 15 of the DTAA, between India and UK were applicable, payment of fees for legal consultancy services to UK-based firm of solicitors was taxable in UK and was not exigible to tax in India. Therefore, the assessee (tax deductor) was under no obligation to deduct tax at source from the payment so made. IMP Power Ltd. v. ITO Mumbai E Bench, (2007) 107 TTJ 522.

4.12 In a case before Karnataka High Court in Hyderabad Industries Ltd. v. ITO & Anr., 188 ITR 749 the issue was whether S. 10(6A) has nothing to do with deduction of tax at source and it is attracted only for purposes of computing the total income of a foreign company. In other words, the contention was that, in case the foreign company has to face an assessment proceeding, then only S. 10(6A) will be attracted.

The Court held that, “the construction sought to be placed by the Revenue (to deduct tax) is based on a distinction, which has no substance in it. It is not understandable as to why, a benefit which will not be included in the total income of a person, should be considered as ‘income’ for the purpose of deduction of tax at source at all. Purpose of deduction of tax at source is not to collect a sum which is not a tax levied under the Act; it is to facilitate the collection of the tax lawfully leviable under the Act. The interpretation put on those provisions by the Revenue would result in collection of certain amounts by the State, which is not a tax qualitatively. Such an interpretation of the taxing statute is impermissible. Tax paid on behalf of foreign company, therefore, will not form part of its income.”

“S. 10(6A) nowhere confines its operation to an assessment proceedings; there is no exclusion of its operation from other proceedings under the Act. Language of S. 10 is quite simple and clear. It governs the computation of the total income of the person covered by it; a benefit, which is not includible in the total income of a person, necessarily implies that the said benefit is not the ‘income’ of the person.”

4.13 Transmission  Corporation of A.P. Ltd. & Anr. v. CIT, (1999) 239 ITR 587 (SC).

In this case the Apex Court had to decide whether the TDS provisions are applicable to Gross Receipt vis-a-vis Income Receipt in case of payments made to non-residents.

The Court observed in Para 8 that, “the scheme of Ss.(l), Ss.(2) and Ss.(3) of S. 195 and S. 197 leaves no doubt that the expression ‘any other sum chargeable under the provisions of this Act’ would mean ‘sum’ on which income-tax is leviable. In other words, the said sum is chargeable to tax and could be assessed to tax under the Act.

Consideration would be – whether payment of a sum to non-resident is chargeable to tax under the provisions of the Act or not? That sum may be income or income hidden or otherwise embedded therein. If so, tax is required to be deducted on the said sum – what would be the income is to be computed on the basis of various provisions of the Act including provisions for computation of the business income, if the payment is trade receipt.

However, what is to be deducted is income-tax payable thereon at the rates in force. Under the Act, total income for the previous year would become chargeable to tax u/s.4. Ss.(2) of 5.4 inter alia, provides that in respect of income chargeable u/s.(1), income-tax shall be deducted at source where it is so deductible under any provision of the Act …. “

4.14 While deciding the applicability of the TDS provisions it is necessary to look into the fact whether the income is exempt from being included in the total income. There is a difference between income not chargeable to tax and not includible in the total income (agricultural income) and income which forms part of total income but which is made taxfree. The Apex ,Court observed in – CIT v. Williamson Financial Services & Ors., (2008) 297 ITR v. 17 (SC) that – Agricultural income not being chargeable to tax does not fall under various computation provisions ….. There is a vital difference between income not chargeable to tax and not includible in the total income (agricultural income) and income which forms part of total income but which is made tax-free ….

4.15 Further CBDT has issued Circular No. 736 dated 30-1-1996 to deal with incomes received by certain defense funds and clearly states that “….no tax may be deducted at source u/s.194-I, since the income of these organisations is exempt from tax u/s.10(23AA) ….”

Although it is for the purpose of defense funds the principle of exempt incomes is clearly borne out.

 5.0 Whether tax treatment in the hands of the payer is relevant?

The last question is whether the tax treatment of the amount paid as agricultural rent or exempt income in the hands of the payer will have any effect on the TDS applicability.

TDS provisions nowhere mention anything about the tax treatment for payments made in the hands of the payer.

As explained hereinabove TDS provisions are not applicable to agricultural land rent or exempt incomes. Hence, this will not have any adverse effect in the hands of the payer i.e. lessee/company, as far as the TDS provisions are concerned. The questions u/s.40(a)(ia) have already been resolved by various Court decisions as discussed in the foregoing paras.

Considering all the relevant facts and the law as discussed hereinabove, and relying and based on the same as mentioned above, it is obvious that, TDS provisions are not applicable to Rent for Agricultural land and TDS cannot be deducted there-from or from incomes which are expressly exempt.

Daughter’s Right In Coparcenary

My article on ‘Daughter’s right in coparcenary’ (BCAJ-January 2009, Page 509) has evinced considerable interest amongst the practising chartered accountants. I have been flooded with number of inquiries and questions. Some of the inquiries have raised interesting supplemental questions, which justify an additional article on broader aspects on the same subject.

As is well known, the Hindu Succession Act, 1956 (‘the Act’) was amended by the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005 (‘the Amendment Act’) with effect from 9th September, 2005. S. 6 of the Act, which was substituted by the Amendment Act to the extent it is relevant to this Article reads as under :

    “6. Devolution of interest in coparcenary property. — (1) On and from the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005, in a joint Hindu family governed by the Mitakshara law, the daughter of a coparcener shall, —

    (a) by birth become a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son;

    (b) have the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son;

    (c) be subject to the same liabilities in respect of the said coparcenary property as that of a son, and any reference to a Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to include a reference to a daughter of a coparcener :

Provided that nothing contained in this sub-section shall affect or invalidate any disposition or alienation including any partition or testamentary disposition of property which had taken place before the 20th day of December, 2004.

(2) to (5) x x x

Explanation. — x x x”

S. 6 of the Act (as amended by the Amendment Act) inter alia provides that on and from the commencement of the Amendment Act, in a joint Hindu family governed by Mitakshara law, the daughter of a coparcener by birth becomes a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son. The Section further provides that any property to which a female Hindu becomes entitled by virtue of the provision shall be held by her with the incidents of coparcenary ownership and shall be regarded as property capable of being disposed of by her by testamentary disposition.

One interesting issue which arises for consideration is as to what happens in case of a daughter of a deceased coparcener of an HUF. The brief facts on which such question can arise could be :

    (a) there is an existing HUF consisting of father A (Karta) and his two sons B and C. Therefore, the HUF would consist of three coparceners, namely, A, B and C.

    (b) A dies before September, 2005 leaving his will whereby he bequeaths his undivided one-third share in the HUF assets to his HUF, so that the HUF continues with two coparceners B and C.

    (c) At the time of the death of A he has left no wife, but two daughters D and E.

    (d) The question is whether after passing of the Amendment Act, D and E get any right in the properties and assets of the HUF.

S. 6 of the Act as it stood at the time of the death of A (i.e., prior to the amendment) reads as under :

“6. Devolution of interest of coparcenary property : When a male Hindu dies after the commencement of this Act, having at the time of his death an interest in a Mitakshara coparcenary property, his interest in the property shall devolve by survivorship upon the surviving members of the coparcenary and not in accordance with this Act :

Provided that, if the deceased had left him surviving a female relative specified in Class I of the Schedule or a male relative specified in that class who claims through such female relative, the interest of the deceased in the Mitakshara coparcenary property shall devolve by testamentary or intestate succession, as the case may be, under this Act and not by survivorship.

Explanation 1 : For the purposes of this Section, the interest of a Hindu Mitakshara coparcener shall be deemed to be the share in the property that would have been allotted to him if a partition of the property had taken place immediately before his death, irrespective of whether he was entitled to claim partition or not.

Explanation 2 : Nothing contained in the proviso to this Section shall be construed as enabling a person who has separated himself from the coparcenary before the death of the deceased or any of his heirs to claim on intestacy a share in the interest referred to therein.

Based on the provisions of S. 6 of the Act as at the time of death of A read with Explanation 1 to the said Section, the share of a deceased coparcener of the HUF is to be determined as if a partition of the property has taken place immediately before his death. Accordingly, in the example given above, there being three coparceners of the HUF A had one-third undivided share in the HUF property, which devolved upon the HUF as per his will.

It is significant to note that S. 6 of the Act (as amended) prescribes that on and from the commencement of the Amendment Act, the daughter of a ‘coparcener’ by birth becomes a coparcener in her own right in the same manner as the son and gets the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son. However, on the date of commencement of the Amendment Act i.e., 9th September, 2005, A was no longer one of the coparceners. The two brothers B and C were the only coparceners of the HUF. It, therefore, follows that the two sisters D and E do not fall in the category of being the ‘daughters of a coparcener’ to qualify for any right under S. 6 of the Act as amended. Accordingly, it is submitted that in such a case the daughters would not be entitled to any right in the HUF property and assets.

The conclusion arrived at above is also supported by some court decisions.

The Supreme Court in the case of Sheela Devi and Ors. v. Lal Chand and Anr., [2007(1) MLJ 797] has clearly observed that the Amendment Act would have no application in a case where the succession was opened in 1989 when the father passed away.

In the case of Smt. Bhagirathi and Others v. S. Manivanan and Anr., (AIR 2008 Madras 250), the Madras High Court has held as under :

    “13. A careful reading of S. 6(1) read with 6(3) of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act clearly indicates that a daughter can be considered as a coparcener only if her father was a coparcener at the time of coming into force of the amended provision. It is of course true that for the purpose of considering whether the father is a coparcener or not, the restricted meaning of the expression ‘partition’ as given in the explanation is to be attributed.

        In the present case, admittedly the father of the present petitioners had expired in 1975. S. 6(1) of the Act is prospective in the sense that a daughter is being treated as coparcener on and from the commencement of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005. If such provision is read along with S. 6(3), it becomes clear that if a Hindu dies after commence-ment of the Hindu Succession (Amendment) Act, 2005, his interest in the property shall devolve not by survivorship but by intestate succession as contemplated in the Act.

        In the present case, the death of the father having taken place in 1975, succession itself opened in the year 1975 in accordance with the existing provisions contained in S. 6. If the contention of the petitioners is accepted, it would amount to giving retrospective ef-fect to the provisions of S. 6 as amended in 2005. On the death of the father in 1975, the property had already vested with Class-I heirs including the daughters as contemplated in the unamended S. 6 of the Act. Even though the intention of the amended provision is to confer better rights on the daughters, it cannot be stressed to the extent of holding that the succession which had opened prior to coming into force of the amended Act are also required to be re-opened. In this connection, we are also inclined to refer to the decision of M. Srinivasan, J., as His Lordship then was, reported in 1991(2) MLJ 199 (Sundarambal and Others v. Deivanaayagam and Others). While interpreting almost a similar provision, as contained in S. 29-A of the Hindu Succession

    Act, as introduced by the Tamil Nadu Amendment Act 1 of 199, the learned single Judge had made the following observations :

    “14.    Under sub-clause (1), the daughter of a coparcener shall become a coparcener in her own right by birth, thus enabling all daughters of the coparcener who were born even prior to 25th March, 1989 to become coparceners. In other words, if a male Hindu has a daughter born on any date prior to 25th March, 1989, she would also be a coparcener with him in the joint family when the amendment came into force. But the necessary requisite is, the male Hindu should have been alive on the date of the coming into force of the Amended Act. The Section only makes a daughter a coparce-ner and not a sister. If a male Hindu had died before 25th March, 1989 leaving coparcenary property, then his daughter cannot claim to be a coparcener in the same manner as a son, as, on the date on which the Act came into force, her father was not alive. She had the status only as a sister-a-vis her brother and not a daughter on the date of the coming into force of the Amendment Act . . . . . .”.

    It is submitted that the sentence “But the necessary requisite is, the male Hindu should have been alive on the date of the coming into force of the Amend-ment Act” quoted by the Madras High Court in the said judgment is from the same Court’s earlier judgment in Sundarambal’s case, is quite significant and throws light on the hypothetical question raised in this article.

    There is one more court decision on the effect of the Amendment Act, again from the Madras High Court. In the case of Valliammal v. Muniyappan, [2008 (4) CTC 773], the Madras High Court has observed as under :

    “6.    In the plaint, it is stated that the father of the plaintiffs died about thirty years prior to the filing of the suit. The second plaintiff as P.W.1 has deposed that their father died in the year 1968. The Amendment Act 39 of 2005 amend-ing S. 6 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956 came into force on 9-9-2005 and it conferred right upon female heirs in relation to the joint family property. The contention put forth by the learned Counsel for the appellant is that the said Amendment came into force pending disposal of the suit and hence the plaintiffs are entitled to the benefits conferred by the Amending Act. The Amending Act declared that the daughter of the coparcener shall have the same rights in the coparcenary property as she would have had if she had been a son. In other words, the daughter of a coparcener in her own right has become a coparcener in the same manner as the son insofar as the rights in the coparcenary property are concerned. The question is as to when the succession opened insofar as the present suit properties are concerned. As already seen, the father of the Plaintiffs died in the year 1968 and on the date of his death, the succession had opened to the properties in question. In fact, the Supreme Court in a recent deci-sion in Sheela Devi and Ors. v. Lal Chand and Anr., 2007 (1) MLJ 797 (SC) considered the above question and has laid down the law as follows :

      19.  The Act indisputably would prevail over the old Hindu Law. We may notice that the Parliament, with a view to confer the right upon the female heirs, even in relation to the joint family property, enacted the Hindu Succession Act, 2005. Such a provision was enacted as far back in 1987 by the State of Andhra Pradesh. The succession having opened in 1989, evidently, the provisions of Amendment Act, 2005 would have no application.

    In view of the above statement of law by the Apex Court, the contention of the appellant is devoid of merit. The succession having opened in the year 1968, the Amendment Act 39 of 2005 would have no application to the facts of the present case.”

    Based on the above and other supporting decisions, the Madras High Court has in the recently decided case of S. Seshachalam v. S. Deenadayalan and Ors., (MANU/TN/1956/2000) taken a similar view rejecting the claim of daughters of a coparcener, who had died in 1965.

    Therefore, it is clear that a daughter would get benefit of the Amendment Act only if her father is alive at the time of coming into force of the Amendment Act. Going back to the hypothetical question raised in this article, the two sisters D and E would not be entitled to any right under S. 6 of the Act as amended.

The Great Financial Meltdown and the Accounting Profession 139

Article

The last thirteen months have been witness to the unfolding
of an unprecedented crisis in the international credit and equity markets
resulting in the ultimate demise of the large independent multinational
Investment Bank as a business. It all started with the onset of a correction in
the US real estate prices in mid 2007 leading to the sub-prime crisis which in
turn brought about the near seizure of the mortgage backed securities market
ending with the ‘guided’ absorption of Bear Sterns and Merrill Lynch, the
well-respected Wall Street Investment Banks, by two large commercial Banks — JP
Morgan and Bank of America, respectively. The US financial services business
model has truly been shaken at its roots with the bankruptcy of the iconic
Investment Bank, Lehman Brothers, the US Government bail-out of the mortgage
majors Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, as also the largest insurance company,
American International Group and the conversion of the illustrious Investment
Banks Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley to commercial banks. To unfreeze the
international interbank money markets that had become virtually non-functional
on account of the fear of the imminent collapse of counterparty Banks, the US
Government has come up with the largest ever bail-out, the US $ 700 billion
Troubled Asset Relief Program (TARP) under which the troubled assets of the
banking system would be bought over by the US Treasury to enable banks to clean
up their books and hopefully resume business as usual. The size of the troubled
assets in the US banking system could be at least five times the planned bailout
and hence it is possible that more bail-outs and recapitalisations will become
necessary before the markets come back to normalcy. While the crisis has
substantially dented the fortunes of the US $ 14-trillion US economy, the
bail-out package and its possible successors may just about manage to pull
through the US economy from a further catastrophe. On the other side of the
Atlantic however, the size of the banking crisis is disproportionately large,
relative to the size of the host country economies. Consequently, the banks once
considered too big to fail have now become too big to save for individual
countries. Hence the process of European bank bail-outs would require more than
one country to chip in and a virtual Government takeover of the ownership of the
banking system is currently in progress.


It is worthwhile examining how the problem assumed such
gigantic proportions without some corrective action being initiated sufficiently
early in the cycle. Mortgages offered by banks and housing finance companies are
subject to the capital adequacy norms prescribed by regulators, which requires
them to back the risk in lending with certain minimum capital. The growth in the
mortgage business of a company is hence limited by the quantum of capital
available. Pursuing a more aggressive growth path would entail new capital to be
raised periodically, which limits the attractiveness of the company in the
equity market. To overcome this problem, companies started selling the loans
that they had originated through a process called ‘securitisation’. This
consists of carving out pools of housing loans with different risk and return
characteristics and selling the same through innovative structures to new
investors in the same way a bond is sold in the debt market. Certain new
attributes were added to the pool of housing loans to make the pool more
marketable by offering credit enhancement — by providing that say the first 5%
of default in the pool will be paid for by the seller — or by a third party
offering credit insurance. Such pools — known as collateralised debt obligations
(CDOs) — are rated by credit rating agencies based on the past repayment history
and the value of the underlying house properties that are mortgaged. The
mortgage companies by becoming originators of mortgage loans who sell the assets
at a profit to other investors — typically mutual funds, insurance companies,
hedge funds, etc. — enhance their return on equity without having the need to
constantly raise capital. The CDOs are generally sold at a yield less than the
contracted yield with the individual mortgagees, thus deriving a profit
approximately equal to the difference between the net present values of the cash
flows at the two yields. The system represents the best form of specialisation
with the mortgage companies concentrating on finding credible borrowers to
originate the loan and the ultimate buyers deploying their large resources in a
pool of assets with reasonable yields. Typically the CDOs are divided into
tranches ranging from investment grade — representing borrowers with a good
credit history and loans with high security coverage — to less than investment
grade, also called sub-prime CDOs and sold at varying yields to investors with
different risk appetite. The risk that a mortgage will not be serviced has
certainly not gone out of the system, but is shared between the originator and
the credit insurer to the extent they are liable and the ultimate holder of the
CDO for the balance amount.

The sub-prime woes in the US are a result of the excesses in the system caused by pushing the balance between risk and return beyond prudent levels. Aggressive US Banks were offering attractively priced mortgages to sub-prime borrowers in the hope that the boom in the real estate market will continue and the security cover will be more than adequate when repossession and sale becomes essential on loan default caused either by rising un-employment or firming interest rates. The prospect of being able to quickly sell these loans as COOs at a profit certainly prompted banks to lower lending standards. The continuing bullishness in the real estate market lulled credit enhancers and insurers to take on risks at a price that they would otherwise have not taken and the ultimate investors – frequently high-yield funds promoted by the very banks who originated the mortgages – to hold securitised assets at low yields emboldenedby credit insurance and softening interest rates. Once the real estate prices started correcting and interest rates firmed up, the holders had to mark-to-market the asset-backed securities incurring considerable losses and the credit enhancers/insurers who had taken leveraged bets while underwriting these risks had to suffer huge losses. Aggressive repossession of housing assets and subsequent sale in an already weak housing market caused a further slide in real estate prices, thus jeopardising the asset coverage of CDOs. This chain of events finally left the Wall Street bankers holding billions of dollars of COOs and other asset-based exotica that represent – variously sliced and diced – home loans made out to sub-prime borrowers. With the supply of these securities exceeding natural demand, when they found that there are no real buyers for these securities, they created buyers called structured investment vehicles (SIVs) who would borrow short-term money from the commercial paper market – based on good credit rating from friendly credit raters – and use the money to buy the long-term mortgage assets from these banks. The catch however is that for this game to continue, the commercial paper would need to be rolled over every few months. With the correction in real estate markets getting worse by the day, the sub-prime borrowers started defaulting in servicing their loan obligations and the value of the mortgaged homes could not cover the outstanding loans. With this, the asset-backed commercial paper market dried up, thus denying the SIVs their primary source of funding.

Under these circumstances, the’ SIV could either liquidate the mortgage securities on a forced sale basis or plead with the sponsoring bank to extend their credit lines. The problem with the first option is that the sale at distress prices will force banks to mark-to-market their holdings of similar illiquid securities worth several billion dollars causing huge losses to be booked. Banks therefore preferred the second option, so that they could continue to value their illiquid securities at ‘fantasy’ prices without providing for mark-to-market losses. In a well-functioning capital market, the SIVs would reflect the real-world prices of their underlying assets and on this basis there would be enough funding available from hard-nosed capitalists through the market mechanism. The mark-to-market valuation would necessarily reflect the distressed nature of these assets and the risk appetite of the capital providers. Some help was at hand from the US Financial Accounting Standards Board in this regard with the adoption of FASB 157 from mid-November 2007, which sought to standardise ‘fair value’ accounting. Under this dispensation, assets are classified into three levels, with the first level involving assets with prices quoted in active markets and the second level involving less-traded securities which are valued using the prices of similar assets. At the third level are securities like COOs that are not traded and are valued with the help of financial models based on a series of assumptions, known as the mark-to-model method. The accounting standards require institutions to classify securities such that the mark-to-model method is kept to the minimum and as far as possible, to value level-3 securities based on a gridded or extrapolated level-2 value. Appropriate disclosures of the methods used to estimate the fair value of assets is a requirement. Avoiding the use of market prices or proxies for market prices in preference to mark-to-model methods became increasingly difficult where the accountants sought to strictly implement the provisions of the accounting standard. If truth be told, the implementation of these standards was not uniformly strict.

One of the aspects of the problem that should concern the accounting profession is the fact that the large banks affected by the sub-prime mortgage meltdown had to take on obligations beyond what were considered contingent liabilities and factored into capital adequacy calculations. Bailing out bank-sponsored off-balance sheet vehicles such as conduits, structured investment vehicles and even money market funds beyond the formal legal ob-ligation of the sponsoring bank was at the root of the massive write-downs. This was indeed necessitated by the need to protect the hard-earned reputation of the sponsoring banks, much beyond the scope of enforceable contracts. This development has far-reaching implications for shareholders, the accounting profession, as also bank regu-lators. For shareholders, this was a risk that they never bargained for, but still had to pay for in terms of value erosion. The accounting profession would do well to revisit the level of disclosures and consider putting in place a reporting standard that requires disclosure on such qualitative and unquantifiable risks. Regulators would need to have a rethink on the adequacy of risk capital that may need to factor the financial consequences of banks opting to take on such unenforceable obligations. The dilution of the credit creation function of banks that would be the inevitable consequence of any deleveraging prescription would need to be balanced with the potential benefits of a healthier banking system.

Another lesson that is worth learning from the ongoing credit crisis and is again relevant to the accounting profession is the inappropriateness of leaning too heavily on complex risk and valuation models. The basis of the high credit rating of pools of sub-prime mortgage loans was the assumption that mortgage defaults were essentially independent of each other. This enabled credit raters to use risk models on the basis of the ‘Law of Large Numbers’ that allowed large portions of these pools to be rated AAA on the premise that the probability of a default of more than 20% of principal was very small. The reality however is that defaults in sub-prime mortgages are not independent events when confronted with a steep interest rate rise or a nationwide housing price collapse. Moreover, the dimension of market liquidity is not factored into financial models because there is no agreed method to value liquidity. Regulators need to be concerned that the soon-to-be-enforced Basel II prescriptions rely largely on the use of such discredited complex risk models. The risks to the financial system on the back of reduced capital adequacy norms based on third-party credit rating of risk assets merits a careful evaluation in the light of recent events.

Worldwide tax review — Limitation of Benefits Provisions in Income Tax Treaties

Article

Based on recent news reports, it appears that the Indian
Government is in the process of renegotiating the India-Cyprus Income Tax Treaty
and would like to hold talks to renegotiate the India-Mauritius Income Tax
Treaty. A key change that the Indian Govt. may push for during the course of
renegotiation is to add a Limitation on Benefits (‘LOB’) provision in the tax
treaties.

An LOB provision is an anti-abuse provision that sets out
which residents of the Contracting States are entitled to the treaty’s benefits.
The purpose of an LOB provision is to limit the ability of third country
residents to obtain benefits under the said treaty. This type of use of the
treaty, where third country residents establish companies in a Contracting State
with the principal purpose to obtain the benefits of the treaty between the
Contracting States, is commonly referred to as ‘treaty shopping’.

The introduction of LOB provisions in recent Indian treaties
is indicative of a policy to discourage treaty shopping. Recently, India
renegotiated the India-Singapore Income Tax Treaty (Singapore Treaty) and the
India-UAE Income Tax Treaty (UAE Treaty) through separate Protocols that add LOB
provisions in each, effective in 2005 and 2008, respectively. Although it is too
early to tell how extensive this shift in policy will become, for now India
seems to be following a similar path taken by the United States starting in the
early 1980s when it began renegotiating its income tax treaties and insisting
that treaty partners agree to having LOB provisions in the renegotiated
treaties. For the U.S., it believes that such provisions are effective in
stopping aggressive international tax planning that uses its treaties for the
benefit of third country residents.

A look at the LOB Provisions in the

India-Singapore and India-UAE Treaties :

The recent LOB provision added to the Singapore Treaty is
illustrative of India’s new direction. The India-Singapore Comprehensive
Economic Co-operation Agreement (‘CECA’) was signed on June 29, 2005. As part of
the CECA, Singapore and India agreed on a Protocol and the tax treaty was
amended. The amendments introduced by this Protocol came into force from August
1, 2005.

The Protocol provides that capital gains arising to a
resident of a Contracting State from the sale of property and shares (other than
immovable property or property forming part of a permanent establishment) in the
other Contracting State would be taxed only in the Contracting State where the
alienator is resident.

In other words, when the Singapore company divests its
interest in the Indian company, it will be exempt from Indian capital gains tax.
However, to prevent third country residents from misusing the capital gains
exemption by establishing a holding company in Singapore, an LOB provision was
also added to the treaty.

The LOB provision is very limited in scope, in that it only
impacts capital gains tax and not other benefits provided by the treaty. Under
the LOB provision, a resident company of Singapore will not be entitled to the
capital gains exemption if the primary purpose for the company’s establishment
was to obtain the capital gains exemption. In addition to this test that looks
at a taxpayer’s motive for its holding structure, the provision includes a
second test which provides that companies (referred to as ‘shell’ companies)
that have no or negligible business operations, or with no real or continuous
business activities in Singapore, would not qualify for the capital gains
exemption under the treaty. Under a safe harbour rule, a Singapore company would
not be a shell if : (1) it was listed on recognised stock exchanges of India or
Singapore, or (2) its total annual expenditure on operations in its state of
residence is equal to or more than S$ 200,000 or Rs.50,00,000, as the case may
be, in the 24 months immediately before the date its capital gains arise. It is
not entirely clear whether the Singaporean company still has to satisfy the
motive test even if it passes the safe harbour rule.

In contrast to the Singapore Treaty, the LOB provision added
to the UAE Treaty is broader in scope in that it applies to all benefits
under the treaty. The LOB provision provides that a company would not be
entitled to treaty benefits if “the main purpose or one of the main purposes of
the creation of such entity was to obtain the benefits . . .” of the treaty.
Once again the intention behind the provision is to curb the use of holding
companies that do not have bona fide business activities in India/UAE
from being granted treaty benefits. However, unlike the Singapore Treaty, the
UAE Treaty does not give any guidelines on what is required to prove that a
company has sufficient business activities to obtain treaty benefits. As a
result, this LOB provision will surely create unnecessary uncertainty as to the
application of the treaty. The treaty partners may need to provide some guidance
on this at some point.

From a policy standpoint it appears that India will continue
to request some form of an LOB provision to be added in its treaties in future
treaty negotiations, including renegotiations of existing treaties (such as
Cyprus and Mauritius) where it perceives misuses taking place, making
tax-efficient inbound investment planning for foreign companies more
challenging.

Overview of LOB Provisions in U.S. Treaties :

With the growth of Indian companies, more and more such
companies are seeking to expand overseas and in this regard the United States is
the largest market for expansion. The United States is a high-tax jurisdiction
and has one of the most complex tax systems in the world. As a consequence, an
Indian company expanding into the United States should understand the U.S. tax
system and the tax costs to a foreign investor.

A foreign investor in a U.S. company will generally receive
return on his investment in the form of capital gains from the divestment of the
U.S. business, or the receipt of dividends, interest, royalties and other types
of investment income. As the United States does not tax capital gains on the
sale of capital assets, such as stock in a company (unless the company has
certain U.S. real property assets), foreign investors will not generally have to
concern themselves with U.S. capital gains tax issues on divestment of U.S.
stock.

On the other hand, dividends, interest, and royalties and
other types of investment income would be subject to a relatively high 30% U.S.
withholding tax. Thus, an Indian company would have to focus on how to reduce or
eliminate the 30% U.S. withholding tax on such U.S. investment income.

Finding ways to reduce or eliminate this tax cost is challenging from a U.S. perspective. The best way of lowering the 30% U.S. withholding tax is to access the benefits of a U.S. income tax treaty, which can provide reduced rates from 0% to 25%, depending on the treaty. In this regard, the U.S. has gone through many challenges over the years as a result of foreign investors creating elaborate schemes designed to lower this tax by accessing one of its many income tax treaties by treaty shopping. To counter treaty shopping, the U.S. has negotiated to have LOB provisions included in its treaties including the US-India Income Tax Treaty-(‘India Treaty’). The LOB provisions limit the treaty residents who may be granted treaty benefits. Importantly, the United States has also made changes to its domestic tax laws that complement the measures taken with its income tax treaties, such as, promulgating anti-conduit regulations, and interest earning stripping rules, and through a rich history of case law and rulings have developed substance over form, economic substance and business purpose doctrines that serve to curb tax transactions that are viewed as abusive. For purposes of this discussion, we will focus only on the U.S Treaty LOB provisions.

1. U.S. LOB provisions:

Broadly, the LOB provisions of most U.S. income tax treaties provide that resident companies of the two Contracting States are entitled to treaty benefits (such as reduction or elimination of the 30% US withholding tax rate on investment income) only if they satisfy one of the tests under the LOB provision of the treaty in question. Although each treaty is unique, there are generally at least three objective tests found in most U.S. income tax treaties, namely: (1)the Publicly Traded Company Test, (2) Ownership /Base-erosion Test, and (3) the Active Trade or Business Test. Further, the LOB provisions will typically have a clause providing that benefits may also be granted if the competent authority of the Contracting State from which benefits are claimed determines that it is appropriate to provide treaty benefits in that case. This little used clause gives the Competent Authority of the Contracting State involved discretion to grant treaty benefits in cases where even though the treaty resident cannot satisfy any of the objective tests, it should nonetheless be granted treaty benefits.

We have seen that without the benefit of a U.S. income tax treaty, an Indian investor would be subject to a 30% U.S. withholding tax on its U.S. sourced investment income. Fortunately, the tax treaty with India (‘India Treaty’) provides relief by reducing the 30% U.S. withholding tax rate for dividends, interest and royalties to 15%, 15% and 15/ 10%, respectively. There are also other U.S. income tax treaties that provide even better benefits, such as the UK Treaty, which can provide zero withholding tax on these three types of income if certain other requirements are met. The key to obtaining these reduced rates though is qualifying for treaty benefits under the respective LOB provision.

 2. The U.S.-India Treaty LOB Provision – Article 24 :

The current tax treaty with India (‘India Treaty’) entered into force in December 1990. As with its other treaties, the United States wants to ensure that under the ‘India Treaty’, only ‘qualified residents’ of either treaty country obtain treaty benefits. The paragraphs of Article 24 (LOB) that relate to companies are intended to guarantee that only Indian or U.S. resident companies that have substantial substance and strong business connections or activities in India or the United States may be entitled to use the treaty.

In this regard, Article 24, paragraph 1, provides an Ownership /Base-erosion Test that is a two-prong test, both of which must be satisfied. Under the first prong of the test, more than 50% of each class of an Indian company’s shares must be owned, directly or indirectly, by individual residents who are subject to tax in either India or the United States, or by the government or government bodies of either Contracting State. Under the second prong of the test, the Indian company’s gross income must not be used in ‘substantial’ part, directly or indirectly, to meet liabilities (such as interest or royalties liabilities) in the form of deductible payments to persons, other than persons who are residents, U.S. citizens or the government or government bodies of either Contracting State. The term ‘substantial’ is not defined under the treaty, however, deductible payments that are less than 50% of the company’s gross income will generally not be considered substantial. This provision is generally focussed on stopping situations where third country lenders or licensors use the treaty to obtain the reduced 15% and 15/10% U.S. withholding tax rate for interest and royalty payments, respectively.

Paragraph 2 of Article 24 provides that an Indian company will qualify for treaty benefits, regardless of its ownership (as is required under the Owner-ship/Base-erosion Test), if it is engaged in an active trade or business in India and the item of income for which treaty benefit is being claimed is connected with or incidental to such trade or business. A company in the business of managing investments for its own account will not be treated as carrying on an active trade or business, unless it’s in the banking or insurance business. This treaty does not define the term ‘active trade or business’, but as discussed below, some guidance is available in the U.S. Treasury Technical Explanation to the ‘U.K. Treaty’ (which is the official guide to the U’K, Treaty by the United States) which provides a definition that the U.s. would likely apply consistently to all its treaties. This test is applied separately to each item of income of the Indian company, compared to the Ownership/Base-erosion Test and the Publicly Traded Company Test (discussed below), where if these tests are satisfied, then all the income of the treaty resident is entitled to all treaty benefits.

The third test under Article 24 is the Publicly Traded Company Test under paragraph 3. Under this test, a publicly traded Indian corporation can qualify for treaty benefits if its principal class of shares is sub-stantially and regularly traded on a recognised stock exchange (e.g., the NASDAQ or New York Stock Exchange in the United States or the National Stock Exchange in India).

3. The U.S.-U.K. Treaty LOB Provision – Article 23
:

The current tax treaty with U.K. (‘UK Treaty’) entered into force in March 2003. It is illustrative of the United States’ more recent policy towards its income tax treaties, which is to extend significant tax breaks to its treaty partners. In this regard, the UK Treaty can provide zero withholding tax on dividends (0%, 5%, or 15%), interest (0%) and royalty (0%) payments if certain requirements are met. These reduced rates generally make it a very desirable treaty to access. Under its LOB provision, however, the U.S. has ensured that only certain categories of residents are granted these treaty benefits. The LOB provision is more extensive than the ‘India Treaty’; providing more tests under which a resident may qualify for treaty benefits, but in all cases it provides a high bar requiring that only those companies with significant substance and business activities or connections in the United Kingdom qualify.

Under paragraphs 2(c), 2(f),and 4 of Article 23, there is a Publicly Traded Company Test, an Ownership / Base-erosion Test, and an Active Trade or Business Test, respectively.

Although these LOB tests are similar to the LOB tests under the ‘India Treaty’, there are some important differences under the Publicly Traded Company Test. Under this Publicly Traded Company Test, a publicly traded company includes companies whose principal class of stock is listed on a ‘recognised stock exchange’, just like under the ‘India Treaty’. However, the recognised stock exchanges under this Publicly Traded Company Test include not only exchanges in the Contracting States, but also the stock exchanges of Ireland, Switzerland, Amsterdam, Brussels, Frankfurt, Hamburg, Johannesburg, Madrid, Milan, Paris, Stockholm, Sydney, Tokyo, Toronto and Vienna. In addition, this Publicly Traded Company Test includes a subsection that allows certain subsidiaries of a publicly traded company to qualify for the ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits. Under this part of the test, a company resident in one of the Contracting States that is at least 50% held by vote and value by five or fewer publicly traded companies that qualify for treaty benefits under the Publicly Trade Company Test may also qualify for ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits (e.g., a wholly-owned U.K. subsidiary of a Ll.K, publicly traded company whose shares are regularly traded on the London Stock Exchange). Thus, the Publicly Traded Company Test allows more publicly traded companies and their subsidiaries that are residents of either Contracting State to qualify for UK Treaty Benefits than those under the ‘India Treaty’.

The Active Trade or Business Test in both treaties is substantially the same. However, unlike the ‘India Treaty’, the U.S. Treasury Technical Explanation to the ‘u.K. Treaty’ does provide a definition of an active ‘trade or business’ for purposes of qualifying for treaty benefits under this test. In this regard, from a U.S. perspective, a U.K. company will be treated as carrying on an active trade or business if it carries on a ‘specific unified group of activities that constitute an independent economic enterprise carried on for profit.’ In addition, ‘a corporation will be considered to carryon a trade or business only if the officers and employees of the corporation conduct substantial managerial and operational activities.’ Further, any company whose function is to make or manage investments for its own account will not be treated as carrying on an active trade or business (unless it’s in the banking, insurance or securities business). The Technical Explanation makes clear that headquarters operations are considered in the business of managing investments, and therefore, the United States will not treat such companies as qualifying for treaty benefits under this test.

In addition to the tests above, the ‘U.K. Treaty’ also has Derivatives Benefits Test that is not found in the ‘India Treaty’. This test expands the types of resident companies that may qualify for ‘U’K. Treaty’ benefits. It allows a resident company that cannot satisfy one of the other tests to qualify for treaty benefits if it is owned by third country residents that meet certain requirements. Under this test, a resident company will be entitled to treaty benefits with respect to an item of income, profit or gain if: (1) at least 95% of vote and value of the company is owned, directly or indirectly, by 7 or fewer persons who are ‘equivalent beneficiaries’; and (2) less than 50% of the company’s gross income for the taxable period in which the item of income, profit or gain arises is paid or accrued, directly or indirectly, to persons who are not equivalent beneficiaries, in the form of deductible payments. The treaty defines an ‘equivalent beneficiary’ as a resident of an EU country or of a European Economic Area state (e.g., France, Ireland, Germany, or the Netherlands, etc.) or NAFTA states (Canada and Mexico). The equivalent beneficiary must also be entitled to all the benefits of a tax treaty between an EU country, a European Economic Area state or NAFTA state and the Contracting State from which the ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits are claimed (the ‘Third Country Treaty’). Further, with respect to claiming treaty benefits for dividends, interest, or royalties, the equivalent beneficiary must be entitled under the Third Country Treaty to a rate of tax on the income for tvhich benefits are being claimed that is at least as low as the rate applicable under the ‘U.K. Treaty’.

The Derivatives Benefits Test can be illustrated with the following example. A U.K. resident company owns a U’.S. subsidiary and is owned 100% by a publicly traded company in France. The U.S. subsidiary pays a dividend to the U.K. resident company. Under the ‘U.K. Treaty’, the u.K. resident company does not satisfy any of the other LOB tests. Its French parent, however, does qualify for benefits under the U.S.-France Income Tax Treaty, which provides a 5% withholding tax rate on dividend payments. Thus, the U.K. resident company will be entitled to the ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits for dividend payments it receives from the U.S. subsidiary. The treaty rate will be limited to 5% and not the 0% the ‘Ll.K. Treaty’ provides, because that is the lowest rate its French parent would be granted under the U.S.-France Income Tax Treaty.

4. How to Structure Investments into the United States:

Because of LOB provisions it may be that, the most tax-efficient way for an Indian company to reduce the U.S. tax on dividends, interest, royalties and other investment income is to hold its U.S. investment directly and to try and qualify for benefits under the ‘India Treaty’. However, if the company has extensive operations in another country that has a treaty with the United States which gives better treaty benefits than the ‘India Treaty’, then it may be worthwhile considering using that treaty. The ‘UK Treaty’ is the best example of such a treaty.

Planning    Example:

An Indian corporation in the pharmaceutical business owns 100% of an existing U.K. subsidiary that in turn owns 100% of a U.S. subsidiary. The U.K. subsidiary owns a factory in the United Kingdom that produces a variety of products that are marketed and distributed in a number of European countries by third parties and in the United States by the U.S. subsidiary. The Ll.S, subsidiary regularly makes dividend distributions to the U.K. subsidiary, which it uses to expand in its U.K. manufacturing operations. Assuming certain requirements are satisfied under Article 10 (Dividends), the U.K. subsidiary should be able to qualify for treaty benefits under the Active Trade or Business Test to reduce the U.S. withholding tax on dividends from 30% to zero. This is a better withholding tax result than if the Indian corporation had directly invested in the U.S. subsidiary and obtained a 15% U.S. withholding tax rate on dividend distributions from the U.S.

Conclusion:

The tax environment in India is very challenging from an inbound and outbound perspective today. India is keen to receive its share of the tax revenues available in cross-border transactions. To this end it seems to be heading on a policy path similarly taken by the U.S. years ago to allow only a clearly identified group of persons access to its income tax treaties and the tax benefits they provide. The use of LOB provisions in Indian income tax treaties will be something to take into consideration by foreign investors to avoid being treated as treaty shopping. For Indian companies expanding into the U.S., they will have to take a closer look at its tax treaties and the challenging requirements set out by the LOB provisions within them to effectuate tax-efficient structures for their overseas business operations.

Disciplinary Mechanism of ICAI

1 Introduction

    1.1 We are currently in the diamond jubilee year of our Republic as well as of our Institute. The motto of our nation is Satyameva Jayate (Truth alone triumphs). We can only dream of poetic justice of truth winning over untruth. In this Kaliyug, real life events often shatter this fond belief. The recent episode of ‘Satyam Computers’ has evoked a storm in our profession as well. The motto of our Institute of Chartered Accountants of India is ‘Ya esha Supteshu Jagarti’ (He who is awake when others are asleep.) This was actually spoken about the ‘Soul’ — the ‘Atman’ in the Upanishadas. It implies that our conscience should always be awake. Unfortunately, the overall scenario is such that not only others but our own professionals have started losing faith in the profession. The situation calls for a good degree of introspection and self-criticism.

    1.2 In recent years, there was a spate of complaints against our professional brothers for alleged misconduct. I had occasion to handle quite a few such cases which gave me some insight in the field. It is not only torturous for the respondents whom I represented, but even more stressful to me. I have, therefore, taken it as a mission to spread awareness of this subject and caution our fellow-members, since prevention is always better than cure.

    1.3 The topic is too vast. The experiences which I wish to share are often frightening and depressing. But unless all of us develop positive attitude, assertive approach and collective action, the future seems to be very gloomy. Not much can be expected from our leaders. It is the same state of affairs as in our Indian democracy. Our own indifference and inaction will put us into deeper trouble. Time has come to really wake up and get out of our slumber.

    The purpose of this article is to make readers conscious of the grave reality. I have consciously avoided technicalities and focussed on practical aspects.

2 Some glaring statistics

    2.1 When the Chartered Accountants’ Act was originally passed in the year 1949, the ‘Disciplinary Committee’ consisted of 5 persons. viz. President, Vice-President, two other elected members of Central Council and one Government Nominee. This Committee was supposed to hear the cases all over India. Today our membership is nearing 1,50,000 and till 2007, the same committee was discharging this function.

    2.2 Times have changed. General tolerance level of people has gone down. People have not only become aware of nuisance value, but have started using it. In the first 30 to 40 years of our Institute’s existence, there might have been about 300 to 400 complaints; whereas now the rate is about 500 to 600 hundred per year.

    2.3 Due to various scams, mass scale complaints are received by the Council or initiated suo moto based on ‘Information’. Such scams add 100 to 200 cases in one stroke.

    2.4 A complaint can be filed within 10 years from the occurrence of the event complained against — Regulation 14 of the ICAI Regulations, 1988. Unfortunately, there is no time-limit prescribed for disposal. For example, even today, a few cases filed in the year 1996 in respect of accounts for the year 1987-88 might have remained undecided.

    After the passage of CA Amendment Act, 2006, the new procedure seeks to cut short the time by introducing a procedure for summary disposal.

    2.5 A survey carried out in the USA revealed that 95% of the complaints against professionals (doctors) are filed out of ego problems —mainly due to improper communication by the professionals.

3 Certain fundamental principles

    3.1 A complaint once filed could not be withdrawn under the old system. Under the new system, it can be withdrawn subject to the permission of Director Discipline and Board of Discipline.

    3.2 For holding a member guilty, the following points are considered absolutely inconsequential —

    (a) Whether the complainant or anybody is aggrieved or not.

    (b) Whether the complainant, although aggrieved, wants to pardon a respondent.

    (c) Whether the complainant has approached the Council with clean hands or whether the complainant himself is a confirmed criminal or has committed contributory negligence.

    (d) Whether the respondent has compensated the complainant for the loss that was incurred by him due to negligence of the respondent.

    (e) Whether the complainant backs out and remains absent during the hearing.

    3.3 Nevertheless, the basic duty of adducing evidence against the respondent does lie on the complainant. These are quasi-criminal proceedings and the Disciplinary Committee has the powers of the Civil Court.

    3.4 The basic objective of the Council is to examine whether the respondent is fit to continue as a member. This is as per a Calcutta High Court decision. The Council does not have jurisdiction to examine the conduct of the complainant or a non-member. It is primarily concerned with safeguarding the credibility and image of the profession. A clear message should go to the public at large that an unscrupulous member is severely punished; and that the Code of Ethics is religiously and rigorously enforced.

    3.5 A general feeling in the society is that complaints are not processed expeditiously. There are delays and members are treated leniently. The Society expects that the Code of Ethics should be strictly implemented.

4. Reasons for delays

    4.1 Many a time, complaints are filed even after 6 to 7 years of the occurrence of alleged misconduct. The permissible time is 10 years as per Regulation 14.

    4.2 Sometimes, the complaints remain unattended at the Council for a number of years — may be due to administrative pressures or due to sudden shifts in priorities.

4.3 After a complaint is received by the Council, it is forwarded to the respondent asking him to file an explanation (written statement). That written statement is forwarded to the complainant with a request to send a rejoinder. To that rejoinder again, the respondent is asked to give his comments. Thus, both the parties get two innings. This was under old regime.

In the amended system, the last limb (comments on the rejoinder by respondent) has been eliminated. This is in respect of complaints filed on or after 28th day of February 2007. However, the Disciplinary Directorate may seek further information from the concerned parties, if required.

4.4 After this preliminary data, the Director Discipline forms a prima jacie opinion as to whether the Respondent is ‘prima facie’ guilty. Under the old system, this decision rested with the Council of 30 members. One can imagine the delay inherent in the old system.

4.5 The instant reaction of any person on receiving a complaint against him is either total nervousness; or a serious anger against the complainant. Both these extremes result in loss of objectivity. The respondent on some pretext or the other seeks extension of time to write a reply.

4.6 Normally, a member tries to hide this from his friends and colleagues; and approaches some lawyer. Lawyers can seldom appreciate the substance of the complaint in the context of our profession. If it requires knowledge of accounting standards and audit technicalities, lawyers may have serious limitations. They usually write a legalistic reply which is often in the nature of counter-attack on the complainant. As stated earlier, the Council is not much concerned with the conduct of the complainant. Thus, the reply becomes either verbose or irrelevant, in the context of our Council’s perception. It is necessary to write a concise and objective reply, by briefly describing the background. In most of the cases, a member is made a scapegoat, as an arm-twisting pressure tactic, in the dispute of the complainant with some other party. (for interesting instances, see para 6)

When a person is found ‘prima facie’ guilty, the disciplinary proceedings are deemed to have commenced. The disqualification or ineligibilities for allotment of bank audits, C & AG Audits, etc. become applicable from this point of time. It should be noted that these ineligibilities are as per the norms of the appointing authorities and not of the ICAI.

4.8 Hearing of cases under the new system is just commencing. At present, the old cases are still pending. The Disciplinary Committee (DC) has its sittings for one or two days each at various important cities in the country. In Mumbai, for example, it might visit on 4 to 5 occasions in a year.

4.9 Duration of a hearing may range from half-an-hour to 8 to 10 hours. Once or twice, a case may be adjourned at the request of the parties. During the hearing, there are witnesses summoned, examined and cross-examined, evidences adduced, submissions made, and complainants as well as respondents are interrogated. Proceedings are tape-recorded and verbatim report (minutes) are made available to the parties. There is a high degree of transparency. Sometimes, submissions are so voluminous that they may run into a couple of thousand pages.

4.10 After the hearing is concluded, it takes normally not less than 10 to 12 months to receive a report. Basically, the DC members are themselves very busy professionals.

They are on tours off and on and have many other issues to deal with. Sitting in judgment against fellow-members is a very delicate task, far from pleasant. Ordinarily, out of five members, only three of them actually sit for hearing. Either the President or the Vice-President presides over the proceedings.

4.11 The report of the DC is basically in the nature of fact finding. It is not conclusive. Under the old system, the DC report is considered by the entire Council. Members of the DC who had sat for the actual hearing at DC cannot sit in the Council while their report is considered. So also, a few other members may be disqualified. In the Council again, both the parties are represented and heard.

Before the DC, a lawyer or any member of ICAI could represent; but before the Council, only a member can represent.

4.12 After the hearing, the Council takes the decision immediately, usually by a majority vote. The Council may take any of the following decisions :

a) Send back the matter to the DC for reconsideration.

b) In case of misconduct specified in schedule I, decide whether a member is guilty and if yes, to award punishment. Since, for Schedule I, the Council’s decision is as good as final, the Council gives one more hearing to the respondent before awarding punishment – Sec. 21(4) of CA Act, 1949.

c) In respect of offences in the second Schedule, the Council has only a power to recommend to the High Court – both the aspects – viz. Whether the Respondent is guilty and if yes, what is the punishment.

For First Schedule, in case the punishment recommended is suspension of membership for a period exceeding 5 years or for life, then also, the Council has to refer it to the High Court.

4.13 Readers may be aware that the High Court in turn may take a few more years. It is thus possible that the decision may become final (unless contested in the Supreme Court) after about 15 to 20 years from the occurrence of the alleged misconduct.

5 Types  of punishment

Under the old system, there were only two types of punishment-

For First Schedule-

i) reprimand  or

ii) suspension of membership for not exceeding five years.

For Second  Schedule-

i) reprimand  or

ii) suspension of membership for any length of time.

6 Interesting (and alarming) instances

6.1 As mentioned earlier, the chartered accountant has become a very soft target. The role of a CA, especially as an auditor, is very vulnerable. There is an increasing tendency to make him a victim of disputes between two parties. The CA is totally unconnected with the dispute.

6.2 I am not trying to say that the work of the CAs in these instances was flawless. There were lacunae; but by no stretch of imagination there was any serious lapse or negligence or mala fide intention or misbehaviour. It was sheer misfortune that brought them into trouble. One very important lesson one should learn is ‘not to do anything in good faith’.

6.3 So far, I have had occasion to handle quite a few cases. The following live instances can really be eye-openers-

6.3.1 For co-operative  Societies, there is a system  that  after  consecutive   two years, the auditor should be changed. Audits are in individual name. There was a couple, both CAs. The wife did a particular audit for 2 years; followed by the husband doing it. Unfortunately, there was a legal separation proceeding between the two; and the wife lodged a complaint that the husband accepted the audit without communicating with the previous auditor.

6.3.2 A private limited company, only two shareholders – brothers; and both were directors. A reputed CA firm doing audit for more than 15 years. In one particular year, since the younger brother was busy in visa formalities since both were to travel together -auditor signed the accounts when only one – elder brother – who was MD with 60% holding – signed the accounts.

Income-tax return was filed thereafter, younger brother refused to sign and filed a complaint that the auditor signed without signature of two directors – Sec. 215 of the Companies Act.

At this juncture, let me point out that in terms of Sec. 215, it is not enough that two directors have signed. What is more important is the approval of accounts in a Board Meeting. This aspect is often overlooked. I would advise that the auditor should retain at least one copy of accounts signed by not only two, but all directors or partners as the case may be.

Interestingly, the reason behind this complaint was that the auditor had declined the complainant’s personal request to accommodate his daughter as a ‘dummy article’.

6.3.3 Mr. A – held Certificate of Practice. – but never pursued it. He was always into a business with Mr. B – Both promoters and co-directors. B’s son completed articleship under A. Unfortunately, there was a dispute between A and B. B’s son files a complaint that A was engaged in a business without obtaining the Council’s permission.

6.3.4 Situation  is all the more vulnerable in co-operative housing  societies. Invariably, there are internal quarrels. A co-operative housing society received a large sum on sale of FSI five years ago. There was no issue with the Income Tax. Due to the disputes among members and also the managing committee, one member files a case that as an honest citizen, he will approach the LT. authorities to issue notice u/s 148, make the society pay the tax and recover from auditor since he did not give proper advice! The purpose was to exert pressure on the other party by threatening the auditor.

6.3.5 A fraudulent lady entered into an ‘arrangement’ with the proprietor of 100% export business. The auditor who was basically a tax practitioner, used to do the audit basically for Sec. 44AB and 80HHC of the Income Tax Act. There was total exemption under Income Tax as well as Sales Tax. The lady in collusion with the businessman and CMD of a nationalised bank, fraudulently got a huge loan disbursed. She herself took away the money. All the three (the lady, the businessman and CMD of bank) were chargesheeted by CBI. And the lady files a complaint that she was misguided bv the audited figures. It could be r roved beyond doubt that the auditor and the accounts had no role to play in the entire deed.

Nevertheless, certain shortcomings which are inherent in any accounts were exposed and the otherwise innocent chartered accountant had to face disciplinary proceedings.

6.3.6 One proprietor CA signed the tax audit report of a medium-scale CA firm – all the partners of which were his close friends. The total collection of the firm about 10 years ago was nearing Rs. two crores.

Unfortunately, in the scrutiny assessment of the firm, it was found that on one particular day, there was a negative cash balance of a few hundred rupees. The Assessing Officer intimated this to the ICAI as a misconduct.

I repeat that in none of the cases one could say that there was no mistake at all. However, the courts have held that the charge in terms of Clause (7) of Part I of Second Schedule is that of ‘gross negligence’ and not of ‘inefficiency’. Every mistake is not a gross negligence. I am sure, these stories are representative of the present scenario.

Our fellow members will be well-advised to proceed with utmost care and caution.

What is essential is a positive perception and conviction that the Code of Ethics is for our protection. It is not a burden, but a shield.

I wish all the readers a trouble-free practice and good luck.

6.3.7 In a deal of immovable properties between Mr. A & Mr. B, Mr. C – a CA was representing Mr. B. In the course of documentation, there were certain differences. C’s presence was felt inconvenient by A and his lawyer. Hence, a complaint was filed against C that he was rendering services of ‘legal drafting’ which is not permissible for a CA.

Under the amended law, there are three types of punishments prescribed.

For First Schedule

i) reprimand

ii) suspension of membership for not exceeding 3 months; or

iii) fine not exceeding Rs. one lakh.

For Second  Schedule

i) reprimand

ii) suspension of membership for any length of time.
    
iii) fine  not  exceeding Rs. five lakhs.

Further, under the new system, the Council’s function is now entrusted to an Appellate Tribunal of five constituents.

Note: After the amendment in the year 2006, the procedure has undergone a radical change. The same will be dealt with in a separate article. At present, a number of old cases are still pending and readers need to know the real position in its perspective.

Step-down Indian subsidiaries of multinational corporations — are these public companies ?

Article

1. Multinational corporations have been carrying on business
in India through private limited companies (‘Indian Companies’) set up by them
under the Companies Act, 1956 (‘the Act’). Often, such private limited companies
are not subsidiaries of the principal holding company (which has public
shareholding), but are step-down subsidiaries of subsidiary companies of such
principal holding companies. Also, the subsidiaries which hold the shares of the
Indian Companies are themselves private companies under the laws of the relevant
jurisdictions in which they are incorporated. In such cases, a question often
arises as to whether such Indian Companies, being step-down subsidiaries of
public companies outside India, are deemed to be public companies within the
meaning of Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act. This aspect gains significance where the
Indian Company desires to issue different classes of shares. While the issue of
shares with differential rights can easily be provided for in the Articles of
Association of private limited companies, the Act prescribes a number of
restrictions in relation thereto in case of public companies. In the above
circumstances, this article discusses the provisions of S. 4 of the Act as
applicable to Indian Companies which are subsidiaries of foreign companies.


2. S. 4 of the Act explains in detail the meaning of the
terms ‘holding company’ and ‘subsidiary company’ used in the Act. Ss.(1) of S.
4, inter alia, provides that a company is a subsidiary of another if such
other company (a) controls the composition of its Board of Directors; or (b)
holds more than half of the nominal value of its equity shares; or (c) if it is
a subsidiary of any company which is the sub-sidiary of the other company (i.e.,
a step-down subsidiary). Ss.(5) of S. 4 of the Act, inter alia, provides
that for the purpose of S. 4 of the Act, the expression ‘company’ includes any
body corporate, thereby implying that even companies incorporated outside India
would be regarded as holding and subsidiary companies of Indian companies, and
that the relationship would not be restricted to companies incorporated under
the provisions of the Act. Ss.(6) of S. 4 recognises that since a relationship
of a holding and a subsidiary company would exist between a foreign company (i.e.,
a company incorporated under the laws of a foreign country) and an Indian
company, the laws under which a foreign company has been incorporated would also
have to be considered for the purpose of determining the relationship of a
holding company and a subsidiary company. Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act provides
that a private company which is a subsidiary of a body corporate incorporated
outside India (which body corporate would be regarded as a public company if
incorporated in India) would be deemed for the purposes of the Act to be a
subsidiary of a public company if the entire share capital of that private
company (incorporated in India) is not held by that body corporate
whether alone or together with one or more bodies corporate incorporated outside
India.

3. Therefore, by virtue of the provisions of Ss.(1) of S. 4
of the Act, the Indian Company would be regarded as a subsidiary of not only its
immediate holding company but also a (step-down) subsidiary of the principal
holding company (which has public shareholding). As stated above, Ss.(5)
clarifies that the term ‘company’ used in S. 4 would refer to not only a company
incorporated under the Act, but also to any body corporate incorporated outside
India and therefore for the purposes of the Act, the principal holding company
(which has public shareholding) would be a holding company of the Indian
Company. With the aforesaid background, we now discuss the manner in which the
provisions of Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act would apply to such Indian Company.

4.1 Ss.(7) of the said S. 4 is divided into two parts. The
first part
states that a private company incorporated in India would be
deemed to be a public company if it is the subsidiary of a public company
incorporated outside India. The second part of the said Ss.(7) exempts
from the provisions of this sub-section those private companies whose entire
share capital is held by a public company outside India whether alone or
together with other bodies corporate incorporated outside India.

4.2 The first part of the said Ss.(7) of S. 4 is very
wide and refers to any and every holding company of an Indian company and
therefore on a plain reading thereof, all step-up holding companies of the
Indian Company would be governed by the provisions of the first part of Ss.(7).
As a consequence thereof, even if a step-up holding company abroad is a public
company, the Indian step-down subsidiary would in terms of the said Ss.(7) be
regarded as a public company, unless exempted in terms of the second part
thereof.

4.3 The second part of Ss.(7) on the other hand is
restricted in its scope. The said second part refers only to that particular
body corporate incorporated outside India (being the holding company), which (i)
is the public company, and (ii) which holds shares of the Indian company
and does not refer to any other step-up holding company. As a consequence
thereof, the second part refers only to the immediate holding company of the
Indian subsidiary.

4.4 It is imperative that the two parts of Ss.(7) of S. 4
must be read harmoniously as a whole and not disjoint from one another. In order
to give such a harmonious interpretation it is imperative that the restricted
meaning given to the term ‘body corporate’ in the second part of Ss.(7) should
necessarily be read into the first part thereof. Therefore, for the purposes of
Ss.(7), the term ‘body corporate’ in both parts should be read to mean only that
body corporate, which directly holds shares in the private limited company
incorporated in India.

4.5 Therefore, briefly stated, for the purposes of Ss.(7) of
S. 4 of the Act, it is only the status of that company which holds shares of the
Indian subsidiary company, which is to be considered for determining as to
whether the Indian subsidiary is a subsidiary of a foreign public company.

4.6 Support in favour of the aforesaid argument is taken form the following paragraphs contained on pages 450 and 451 of “Principles of Statutory Interpretation” by Guru Prasanna Singh, Tenth Edition 2006 :

“The rule of construction noscitur a sociis as explained by Lord Macmillan means: “The meaning of a word is to be judged by the company it keeps”. As stated by the Privy Council: “It is a legitimate rule of construction to construe words in an Act of Parliament with reference to words found in immediate connection with them”. It is a rule wider than the rule of ejusdem generis; rather the latter rule is only an application of the former. The rule has been lucidly explained by Gajendragadkar, J. in the following words: “This rule, according to Maxwell, means that when two or more words which are susceptible of analogous meaning are coupled together, they are understood to be used in their cognate sense. They take as it were their colour from each other, that is, the more general is restricted to a sense analogous ) to a less general. The same rule is thus interpreted in Words and Phrases. Associated words take their meaning from one another under the doctrine of noscitur a sociis, the philosophy of which is that the meaning of the doubtful word may be ascertained by reference to the meaning of words associated with it;
……………
……………
……………

In S. 232 of the Indian Companies Act, 1913, which enacted that “where any company is being wound up by or subject to the supervision of the Court, any attachment, distress or execution put into force without leave of the court against the estate or effects or any sale held without leave of the court of any of the properties of the com-pany after the commencement of the winding up shall be void, the words ‘any sale held without leave of the court’ were construed in the light of the associated words, ‘any attachment, distress, or execution put into force’ and thereby restricted to a sale held through the intervention of the court thus excluding sale effected by a secured creditor outside the winding up and without intervention of the court.” (See M. K. Ranganathan v. Government of Madras, AIR 1955 SC 1323.)

4.7 Therefore, the provisions of Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act must be read as a whole and the second part of Ss.(7) which is more specific should necessarily be read into the first part thereof, which is general in nature.

5.1 We now consider the implications of giving a wider interpretation to the term ‘body corporate’ in the first part of Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act, so as to include within its ambit all step-up holding companies, while restricting the exemption in the second part to select Indian companies whose shares are held by bodies corporate abroad. Such an interpretation would lead to some anomalies which can be explained by the following example:

If A were a public limited company  incorporated outside India and B a private limited company incorporated in India of which the entire share capital was held by A, then by virtue of the provisions of the second part of Ss.(7), B would not be deemed under the said Ss.(7) to be a subsidiary of a public company. However, if B in turn were to have a wholly-owned subsidiary say C, then strictly speaking, while C would be a step-down subsidiary of A (being the public company incorporated outside India), the shares of C would not be held by A. Therefore, C would not enjoy the exemption given under Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act. This would lead to an absurd interpretation whereby B,being the wholly-owned subsidiary of A, would not be deemed to be a public company, but C being a wholly-owned subsidiary of Band the step-down subsidiary of A would be deemed to be a public company under Ss.(7) of 5.4 of the Act.

5.2 Therefore, the provisions of Ss.(7) of 5.4 of the Act should be interpreted harmoniously to prevent such an anomalous construction thereof. Ss.(7) of S. 4 must necessarily be construed as applying only to those private limited companies whose shares are directly held by public limited companies incorporated abroad. It is evident that the provisions of Ss.(7) of S. 4 would not and cannot apply to step-up holding companies or step-down subsidiary companies, as it would otherwise create an anomalous situation which does not appear to be intended by the provisions of the Act.

6. It is interesting to note that the provisions of Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act seem to have been done away with under the Companies Bill, 2008 (‘the Bill’), presently pending sanction of the Parliament. The implication of omission of the present Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act, in the Bill, would prima facie appear to be that the exemption available to Indian subsidiaries of foreign public companies has been withdrawn and that such subsidiary companies would also be regarded as public companies under the Act. However, the actual implication is exactly the opposite, since the other provisions of S. 4 have also been omitted in the Bill.

7. To recapitulate, for the purposes of 5.4 of the Act, the term ‘company’ includes a ‘body corporate’ and therefore Indian subsidiaries of foreign holding companies are also regarded as subsidiary companies under the Act. Such subsidiaries are regarded as ‘public companies’ under the Act if the conditions specified in Ss.(7) of S. 4 of the Act are satisfied. However, under the Bill, the terms ‘holding company’ and ‘subsidiary company’ have both been defined as follows so as to bring within their scope only ‘companies’ i.e., companies incorporated under Indian laws:

‘holding company’, “in relation to one or more other companies, means a company of which such companies are subsidiary companies”

‘subsidiary company’ or ‘subsidiary’ in relation to any other company (hereinafter referred to as the holding company), means a company in which the holding company:

i) controls the composition of the Board of Directors; or
ii) exercises or controls more than one-half of the total voting power.

Explanation: For the purposes of this clause, a company shall be deemed to be a subsidiary company of the holding company even if the control referred to in sub-clause (i) or sub-clause is of another subsidiary company of the holding company.”

8. Under the Bill, an Indian subsidiary company, being a wholly-owned subsidiary of a company registered outside India, would not be regarded as a ‘subsidiary company’ of such foreign company. The relationship of the Indian subsidiary company with the foreign holding company not being recognised under the Bill, there can be no question of the Indian company being regarded as a public company or otherwise, under the Bill merely by virtue of it being a subsidiary of a foreign public company.

9. In effect, if the Bill is passed, while Indian subsidiaries of Indian public companies would be regarded as public companies, Indian subsidiaries of foreign public companies would continue to be regarded as private companies, if so incorporated, though such an effect may never have been intended. In light of the aforesaid, provisions such as those contained in S. 4 of the Act should be incorporated in the Bill.

Assessments and Monitored (?)(!) Assessments under the Income-tax Act, 1961

Articl

All taxpayers are assessed u/s.143, u/s.147, u/s.148 and
u/s.153 of the Income-tax Act, 1961. After filing of return, when an assessee is
being assessed by an Assessing Officer, he/she is required to file his/her
submissions before the respective authority during the course of assessment. All
these assessments are popularly known as ‘Scrutiny’ assessments. In case of
these assessments, the authority before whom these proceedings are going on is
supposed to form his opinion after verifying books of accounts, documents,
submissions, proofs, evidences, statement of cross-examination of the parties
concerned, etc. by bringing on record all or some of these things from the
assessee, his/her representative and also by collecting independent evidences,
proofs, documents, etc. To collect information, the assessing authority also can
call outsiders by taking his/her statement on oath u/s.131 or u/s.133. After
doing this exercise in full or in part, if the assessing authority is satisfied
on issues arising out of the assessment proceedings, he records his findings in
respect of the said assessment and he passes an order known as assessment order.


The following information is necessary in the assessment order :

(i) Section under which the assessee is being assessed,

(ii) Assessment year for which he is being assessed,

(iii) Dates of hearing,

(iv) Date of filing return by the assessee,

(v) Amount of income at which he has assessed him,

(vi) Amount of income declared by the assessee in his
return of income,

(vii) Why the assessing authority is making addition, if
any ?

(viii) Details of records verified by him during the course
of assessment,

(ix) Date of passing assessment order,

(x) Demand, if any, arising after the assessment
proceedings. While raising the demand he will have to give proper credit of
the taxes paid by the assessee as advance tax, self-assessment tax and TDS/TCS,
if any.


While forming his opinion, he will have to give proper
consideration to the submissions made by the assessee during the course of
scrutiny. He has to consider the proofs, documents, evidences, etc. produced by
the assessee. He may verify the statements, trading, Profit & Loss A/c, balance
sheet & relevant schedules with the books of accounts of the assessee. He may
take relevant extracts of one or more accounts from the books of accounts of the
assessee. He may further cross-examine the account extract given by the assessee
with those of the extracts he has called from the relevant parties from their
own books of accounts. Such parties may be the debtors, creditors, suppliers or
customers of the assessee concerned. The Assessing Officer is supposed to know
the following important things :

(i) The nature of business,

(ii) All important characteristics of business,

(iii) Nature of transactions being carried out in the
business,

(iv) All uncommon terms used in the business under
assessment before him.


The Assessing Officer must know the following things before
starting the assessments of some uncommon types of assessees. The Assessing
Officers are generally conversant with the way of common transactions of
trading, manufacturing and professional income and its assessments, but many
times are found non-conversant with the following types of assessees and the
terminology being used in these types of businesses.


For example :

A. In lottery business :


(i) Prize Winning Tickets : In case of lottery
business, the stallholder from whom the customer purchases lottery tickets makes
the payment to the buyer of the winning lottery ticket, which has got prize. The
stallholder in turn, while making his payment to his supplier (wholesaler) makes
payment partly in terms of cash/cheque and partly in terms of these winning
tickets. This chain of payment continues till end to the govt. under which the
lottery is monitored. The amount seen on the assets side of any balance sheet of
lottery dealer (whether wholesaler, retailer, distributor, stockist or sole
stockist) is the balance of such tickets held by him on the particular day
received by him from his customers in discharge of their liability of price of
tickets. These are awaited for sending to the supplier in the chain as payment
of his cost of tickets.

(ii) Cost of Participation in Draw (CPD) : While
framing a scheme of lottery, the expenses on cost of printing tickets, royalty
payable to govt., local taxes (sales tax, octroi, etc.), profit of the parties
involved in the chain including sole distributor, cost of transport, cost of
distribution, etc. are taken into account for deciding the amount available for
distribution by way of winning, to the people taking part in the lottery. This
is termed as Cost of Participation in the Draw i.e., CPD.

(iii) Cost towards Prize Fund (CPF) : While forming a
scheme of lottery after allowing the expenses referred above which are termed as
CPD, whatever is kept for distribution by way of various prizes of lottery is
collectively termed in lottery business as Cost towards Prize Fund (CPF). This
amount remains unchanged from the govt. till the final consumer. The amount of
CPD goes on changing at each point due to addition of expenses and margin of
profit of each party involved in the chain.

(iv) Unsold Loss : After the scheduled time of draw of
a particular lottery, if some tickets remain in balance with the seller, these
tickets become non-saleable and are required to be scrapped. Amount paid as
purchase price of these tickets is known as unsold loss.

(v) Unsold Winnings : After the scheduled time of draw
of a particular lottery, if some tickets remain in balance with the seller,
these tickets become non-saleable and are required to be scrapped. Out of these
scrapped tickets if some ticket wins some prize, it is known as unsold winnings.

B. In case of a labour contractor :


(i) Mess Charges : Amount paid by the labour
contractor towards food charges of the labourers and their families is termed as
mess charges and deducted as expenditure from the income of the labour
contractor.




ii) Tent charges: Amount paid by the labour contractor towards lodging and accommodation facilities of labourers and their families is termed as tent charges and deducted as expenditure from the income of the labour contractor.

For giving proper justice to the assessment, it is necessary that the Assessing Officer should know the terms used by the assessee in his business in detail; otherwise, he cannot do proper justice to the work of assessment entrusted to him. The above detailed examples are given to elaborate the essence of knowledge of these terms to an Assessing Officer in respect of uncommon terms used in such uncommon businesses.

Many times before the higher forums of appeal, it is seen that the Assessing Officer has:

  •     Not given proper justice to the submissions made by the assessee,


  •     Not understood the nature of transaction and therefore misinterpreted it and added it to the assessee’s income,


  •     Not understood the exact nature of business of the assessee,


  •     Acted beyond  his authority,


  •     Not given proper time to the assessee for proving his case,


  •     Misinterpreted the facts brought before him by the assessee,


  •     Not called for information independently, ‘-which he could have otherwise collected easily, for want of proper justice,


  •     Not allowed the opportunity of cross-examination


  •     Not given the assessee the opportunity of natural justice,


  •     Not given the assessee the opportunity of being heard,


  •     Decided the case only with oral directions of his higher authorities without giving thought to the interpretations made by such authorities, whether the same are correct or otherwise.


  •     Decided the case on the basis of some irrelevant papers, proofs, records, etc. not related to the case.

For giving justice to the assessee, for want of proper interpretation ‘of facts of each case, for helping the Assessing Officer to interpret the facts in a proper manner, thereby to avoid the loss of revenue as well as loss of assessee, to avoid scenario of apparent mistakes or errors of facts in assessments, the system of monitored assessments must have been introduced in the statute. The intention of the statute behind introducing the above system must be to reduce unnecessary paperwork, reduction in appeals and proper justice to the assessee at the assessment stage only, due to wrong interpretation, if any which may take place because of misunder-standing of facts of each case by the assessing officer at assessment stage only. Though the intention of the statute was genuinely to help the assessee, what is the present position? The present position is not as the statute has expected at the time of its introduction, but is totally different.


The Assessing  Officer is required to act on the directions of the senior authorities. During the course of assessment, the Assessing Officer generally presents views of his senior official to the assessee or his representative in respect of a point of disagreement that, though he is satisfied with the explanation given by the assessee or his representative, the Additional Commissioner or the Administrative Commissioner to whom he has to report, is in dis-agreement with the view. He may say that the senior authorities are hardpressing for making addition on some point or the other on any of the grounds for the various reasons.

In such a situation,  generally  the assessee  or their representatives  try to narrate  the case orally before the senior authority  with or without  the consent of the Assessing Officer. In fact, such type of oral representation  has no legal standing.  In some cases, it may have helped the assessee to avoid the proposed addition.  But as opposed  to the few times the assessee  may  have  got justice  by  this  exercise  of meeting  senior  authorities  and  explaining  before them the case, in majority  of the times  the senior authorities   may  put  the  ball  in the  court  of the Assessing Officer by giving  some oral reply which is not legally binding  on them. At the same time, they direct their junior  regarding  their  own interpretation  and ask him to pass an assessment  order as per their oral directions,  which  in their opinion is the correct interpretation  of facts. On such inter-pretation,  the Assessing  Officer is bound  (though not legally) to pass the assessment  order as per the interpretation  of the senior  authority.  But, in such situations,  we tax professionals  should  not  choose this path  of meeting  and  explaining  orally  to the concerned senior authority the facts of the case, but we should choose the legal available path to come out of the situation at the assessment stage only. This gives us a legal tool for avoiding the situation of appeals and thereby avoiding expending of time, money and man-hours.


The following steps can be taken:

In case an Assessing Officer during the course of assessment is in disagreement with the views taken by the assessee and puts it that the view is not taken by him but is a directive given by his senior (Additional Commissioner/Administrative Commissioner), if an assessee or his representative finds that a particular interpretation of facts in a case is not being correctly done by the Assessing Officer, then the assessee can present his case by giving the facts in detail in writing to such senior authority (generally, an Additional Commissioner or Administrative Commissioner) of the Assessing Officer and ask him his view of the matter in writing u/s.l44-A. S. 144-A of the Income-tax Act, 1961 is a very important legal tool in our hand in the situation narrated above. In present situation, when there are a number of cases being selected for scrutiny, occurrence of such a situation may be so frequent.

S. 144-A of the Income-tax Act, 1961 reads as follows:
“A Joint Commissioner may, on his own motion or on a reference being made to him by the (Assessing) Officer or on the application of an assessee, call for and examine the record of any proceeding in which an assessment is pending and, if he considers that, having regard to the nature of the case or the amount involved or for any other reason, it is necessary or expedient so to do, he may issue such directions as he thinks fit for the guidance of the (Assessing) Officer to enable him to complete the assessment and such directions shall be binding on the (Assessing) Officer.

Provided that no directions, which are prejudicial to the assessee shall be issued before an opportunity is given to the assessee to be heard.

Explanation: For the purposes of this Section, no direction as to the lines on which an investigation connected with the assessment should be made, shall be deemed to be direction prejudicial to the assessee.”

Interpretation of the above Section clearly shows that an Additional Commissioner is bound to answer the application made under this Section. If the senior authority agrees with the view taken by the assessee, then on getting the answer in writing the lower authority is bound to accept that view in respect of the assessment and frame his assessment by considering the same. At the same time, we may file a letter in writing to the assessing authority that he may wait till the reply of application made by the assessee to the senior authority u/s.144-A is received.

The above-referred situation to the best of my knowledge, in present times, is only a theoretical situation. In day-to-day practice, neither the practitioners nor the assessees use this Section, and in effect do not use an important weapon in the hands of the assessee. This Section is a very important tool, which the assessee and practitioners may use for their benefit and thereby reduce the wastage of time and energy to some extent.

In fact, neither. the senior officers in the Income-tax Department in capacity of Administrative Commissioners or Additional Commissioners want to give their opinion in writing. What is going on practically is the hybrid mix of the Section, whereby the assessee and practitioners are put into trouble and the Departmental senior officials are not bound by anything directed by them to their juniors, as they are neither giving anything in writing to the junior officer, nor to the assessee, who is finally becoming the victim of such wrong directions. At the same time, the senior officer in the Department is not bound by any of his directions. The present practice of monitored (!) (?) assessments is therefore wrong, impractical and hence required to be immediately changed with the use of available tool of S. 144 by the assessee as well as by the tax professionals.

I sincerely feel that the present system of monitored assessments is wrong for reasons given above. The submissions made by the assessee are, in his absence, being interpreted by the Assessing Officer to his senior authorities or the senior as per his own understanding. He may interpret the submissions made by the assessee, without going into the details of the case from the assessee or his counsel. The interpretation of the senior authorities may be different if the assessee himself or his counsel explains the fact to the authority. On explanation by the assessing officer in the absence of the assessee, the senior forms his views and gives his opinion to the Assessing Officer, who in turn raises the views of the senior before the assessee, and the assessee is required to answer the questions so raised. In this system, there is every possibility of misinterpretation of facts by the senior authority, non-consideration of an important fact by the authority while forming his opinion and dictating it to his junior Assessing Officer. Also, there is every possibility of improper representation of a case by the Assessing Officer to his senior for various reasons given above, thereby resulting in injustice.

I therefore sincerely feel that the present system of monitored assessments should be changed with the use of available tool of S. 144 by the assessee as well as by the tax professionals. But in cases having higher tax stake, points raised by the higher authorities should be heard by both the Assessing -4. Officer and the monitoring authority simultaneously. Opinion formed by both of them after such hearing will have some sense. Otherwise, the present system of monitored assessments, without using the tool of S. 144-A, will result in assessments without doing proper justice to the asses sees.

Accounting for financial instruments and derivatives – Part 2

Article

In Part One, we
discussed accounting principles of recognition and measurement of two categories
of Financial Assets, viz. Financial Assets held at fair value through profit and
loss and Loans & Receivables. We now discuss the other two categories of
Financial Assets, viz. Held to Maturity and Available for Sale. Thereafter, this
Article covers accounting of Financial Liabilities.


Financial assets
— Held to maturity :

Held to
maturity
financial assets are non-derivatives with fixed or determinable
payments and fixed maturity that an entity has a positive intention and ability
to hold to maturity. These assets are initially recognised at fair value plus
transaction costs directly attributable to the transaction. They are
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method and
are tested for impairment. The methodology of the computation of effective
interest method was discussed in Part One of this series of Articles.

The amount of
loss on impairment is measured as the difference between the carrying value and
the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the effective
interest rate computed at the point of initial recognition. Such impairment can
be reversed in subsequent periods if it can be established that the event
leading to such reversal occurred after the date of recognition of the
impairment.

Merely because an
entity intends to hold the asset for an indefinite period, the asset cannot be
categorised as held to maturity. If the entity intends to sell the financial
asset as a result of changes in interest rates, risks, yields, liquidity needs,
foreign currency rates, then it cannot categorise the instrument as held to
maturity. If the issuer of the instrument has a right to settle the instrument
at a value significantly lower than its amortised cost, such an instrument
cannot be categorised as held to maturity.

An equity
instrument and perpetual debt instruments cannot be categorised as held to
maturity, as they do not have a fixed or determinable redemption date. Floating
interest rate instruments are not precluded from this classification so long as
they are not perpetual debt instruments. A default risk does not by itself
preclude this categorisation. If the instrument is callable by the issuer, the
instrument can be classified as held to maturity if at this point, the holder
can recover all or substantially all of the carrying value. If the callable
price is such that the holder cannot recover a substantial portion of the
carrying value, then such an instrument cannot be classified as held to
maturity. A puttable financial asset cannot be classified as held to maturity,
because a put feature is not consistent with intention to hold to maturity.

If the entity
transfers a held-to-maturity financial asset before maturity, the consequences
could be significantly adverse. The entity is required to reclassify its entire
held-to-maturity basket out of this basket immediately. Further, the entity is
not allowed to categorise any new financial asset as held to maturity in this
financial year and in the succeeding two financial years. Exceptions to this
treatment are few and include the following :

  • Sale of the
    financial asset as a result of significant decline in creditworthiness of the
    issuer

  • Changes in tax
    laws that may eliminate or reduce tax exempt status of such assets

  • Major business
    combination or disposition that necessitates transfer of such assets to
    maintain the entity’s risk management or interest rate policies

  • Changes in
    statutory or regulatory requirements including changes in risk weightages of
    such financial assets.

The entity’s
intention and ability to hold such financial assets to maturity are required to
be re-evaluated at each reporting date.

Available for
sale :

These are
non-derivative financial assets that are either designated as available for sale
or are not designated as any of the other three categories, viz. held at
fair value through profit and loss, loans & receivables or held to maturity.
They are measured at fair value plus transaction costs directly attributable to
the transaction on initial recognition. They are subsequently measured at fair
value without any adjustment for potential transaction costs on disposal.

However, if this
category includes any equity investments that do not have a quoted market price
in an active market and whose fair value cannot be reliably measured, then these
are measured at cost. This category of financial assets is subject to impairment
tests.

Gains and losses
on revaluation of available-for-sale financial assets are recognised in an
equity reserve account. These gains or losses are accumulated from period to
period in this account and recycled into the Profit and Loss Account on sale or
transfer of the financial asset. Dividends are recognised in the Profit and Loss
Account when the right to receive dividends is established. Interest income or
expense is recognised in the Profit and Loss Account based on effective interest
rate methodology. Impairment losses and foreign exchange gains or losses are
also recognised in the Profit and Loss Account.

Example :

Your entity
bought a G Sec for Rs.98 (Face value Rs.100, Tenor 7 years, Coupon 8% payable
annually in arrears). Let us assume for simplicity that this G Sec was bought on
day one of the accounting year. At the end of one year, the market price of this
G Sec is Rs.97.51. Your entity has categorised this G Sec as an
‘available-for-sale’ financial asset.

Let us examine
how this G Sec will be reflected in the financial statements.

The effective interest rate of the G Sec works out to 7.376%. The amortisation table for the G Sec is presented here:

The Profit and Loss Account of year one recognises an interest income of Rs.7.2285 as computed above. The difference between the carrying value as computed above (Rs.98.2285) and the market price (Rs.97.5100) is a loss of Rs.0.7185, which will be charged to reserves. The carrying value in the Balance Sheet will be Rs.97.51, which is arrived at after giving effect to interest income and mark to market impact.

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss:

This category  would comprise    of :

  • Financial  liabilities  held  for trading

  • Portfolio of financial instruments that are managed together for which there is evidence of short-term profit taking

  • Derivatives

  • Instruments which upon initial recognition are designated by the management into this category (this is permitted subject to various precedent conditions).

One may wonder what kind of financial liabilities could be held for trading. A common example is short seiling of equity shares. The entity selling short would borrow securities from the market. The entity is now obliged to return back securities to the lender. The value of such securities would appear as financial liabilities in its Balance Sheet and would fluctuate with the price of the security.

On initial recognition, these financial liabilities are recognised at fair value. Transaction costs are charged to Profit and Loss Account. Subsequently, they continue to be carried in the Balance Sheet at fair value and gains/losses in fair value are recognised in the Profit and Loss Account. These liabilities are not tested for impairment.

Other financial  liabilities:

Financial liabilities other than those carried at fair value through profit and loss are categorised as ‘other financial liabilities’. They are initially recognised in the Balance Sheet at fair value minus transaction costs directly attributable to the transaction. They are subsequently carried at amortised cost in the Balance Sheet. Interest expense computed on effective interest rate method is recognised in the Profit and Loss Account.

When held to maturity securities are reclassified into Available-for-Sale category, the difference between the carrying amount (which would typically be computed on amortised cost) and the revised carrying amount (which would typically be fair value) would berecognised in reserves. As discussed earlier, if a significant quantum of held-to-maturity assets are sold or transferred or reclassified, the entire portfolio of such assets gets ‘tainted’ and is required to be reclassified into Available for Sale. The entity is not permitted to then classify any financial asset into held to maturity basket for that financial year and the succeeding two financial years.

Where a financial asset is classified into the held to maturity category, the carrying amount on the day of reclassification is recognised as its amortised cost. In case of a financial asset with fixed maturity any amount that has been previously recognised in reserves is required to be amortised over the balance time to maturity using effective interest rate method. If the asset does not have a fixed maturity, the amount previously recognised in reserves will remain in reserves till disposal of the asset.’

De-recognition of financial assets:

The entity is required to de-recognise a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire. In the world of securitisation, transfers of financial assets involve complex conditionalities and the standard deals with such complexities in an elaborate manner. These are not discussed in this Article.

On de-recognition of an asset, the difference between its carrying amount and the sum of (a) the consideration received and (b) the amount recognised in a reserve account till date should be recognised in the Profit and Loss Account.

Example:

Your entity bought an equity share of L&T for Rs.3,200. This was revalued at the last quarter end at Rs.l,OOO.The investment revaluation reserve carries a debit balance of Rs.2,200 being the cumulative impact of revaluations from the date of purchase to the last quarter end. The entity now sells this share for Rs. 1,025 (ignoring transaction costs).

The profit and loss account will recognise a loss of Rs.2,175. This comprises a gain of Rs.25 (difference between carrying amount of Rs. 1000 and consideration of Rs.l,025) and the cumulative previously recognised losses of Rs.2,200 in reserves, which are now recycled into the Profit and Loss Account.

There appears to be no bar on such an investment revaluation reserve carrying a debit balance as per paragraph 61(b) of AS-30.

De-recognition of financial liabilities:

Financial liabilities’ are de-recognised when the liability is extinguished, that is when the obligation in the contract is discharged or cancelled or expires. An exchange between a borrower and a lender of financial instruments substantially different from existing instruments should be treated as an extinguishment of the earlier liability and a new liability should be recognised.

The difference between the carrying amount and the consideration paid, including any non-cash assets transferred or liabilities assumed, should be recognised in the Profit and Loss Account.

The Vodafone Tax Dispute — A Landmark Judgment of the Bombay High Court

Article

The ongoing tax dispute between
the Indian Tax Authorities and Vodafone in connection with taxability of the $
11.2 billion Hutch-Vodafone deal is one of the biggest controversies in Indian
multijurisdictional M&A history. The quantum of tax demand by the Indian Revenue
Authorities in this particular case could be around Rs.12,000 crore plus
interest. Further, the outcome of this dispute could also have implications on
other similar cross-border deals being scrutinised by the Indian Tax Authorities
for possible loss of tax revenue. As a result, the developments of this case are
being closely followed by many multinationals, M&A consultants and even by the
International business and tax fraternity.

We have summarised below the key
aspects of the recent landmark judgment of the Bombay High Court on the Vodafone
tax dispute and have also given our personal comments on some of the questions
generally being raised by fellow professionals post this judgment.

Background of the case :

In December, 2006, Hutchison
Telecommunications International Ltd. (HTIL), a company incorporated in Cayman
Islands and having its principal executive office at Hong Kong, held 66.9848%
interest in an Indian company, Hutchison Essar Ltd. (HEL) through a maze of
subsidiaries in British Virgin Islands, Cayman Islands and Mauritius (around 15
offshore companies) and through complicated ‘option’ agreements with a number of
Indian companies. HEL along with its Indian subsidiaries held licences for
providing cellular services in 23 telecom circles in India. The balance 33.0152%
interest in HEL was held by the Essar Group of Companies.

Vodafone (through its
Netherlands entity) entered into a share purchase agreement with HTIL in
February 2007 to acquire the said 66.9848% interest in Hutchison Essar Ltd. and
it claims to have acquired the same through purchase of the solitary share of a
Cayman Island company of the Hutch Group [viz., CGP Investments



(Holdings) Ltd. (CGP)].

The Indian Revenue Authorities
alleged that Vodafone International Holdings B.V., Netherlands (Vodafone BV) had
failed to withhold income-tax on the payment of consideration made to HTIL and,
hence, sought to assess tax in its hands as a taxpayer in default and it issued
a notice to Vodafone.

Vodafone BV had challenged the
issue of this notice before the Bombay High Court and the case was decided
against it. Vodafone filed a petition before the Supreme Court (SC); however,
the same was dismissed by the SC and it directed the Revenue Authorities to
decide whether it had jurisdiction to tax the transaction and it also said that
if the issue was decided against Vodafone BV, Vodafone BV was entitled to
challenge it as a question of law before the High Court.

The Revenue Authorities by an
order in May 2010 held that it had jurisdiction to treat Vodafone BV as an
assessee in default u/s.201 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 for failure to deduct
tax at source.

This order was challenged by
Vodafone BV before the Bombay High Court, by a writ petition. The key issue
before the HC was whether the Indian Revenue Authorities have the jurisdiction
to proceed against Vodafone BV and tax the transaction.

Primary contention of Vodafone :

The basic contention of Vodafone
was that the transaction represents a transfer of a share (which is a capital
asset) of a Cayman Island company, i.e., CGP. CGP through its downstream
subsidiaries, directly or indirectly controlled equity interest in HEL. Any gain
arising to the transferor or to any other person out of this transfer of a share
of CGP is not taxable in India because the asset (i.e., share) is not situated
in India.

Primary contention of Revenue :

The contention of the Revenue is
that the share purchase agreement between HTIL and Vodafone and other
transaction documents establishes that the subject-matter of the transaction is
not merely the transfer of one share of CGP situated in Cayman Islands as
contended by Vodafone. The transaction constitutes a transfer of the composite
rights of HTIL in HEL as a result of the divestment of HTIL’s rights, which
paved the way for Vodafone to step into the shoes of HTIL. Such transaction has
a sufficient territorial nexus to India and is chargeable to tax under the
Income-tax Act, 1961.

Decision of Bombay High Court :

The High Court dismissed the
petition of Vodafone BV and has accepted the argument of the Income-tax
Authorities that the transaction in question had a significant nexus with India
and the proceedings initiated by it cannot be held to lack jurisdiction.


    (i) The key aspects observed by the High Court :

Before analysing the facts of the instant case, the High Court made observations on certain general principles, some of which are given below :

    – Tax planning is legitimate so long as the assessee does not resort to a colourable device or a sham transaction with a view to evade taxes;

    – A controlling interest which a shareholder acquires is an incident of the holding of shares and has no separate or identifiable existence distinct from the shareholding;

       – S. 195(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961 provides for a tentative deduction of income-tax, subject to a regular assessment;

The Parliament, while imposing a liability to deduct tax has designedly imposed it on a person and has not restricted it to a resident and the Court will not imply a restriction not imposed by legislation.

        ii) Analysis of facts:
The High Court analysed the various agreements entered into by the parties (like share purchase agreement between HTIL and Vodafone BV, term sheet agreement between HTIL and Essar group for regulating the affairs of HEL which was later replaced by a similar term sheet agreement between Vodafone and Essar group, brand licence agreement granting a non-transferable royalty-free right to Vodafone BV to use IPRs for a certain period, agreement for assignment of loans to Vodafone BV, framework agreements for option rights, etc.) and the various disclosures made by the parties (like disclosures made by HTIL in its annual reports, disclosures made by Vodafone in its offer letter, disclosures made by Vodafone before the FIPB, etc.) for ascertaining the subject-matter of the transaction and the business understanding of the parties to the transaction.

        iii) Conclusions:

Based on the analysis of the above documents and disclosures, the High Court held that:

The transaction between HTIL and Vodafone BV was structured so as to achieve the object of discontinuing the operations of HTIL in relation to the Indian mobile telecommunication operations by transferring the rights and entitlements of HTIL to Vodafone BV. HEL was at all times intended to be the target company and a transfer of the controlling interest in HEL was the purpose which was achieved by the transaction. The due diligence report of Ernst & Young also emphasises this and it also suggests that the transfer of the solitary share of CGP, a Cayman Islands company was put into place at the behest of HTIL, subsequently as a mode of effectuating the goal.

The rights under the option agreements were created in consideration of HTIL financing such Indian companies for making their investments in HEL. The benefit of those option agreements with Indian companies had to be transferred to Vodafone BV as an integral part of the transfer of control over HEL.

The transfer of the CGP share was not adequate in itself to consummate the transaction. The transactional documents are not merely incidental or consequential to the transfer of the CGP share, but recognised independently the rights and entitlements of HTIL in the Indian business, which were being transferred to Vodafone BV. These rights and entitlements constitute in themselves capital assets.

For Income-tax Law what is relevant is the place from which or the source from which the profits or gains have generated or have accrued or arisen to the seller. If there was no divestment or relinquishment of HTIL’s interest in India, there was no occasion for the income to arise. The real taxable event is the divestment of HTIL’s interests which comprises in itself various facets or components which include a transfer of interests in different group entities.

Apportionment of the consideration lies within the jurisdiction of the Assessing Officer during the course of the assessment proceedings. Such an enquiry would lie outside the realm of the present proceedings.

The transaction between HTIL and Vodafone BV had a sufficient nexus with Indian fiscal jurisdiction. The essence of the transaction was a change in the controlling interest in HEL which constituted a source of income in India. Accordingly, Indian Tax Authorities have acted within their jurisdiction in initiating the proceedings against the Petitioner for not deducting tax at source. As regards the withholding obligation on a non-resident, the High Court held that once the nexus with Indian fiscal jurisdiction is shown to exist, the provisions of S. 195 would operate.

    Issues involved and our view :
1. Whether all offshore share transactions which indirectly involve transfer of underlying Indian assets are taxable in India?

Ever since the Indian Revenue Authorities initiated proceedings against Vodafone, we have been hearing this concern from everyone including many international tax experts that how can the Indian Revenue Authorities tax a transaction of sale of shares of a foreign company by one non-resident to another non-resident by taking an argument that pursuant to such sale of shares, underlying assets in India get transferred?

We believe that in the instant case, the Revenue is not seeking to tax the transaction in India on the ground that there is an indirect transfer of underlying assets situated in India on account of a transaction of transfer of shares of a foreign company. It seems that the Revenue’s contention is that on evaluation of the various transaction documents executed by HTIL and Vodafone, it can be established that the transaction itself is for transfer of composite rights including, in particular, rights under a joint venture agreement (which constitute a capital asset situated in India) and the transfer of share of an overseas company is only a mode for facilitating the transaction.

It has to be accepted that for evaluating the taxability of a transaction, one needs to first understand the true nature and character of a transaction.

The High Court before analysing the facts in the instant case, laid down the general principle that legal effect of a transaction cannot be ignored in search of ‘substance’ over ‘form’. However, the High Court has also rightly held that in assessing the true nature and character of a transaction, the label which parties may ascribe to the transaction is not determinative of its character. The nature of the transaction (i.e., ‘form’ of the transaction) has to be ascertained from the covenants of the contract and from the surrounding circumstances. The subject matter of the transaction must be viewed from a commercial and realistic perspective. The terms of the transaction are to be interpreted by applying rules of ordinary and natural construction.

After going through the facts available on record, including various public disclosures made by the Hutch and Vodafone Group and share purchase agreement and other transaction documents entered into between the parties, which have been very well analysed by the High Court in its judgment, there is no doubt in the mind of the High Court that the subject-matter of the transaction in the instant case, even in ‘form’, is not one share of the Cayman Islands Company, but it is a transfer of controlling interest (including various rights and entitlements) in HEL, India. As noted by the High Court, the acquisition of one share of the Cayman Islands company was only a mode chosen by the parties to facilitate the process.

The High Court thus rejected the submission of Vodafone that the transaction involves merely a sale of a share of a foreign company, which is a capital asset situated outside India and all that was transferred was that which was attached to and emanated from such solitary share. The High Court also noted that it was based on such false hypothesis that it was being urged by Vodafone that the rights and entitlements which flow out of the holding of a share cannot be dissected from the ownership of the share.

Thus, it is based on the detailed evaluation of the specific facts and documents of this transaction that the High Court finally concluded that the real taxable event is the divestment of HTIL’s interests in India and it accepted the argument of the Revenue that the transaction in question had a significant nexus with India and the proceedings initiated by it cannot be held to lack jurisdiction.


Hence, the High Court ruling does not at all hold that offshore share transactions which indirectly involve transfer of underlying Indian assets can be taxed in India.

2. Whether withholding is required on the entire consideration or there needs to be an apportionment?

The High Court has held that an enquiry on the aspect of apportionment of the total consideration would lie outside the purview of the proceedings before it and the aspect of apportionment lies within the jurisdiction of the Assessing Officer during the course of the assessment proceedings. Thus, it would be for the Assessing Officer to determine during the course of assessment proceedings whether there is any income out of the total consideration which cannot be said to have accrued or arisen in India or cannot be deemed to have accrued or arisen in India and hence cannot be taxed in India. The observations clearly relate to ‘assessment’ and not to deduction of tax.

It would also be relevant to note that the High Court while laying down the principles governing the interpretation of the provisions of S. 195 held that S. 195(1) provides for a tentative deduction of income-tax, subject to a regular assessment.

The High Court has only held that the composite payment by Vodafone had nexus with and included payment giving rise to income accruing or arising in India. Consequently, the High Court has decided the question before it, viz., whether the Indian Tax Authorities have the jurisdiction to take action against Vodafone for having made the payment without deducting tax as it was required to do u/s.195.

The High Court has not gone into, nor made any observations or given any decision about whether the whole or part of the payment would be liable to deduction of tax, the rate at which tax is to be deducted, etc. The High Court was not required to and has expressed absolutely no views on any of these matters which the Officer has to adjudicate.

3. Is there an inconsistency in the observation made by the High Court on the aspect of controlling interest not being a capital asset and its final conclusion?

The High Court before analysing the facts in the instant case, laid down the general principle that the controlling interest which a shareholder acquires is an incident of the holding of shares and has no separate or identifiable existence distinct from the shareholding. After a detailed evaluation of the specific facts and documents of this transaction, the High Court finally concluded that the essence of the transaction was a change in the controlling interest in HEL which constituted a source of income in India. With due respect to the High Court, is there an inconsistency in the observation made by the High Court and its final conclusion?
        
In our view, there is no inconsistency, as the entire order needs to be read harmoniously. The term ‘controlling interest’ in the general principle laid down by the High Court that ‘the controlling interest which a shareholder acquires is an incident of the holding of shares and has no separate or identifiable existence distinct from the shareholding’ seems to refer to controlling interest acquired as an incidence of acquisition of a particular number of shares. The High Court has not made any general observations about a case where the subject matter of the transfer is the ‘controlling interest’ and the requisite number of shares are transferred or delivered, directly or indirectly, for achieving the transfer of the ‘controlling interest’. In any case, the term ‘controlling interest’ used by the High Court in its final conclusion represents the entire business interest of HTIL in the Indian mobile telecommunication operations, i.e., HTIL’s interest in HEL, which includes (a) Equity interest of 42.34% held by HTIL through its subsidiaries (b) Equity interest of 9.58% held by HTIL through minority equity holdings of its subsidiaries in certain Indian companies which in turn held equity interest in HEL (c) Rights (and call and put options) representing HTIL’s economic interest in 15.03% equity of HEL (d) Assignment of loans (e) Other rights and entitlements.

Further to the above, it may also be worthwhile to evaluate if the above general principle will hold good in a situation where the transaction between the parties incidentally results in the acquisition of controlling interest in a subsidiary company (say, an Indian company) as a consequence of transferring shares of an overseas parent company. The same does not seem to have been evaluated by the High Court in the instant case, may be because such evaluation was not necessary here as the transaction was for transfer of entire business interest in HEL which included various rights and entitlements which anyway could not have been transferred in the manner in which they were transferred by the transfer of one share of CGP and the consideration was for the transfer of such entire business interest as a package.

4. Will the Vodafone case create a negative perception of India in the eyes of foreign investors?

As could be seen from the High Court order, the action of the Indian Tax Authorities in this particular case is based on a proper and detailed analysis of the facts and circumstances of this case and the relevant provisions under the domestic Income-tax law which are very widely worded. It is important to note that no tax treaty is applicable in this particular case and hence it is not a case that the Indian Government is not honouring its commitment to foreign investors by proposing to tax the impugned transaction in the case of Vodafone. Also, here it is not the claim of Vodafone that there is double taxation on the income from the transfer of controlling interest in HEL. Further, it has to be appreciated that tax cost is only one of the various costs of a business and business decisions are not taken entirely on the basis of tax cost.

The order of the High Court has not been stayed by the Supreme Court, on the contrary the Supreme Court directed the Income-tax Department to pass an order to quantify the tax liability. Thus, the action of the tax authorities in this particular case has not only been held as reasonable and not without substance, but also legal, and it will be taken in the right perspective by foreign investors and it should not have an adverse impact on M&A activity in India.

Are MAT companies liable to advance tax ?

Article

Currently companies are required to pay MAT tax if the tax
payable under normal provisions of the Act is lower than 10% (15% w.e.f. A.Y.
2010-11) of the book profit as defined u/s.115JB of the Act. An issue which
arises is whether an assessee liable to MAT should pay interest u/s.234B and
u/s.234C for shortfall in payment of advance tax.


Bombay High Court in Snowcem India Ltd. :

Recently the Bombay High Court in the case of Snowcem India
Ltd. (313 ITR 170) had an opportunity to consider this issue in the context of
S. 115JA of the Act. The Court held that S. 115JA is same or similar to S. 115J
of the Act. It further held that since the Karnataka High Court’s decision in
Kwality Biscuits Ltd. was affirmed by the Supreme Court by dismissing the
appeals, it was binding on them. Accordingly, the Bombay High Court allowed the
appeal in favour of the assessee.

It may be noted that the Bombay High Court in Snowcem has
held that the terminology in S. 115JA is the same or similar as that contained
in S. 115J. Attention is invited to the fact that the wordings in S. 115JA(4)
and S. 115JB(5) which provide that ‘save as otherwise provided in this Section
all other provisions of this Act would be applicable’ were not present in the
earlier S. 115J of the Act. Also the Finance Act in the years when S. 115J was
applicable did not provide for payment of advance tax on income chargeable
u/s.115J of the Act as is currently provided. This distinction is explained as
follows :

Section

115J

115JA

115JB


Assessment year onwards

1988-89 
to 1990-91

1997-98
to 2000-01

2001-02


All other  provisions applicable

115JA(4)

115JB(5)


Advance tax payable as per Finance Act

S. 2(8)

It appears that the provisions of S. 115JA(4) were not
considered by the High Court leading to the conclusion that the terminology is
the same.

Karnataka High Court in Kwality Biscuits Ltd. :

This issue was earlier addressed by the Karnataka High Court
in the case of Kwality Biscuits Ltd., 243 ITR 519 in the context of S. 115J of
the Act. The Karnataka High Court considering the contention of the assessee
held that for the purpose of assessing tax u/s.115J, firstly, the profit as
computed under the Income-tax Act has to be prepared, thereafter the book profit
as contemplated by the provisions of S. 115J are to be determined and then the
tax is to be levied. The liability of the assessee for payment of tax u/s.115J
arises if the total income as computed under the provisions of the Act is less
than 30% of its book profits. The Court then observed that since the entire
exercise of computing the income or that of book profit could be only at the end
of the financial year, the provisions of S. 207, S. 208, S. 209 or S. 210 cannot
be made applicable, until and unless the accounts are audited and the balance
sheet is prepared as even the assessee may not know whether the provision of S.
115J would be applicable or not. Accordingly, the Court held that interest could
not be charged u/s.234B and u/s.234C of the Income-tax Act. The judgment of the
Karnataka High Court was contested by way of SLP to Supreme Court which passed
an order dismissing the appeals (284 ITR 434).

Bombay High Court in Kotak Mahindra Finance Ltd. :

It may be mentioned here that the Bombay High Court in Kotak Mahindra Finance Ltd. (265 ITR 119) had taken the view that even in a case covered by S. 115J the provisions of S. 234B and S. 234C were attracted. While deciding the issue the learned Bench of the Court negated the contention as raised on behalf of the assessee that provisions of S. 234B and S. 234C are not attracted in cases falling u/ s.115J as book profits were determinable after the end of the financial year. The Court held that the difficulty faced by the assessee in the matter of computation cannot defeat the liability for payment of advance tax and that u/ s.207 of the Income-tax Act, advance tax is payable during any financial year in respect of the ‘current income’. The Court held that the words ‘current income’ refer to computation of total income under the provisions of the Income-tax Act including S. 115J. The Court further observed that u/s.207 of the Income-tax Act the words ‘total income’ have been equated to the expression ‘current income’. The Court held that the interest leviable u/ s.234B and u/ s.234C is compensatory in nature and it has no element of penalty. Therefore, if there is non-payment or short payment of tax on the current income, then the assessee has to pay interest as the income has accrued to the assessee for the previous year. The distinction sought to be made in respect of companies falling u/s.115J was not accepted. While holding so, the learned Bench observed that the view being taken is supported by the judgment of the Gauhati High Court in the case of Assam Bengal Carriers Ltd. v. CIT, (1999) (239 ITR 862) as also the judgment of the Madhya Pradesh High Court in the case of Itarsi Oils and Flours (P) Ltd. v. ClT, (2001) (250 ITR 686). The Court further held that they disagreed with the judgment of the Karnataka High Court in the case of Kwality Biscuits Ltd. v. ClT, (2000) (243 ITR 519).

Legislative history of MAT:

Let us look at the legislative history of the Sections and how it has been amended from time to time.

Initially S. 115J was inserted by the Finance Act, 1987 as per which tax at the regular rates on 30% of the book profit was levied if the same was found to be more than the total income computed under the Act. S. 115J(1) provided that where the total income computed under the Act is found to be less than 30 per cent of the book profit the total income of the assessee, shall be deemed to be an amount equivalent to 30% of such book profit. Thus, the concept of ‘deemed total income’ emerged. The liability to pay MAT would arise only on the determination of book profits which by necessary implication could be determined only after the accounts are audited as held in Kwality Biscuits case. S. 115J ceased to be effective from the A.Y. 1991-92.

The scheme of MAT, however, was revived effective from A.Y. 1997-98 by insertion of a new charging S. 115JA and under the said provision where the total income computed under the provisions of the Act was found to be less than 30% of the book profit, the total income chargeable to tax would be deemed to be an amount equivalent to 30% of the book profit. S. 115JA operated up to and including
 
A.Y. 2000-01 when it gave way for another charg-ing S. 115JBeffective from A.Y. 2001-02. It was different from its predecessor in one respect in not seeking to deem any total income but providing for tax payable to be deemed at 7.5% of such book profit. S. 115JB was amended by the Finance Act, 2002 with retrospective effect from 1-4-2001 substituting for the words ‘the tax payable for the relevant previous year shall be deemed to be seven and one-half percent of such book profit’ the words ‘such book profit shall be deemed to be the total income of the assessee and the tax payable by the assessee on such total income shall be the amount of income-tax at the rate of 7.5%’. The main difference between the provision as introduced initially and later amended is that the former provided for an obligation to pay tax at 7.5% of the book profit without deeming the book profit to be total income.

S. 115JB as it stands    now  is as follows:

1) Notwithstanding anything contained in any other provision of this Act, where in the case of – an assessee, being a company, the income-tax, payable on the total income as computed under this Act in respect of any previous year relevant to the assessment year commencing on or after 1-4-2007 is less than 10% of its book profit, such book profit shall be deemed to be the total income of the assessee and the tax payable by the assessee on such total income shall be the amount of income-tax at the rate of 10%.”

2) Every assessee, being a company, shall, for the – purposes of this section, prepare its profit and loss account for the relevant previous year in accordance with the provisions of Parts 11and III of Sched ule VI to the Companies Act, 1956 (1 of 1956).

…………………
…………………

5) Save as otherwise provided in this section, all other provisions of this Act shall apply to ev-ery assessee, being a company, mentioned in this section.”

CBDT Circular No. 13/2001 was issued on 9-11-2001 clarifying that all companies are liable for payment of advance tax under the new MAT pro-visions of S. 115JB of the Act. It is abundantly made clear in the said Circular that the new provisions of S. 115JB as introduced by the Finance Act, 2000 are a self-contained Code. Ss.(l) lays down the manner in which income-tax payable is to be computed.

Ss.(2) provides for computation of ‘book profit’. Ss.(5) specifies that save as otherwise provided in this section, all other provisions of this Act shall apply to every assessee, being a company mentioned in that section. The Circular clarifies that except for substitution of tax payable and the manner of computation of book profits, all the provisions relating to charge, definitions, recoveries, payment, assessment, etc., would apply in respect of the provisions of this Section.

The Circular further goes on to explain the scheme of the Income-tax Act. S. 4 of the Act charges to tax the income at any rate or rates which may be prescribed by the Finance Act every year. S. 207 deals with liability for payment of advance tax and S. 209 deals with its computation based on the rates in force for the financial year, as are contained in the Finance Act. The first proviso to S. 2(8) of the Finance Act, 2001 provides that tax would be payable by way of advance tax in respect of income charge-able u/s.115JB as introduced by Finance Act, 2000. The Circular clarifies that consequently the provisions of S. 234B and S. 234C for interest on default in payment of advance tax and deferment of advance tax would also be applicable.

This was the view  taken  by  the  Karnataka   High Court in the case of Jindal Thermal  Power  Co. Ltd. 286 ITR 182 in the context of S. 115JB. This view has also been taken by the Mumbai  Tribunal  in Madaus Pharmaceuticals  P. Ltd. 24 SOT 180 following  Karnataka High Court in Jindal Thermal Power Co. Ltd.

It may be appropriate to mention that the Mumbai Tribunal in Deepak Fertilizer and Petrochemicals Corporation [304 ITR (AT) 167], the Cochin Tribunal in Escapade Resorts P. Ltd. (13 SOT 300) and the Bangalore Tribunal in IBM India Ltd. [290 ITR (AT) 183] have in the context of S. 115JA taken a view in favour of the assessee following the principle laid down by the Supreme Court in Kwality Biscuits Ltd.

Ahmedabad Special Bench in Ashima  Syntex Ltd. :

However, attention is invited to the Ahmedabad Special Bench decision in the case of Ashima Syntex Ltd. 310 ITR (AT) 1. The Special Bench has held that the aforesaid decision in the case of Kwality Biscuits Ltd. was not rendered in the context of the provisions of S. 115JA of the Act. The Special Bench has analysed various decisions in detail. It has stated that for the purpose of payment of advance tax, all the assesses including companies, are required to make an estimate of their current income. Even before the introduction of the provisions of S. 115J of the Act, companies had been estimating their total income after providing deductions admissible under the Act. In fact, all the assesses who maintain books of account have to undertake this exercise for the purpose of payment of advance tax. If a profit and loss account can be drawn up on estimate basis for the purpose of the Income-tax Act, it is not understood as to why a similar profit and loss account on estimate basis under the Companies Act cannot be drawn up. If the explanation of the companies that the profits u/s.115JA of the Act can only be determined after the close of the year were to be accepted, then no assessee who maintains regular books of account would be liable to pay advance tax as in those cases also, income can only be determined after the close of the books of account at the end of the year. The provisions of S. 207 to S. 209 of the Act do not exclude the income determined u/s.115JA of the Act from the purview of current income on which advance tax is payable. Similarly, there is no scope for considering the hardship of the assessee as the levy is automatic and does not require any opportunity to be given to the assessee. S. 4 of the Act envisages charge to tax the income at any rate or rates which may be prescribed by the Finance Act every year and S. 207 deals with liability for payment of advance tax and S. 209 deals with its computation based on the rates in force for the financial year, as are contained in the relevant Finance Act.

Accordingly the Special Bench has held that all other provisions of the Act including provisions relating to payment of advance tax are applicable even when income is computed u/s.115JA of the Act.

Conclusion:

It may be concluded that subsequent to incorporation in the Finance Act of the requirement for payment of advance tax by companies falling u/s.115JB, there can be no doubt in the matter. Considering the difference in the language of S. 115J and S. 115JA/ S. 115JB,provisions of the Finance Act and the view taken by Ahmedabad Special Bench and the Karnataka High Court, MAT companies would be liable to pay advance tax u/s.115JB. If they don’t do so they may land up paying heavy interest u/ s.234B and u/s.234C which is not tax deductible.

Recent Developments In Service Tax And VAT Related to Construction Industry

Article

In the budget for 2010 both the Central and State Governments
have made certain amendments to levy tax on sale of immovable property under
construction, to enhance their revenue and to overcome certain judicial
pronouncements. An attempt is made to discuss the implications of the above
amendments on the real estate transactions. This article does not discuss the
legal validity of the amendments brought about by the Central and State
Governments, but explains the same assuming that the amendments are
constitutionally valid.


Service tax :

By the Finance Act, 2010 the Government has amended the
definition of Commercial or Industrial Construction Service [S. 65 (25b) read
with S. 65 (105) (zzq)] and construction of Residential Complex [S. 65 (30a)
read with S. 65 (zzzh)].


The scope of these categories is expanded to cover sale of
flats/units under construction.
Builders/developers are now liable to
service tax if any payment towards sale consideration is received before the
grant of completion certificate by the competent authorities for such
flats/units. This amendment overrides the Gauhati High Court’s decision in the
case of Magus Construction Private Limited v. UOI, (2008 11 STR 225).

Therefore, if a builder/developer receives the entire sale
consideration for flats/units after the issue of completion certificate, the
same is not liable to service tax.

There is an abetement of 75% of the sale value. Thus, tax
will be levied on 25% of the sale value of flat at the rate of 10.3%. For
example, if the agreement value of a flat sold under construction is
Rs.50,00,000, then service tax @ 10.3% is payable on Rs.12,50,000, which works
out to 1,28,750. Thus, there will be an additional burden of 2.6% on the
agreement value of the flat. The amendment will be effective from the date to be
notified by the Central Government.

Vat :

The Maharashtra Government in the State budget has also
introduced a new composition scheme on sale of under construction property along
with land or interest in land @ 1% of the agreement value. The scheme is
effective from 1st April, 2010 but the Notification in respect of the same about
the manner in which the tax is to collected by the builder/developer has not yet
come. There is no set-off for inputs.

It may be noted that already a composition scheme @ 5% is in
operation, which is effective from 20th June, 2006 i.e., the date on
which the transfer of property under construction was brought within the ambit
of VAT.

It may further be noted that the levy of tax on property
under construction itself is challenged by the Maharashtra Chamber of Housing
Industry (MCHI), an association of builders by a writ petition in the Bombay
High Court (being Tax writ petition No. 2022 of 2007). The main issue
involved in the writ petition is the competency of the State Legislature to
enact the definition of Works Contract in the manner which suggests its
applicability to the builders/developers, in addition to the contractors.

The definition talks about transfer of property in goods in the execution of
works contract including the building, construction, . . . . . The Government is
competent to levy tax on construction (sale of goods involved in construction).
Article 366 read with Article 246 (2) of the Constitution has authorised it to
do so. But power to levy tax on building; i.e., sale of flats is
unimaginable. It appears that prima facie the High Court is convinced
about this position and ordered interim relief for the members of the
Association. The High Court has directed that the members of the MCHI should not
be treated as ‘dealers’ liable to tax under the MVAT Act, 2002 in respect of
sale of flats on ownership basis under the Maharashtra Ownership Flats Act, 1963
(MOFA Act), provided such members of MCHI submit the data and documents as
mentioned in the Court order. Thus, such members of MCHI have been absolved from
registration and also from assessments till the disposal of the petition.
However, the developers who are not members of the Association are not protected
by the Court order.

It seems that to divert the attention of the public from the
Court matter, the Government has introduced a new composition scheme @ 1% on the
agreement value of the transfer of flat/unit under construction without
providing any deduction for land, etc.


There is an impression in the mind of people that this is a
new amendment and only under construction flats/units sold after 1st April, 2010
are chargeable to VAT @ 1%. This is not so, the amendment regarding tax on
flat/unit under construction is effective from 20th June, 2006
. In this
budget the Government has come out with a new composition scheme of 1% of
agreement value without any deduction for land against earlier composition
scheme of 5%.

Though the new composition scheme is effective for the
flat/units registered on or after 1st April, 2010, the Notification in respect
of the same has not been issued. In the absence of the Notification the builders
are in a dilemma as to how and in what manner the tax is to be collected as the
full sale price is not collected at the time of executing agreement for
flat/unit which is under construction.

Thus in the hands of purchaser the overall cost of the
flat/unit may increase by about 3.6% of the agreement value by way of service
tax and VAT. In the given example of Rs.50,00,000 value of flat, the additional
cost by way of service tax will be Rs.1,28,750 and by way of VAT will be Rs.
50,000 making it a total of Rs.1,78,750.

It is pertinent to note that the above cost can be avoided if a ready flat
is purchased after the builder obtains completion certificate.

levitra

‘Corporate Governance’ and agency theory

Introduction :

‘Corporate Governance’ — these words have been hitting the
headlines of financial magazines for quite some years, particularly post Enron,
and in India they have once again triggered debates post Satyam scam. Satyam
— this word would no longer be used as an adjective to signify the attribute of
truthfulness, but will now be used as a noun to signify systemic failure in
history of Indian corporate governance system. Satyam story holds within it,
legion of myriad hidden lessons for a spectrum of bodies, from directors to
investors and from auditors to regulators.

A lot has been and will be written and discoursed on the
concept of corporate governance and its raison d’être. This article
discusses one of such aspects. In the first part, it highlights the portent of
Adam Smith and tries to prove how Adam Smith had prescient of the inherent flaw
in the model — ‘Corporation’. The second part advocates a prescription
for good governance practice.

Smith’s Portent & Prophecy :

Corporations today are based on, ‘Agency Theory’ (a
branch of organisational behaviour) wherein the owners of funds (alias
principals) invest their money in a company that is managed by altogether
different group of people called directors and managers (alias agents);
this agency relationship between the shareholders and directors is based on the
premise of trust; shareholders lend their money to directors under trust that
the latter shall deploy the money in a manner that would maximise shareholders’
interests.

Agency Theory is defined by Chartered Institute of Management
Accountants as — ‘Hypothesis that attempts to explain elements of
organisational behaviour through an understanding of the relationships between
principals (shareholders) and agents (directors and managers). A conflict may
exist between the actions undertaken by agents in furtherance of their own self
interest and those required to promote the interest of principals.’


Some of the instances wherein a conflict can exist between
owners and managers can be :


à Managers
are interested in short-term profits against long-term shareholders’ value, as
it has positive impacts on their compensation, incentives, bonus and
promotion. The episode of sub-prime crises in United States exemplifies this
conflict wherein the investment bankers and financial institutions took
recourse to highly complex derivative products in order to inflate short-term
profits and thereby inflate their incentives.


à Management
myopia on short-term profits also motivates them to resort to creative
accounting, inflating the top line and bottom line. Enron’s episode best
exemplifies such myopia where the company resorted to creative accounting to
show better profitability.


à Quite
often, managers having financial interest in their own company tend to send
wrong cues to the market in order to inflate the share prices and ultimately
increase their own wealth.


à Managers
deploy shareholders’ funds in risky investments so as to get quick and
immediate returns, at the cost of preserving shareholders’ wealth.


à
Shareholders’ funds are siphoned into projects in which the management may
have personal interest; examples of this can be — deploying funds in a company
that is owned by a relative of the managing director or awarding a contract to
a vendor company that is operated by a relative of one of the executives.


à Managers of
companies that are subject to a takeover bid often put up a defence to repel
the predator, even though such a takeover may be in the long-term interest of
shareholders of the acquired company; managers of the acquired company do so
in fear of losing their jobs or status to the managers and functional heads of
the predator company.


Adam Smith, known as father of economics, was highly cynical
and pessimistic about the success of corporation as a model of creating wealth
and pursuing economic growth. The entire idea of dilution of ownership, whereby
the owner and manager of funds are two different groups/persons, was not at all
invidious to Smith. Smith had prescience of the inherent and institutional flaw
in the model of corporations. He wrote in his book ‘The Wealth of Nations’
(abbreviated name for An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the
Wealth of Nations’) :


‘The directors of such companies . . . . being the managers
of other people’s money rather than of their own, it cannot well be expected
that they should watch over it with the same anxious vigilance with which the
partners in a private co-partnery frequently watch over their own. Like
stewards of rich man, they are apt to consider attention to small matters as
not for their master’s honour and very easily give themselves a dispensation
from having it. Negligence and profusion, therefore, must always prevail,
more or less, in the management of the affairs of such a company . . .’


This statement of Smith came in 1776, almost 200 years after
incorporation of East India Company in 1600 — the Company that ruled India and
which was the first company to hold democratic general meeting of shareholders
and was later on accused of mis-management aimed at generating personal gain (in
violation of the ‘agency theory’).

Smith believed so strongly in the power of self interest and
the conflicts it generates, that he was extremely pessimistic about the ability
of the joint stock company to survive in any but the simplest of activities
where management’s behavior could be easily monitored.

Without a monopoly a joint stock company cannot long
carry on any branch of foreign trade. To buy in one market, in order to sell,
with profit, in another, when there are many competitors in both; to watch
over, not only the occasional variations in the demand, but the much greater
and more frequent variations in the competition, or in the supply which that
is likely to get from other people, and to suit with dexterity and judgment
both the quantity and quality of each assortment of goods to all these
circumstances, is a species of warfare of which the operations are continually
changing, and which can scarce ever be conducted successfully, without such an
unremitting exertion of vigilance and attention, as cannot long be expected
from the directors of a joint stock company
’.

Smith had strong surmise about the sustainability of a corporation without it being granted a state monopoly. Only activities where this model can work, according to Smith, were those that were easily monitored; Smith implicates this when he says in his words – “which all the operations are capable of being reduced to what is called a routine, or to such a uniformity of method as admits of little or no variation”.

Smith was well aware of the benefits of corporations, including their ability to concentrate large amounts of money into capital-intensive undertakings. But he thought and believed that:

  • The costs of agency relationship would always I.be too high. (Today there is intense debate in the USA on ‘managerial remuneration’.)

  • Those costs shall rise with the increase in size of business.

  • Bigger a business got, the worse would be waste because of negligence.

  • Negligence, profusion and conflict of interest would ruin the corporation as its business scaled high and it would be predicament for anyone to preclude these costs, by whatsoever checks, balances, controls and regulations being instituted. (Pending outcome of investigation, it was negligence and profusion that resided at the bottom of Satyam pyramid.)

These agency costs viz. negligence, profusion and conflict of interest, are today reflected in the form of corporate debacles, be it Enron, World-corn or Satyam. It is sad, but the fact is that Smith has been proven right hitherto specifically in last decade if one is to go purely on regression analysis.

Smith’s prophecy that ‘negligence and profusion must always prevail’ made 200 years before, still holds good today. The irony is: it is only now when we realise the unfathomable truth in his profound statement.

To conclude: Enron brought a sea change in our perspective towards corporate governance; it had its own lessons to teach and so would Satyam. Stringent and vigilant controls would be instituted by regulatory bodies, in the form of codes, rules, audits, and peer reviews; investigations will be carried out, special committees will be appointed, white papers will be issued and; significant amount of research would be done in investigating why this happened, how this happened, could it have been prevented or at least predicted, what to do to prevent its re-occurrence, who should be held responsible, how should they be punished, etcetera. How-ever, the fact is and as Smith aptly wrote, this model of corporation possesses an inherent flaw and this would time and again be reflected in the form of more Enrons and Satyams. These are bound to take place in future, irrespective of checks and balances because of the inherent greed and conflict of interest.

Prescription for good governance practice:


In the midst of academic debate as to what constitutes good governance practices, below are a few canons that inter alia form the basis for good governance. These are simple principles and values taken from different sources of management theory that have been practised at different times in history. Co-incidentally, these canons also happen to be in order of vowels of English literature (AEIOU) and therefore, one may also term them as vowels of good governance practice.

1. Altruism:
Etymologically, altruism origins from the word alter, which is the latin word for other. An altruist is a person who works for the benefit of others and who is more concerned with welfare of others. Likewise, the board and management need to practise altruism, whereby their actions are directed in maximising interest of shareholders and other stakeholders, instead of their own.

2. Egalitarianism:
Egalitarianism is a principle or belief that all the people are equal and deserve equal rights and opportunities. Relating it to ‘governance practice’, it basically means that board should adopt a stakeholder approach, rather than a shareholders’ approach in performing its actions.

Lately, although stakeholder approach has been adopted by academia, it has not been reflected in governance practice in real life. In fact, in Germany the legal system itself mandates explicitly that firms do not have a sole duty to pursue the interest of shareholders and that other stakeholders also need to be represented on the board. The Germans have the system of co-determination, in which employees and shareholders in large corporations share an equal number of seats on the supervisory board of the company, so that the interests of both are taken into account. Japan and France have also adopted stakeholders’ approach in governance of companies. This is not the case in other developed countries like US and UK. Even in India, the directors on board represent and are accountable to shareholders. However, several reports now advocate a ‘Stakeholder’ approach and advocate the three P approach to governance.

3. Integrity and independence:
Integrity is the attribute of having moral principles; being straightforward and honest. It means being ethical in discharging one’s duty. In terms of governance, it primarily means being transparent in disclosing information to shareholders and other stakeholders.

Independence stands for the strength of an individual to adopt an unbiased view on the matters, undaunted by any favour or frown. Relating it to governance practice it means the board must be independent in its actions whereby it should not be subordinated by the wishes or directions of management. This particular attribute of governance is one of the imperative corner stones of good governance practice.

4. Oracle:
Oracle is basically a noun, rather than an adjective. It means having a vision and an ability to foresee future. In terms of governance practice it means that the board needs to have vision and provide strategy to management for execution. One of the important roles of a board is to set objectives – objectives that translate long-term vision of the board, which is in the interest of stakeholders.

5. Utilitarianism:
Utilitarianism is a doctrine that emphasises that actions are right if they are useful or for the benefit of a majority; it emphasises: greatest happiness of greatest number. This is one of the most precious attributes that one can gain from Indian epics, both Ramayana and Mahabharata. This attribute also augments the canon of egalitarianism.

The board while dealing with different interests of different stakeholder groups cannot satisfy all the interests of all the stakeholders at the same time. There are bound to be conflicts between interests of different stakeholders. For instance – shareholders may often question the expenditure on corporate social responsibility as it ultimately impacts their dividend. The board is often confronted with such a dilemma wherein interest of two or more stakeholders conflict. It is at this point where the board needs to exercise the canon of utilitarianism i.e., it must act in a manner that provides greatest benefit to greatest number.

Auditing Beyond Compliance

Article

1. Background :


It is a matter of general perception that the role of the
auditor is only to do whatever in order to issue an opinion of ‘true and fair’
on the financial statements of the company under audit. Statutory audit cannot
therefore be perceived to do anything beyond audit of the relevant books of
account, obtaining explanations and representations from management and other
relevant stakeholders such as banks, suppliers and customers.

The role of the auditor together with the duties and
responsibilities are contained in several provisions of the Companies Act. The
said Act and the ICAI’s Code of Ethics are very specific in terms of the roles
and responsibilities of the auditor and the ‘bounds’ within which he should
operate. The Companies Act of 1956 and the Code of Ethics of the ICAI also deal
at length with the issues relating to ‘independence’ and under which, there can
be various penalties for non-compliance.

In addition, the general understanding of the role of audit
on the part of auditors is that it is a compliance function where the auditor is
appointed to audit the books of accounts for a very specific purpose and that is
to express an opinion of ‘true and fair’. More importantly, the perception is,
had it not been for the requirement under the Companies Act, it is possible that
the client would dispense with this service.

The aforesaid factors have, in one manner or the other, had
their impact on the auditor who believes that his role is that of a compliance
officer of the company that he audits.

Companies also share the general perception that audit is
primarily a ‘compliance’ function and therefore, the auditor should restrict his
role to that of a compliance officer. This thinking sometimes also arises on
account of the belief that auditors do not ‘add value’ beyond audit of the books
of accounts; companies perceive that audit as a function exists to meet
requirements prescribed under the Companies Act with regard to proper
maintenance of books of account.

A number of accounting firms also believe that audit is
purely a compliance function and have therefore set limitations on every aspect
of their work. As a result, clients perceive very little ‘value add’ in terms of
the services rendered and whatever doubts that existed in their minds about the
role of audit gets further confirmed. Companies also use this argument whilst
fixing or negotiating auditor’s fees, little realising the services the auditor
renders.

The purpose of the article is to highlight the fact that
‘looking beyond compliance’ is very much within the overall role of compliance,
except that we need to understand the fact that it is important to shed the
traditional thinking that the role of the auditor begins and ends with pointing
out errors in accounting, non-compliance with law and getting them rectified or
reported.

2. Widening the horizon : What does ‘Auditing Beyond Compliance’ mean !


The perception of audit as a compliance function has to start
with the auditors recognising the fact that they cannot be putting ‘fetters’ on
themselves by playing merely the role as ‘compliance officers’. The important
thing to understand at this stage is, what does ‘auditing beyond compliance’
actually mean. Most professionals imagine this entails adding value in terms of
identifying areas for cost reduction and control, process improvements through
the identification of processes that do not add value, etc. Auditing Beyond
Compliance need not always involve going beyond the normal call of duty as an
auditor as one can see in the following paragraphs :

A. Adopting a pro-active approach to audit :


Most auditors fail to recognise the importance and value in
adopting a pro-active approach to auditing. Transparency and proactivity can
build trust and the auditor must recognise that this policy works in almost all
cases. For example, many auditors involve their client personnel in important
decision making such as planning of the audit. Client staff is invited for
sessions where the audit approach is explained at a broad level; what are
auditor’s expectations from the client in terms of information, the timing of
information, etc., providing general guidance to client staff in the preparation
of certain audit schedules without getting into ‘conflict of interest’
situations, etc. are some of the simple ways of going beyond compliance. Client
staff becomes very comfortable dealing with auditors who work alongside them and
help them understand and address some of the complex requirements. Helping
client staff in various procedures involved in a simple stock-take can add
value. For example, auditors can provide critical inputs in helping client staff
keep the production area clean and demarcated to facilitate stock-count.
Similarly, many auditors transfer knowledge on important areas such as revenue
recognition to enable client staff to record revenue correctly. Cut-off
procedures invariably pose a challenge and the auditor can provide inputs to
client staff achieve effectiveness of cut-off procedures. The auditor can add
significant value in the process of assisting clients without compromising on
his independence as auditor.

B. Partnering clients :


In addition to assisting clients during course of audit, many
auditors partner clients in many other ways: For example, clients face
difficulties in understanding the implications of new accounting standards and
therefore, get delighted when auditors play a pro-active and partnering role.
Thus, when AS-30 was introduced, many clients were not conversant with the
complex requirements. Auditors provided the much-needed knowledge on how to
comply with the requirements relating to ‘hedge accounting’ including
documentation requirements. Clients were advised what needed to be done right
from the beginning, so that they understood the key aspect of ‘hedge
accounting’.

Many auditors recognise the importance of keeping clients informed on all major developments in terms of new laws and accounting requirements, etc. that impact companies in general and a client in particular. As a result of this communication, auditors develop a relationship that results in a ‘no surprises’ audit. This is because, most contentious issues are discussed and resolved prior to year end, particularly with the top management to ensure that nothing is taken to the audit report as a ‘matter of qualification’. All issues that have a reporting implication are discussed well in advance and remedial action taken to ensure closure of issues. It is possible that even after all this, the auditor may decide to go ahead with a qualification in his report. But, this will be seen as clearly the last alternative, as opposed to a feeling that ‘not all options were explored’.

In the past few years, many medium-sized companies have been entering into M & A transactions, collaboration agreements and royalty agreements, etc. These are out of the ordinary transactions and involve complex accounting and other issues where the auditor can play an important role. Many auditors provide clients that are in the process of entering into such transactions, ‘on line’ accounting and other advice, so that accounting implications that have a significant bearing on the transaction can be taken into account before finalising the transaction. Also, it would provide the client with comfort that these transactions will not be subject to accounting review at the year end, since they are already ‘agreed upon’ with the auditors.

Similarly, audit of transactions on a quarterly basis, asking for confirmation of balances during the year or a date close to year end date (without diluting the effectiveness of the audit procedure), etc. are some of the ways in which significant value can be added.

C. Adhering to client deadlines, targets, etc. :

Many auditors believe in the importance of adhering to client deadlines in terms of finalising the accounts. Invariably, board meetings for adoption of accounts are fixed well in advance and cannot be postponed except at great embarrassment and heartburning. In such cases, auditors discuss the entire schedule to finalisation well in advance with the client to ensure that a timeline is drawn up that is adhered to by both parties. In case the timeline is very aggressive, the matter is taken up with management immediately and conveyed. Even in such cases, clients are asked to draw up a schedule to demonstrate that the timelines are workable and realistic. Once agreed upon, there is no question  of ‘backing  out’  at the  last moment.

Fixed timeline audits invariably lead to many arguments and heartburning because the schedule is not adhered to and the ‘blame game’ starts with the auditor invariably being held responsible for the delay. Auditors therefore maintain a very pro-active and open communication with the client where, any potential problems are escalated and thrashed out in advance only, to avoid the blame game. Auditors foresee such issues well in advance and discuss the issue with the client in an open and free manner to save on the ‘last minute’ surprises.

D. Conflict    resolution:

Auditors who do not adopt the ‘Compliance Auditor’ mindset adopt a very positive attitude towards conflict resolution. By adopting an attitude where ‘solutions need to be found if they at all exist’ as opposed to ‘how can solutions be found in such cases’, auditors go beyond the compliance approach to partner clients on a very pro-active basis and in the process add significant value. The auditor perceives his role not merely as a ‘compliance officer’ whose job it is to find mistakes, errors, deviations from accounting practices and non-compliance with law, but looks at such issues with an open mind to ascertain whether solutions exist, before reporting them to the members.

Most auditors believe that finding solutions to problems is not their ‘business’, whereas clients feel delighted when auditors perceive their role as ‘solution finders’ and not merely, ‘fault finders’. As a result, clients see great value even in cases where the auditor is constrained to report such deviations, etc. in his audit report.    .

E.  Mentoring and knowledge sharing:

An auditor gathers Significant amount of business knowledge during the course of audit. In many cases, such knowledge does not get shared and is a waste. However, many auditors share the knowledge they have acquired during course of audit by way of communication to audit committees and boards. In addition to sharing knowledge gathered by him, management letters containing areas of cost reduction, better compliance, etc. are high-lighted and discussed with the client together with a clear plan of action to avoid recurrence. Clients also feel delighted with auditors who identify areas which help remedy faults from recurring. In the process, the auditor adds value that goes beyond the ‘compliance function’.

F. Conclusion:

Adopting the right attitude towards the audit function and working beyond self-imposed constraints are options that are clearly available to the auditor without compromising on any of his duties and responsibilities as the auditor. Auditors need to recognise that playing the role of the ‘compliance officer’ does not mean putting a fetter on one’s ability and attitude towards the role. In fact, the auditor invariable gets an opportunity to play a pro-active, positive role in terms of partnering the client. Assisting the client improve upon his stakes is the best way to transform. As a matter of fact, the only way to transform is to play an active role in helping and mentoring clients change for the better.

If audit is to be given the right place and value, auditors, companies and other institutions need to work towards getting audit its rightful place and that is, it is one of the most valuable and insightful functions that is awarded to an ‘outsider’, who is provided with an opportunity to look at various transactions entered into by the company in a systematic and insightful manner, evaluate at times business risks in addition to various aspects of internal control including assessing the ‘tone at the top’ that is set by the management in the course of business.

The profession of accountancy and audit is on the threshold of significant changes in the wake of the business failures that we are witnessing by the day across the world and if it has to serve its role effectively, it will need to get rid of the shackles it has put itself under and work towards expressing itself constructively, in a pro-active manner. An auditor should work as a partner to the business by communicating to the audit committee, the board and the management in a timely manner on all important issues of which he has gained knowledge during course of audit.

Lastly, the ICAI has embarked on a massive project aimed at making the entire accounting framework IFRS compliant, by 2011. Auditors have been provided with the most valuable opportunity to assist clients in this process in several ways without, at the same time, getting conflicted out. Auditors of companies have already started advising companies what the implications are and what the impact would be in the year of transition. Companies are therefore delighted that auditors have become very pro-active and this augurs well for the profession.
 
‘Auditing Beyond Compliance’ therefore is largely, a mindset issue and auditors really need to embrace change to become more relevant to their clients by adopting a more proactive, constructive and ‘partnering’ approach towards clients. The challenge before the auditor is to become the client’s trusted advisor and partner, without losing out on ‘independence’.

Fair Value Accounting

Article

Fair value accounting is a concept that has attracted
worldwide debate as to its appropriateness in financial statements. Terms such
as ‘mark to myth’ and one based on judgmental aspects which tend to demean the
very concept of prudence are slated as arguments for the same. It is also true
that most of the criticism comes from the ‘old guard’ who have always
believed that
historical cost is one of the most verifiable concepts in
accounting. The fact is that the world has moved on and fair valuation is a
measure by itself. The accounting profession needs to wake up to this reality
and take necessary steps to make sure fair valuation (now a big element of the
‘true and fair’ opinion) is well understood. Our profession needs to be well
equipped to make sure we use it appropriately and not expose it to abuse the way
it is feared to be.


The issue is : what is Prudence. ‘Prudence is the
inclusion of a degree of caution in the exercise of the judgments needed in
making the estimates required under conditions of uncertainty, such that assets
or income are not overstated and liabilities or expenses are not understated.
However, it completely ignores assets or liabilities that expose an entity to
market-related risks. The issue is : Is that prudent ? Especially in today’s
times when in free markets, entities are exposed to market risk (intentional or
unintentional).


Fair value accounting envisages accounting for unrealised
gain to reflect a ‘true and fair’ view of the state of affairs.

Fair valuation has brought to the notice of an investor the
true profits in companies like Enron, WorldCom and Waste Management in
the past and a host of financial services companies in the current credit market
meltdown. This is mainly because over the years, the masters of business have
been under acute pressure to show results and the masters of finance have helped
them achieve it at any cost. This has led to the use of financial and other
instruments in our financial statements, making fair valuation a very important
aspect of today’s financial statements. Also, the use of derivative instruments
has been genuinely necessitated as we globalise businesses and as countries open
up to free trade.

Let’s now examine what are the flaws with fair value
accounting. The biggest issue to fair value is that of illiquidity and its
related concern that in both boom and bust time market values are not
real. Firstly, India does not have any traded benchmarks except government
securities, and secondly, over-the-counter products are very difficult to
measure. Accordingly, we prefer not to record any perceived market losses unless
we believe they are permanent. Gains are a complete no unless realised.
Unfortunately we judge losses with the same parameters as we assess gains, but
only record the former should the diminution be permanent. How fair is that from
a ‘true and fair’ perspective ?

The reality is that companies have certain investments of a
permanent nature (HTM held to maturity) and some of a trading nature (short-term
investments or positions taken which do not actually hedge any underlying
transaction)
. The former is normally treated as a long-term asset where
values would be realised over the period to maturity with any diminution being
recorded should there be a perceived risk. The trading assets and
derivates which do not necessarily hedge an underlying transaction
are
effectively hexposures to market risk and hence, are not intended to be held to
maturity. Accordingly, these should be marked to market at any accounting period
to bring into the results and perceived gain or loss from the asset. The fact
that such gain is permanent or temporary is not of concern. The financial
statements should reflect the results of the market risk position taken by an
entity. Our legacy accounting principles completely ignore this concept, as
these did not exist in India until the recent past when our economy opened up as
part of our reforms.

Another example where we completely ignore fair valuation is
in while recording debt with equity conversion features. We seem to
completely ignore the optionality to convert in financial statements
today. And the only way to record these is through fair valuation. Take FCCBs
for instance. Our corporates have been recording the FCCB as if the conversion
is not an option but a definite event. In the present situation where stock
prices have fallen and conversions are unlikely to happen, companies are faced
with cash redemptions and huge back-ended interest costs. Fair value accounting
would have valued the options at fair value and treated the balance as a debt.
The option value would tend to become zero near redemption should conversion
price and market price of stock converge. This would ensure an equitable profit
or loss and the optionality clearly being recorded on the balance sheet. Our
traditional cost system records the consequence of conversion as an unlikely
contingent event which ends being ignored by investors and analysts alike.


A key understanding that most accountants, bankers and CFOs
alike tend to get confused with is the difference between hedging and hedge
accounting. This is where most transactions get confused as hedges and hence are
not fair valued. Hedging is a dynamic measure where a decision-maker consciously
performs a correlation exercise to identify how an underlying market risk can be
hedged. Hedge accounting is a measurable principle which provides

guidelines as to when a derivative instrument can be regarded as a hedge to an
underlying. For example, if someone sees a correlation between the price of
apples and the price of oil, he could effectively buy oil futures to hedge
against moving apple prices. That would make his P&L immune should his
hypothesis be correct. However, this would not qualify for hedge accounting as
it may not meet the criteria of commonality of risks. However, if the hypothesis
is true, then whether hedge accounting is followed or not, the impact on the
profit and loss account would be similar.


We also seem to have mixed issues of fair value accounting with capital adequacy norms (especially in the financial services sector). The issues revolve around certain companies not reflecting pension costs in line with AS-15 or transferring of securities initially purchased as trading to HTM. These are artificial coverages to maintain adequate capital. However, there should be a distinction made in special situations between regulatory and financial capital adequacy. We tend to break or amend the financial thermometer, but do not succeed in improving the health of the patient. Instead we make the doctor’s task more difficult as the problems do not go away through accounting solutions.

Having considered fair valuation as a bane in most situations, India is possibly one of the few countries which allow asset revaluations which completely goes against the historical cost concept or prudence and is a way to fair valuation of assets provided the increase is of a permanent nature (which only restates balance sheets at replacement costs, a completely unverifiable proposition). However, as this is an age-old practice we continue it.

While it is easy to point the faults inherent in fair value accounting, it is less easy to identify an alternative method which would better fulfil the features of relevance, reliability, comparability and understand ability . Reference to historical prices would provide less comparable and much less relevant information given that the company itself views the underlyings at fair value (e.g., options). Illiquid financial instruments are a challenge, but even there the idea of reducing the scope of fair value has not resulted in credible options. An al-ternative is to ‘mark to model’. Models have been widely used and may aid transparency if backed by detailed disclosures about underlying instruments and mark to model assumptions.

Another issue debated is the relevance of fair valuation in the present markets. Should assets be marked down to reflect losses as these are not the values at which companies may sell? My own argument is that if a company sold its assets at the balance-sheet date, fair value is what it would receive for the assets, regardless of whether such values are artificially low in current markets. Irrespective of the company’s intention to hold this until markets improve, the lack of liquidity in current markets can, and has, forced companies to sell assets at these ‘artificially’ low values. In the current market situation, any accounting which fails to highlight liquidity risk in the way that fair value accounting does, would fail to capture the risk appropriately. Fair value accounting reflects the reality that investors are faced with as far as trading assets are concerned.

In the final analyses, fair value accounting as prescribed internationally and in AS-30 can best be described in the same breath as Churchill’s portrayal of democracy, “It’s the worst system with the exception of all others”. Though there is a lot of judgment involved and there is enough potential to abuse it especially in an illiquid environment, there is a lack of any other credible alternative. Though there is a need to have a vigorous debate around fair value, the fact remains that as a profession we need to. clearly understand the concept and see how we could challenge the interpretations taken by our industry and banking colleagues.

Desirable?

Article

We are heading towards full convergence of the Indian GAAP
with the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) subject to certain
small exceptions. Otherwise also, the recently issued accounting standards are
based on either the corresponding IFRSs or the International Accounting
Standards (IASs). Thus, the process of convergence has already begun. The chief
reason given for such convergence is that in a globalised economy and with
investors in all countries looking for outbound investments, it is desirable
that corporations the world over follow the same set of principles in preparing
their accounts. Another area of concern is that the present accounts fail in
disclosing strength or weakness of a corporation, as the figures in financial
statements, in most cases, represent ‘cost,’ which has hardly any relevance in
times of changing values.


The conceptual difference between the accounts under IFRSs
and under the Indian GAAPs is that in many instances (except in the case of
inventory, where the age-old principle of ‘lower of cost or net realisable
value’ will continue to apply) the figures in accounts under the IFRSs will be
reported on the basis of ‘fair value’ of the items, whereas such items by
and large are reported at present at ‘cost’, unless the fair value happens to be
lower than the cost — for example — investments. The fair value concept demands
that if an item has appreciated in value over its cost, the appreciation will be
recognised and if it has declined in value, the decline will also be recognised.
Thus, basically, the fair value-based accounting amounts to abandoning the
concept of prudence — that is — unrealised gains are not to be accounted.

The question is : should India fully converge with IFRSs and
adopt fair value as the basis of accounting in place of ‘cost’ ? The answer
depends on the following discussion.

First, let us see reasons that are in favour of ‘cost’
forming the basis of accounting. ‘Cost’ of an item can be computed with
reasonable certainty. Cost of an item may comprise elements like cost of labour,
material, finance charges, etc. It is possible that different corporations may
define ‘cost’ differently for the purpose of accounting an item. However, once
‘cost’ is defined by a corporation for a particular purpose, it is uniformly
adopted for all purposes. All elements of cost would be such as have resulted in
an outgo of resources or in creation of an obligation if there is no immediate
outgo of resources. In short, cost of an item is by and large a figure arrived
at objectively. Such cost yields itself to verification and to its reliability.
Thus, the accounts presented under the cost-based accounting are
reliable
.

Let us also see the reasons that represent weakness of the
cost basis of accounting. The most significant weakness of such accounting is
that it fails to reflect ‘changing values’ and fails to account for inflation
(or deflation) in the value of currency. Because of such weakness, it is argued,
accounts fail to reflect strength or weakness of a corporation and fail to yield
to comparison with the accounts of another corporation. This weakness is real.

Let us examine the technical soundness of the conceptual
aspect of the IFRSs. As seen above, the IFRSs are fair value-driven unlike our
present conservative approach to accounting displayed in the principle of ‘lower
of cost or net realisable value’. IFRSs require write-up of financial assets of
trading nature if their fair value exceeds the cost just the same way as they
require such assets to be scaled down if the fair value drops below the cost.
This is quite in contrast to the principle of ‘prudence’, which so far formed
the basis of accounting policies and standards.

Thus, fair value-based accounting does remove the above
weakness of cost-based accounting. Hence, accounts under the ‘fair value’ basis
will show the present value of a corporation representing the changing values of
assets, and may therefore, be more useful to users. It is argued that accounts
prepared on ‘fair value’ will be more realistic as they reflect the correct
value of a corporation.

However, the major weakness of the fair value-based
accounting is that such accounts will depend a lot on valuation of assets. Value
of an asset is determined by an open market if the asset is freely traded there,
or arrived at on the basis of such valuation models as accountants and valuers
use, or a combination of both. Fair value accounting implicitly assumes that
such value is the correct value of the asset. It is questionable whether this
implicit assumption is correct. Valuation of an asset involves a good amount of
individual skill, the making of a number of assumptions, forecasting future,
using several valuation models and accepting value arrived at under one method
or accepting an average of values arrived at under different models. Only the
naïve can be convinced that such valuation is objective
as there will be a
good deal of subjectivity involved in the process of valuation.
Any valuation necessarily involves looking into the future, making assumptions,
and the terms ‘future’ and ‘uncertainty’ are synonymous. No two individuals,
astrologers included, foresee the future in the same manner. When we contemplate
the large numbers that the accounts of modern corporations contain, we can
understand the significance of a small error, intentional or otherwise,
committed in arriving at fair value of items and its impact on the truthfulness
of accounts.

If accounts adopt values discovered by an open market wherever that is possible, for the purpose of preparation of accounts, the scenario may look better than the one under which value is determined by one or more valuers. However, it is also a myth that the value discovered by the free market is always ‘true value’. In fact, the way the markets behave one may wonder whether there is at all any thing like ‘true value’, especially in the context of financial instruments whose accounting will be greatly impacted under the ‘fair value’ accounting. Stock exchanges are the epitome of free markets and continually strive to discover value of securities. But high degree of volatility in the market makes the whole exercise speculative. Falls in the share market witnessed recently the world over exploded into smithereens the myth of reliability of market valuation. If one studies the recent market trends world over, one might think that the present times are ripe to abandon ‘fair value’ accounting and revert to prudence and cost-based accounting. I repeat recent market volatility should serve to establish the weakness of the ‘fair value’ accounting.

I believe ‘fair value’ accounting makes accounting subjective and financial statements prepared on the basis of subjective criteria hardly inspire confidence. Such accounts offer a great scope for manipulation at times with mala fide intentions. The hope that auditors willdetect such manipulations willalso prove to be a myth, not because auditors do not do their job but because auditing has its own limitations which the society and the users must recognise. We must admit that with the introduction of accrual basis of accounting we had introduced some degree of subjectivity in accounting especially whilst making provisions. Still, by retaining ‘cost’ as the basis of accounting coupled with prudence we have succeeded in eliminating much of subjectivity in the accrual system of accounting. We have been able to produce by and large reliable accounts. Fair value-based accounts will raise doubt about the reliability. As fair value-based accounts are deemed to be more relevant than cost-based accounts, it appears reliability is taking a ‘back-seat’ to relevance. The issue is : should this happen, is it good for business?

Let us also see whether the fair value-based ac-counting completely serves the purpose which it avowedly professes to serve. It is said that such accounting will help determine the true value of a business, which, in accounts prepared under the cost-based accounting is not possible. However, this argument in favour misses one vital point : that the value of a business is not only a function of the value of its assets, but is also a function of intangible assets including human resources, which are mostly off-balance sheet items. Hence, these two vital elements, namely, intangible assets and human resources, which influence the value of a business, still remain outside the books of account. Let us not forget that value of business is a perception. It is at times the price paid to enter the market to eliminate competition or acquire market share.

Though the fair value-based accounting has its advantages, like any other method of accounting may have, it is a question whether the fair value should form the basis of accounting replacing the cost as a concept. Fair value-based accounting may satisfy one group of readers of accounts, but it may throw up several issues of far greater significance. For example, balance sheets and income statements prepared under the fair value-based accounting will still have to be certified as being true and fair. May be such accounts are relevant for a purpose, yet it will be difficult to say that they are reliable. We need to decide what we want: relevant accounts or reliable accounts; I am of the opinion that reliability should not be sacrificed. However, to make financial statements more relevant all that is necessary is to require managements to provide on the value of assets including intangibles. The managements should also be required to disclose all off-balance sheet liabilities. The analysts and the investors I am sure would know how to make use ‘of this information. I don’t think we should play with the reliability of financial statements. In any case, no big investments in corporations are made without undertaking what is known as ‘due diligence’ exercise. Therefore, at the time of such exercise, all required information can be elicited from the management.

To sum up, fair value-based financial statements being highly subjective, are a myth open to manipulation for ulterior purposes. The age-old concept of ‘true and fair’ is in jeopardy. I don’t think, business and the profession should take or accept the ‘risk’ – risk of manipulation. Let us stick to prudence and reliability.

Good Bye Prudence

Article

‘I think it is hard to argue with the conceptual merits of
fair value as the most relevant measurement attribute. Certainly, to those who
say that accounting should better reflect true economic substance, fair value,
rather than historical cost, would generally seem to be the better measure’.


[Robert Herz, Chairman of the Financial Accounting Standards
Board in CFO Magazine, February 2003, page 40, quoting from a speech at a
conference of Financial Executives International].


‘I know what an asset is. I can see one, I can touch one, or
I can see representations of one. I also know what liabilities are. On the other
hand, I believe that revenues, expenses, gains, and losses are accounting
concepts. I can’t say that I see a revenue going down the street. And so for me
to have an accounting model that captures economic reality, I think the starting
point has to be assets and liabilities’.

[Thomas Linsmeier, Member of the

Financial Accounting Standards Board,

in “Will Fair Value Fly?” on CFO.com,

September 20, 2006].

1.1 ‘Accounting concepts’ have evolved over time and
therefore ‘accounting’ is commonly referred to as being an ‘art’ rather than
‘pure science’. Hitherto, financial statements were commonly prepared in
accordance with an accounting model based on ‘historical cost’. However,
times have changed, and there has been a conscious move to the ‘fair value’
model, driven by expectation gaps that historical model caused.

1.2 It needs to be noted that even under existing standards,
some account balances are determined using ‘some sort of fair valuation’, for
example, provision for doubtful debts or diminution in the value of investments
and inventories. But going forward, in the changed scenario fair valuation
principles are expected to be applied more extensively in the preparation of
financial statements. India will be adopting International Financial Reporting
Standards in 2011 and the Institute has notified AS-30 and AS-31, which are
extensively fair value driven.

2.1 Among the questions being debated are : How fair is
fair value 
? How does fair valuation measure up on the principles of
relevance and reliability ? How easy is it to audit fair value ? How will
fair value accounting work in practice and what are the implications for
performance measurement ? Furthermore, the profits arising from value changes
may not
have been realised, and recognition of unrealised gains goes against
the traditional prudent approach to accounting. Worse, if the unrealised
gains get distributed as dividends, it may create major liquidity and
going-concern issues. This article is an attempt to provide a balanced
assessment of this controversial and multifaceted topic.

2.2 The IASBs Framework for the Preparation and
Presentation of Financial Statements
adopted by the IASB in April 2001
stated that the objective of financial statements was to provide information
about the financial position, performance and changes in financial position of
an entity that is useful to a wide range of users in making economic decisions.
As per the Framework, the four principal qualitative characteristics ‘financial
statements’ should have are ‘understandability, relevance, reliability and
comparability’
. Other qualitative characteristics are
materiality, faithful representation, substance over form, neutrality,
prudence
and completeness. The Framework is now under revision. In the
Exposure Draft, relevance and faithful representation are identified as key
characteristics. The enhancing qualitative characteristics are comparability,
verifiability, timeliness and understandability. Interestingly, prudence and
reliability
do not find any place in the proposed revised
Framework.

2.3 The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) has
given significant importance to fair valuation in IFRS. IASB’s new and revised
standards are based, to a great extent, on an accounting model that focuses on
fair valuation for recognition, measurement and disclosure of assets and
liabilities and that income and expenses are determined by reference to
increases and decreases in assets and liabilities, rather than the reverse, as
in the case of the historical model. Besides financial instruments, other
standards that require use of fair valuation include business combination,
employee compensation, share-based payments, impairments, intangibles,
biological assets and investment properties.

2.4 However, at this point in time fair value is definitely
not well defined even in IFRS standards, and the determination of ‘fair
value’ can be highly subjective. Though many IFRS standards require fair
valuation, there is no single standard that prescribes how to determine ‘fair
value’. Some argue that in the preparation of financial statements, IASB has
placed too much emphasis on ‘relevant information’ and has given
inadequate consideration to reliability and understandability. The danger
to relevance, reliability and comparability of financial statements using
calculated, hypothetical, non-market-based fair values was well illustrated in
an exercise conducted by an accounting firm to determine ‘employee stock
option charge’
. By making changes to the input variables, all within the
allowable parameters of IFRS, option expense as a percentage of reported income
could vary as much as 40% to 155%.

2.5 Worse still, current IFRS standards include a variable
blend of both historical cost and ‘fair value’ measurement, for example :

  •  assets held to maturity are accounted on the basis of amortised cost, if held to maturity intention is demonstrated.

  • changes in ‘fair value of ‘assets available for sale’ are recognised in equity, whereas in the case of trading assets, the ‘fair value’ changes are recognised in the income statement.

  • hedge accounting brings in the matching concept, so that fair valuation volatility is contained. Therefore in the case of hedging, fair value changes in a derivative are not immediately recognised in the profit and loss

  • account, but matched with future changes in the fair value of the hedged item.
  • both cost and fair valuation approach is permitted for investment properties. If the fair value model is applied, the changes in fair value are recognised in the income statement.

  • only the fair value approach is followed in )-the case of biological assets, with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement.

  • fixed assets are accounted either by applying the cost model or the fair valuation model. If fair value model is used, the changes in fair value are not recognised in the income statement, but are recognised in a reserve account.

  • intangible assets are predominantly accounted for using the cost approach with the fair value approach allowed only in the case of a few intangibles that have a ready market

2.6 With this hotchpotch, the understand ability prerequisite of financial statements prepared under IFRS has been compromised. Users are likely to be confused as financial statements have become an aggregation of apples and oranges.

3.1 We will now seek to understand the difference between ‘historical cost’ and ‘fair value’ accounting, how they measure up to the qualitative characteristics identified in the Framework and why prudence and reliability have lost their relevance in the changed scenario. Other alternative accounting models are: current cost, reproduction cost, replacement cost, net realisable value, value in use and deprival value. However, this article is restricted to a discussion between the historical cost and fair value approach.

3.2 Under historical cost, assets and liabilitiesare recorded at historical cost, followed by amortisation or depreciation. On the other hand in the ‘fair value’ model, assets and liabilities are recorded at the amount for which an asset or liability could be exchanged between knowledgeable and willing parties in an arm’s-length transaction. Historical cost gives no consideration to recoverability. It is only a measure of the amount expended. It has been observed that the value of an asset is represented by the future economic benefits expected to flow. The historical cost of an asset lacks this attribute, and therefore it must be supplemented by a measure of recoverable value to meet the ‘true and fair’ test. This aspect has been partly taken care of by requiring an impairment provision when recoverable amount falls below the historical carrying amount.

3.3 Some argue that a presumption of recoverability is implicit in the historical cost and amortisation, because it can be generally presumed that an entity will not pay more for an asset than it believes to be its value either in use or sale. However, the belief of asset cost recoverability may reflect entity-specific expectations that mayor may not be reasonable, and supported by observable evidence.

3.4 In contrast, ‘fair value’ stands on its own as the value could be exchanged between knowledge-able and willing parties dealing at arm’s length. Hence, the value of probable future economic benefit is reflected in the ‘fair value’. Further, ‘fair value’ of an asset needs no additional assessment of recoverable amount, because ‘fair value’ repre-sents the market’s measure of its recoverable value.

3.5 The historical cost-based accounting is premised on ‘cost-revenue matching’ objective. The ‘cost-revenue matching’ objective’ has its roots in the economic premise that costs are generally incurred to earn revenue. Business entities are set up with the objective of transforming various inputs of goods and services into outputs that can be sold for revenues that exceed the cost of inputs. The traditional accounting objective has been to recognise the cost of an asset as an expense when the revenues to which the asset is considered to contribute are recognised. Net income is then measured on the basis of matching costs with related revenues.

3.6 This traditional matching objective has undergone significant changes. It is now well accepted that an input must meet the definition of an asset to warrant capitalisation and that its cost should be carried forward only to the extent that it can be considered to be recoverable from future cash-generating activities or sale. Further, the market-place is the final arbiter in determining the recoverable value of an asset.

3.7 To carry forward an asset at historical cost that differs from its fair value results in wrong in-formation being given in later periods when the asset is ultimately realised (through sale or use) and would be violative of the basic accounting principle of cost matching revenue. It is reasoned that carrying an asset at ‘fair value’ is actually in line with the concept of ‘true and fair’.

3.8 Further, historical cost concept is not for-ward looking. In comparison, ‘fair value’ of an asset embodies market expectations and helps users to evaluate the risk and volatility dimension. In addition, financial disclosures that use ‘fair value’ provide investors with insight into prevailing market values, thereby enhancing the usefulness of finan-cial reports.

3.9 It is axiomatic that it is better to know what something is worth now than what it was worth at some time in the past. . . Historic cost data is never comparable on a firm-to-firm basis, because the costs were incurred on different dates by different firms or even within a single firm.

3.10 Today, investors are concerned with value, not costs. ‘Fair value’ accounting would in principle lead to better insight into the risk profile of the financial entities than is presently the case, more so in the light of the requirement to move many relevant off-balance sheet items onto the balance sheet. Financial stability could benefit if shareholders, uninsured depositors and other debt holders are in a position to readily identify a deterioration in the safety and soundness of an entity. In fact, their reactions either by directly interfering in managerial choices or by exiting from the investment could put pressure on the entity’s management to take early corrective action.

3.11 ‘Fair value’ accounting is timely because it brings economic reality into the balance sheet. With growing concern on ‘going concern’ of entities, a balance sheet prepared on ‘fair value’ basis will provide more relevant information as compared to a balance sheet prepared on outdated historical cost.

3.12 ‘Fair value’ balance sheet is a better representation of the net worth of an entity’s financial position than compared to a historical model. ‘Fair value’ measure of assets and liabilities is attractive because it meets many of the Framework’s qualitative characteristics of useful financial information. ‘Fair value’ can also be viewed as a better presentation of stewardship, as fair values are essential for determining performance ratios such as return on capital employed.

3.13 ‘Fair value’ of an asset or liability depends only on the characteristics of the asset or liability and not on the characteristics of the entity that holds the asset or liability or when it was acquired. ‘Fair value’ is a market-based measure that is not affected by factors specific to a particular entity; accordingly it represents an unbiased measurement that is consistent from period to period and across entities.

3.14 ‘Fair value’ is a solution to the accountant’s problem of income measurement: In accordance with the widely-accepted Hicksian definition of income is ‘a change in wealth – the change in fair value of net assets on the balance sheet yields income’. Hence, ‘fair value’ measure is to be preferred to the hundreds of rules underlying historical cost income. The issue is – how do we take control of the reported numbers out of the hands of corporate management? We do it by requiring that assets and liabilities be reported at ‘fair value’.

3.15 Whilst one could debate the use of fair valuation for non-financial asset and liabilities, there is little debate as regards valuation of financial assets and liabilities. The issue really is : how does one use historical cost to value stock options or derivatives ?

3.16 ‘Fair value’ seems to be the only basis for valuing financial assets and liabilities. FASB be-lieves:

  • ‘fair value’ for financial assets and financial liabilities provides more relevant and under-standable information than cost or cost-based measures.

  • ‘fair value’ to be more relevant to financial statements users for assessing the current financial position of an entity, because fair value reflects the current cash equivalent rather than the price of a past transaction.

  • with the  passage  of time,  historical  prices become irrelevant in assessing an entity’s current financial position.

3.17 In case there is a well-defined and liquid market, defining ‘fair value’ is not problematic. However, for illiquid assets or liabilities it may be necessary to use a model to derive ‘fair value’, such as one based on the present value of ‘future cash flows’. But model’s assumptions, such as the r relevant discount rate, may vary widely between in-stitutions and types of assets/liabilities and such variations raise questions about reliability. As a result, some opponents of ‘fair value’ suggest that:

  • ‘model’ can only sensibly be used in relation to items for which there exists an efficient market.

  • ‘model’ at times may fail the ‘consistency and comparability’ test.

  • value based on internal models will have implications for the auditors, as their verification is dependent upon accepting the logic underlying the model.

3.18  The counter argument is that even if there is a degree of potential unreliability as to the values, they are still useful to decision-making, because they represent economic reality as opposed to an accounting ‘fiction’ in the form of historical cost. A ‘fair value’ based balance sheet is a better representation of the net worth of an entity than one based on historical cost.

4.1 Having considered the superiority of fair valuation over the historical model, now let’s look at the pitfalls of fair value. Clearly ‘fair value’ is not a panacea for all ills. At this point in time ‘fair value’ methodology is definitely not well established in IFRS or US GAAP, and the determination of fair value can be highly subjective. In the absence of any specific guidance, ‘fair value’ raises a number of issues, such as:

  • What should be the level of unit at which fair value is determined ?
  • Whether market price will be adjusted be-cause of size?
  • Whether block discount or block premium are considered for determining fair value?

  • Whether fair value would be the entry price or exit price ?
  • Which market is the most advantageous or principal market considered for determining fair valuation?

  • How are transaction costs treated for deter-mining fair valuation?

  • Should fair value measurement assume the highest and best use of the asset by market participants even if the intended use of the asset by the reporting entity is different?

  • Where quoted market price is not available, which valuation technique is appropriate: should it be the market approach, cost approach or income approach?

  • Within the various valuation techniques, how are the various assumptions made, for ex-ample, if the income approach is used, how would the cash flows be discounted to present value and risk adjusted for uncertainty?

  • What is to be done where market inputs are not available, for example, the credit worthiness of a home loan portfolio.

4.2 The term ‘Fair value’ implies active and liquid markets with knowledgeable and willing buyers and sellers and observable arm’s-length transactions – not values calculated on the basis of hypothetical markets, with hypothetical buyers and sellers.

4.3 ‘Fair value’ also increases the risk of misunderstanding on the part of existing or potential investors. ‘Fair value’ might be the realisable market value, but it will not necessarily equate to the market value of the entity because of the existence of internally generated goodwill or other intangible assets. It cannot be denied that ‘Fair value’ brings balance sheet value closer to the market value. However, using fair values for decision-making remains relatively difficult, but probably less difficult when compared to the historical model.

4.4 In the absence of market value, a surrogate has to be used by regarding a mathematical calculation of a hypothetical market price as a fair value. This is illustrated in the following ‘fair value hierarchy’ that has been developed by the US FASB and embraced by the IASB. This indicates the process that should follow for determining ‘fair value’ :

4.5 The reality is that a Level 3 subjective assessment will be required to measure ‘fair value’ in many situations. This will apply to intangible assets acquired in a business combination, unquoted equity securities, equity securities quoted on illiquid markets, derivatives, pension costs, provisions for share-based payments, asset revaluations, impairments and biological assets during the growth phase.

4.6 The fundamental question is whether such hypothetical amounts are sufficiently understandable, reliable, relevant and comparable for financial reporting.

1.    Do the users understand how hypothetical and subjective ‘fair value’ can be?

2.    Can valuations that are not independently verifiable be considered reliable?

3.    Is information that is not reliable, relevant in the world of financial reporting?

4.7 ‘Fair value’ measurement models have been developed for some contractual assets and liabilities especially financial instruments. There seem to be fewer prospects for developing reliable fair value measurement models for non-contractual assets that are inputs to revenue-generating processes – assets that do not generate cash flows by themselves, but contribute along with other inputs to a cash-generating process – can present significant fair value measurement problems when there are no observable market prices for identicalor similar assets, for example, an equipment that is configured for a specialised use. It could be concluded that realisable value in the marketplace is nothing beyond its value as scrap, or the market value of unspecialised equipment less estimated costs to restore to its unspecialised condition. This view presumes that the market does not attribute any value to use. This would be an unreasonable presumption.

4.8 The reliability of fair value estimates is de-pendent not only on how well a model replicates accepted market pricing processes, but also on the reliability of data inputs and assumptions that marketplace understands – for example – data inputs required by ‘accepted stock option’ pricing model includes the current price of the underlying stock, the volatility of that price, the effects of vesting provisions, and the risk-free interest rate for the expected life of the option. The market prices of certain of these inputs can be readily observed, for example, the risk-free inter-est rate can be derived from the price of government bonds and the current price of the underlying stock can be observed if it is traded in a market. The market’s measure of some other inputs may not be so readily determinable, for example, the effects of vesting provisions and the appropriate measure of volatility. Further, the measure of volatility on pricing an option is commonly based on past volatility, which may not be fully indicative of future volatility. Consistency of such data with market expectations requires careful evaluation in the context of the particular circumstances and disclosure of the basis of such data, underlying assumptions and the extent of measurement uncertainty. It may not be out of place to quote Warren Buffet, who feels that ‘marking to market’ has changed to ‘marking to a model’ but is actually ‘marking to myth’.

4.9 As many assets and liabilities do not have an active market, the inputs and methods for estimating their fair value are subjective making ‘fair’ valuation less reliable. Federal Reserve research shows that ‘fair value’ estimates for bank loans can vary greatly depending on the valuation inputs and methodology used.

4.10    Banking  regulators    have observed  that  minor  changes in the  assumptions in a pricing model can have a substantial impact  and reliability can be a significant concern. However, FASB feels  that reliability can  be  significantly enhanced  if market inputs are used whilst valuing.

However, because management uses significant judgment in selecting market inputs when market prices are not available, reliability will continue to be an issue. Management’s use of judgment bias – whether intentional or unintentional in the valuation process, may result in inappropriate fair value also resulting in misstatement of earnings and capital. This is the case in the overvaluation of certain residual tranches in securitisations in recent years in the absence of active market. Significant write-downs of overstated asset valua-tions have resulted in the failure of a number of entities operating in the financial market.

4.11 It should be clear that the date and purpose of valuation is critical in establishing a ‘fair value’. A valuation determined at a particular point in time generally should not be relied upon for value on any other date. In the same vein, a valuation made for a particular purpose may not be appropriate for another purpose. Moreover, given the current state of the art, particularly with regard to credit risk models, reliability of financial statements could be negatively affected as fair values do not always convey precise information regarding an entity’s risk profile. Misjudgement can trigger overreaction, which can have a negative impact on the valuation of an entity.

4.12 We continue to read stories about earnings manipulation under the ‘historical cost’ model. The author believes that in the absence of reliable fair value estimates, the potential for misstatements in financial statements prepared using fair value measurements is greater. Moreover, valuations that are not based on observable market prices but on management judgments will be difficult to audit.

4.13 Volatility in earnings is another constant argument one hears against fair valuation.

1.    For assets and liabilities held to maturity, the volatility reflected in the financial statements is artificial and misleading as any deviations from cost will be gradually compensated during the life of the financial instrument, ‘pulling the value to par’ at maturity.

2.    An excessive reliance on fair values, including non-actively traded assets on illiquid secondary markets run the risk of embodying ‘artificial’ volatility, driven by: short-term fluctuations in financial market or caused by market imperfections or by inadequate de-velopment of valuation model.

4.14 The counter argument is that financial in-stitutions may have an incentive to take proactive measures in order to prevent this from occurring, by building additional reserves and thereby increas-ing their resilience in case certain binding finan-cial ratios are exceeded (e.g., capital requirements or ratios used in loan covenants that could trigger actions such as repayment).

4.15 Increased volatility is not necessarily a problem if investors correctly interpret the information disclosed. In particular, market analysts and institutional investors should try to extrapolate fair valuations from a variety of sources and mature financial markets would be in a position to appropriately interpret this increased volatility.

4.16 Implementation and maintenance of a fair value accounting system will cost time and resources. There may be other alternatives that may make more sense in a given situation. A case in point is one where biological assets are required to be fair valued by fAS 41. Other than questioning the need to fair value non-financial assets, the fact that biological assets are generally owned by small enterprises should not be ignored. These enterprises may find the whole process defeating, since fair value done at prohibitive cost may be completely useless for the purposes of decision making.

4.17 IAS 41 requires biological assets to be fair valued. IAS 41 met with severe criticism because many biological assets are simply not capable of reliable estimate of fair value. For example:

Take for instance, a colt which is kept as a potential breeding stock, grows into a fine stallion. The stallion starts winning race events and is also used in Bollywood films, as the stallion earns substantial amount for its owner from breeding and other services, the stallion gets older, his utility decreases. Eventually the stallion dies of old age and the carcass is used as pet food. At each stage in the life of the stallion, the ‘fair value’ would change significantly, but estimating the fair value would be extremely subjective and difficult. The issue is : if changes in fair value of fixed assets are not recognised in the income statement, then why should the treatment be different in the case of biological assets?

Vineyards and coffee and tea plantations have similar measurement issues. The relationship between the vines and coffee or tea plants and the land that they occupy is unique and integrated. The vine or plant itself has relatively little value. However, in conjunction with the land, they do have value. Determining the fair value for a vine-yard, coffee or tea plantation involves esti-mating production along with sales prices and costs for a number of years in the future, together with estimating a terminal value and the application of a discount rate to calcu-late the net present value – an enormously complex and subjective task. The value of the vines and plants would then have to be determined as a residual because it would be calculated by deducting the value of the un-improved land and the value of the infra-structure from the aggregate value. It is clear that the valuation in the above examples is based on subjective estimates and is open to substantial variability.

4.18 Pitfalls – of using ‘fair value’ for biological assets are:

  • these are subject to droughts, floods and diseases which events are difficult to mea-sure.

  • during the transformation process, it could be very difficult to determine ‘quality of the assets and their value’.

  • accounting for unrealised gains arising from changes in fair value can give a distorted picture of the financial results. It could be misunderstood and may lead to inappropriate decision-making, such as dividend declaration from unrealised profits.

4.19 Applying the ‘fair value’ option to the report-ing entity’s liabilities poses a particular problem, especially from a prudential point of view. As, under the fair value option, fair value measurement is not restricted to market developments (e.g., market interest rate fluctuations or changes in the exchange rate parities), but is all-encompassing, i.e., it also includes fluctuations caused by changes in the reporting entity’s credit rating – for example – a deterioration in the entity’s credit rating and the resultant devaluation of its own liabilities leads to an increase in its capital, for example, if an entity that has borrowed at 10%, credit worthiness goes down subsequently, and can now borrow only at 12%, it would record a fair value gain on the earlier loan reflecting the 2% gain on account of its own credit deterioration. From a prudential point of view, this is unacceptable.

4.20 In case of banks and financial institutions:

  • Upward revaluations of assets (when asset prices are increasing) would be reflected in bank profits and bank management could face pressure from shareholders to distribute dividends, including unrealised gains on assets.

  • Banks’ ability to smooth intertemporal shocks would therefore be adversely affected.

  • Historical cost, on the other hand, applies the principle of prudence which does not recognise unrealised gains.

  • Historical cost makes it possible to build up reserves during good times, which can then be depleted during bad times. Historical cost would translate into lower variability in banks’ income and would allow banks to insure themselves against unforeseen circumstances.

4.21 However, the flaw with the above argument is that:

  • prudence does not reveal the truth, hence is certainly not liked by investors, who want to know the truth.

  • prudence is an arbitrary concept and one sided, requiring unrealised losses to be recognised, but does not allow unrealised gains to be recognised.

  • prudence results in unrealistic accounting – take for instance, two investments of absolutely the same type, except that one distributes entire earnings by way of dividend whereas the other does not pay any dividends. If prudence were to be applied, then the two investments would be valued differently. Dividends would be recognised as income; however, in the case of the other investment, which is equally profitable, no income would be recognised. Such mis-match would not occur if both investments were recorded at ‘fair value.’

  • ‘Prudence’ also is seen by many as a means by which entities could inappropriately smoothen their profits through the creation of excessive provisions.

4.22 The inadequacy of historical cost, transac-tion-based approach for dealing, in particular, with derivatives (which have little or no initial cost but can expose companies to very substantial financial risk) and diminutions in the value – impairments of assets, have encouraged standard-setters to espouse an asset/liability approach to recognition of income and a ‘fair value’ basis of measurement of assets and liabilities.

4.23 Although the recognition of unrealised gains and losses on financial assets is achieving wider acceptance, the IASB has not yet put forward any convincing arguments in favour of a ‘fair value’ model for non-financial assets. IAS 41 does not require the existence of active market for using fair value in case of biological assets. This approach is inconsistent with other international standards, for example – for valuing intangibles under IAS 38, the existence of an active market is a perquisite for using fair value.

5.1 The arguments for and against fair value accounting raise fundamental questions about core accounting issues, such as how performance should be measured, and the relative merits of the qualities of relevance versus reliability. Fair value accounting is a paradigm shift – it moves away from ‘historic focus’ to a ‘current perspective’ on value. However, the standard-setters now face a significant dilemma :

how can they continue to pursue their mark-to-model approach to asset/liability measurement and, at the same time, promul-gate accounting standards that will lead to a style of financial reporting that enables investorsto evaluatemanagement performance and assess enterprise value to make sound
investment decisions ?

5.2 The issues are:

  • How can shortcomings of the ‘fair value’ model be addressed !
  • How to improve reliability of level-3 valuation!

5.3 The answer is :

  • IASB should develop a standard on fair valuation and address the basic interpretative issues that are currently prevalent (lASB is working on this project).

  • IASB should be clear as to whether it would want to draw a distinction between financial assets and liabilities and non-financial assets and liabilities, because non-financial assets and liabilities are held for long-term use in the business and ‘fair value’ cannot be reliably determined. Comparatively, financial assets and financial liabilities are more liquid and can be fair valued with greater reliability.

  • Develop an appropriate accounting model by drawing a distinction between financial items and non-financial items. The accounting model is then applied consistently, eliminating any disparities or inconsistencies that could confuse users.

  • Make valuation systems and processes more robust by having specificity and clarity on fair valuation techniques to ensure more reliable valuation numbers and eliminate chances of bad judgments.
  • Another alternative is limiting application of the fair value model to those assets and liabilities that have real and determinable market value, along with compulsory disclosure of ranges of possible fair values together with assumptions and sensitivity analyses. A point to’ be noted is that users need financial statements that have predictive value in terms of providing a sound basis for decision-making, which is a quite different matter from supplying users with financial statements that give the impression that they are themselves predictions. Unfortunately, IASB has so far chosen not to follow this path.

5.4 The most interesting question in everyone’s mind is how long it will take for the full range of non-financial assets, and particularly internally generated goodwill, to be measured using ‘fair valuation’. That would make future balance sheet, a valuer’s balance sheet rather than an accountant’s balance sheet.

5.5 Using fair values to measure assets and liabilities is attractive because it meets many of the Framework’s qualitative characteristics of useful financial statement information. These criteria are to be applied in the context of the primary objective of financial reporting, which is to aid investors and other users of financial statements in making economic decisions. The criteria include relevance, comparability, consistency, and timeliness. Fair values are relevant because they reflect present economic conditions, i.e., the conditions under which the users will make their decisions. Fair values are comparable because the fair value of any particular asset or liability depends only on the characteristics of the asset or liability, not the characteristics of the entity that holds the asset or liability or when it was acquired. Fair values enhance consistency because they reflect the same type of information in every period. Fair values are timely because they reflect changes in economic conditions when those conditions change. In addition, fair values can be viewed as fulfilling a stewardship role for financial reporting because the financial statements reflect the values of assets at the entity’s disposal. Such values are essential for determining performance ratios such as return on capital employed. The author would conclude by stating that despite its faults, ‘fair value’ is here for good and as the valuation models become more established in future accounting standards, many of the criticisms on fair valuation would disappear. If marking to market is a myth, then historical cost accounting is rather a mystery. A return to full historical model would be a retrograde step. Investors are definitely not seeking financial statements that have outdated information. Change to ‘fair value’ is a challenge to our profession and I am sure we will meet the challenge.

Whether Service Tax is applicable to the sale of computer software ?

Article

Brief background :



The Finance Act, 2008 brought some new services under the
Service Tax net. One of them is Information Technology Software Service.

Inclusion of a new services category — Information Technology
Software Services — within the ambit of Service Tax legislation has created
confusion among software firms. The levy of this new service along with other
services has become effective from 16 May, 2008.

Post the Notification, many feel that from 16 May, 2008,
packaged software will also attract 12.36% of Service Tax. So far, packaged
software attracts Value Added Tax (VAT) of 4% and 12% of excise duty.

The confusion arises as the Notification does not make a
clear demarcation of whether ‘software’ is to be sold as goods and hence liable
for sales tax (VAT) or considered as ‘services’ and liable for a Service Tax or
both.

Packaged softwares are products that are sold off the shelf.
Examples of the products that would fall under this are Microsoft, Autodesk,
Adobe and several security software packages for computers. This will also
include accounting software from Tally.

Normally Service Tax is payable to the Central Government
when a service is offered, while VAT is applicable when a product is sold.

In case of softwares which are not sold off the shelf, the
sale price includes free initial installation and implementation of the
software. This includes some modifications or customisations to suit the
customers, but without disturbing the basic structure of the software or its
performance.

The copyright in the software is protected and always remains
the property of the creator. What is sold is the right to use the software.

The sale is with a condition for exclusive use of the
software by the customer at the exclusion of others. The sale gives absolute
possession and control to the purchaser/user of the right to use the software.

The sale normally gives a warranty period and after the said
period some annual maintenance charges are recovered for the services rendered,
popularly called Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC).

At present the sale is subjected to tax under the Maharashtra
Value Added Tax Act, 2002, (MVAT) and AMC is subjected to Service Tax.

The confusion is created due to the amendment in the Service
Tax by the Finance Act, 2008 which has added “Information Technology Software
Service” by way of sub-clause (zzzze) in Cl. 65(105) of the Finance Act, 1994,
and further sub-clause (53a) in Cl. 65, defining the term “information
technology software.”

The query :

Whether Service Tax is applicable to the sale of computer
software ? Whether MVAT is also applicable to the same ?

Questions to be answered/verified :

To answer the query, the following crucial questions will
have to be addressed :

1. Is the software ‘Goods’ and covered as a ‘Sale’ under
the MVAT Act, 2002 ?

2. Is it a service chargeable to Service Tax under Cl.
65(105)(zzzze) of the Finance Act, 1994 ?

3. Whether both the MVAT and Service Tax are applicable ?

4. What is the value chargeable to Service Tax, if
applicable ?

5. Facts from the sale/licence agreements.

6. Conclusion.


Analysis of the questions :



1. Is the software ‘Goods’ ?



1.01 The question is very important and is relevant to decide
its taxability.

The question assumes importance, because if it is ‘Goods’, it
is subjected to tax under the MVAT. If it is not goods, then it may be subjected
to Service Tax.

1.02 ‘Goods’ is defined in S. 2(12) under the Maharashtra
Value Added Tax Act, 2002, as :

“In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,
goods
means every kind of moveable property not being newspapers,
actionable claims, money, stocks, shares, securities or lottery tickets and
includes livestocks, growing crop, grass and trees and plants including the
produce thereof including property in such goods attached to or forming part
of the land which are agreed to be severed before sale or under the contract
of sale.”


1.03 Under Article 366(12) of the Constitution of India,

“Goods include all materials, commodities, and articles.”


1.04 Further, Entry 39 in Schedule C to the Maharashtra Value
Added Tax Act, 2002, which decides the rate of tax, describes goods under that
entry as :

“Goods of intangible or incorporeal nature as may be
notified, from time to time, by the State Government in the Official Gazette”;

and the Notification VAT-1505/CR-114/Taxation-1, dated
1-6-2005 notifies a list of goods in which Item (5) reads :

“Software Packages.”


1.05 Further, it would be worth to look to the definition of
‘Sale’ under the Maharashtra Value Added Tax Act, 2002, S. 2(24) :


“Sale means a sale of goods made within the State for cash or deferred payment or other valuable consideration, but does not include a mortgage, hypothecation, charge or pledge; and the words ‘sell’, ‘buy’ and ‘purchase’, with all their grammatical variations and cognate expression, shall be construed accordingly.

Explanation :

For the purpose of this clause :

(a)……………

(b)(iv)  the transfer  of right to use any goods for any purpose  (whether  or not for a specified period)  for cash, deferred  payment, or other valuable consideration;…………..

shall be deemed to be a sale.”

1.06 It can be seen that ‘goods’ has been defined under all the relevant acts very widely and includes the right to use any goods which can be sold.

1.07 There  have  been  many  instances where the courts of law had occasions to examine whether  the software is goods. Although  with some limitations, but the most relevant on the subject was the case of :

Tata Consultancy  Services v. State of A.P., (2004) 271 ITR 401 (SC)

This is a landmark judgment of the Supreme Court of India, on the definition of ‘Goods.’ A detailed discussion on the same throws light on the term in the correct perspective.

1.08 Tata Consultancy Services (TCS) provides

consultancy services including computer consultancy services. They prepare and load on customers’ computers custommade software and also sell ready-made computer software packages off the shelf. The readymade software is also known as canned software.

The assessing officer, first appellate authority and the Sales Tax Tribunal Andhra Pradesh held that canned softwares are goods and sales tax is leviable on their sale.

TCS filed a tax revision case to the Hon. Andhra Pradesh High Court, which was dismissed.

The appellant preferred an appeal before the Supreme Court and the question raised in the appeal was whether canned software sold by the appellant can be termed to be ‘goods’.

The appellant submitted that the term ‘goods’ in S. 2(h) of the Andhra Pradesh General Sales Tax Act only includes tangible moveable property, and the words ‘all material articles and commodities’ also cover only tangible moveable property, and computer software is not tangible moveable property.

The appellant further submitted that the definition of ‘computer’ and ‘computer programme’ in the Copyright Act, 1957 shows that a computer programme falls within the definition of Literary Work and is intellectual property of the programmer.

The appellant also submitted that computer software is nothing but a set of commands, on the basis of which the computer may be directed to perform the desired  function.

It was further contended by the appellant that software is unlike a book or a painting. When the customer purchases a book or a painting, what he gets is the final product itself and in the case of software the consumer does not get any final product, but all that he gets is a set of commands which enable his computer to function.

It was further argued that having regard to its nature and inherent characteristic, software is intangible property which cannot fall within the definition of the term I goods’ in S. 2(h) of the Andhra Pradesh General Sales Tax Act.

The Supreme Court did not agree with these arguments and held as under:

The term ‘goods’ as used in Article 366(12) of the Constitution of India and as defined under the said Act are very wide and include all types of movable properties, whether these properties be tangible or intangible. We are in complete agreement with the observations made by this Court in Associated Cement Companies Ltd., (2001) 124 STC 59. A software programme may consist of various commands which enable the computer to perform a designated task. The copyright in that programme may remain with the originator of the programme, but the moment copies are made and marketed; it becomes goods, which are susceptible to sales tax. Even intellectual property, once it is put on to media, whether it be in the form of books or canvas (in case of painting) or computer disks or cassettes, and marketed would become “goods”. We see no difference between a sale of a software programme on a CD / floppy disc from a sale of music on a cassette / CD or a sale of a film on a video cassette/ CD. In all such cases, the intellectual property has been incorporated on a media, for purpose of transfer. Sale is not just of the media which by itself has very little value. The software and the media cannot be split up. What the buyer purchases and pays for is not the disc or the CD. As in the case of paintings or books or music or films, the buyer is purchasing the intellectual property and not the media; i.e., the paper or cassette or disc or CD. Thus a transaction of sale of computer software is clearly a sale of ‘goods’ within the meaning of the term as defined in the said Act. The term, “all materials, articles and commodities” includes both tangible and intangible/incorporeal property which is capable of abstraction, consumption and use and which can be transmitted, transferred, delivered, stored, possessed, etc. The software programmes have all these attributes.

The Supreme Court dismissed the appeal and held that canned software is “goods”.

This judgment more or less has defined the test to decide what is goods and the event when it becomes goods i.e., the moment copies are made and marketed, it becomes goods, which are susceptible to sales tax. Even intellectual property, once it is put on to media, whether it be in the form of books or canvas (in case of painting) or computer disks or cassettes, and marketed would become “goods”.

1.09 In the landmark judgment of Bharat Sanchar Nigam Ltd. v. Union of India, (2006) 1453 STC 91 – the Hon. Supreme Court held that a goods may be a tangible property or an intangible one, it would become goods, if it satisfies the test. It observed in para 56 that:

This view was adopted in Tata Consultancy Services v. State of Andhra Pradesh, for the purposes of levy of sales tax on computer software. It was held:

“A ‘goods’ may be a tangible property or an intangible one. It would become goods provided it has the attributes thereof having regard to (a) its utility; (b) capable of being bought and sold; and (c) capable of being transmitted, transferred, delivered, stored and possessed. If a software whether customised or non-customised satisfies these attributes, the same would be goods.”

This makes it clear that whether the software is a customised one or otherwise, it would be goods.

1.10 Further in the latest judgment of – Infosys Technologies Ltd. v. Special Commr. of Commercial Taxes,
(2008) 17 VST 256 (Mad.), while deciding the question “whether customised or non-customised software satisfies the test of the’ goods’ and is ‘goods’ for sales tax ?”, following the Supreme Court judgment in Bharat Sanchar Nigam Ltd. v. Union of India, (2006) 145 STC 91, it was held that goods may be a tangible property or an intangible one, it would be goods provided it has the attributes having regard to (a) its utility, (b) capable of being bought and sold; and (c) capable of being transmitted, transferred, delivered, stored and possessed.

If a software, whether customised or non-customised, satisfies these attributes the same would be goods.

2.0 Is it a service chargeable to Service Tax under Cl. 65(105) (zzzze) of the Finance Act, 1994 ?

2.01 The services provided under the Information Technology Software Service head on or after 16-5-2008 have been made taxable.

2.02 The statutory definition in S. 65(53a) of the Finance Act, 1994 is :
‘information technology software’ means any representation of instruction, data, sound or image, including source code and object code, recorded in machine readable form, and capable of being manipulated or providing interactively to a user, by means of a computer or an automatic data processing machine or any other device or equipment.

2.03 S. 65(105) (zzzze) of the Finance Act, 1994, inserted, defines taxable service as :

“any service provided or to be provided to any person, by any other person in relation to information technology software for use in the course, or furtherance, of business or commerce, including:

(i) development of information technology software,

(ii) study, analysis, design and programming of information technology software,

(iii) adaptation, upgradation, enhancement, implementation and other similar services related to information technology software,

(iv) Providing advice, consultancy and assistance on matter related to information technology software, including conducting feasibility studies on implementation of a system, specifications for a database design, guidance and assistance during the startup phase of a new system, specification to secure a database, advice on proprietary information technology software,

(v) Acquiring the right to use information technology software for commercial exploitation including right to reproduce, distribute and sell information technology software and right to use software components for the creation of an inclusion in other information technology software products,

(vi) Acquiring the right to use information technology software supplied electronically.

On a plain reading of the scope, apparently Sale of Software seems to be covered under the charge of Service Tax.

2.04 The Circular/Letter D. O. F. No. 334/1/2008-TRU, dated 29-2-2008, discusses salient features of the changes made by the Finance Act, 2008. It states in Para 4.4.1., that:

Transfer of the right to use any goods is leviable to Sales Tax/VAT as deemed sale of goods [Article 366(29A)(d) of the Constitution of India]. Transfer of right to use involves transfer of both possession and control of the goods to the user of the goods.

It also states in Para 4.4.2, that:

Excavators, wheel, loaders, dump-trucks, crawler carriers, compaction equipment, cranes, etc. off-shore construction vessels & barges, geotechnical vessels, tug and barge, flotillas, rigs and high-value machineries are supplied for use, with no legal right of possession and effective control. Transaction of allowing another person to use the goods, without giving legal right of possession and effective control, not being treated as sale of goods, is treated as service.

It further states in Para 4.4.3, that:

Proposal is to levy Service Tax on such services provided in relation to supply of tangible goods, including machinery, equipment and appliances, for use, with no legal right of possession or effective control. Supply of tangible goods for use and leviable to VAT/sales tax as deemed sale of goods, is not covered under the scope of the proposed service. Whether a transaction involves transfer of possession and control is a question of facts and is to be decided based on the terms of the contract and other material facts. This could be ascertained from the fact whether or not VAT is payable or paid.

Although the clarification is under the head Supply of Tangible Goods for Use, it is equally applicable in the present case also.

This is because the Supreme Court also has held the right to use as goods.

It is obvious that the test to decide any transaction as a sale as is accepted in taxing statutes, is whether a transaction involves transfer of possession and control is a question of facts and is to be decided based on the terms of the contract and other material facts.

2.05 The further test for checking about the applicability of Service Tax is to check whether MVAT is payable or paid.

It is obvious from the clarification by the Department itself that transfer of right to use any goods is subjected to VAT and where VAT is payable or paid, the service is not covered under the scope of Service Tax.

2.06 This is a very important point as it relates to a clarification per Constitution.

2.07 Further, Service Tax since its inception has never been intended to be levied on Sale of Goods and the same principle has throughout been followed consistently by the Department. The reason is obviously related to the Constitutional power of the Union Government to levy tax on an item covered under Article 246 read with List II – State List to Schedule VII to the Constitution of India. This is more particularly explained in the following paras 3.00 to 3.14.

2.08 The mutual exclusivity of taxes which has been reflected in Article 246(1) of the Constitution means that taxing entries must be construed so as to maintain exclusivity.

i) Gujarat Ambuja Cements Ltd. v. UOI, (2005) 4 SCC 214, (para 23)

2.09 Presumption that a Legislature is acting within its competence:

In constructing an enactment of a Legislature with limited competence, the Court must presume that the Legislature in question knows its limits and that it is only legislating for those who are actually within its jurisdiction.

 i) State of Bihar v. Charusila Dasi, 1959 S.c.  1002

 ii) P. N. Krishna  Lal v. Govt.  of Kerala,  (1995) Supp.(2)  SCC 18 (Para 8)

iii) Anant  Prasad Laxminiwas  Genriwal  v. State of A.p.,  1963 S.c.  853.
 
In all the amendments that may take place, the Legislature has to remain in the framework defined by the Constitution.

Service Tax is never intended to, nor can it, be levied on subjects which are enumerated in List-II i.e., a State List.

Hence, even if wordings are drafted to suggest some different meanings, it cannot travel beyond the framework.

The Courts have laid down the principles of inter-pretations and while deciding matters like this the test called ‘pith and substance’ has to be applied ignoring the apparent words.

2.10 The State Legislature has legislative competence to treat a particular sale or purchase as the first sale or purchase.

i) Food Corporation of India v. State of Kerala, (1997)

 ii) Arjun Flour Mills v. State of Orissa, (1998) 8 SCC 89 (Para 1).

2.11 Whenever the question of legislative competence arises, the issue must be solved by applying the rule of pith and substance whether that legislation falls within any of the entries in List-II. If it does, no further question arises and article 246 cannot be brought in to yet hold that the State Legislature is not competent to enact the law.

i) State of A.P. v. McDowell & Co., (1996)3 SCC 709 (para 7)

2.12 Doctrine  of pith  and  substance

This doctrine means that if an enactment substantially falls within the powers expressly conferred by the Constitution upon the Legislature which enacted it, it cannot be held to be invalid, merely because it incidentally encroaches on matters assigned to another Legislature.

i) Bharat Hydro Power Corpn. Ltd. v. State of Assam, (2004) 2 SCC 553-561 (para  18)

The doctrine of pith and substance is sometimes invoked to find out the nature and content of the legislation. However, when there is an irreconcilable conflict between the two legislations, the Central legislation shall prevail. However, every attempt would be made to reconcile the conflict.

i) Special Reference No. 1 of 2001. In re, (2004) 4 SCC 489, 499-500 (para 15)

The express words employed in an entry necessarily include incidental and ancillary matters so as to make the legislation effective.

i) Hindustan  Lever v. State of Maharashtra,  (2004) 9 SCC 438,  457-58 (para  34)

The Court is required to ascertain the true nature and character of the enactment with reference to the legislative power. It must examine the whole enactment, its object, scope and effect of its provision. If on such adjudication, it is found that the enactment falls substantially on a matter assigned to the State Legislature, the enactment must be held valid even though the nomenclature of the enactment shows that it is beyond the legislative competence of the State Legislature. When a levy is challenged, its validity has to be adjudged with reference to the competency of the State Legislature to enact such a law and real nature and character of the levy, its pith and substance is to be found out and adjudged with reference to the competency of the Legislature.

i) State of Karnataka v. Drive-in-Enterprises,  (2001) 4 SCC 60,  63-64 (para  6)

If by applying the rule of pith and substance, the legislation falls within any of the entries of List I1, the State Legislature’s competence cannot be questioned on the ground that the field is covered by the Union List.

 i) State of Rajasthan v. Vulan Medical & General Store, (2001) 4 SCC 642, 652-53 (para 11)

In other words, when a law is impugned as ultra vires, what has to be ascertained is the true character of the legislation. If on such examination it is found that the legislation is in substance one on a matter assigned to the Legislature, then it must be held to be valid in its entirety, even though it might incidentally trench on matters which are beyond its competence.

i) Krishna A. S. v. State of Madras, AIR 1957  SC;

ii) Kantian Devon Produce & Co. s. State of Kerala, (1972) 2 S.CC 218;

iii) P. N.  Krishnd Lal v. Govt. of Kerala, 1995  Supp (2)SCC 187  (para  8 and  9).

In a situation of overlapping, the rule of pith and substance has to be applied to determine to which entry a given piece of legislation relates. Thereafter, any incidental trenching on the field reserved to the other Legislature is of no consequence.
 
i) Goodricke Group Ltd. v. State of W.B.,  1995 Supp SCC 707  (para  12)

ii) ITC Ltd. v. A P M C, (2002) 9 SCC 232 (para 182)

iii) E. V Chinnaiah v. State of A.P., (2005)  I SCC 394, 413  (para  29)

It is the function and power of the court to interpret an enactment and to say to which entry an enactment relates. The opinion of the Govt. in this behalf is but an opinion and not more.

i) Goodricke Group Ltd. v. State of W.B., 1995 Supp SCC 707  (para 37)

In order to examine the true character of the enactment, one must have regard to the enactment as a whole to its objects and to the scope and effect of the provisions. It would be quite an erroneous approach to the question to view such a statute not as an organic whole, but as a mere collection of sections, then disintegrate it into parts, examine under what heads of legislation those parts would severally fall and by that process determine what portions thereof are intra vires and what are not.

i) Bharat Hydro Power Corpn. Ltd. v. State of Assam, (2004) 2 SCC 553, 561 (para  18)

2.13 It is obvious from the discussion above that the doctrine of pith and substance has to be applied while interpreting the situation like the one in the present case.

3.0 Whether both the MVAT and Service Tax are applicable?

3.01 The issue is already clarified by the Department itself as mentioned in Point No. 2.04 above that, where VAT/Sales Tax is payable or paid, the service will be beyond the scope of Service Tax.

This is a very important point as it relates to a Constitutional clarification.’ Various courts have clarified this point in many cases.

3.02 The reason for this is the Constitution of India gives powers to the Parliament and to the Legislatures of the States to charge tax on various things/ subjects.

Article 246 enumerates  the powers and Lists I, II and in Schedule VII to the Constitution enumerate various matters. List I is a Union List, List II is a State List and List III is a Concurrent List.

We are at present  concerned with List-I and List-Il.

3.03 In List-I

For Service Tax there is a specific Entry 92C – Taxes on Services – inserted by 95th Amendment Bill, 2003 (to be called 88th Amendment Act, 2003) and passed by Lok Sabha on 6-5-2003 and Rajya Sabha on 5-5-2003.

But this has not been made  yet effective.

Entry-97 is a residuary entry and presently Service Tax is covered by this. This reads as :

97. Any other matter not enumerated in List 11or List III including any tax not mentioned in either of those Lists.

3.04 In List-II – State List

Entry  54 reads:

Taxes on the sale or purchase of goods other than newspapers, subject to the provisions of Entry 92A of List I.

(92A in List-I, is for taxes on Sale or Purchase in the interstate trade.)

3.05 Sale of Goods is a State subject and goods which are subjected to State Sales Tax/VAT cannot be subjected to Union tax – i.e., Service Tax in the present case.

There have been many instances where both the Union and the State claim the taxes. There are instances of transactions of multiple taxing events. In all such questions as to whether both the taxes are applicable to the same event, various courts of law including the Supreme Court, have clarified that there cannot be a double taxation on the same thing. This is evident from the following decided cases on the subject.

3.06 Held in International Tourist Corporation v. State of Haryana, AIR 1981 SC 774; (1981) 2 SCC 319 – that:

Before exclusive legislative competence can be claimed for Parliament by resort to the residuary power, legislative incompetence of the State Legislature must be clearly established. Entry 97 itself is specific in that a matter can be brought under that Entry only if it is not enumerated in List 11or List and in the case of a tax, if it is not mentioned in either of those lists.
 
3.07 In State of West Bengal v. Kesoram Industries Ltd., 266 ITR 721 (SC 5-Member Constitution Bench 4 v. 1 judgment), it was held that:

Measure of tax is not determinative of its essential character. The same transaction may involve two or more taxable events in its different aspects. Merely because the aspects overlap, such overlapping does not detract from the distinctiveness of the aspects. Two aspects of the same transaction can be utilised by two Legislatures for two levies which may be taxes or fees.

3.08 It was held in – Builders’ Association of India v. UOI, 73 STC 370 (SC 5-Member Constitution Bench) that:

After the 46th Amendment, works contract which was indivisible one is by a legal fiction altered into one for sale of goods and the other for supply of labour and services. After 46th Amendment, it has become possible for States to levy tax on value of goods involved in a works contract in the way in which sales tax was leviable on the price of goods and materials supplied in a building contract which had been entered into two distinct and separate parts. (Really, in the observation ‘an indivisible works contract, is by a legal fiction altered into one for sale of goods and the other for supply of labour and services’, the second part is obiter, since the 46th Amendment does not provide that other part will be deemed for supply of labour and services).

Article 366(29A) provides for ‘deemed sale of goods’ and not ‘deemed provision of service’.

3.09 In Godfrey Philips India Ltd. v. State of Up, 139 STC 537 (SC 5-Member Constitution Bench), it was observed as follows :

The Indian Constitution is unique in that it contains an exhaustive enumeration and division of legislative powers of taxation between the Centre and the States. This mutual exclusivity is reflected in Article 246(1).

3.10 In Kerala Agro Machinery Corpn. v. CCE, (2007) (CESTAT),a strong prima facie view is expressed that when sales tax is paid on a transaction, service tax will not be payable.

3.11 In the Shorter Constitution of India, Dr. Durga Das Basu, while commenting on Union’s and State’s powers and Entries in Schedule VII :

Scope of legislative (fiscal) power under Schedule VII – at Page 1693 of 14th edition 2009, – stated that:

There can be no overlapping in the field of taxation. A tax if specifically provided for under one legislative entry, effectively narrows the fields of taxation available under other related entries. It is also natural when considering the ambit of an express power in relation to an unspecified residuary power, to give a broad interpretation to the former at the expense of the latter.

i) Godfrey Phillips India Ltd., v. State of U.P., (2005) 2 SCC 515, 544-45 (Para 59); AIR 2005 SC 1103.

3.12 Further on commenting on – Scope of the residuary power – at Page 2367 of 14th edition 2009 it is stated  that:

3) Where the competition is between an Entry in list II and Entry 97 in list I, the latter cannot be so expansively interpreted as to whittle down the power of the State Legislature.

International  Tourist Corpn. v. State of Haryana, AIR 1981 SC 774 (Para  7) 1981 (2) SCR 364

On the other hand, the Entry in the State list must be given a broad and plentiful interpretation.

International  Tourist Corpn. v. State of Haryana, AIR 1981 SC 774 (Para  7) 1981 (2) SCR 364

5) Being aware of the dangers of allowing the residuary powers of Parliament under Entry 97 of List I of the Seventh Schedule to swamp the legislative entries in the State List, the Supreme Court interpreted Entry 54 of List II, together with Art.366 (29A) of the Constitution, without whittling down the interpretation by referring to the residuary provision.

Bharat Sanchar  Nigam  Ltd.  v. Union  of India, (2006) 3 SCC I, 40 (Para  82).

3.13 It is held in Imagic Creative Pvt. Ltd. v. Commissioner of Commercial Taxes, (2008) 12 STT 392 (SC) that:

The Court must also bear in mind that where the application of a Parliamentary and a legislative Act comes up for consideration, endeavours shall be made to see that provisions of both the Acts are made applicable (Para 27).

Payments of Service Tax as also VAT are mutually exclusive. Therefore, they should be held to be applicable having regard to the respective parameters of Service Tax and sales tax as envisaged in a composite contract as contradistinguished from an indivisible contract. It may consist of different elements providing for attracting different nature of levy. It was, therefore difficult to hold that in a case of instant nature, sales tax would be payable on the value of the entire contract, irrespective of the element of service provided – the approach of the assessing authority, thus, appeared to be correct. (Para 28)

4.0    What is value chargeable to Service Tax, if applicable?

4.01 S. 67 of the Finance Act, 1994 contains provisions for valuation of service for charging Service Tax and Rule 3 of the Valuation Rules provides Manner of determination of value of taxable service.

4.02 There are instances when some services are provided free of cost. The courts of law have held that no service Tax can be charged for free services.

i) Bharati Cellular Ltd. v. CCE, (2205) 1 STT 73 (CESTAT)

ii) Kamal & Co. v. CCE, (2007) 10 SIT 481 (CESTAT 5MB)

4.03 Indus Motor Company v. CCE, (2008) 12 SIT 112 is a case very similar to the present one. Free service provided to automobiles by authorised service station (presumably at the time of sale) for which no payment is received from anyone and when its price is included in sale price of vehicle, it cannot be subjected to Service Tax.

4.04 In Chandravadan Desai v. CCE, (2007) 11SIT 326 (CESTAT), the assessee who was a stockbroker did not charge brokerage in respect of certain transactions, it was held that S. 67 does not have any deeming provision and hence Service Tax is not levi-able.

4.05 The discussion in Builders’ Association of India v. UOI, 73 STC 370 (SC 5-Member Constitution Bench) is also relevant and is given in Point No. 3.08 above.

4.06 Very important observations are made by the Supreme Court in the case of Bharat Sanchar Nigam Ltd. v. Union of India, (2006) 3 SCC 1.

The Court observed that the definition of the word Sale in Article 366(12) was not altered and hence the same has to be understood as under the Sale of Goods Act, 1930.

Further, important test laid down by the Court in deciding a composite contract not covered by Article 366(29A), that the ‘dominant nature test’ continues to be applied.

The Court observed that after 46th Amendment to the Constitution, only 3 specific situations were chosen from several composite transactions which involve service as well as sale and out of those 3, only works contract and catering contract involve both the elements of service and sale. Therefore except these, no other sale was contemplated to be covered or bifurcated.

In para 46 it observed that:

“the test therefore for composite contracts other than those mentioned in Article 366(29A) continues to be – did the parties have in mind or intend separate rights arising out of the sale of goods. If there was no such intention, there is no sale even if the contract could be disintegrated. The test for deciding whether a contract falls into one category or the other is as to what is ‘the substance of the contract.’ We will, for want of a better phrase, call this the dominant nature test.”

In view of the above test, it can well be concluded that unless the transaction in reality contemplated two distinct contracts, a composite contract cannot be bifurcated for levy of Service Tax. One has to go by the substance of the agreement in the transaction.

5.0 Facts from  the Software  Sale Agreement:

5.01 The software seller normally enters into an agreement with the buyer and various terms and conditions are specified and executed by the buyer and the seller.

5.02 The Terms of Agreement normally grant a licence to use the software and the vendor thereby grants to the buyer a licence to use the said product or licensed material.

5.03 Further, there are clauses which enumerate free services provided like :

Installation of product and it normally states that the vendor undertakes to provide on-site training of the software only to the specified staff of the buyer.
 
The vendor also normally carries out some modifications or customisation and also takes up

  • Pre-installation. Requirement/GAP analysis study, conducted by vendor.
  • Data migration from all earlier  software.
  • Pre- and post-installation system  audits.

All the above come as an inbuilt and inseparable part of the product and necessarily required with the software and are free of cost/charge for the same. The price paid is for the licence/right to use the software.

In many cases e.g., in case of a Tally software, installation is done by the representative of the vendor and other stages i.e., migration of the data and system audit, etc. are done and carried out by the buyer at his own cost. Even if the same is arranged by the vendor, the cost is paid for the buyer to a third party and nothing is paid to the vendor.

6.0 Conclusion:

Considering all the relevant facts, and the law as discussed here in above, and relying and based on the same as mentioned above, we reach the conclusion that:

6.01 In case of the manufacturer / developer, he sells the right to use of the software.

However in case of the software dealer the position is slightly different. The software is not developed by him, but he has got the rights to sale/market/ deployment of the licence/right to use.

Except this, there is no difference between the two. It is permitted to make only minor modifications to the extent of incorporating the name, etc. as per the specific requirements/parameters of the purchaser, without changing any basic structure of the software.

The vendor is also in some cases, making requirement/GAP analysis study, data migration from all earlier software, and arranging pre- and post-installation system audit, which are either free of cost or included in the software price itself, except in case of system audit. This is normally required to be carried out by an independent third party and is paid separately by the buyer to the third party.

6.02 It is evident that the sale involves both a Sale and a Service. The grant of licence is a right to use the software, with a legal right of possession and effective control, allowing another person (purchaser) to use the goods (software).

This is done by copying the original software and then given possession and control to the buyer. The moment this is copied for Sale, it becomes goods, as defined by the Supreme Court of India.

Hence, this is a Sale of Goods under Article 366(12) of the Constitution of India, Entry C-39 of Schedules to the MVAT Act, 2002 and consequently MVAT is chargeable on sale price of the same. The position for the developer of the software and the dealer is the same.

This portion being in List-Il, i.e., State List of Schedule VII to the Constitution of India, cannot be subjected to Service Tax.

6.03 The items mentioned in Point No. 5.03 may be covered and subjected to Service Tax, if any consideration for the service is received separately in any manner.

Normally the pre-installation, installation, modifications and successful commencement of use of software, etc. are provided free of cost.

As held by the Supreme Court (para 4.06) the dominant intention of parties is to buy and sell. Hence, the sale price cannot be disintegrated for the purpose of Service Tax.

Hence, in my opinion these are not chargeable to Service Tax.

Hence, under the State Vat, the position is now amply clear.

But, there has to be suitable amendment in the Valuation Rules and a basic clarification in the definition and the scope of the service, to tax services part only under the Service Tax and not the goods part, as this is not permitted under the Constitution of India.

Changing of law through issuance of circulars ! ! !

Introduction :

    Till today the law on the subject of repairing and maintenance of roads and other infrastructural facilities was clear in the minds of all stakeholders (barring a few service tax commissionerates).

    There was this discussion that maintenance and/or repairing of roads may be a taxable activity, but a conclusive view came across from most corners that no such taxing is possible because the law itself was clear enough.

    This view was based on a sound principle of law which says that if a service activity is specifically excluded from the purview of taxation from one service category, it cannot be included in some other category unless and until specific inclusion thereof is provided for it in that Section.

    The Central Board of Excise and Customs (CBEC) has now come up with a Circular No. 110/2009, dated 23.02.2009 clarifying the doubts in respect of levy of service tax on repair/renovation/widening of roads.

    The Circular has tried to give extra-judicial meaning to 2 sections involved :

    1. Commercial or industrial construction service [Section 65(105) (zzq)]

    2. Management, maintenance or repair service [Section 65(105) (zzg)].

Legislative Background :

I. Commercial or Industrial Construction Service :

As per Section 65(25b) of the Finance Act, 1994 (Act), ‘Commercial or industrial construction service’ means —

(a) construction of a new building or a civil structure or a part thereof; or

(b) construction of pipeline or conduit; or

(c) completion and finishing services such as glazing, plastering, painting, floor and wall tiling, wall covering and wall papering, wood and metal joinery and carpentry, fencing and railing, construction of swimming pools, acoustic applications or fittings and other similar services, in relation to building or civil structure; or

(d) repair, alteration, renovation or restoration of, or similar services in relation to, building or civil structure, pipeline or conduit,

which is —

(i) used, or to be used, primarily for; or

(ii) occupied, or to be occupied, primarily with; or

(iii) engaged, or to be engaged, primarily in,

commerce or industry, or work intended for commerce or industry, but does not include such services provided in respect of roads, airports, railways, transport terminals, bridges, tunnels and dams;

    The above defining Section clearly spells out that all kinds of repairing, alteration, renovation, restoration or similar services provided in relation to any infrastructural facilities including roads is completely non-taxable. Therefore it can be safely said that there was and still exists a specific exclusion from charging of service tax on repairing and related services in respect of roads.

II. Management, Maintenance or Repair Service :

    As per section 65 (64) of the Act,

    “management, maintenance or repair service means any service provided by —

    (i) any person under a contract or an agreement; or

    (ii) a manufacturer or any person authorised by him,

    in relation to,

    (a) management of properties, whether immovable or not;

    (b) maintenance or repair of properties, whether immovable or not; or

    (c) maintenance or repair including reconditioning or restoration, or servicing of any goods, excluding a motor vehicle.

    [Explanation : For the removal of doubts, it is hereby declared that for the purposes of this clause, —

    (a) ‘goods’ includes computer software;

    (b) ‘properties’ includes information technology software;]

    This section puts in place a charge on management, maintenance or repair services in relation to all movable and immovable goods and properties. This Section was first amended w.e.f. 16.06.2005 to include maintenance services in respect of immovable properties and it was further amended from 1.05.2006 to include repairing services therein also.

    Legal Importance of circular :

    It is an accepted rule of law that an Act passed by the Parliament is supreme in authority and its provisions cannot be re-defined by issuance of Circulars. Circulars can only be guides to law and law cannot be re-defined by these instruments. Many Circulars have been struck down by Courts. In the case of Commissioner of Sales Tax vs. Indra Industries, (2001) 248 ITR 338 (SC), the apex court has opined that,

    “A Circular by tax authorities is not binding on the Courts. It is not binding on the assessee.”

    Hence Circulars at best are instruments in the hands of administrators to clear doubts where they exist, but unfortunately these are being used to create doubts where none exist.

    Defining the Circular

    Circular no. 110 is issued in response to clarification sought by the Nashik Commissionerate on the issue. The Circular has tried to clarify 2 issues —

    a. Whether management, maintenance or repairs of roads is taxable under similar service head or not.

    b. Segregation of activities in relation to roads into 2 distinct heads as under :

    i. Maintenance & repair activities

    1. Resurfacing

    2. Renovation

    3. Strengthening

    4. Relaying

    5. Filling of potholes

    ii. Construction Activities

    1. Laying of a new road

    2. Widening of narrow road to broader road (such as conversion of a two-lane road to a four-lane road)

    3. Changing road surface (gravelled road to metalled road/metalled road to black-topped/blacktopped to concrete, etc.).

In simple language, as per this Circular all activities of management, maintenance or repairing in respect of roads will be taxable with retrospective effect at least from 1.05.2006 if not earlier. It has tried to define what activities are classifiable as Maintenance or Repair services and what can be defined as Construction. As there is no legal standing of the Circulars, its impact cannot be retrospective in nature.

If we believe this Circular to be sacrosanct, then at least from 1.05.2006 all jobs of resurfacing, renovation, strengthening, relaying or filling of potholes in respect of roads will become taxable.

This can be stretched to mean that if a road is constructed once – all relaying work done on it for as many years to come – would be a taxable activity given that the quality of surface of the road is not changed from gravelled road to metalled road/metalled road to blacktopped/blacktopped to concrete, etc.

Mistake of Omission:

The Circular fails to recognise one important sub-clause of section 65 (25b) of the Act.

As explained earlier, this Section defines the words “Commercial or Industrial Construction” – wherein sub-clause (d) of Section 65 (25b) clearly includes all kinds of repair, alteration, renovation, restoration or similar services. Thereby meaning that repairs is also a sort of Construction.

The definition further has an the exclusion clause which says that,

“but does not include such services provided in respect of roads, airports, railways, transport terminals, bridges, tunnels and dams.]”

The words “Such services” – refer to sub-clause 65 (25b) (a) to (d) – which means that all repairing, renovation, etc., jobs in relation to roads are NOT TAXABLE at all.

Why was this clause not referred to before issuance of the impugned Circular is a question that only the Board can answer. It is clear that they have not considered this sub-clause and this mistake of omission would give birth to serious litigation issues for the infrastructure sector as a whole.

Conclusion:

As far as repairing jobs of roads, etc., is concerned there was no iota of doubt in the legislative intent, because infrastructure is the need of the day and upkeep of the infrastructural facilities is a core area in which the Government is working hard. Unfortunately this Circular may undo all the good intentions of law.

It is not as if the law is silent on the issue. On the contrary, the law is crystal clear and specifically excludes all kinds of repair jobs done in respect of all infrastructural facilities like roads, airports, railways, transport terminals, bridges, tunnels and dams as explained above.

This Circular must be withdrawn with immediate effect and all efforts must be taken by all stake-holders to force the Central Government into withdrawing it. The Circular, in any case according to me, is Void-ab-initio and will not stand the scrutiny of Tribunals and courts in the long run. But till that happens, it would have played the mischief it is intended to. The litigation-creating potential of this Circular is immense and immediate.

This Circular would  proverbially open a Pandora’s box for the maintenance and repairing of infrastructural facilities sector as a whole, because the logic of this circular, if accepted, would mean that similar services in relation to infrastructural facilities other that roads -like airports, tunnels, dams, etc., – will also be taxable and that too retrospectively.

This Circular has all the right ingredients to do all the wrong things !

Taxation of Alimony

Article

1. Introduction :


Even though marriages are made in heaven, divorces take place
on earth, and as death and taxes are inevitable, the question arises about
taxability of alimony in the hands of the receiver.

There are various laws that govern the quantum of maintenance
awarded by the Court. An application for maintenance can be filed in India by
Hindus under the Hindu Adoption and Maintenance Act, and under the Hindu
Marriage Act. People belonging to other religions are governed by their personal
laws. However, irrespective of one’s caste, creed or religion, any person can
file an application for maintenance, u/s.125 of the Criminal Procedure Code.
Besides the wife and husband, the parents and children of the respondent, can
also vice versa claim maintenance under this particular Section.

The Court decides to grant maintenance only when an
application is filed before it. It is entirely at the discretion of the Court to
decide if at all any maintenance deserves to be awarded to the applicant/
petitioner, and if so, then the amount of maintenance to be granted. Whilst
doing so, the Court takes into account various factors that would affect the
quantum of maintenance to be decided upon, such as the status and the financial
position of the parties concerned, the number of dependants on the respondent,
etc. Although the wife who makes the application for maintenance is earning
sufficiently well for herself, she can yet be entitled to alimony in case her
husband’s income exceeds way beyond her own, on the premise that the wife is
entitled to live as per the standard and status of her husband.

The amount of maintenance once fixed by the Court can be
altered if there is a reversal of circumstances. There can be an enhancement or
reduction of the same.

If there is failure on the part of the husband to pay up the
maintenance amount decided upon by the Court, the Court dismisses any relief
that he is entitled to.

The Court can refuse alimony if it is proved that the wife
has a good source of income; or if it is found that she has been living in
adultery. In recent times, the laws in India have become very strict. The Court
has taken a very firm stand as regards the status of the wife. Only the lawfully
wedded woman is considered as the wife. Certain recent judgments pronounced by
the Court have very clearly indicated that mistress or second wife is not
entitled to maintenance. However, children from the second marriage are entitled
to maintenance from the father.

2. Taxation of Alimony received :


Now with this very brief background about ‘Alimony’, let’s
see the taxation of the alimony in the hands of the receiver. The following
factors need to be considered in this regard :

The word ‘Income’ is defined in S. 2(24) of the Income-tax
Act. This definition does not specifically cover ‘Alimony’. But at the same time
this definition is an inclusive definition and hence whatever can fall under
natural meaning of the word ‘Income’ is covered under this definition.

Now to look at the natural meaning of the word ‘Income’, we
must consider the following factors.

We first have to decide whether the receipt is a capital
receipt or it is a revenue receipt. Capital receipts are not taxable unless
otherwise specifically taxed by the law and all revenue receipts are taxable
unless otherwise exempted by the law.

When during the course of continuance of marriage the husband
gives money to his wife for the upkeep and maintenance of his family including
herself, the same is not regarded as her income, as by the customary laws, the
earning husband is duty bound to maintain his family. Payment of alimony arises
out of the same duty recognised by various statutes; the only difference being
that in this case the marriage does not subsist.

In CIT v. Shaw Wallace and Co., AIR (1932) PC 138;
(1932) 2 Comp. Cases 276; it has been held that :

“The object of the Indian Act is to tax income, a term
which it does not define. It is expanded, no doubt, into income, profits and
gains, but the expansion is more a matter of words than of substance. Income,
in this Act connotes a periodical monetary return coming in with some sort of
regularity, or expected to be continuously productive, but it must be one
whose object is the production of a definite return, excluding anything in the
nature of a mere windfall. Thus income has been likened pictorially to the
fruit of a tree or the crop of a field.”


In Dooars Tea Ltd. v. Commr. of Agri., IT (1963) 44
ITR 6, the Supreme Court has pointed out that it is necessary to bear in mind
that the word ‘income’ as used in the Indian IT Act, 1922, is a word of elastic
import and its extent and sweep are not controlled or limited by the use of the
words ‘profit and gains’ and they have pointed out that the diverse forms which
income may assume cannot exhaustively be enumerated, and so in each case the
decision of the question as to whether any particular receipt is income or not
must depend upon the nature of the receipt and the true scope and effect of the
relevant taxing provisions.

In H.H. Maharani Shri Vijaykuverba Saheb of Morvi v. CIT, (1963) 49 ITR 594, it was held that a voluntary payment, which is made entirely without consideration and is not traceable to any source which a practical man may regard as a real source of his income but depends entirely on the whim of the donor, cannot fall in the category of ‘income.’ Thus voluntary and gratuitous payments which are connected with the office, profession, vocation or occupation may constitute income, although if the payments were not made, enforcement thereof cannot be insisted upon. These payments constitute income because they are referable to a definite source, which is the office, profession, vocation or occupation. It could thereof be said that such payment is taxable as having an origin in the office, profession, or vocation of the payee, which constitutes a definite source for the income. What is taxed under the Indian IT Act is income from every source (barring the exception provided in the Act itself) and even a voluntary payment, which can be regarded as having an origin, which a practical man can regard as a real source of income, will fall in the category of income, which is taxable under the Act.”

The motive of payer is not relevant while deciding whether a receipt is revenue or capital in nature. [P. H. Divecha v. CIT, (1963) 48 ITR 222 (SC)]

In (IT v. Smt. Shanti Meattle, (1973) 90 ITR 385 (All.) it was held that “In the circumstance of the case, the allowance received by the assessee from her husband was held to be taxable as income in her hands.”

In CIT v. M. Ramalaxmi Reddy, (1980) 19 CTR (Mad.) 270; (1981) 131 ITR 415, it has been held by the Division Bench of the Madras High Court that il receipt cannot be treated as income where no characteristics of income can be detected in it. Where a person gets some receipt of money where he does not angle for it, or where it is not the product of an organised seeking after emoluments, or where it is merely a chance encounter with a venture, which while enriching him does not form part of any scheme of profit making, the idea of income is absent. It has been held there that the real basis for the concept of non-taxable casual receipt is that the transaction in question which produces it does no constitute any trade or an adventure in the nature” of trade.

It has been held in the case of Mehboob Production P. Ltd v. CIT, (1977) 106 ITR 758 (Bom.) that:

“In order to constitute of income, the receipt must be one which comes in (a) as a return, and (b) from a definite source. It must also be of the nature which is of the character of the income according to the ordinary meaning of that word in the English language and must not be of the nature of a windfall.”

A receipt in lieu of source of income is a capitaf-receipt and a receipt in lieu of income is a revenue income.

It has been held in the case of Commissioner of Income-tax v. M. P. Poncha, (1995) 125 CTR (Bom.) 274; (1995) 211 ITR 1005 (Bom.) that:

“Payment of alimony to divorced wife – payment made by employer out of assessee’s salary under instructions of assessee.

This is a clear case of application of income by the assessee for payment of alimony to his ex-wife and maintenance of his minor child. The direction to the employer or the agreement with the employer to pay the agreed amount of Rs.650 per month to the ex-wife every month is only a mode of payment. It does not in any way amount to diversion of salary income before it accrues to the assessee. The employer is obliged to pay the amount only after the salary income accrues to the assessee and becomes payable to him. It is at that point of time that the employer has agreed or undertaken to pay as per the wishes of the assessee the sum of Rs.650 per month to his ex-wife. The employers have only agreed to deal with the amount of salary accrued to the assessee in such a manner as directed by him. It is a clear case of application of income which has accrued in the hands of the assessee. This is not a :ase of diversion of income by overriding title.”

Just because the alimony is based on the income of the payer, it cannot make the receipt a revenue receipt. There is no relation between the measure that is used for the purpose of calculating a particular receipt and the quality of the figure that is arrived at by means of application of the test. – Glenboig Union Fireclay Co. Ltd. v. IRC, (1922) 12TC 427. It is the quality of payment that is decisive of the character of the payment and not the method of payment or its measure. – Sevairam Doongarmall v. CIT, (1961) 42 ITR 392 (SC).

2.2 It flows from above that at the first instance we have to decide whether the concerned receipt is revenue in nature or not. Once a receipt is considered as revenue, it is not material whether it is received in parts or it is received in lump sum.

2.3 S. 25 of the Hindu Marriage Act, 1995 deals with permanent alimony and maintenance. Ss.(1) of the said Section runs as follows:

“Any court exercising jurisdiction under this Act may, at the time of passing any decree or at any time subsequent thereto, on application made to it for the purpose by either the wife or the husband, as the case may be, order that the respondent shall, while the applicant remains unmarried, pay to the applicant for her or his maintenance and support such gross sum or such monthly or periodical sum for a term not exceeding the life of the applicant as, having regard to the respondent’s own income and other property, if any, the income and other property of the ap-plicant and the conduct of the parties, it may seem to the Court to be just, and any such payment may be secured, if necessary, by a charge on the immovable property of the respondent.”

2.4  Case Law:

In a landmark decision on this issue in the case of Princess Maheshwari Devi of Pratapgarh v. CIT, (1984) 147 ITR 258 (Bom.), the Bombay High Court observed that:

“The decree is the source of the payment of alimony. It cannot be said that the decree is a mere recognition or continuation of an earlier obligation. If the decree were set aside, the assessee could not claim the monthly alimony from her ex-husband. If the ex-husband failed to pay the amount, it is the decree which the assessee would have to execute. It is clear that the decree is the definite source of these receipts. The amount is what the assessee periodically and regularly gets and entitled to get under this decree. This amount must, therefore, be looked upon as a return from the said decree which is the definite source thereof.

The word ‘return’, in a case like this, can never be interpreted as meaning only a return for labour or skill employed or capital invested. Such a definition of ‘return’ would be too narrow and would exclude the case of voluntary payments, when it is settled position in law that in some cases even voluntary payments can be regarded as income. Although it is true that it could never be said that the assessee entered into the marriage with any view to get alimony, on the other hand, it cannot be denied that the assessee consciously obtained the decree and obtaining the decree did involve some efforts on the part of the assessee. The monthly alimony being a regular and periodical return from a definite source, being the decree, must be held to be ‘income’ within the meaning of S. 2(24).

The monthly payments of alimony have their origin in a definite source, viz., they are regular in nature and the said decree was obtained by some efforts on the part of the assessee. Hence these payments can never be regarded as a series of windfall or casual payments.

So far as a lump sum payment is concerned, the decree must be regarded as a transaction in which the right of the assessee to get maintenance from her ex-husband was recognised and given effect to. That right was undoubtedly a capital asset. By the decree, that right has been diminished or partly extinguished by the payments of the lump sum alimony, and the balance of that right has been worked out in the shape of monthly payments of alimony, which could be regarded as income. Had the amount not been awarded in a lump sum under the decree of the assessee, a larger monthly sum would have been awarded to her on account of alimony. It is not as if the payment can be looked upon as a commutation of any future monthly or annual payments, because there was no pre-existing right in the assessee to obtain any monthly payments at all. Nor is there anything in the decree to indicate that the lump sum alimony was paid in commutation of any right to any periodic payments. In these circumstances, the receipt of that amount must be looked upon as a capital receipt.”

3. Conclusion  and author’s  views on this issue:

3.1 In my personal opinion alimony cannot be said to be from any particular ‘source’. Nor can it be said to be return for any past service or any definite consideration. It is merely a personal payment and not income.

3.2 Decree is a legal process of pronouncement. The right to claim alimony originates from the relationship of marriage. There can be no decree of alimony without marriage.

3.3 Alimony should not be regarded as ‘return’ from the decree, because it has its roots in the relationship of marriage and NOT in the decree. A husband may agree to pay alimony to his wife with mutual consent without existence of decree.

3.4 If alimony were to be treated as income, then money given by husband to wife every month could also be treated as income applying the same analogy as given in the case of Princess Maheshwari Devi (supra).

3.5 The intention of the statute governing alimony is to provide for ‘Maintenance and support’ of the dependant and certainly not to create a ‘source of income’ in the common parlance.

3.6 As a matter of law, so far as the jurisdiction of Bombay High Court is concerned the decision of Princess Maheshwari Devi (supra) holds good and accordingly monthly alimony shall remain taxable and one-time alimony shall be treated as capital receipt. However owing to reasons cited above, with due respect to the Honourable High Court, the decision is worth a second thought.

2nd proviso to S. 2(15) — Boon or Bane ! ! !

Article

A. Insertion of second proviso to S. 2(15) :


Charity keeps getting constant attention of the Revenue. The
Revenue always tends to look at charitable activities with a little suspicion.
Money laundering and misuse of charity route for personal purposes are some of
the concerns of the Revenue. Therefore, the provisions dealing with exemption in
respect of charitable activities are frequently visited by the Finance Ministry
to plug the loopholes noticed by it from time to time. Amendments dealing with
anonymous donations and advancement of object of general public utility are some
of the recent examples.

The Finance Act, 2010 which was approved by the President on
8th May 2010 has added second proviso to S. 2(15) with retrospective effect from
1st April 2009.

The proviso inserted reads as follows :


“Provided further that the first proviso shall not apply
if the aggregate value of the receipts from the activities referred to
therein is ten lakh rupees or less in the previous year.”


The aforesaid proviso is applicable for the assessment
2009-2010 and onwards. The above proviso makes the first proviso not applicable
if the aggregate value of the receipts from the commercial activities does not
exceed Rs.10,00,000 in the previous year.

At the outset, it appears that the second proviso is a minor
change seeking to give relief to those trusts who would have
incidentally/accidentally derived income from activities referred to in the
first proviso. However, on a deeper noting, it transpires that so-called small
mercy creates many issues which may not be both intended or envisaged by the
lawmakers.

B. Background :


With a view to limiting the scope of the phrase ‘advancement
of any other object of general public utility’, in clause (15), the said clause
was substituted with effect from April 1, 2009, for the existing clause. Before
its substitution, clause (15), read as follows :


(15) ‘charitable purpose’ includes relief of the poor,
education, medical relief, and the advancement of any other object of
general public utility;


The object of the amendment is to exclude from ‘advancement
of any other object of general public utility’ (i) any activity in the nature of
trade, commerce or business, or (ii) any activity of rendering any service in
relation to any trade, commerce or business, for a cess or fee or any other
consideration, irrespective of the nature of use or application, or retention,
of the income from any such activity.

This amendment will apply in relation to the


A.Y. 2009-10 and subsequent assessment years.

The Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009 expanded the definition of
‘charitable purpose’ with retrospective effect from April 1, 2009, to include
the preservation of environment (including watersheds, forests and wildlife) and
preservation of monuments of places or objects of artistic or historic interest,
so that it would not be affected by the amendment which excluded from the
‘advancement of any other object of general public utility’ activities in the
nature of trade, commerce or business, or any service in relation to any trade,
commerce or business, for a cess or fee or any other consideration, irrespective
of the nature of use or application, or retention, of the income from such
activity.

C. The amendment as explained :


The Memorandum explaining the clauses explains the reasons
for insertion of a new proviso as follows :

(i) For the purpose of the Income-tax Act, ‘charitable purpose’ has been defined in S. 2(15) which, among others, includes ‘the advancement of any other object of general public utility’. However, ‘the advancement of any other object of general public utility’ is not a charitable purpose if it involves the carrying on of any activity in the nature of trade, commerce or business, or any activity of rendering any service in relation to any trade, commerce or business, for a cess or fee or any other consideration, irrespective of the nature of use or application, or retention, of the income from such activity. The absolute restriction on any receipt of commercial nature may create hardship to the organisations which receive sundry consideration from such activities. It is, therefore, proposed to amend S. 2(15) to provide that ‘the advancement of any other object of general public utility’ shall continue to be a ‘charitable purpose’ if the total receipts from any activity in the nature of trade, commerce or business, or any activity of rendering any service in relation to any trade, commerce or business do not exceed Rs.10 lakh in the previous year.

    (ii) This amendment is proposed to take effect retrospectively from 1st April 2009 and will, accordingly, apply in relation to the A.Y. 2009-10 and subsequent years.

As explained in the above paragraph, the objective of the
second proviso is to lift the absolute bar on sundry consideration received from
commercial activities. Hence, the aforesaid proviso is a beneficial provision
intending to provide relief to the charitable trust in some cases.


D. Aforesaid proviso gives rise to certain
complications :




The newly inserted second proviso will have the effect of
making the first proviso not applicable in the previous year in which the
aggregate value of the receipts from commercial activities does not exceed
Rs.10,00,000. Therefore, depending on the aggregate value of such receipts, the
first proviso may or may not apply for a particular previous year. Thus, the
charitable trust pursuing advancement of object of general public utility may be
a charitable trust in one year and not a charitable trust in another year
depending on aggregate value of receipts from commercial activities.

This year-on-year change of status may cause a lot of
complications and a few of them have been discussed in the paragraphs that
follow :

(a)
Application of S. 2(24)(ii)(a) :


1. S. 2(24)(ii)(a) provides that voluntary contribution received by a trust created wholly or partly for charitable purposes shall be deemed to be income at the hands of the trust.
2.    The trust may have been created to pursue advancement of object of general public utility like urban decongestion. This activity may per se be considered to be a charitable purpose. However, if this activity constitutes of recycling of urban waste, it may involve commercial activity so that the first proviso may apply. Throughout this article, such a trust is taken up for case study.

3.    Let us assume that in the first year, the aggre-gate value of receipts from commercial activities does not exceed Rs.10 lakh. The first proviso therefore is not applicable. The trust, therefore, remains charitable in nature. The donations received in the first year will be regarded as income u/s.2(24)(ii)(a) which will be exempt from tax as per S. 11 read with S. 12.

4.    In the second year, the aggregate value of the aforesaid receipt may exceed Rs.10 lakh. Therefore, in the second year, the activity pursued by the trust ceases to be charitable in nature. The trust will be hit by the first pro-viso and therefore will not get the exemption u/s. 11. However, it may continue to receive donations in the second year. An interesting question arises is whether such donations would be covered by S. 2(24)(ii)(a) or not. For the purpose of second previous year, can it be said that trust is not created for charitable purpose?? If the answer to this question is in the affirmative, the provisions of S. 2(24)(ii)

(a) would not be applicable.

5.    Can it be argued that although by virtue of the first proviso, object pursued by the trust ceases to be charitable in the second previ-ous year, in the first previous year (year of creation), the object was very much charitable due to non-application of the first proviso??

Thus, one may contend that the trust was created for charitable purpose, although sub-sequent to such creation, the object which was charitable in the beginning ceased to be as such in the second year. One may further argue that in any subsequent year by reason of aggregate value of receipts from commercial activities not exceeding Rs.10 lakh, the trust may revive its charitable character. One may also contend that the nature of the purpose at the time of creation is important and not thereafter by relying on the decision of the Supreme Court in the case of Bajaj Tempo Ltd. v. CIT, (1992) 196 ITR 188 (SC), where the Supreme Court dealt with the meaning of the term ‘formed’.

6.    The aforesaid argument may be met by con-tending that the fiction of the first proviso should be taken to its logical end, meaning thereby that in whichever previous year the trust ceases to pursue the charitable part, proviso to S. 2(24)(ii)(a) are not applicable by relying on the decision in the case of East End Dwellings Co. Ltd. v. Finsburry Borough Council,

(1951) 2 All ER 587 followed by the SupremeCourt in Ashok Leyland Ltd. v. State of Tamil Nadu (SC), (2004) 134 STC 473 (SC).

7.    Even though arguments of the trust that in the second year, provisions of S. 2(24)(ii)

(a)    are not applicable may be successful, it may be argued that the donations received shall be deemed to be income by applying the provision of S. 56(2)(vii)(a). S. 56(2)

(vii)(a) was inserted by Finance Act, 2009 with effect from 1-10-2009. The clause (a) of the said Section provides that where an individual or HUF receives any sum of money, without consideration, the aggregate value of which exceeds Rs. fifty thousand, the whole of the aggregate value of such sum shall be charged to income-tax under the head ‘Income from

Other Sources’. The necessary enabling provision in this regard has been made u/s.2(24) (xv). It may be argued that the charitable trust is after all created for the benefit of various individuals at large and therefore, the status of the trust should be taken as that of an individual making S. 56(2)(vii)(a) applicable to charitable trust also. Such argument may use certain decisions like CIT v. Shri Krishna Bandar Trust, (1993) 201 ITR 989 (Cal.), CIT v. Sodra Devi, (1957) 32 ITR 615 (SC), etc. However, this argument may be countered on the basis that the beneficiaries of a public charitable trust are not specified individuals but public at large. The cases referred to above dealt with private trusts created for a group of definite individuals. In a public trust, the beneficiaries at times may not be even human beings, for example, a trust for animal welfare.

(b)    Cancellation of registration:

S. 12AA(3) provides that in the case of a trust registered,    if    subsequently   the    Commissioner is satisfied that the activities of such trust or institution are not genuine or are not being carried out in accordance with the objects of the trust or institution, he shall pass an order in writing cancelling the registration of such trust or institution after giving such trust or institution a reasonable opportunity of being heard.

The question is, can the Commissioner invoke powers u/s.12AA(3) cancelling the registration in the previous year when the first proviso applies and revive the registration in the previous year in which second proviso applies?

The powers u/s.12AA(3) can be exercised only when the Commissioner is satisfied that

  •         the activities of the trust are not genuine, or
  •         the activities are not being carried out in accordance with the objects of the trust.

Therefore, the Commissioner cannot cancel the registration merely on the basis that in any one previous year the trust ceases to be charitable by application of the first proviso. This view is strengthened by the fact that in the year of applicability of the second proviso, as the trust revives its charitable nature, cancellation of the registration would adversely affect the trust as re-grant of the registration cannot be done with a retrospective effect. The Chandigarh Tribunal in Himachal Pradesh Environment Protection & Pollution Control Board (2009) 125 TTJ 98 (Chd.) has clearly held that cancellation of the registration is not permissible by invoking the first proviso to S. 2(15).

Interestingly, as long as the registration remains in force, the Assessing Officer may be precluded from examining the charitable nature of the trust and he may not have any option but to grant exemption u/s.11. In the case of ACIT v. Surat City Gymkhana, 300 ITR 214, the Supreme Court was considering the question as to whether the Income-tax Appellate Tribunal was justified in law in holding that registration u/s.12A was a fait accompli to hold the Assessing Officer back from further probe into the objects of the trust. The Gujarat High Court ruled against the Department, relying on its earlier decision in the case of Hiralal Bhagwati v. CIT, (2000) 246 ITR 188. The Supreme Court declined to interfere as the Revenue had not challenged the earlier ruling in Hiralal’s case. Although the above decisions were

rendered in the context of unamended S. 2(15), on an aggressive note, it may be said that the Assessing Officer is helpless but to allow the exemption. No doubt, there is another view suggesting that as the registration remains intact, the Assessing Officer may still deny exemption on the basis that S. 11 is not satisfied.

(c)    Status of 80G approval:

The time limit specified in the approval granted by the Commissioner to any institution or fund has been done away with. This was effected by omitting the proviso to S. 80G(5)(vi) w.e.f. 1-10-2009.

It was also provided that the approval already granted is not affected by the amendment of definition of ‘charitable purpose’. The new clause (viii) to S. 80G(5) provides that where any institution or fund has been approved for the previous year 2007-08, such institution or fund shall, notwithstanding anything contained in the proviso to clause (15) of S. 2 be deemed to have been established for charitable purpose and approved for the previous year 2008-09.

Consequent to omission of the proviso to S. 80G (5)(vi) by the Finance Act, 2009 effective from 1st September 2009, and simultaneous insertion of S. 293C, the approval u/s.80G(5)(vi) has now become open-ended and perpetual.

Unless the approval is withdrawn by invoking the powers u/s.293C, approval granted u/s.80G(5)(vi) remains in force. The question that arises is can the Commissioner invoke the powers u/s.293C to withdraw the approval on the basis that the case of the trust is covered by the first proviso to S. 2(15) and not by the second proviso thereto?? S. 293C does not as such provide for circumstances for withdrawal of approval, unlike S. 12AA (3). It only requires the authority to give a reasonable opportunity of showing cause against withdrawal. Therefore, it is natural to infer that the power to withdraw can be invoked when the circumstances necessary for grant of approval no longer exist. For this purpose, we may refer to Rule 11AA (4 & 5). The said Rule reads as follows?:

“(4) Where the Commissioner is satisfied that all the conditions laid down in clauses (i) to (v) of Ss.(5) of S. 80G are fulfilled by the institution or fund, he shall record such satisfaction in writing and grant approval to the institution or fund specifying the assessment year or years for which the approval is valid.”
 
(5)    Where the Commissioner is satisfied that one or more of the conditions laid down in clauses (i) to (v) of Ss.(5) of S. 80G are not fulfilled, he shall reject the application for approval after recording the reasons for such rejection in writing?:
Provided that no order of rejection of an application shall be passed without giving the institution or fund an opportunity of being heard.”

S.    80G(5)(vi) provides for a condition that income of the trust is not liable to inclusion in its total income u/s.11. The Commissioner while approving the trust for the purpose of S. 80G(5)(vi) is required to look at compliance of conditions included in S. 80G(5) (vi) mentioned above. In any previous year where the case of the trust is covered by first proviso to S. 2(15) but not by the second proviso, the condition of the S. 80G(5)(vi) remains not satisfied. This can be a ground for the Commissioner either to reject the application for approval u/s.80G(5)(vi) or cancel the approval u/s.293C. In that case, the trust may take a defence that as its position of exemption u/s.11 could oscillate like pendulum year after year, thanks to interplay between the first proviso to S. 2(15) and the second proviso, the approval u/s.80G should not be cancelled, and the eligibility of claim of deduction by the donor may be independently examined u/s.80G(5)(i) without affecting the approval granted to the trust.

The donor who has donated to the trust prior to cancellation of the approval u/s.293C may still get the benefit of deduction u/s.80G, although the cancellation u/s.293C may be made on retrospective basis as held by the Calcutta High Court in the case of CIT v. Borbehta Estate (P.) Ltd., (2001) 252 ITR 379.

It may not be out of place to note that Explanation 2 to S. 80G provides that a deduction shall not be denied merely on the ground that subsequent to the donation, any part of the income of the institution or fund has become chargeable to tax due to non-compliance with any of the provisions of S. 11, S. 12, S. 12A or on the ground that u/s.13(1)(c), the exemption u/s.11/12 is denied to the institution or fund in relation to any income arising to it from any investment referred to in S. 13(2)(h) where the aggregate of the funds invested by it in a concern referred to in the said clause does not exceed five percent of the capital of that concern.

(d)    Status of trust:
As the trust’s position as a charitable trust could vary from year to year, its tax position also will correspondingly vary. In one year it may have to pay tax and in another year it may not have to pay tax. Secondly, its status as well as the form in which return has to be filed may also change. Needless to say, the jurisdiction of the Assessing Officer may also change. This could result in the trust having to submit to multiple jurisdictions when there are many pending proceedings for several years.

(e)    Postponement/accumulation:
As per Explanation 2 to S. 11(1), a trust may postpone application of its income for charitable purposes to the previous year next following previous year in which the income was received where the trust is following accrual system and in any other case, to the previous year next following previous year in which income was derived.

Let us assume that in the first year, the trust is a charitable trust by virtue of second proviso. The trust may have exercised its option under the aforesaid Explanation. However, in the previous year to which such application was postponed, the trust may be hit by the first proviso. One may contend that actual application made by the trust in such previous year would not be for charitable purpose and accordingly, S. 11(1B) may be invoked to tax the trust in respect of such application.

S. 11(2) provides for accumulation of not more than 85% of income for specific purposes for a period not exceeding five years, subject to satisfying the conditions laid down u/s.11(2).

If in the first year, a trust is covered by the second proviso, such trust being a charitable trust may accumulate up to 85% for future application. However, if in the year of application, the trust ceases to be charitable by virtue of the second proviso not being applicable, there is likelihood of the Department holding that the application is not for a charitable purpose. Accordingly, the Department may invoke S. 11(3)(a) which provides for taxing accumulated amount if the same is applied for a purpose other than charitable.

Interplay of the first proviso and the second proviso could have implication on carry forward also. The problem in this case is identification of head of income in the year in which past loss is sought to be set off. This may be illustrated with an example (Refer table below).

In the 3rd year, Rs.30 is charged to tax on the basis that the application is for non-charitable purpose. However, the question is what is the right head of income for taxing the same. This is for the reason that unless this Rs.30 is traced to business income, a set-off may not be permissible. This Rs.30 is traced to the first year’s accumulation which has come from Rs.100 comprising of different sources. In the absence of any mechanism available for identification of head and in the absence of proof thereof, one may explore the option of allocating Rs.30 on the basis of composition of Rs.100.

E.    Concluding comments:

Looking at the above sample of issues it appears certain that the purportedly beneficial provision like the second proviso creates several problems leaving the assessee-trust in a state of confusion. There is no doubt that the second proviso has been inserted in good faith but without adequate home work. On a pessimistic note one wonders if life without the second proviso could be a better option.

Recent issues in FDI Policy

Article

1. Introduction :


1.1 The Foreign
Direct Investment (‘FDI’) Policy has always been a contentious issue. Recently
in an attempt to simplify the FDI Policy, the Department of Industrial Policy &
Promotion (DIPP), Ministry of Commerce & Industry, has issued 3 Press Notes — PN
2 of 2009, 3 of 2009 and 4 of 2009.

1.2 Press Note
2 of 2009
seeks to bring in clarity, uniformity, consistency and homogeneity
into the methodology of calculation of the direct and indirect foreign
investment in Indian companies across sectors/activities. Press Note 3 of
2009
gives guidelines for transfer of ownership and control of Indian
companies from resident Indians to non-resident entities. Press Note 4 of 2009
lays down the policy for downstream investment by Indian companies.

1.3 Whether these
Press Notes clear the confusion or add more fuel to the fire is anyone’s guess.
This Article seeks to explain the issues which emerge as a result of this new
Policy stance adopted by the Government.



2.


Indirect Foreign Ownership
(Press Note 2 of 2009) :


2.1 Any
non-resident investment in an Indian company is FDI. However, if the domestic
investment by resident Indian entities, which have invested in the Indian
company, comprise non-resident investment, then the Indian company would have
indirect foreign investment as well. Till recently the FIPB reckoned such
indirect foreign investment on a proportionate basis in several sectors such as
telecom. For example, an Indian telecom company had 36% FDI and 64% domestic
investment and if the domestic investor had 50% FDI in it, then the indirect
foreign equity in the telecom company was 32% and the total foreign investment,
direct and indirect was 68%.



2.2


New method of calculating
foreign investment in an Indian company :


2.2.1 All
investments made directly by a Non-resident Entity into an Indian company would
be treated as Foreign Direct Investment.

2.2.2 For
reckoning the indirect foreign investment, the important factors would be the
ownership and control of the Indian investing companies. Any foreign investment
by an investing Indian company which is ‘owned and controlled’ by
resident Indian citizens and/or by Indian companies which are in turn owned and
controlled by Resident Indian citizens, would not be considered for calculation
of ‘indirect foreign investment’. Such investment would be treated as
pure domestic investment
. The previous provisions (PN 7 of 2008) for
investing companies in infrastructure and service sector and the proportionate
method computation have now been deleted.

Let us understand
the meaning of the terms ‘owned’ and ‘controlled’ :

Owned :

An Indian company
would be considered as ‘owned’ by resident Indian citizens and Indian
companies if more than 50% of the equity interest in the Indian company
is beneficially owned

  • by resident
    Indian citizens, or

  • by Indian
    companies which are owned and controlled ultimately by resident Indian
    citizens.

Controlled :



An Indian company would be
considered as

‘controlled’ by resident
Indian citizens

and Indian companies (which are owned and controlled ultimately by resident
Indian citizens) if the resident Indian citizens and Indian companies (which are
owned and controlled ultimately by resident Indian citizens) have the

power to appoint a
majority of its directors
.


For example, in
Bharti Airtel, SingTel of Singapore owns a 31% stake, of which only 15.8% is
direct and the balance is through its investment in Bharti Telecom which owns
45% of Bharti Airtel. As per the new norms, only 15.8% would be treated as
SingTel’s foreign ownership in Bharti Airtel, since Bharti Telecom is a company
owned and controlled by Indians and hence, its entire investment in Bharti
Airtel is treated as a domestic investment.

2.2.4 If the
investing Indian company’s ownership and control is not directly/indirectly by a
Resident Indian Citizen, the entire investment by such company would be
considered as indirect foreign investment. For example, A Ltd. which is owned
and controlled by an NRI, has invested 40% in B Ltd. The indirect foreign
investment in B Ltd. is 40%.

An exception has
been provided for in the case of downstream investments in a wholly-owned
subsidiary of operating-cum-investing/investing companies
. In such a case,
the indirect foreign investment will be limited to the foreign investment in the
operating-cum-investing/investing company. Thus, A Ltd., which is an
operating-cum-investing company has 74% FDI and if it sets up a 100% subsidiary,
B Ltd., then B Ltd., will be treated as having 74% indirect foreign investment.

The
above-mentioned methodology for computation of foreign investment does not apply
to sectors which are governed specifically by a separate statute, such as the
insurance sector. The methodology specified therein would continue.

2.2.5 The Press Note also treats foreign investment as including all FDI, FII investment (as on 31st March), FCCB, NRI/ ADR/GDR investment/Convertible Preference Shares/Convertible Debentures, etc.

2.2.6 In the case of all sectors which require FIPB approval, any shareholders’ agreement which has an effect on appointment of directors, veto rights, affirmative votes, etc., would have to be filed with the FIPB at the time of seeking approval. It will consider all such clauses and would decide whether the investor has ownership and control due to them.

2.2.7 Issues:

The recent Press Note has thrown  up several issues:

(a)    It is necessary to note that an Indian company must be both owned and controlled by Indian citizens. If either condition is violated, then its investment would be treated as indirect foreign investment.

(b)    For determining the foreign ownership of an Indian company it should have more than 50% foreign ownership. What happens in a situation where the Indian and the foreign partner have an equal (50 : 50) stake? In several Indian JVs, the foreign partner desires one golden share (over 50%) to enable consolidation with his foreign company. If such a JV makes a down-stream investment in any company, then the entire investment would now be treated as in-direct foreign investment.

(c)    For determining the foreign control, it only needs to be seen whether the foreign entity has power to appoint majority of directors. It does not address the other ways in which control can be exercised, e.g., veto rights, affirmative votes, shareholders’ agreement. In sectors where the FDI is subject to Government approval, the Indian company will need to disclose to the FIPB the details of inierse shareholder agreements which have an effect on the appointment of the Board of Directors, differential voting rights and such other matters. But a similar treatment has not been extended to the indirect foreign investment. A majority of the private equity deals have a host of special investor rights, but may not necessarily have a majority of the Board seats.

(d)    What would happen if an Indian investing company with 49% FDI and which is owned and controlled by Indian citizens, invests 26% in an NBFC which already has 51% FDI? Under the new norms, 26% investment would be treated as domestic investment and hence, the NBFC would not have to comply with the minimum capitalisation norms applicable to an NBFC which has more than 75% FDI.

(e)    What if the Indian investing company, which has 49% FDI and which is owned and controlled by Indian citizens, invests in a sector for which FDI is prohibited, e.g., lottery business? Sectors such as retail trading, real estate, information, defence, avaiation, etc., are expected to benefit from this Press Note. We may soon have a case where several foreign retail players may try to invest in multi-brand retailing via the indirect foreign ownership method. As per press reports, the RBI has objected to this Press Note.

(f)    FII investment has been treated as foreign investment. However, to consider the same, one has to ascertain the limits as on 31st March. If one looks at the FII activity after 31st March, 2008 there are only withdrawals. Hence, even though the current position is drastically different from what it was on 31st March, 2008, yet one is required to consider the FITinvestment level as on 31st March, 2008. This provision would create a lot of problems. Further, clubbing ADR/GDR holding with foreign shareholding is also a vexed issue. The voting on ADR/GDR is by the custodian of the shares. How the custodian would vote is generally not specified. There are a few cases where it is specified in the pro-spectus. But generally, it is left open. Interestingly, Cl. 40A of the Listing Agreement, while computing the public shareholding in a listed company, excludes shares which are held by custodians and against which depository receipts are issued overseas. The logic being that the custodian would vote in unison with the promoter. If that be the case under the Listing Agreement, then the stand taken by the FIPB is diagonally opposite, i.e., the custodian would vote in unison with the foreign receipt owners.

(g)    Special investor rights are the norm in the case of private equity deals and hence, if PE deals are to be done in sectors requiring FIPB approval, then the Shareholders’ Agreement would have to be filed with the FIPB. Thus, if any courier company (where FIPB approval is required) wants to get PE funding, it would also have to get the Shareholders’ Agreement approved by the FIPB. Thus, the regulator would now exercise quasi-judicial functions. This amendment is truly amazing.

3.    Transfer of Ownership & Control of Indian Companies from Resident Indian Citizens to Non-Resident Entities (Press Note 3 of 2009) :

3.1 The DIPP has issued new guidelines in respect of transfers of shares in all sectors where the FIPB approval is required or sectors which have caps of FDI. These include sectors, such as defence, air transport, ground handling, asset reconstruction, private sector banking, broadcasting, commodity exchanges, credit information companies, insurance, print media, telecom and satellites.

3.2 In all such sectors, Govemment/FIPB approval would be required in the following cases:
(a)    If an Indian  company  is being  established  with foreign investment  and is owned  or controlled by a non-resident entity,  or   

(b)    The ownership or control of an existing Indian company, owned or controlled directly or indirectly by resident Indian citizens, is being transferred to a non-resident entity as a consequence of transfer of shares to NREs through amalgamation, merger, acquisition, etc.

3.3 The guidelines  will not apply  to sectors where there are no foreign investment caps, i.e., 100% foreign investment is permitted under the automatic route.

3.4 Issues:

(a)    Press Note 4 of 2006 had earlier put all transfers of shares from residents to non-residents on the automatic route, including in financial services sectors, or cases where the Takeover Regulations were attracted. It is intriguing that after a period of 3 years, the Government has decided to take a step backwards and put transfers in certain sectors on the approval route. When on the one hand, the RBI is taking measures for liberalisation of the FEMA, the FIPB on the other hand has taken us back to the approval raj.

(b)    The FIPB’s approval  would  be required  even

in cases of Court-approved mergers, demergers, etc. This has increased the number of authorities whose permission would be required for a merger. Thus, if a listed company in the telecom field decides to merge with another listed company which has more than 50% foreign investment, then consider the number of approvals it would require – the High Court, BSE/NSE (under Cl. 24 of the Listing Agreement) and now the FIPB.

The FIPB’s approval would be required even for cases of acquisition of shares. This would even delay the process for takeover of listed companies. A takeover, in a sector requiring FIPB approval for FDI, which attracts the SEBI Takeover Regulations, requires the clearance of SEBI, prior approval of the RBI and now also the approval of FIPB. Thus, this step is going to increase the time it takes for corporate re-structuring.

4.    Downstream Investments in Indian Companies (Press Note 4 of 2009) :

4.1 The last of the Press Notes aimed at simplifying the Rules is Press Note 4. This deals with down-stream investments by Indian companies. Down-stream investment, which refers to indirect foreign investment by one Indian company in another, was hitherto governed by Press Note 9 of 1999. This dealt with any downstream investmentby aforeignowned Indian holding company. FDI in such cases required prior FIPB approval. Recently, FIPB had taken an interesting stance that downstream investment on an automatic route was permitted only for pure investment companies and not by operating-cum-investment companies, those which have their own operations in economic activities and desired to invest in another Indian company. FIPB’s view was that this tantamounted to a change in status from operating to operating-cum-investment company and hence, required prior FIPB approval. Several renowned corp orates such as JSW Energy Ltd., Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd., etc. were pulled up for getting FDI and making downstream investments without FIPB approval. FIPB allowed restrospective clearance subject to compounding of penalties with the RBI under FEMA. In some cases, the foreign investment was as low as 1% and yet FIPB treated it as a violation of Press Note 9 of 1999. Thus, this was one area where there was a lot of ambiguity.

4.2 Operating Companies :

The new norms state that foreign investments in operating companies would fall under the automatic approval route wherein the investing companies would have to comply with the relevant sectoral conditions on entry route, conditionalities and caps with regard to the sectors in which such companies are operating.

4.3 Operating-cum-Investing    Companies:

Foreign Investments in operating-cum-investing companies would fall under the Automatic Route as explained above. Further, the Operating-cum-investing company which is making the downstream investment into the Indian Company would have to comply with the relevant sectoral caps and conditionalities which are applicable to the investee company. Thus, if Hindustan Unilever Ltd., which is a foreign-owned company, desires to invest in a retail trading company, then it would become an operating-cum-investment company and its downstream investment would need to comply with the conditions applicable to FDI in retail trading.

4.4 Investing  Companies :

Foreign investments in purely Investing Companies would require FIPB approval, regardless of the extent of foreign investment. Further, as and when such Investing Companies make downstream investments in Indian companies, they would have to comply with the relevant sectoral caps and conditionalities. However, such downstream investments cannot be made for the purposes of trading of the underlying securities. The FIPB approval would be required regardless of the amount of foreign investment in such an investing company.

4.5 Shell Company :

Foreign investments into companies which are currently neither carrying on any operations nor do have any investment activities, would require FIPB approval regardless of the extent of the foreign investment. Further if and when such shell companies commence any operating/investing activity, the relevant conditionalities as explained above would have to be complied with.

4.6 Additional Conditions :

In case of Operating-cum-Investing Companies and Investing Companies, certain additional conditions have to be complied with, such as giving an intimation to FIPB regarding the downstream investment within 30 days of such investment, compliance with the Pricing Guidelines as prescribed by SEBI, etc. Further, in order to make the downstream investment, the funds must be brought in from abroad only and not borrowed domestically.

5. Conclusion:

5.1 Although Government has a noble intention of simplifying the FDI policy, it may have unwittingly opened up a few more pandora’s boxes. It has plugged a few leaks by creating new leaks. The days to come are likely to throw up new issues in respect of these Press Notes and in some of the cases, the remedy may be more serious than the ailment. One hopes that the FIPB addresses these issues and comes out with a clearer and unambiguous policy. One is reminded of the US author, Kerry Thornley’s words:

“What we imagine as Order is merely the prevailing form of Chaos !”

Innovation in Services

Article

‘Innovation’ is one of the most used buzzwords in
21st-Century management vocabularies. However, when most of us think of
‘Innovation’, what comes to our mind is sleek, user-friendly products such as
iPhone. People have a good idea of what technical innovation is, but innovation
in services, as in the case of professionals, is more hidden and unknown. Its
important to discuss what innovation means for a professional like Chartered
Accountant and how it helps him in serving his client better. Client-focussed
innovation will benefit both the client as well as the professional organisation.
Client will be benefited by more value-added services and the professional
organisation will effectively combat the increasing competition and help it in
client retention.


What do you mean by innovation in professional services ?

It is not a rocket science as people think it is. It is a
skill that can be learnt and taught. For me innovation is an original concept,
new or improved process or service. A new method or idea of doing things faster
and in a better manner, in other words, where there is a value addition.

Does a client need innovative solutions ?

A client is always in need for innovative, different ideas
which will make them distinctive in comparison to their competitors’. In today’s
world, where the client has a strong in-house team, they would be very well
equipped to handle day-to-day and routine matters. Further, the in-house team is
also capable of providing the routine, conventional and a standard solution
which a normal professional organisation would give. In such a case, the client
would start thinking : Why should we hire an external professional
organisation when it is going to provide us the same solutions at a higher cost 
?
Clients need more than just standard solutions for which it is important for a
professional organisation to innovate on a continuous basis. If the professional
organisation does not realise this fact, it may lose out on such client. Here
comes the need for innovation in providing services.

How does a client and the professional

organisation benefit from innovation ?

Innovation could be radical in nature i.e., a
different solution/idea by means of which the client is benefited tremendously.
The client could benefit in terms of savings of tax or in terms of economics of
the project. For example, a professional organisation may provide an out-of-box
solution by which the client saves service tax and the entire
economics/commercial feasibility of the project may change in favour of the
client. Such kind of innovation gives a huge advantage to the client and his
competitors may be totally outplaced, if they do not take measures before their
market position is completely lost. By providing such solutions, the
professional organisation gets loyalty from its clients and it ensures that it
stays ahead of its competitors.

Innovation could be proactive in nature. Proactive innovation
means proactively searching for solutions to problems of the client. It starts
with asking the client right questions, defining a problem or opportunity which
the client is facing. The second step would be to gather or collate information
from various sources (including the client himself) to gain more knowledge of
the facts. This is the most important process of ‘creative’ thinking whereby new
ideas are generated by analysing the information. Thus, in this manner a new
solution is developed which will solve the problem on hand and adhere to client
needs. Thus, innovation in services cannot take place overnight. It is normally
a steady, hard-headed response to client needs and not the accidental insight or
idea. However, proactive thinking also means that identifying a problem which
the client is facing where the client is not aware of the potential problem and
the impact of such problem. In such a case, the professional organisation has to
proactively approach the client and has to warn him of the potential problem and
provide him an appropriate solution, without thinking whether the client pays
its fees for such advice or not. This pro-activeness would delight the client.

Sometimes it is possible that the problem which the client is
facing is being faced by all the companies which are in the client’s business.
In such a case, a combined solution can be sought by asking the client to join
hands with its competitors and make a joint representation to the government or
any other regulatory authority. This will ensure that the client is benefited,
as the representation will get more importance as it is made by all the players
in that particular industry and chances of it getting approved are enhanced.
Further, the client would suffer a lower cost as the cost is shared by all the
professional organisations and the client is also benefited as it comes into
limelight in front of all the industry players and would certainly generate
income from them in future.

Innovation could also be in the nature of incremental change.
Incremental change can be in the form of generating good, new ideas to support
existing services, service delivery or processes. In other words, a better way
or method of doing the same thing in a more efficient manner. Certainly, one
may think, how does incremental change benefit the client ?
This type of
innovation certainly improves efficiency of the professional organisation and
ensures that the deliverables are faster. This gives the professional
organisation a competitive advantage and also leads to client satisfaction. Some
of the ways in which efficiency can be ensured is by providing short, clear and
practical advice. It should be remembered that client normally wants a quick
advice. Therefore, at times it is better to talk over the phone and discuss the
matter rather than sending out long emails which may take good amount of time.
The conclusion of such teleconference could always be circulated later.

Why should there be innovation ?

Professional organisations can no longer remain static or arrogant as in the past, because the clients have become more informed and more demanding in these times of information boom. They now question the opinions, the approach and the manner and get satisfied only with a thorough response. Gone are the days when professional organisations were rewarded for simply providing excellent services. Clients also want their consultants to help them network and improve their businesses. They want services to be efficient, cost-effective, and technologically advanced. The professional organisation cannot take the client for granted and has to realise that the client is always in need for new and distinctive ideas. The professional organisation has to ensure that the client is satisfied with its service. Hence, it has to be innovative at all times.

How can the professional organisation innovate in order to provide client satisfaction ?

A professional organisation can innovate in a number of ways. In my opinion, the following are some of the ways in which a professional organisation can innovate and ensure client satisfaction:

  • Ability to act as business advisors and not mere tax advisors or consultants. Professionals need to understand client’s business in detail and provide him a solution which meets his requirements, taking into consideration the practical difficulties which will be faced by the client in implementing the solution. The professional organisation should not only provide a technically correct answer, but also ensure that the same is implementable;

  • Providing complete range of services from start to end. A client prefers a professional organisation that holds his hands from starting of the project till the project is completed. If the professional organisation is not an expert in that field, it can recommend the best person who could render such services and probably network with the best person;

  • Examining existing problems of the client from a new perspectives and providing distinctive solutions;

  • Providing client service by way of interactive websites where clients could post the queries. The website would also host data which would be useful to the client in his day-to-day business;

  • Provide regular news updates on cases/ amendments, circulars, relevant to the client as well as a note on how such updates/amendments would impact the business of the client;

  • Ability to identify and articulate areas or opportunities for the client that if improved/ adopted could yield a source of advantage of any kind to the client. e.g., advising the client that would give him a business advantage (even though it is not your scope to advise him on such areas);

  • Ability to quickly respond to the client queries and understanding the fact that time lag on the part of professional organisation could have implications such as loss of business opportunity;

  • Ability to take risk and actually spending time and cost in the innovation process, even taking into account the fact the innovation process may fail.

Clearly, fabulously successful enterprises such as Gillette razors and Coca-Cola have been applying innovation at the point where it matters most – the client’s/customer’s changing needs. In other words, innovation has to be something which has the end-objective of keeping the client happy. Generating ideas and being innovative are important contributors to business success.

A classic example of innovation could be a trans-formation of an enterprise which is willing to innovate and chunk old traditional ideas e.g., ICICI Bank and HDFC Bank. The banking system in India as recently as in late 1990s was stuck in the rut of big and static PSU banks, the whole of the banking sector was ailing from syndrome of ‘Over-branched but underserviced’. In this scenario, these banks emerged and changed the entire landscape. Keeping the customer service as its prime focus, they embraced technology as its main aid and kept on innovating services to meet client satisfaction. The result is for everyone to marvel. This is a classic example of turnaround of the company by keeping the clients/customers happy.
 
To add value to our conventional practice of audit we can innovate, for example whilst reviewing:

  • internal control procedures, advise the client on risk mitigation;
  • financial cost, suggest alternative modes of financing to reduce costs;
  • power costs, even bring in a business advisory team to suggest means for reducing cost, in other words, conduct a ‘power’ audit;
  • consider compliance with environment laws as environment is becoming a major risk.

Another area is assisting and advising clients in the discharge of ‘social responsibility’. It is an area where we can innovate and be a catalyst. Let us accept that charity in today’s environment is big business. Let us assist business in carrying out philanthropic activities which are in the interest of business.

In my view, innovation is the need of the day and organisations including professional organisations should encourage innovations and have to ensure that their clients are continuously fed with more and more innovative solutions. IBM, for instance, has recently run a series of television commercials on innovation. The theme is the need to innovate because: “in today’s world your new idea on Monday is a commodity on Wednesday … “

I would conclude  by stating:

“Innovate to survive by anticipating need, nay, creating need for those whom we serve.”

Chartered Accountants don’t retire — they fade away

Article

Retirement — what is retirement ? Chartered accountants just
do not know the meaning of this term ‘retirement’. Hence the statement —
chartered accountants ‘never retire, but they just fade away’. The irony is that
even when they retire — either because of commitments or circumstances, they
still continue to be involved with ‘accountax’. They never truly retire.


Talking of retirement reminds me of this story of Henry Ford.
When asked a question : “When are you going to retire ?” His reply was “Only
after I cease being useful — which stage I will never attain.”

Chartered Accountants also seem to believe that they will
never cease to be useful.

Thinking about retiring takes me almost 40 years back in
time. I met a German equivalent of a CA who was well past 65 and yet quite
active. On being asked by me as to why he was not retiring, his reply was :

“Young man, in my country a CA can never afford to retire
on what he makes and so must it be in your country too.”


Passage of time, and years of experience have confirmed the
truth of these words. A CA cannot afford to retire on his earnings. Most of us
continue to work as we cannot afford to retire both economically and even
emotionally.

Once again my mind slips into the past and memories of my
articleship days come flooding, reminding of an instance when I was appearing
for my C.A. finals. My father came to drop me at the centre. He met a friend who
asked my father as to why he was at the centre. “I have come to drop my son” was
his reply. My father asked the same question to his friend as to why he was at
the centre, “My children have come to drop me for the Exam.” was his prompt
reply. He did ultimately clear the Exam. What perseverance ! What
determination !

How could this friend of my father ever think of retirement ?

So much efforts go into being a CA that one has to work for
many many years to recoup his investment in terms of time and money. Perhaps
that is why a CA cannot think of retirement.

Retirement is also not conceivable, because a chartered
accountant loves his profession and it is very difficult to get over ‘love’ — a
life-long relationship. CA’s relationship with the profession, especially that
of my generation, can be compared to an arranged marriage. In an arranged
marriage you fall in love after marriage and live in devotion till ‘death do –
us – part’. A relationship with a client might start on a professional basis,
but it matures into a personal bond and the CA is virtually treated as a member
of the family. Even in his senility and dreams he thinks of how best he can
serve his clients. Ask an accountant : when he will retire and I am sure the
reply will be : Retirement is fifteen years away and he will also raise the
question :

Please tell me to what should I retire to !

We as CAs are so committed to work that we forget our
families, our friends and everything and give first place in our life to our
work. I will illustrate with a story. I heard this one, decades ago at one of
our conferences : ‘There was a chartered accountant. He was totally committed to
his work. He would leave early morning and come back late at night. One day
someone told him that while he was sweating away at office, things were going on
behind his back in his home . . . . indicating that someone was visiting his
house and a clandestine affair was going on behind his back. He was enraged. He
decided to put an end to this matter. Next day after leaving home at 8 a.m.,
instead of going to the office he climbed a tree in front of his house with a
gun in his hands, waiting for ‘that’ person to come. 9 O’clock — no one, 10
O’clock — no one . . . Yet he waited patiently. However at 12 Noon, he suddenly
realised that he was not even married !’

Work is CA’s life, his reason for existence. This is
exemplified by a chartered accountant friend of mine. Apart from being a
successful practitioner, he is an eminent writer, a musician of repute and a
very knowledgeable person. In one of his articles he confessed that whenever he
saw a picture of a beautiful and gorgeous film star like Mallika Sherawat or
Katrina Kaif, his imagination ran riot and his first thought was of what could
be her Permanent Accountant Number ?

How can such a person ever think of retiring from the
profession? Without work he would be like fish out of water . . . He would start
gasping for breath.

There is a story of a senior citizen. He, a widower, would
visit his lady friend daily and spend his evenings with her. This went on for
years. A friend like me suggested that he should marry her. His response was,

“Well, I have considered this many a time. But if I marry
her how do I spend my evenings . . . . ?

The dilemma of a CA is similar : how does he spend his time
after retirement ?

I think that in the ultimate analysis, a CA goes on working
all his life, first to make both ends meet, then later perhaps for the ‘fame and
name’, and still later because it has become a habit which he cannot break and
also because he does not know what else to do.

Another friend of mine, a retired accountant, who recently
retired, was sarcastically questioned by a friend at an office gathering :

Q. How to you spend your time as you are no longer changing
‘figures’.



Ans. Hitting golf balls and cracking nuts.

However, he went on to add : “The benefits of retirement are
— I don’t have to comment on :

  • The implied and intended violations of law
  • Deviations from standards
  • Violations of ten commandments  of S. 227
  • Values being fair
  • On affairs being  ‘true  and  fair’
  • and above all on ‘frauds  committed by you.’
 
A thousand years ago Shankaracharya lamented in ‘Bhaja Govindam’ as under:
“The body has become worn out. The head has turned gray. The mouth has become toothless. The old man moves about leaning on his staff. Even then he leaves not the bundle of his desires.”

He laments that no one at any age has time for God. Let us listen to his advice and seek God before it is too late in our life.

We have one shining example  to follow. Shri N. V. Iyer, a person renowned in our profession, retired from the profession when he had reached great heights and he completely cut himself off from the profession from the day of the retirement itself to follow higher and nobler pursuits.

Let us then have courage to retire at a proper time and follow the higher path. Let us prove that CAs also can retire and need not just fade away in oblivion.

I would conclude :

Some of us fear that retirement may lead to senility. We forget that retirement is an opportunity to put life into our years – do what we missed – revive our hobbies and our relationships, discover old and make new friends. Life after retirement can be equally challenging. Retirement is also an opportunity to be creative, to do something we haven’t done during our working years. We can on retirement seek a blend of ‘client service’ and ‘service to profession’ or better still blend ‘service to profession’ and ‘service to society’. As Albert Einstein said :

‘The  highest  destiny  of individual is to serve’.

Let us learn to retire, contribute to society and seek our real growth rather than fade away.

Works Contracts

Article

1. Composite Contracts — Introduction :


A composite contract is one which has constituent elements
but the customer is interested in the final outcome of the contract. In such a
contract, the constituent elements are so integrally connected and
interdependent with each other that it is not feasible to look at the elements
in isolation. Such composite contracts may also include minor elements which are
incidental and ancillary to the main objective of the contract. Such elements of
a composite contract are to be treated as means of attaining the ultimate object
of the contract. For example, in a turnkey contract for design engineering,
procurement, construction, installation and commissioning of a power plant, the
individual element of engineering cannot be viewed in isolation of the
procurement, construction, installation and commissioning. In a lighter vein,
one can say that the icing on the cake cannot be viewed separately from the cake
itself !

1.1 Works Contracts — Species of Composite Contracts :


Composite contracts involving both the supply of materials
and rendering of services (in reasonably dominant proportions) are known as
works contracts. A turnkey contract of the nature referred to above is a good
example of a works contract. In a works contract, there is a transfer of
materials from the contractor to the employer/contractee, however, the said
transfer is not by means of sale.

In a works contract, the contractor agrees to perform some
work on the client’s property (may be moveable or immoveable). The performance
of work also involves the use of some materials of the contractor. As the
contractor uses these materials to perform the work, the materials get attached
to the property of the client in such a fashion that such contractor’s materials
can no longer be removed without substantial damage either to the contractor’s
materials or the contractee’s property. Since the property which is the subject
matter of the work belongs to the client, the ownership of the materials so
attached on the property passes on to the client albeit in an indirect fashion.

1.2 Accretion :


Consider the case of a building contractor who constructs a
building on the land of the client using his owned bricks, sand, cement, etc.
Till the stage he applies the cement on the land and lays a brick on it, the
cement and brick belongs to the contractor. But once the cement paste and the
brick are applied on the land, these ingredients fasten themselves to the land.
It is then not possible or viable to remove the cement or brick from the land
(without fundamental damage). Since the land belongs to the contractee, the
ownership in the cement and brick gets transferred to the contractee by
inference and not by way of sale. This process of the contractor’s materials
getting embedded in the client’s immoveable property is referred to as the
transfer of ownership in goods through the process of accretion.

1.3 Accession :


Consider another example of a garage undertaking to paint the
car of its client. Similar to the earlier example, till the stage the garage
applies the paint on the car, the paint belong to the garage. But once the paint
is applied on the car, the liquid paint gets attached on the metal of the car.
It is then not possible to remove the paint without fundamental damage. Since
the car belongs to the client, the ownership in the paint also gets transferred
to the client by inference. This process of the contractor’s materials getting
embedded in the client’s moveable property is referred to as the transfer of
ownership in goods through the process of accession.

1.4 Blending :


One more situation of works contract could be a case where
multiple moveable products owned by the contractor are ‘blended’ together to
create a new moveable product which is non-marketable in nature. Consider the
case of a printer who uses paper and ink to print cheque books for its client
bank.

In this case, the transaction cannot constitute a sale
because cheque books are not marketable and there-fore are not goods. However,
the properties in the paper and the ink have passed on to the bank the moment
the printer blended these two moveable products. Thus, there is a transfer of
the ownership in goods through the process of blending.

2. Nature of Indirect Taxes and applicability to Composite Contracts :


At this juncture, it may be relevant to broadly classify the
indirect taxes based on the nature of the taxes. At one end of the spectrum are
duties on goods like customs duties and excise duties which are levied on
specified activities i.e., the activity of import/export of goods or the
manufacture of goods. Since the levy of duty is on an activity and not on a
transaction, it is apparent that the duty is attracted irrespective of whether
the product constitutes an end in itself or a means to an end.

At the other end of the spectrum are taxes like sales tax
(VAT) and service tax which are levied on specified transactions i.e.,
the transaction of sale of goods or the provision of services. Since the levy of
the tax is on a transaction, one has to look at a transaction. A transaction is
the cake itself (i.e., the end) and not the icing on the cake (i.e.,
the means to an end). This therefore suggests that for taxing the transaction,
one looks at the tax implications on the cake and not on the icing !

3. Composite Contracts — Judicial Thinking :


Before proceeding any further, it may be relevant to look at
the judicial thought process on this aspect.


In a landmark case1
pertaining to sales tax, the Supreme Court held that a building contract is one
entire and indivisible contract; there is no sale of goods as a separate
contract. A series of judgments of the High Courts and the Supreme Court
followed this case taking the same view.

In another situation, the contract provided for progressive release of payments dependent on the stage of execution of a particular component. The Supreme Courf observed that in an indivisible, composite contract, it is not possible to vivisect the same. The Court accepted the commercial practice in spreading the contractual payments over the entire period of the execution of the contract and held that progressive release of payments would not have any bearing on the nature of the contract.

In a case pertaining to income tax, an Indian company entered into separate contracts with the foreign company for purchase of equipment and for supervision of erection, start-up, putting into commission, etc. of the equipment. The A.P. High Court held that the terms of the separate agreements clearly showed that it was one and the same transaction. One could not be read in isolation of the other. The considerations for services in connection with the supervision of erection, start-up, putting into commission, etc. were part of the payment of the sale price of the equipment. Thus, in spite of two separate contracts, the High Court considered these as part of single sale transaction.

In a landmark judgment? pertaining to service tax, the Department tried to levy service tax on the drawing, designing and commissioning activities, for which separate amounts were indicated in the price break-up in the turnkey contract. Negating such attempt, the Tribunal held that the contract between Daelim and IOCL was a works contract on turnkey basis. It cannot be vivisected for subjecting a part of the contract price to service tax.

From each of the above decisions, it is amply clear that the judiciary has consistently looked at composite contracts as a whole and has not permitted a vivisection of such composite contracts.

4.    Constitutional Amendment & Implications under VAT:

On the basis of recommendation of the Law Commission, the Parliament passed 46th Constitutional Amendment, introducing a legal fiction by defining ‘tax on the sale or purchase of goods’ in Article 366(29A) to include certain types of deemed sales. Thus, the following non-sale transactions were brought within the service tax net:

(a)    Non-voluntary transfer of goods for consideration
(b)    Transfer of property in goods involved in the execution of works contract
(c)    Delivery of goods on hire-purchase or instalment payments
(d)    Transfer  of right to use goods
(e)    Supply of goods by unincorporated association or body to members for consideration
(f)    Supply of food or beverage by way of or as part of service.

With respect to works contracts, one of the deemed sales, in view of the above amendment, sales tax/VAT could be levied on the value of the supply portion of the contract. Thus, there is a sale of the goods supplied in the execution of works contract for the limited purpose of sales tax/VAT. In this sense, through legal fiction, an indivisible composite contract becomes divisible. However, the Supreme Court” has held that the 46th Constitutional amendment is valid only for those entries in the three lists in the Seventh Schedule where the expression ‘tax on the sale or purchase of goods’ appears. Effectively, the amendment is applicable only with respect to sales tax/VAT law and not for any other law. This amendment has not brought any change in the normal legal meaning of ‘sale’. Therefore, for purposes outside sale tax/VAT, the concept of indivisible composite contract continues to be valid. Further, the Supreme Court”, held that even after the 46th Constitutional amendment it is not permissible to split composite transactions except in the case of works contracts and supply of food and beverages as part of the service in restaurants and hotels for sales tax/VAT. In other words, the principles enunciated in Gannon Dunkerley & Co. case, survives for purposes other than tax on these two deemed sales introduced by the Constitutional amendment.

5. Implications under Service Tax -before 1-6-2007:

The above discussion brings to light a question regarding the applicability of service tax provisions to composite contracts. Over a period of time, there has been a gradual expansion in the scope of taxable services. Some relevant service categories are listed in the table below :

Right from the time the category for taxing consulting engineering services was brought into the Statute, there were constant attempts to levy service tax on the ‘consulting’ element of the composite contracts. While the 46th Constitutional Amendment permits the States to levy tax on transfer of goods involved in the execution of a works contract, no specific authorisation is available to the Centre for artificially vivisecting such contracts for the purpose of levy of service tax and hence the Courts have consistently held that composite contracts cannot be made liable for service tax? under the category of consulting engineering services.

Since 2003, the Legislature has gradually expanded the scope of taxable services to cover various activities involving performance of work. From an industry perspective, such performance of work could be either on a stand-alone basis or as an element of a composite contract. While there were no doubts on the coverage of activity done on a stand-alone basis (‘labour job’), there was uncertainty on the coverage of the activity done as a component of a composite ‘works contract’.

The Department interpretation at that stage was to argue on the principle of aspect theory and suggest that the levy of service tax was, in principle, in order. To address the issue of valuation and cascading impact of taxes, the Department provided the following alternatives:

1. Discharge of service tax on the full value of the contract with corresponding credit of duties/taxes paid on inputs and input services

2.    Discharge of service tax on the value of the service component (by identification and reduction of the value of the goods sold) with corresponding credit of taxes paid on input services

3.    Discharge of service tax on a presumptive value of the service component (i.e., 33% of the gross value of the contract) with no credit of taxes paid on inputs/input services.

Notwithstanding the above mentioned options, can it be argued that there really is no authority to levy a service tax at all in the absence of a specific constitutional amendment? After all, even for levy of sales tax, a Constitutional amendment was required and it has already been held that the Constitutional amendment has only restricted applicability vis-a-vis  sales tax laws.

The answers to the above questions could be debatable and would depend on whether one treats a works contract as a whole as constituting an activity and therefore a service (View 1) or one looks at works contract as independent of both goods and services (View 2).

In case View 1 is adopted, the levy of service tax can be said to be effective from the date the respective category for execution was introduced, say construction service. All the three alternate options for discharging the tax liability would ensure that there is no cascading effect. In case View 2 is adopted, the levy of service tax would actually require a Constitutional amendment.

Before the dust could settle down on the said controversy, the judiciary was flooded with a plethora of cases wherein the Department’s attempt to tax the services embedded in a composite contract was challenged. In fact, the Bangalore Tribunal went ahead and held that a composite contract cannot be vivisected to levy a tax on the erection, commissioning and installation component of the said composite contract”.

6.    Implications under Service Tax – from 1-6-2007:

In order to overcome the above controversy and specifically provide for a mechanism to tax the service component of a works contract, a new category of service was introduced with effect from 1-6-2007 to tax specified  works contracts.

However, as highlighted earlier, in case a view is taken that the service component is embedded within a composite contract, the composite contract cannot be vivisected merely by insertion of a taxable category of service. Hence the levy of service tax under the category of ‘Works Contracts Services’ can be constitutionally challenged.

If one holds the conservative view that the entire composite contract is a service, there was really no need for the introduction of the category of ‘Works Contracts Services’, since the basic categories were wide enough to cover the impugned transactions. In either of the situations, the introduction of the category of ‘Works Contracts Services’ becomes redundant. The law cannot be interpreted to bring about redundancy in any of the provisions.

Therefore it can be strongly argued that the levy of service tax is not constitutionally valid even after the introduction of works contract services as a category, since the Legislature does not have the authority to vivisect a composite contract.

7.    Non-Vivisection –  Practical Ramifications:

While there is a strong legal justification to challenge the applicability of service tax on works contracts, a business needs to evaluate the position taken from a practical perspective. Being an indirect tax, any aggressive position taken can result in an opportunity cost (since the tax would have been recovered from the client in the case of a conservative position). Further, the availability of CENVAT Credit to both the service provider and service recipient (in many cases), effectively results in no additional cost on account of adoption of a conservative position. Thus, one may reconcile the position to accept the levy of service tax under the category of ‘Works Contract Services’ with effect from 1-6-2007.

With the introduction of a new category to tax only speCified works contracts, it can be argued that the Legislature accepts the principle that the works contracts could not be taxed under the basic category itself and therefore the new category was created. Therefore, no service tax was payable in the past periods in cases where works contract tax was payable. This view has already found favour with the judiciary 10. Thus, one can safeguard the liability for the past periods.

8. Conclusion:

The article tries to explain in a nutshell the theory of non-vivisection of composite contracts and its ramifications vis-a-vis levy of service tax on works contracts. It does not deal with the issues concerned with valuation and claim of credit, since they are secondary to the basic issue of levy of service tax itself.

The article also does not deal with the tax implications of other types of composite contracts wherein, say, multiple services are bundled. Over a period of time, the law will evolve. It appears that a long-term solution could be to have an integrated Goods and Service Tax with a comprehensive coverage of all supplies of goods and services. Till the time such a GST regime is evolved, these issues will continue to present uncertainty for the industry.

It is a challenge to both the profession and the business to confront and comply with uncertainty.



Convergence and Conflicts of Accounting and Taxation

Article

1. Commercial Accounting Principles — basis of taxable profits :


Income-tax is a branch of law and its practice falls within
the domain of lawyers. We Chartered Accountants have, however, entered and have
successfully carried on practice in this field for the reason that income-tax is
tax on income, profits and gains, and determination thereof needs expertise in
accounting principles. The Apex Court has held time and again that in working
out profits, the principles that have to be applied are those which are a part
of commercial practice or which an ordinary man of business will resort to when
making computation for his business purposes1. More recently, the Supreme Court
has held in CIT v. U.P. State Industrial Development Corporation, (1997)
225 ITR 703 (SC) that it is well-accepted proposition that “for the purposes of
ascertaining profits and gains the ordinary principles of commercial accounting
should be applied, so long as they do not conflict with any express provision of
the relevant statute”. The Apex Court quoted with approval the principle laid
down by the English Courts2 and also reiterated the principle laid down earlier
by the Supreme Court in P.M. Mohammed Meerakhan v. CIT, (1969) 73 ITR 735
(SC) that it was the duty of the Income-tax Officer to find out what profit the
business has made according to the true accountancy practice.

2. Modification/Deviations from accounting principles :


While the commercial accounting principles do form the basis
of computing profits for tax purposes, the law-makers have a variety of agenda
to be achieved through the Income-tax Act for which purpose, the commercial
accounting principles are either given a complete go-bye or are somewhat
modified or deviated from. Objectives of such deviations could be either
simplification of the tax law or provision of incentives for economic
development or just as a measure of ensuring effective revenue collection or
check evasion. The objective of simplification is achieved by — for example —
enacting provisions for presumptive taxation. This involves computing taxable
income as a percentage of, say, gross revenues or some other quantitative
measure like tonnage capacity in case of ships or number of trucks in case of
small transport operators, etc. The objectives of incentives for economic
development may involve creation of special-purpose statutory reserves (like SEZ
Reserve or erstwhile Investment Allowance Reserve) that are otherwise not
required under commercial accounting principles. Similarly, the objective of
ensuring effective revenue collections is achieved by, say, allowing deduction
for statutory liabilities only on actual payments, irrespective of whether the
taxpayer follows mercantile or cash method of accounting. The exercise in
computation of taxable income, thus, essentially involves sound knowledge of :


à
Commercial accounting principles that form the basis for computation of
profits; and


à
The provisions of the law that require deviation from such commercial
accounting principles or may just provide for artificial formulae in computing
taxable profits.



3. Statutory recognition of commercial accounting
principles & practices :



S. 145 of the Act provides that income chargeable under the
head ‘Profits and gains of business or profession’ or ‘Income from other
sources’ be computed in accordance with either cash or mercantile system of
accounting regularly employed by the taxpayer. It empowers the Central
Government to notify accounting standards to be followed for computing such
profits. Pursuant to the said powers, the Central Government has notified two
accounting standards (AS), one of which needs to be mentioned here. The notified
AS defines ‘Accounting Policies’ to mean the specific accounting principles and
the methods of applying those principles adopted by the assessee in the
preparation and presentation of financial statements. It further provides that
the Accounting Policies adopted by an assessee should be such so as to represent
a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the business, profession or
vocation in the financial statements prepared and presented on the basis of such
accounting policies. For this purpose, the major considerations governing the
selection and application of accounting policies are the following, namely :

(i) Prudence : Provisions should be made for all
known liabilities and losses, even though the amount cannot be determined with
certainty and represents only a best estimate in the light of available
information;

(ii) Substance over form : The accounting treatment
and presentation in financial statements of transactions and events should be
governed by their substance and not merely by the legal form;

(iii) Materiality : Financial statements should
disclose all material items, the knowledge of which might influence the
decisions of the user of the financial statements.


The notified AS provides that ‘Accrual’, ‘Going Concern’ and
‘Consistency’ are the fundamental accounting assumptions in preparation and
presentation of accounts. If these are not followed, a specific note is
required. These terms are defined as follows :

‘Accrual’ refers to the assumption that revenues and costs
are accrued, that is, recognised as they are earned or incurred (and not as
money is received or paid) and recorded in the financial statements of the
periods to which they relate;

‘Consistency’ refers to the assumption that accounting
policies are consistent from one period to another;

‘Going concern’ refers to the assumption that the assessee
has neither the intention nor the necessity of liquidation or of curtailing
materially the scale of the business, profession or vocation and intends to
continue his business, profession or vocation for the foreseeable future.

There seems to be a significant convergence between the major considerations and fundamental assumptions as laid down in the CBDT-notified AS and the.AS issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI),the apex accounting body in the country. Some differences, however, that are significant are discussed subsequently at appropriate places.

4. Prudence:
The accounting consideration of Prudence is adopted and recognised in several tax cases. A prominent illustration is where Courts have held that the closing stock ought to be valued at cost or market price whichever is lower. Courts have also held in favour of providing for actuarially valued liabilities, though the amount cannot be determined with certainty and represents a best estimate in the light of available information. There are, however, conflicts on the aspect of point of accrual to which we shall refer a little later.

5. Substance over form:
The consideration of Substance over form has been a major area of tax disputes for ages and the Courts have generally leaned in favour of substance rather than forms, though earlier there have been some exceptions, In fact, the Courts have held that the accounting entries, though are indicative of the nature of the transaction, they are not decisive of the true legal character thereof 7. This is a classic tax law principle that demonstrates convergence within divergence.

6. Accrual:
The accounting assumption of Accrual essentially means that if accounts are not prepared on Accrual basis, appropriate disclosures should be made. The Companies Act was amended in 1988 so as to make Accrual as the method of accounting compulsory for all Companies. S. 145 of the IT Act permits cash and mercantile methods of accounting. There is an age-old fight between the accounting concept of accrual and the tax concept of accrual. While the accounting concept refers to matching of costs and revenues, the tax law concept refers to ‘vesting of right to receive’s so far as income accrual is concerned and it refers to incurring or crystallising of the liability? so far as the expense accrual is concerned. One of the recent exceptions is the decision of the Supreme Court in Madras Industrial Investment Corpora-tion v. CIT, (1997) 225 ITR 802 (SC) wherein the Apex Court held that “ordinarily revenue expenditure which is incurred wholly and exclusively for the purposes of business must be allowed in its entirety in the year in which it is incurred. It cannot be spread over a number of years even if the assessee has written it off in his books over a period of years. However, the facts may justify an assessee who has incurred expenditure in a particular year to spread and claim it over a period of ensuing years. In fact, allowing the entire ex-penditure in one year might give a very distorted picture of the profits of a particular year”. Saying so, the Supreme Court held that discount on issue of debentures is an instance where although the assessee has incurred the liability to pay the discount in the year of issue of debentures, the payment is to secure a benefit over a number of years and the liability should, therefore, be spread over the period of debentures. This is a classic case of convergence of accounting accrual with the tax accrual. Yet another illustration is the decision of the Supreme Court in the case of Bharat Earth Movers v. CIT, (2000) 245 ITR 428 (SC) wherein the Apex Court held that even if the liability to pay leave encashment to employees is not due but it has definitely accrued (which is asserted by actu-arial evaluation of the liability), it should be held as allowable for tax purposes.

Although such instances seem to suggest the same direction of accounting and tax accrual, still lot of ground needs to be covered for achieving convergence. For instance, when a bank does not recognise revenues in respect of interest on sticky advances, the Tax Department still contends that income has accrued, though not recognised in the books. The Supreme Court held, in the case of State Bank of Tranvancore v. CIT, (1990) 186 ITR 187 (SC) that where interest on doubtful advances though not credited to the profit and loss account but credited to interest suspense account should be regarded as accrued and taxed accordingly. This view was once again reiterated in Kerala Financial, Corporation v. CIT, (1994) 210 ITR 129 (SC). There is thus a marked conflict between the accounting theory for revenue recognition and the tax law theory. This seems evident from an apparent difference between the understanding of the accounting consideration of Prudence under the ICAI Standard and the CBDT Standard. While the former specifically includes “In view of the uncertainty attached to future events, profits are not anticipated but recognised only when realised though not necessarily in cash”, the latter is conspicuously silent on this aspect of Prudence. In the context of NBFCs, the Tribunal held, in some cases!”, that provisions made as per prudential norms ought to be allowed for tax purposes independent of the provisions of S. 36, while it held in some other cases!’ that such provisions can be allowed only if they fall within the specific provisions of the IT Act and not otherwise. The Kolkata High Court has recently upheld the former view in the case of CIT v. Brabourne Investment Ltd., (ITANo. 333 of 2007). One doesn’t know the fate of this conflict if and when it reaches the Apex Court. But the point to be noted is that in the areas of revenue recognition and provisioning, the accounting and tax law concepts of Accrual have a long way to travel before a complete convergence is experienced.

7. Consistency:

Consistency principle finds a very satisfactory convergence in accounting and taxation. Courts have always held that the method of accounting regularly followed by the assessee and accepted in the past ought to be generally accepted 12. However, in CIT v. British Paints India Ltd., (1991) 188 ITR 44 (SC) the Apex Court held that even though the Tax Department has accepted for past several years the assessee’s method of valuing closing stock of finished goods only at the cost of raw material and totally excluding overheads, the Tax Department was entitled to reject such method and require the valuation on the basis of raw material cost plus overheads. In this case the Court deviated from the principle of consistency, only because the method consistency followed was a wrong method of valuation not recognised even under the accounting theory. Barring such cases, the Courts have always held that though the concept of res judicata does not apply to tax cases, the rule of consistency does apply and hence if the facts and the law remain the same, the Tax Department should not take different views on the same subject matter in different years”. Courts have also held that when a change in method of accounting (e.g., stock valuation) is bona fide (i.e., more appropriate or required due to change in law) such change should be permitted for tax purposes, but the taxpayer should thereafter consistently follow the changed method”.

8. Going concern:
Going Concern assumption follows one set of rules for accounting and if the enterprise is under liquidation, the accounting rules change. This is recognised even for tax law purposes when the Supreme Court held, in the case of A.L.A. Firm v. CIT, (1991) 189 ITR 285 (SC) that “the principle of valuing closing stock of business at cost or market value whichever is lower is a principle that would hold good only so long as there is a continuing business and that where the business is discontinued, whether on account of dissolution or closure or otherwise by the assessee, then the profits cannot be ascertained except by taking the closing stock at market value. The assets have to be valued on the basis of the market value on the date of dissolution”. There is thus a significant convergence as regards this concept from accounting and taxation perspectives.

9. A glimpse of some areas of conflict:

While the above provides a bird’s-eye view of the fundamental or directional issues, the nitty-gritties and nuts and bolts issues are far too many and a lot needs to be done for resolving them if the desire is to achieve substantial convergence between accounting and taxation and thereby minimise tax litigation at least on this aspect. For achieving convergence between the Accounting Standards issued by the ICAI and the Accounting Standards required to be followed under the Companies Act, initially S. 211(3C) was enacted in the Companies Act in 1999 and today we have Companies (Accounting Standard) Rules, 2006. However, convergence for tax purposes has a long way to go. This article is not aimed at discussing right v. wrong, but the purpose is to have a glimpse of some of the major areas of conflicts and open up a discussion as regards the way forward to achieve convergence. Readers may take note of these and many other areas of conflict between accounting principles and taxation.

  • Income earned during the period of construction of a project by an entrepreneur goes to reduce the cost of the project as per well-established accounting principles. However, the Apex Court held in the case of Tuticorin Alkali Chemicals & Fertilizers Ltd. v. CIT, (1997) 227 ITR 172 (SC) that certain income ought to be taxed as income from other sources. Though in certain subsequent decisions 15, this decision has been explained and distinguished and the effect thereof is to a great extent diluted in respect of income that can be regarded as inextricably linked to the setting up of the project, the basic rationale – that commercially speaking, investment of temporary surplus funds go to reduce the cost of the project – which forms the basis of the accounting treatment remains disapproved and hence unrecognised for taxation purposes.

  • AS-2 of ICAI requires valuation of costs of purchases at a price including duties and taxes ‘other than those subsequently recoverable by the enterprise from the taxing authorities’. As against this, S. 145A of the Income-tax Act requires valuation of purchases, sales and inventories inclusive of duties and taxes paid ‘notwithstanding any right arising as a conse-quence to such payment’. Thus, the ICAI Standard recommends exclusive method, while the tax law requires inclusive method. A pre-dominant legal view'” is that both the methods result in the same profits. However, the issue has been a subject matter of immense tax litigation.

  • AS-11 requires recognition of exchange differences in variety of situations. Year-end recognition of such exchange differences debited or credited to the profit and loss account have been a subject matter of litigation. Questions have arisen whether such debits are allowable for tax purposes or not. Fundamental principles were laid down by the Supreme Court in Sutlej Cotton Mills v. CIT, (1978) 116 ITR 1 (SC) to decide when the exchange loss can be treated as capital and when revenue. However, the controversy takes new dimensions with every different case. The Delhi High Court in a recent decision in CIT v. Woodward Governor India P Ltd., (2007) 162 Taxman 60 (Del) held that “judicially accepted position appears to be that in determining whether there has in fact been accrual of liability or income, the accountancy standards prescribed by the ICAI would have to be followed and applied”. In so deciding, the Delhi High Court took into consideration the various important aspects of AS-11. On the other hand, the Uttarakhand High Court, in CIT v. ONGC, (2008) 301 ITR 415 (Utt) has held that the foreign exchange loss claimed by the assessee on revenue account on, accrual basis on account of foreign exchange fluctuation on the last day of the accounting year was only a contingent and notional liability, and did not crystallise or accrue in the year under consideration and hence was held as not allowable. On a plain reading of the judgment, one finds that there is no discussion at all on AS-11 and its requirements. Poor taxpayer is at a complete loss as to what the correct position in law is on the subject.

  • AS-28 provides for impairment of assets and requires recognition for such impairment in certain circumstances. Indeed, the question whether such impairment is allowable for tax purposes or not is something that one may have to reckon with as and when the issue arises.

The list can go on. This is just a food for thought in the Diamond Jubilee issue. We may have an occasion to discuss this article further, may be in some RRC of the SCAS, which we all seldom miss!

Can Tax Laws ever be simplified ?

Article

Cost of Complexity :


1.1 The often quoted statement is : ‘Equity and taxes are
strangers’
; one could add that ‘tax laws and simplicity are also strangers’.
In the Wealth of Nations, Adam Smith famously noted that complexity makes taxes
“more burdensome to the people than they are beneficial to the sovereign”.
The cost of taxes is not just the taxes we pay, but also the cost of complexity,
popularly now termed as ‘compliance cost’. There seems to be universal agreement
that the present tax code is way too complex and needs to be completely
overhauled.

1.2 Tax laws world over are complex, but the Indian
Income-tax Act has the unique distinction of being amended every year, often
retroactively and at times the law is amended even before it has become
applicable. This has resulted in an already complex law being made almost
incomprehensible.

1.3 Our tax laws live up to Senator Spark M. Matsunaga’s
statement :

‘They say there are only two certainties in life, taxes and
death. The only difference is, death doesn’t get worse every time Congress
meets.’


Why Tax laws are complex ?

2.1 Equity and certainty are two basic canons of taxation
that constitute the foundation of all discussion on the principles of taxation.
The canon of equity demands that tax paid should be commensurate to the
respective abilities of the tax-payers. That the rich should contribute to the
public expense not just in proportion to their revenue, but more than that. The
canon of certainty, as Adam Smith put it so succinctly entails that “the tax
which each individual is bound to pay ought to be certain, and not arbitrary.
The time of payment, the manner of payment, the quantity to be paid, ought all
to be clear and plain to the contributor, and to every other person, so that the
taxpayer is not put in the power of the tax gatherer
“.

2.2 The economic reality is that no other branch of law
touches human activity at so many points and therefore tax laws will necessarily
be complex. The unfortunate truth is that it is difficult to design a tax code
that is simple and yet provides both equity and certainty.

2.3 The Government in the past has appointed several
committees to rationalise and simplify tax laws. Each report is a complete
report, but the irony is that the authorities have been selective in accepting
recommendations. This selective approach of the authorities has further
complicated the law. The need of the changing environment, if India is to emerge
as an economic superpower, is to bring about clarity in tax laws, where ‘tax
liability’ can be determined with certainty.

What is complexity ?

3.1 Taxation concepts by themselves are complex and are
troublesome enough, but when expressed in complex language, the confusion is
worse confounded. Hence, the case for simplicity is usually considered as
self-evident and is advocated as the panacea for all tax woes. However, there is
hardly any agreement as to what simplicity entails. For some, it means encoding
the tax law in a simple and easy to understand language. To others
simplification means a statute that contains a minimal number of distinctions
and exceptions, so that all arrangements or transactions with similar economic
effects receive the same tax treatment. In other words, deletion of exemptions
and deductions for different economic interest groups, resulting in a small and
simple Income-tax Act with fewer sections.



Can simplicity be achieved ?


4.1 Simplicity can be achieved by adopting any one of the
following broad parameters :


à
A “butcher’s knife” approach. This could be outrageously discriminatory and
grossly inequitable and unfair to a lot of people. For example, a fixed tax of
Rs.10,000 for every individual (irrespective of his income) would be very
simple, but would be totally unacceptable and unjust.


à
A flat rate of tax — that is — doing away with the slab system. This is
prevalent in some countries like Czech Republic, Mauritius, Russia, etc.
However, this system by itself can achieve only limited simplification unless
it is accompanied with removal of exemptions and deductions.


à
Make tax laws (like accounting standards) principle-based and not rule-based.
In other words don’t try to solve every conceivable problem or plug every
possible loophole, but instead enact a generalised statute that lays down
principles and clearly indicates their purpose. Surely, in today’s complex
business environment, this is a pipe dream. Even assuming such an approach
were attempted it would necessarily have to rely predominantly on voluntary
compliance. Advocates of this approach canvass that simplicity would promote
voluntary compliance and thereby boost revenue collections.


à
Social and political objectives for development of areas or special interest
groups should be through direct subsidies and not through tax laws. Subsidies
however have proved to be very costly and ineffective and experience now
suggests that these should be introduced only under very special
circumstances.



The reasons for complexity :

5.1 It is also undisputed that world over taxpayers are resorting to ever more complex tax structures to reduce their tax liability. Indeed, taxpayers (with the help of consultants) are blurring the line between tax evasion, tax avoidance and tax planning. Complex business structures, use of tax-friendly jurisdictions (tax havens), off balance-sheet transactions, interdealings with related enterprises, etc. are as much an integral part of the modern business as they are tools to minimise tax liability.

5.2 Indian laws are not any more complicated than in the US and many other European countries.
 
Tax laws world over are complex and will unfortunately remain so, as they have to deal with businesses that are complex and intricate.

5.3 Besides, modern tax laws are not just about revenue collection. They are also fiscal tools to achieve social, economic and political objectives. Despite the rhetoric from businesses and Government that they prefer a free market economy as a vehicle for the desired distribution of economic resources, in practice there is little faith shown in unassisted market to deliver optimal economic and employment growth. Special interest groups as well as political groups regularly lobby, often successfully and often justifiably, in carving out exceptions to the tax laws and thereby adding to complexity. It is routinely touted that exemptions and deductions should be reduced. However, the reality is that many groups will have special problems and their appeal for special treatment willsound perfectly fair and justified.

5.4 The bottom line is that as long as we continue to use tax codes to achieve economic, social and political objectives beyond raising revenue for necessary government programmes, it is impossible to achieve true tax Simplification.

5.5 To summarise, the primary reasons for tax laws being complex world over are:

  • Complex nature of transactions and business structures.

  • Multiple character of transactions.

  • Diverse nature of business, local, national and transnational.

  • Use of tax law as tools to achieve social, economic and political objectives, for example, education cess of 3%.

  • Exemptions granted to special interest groups or areas for encouraging economic development, for example, tax benefits granted to north-eastern States ‘and developers of residential real estate.

  • Desire of every taxpayer to arrange his affairs in a manner that minimises his tax liability.

  • Desire of every government to tax a part of profit arising out of a transnational transaction.

5.6 In India, the confusion is worst confounded on account of additional problems, which are purely administrative in nature :

  • Use of different languages in similar provisions, for example, some Sections in chapter VI-A use the term ‘attributable to’ as opposed to ‘derived from’ used in other Sections resulting in endless litigation.

  • Desire to deny deduction to which the assessee is entitled, leading to prolonged litigation, for example, S. 80HHC.

  • Bad drafting of laws. This is despite the fact that all members of the CBDT are from the field and are conversant with the problems faced both by the tax gatherer and the tax-payer.

  • Desire of tax gatherer to collect the most rather than the correct share of tax.

Complexity must be reduced if it cannot be eliminated:

6.1 This does not mean that no attempt should be made to rein in complexity. Complexity in itself creates opportunities for tax avoidance and also causes difficulties for honest taxpayers. It leads to confusion and mistakes that are often hard to distinguish from dishonesty. Consequently, penalties become a less appealing approach to enforcement, while simultaneously, detection becomes costlier. In other words, complexity not only increases the cost of compliance for the taxpayer, but it also increases the cost of enforcement for the Government. Therefore, before giving in to demands of special interest groups, one must think hard about whether the alleged equity or advantage resulting from each new exception (exemption, “deduction, etc.) is really worth the added complexity and confusion.

6.2 Lessons can also be learnt from international best practices. For example, OECD and the United Nations have been incessantly working for reducing complexities in international taxation by drafting model treaties for avoiding double taxation.

Simplification of Tax Administration:

7.1 Given the limited possibility of reducing complexity, the focus must necessarily shift from simplification of tax laws to simplification in tax administration. Greater attention should be’ paid to improving compliance through equity, improvement in taxpayer services, transparency and accountability. The last disclosure scheme was questioned and criticised on the ground that it rewarded the dishonest taxpayer. But its success also demonstrated quite effectively that simplicity coupled with a responsive administration works.

7.2 US President Lyndon Johnson said, “I do not suppose we will ever get to the point where people are pleased to pay taxes, but we owe it to them to see that the collection is done as efficiently as possible, as courteously as possible and always honestly.”

7.3 The concept of good governance and fair treatment of stakeholder is not just applicable to the corporate world, but is with much greater force applicable to the Government, which has the primary duty to treat taxpayer with fairness and dignity.

7.4 The Citizens’ charter published by the tax authorities proclaims its commitment to excellence in providing service to the taxpayers. It is about time that the Tax Department is held accountable on this promise. Tax practitioners should also work in tandem in promoting voluntary tax compliance. The unfortunate experience of the taxpayer and the tax practitioner is that the general approach is to treat the taxpayer as a tax evader and tax practitioner as evader’s abettor.

7.5 Simplification of tax administration can be achieved through systemic changes, effective use of technology and by introducing transparency and accountability. If information is available electronically and the interface between taxpayer and Tax Department is minimised to only where absolutely essential, then it will not only reduce the scope for malpractice, but would also improve tax administration. Higher transparency will automatically also result in higher accountability. In the age of ‘Right to Information’ this is the need of the hour.

7.6 Innovative steps in this direction could be:

  • Statistics of additions made at assessment level as compared to additions finally sustained, total successful appeals out of total appeals filed by each section of the Department, and so on can be made public through Department’s website.

  • Broad and well thought out parameters and not just revenue collection, should be used as criteria to judge the performance of the tax officers. This would go a long way in improving tax administration and bring about a change in ‘rnindset’.

  • The bureaucrat, it is said is as good as his last mistake. This mindset results in paralysis of action, as mistakes are not forgiven, but non-performance is ignored and often (ironically) encouraged. Tax officers need to be rewarded for prompt decision and action and held accountable for inaction and delay.

  • Focussed training along with systemic changes by introducing transparency and accountability can certainly trigger the process of change.

  • The Department should discourage filing of frivolous appeals. Statistics establish that majority of the appeals are filed by the Department. The Courts should award ‘cost’ -nay – heavy costs to the assessee, in case it is of the opinion that the Department’s appeal is frivolous.

  • Where an issue is pending before the Supreme Court, the lower appellate authority should pass an order to the effect that the matter will be dealt with according to the decision of the Supreme Court. This will obviate the filing of an appeal by the assessee.

7.7 Given that the tax laws will necessarily remain complex, controversies should be addressed as soon as they arise in order to remove uncertainty. The Tax Department should communicate its stand on complex laws through Circulars that are unambiguous. Unfortunately, the present trend is to issue Circulars that are more complex than the original law they seek to clarify. Above all, the Department should follow a consistent approach across all jurisdictions.

7.8 It is well known that changes introduced in the name of simplicity cause the greatest confusion. Complexity in administration can also be reduced by avoiding frequent changes in laws and rules, as they only lead to fresh ground of litigations and confusion. Since amendments are often with retroactive effect, the complexity and uncertainty embedded in the laws are further compounded and sensible planning becomes impossible.

In Conclusion:
8.1 The biggest problem today is not that the law is complex, but that it is administered in a complex and unfriendly manner. Focus must therefore change from simplification of tax laws to improving tax administration.

8.2 It is the duty of the Government to create an environment where tax compliance is encouraged and every taxpayer is not considered guilty until proven innocent. As William Gladstone said, “it is the duty of the Government to make it difficult for the people to do wrong and easy to do right”.

8.3 Though tax laws will never achieve the simplicity we desire, the challenge is to have a responsive and efficient administration which can to a large measure prove John Have’s statement wrong. I quote:
‘Income Tax is capital punishment’.

Recent trends in revenue generation

Article

Both tax administrators as well as tax professionals —
Chartered Accountants, Advocates and other experts — are often so pre-occupied
with their day-to-day concerns that they sometimes have little time to study the
environment in which they are functioning. The present article seeks to provide
some information in respect of the latter.


Certain trends in collection of direct taxes in recent times
reflect an important change in the macro-economic environment in which we all
function and deserve some thought. The good news first : One feature of the
pattern of revenue in recent times is the much heavier reliance now placed by
the Central Government on direct taxes — personal income-tax and corporate tax —
to meet its revenue yields. The current composition of revenue is now much more
reflective of the revenue composition of a developed country. This is in marked
contrast to the situation which prevailed in the country about 12 to 13 years
ago. During the year 1995-96, direct taxes accounted only for 30.2% of the
revenues of the Central Government. The current figure for 2007-08 is 48.8%.
During the year 1995-96, customs and central excise duties were the mainstay of
the central finance — accounting for 32.1% and 36.1%, respectively, of the
revenue receipts. In the year 2007-08,
these figures declined to 18% and 23.8%, respectively.

The decline in the reliance on indirect taxes cannot but be
good news for the economy, for the efficiency and distortion losses from such
taxes are well known and are generally much greater than those from
income-taxes. The latter do not have a cascading effect which a tax on tax
generates. Income-taxes also do not distort to the same extent, the natural
choices of consumers and producers. One can only hope for the sake of the
healthy development of our economy that this trend of progressively greater
reliance on personal income-tax and corporate tax will continue.

Up to and including the financial year 1995-96, income-tax
and corporate tax raised by the Income-tax Department were more or less equal.
During the year 1995-96, revenue from personal income-tax stood at Rs.15,592
crores and that from corporate tax at Rs.16,487 crores. The growth of these two
taxes till this year was more or less on par in that the ratio of 1 : 1 was
being consistently maintained from year to year.

There has been a sea change since then. As a percentage of
gross tax revenues of the Central Government, personal income-tax has increased
between 1995-96 and 2007-08 from 14.0% to 18.1%. During this period corporate
tax more than doubled from 14.8% to 30.7% of the Centre’s tax revenues. As a
percentage of GDP, personal income-tax has increased from 1.3% to 2.1% of the
GDP. Corporate tax on the other hand has increased from 1.4% to more than 4% of
the GDP. The growth of corporate tax is thus, by any indicator, far more rapid
than personal income-tax. This phenomenon has important implications not only
for the tax administration, but the entire economy.

What it appears to imply is that the level of voluntary
compliance insofar as corporate tax is concerned is much better than in the case
of personal income-tax. The current ratio of personal income-tax to corporate
tax of 7 : 12 is heavily skewed in favour of corporate tax. Compare this with
the United Kingdom where in the year 2004-05, corporate tax accounted for
receipts of 34.1 billion Pounds and personal income-tax for receipts of 127.2
billion Pounds. The ratio between personal income-tax and corporate tax was thus
3.73 : 1. Considering the magnitude of corporatisation in the two countries, one
would imagine that the revenues from personal income-tax in India too should be
far greater than corporate tax. What policy makers need to ponder over is why
the ratio between the two taxes is so heavily biased now in favour of corporate
tax. One inference that can reasonably be drawn is that the collections from
personal income-tax are far below potential.

The explanations for this phenomenon are not far to seek :
the culture for voluntary compliance amongst non-corporate entities in India is
still very weak. People still do not perceive any great advantage in paying
taxes, possibly because they cannot see getting back any benefit from doing so.
Even more so, they do not see anything morally wrong in evading taxes if they
can get away with it; if they find that others, equally placed, are doing so
successfully without coming to any harm; or if they perceive complexities in the
system, too daunting to handle.

Future thrust of policy planning should surely be in the
direction of finding ways of making ordinary people see the advantages of paying
taxes. This would involve a twofold strategy : in the first instance, they must
be able to perceive that it would be difficult for them to get away in case they
do not pay taxes according to law. Strengthening the third-party reporting
system (AIR) would definitely help in this regard. Secondly, and even more
importantly, it is important to undertake taxpayer education on a larger scale
than ever before to make the taxpayers realise the advantages of voluntarily
complying with the law.

At the level of the cutting edge, a taxpayer must also want
to deal with the Tax Department and not shy away such a course of action. In
concrete terms, this would mean that the Tax Department itself would need to
work on improving the attitudes of its officials towards the taxpaying public. A
climate in which scrutiny assessments are made in a much less threatening
environment would perhaps need to be created. One possible way to achieve this
objective would surely be to prescribe a limit on the number of times a taxpayer
can be called for making a routine scrutiny. The officer’s discretion to call
for information should also not be open ended, but severely circumscribed
inter alia
by the reasons for which the computer system has selected the
case in the first instance. In other words, it should not ordinarily be open to
the officer to launch fishing inquiries into areas which are beyond the reasons
for selection.

The direct taxes to GDP ratio has improved appreciably from 2.8% to well over 6%between the years 1995-96 and 2007-08. The overall taxes to GDP ratio of the Central and State Governments, put together, however, is still very low at about 15% to 16%. To bring this ratio and particularly that of direct taxes to GDP on par with developed countries, considerable modifications in polices, along the lines indicated above, would be required.

Is India watering down IFRS ?

“India must first aspire to uphold the purity of IFRS and be fully IFRS-compliant nation and second it should take a stand that it has full belief in the proposed deviations as being the best practices and then the confidence and conviction to influence the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) through consensus about what it believes is right and the need to bring the required improvement/amendments in IFRS rather than remaining as a carved-out nation”.
Journey so far :
India started its journey towards IFRS way back in 2006 and in the last four years it has travelled many milestones and hurdles and finally at the start of 2010 and thereafter, we saw some roadmap being laid down.
In this context, some interesting news excerpts are as under:
“Let me make it very clear that India is a signatory to accept IFRS. By accept, I mean convergence to IFRS by April 2011 and not adoption. We stand by that. There is no reason to change that date or extend the time,” Mr. R. Bandyopadhyay, Secretary, Ministry of Corporate Affairs, said at ‘IFRS Summit 2009’ organised by the Confederation of Indian Industry (CII).
While pointing out that standard-setting was an evolutionary process even at the level of International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), Mr. Bandyopadhyay said that India will converge with those accounting standards which prevail at the time of transition. “If certain things are changing at IASB, it does not mean we will immediately jump into this. We are converging and doing that on our own suitability,” he said. The entire exercise of convergence ought to be in the interest of the country and also that of the growth of the corporate sector, the MCA official said.”
“On July 17, 2010, a section of the press has quoted Salman Khurshid, the Minister for Corporate Affairs saying “Convergence gives you the flexibility to stop where you want to stop, adjust where you want to adjust and make an exception where you want to make an exception.” He further said, “. . . There will be areas where ‘fair value’ will apply, there will be areas where it need not apply,” Mr. Khurshid was answering questions in the context of large Indian companies transiting to a new set of accounting standards to be issued by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs from April 1, 2011.”
As envisaged, India has finally chosen to converge with IFRS, as opposed to adopting IFRS on the pretext that Indian regulators and standard-setters will review the existing IFRS standards and their applicability in Indian context and will issue converged accounting standards called as Ind-AS. However, in this process we will face key challenges in the areas of managing the ‘carve-outs’ from IFRS and the quick response for incorporating the ongoing changes in Ind-AS in line with IFRS.
The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has already issued Exposure Drafts (EDs) for substantially all Ind-AS and the same have been cleared by the Council of the ICAI (barring few exceptions). Most of the standards have also been cleared by the National Advisory Committee on Accounting Standards (NACAS). An analysis of these exposure drafts along with the recent decisions taken by the NACAS reveals the following carve-outs/deviations:
  •  Out of Ind-AS 30 (corresponding to IAS 39) or Ind-AS 40 (corresponding to IFRS 9), only Ind-AS 30 shall be applied.
  •  Not to include IFRIC 15 on accounting of agreements for the construction of real estates in Ind-AS 9, i.e., Revenue Recognition, and has included the same in the scope of Ind-AS 7, i.e., Construction Contracts. By the implication of which, the real estate developers will be able to follow percentage of completion method during the period of construction and hence, creating a big carve-out from the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).
  •  The gain on bargain purchase in case of Business Combination will be recognised in the Statement of Other Comprehensive Income statement.
  •  The actuarial gains and losses arising on defined benefit obligation and related defined benefit plan, as per the present draft Ind-AS 15 (Revised 20XX), Employee Benefits, requires the same to be recognised immediately in profit or loss instead of options as available to charge the same to reserves as per IFRS. However, NACAS has suggested that the entire amount of actuarial gain or losses should be recognised immediately in other comprehensive income, keeping in view the suggestions of industry representatives on NACAS and principles given in this regard in the exposure draft on IAS 19 issued in April 2010 by the IASB.
  •  As per the draft Ind-AS 41 (corresponding to IFRS 1), first-time adoption of Indian Accounting Standards, there is mandatory provision to present the comparative figures as per previous GAAP with an option to give additional column for figures as per Ind-AS also. However, as per IFRS 1, there is a mandatory provision to present the comparatives as per IFRS only.

Apart from the above carve-outs, certain other deviations can also be expected e.g., different accounting treatment for Foreign Currency Convertible Bonds (FCCB), existing Indian GAAP carrying value of the fixed assets may be considered as ‘deemed cost’ as on the transition date, treatment of foreign exchange differences, etc.

The final journey has just begun and we are already seeing deviations in new standards and we don’t know how far or near we will be from IFRS.
Journey way forward:
The decision to converge and not to adopt IFRS gives the flexibility to carve out and or deviate from the accounting principles and policies in IFRS. The important question is to what extent we should use this flexibility. If, we make significant changes in IFRS using the flexibility, the new accounting standards will not be fully convergent with IFRS and the purpose of convergence will be lost. Our accounting practices will fall short of globally accepted accounting practices. Inflow of foreign capital may be affected adversely. Indian companies, that are listed in stock exchanges in USA, Europe and other countries, using accounting standards fully convergent with IFRS, will have to prepare two sets of financial statements.

Moreover with tax authorities still holding the cards close to their chest, it appears that the converged accounting standards may not be acceptable for tax filings for next three to five years and till then the current Indian GAAP would be used for tax purposes. This will ultimately result into three sets of financial statements being pre-pared by Indian companies.

In any debate on convergence or adoption or carve-outs, India must first aspire to uphold the purity of IFRS and be fully IFRS-compliant nation and second it should take a stand that it has full belief in the proposed deviations as being the best practices and then the confidence and conviction to influence the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) through consensus about what it believes is right and the need to bring the required improvement/amendments in IFRS rather than remaining as a carved-out nation. We cannot just take short-term nationalist and local view rather we need to take long-term global view on IFRS.

If carve-outs/deviations are managed with this objective and attitude, then India and Indian entities would benefit in the long term.

The Foreign Contribution Regulation Act, 2010 — An analysis

Article

The Foreign Contribution
Regulation Act, 2010 (FCRA 2010) is an enactment that is relatively unknown even
to practising Chartered Accountants. Besides it is a law where compliance is
difficult to monitor and implementation presents practical difficulties. The
result is that the law is often practised in breach.

It was felt that the earlier
Act of 1976 (FCRA 1976) required a complete overhaul as it had failed to keep
pace with the changing face of India’s economic growth. In fact there was a
lobby that felt that the law had outlived its utility and needed to be scrapped.
Particularly after the introduction of the Prevention of Money Laundering Act,
2002, it was felt that FCRA did not serve any meaningful purpose.

In this article we will
discuss the basic provisions of FCRA 2010 with particular focus on the changes
brought about vis-à-vis FCRA 1976. It may however, be noted that the Act
has not yet received assent of the President and will come into force only
thereafter, on such date as is notified in the Official Gazette by the Central
Government.

The basic purpose of FCRA
2010 as mentioned in the preamble to the Act is “
to
consolidate the law to regulate the acceptance and utilisation of foreign
contribution or foreign hospitality by certain individuals or associations or
companies and to prohibit acceptance and utilisation of foreign contribution or
foreign hospitality for any activities detrimental to the national interest and
for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.”


It is generally believed
that both these Acts cover only the Non-Profit Organisations (NPOs) and not
others. It is true that organisations having a definite cultural, economic,
educational, religious or social programme are specifically covered. However, it
also covers persons in sensitive government positions, political parties and
persons associated with the news media. After all, the avowed purpose of the Act
is to regulate and prohibit acceptance and utilisation of foreign contribution
for any activities detrimental to national interest. As such the provisions of
FCRA 2010 can be broadly classified in the following three categories and we
will discuss each of them separately :

(1) Prohibition on certain
persons from accepting foreign contribution.

(2) Restriction on certain
persons from accepting foreign hospitality.

(3) Regulating the
acceptance of foreign contribution by persons having a definite cultural,
economic, educational, religious or social programme. NPOs are covered under
this category.

Before we discuss the above,
it is essential to understand two most important terms used in both the Acts.

Foreign contribution :

Foreign contribution is
defined to mean any donation, delivery or transfer made by a foreign
source
of any article, currency (whether Indian or foreign) or any
security. It will be appreciated that the definition is very wide both in terms
of coverage and the mode of transfer of the assets covered. It brings within its
ambit not only money, but practically any asset transferred from a foreign
source. It covers all modes of receipt of foreign contribution, be it transfer,
gift or delivery in any manner. Even advance or loan received from a foreign
source would be treated as foreign contribution.

The definition is also broad
enough to cover any indirect receipt from a foreign source. Even if the money or
article is routed through several intermediaries, it will not be cleansed of
being treated as foreign source if the original source is foreign.

The only exception is with
regard to gifts received for personal use, and that too only if the market value
of the article gifted is not more than such sum as may be specified in the rules
to be framed by the Central Government. Under FCRA 1976, the monetary limit was
set in the Act itself at Rs.1,000 which was found grossly inadequate, as it had
failed to keep pace with inflation and the consequent depreciation in the value
of money. Hopefully, the rules will not only set a more realistic limit (say
Rs.50,000), but will also periodically revise the same.

The definition of foreign
contribution created all kinds of practical difficulties and FCRA 2010 has
sought to address some of them. An explanation is inserted to the definition of
foreign contribution to provide that any amount received by any person from a
foreign source by way of fee (including fees charged from foreign students) or
towards cost in lieu of goods sold or services rendered by such person in the
ordinary course of business, trade or commerce, whether within or outside India,
shall not be treated as foreign contribution. As such fees paid by a foreign
student for enrolment to an Indian educational institution or fees for enrolment
to any seminar or workshop will not be treated as foreign contribution.

Though this seems to be a
well-intentioned change, it leaves several problems unattended. Only the cost in
lieu of goods sold and services rendered is excluded from the definition of
foreign contribution. What if the goods are sold or services rendered by adding
a nominal margin ? In any case how would one determine the exact cost, would it
include overheads or not ? Even if the NPO has no intention of making profits,
it might realise some surplus, as it would price its product or service based on
certain costing assumptions. It would be impossible to arrange the affairs in
such a manner that sale proceeds exactly match the cost. If the NPO has
recovered even one rupee above the cost, would it lose the benefit of the
explanation ? Clearly, restricting the explanation only to the cost will be
practically unworkable and self-defeating.

Another interesting example is that of a temple trust offering the facility of online Aarti at a charge. If the payment is from a person who is not a citizen of India, then it would be treated as foreign contribution and would not qualify for exemption as the payment cannot strictly be treated as ‘fees’, nor can it be said to be for services in the ordinary course of trade, commerce or business.

Further, the term ‘goods or services rendered in the ordinary course of business, trade or commerce’ seems too restrictive and will hopefully be liberally interpreted to also cover goods sold or services rendered by the NPO in the course of carrying out its charitable activities.

Foreign source:

To understand the meaning of the term foreign contribution, one has to understand the term foreign source. This is an inclusive definition, again with a very wide coverage. It covers a foreign government or its agency, any international agencies (other than certain specified agencies such as United Nations, World Bank, etc.), foreign citizen, foreign company, any other foreign entity such as trade unions, trusts, societies, clubs, etc. formed or registered outside India. It also covers multi-national corporations and any company where more than 50% of the share capital is held by foreign government, entity or citizen.

Receipts from foreign citizen are considered as foreign source and hence by implication one could argue that amounts received from Indian citizen would not be treated as foreign source. As such, even foreign currency would be treated as received from Indian source, if it is received from an Indian citizen. The basic principle is to determine the source from which the currency or asset is being received. If the source is Indian, then it does not matter whether the currency is Indian or not. Conversely, if the source is foreign, then even if the receipt is in Indian Rupees, the same would be considered as foreign contribution.

Multi-national company has been defined to mean a corporation incorporated in a foreign country if it has a subsidiary or branch or place of business in two or more countries, or otherwise carries on business or operations in two or more countries. Thus a foreign company having operations in any one or more country besides India would fit into this definition. For example several foreign banks operating in India would fall under this category.

What is most damaging is that even Indian companies where foreign shareholding is more than 50% would be treated as foreign source. With liberalised FDI norms and also liberalisation of permissible foreign investment limits in listed Indian companies, there are several Indian companies where the foreign holding is more than 51%.

Any donations received from such companies (for example, Hindustan Unilever, HDFC, ICICI Bank, etc.) or even from branches of foreign companies (for example, Citibank, Standard Chartered Bank, etc.) would be treated as foreign contribution. Such companies cannot give donations to Indian trusts or even place advertisements in souvenirs brought out by such trusts, unless the trusts are either duly registered with the Central Government or have taken prior permission for receiving such donation. It was hoped that this situation would be remedied in FCRA 2010, but unfortunately the position has remained practically unaltered or has been made even more stringent.

Now let us examine the provisions of FCRA 2010 from the three broad categories as enumerated above.

Prohibition on certain persons from accepting foreign contribution:

The following persons are prohibited from accepting foreign contribution:
(a)    Candidate for election;
(b)    Correspondent, columnist, cartoonist, editor, owner, printer or publisher of a registered newspaper;
(c)    Judge, government servant or employee of any entity controlled or owned by the govern-ment;
(d)    Member of any Legislature;
(e)    Political party or its office bearers;
(f)    Organisations of a political nature as may be specified;
(g)    Associations or company engaged in the production or broadcast of audio news or audio-visual news or current affairs programmes through any electronic mode or form or any other mode of mass communication;
(h)    Correspondent or columnist, cartoonist, editor, owner of the association or company referred to in (g) above.

However, foreign contribution can be accepted by the above-mentioned persons in the following specific situation:
(a)    By way of remuneration for himself or for any group of persons working under him;
(b)    By way of payment in the ordinary course of business transacted in or outside India or in the course of international trade or commerce;
(c)    As agent of a foreign source in relation to any transaction made by such foreign source with the Central or State Government;
(d)    By way of gift or presentation as a member of any Indian delegation. However, the gift or present should be accepted in accordance with the rules made by the Central Government;
(e)    From his relative;
(f)    By way of any scholarship, stipend or any payment of like nature.

It is important to note that barring the above exceptions, there is blanket prohibition on the above-mentioned persons from accepting foreign contribution. The provisions are extremely stringent and are reminiscent of the FERA days where a foreign exchange offence was considered as destroying the economic fibre of the country and hence was to be dealt with as ruthlessly and strictly as a criminal offence.

It is clear that the above prohibition is in order to protect ‘national interest’, which can be a very ubiquitous term. However, whatever the intention, it is quite evident that FCRA 2010 has failed to keep pace with the liberalised exchange control regulations. For example, FDI is permitted to the extent of 26% in news and current affairs TV channels. However, under FCRA 2010, companies engaged in production of such TV programmes or their key employees cannot accept foreign contribution. Mercifully, amounts received in the ordinary course of business or in the course of international trade are exempt.

Interestingly, correspondent, columnist, cartoonist, editor, owner, printer or publisher of registered newspapers were covered by FCRA 1976, but the same did not cover such persons connected with the audio-visual and the electronic media. Perhaps this was because in 1976 the radio and the TV channels were Government controlled and did not have the kind of foreign participation that we have today. As such they were not considered sensitive areas from the perspective of national interest. FCRA 2010 now covers both the print and the electronic media.

The language used for bringing the electronic media and its key personnel within the ambit of FCRA 2010 seem out of place with reference to the television and audio industry. The terms ‘columnist, cartoonist, etc.’ are borrowed from the old clause under FCRA 1976 relating to print media, and seem quite inappropriate in the context of the electronic media.

Under FCRA 1976, even gifts received by the above category of persons required previous permission of the Central Government, if the value of the gift exceeded Rs.8,000 per annum. Even where the value of the gift was less than Rs.8,000, the Central Government was required to be intimated about the details of the gift. Mercifully, FCRA 2010 now gives specific exemption in respect of foreign contribution received from a relative as defined under the Companies Act, 1956.

Restriction on certain persons from accepting foreign hospitality:
FCRA 1976 as well as FCRA 2010 prohibit members of Legislature, office bearers of a political party, judges and government servants from accepting any foreign hospitality except with the prior permission of the Central Government. It is not necessary to obtain such prior permission in case of medical emergency outside India. However, even in such medical emergency, the person receiving the hospitality is required to intimate the Central Government about the receipt of such hospitality, the source from which and the manner in which the hospitality was received by him within one month.

Foreign hospitality is defined to mean any offer, not being a purely casual one, made in cash or kind by a foreign source for providing a person with the costs of travel to any foreign country or with free boarding, lodging, transport or medical treatment.

It is interesting to note that a purely casual offer is not considered as foreign hospitality. But it is not clear as to what kind of offer would be considered as a ‘purely casual’ one.

Regulating the acceptance of foreign contribution by persons having a definite cultural, economic, educational, religious or social programme:

NPOs are directly affected by the provisions of FCRA (both FCRA 1976 and 2010), and the Government closely monitors the inflow of foreign contribution into this sector.

Both under FCRA 1976 and FCRA 2010, any individual or organisation carrying out a definite cultural, economic, educational, religious or social programme is required to be registered with the Central Government or obtain prior permission of the Central Government before accepting any foreign contribution. Such an NPO cannot in turn transfer the foreign contribution received by it to any other person unless such other person is also registered or has obtained prior permission.

The process of registration is stringent and fraught with bureaucratic process. Unless the NPO has a track record of at least three years, as a matter of practice, registration has generally not been granted under FCRA 1976. Under FCRA 2010, the requirement of having a track record is now codified, as the Act specifically provides that before granting registration, the Central Government shall verify whether the NPO has undertaken reasonable activ-ity in its chosen field for the benefit of society. If the NPO is not able to fulfil the requisite conditions for registration, then the only alternative would be to apply for prior permission, which would be valid only for the specific purpose and source for which it is obtained. Even for prior permission the NPO would have to show that it has a reasonable project for the benefit of society for which the foreign contribution is proposed to be utilised.

The Central Government, before granting registration or prior permission, is required to ensure that the person or organisation is in no way working to the detriment of national interest. For example, (and the below-mentioned items are only illustrative) it should not be engaged in?:

(a)    Religious conversion through inducement or force;
(b)    Creating communal tension or disharmony;
(c)    Propagation of sedition or advocating violent methods to achieve its ends;
(d)    Undesirable purposes.

Besides,    permission    can    be    denied    if the acceptance of foreign contribution is likely to affect prejudicially the sovereignty and integrity of India or is against the security, strategic, scientific or economic interest of the State; or is opposed to public interest.

This clearly brings out that the Central Government has almost absolute powers to deny registration or prior permission. The manner in which some of the above criteria can be interpreted is extremely subjective and fear is that too much power is placed in the hands of the bureaucracy and this may lead to undesirable consequences.

Under FCRA 1976, prior permission was relatively simpler to obtain as compared to registration and was generally granted within 90 days if the paper-work was proper. Under FCRA 2010, it is specified that application for registration or prior permission should, after inquiry, be ordinarily granted within 90 days of the application or the Government should communicate the reasons for not granting the same. No specific consequences are provided for not processing the application within the 90 days and hence the provisions are rightly viewed with a great deal of skepticism, as it is unlikely that the sanctity of the time frame of 90 days will be observed.

What is worst is that the certificate for registration is now valid for a period of five years, after which the registration process will have to be repeated. This is in deviation of the present situ-ation under FCRA 1976 where registration once granted is valid for the lifetime unless specifically revoked. The Central Government has wide powers under specified situations to cancel the certificate of registration, after making such inquiry as it deems fit. For example, the certificate can be cancelled if the NPO has obtained the same by making false statements or has violated any terms and conditions of registration or of FCRA or its rules or it is necessary to do so in public interest. The certificate can also be cancelled if the NPO has not been engaged in any reasonable activity for the benefit of society for two consecutive years. Foreign contribution can be received only in a single designated bank account and it is not permissible to open multiple bank accounts. Of-ten funding agencies demand that separate bank account be opened specifically to manage and monitor the foreign contribution sent to India by them. Unfortunately that is not permitted under FCRA and needs to be clearly explained to the funding agencies.

Often trusts have projects in far-flung and remote places and it is always advisable to open a bank account at the project site. Recognising this need, it is provided that more than one bank account can be opened for actual utilisation of such foreign contribution. Such bank account is popularly referred to as project account and typically, the funds are transferred from the designated account, to the project account for direct spending on the project. No other deposits are allowed to be made in such project account as they are meant only for disbursement of expenses. Such project accounts were permitted under FCRA 1976 also by way of administrative directions, but under FCRA 2010, the same is legitimised by a specific provision in the Act itself.

This restriction on opening separate bank ac-counts, throws up some tricky problems for trusts carrying out work in remote areas. What if the trust engaged in micro credit activity receives foreign contribution as part of its revolving fund and from such fund gives petty loans to local artisans? Arguably, the loan recovered would go back into the revolving fund and would continue to be treated as foreign contribution. The amount recovered could be less than Rs.100 but it would not be possible to deposit the same in the project account, and would have to be physically carried to be deposited in the designated bank account, which may be at the head office far from the field office. Similarly any expenses reversed or any re -imbursement received cannot be re-deposited in the project account from where it was made in the first place and will have to be deposited only in the main designated account. Therefore, the problem that existed under FCRA 1976 will continue to trouble NGOs under FCRA 2010 as well.

Surplus funds in the designated bank account can be invested in approved assets. However, there is a specific ban on using such assets for speculative business. Rules will be made to specify which activities will be construed as speculative business. The investments as well as the income from such investments will continue to be characterised as foreign contribution and accordingly the interest earned or proceeds realised on encashment of the investments will have to be re-deposited in the designated bank account.

The NGOs will have to maintain records and accounts in the prescribed manner and intimation will have to be sent to the Central Government reflect-ing the amount of each contribution received, its source and manner in which the same was utilised. The designated bank also has to report the details of the foreign contributions routed through them directly to the specified authority.

In recent times concerns have been raised that trusts do not spend adequate amounts on their core objects. There isn’t enough transparency in the administration of the trusts, resulting in disproportionately high administrative expenses. Apparently to address these concerns, further controls over trusts are introduced, providing that not more than 50% of the foreign contribution received in a financial year by the trust shall be utilised to meet administrative expenses. Administrative expenses exceeding 50% can be defrayed only with the prior approval of the Central Government, which will prescribe the elements that will be included in the administrative expenses and the manner in which such administrative expenses shall be calculated.

Scholarships and stipend:

Under FCRA 1976, scholarship, stipend or any payment of like nature from any foreign source, received by any citizen of India was required to be intimated to the Central Government within the prescribed time and manner. There were some exceptions and relaxation, but by and large this was one provision that was most often observed in breach. Very few, if any, were actually intimating the Central Government about the scholarship or stipend received by them.

Fortunately the FCRA 2010 has done away with the requirement of intimating the Central Government about the receipt of such scholarship or stipend. In fact, even persons who are prohibited from accepting foreign contribution (as discussed above) are free to accept scholarship or stipend, as a specific exception has been carved out for the same.

In summary:

The FCRA 2010 is by and large an old wine in a new bottle. Unfortunately, in a lot of respects the provisions have been made far more stringent than what they were under FCRA 1976. Philanthropy is ingrained in the Indian psyche and a vast number of organisations do yeoman work, they serve the most basic problems of the neediest of the needy, where government machinery has woefully failed. Such organisations need to be encouraged and provided with a framework where they can function efficiently and effectively. However the reality is that charitable trusts have found themselves targeted from several sides in recent years. It is unfortunate that for the misdeeds of a few, all charitable entities have to deal with punitive legislation. The Foreign Contribution Regulation Act, 2010 is one more of such regulations that is only going to add to the already onerous burden that such trusts have to endure.

The Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009

Life of a professional

Article

When a C.A. professional is called upon to write about his
professional life, what comes uppermost in his mind is to draw up a Balance
Sheet of Life. We Chartered Accountants, who certify financial statements, which
include Balance Sheets of our client, try to give a ‘true and fair’ view of the
state of affairs of the organisation. People judge the health of the
organisation on the basis of our opinion. We should try to prepare Balance Sheet
of our Life to find out whether it gives a ‘true and fair’ view of our actions
in life.

One of our professional colleagues had once tried to state in
a journal as to how Balance Sheet of a professional should appear. This write up
appeared somewhat as under :

Balance sheet of a professional :


Liabilities


Assets


Capital


Fixed Assets

Character of Professional

Heart of Professional

Reserves and Surplus

Goodwill

Happiness in life

Soul of professional

Liabilities

Investment

Duties to the society

Your knowledge

 


Bank balance

 

Your mind

 

Accrued interest

 

Your patience

 

Accumulated losses

 

Your sorrows

One can summarise the Balance Sheet of Life in the above
manner.

The essence of C.A. profession :

A professional commands respect in the society because his
motto is ‘Pride of service in preference to personal gain’. He is described as
one who places public good above his personal gain. This is the reason why
Government, financial institutions and members of the public rely on a CA for
his expert advice. This reliance imposes a public interest responsibility on our
members, when they render services in the field of accounting, taxation or other
fields.

For the success of any professional, it is essential that
there is a strong base provided by the regulating body to which he is
answerable. The system of education, training and examination should be such
that he is able to command the respect and confidence of the members of the
society. The users of professional services require an assurance that the member
of the profession whose services are retained is (i) a person of character and
integrity and (ii) competent and knowledgeable to render professional services.

The character and integrity of a professional will depend on
his personal qualities. This will also be guided by the environment in which he
has taken his education and training as well as the environment in which he is
working. His position can be maintained and strengthened only if the regulating
professional body is able to guide and encourage its members to live upto the
high ethical and professional standards. The prestige and confidence enjoyed by
a professional, to a great extent, depends on the strictness and scrupulous
manner in which the professional code is implemented.

Bhagavad Geeta classifies castes (not communal) on the basis of different qualities and actions of a person. According to this classification a ‘Brahmana’, in whatever community the person is born, is one whose wisdom and knowledge is in his nature. Self-restraint, purity, uprightness and wisdom are the qualities of a ‘Brahmana’, It is for this reason that in the Indian Society all professionals, such as a CAs, lawyers, doctors, etc. are considered as Brahmanas. A C.A. professional does not own a business or industry but he does act as advisor of a businessman because of his study and knowledge. For this purpose, he has to keep himself updated in his knowledge as he is in constant touch with his client during his audit, tax and other assignment year after year. In other words, he has to be a student throughout his life.

Fundamental principles:

Our Institute has identified the following fundamental principles by which any professional should be governed in the conduct of his professional relations with others.

i) Integrity:

A professional should be straightforward, honest and sincere in rendering professional services.

ii) Objectivity:

A professional should be fair and should not allow prejudice or bias, conflict of interest or influence of others to override objectivity.

iii) Independence:

When in public practice, a professional should both be and appear to be independent. Integrity and independence are the most essential characteristics of any professional. Independence implies that the judgement of a person is not subordinate to the wishes or directions of another person who might have engaged him or to his own self interest.

iv) Confidentiality:

Information acquired in the course of his professional work has to be treated as most confidential. This should not be disclosed to anyone without specific authority of the client or unless it is required to be disclosed for compliance with legal or professional requirements.

v) Technical standards:

He must discharge his duties in accordance with the technical and professional standards relevant to the work assigned to him.

    vi) Professional  competence:

He must maintain high level of competence throughout his professional career. He should un-dertake only such work which he or his firm is competent to handle and complete within the given time frame.

vii) Ethical behaviour:

A professional should conduct himself in a manner consistent with the good reputation of the profession and refrain from any conduct which might bring discredit to the profession.

A professional who keeps the above seven principles before him and adopts them in his day-to-day practice can achieve great success in his professional practice. One may say it is difficult to adopt all these principles in the present day environment. However, if a professional wants to have peace of mind and get inner satisfaction of having served the society and the profession, he will have no option but to follow the path identified by the above principles.

Conduct in other fields:

Our Institute strives to maintain discipline amongst our members not only on matters relating to their professional conduct but also in relation to their conduct in other fields. It is for this reason that the Institute is given power to take disciplinary action against a member if he is found guilty of ‘Other Misconduct’. This is a very wide term. The Institute has, however, taken the view that a member of the profession is expected to maintain the highest standards of integrity in his personal conduct and any deviation from this high standard, even in personal affairs, would expose him to a disciplinary action.

A professional may be holding an office in a social or service organisation in his personal capacity. He may be a member, treasurer, secretary or chainman of such organisation. He may be an arbitrator, executor, liquidator or trustee in any trust, etc. in his personal capacity. In all such situations, his actions and decisions relating to financial, legal and other matters should be above board and he should not take any personal benefit in such capacity. This is because the society expects that a professional person will render service even in his personal capacity in the same manner as he renders his professional service.

When CA. Act was amended in 2006, Part IV was added in the First Schedule to provide that a CA., whether in practice or not, will be guilty of ‘Other Misconduct’ if he is held guilty by any Civil or Criminal Court of an offence which is punishable with imprisonment for a term not exceeding six months. It also provides that, if in the opinion of the Council, an action of any CA brings disrepute to the profession or the Institute, whether or not such action is related to his professional work, he will be held to be guilty of ‘other misconduct’.

Similarly, Part III has been added to the Second Schedule to provide that if a CA., whether in practice or not, is held guilty by any civil or criminal court for an offence which is punishable with imprisonment for a term exceeding six months, he shall be considered  as guilty of ‘Other Misconduct’.

Ethics in profession:

The word ‘Ethics’ is defined to mean ‘moral principles, quality of practice, a system of moral principles, the morals of individual action or practice’. Accordingly, his behaviour towards his professional brothers and sisters, his employees, articled assistants, clients, users of his service and general public should be governed by the above ethical principles. His personal conduct in a capacity other than his professional work should also be governed by these ethical principles.

The C.A. Act and Regulations provide for the Code of Ethics. Our Institute also publishes literature on the subject from time to time. As stated earlier, certain fundamental principles have been identified. Some of the Do’s and Don’ts about ethical behaviour of a c.A. professional are listed as under:

    i) Cannot engage in any business or occupation without the permission of the Council.

    ii) Cannot enter into partnership or share fees with a non-professional. Recently some relaxations are made about sharing of fees/partnership with other designated professionals such as Company Secretaries, Cost Accountants, Advocates, etc.

    iii) Cannot solicit professional work or advertise professional attainments, subject to certain exceptions.

    iv) Cannot charge fees based on percentage/ contingency.

v) Cannot allow a member who is not in practice or not his partner to sign financial statements or audit opinion on his behalf or on behalf of his firm.

    vi) Cannot disclose information acquired during the course of his professional or other engage-ment without the client’s permission.

    vii) Cannot express opinion on financial statements of an enterprise in which he or his relatives have substantial interest. This restriction also applies if his firm or a partner of the firm has substantial interest in the enterprise.

    viii) Performs professional duties without due diligence or is grossly negligent while performing his duties.

    ix) Cannot keep client’s money without opening separate bank account.

    x) Contravences any of the provision of the CA Act, Regulations and directions of the Council of ICAI.

Some quotations:

It may be useful to refer to two quotations of eminent personalities about how one should conduct oneself in life.

i) Oscar Wilde has said about Meanings as under:

Standing for what you believe in,
Regardless of the odds against you,
and the pressure that tears at your resistance,

… means  courage

Keeping a smile on your face,
when inside you feel like dying,
For the sake of supporting others,


… means    strength


Stopping  at nothing,
And  doing what’s  in your heart
You know is right,


… means    determination

Doing more than is expected,
To make another’s life a little more bearable,
Without uttering a single complaint,

… means compassion
 
Helping  a friend  in need,
No  matter the time or effort,
To the best of your ability,

… means    loyalty

Giving  more than you have,
And  expecting  nothing
But nothing  in return,

… means    selflessness

Holding  your head high
And  being the best you know you can be
When life seems to fall apart at your feet,
Facing each difficulty with  the confidence
That time will bring you better tomorrows
And  never giving  up,

… means    confidence.

ii) Late  Shri 1.R.D.  Tata  on Guiding  Principles:

  • Nothing worthwhile is ever achieved with-out deep thought and hard-work.

  • One must think for oneself and never accept at their face value slogans and catch phrases to which, unfortunately, our people are too easily susceptible.

  • One must forever strive for excellence or even perfection, in any task however small, and never be satisfied with the second best.

  • No success or achievement in material terms is worthwhile unless it serves the need or interests of the country and its people and is achieved by fair and honest means.

  • Good human relations not only bring great personal rewards but are essential to the success of any enterprise.

A true professional:

Late Shri Nani A. Palkhiwala has explained as to who can be called a True Professional, as under:

  •     First a man must have the courage of his convictions.
  •     He must  not be coward.
  •     He must honestly believe certain things and he must say publicity what he believes privately.
  •     Secondly he must have integrity

-Not only financial integrity

But

– Intellectual  integrity  also.

  •     He must have intellectual honesty which makes him say what he believes to be right.
  •     So, if a Chartered Accountant or a Lawyer has intellectual integrity, he will never give an opinion merely to suit the client.
  •     The professional man must have that ideal before him, when he advises his clients.
  •     Lastly, humility is just as important as courage and intellectual integrity.

    The higher the man goes in life the humbler he should-be.
 

In this context a Bhajan by Narsingh Mehta is most appropriate.

Vaishnav    Jan :

– Who is vaishnav – A person who is nearer to Lord Vishnu.

– He who knows  difficulties of others.

– He who will help the needy person but will not boast about the same.

– He who is humble to all and will never speak ill of others.

– He who is upright in his   

– Speech

– Hearing others

– Mind

– He who will always speak truth.

– He who will never touch monies belonging to others.

– He who is never greedy.

– He who is detached  and never  angry.

If a person can imbibe these qualifies of a true vaishnav he can be a ‘true professional’.

In this article an attempt has been made to explain what qualities a professional has to have in his life.

When a person wants to choose his career and take a decision whether to join a business or profession, he should be ready to make a sacrifice if he selects to join a profession. He will have to keep in mind that motto of a profession is ‘Pride of Service in preference to personal gain’. He has to place public good above his personal gain. He cannot mix profession with business as there will be conflict of interest. As stated earlier, a professional has to keep the fundamental principles enunciated by professional bodies uppermost in his mind while performing his duties. He has to follow these principles even in his personal actions not connected with his professional duties. In short, he has to act as a ‘Vaishnav’ to be a true professional. He has to draw up Balance Sheet of his life at periodical intervals and determine whether it gives a ‘true and fair view’ of his behaviour and actions.

Section 50C of the Income tax Act — a tool to tackle menace of black money

The Government has been rightly concerned about the component of black money in real estate transactions and consequent evasion of tax. With a view to curb the said menace and to tax the unaccounted money, the Government has time and again made amendments in the Income-tax Act (Act) by introducing different provisions to tackle the issue.

Under the Act of 1922 , we had the first proviso to Section 12B(2), which entitled the Assessing Officer to ignore the actual consideration received for the transfer and to substitute a notional or artificial consideration based on the fair market value of the asset on the date of transfer in such cases where the transfer was to a person directly or indirectly connected with the assessee and the Income-tax officer had reason to believe that the transfer was effected with the object of avoidance or reduction of the liability of the assessee to capital gains tax. With the enactment of the 1961 Act, the said provision found place in Section 52 of the said Act. It provided that only when both the conditions specified in the said Section were satisfied, viz. (1) the transfer was effected with the object of avoidance or reduction of the liability of the assessee under Section 45 and (2) the fair market value exceeded the amount of declared consideration by more than 15%, that the difference between the agreed consideration and market value could be subjected to tax. The scope of the said provision was thus restricted. The said provision was found unworkable as the Assessing Officers found it difficult to establish that the consideration had been understated with the object of avoidance or reduction of the capital gains tax liability. The vires of this Section was examined by the famous decision of the Apex Court in K. P. Varghese’s case 131 ITR 597 (SC) and the provisions were made virtually inapplicable.

Thereupon in the year 1982, Chapter XXA was inserted in the Act, providing for compulsory acquisition of immovable properties. As the provisions of the said Chapter too were not successful in arresting the proliferation of black money in the transfer of immovable properties, the said Chapter was replaced by a new Chapter XXC by the Finance Act, 1986. Under the provisions contained in the said Chapter XXC any person intending to transfer immovable property in specified areas at values exceeding specified amounts was required to file a statement in Form 37-I before the appropriate authority within the prescribed time before the intended date of transfer. The transfer could be effected, only if the appropriate authority did not pass an order of pre- emptive purchase of the property and a ‘No Objection Certificate’ was issued by the said authority. As compared to Chapter XXA, the said Chapter XXC did not provide for compulsory acquisition of immovable properties, but enabled the Central Government to purchase the property which had already been offered for sale. The said Chapter was found to be creating procedural delay in registration of transfers. The provisions of the said Chapter were read down by the Apex Court in C. B. Gautam’s case 199 ITR 530 (SC) and were finally abandoned with a view to remove the source of hardship to the taxpayers and instead Section 50C was introduced by the Finance Act, 2002.

The said Section provides that where the consideration received or accruing as a result of the transfer of land or building or both is less than the value adopted or assessed by any authority of a State Government for the purpose of payment of stamp duty in respect of such transfer, the value so adopted or assessed shall be deemed to be the full value of the consideration and capital gains shall be computed accordingly. The said provision has been enacted notwithstanding adverse observations that had been made by the various courts of law against the reliance on stamp duty valuations for the purpose of computation of capital gains. The Gujarat High Court in the case of New Kalindi Kamavati Co-op. Housing Society Ltd. vs. State of Gujarat & Ors. (2006)(2) Guj. L. R. Vol. XLVII(2) has observed that the valuation adopted by the Stamp authorities cannot be considered conclusive. The Court while observing that : Sole reliance was placed on ‘jantri’ by Dy. Collector for determination of market value for stamp duty held that ‘jantri’; i.e., market valuation record book maintained by the Stamp Valuation authorities reflects probable market value and the same was not a conclusive evidence.

The Allahabad High Court in the matter of Dinesh Kumar Mittal vs. ITO & Ors., 193 ITR 770 (All) has observed : We are of the opinion that we cannot recognise any rule of law to the effect that the value determined for the purpose of stamp duty is the actual consideration passing between the parties to a sale. The actual consideration may be more or may be less. What is the actual consideration that passed between the parties is a question of fact to be determined in each case having regard to the fact and circumstances of the case.

The Madras High Court in the case of Hindustan Motors Ltd. vs. Members, Appropriate Authority, (2001) 249 ITR 424 (Mad.) while dealing with the provisions of Chapter XX-C of the Income-tax Act has observed : Guideline values are fixed by registering authorities for purposes of collection of stamp duty and therefore, those guidelines can have no application for determining market value under Chapter XX-C . . . . Valuation depends on the location of property, the purpose for which the property is used, the nature of the property, and the time when the agreement is entered into and similar other objective factors. The valuation therefore has to be done by a method, which is more objective and can furnish reliable data to arrive at a just conclusion. The market rates notified by the Sub Registrar for the purpose of registration cannot be proper guide for valuation in respect of pre-emptive purchase.

The constitutional validity of the provisions of Section 50C was challenged before the Madras High Court in the case of K. R. Palanisamy vs. UOI, 306 ITR 61 (Mad). The provisions of the Section were attacked on the following grounds :

(i) lack of legislative competence — It was urged that while under Entry 82 List I of Schedule VII of the Constitution of India, tax could be levied on income other than agricultural income, Section 50C seeks to charge tax on artificial or deemed income, which is neither received nor is accrued;

ii) provisions of Section SOC are arbitrary in nature due to adoption of guideline values and thus being violative of Article 14 of the Constitution – It was urged that the provisions contained in the said Section fail to take cognizance of genuine cases, where actual sale consideration passing between the parties for various valid reasons could be lower than the guideline values, which it was further urged are normally fixed for survey numbers or particular area and it fails to take into account that within the particular area the value of the property may differ widely depending upon various locational advantages and disadvantages;

iii) the provisions of the Section are discretionary inasmuch as it covers only the transfer of the property in the nature of ‘capital asset’ leaving out of its ambit the transfer of land and building held as trading asset/stock-in-trade, as there is no deeming provision that could apply to the determination of income under the head ‘profits and gains of business or profession’;

iv) the provisions being beyond the legislative competence and violative of Articles 14 and 265 of the Constitution should be read down.

The Court while upholding constitutional validity of the provisions of Section SOCobserved that these provisions are directed only to check and prevent the evasion of tax by undervaluing the consideration of the transfer of capital assets and held that when there is a factual avoidance of tax in terms of law, the Legislature is justified in enacting the impugned provisions and it is not hit by the legislative incompetence of the Central Legislature. The Court while referring to the provisions contained in Section 47A of the Indian Stamp Act, 1989, pointed out that every safeguard has been provided allowing the aggrieved assessees to establish before the authorities the real value for which the capital asset has been transferred. The Collector is empowered to determine the market value of the property after giving an opportunity of being heard. The Court further ruled that sub-sections 2 and 3 of Section SOC further provide safeguard to the assessees in the sense that if the assessee claims before the Assessing Officer that the value adopted by the stamp duty authorities exceeds the fair market value and the value adopted by the stamp duty authorities has not been disputed in any appeal or revision before any authority, the Assessing Officer may refer the valuation of the capital asset to the Department Valuation Officer and if the value determined by the DVO be more than the value adopted by the stamp duty authority, the AO shall adopt the market value as determined by the stamp duty authorities. The Court thus held that the contention that Section 50C is arbitrary and violative of Article 14 cannot be accepted. In the context of the contention that the impugned provision is discriminatory, the Court while relying on a number of juridical pronouncements of the Apex Court ruled that: There exists intelligible differentia between the categories of assets, which had a rational nexus with the object of plugging the leakage of tax on income from the capital asset by undervaluation of the document. Thus holding that ‘differentiation is not always discriminatory’ it held that the contention that the impugned provision is discriminatory cannot be accepted. As regards the last contention, the Court ruled that in view of sufficient opportunity being available to the assessees under the Stamp Act to dislodge the value adopted by the stamp authorities the provision is not hit by legislative incompetence.

In the context of the safeguard available to the assessees under sub-Section (2) of Section 50C for reference being made to D.V.O. for determining the value of the property, it may, with due respect to the Hon’ble High Court, be pointed out that the word ‘may’ occurring in the said sub-Section suggests that the option in this regard is vested in the Assessing Officer, who may choose to refer the valuation to DVO or not.

The said question came up for consideration before the Jodhpur Bench of the Income-tax Appellate Tribunal in the case of Meghraj Baid vs. ITO, (2008) 4 DTR 509. The Tribunal in that case took the view that in case the AO did not agree with the explanation of the assessee with regard to lower consideration disclosed by him, then the Assessing Officer should refer the matter to DVO for determination of the fair market value. The Tribunal observed that if the provision was read to mean that if the AO was not satisfied with the explanation of the assessee, then he has a discretion to not send the matter to DVO, the provision would then be rendered redundant. Since the Courts of law, as discussed hereinabove have observed that the value determined for the purpose of stamp duty is not conclusive evidence of the actual consideration passing between the parties to a sale, the principles of natural justice demand that in all such cases, where there is a difference between the agreed consideration and the value assessed for the purpose of stamp duty, the AO should refer the matter to DVO for determination of fair market value for the purpose of computing capital gains, instead of placing sole reliance on the value determined for stamp duty in all cases where the assessee has computed capital gains on the basis of agreement value.

The Income-tax Appellate Tribunal in the case of Navneet Kumar Thakkar vs. ITO, (2007) 112 TIJ 76 (Jd) held that unless the property transferred has become the subject matter of registration and for that purpose has been assessed by the stamp duty authorities at a value higher than the amount of agreed consideration, the provisions of Section 50C cannot come into operation. This decision seems to provide for a release from the stringent clutches of S.50c. It is seen that quite often than not the parties do not register the sale deeds. In such cases, the onus would be upon the revenue to establish that the sale consideration declared by the assessee was understated and in such event as observed by the Tribunal, the ratio of the decisions of the Apex Court in the matter of K. P. Varghese vs. ITO, 131 ITR 597 and CIT vs. Shivakarni Co. Pvt. Ltd. (1986) 159 ITR 71 would be applicable. The Supreme Court in the case of Varghese was concerned with the provisions of Section 52(2) of the Act, which was in force at the relevant time and had remained on the statute till 31.3.1987. The said Section provided that where in the opinion of the Assessing Officer the fair market value (FMV) of the capital asset on the date of its transfer exceeded the sale consideration by not less than 15 per cent, the Assessing Officer with the previous approval of the Inspecting Asst. Commissioner can adopt FMV as the full consideration received by the assessee. It was held by the Apex Court that Section 52(2) can be invoked only where the consideration for the transfer has been understated by the assessee or in other words, the consideration actually received by the assessee is more than what is declared or disclosed by him and the burden of proving such an understatement is on the Revenue. It was also observed that the said Section has no application in the case of an honest and bona fide transaction, where the consideration in respect of transfer has been correctly declared or disclosed by the assessee even if the condition of 15 per cent difference between the FMV of the capital asset as on the date of transfer exceeds full value of the consideration declared by the assessee. If, therefore, the Revenue seeks to bring a case within sub-Section (1), it must show not only that the fair market value of the capital asset as on the date of transfer exceeds the full value of the consideration declared by the assessee by not less 15 per cent of the value so declared but also that the consideration has been understated and the assessee has actually received more than what is declared by him. These are two conditions which have to be satisfied before sub-Section (2) can be invoked by the Revenue and the burden of showing that these two conditions are satisfied rests upon the Revenue.

It may further be pointed out that Section 50C targets the vendor or transferor of the property and not the purchaser or transferee. It is an accepted position in law that the legal fiction cannot be extended beyond the purpose for which it is enacted. Section sac embodies the legal fiction by which the value assessed by the stamp duty authorities is considered as the full value of consideration for the property transferred. It cannot thus be extended to rope in the purchasers on the ground of undisclosed investment. It may nonetheless be pointed out that in the case of Dinesh Kumar Mittal vs. ITa and Ors., (1992) 193 ITR 770 (All) the Income-tax officer in the course of proceedings relating to AY 1984-85 had invoked the provisions of Section 69 of the Act in the hands of purchaser by holding that the purchase consideration declared was less than the value determined for the purpose of stamp duty and had made an addition of 50 per cent of the difference in his hands. The said addition was upheld by AAC and the revision petition moved by the assessee was rejected by the CIT. The Allahabad High Court while holding that there was no rule of law to the effect that the value determined for the purpose of stamp duty was the actual consideration passing between the parties to a sale had eventually quashed all the three orders and had remanded the matter to the ITO for determination of actual consideration, which was paid by the assessee.

Section 69 does not embody the legal fiction by which the value assessed by stamp authorities could be considered to be the actual consideration paid by the purchaser of the property. In fact in Section 69 the word ‘may’ has been deliberately used. It may be recalled that when the Bill was introduced for insertion of S.69, in the Parliament the draft provision required that the value of investment ‘shall’ be deemed to be the income of the assessee for such financial year. However at the suggestion of the Select Committee of the Parliament, the word ‘may’ was substituted for the word ‘shall’ and has been finally adopted in the Act. It indicates that there is no presumption that unexplained investment must necessarily be added to the assessee’s income. It vests substantial amount of discretion unto the Income-tax authorities. The Courts have ruled that even ‘the unsatisfactoriness of the explanation need and did not automatically result in deeming the value of investment to be the income of the assesee’. That is still a matter within the discretion of the officer and therefore of the Tribunal as has been held in [(1980) 123 ITR 3 (Ker) and, (1995) 216 ITR 301 (AP)]. Thus it may be concluded that the scope of Section sac is limited to the extent that it cannot be utilised as a tool for additions in the hands of a purchaser.

PAN Or PAIN : An Analysis of S. 206AA(1)

Article

The Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009 has introduced S. 206AA in the
Income-tax Act, 1961 (Act in short). This Section employs provisions relating to
collection and recovery of tax to enforce certain requirements in relation to
permanent account number (PAN in short). This Section has come into force with
effect from 1-4-2010. Among the several sub-sections of this provision, it is S.
206AA(1) which has wide ranging impact on the working of tax collection
mechanism in India. In this article we examine the scope and applicability of S.
206AA(1).


S. 206AA :

S. 206AA(1) requires any person (deductee in short),
receiving any sum, income or amount which is liable to tax deduction at source (TDS
in short), to furnish his PAN to the person responsible to deduct tax at source
(deductor in short). In case the deductee fails to furnish his PAN, the deductor
is liable to deduct tax on the sum, income or amount (income in short) payable
to the deductee, at a rate which is higher of (1) the rate specified in the Act;
(2) the rate or rates in force or (3) 20%. S. 206AA(1) provides as under :

“(1) Notwithstanding anything contained in any other
provisions of this Act, any person entitled to receive any sum or income or
amount, on which tax is deductible under Chapter XVIIB (hereafter referred to
as deductee) shall furnish his Permanent Account Number to the person
responsible for deducting such tax (hereafter referred to as deductor),
failing which tax shall be deducted at the higher of the following rates,
namely :


(i) at the rate specified in the relevant provision of
this Act; or

(ii) at the rate or rates in force; or

(iii) at the rate of 20%.”



S. 206AA(1) will be attracted only if the following
ingredients thereof are fulfilled :

(a) The deductee in question should be entitled to receive
any sum, income or amount;

(b) Tax should be deductible at source from such income
under Chapter XVIIB;

(c) The deductee should be liable to furnish his PAN to
person responsible to deduct tax at source on such income.

(d) The deductee should have failed to furnish his PAN to
the person responsible to deduct tax at source.





The implication of these conditions is as under :

(a) Entitled to receive any sum, income or amount :


The first requirement is that the deductee should be entitled
to receive any income. S. 206AA(1) employs the words ‘entitled to receive’. The
term ‘entitle’ is defined in the case of Jopp v. Wood, (1865) 46 ER 400
(cited from Advanced Law Lexicon, P. Ramanatha Aiyer, 3rd Edition, 2005, page
1611) as ‘to give a claim, right, or title to; to give a right to demand or
receive, to furnish with grounds for claiming.’.

This indicates that a prior right to receive the income
should exist before S. 206AA(1) is attracted. In the absence of any prior right
to receive the income, whether contractually or statutorily, S. 206AA(1) is not
triggered. For example, gift of money or property, would not attract S.
206AA(1), even though if falls within the definition of term ‘income’ under S.
2(24) and is subject to provisions of Chapter XVIIB.

(b) Tax should be deductible at source under Chapter XVIIB :


S. 206AA(1) applies only when the tax is deductible at source
under Chapter XVIIB on the income under consideration. Use of the word
‘deductible’ indicates that there should be a statutory obligation to deduct tax
at source. In other words, where tax is deducted at source by abundant caution
or by mistake, though not required by Chapter XVIIB, S. 206AA(1) would not
apply.

Further, such obligation to deduct tax at source should exist
after 1-4-2010. S. 206AA(1) would not apply to a case where a person is entitled
to receive any income, on which tax has already been deducted prior to 1-4-2010.
This is for the reasons that no tax would be again deductible on the said sum
after 1-4-2010.

Obligation to deduct tax at source under Chapter XVIIB is
attracted only if there is any income which is chargeable to tax in the hands of
the deductee u/s.4(1). Without the charging provision u/s.4(1) getting
attracted, the machinery provision for collection of taxes due thereon would not
apply. This is by virtue of S. 4(2) which is the enabling provision for
collection of tax. S. 4(2) enables collection of taxes by various methods
including by deduction of tax at source only in respect of income chargeable
u/s.4(1). S. 4(2) provides as under :

“(2) In respect of income chargeable U/ss.(1), income-tax
shall be deducted at the source or paid in advance, where it is so deductible
or payable under any provision of this Act.”

The provisions of Chapter XVIIB deal with collection and
recovery of tax by way deduction at source. These provisions draw their support
from S. 4(2), which is the enabling provision. S. 206AA being part of Chapter
XVIIB is attracted only when the deductee is entitled to receive any income
which is chargeable to tax u/s.4(1).

Tax will not be deductible merely because S. 4(1) is
satisfied. There should be a specific provision in Chapter XVIIB for deduction
of tax at source on the income received by the deductee. There are several
incomes which are not subject to TDS provisions. In case the deductee is
entitled to receive such incomes, S. 206AA(1) would not be attracted.

(c)
Obligation to
furnish PAN :



In case the first two requirements stated above are
satisfied, S. 206AA(1) requires the deductee to furnish his PAN to the person
responsible to deduct tax at source. Once the assessee has PAN, he becomes
obligated to furnish it to the person responsible to deduct the same. This
aspect of the matter is discussed in detail later.


(d) Failure to furnish PAN :


The fourth condition is that there should be a failure to furnish PAN once an obligation to furnish PAN gets attached. S. 206AA(1) employs the words ‘failing which’. The word ‘failing’ stems from the word ‘fail’. Word ‘fail’ means ‘to leave something unperformed though required to be performed’. It also means ‘to fall short in attainment or performance or in what is expected’. Thus the term ‘failing’ pre-supposes a requirement to perform.

Another form of the same word, namely, ‘failed’ had been the subject of the discussion in Ahmed Abdul Quader v. Raffat, AIR 1978 AP 417. Dealing with the expression ‘failed to provide’, the AP High Court held that the “words ‘failed to provide’ do imply a duty to provide. If there is no such duty to provide, it cannot be said that the husband had failed to provide maintenance to his wife.”

The word ‘failure’ is also defined on similar lines. The difference between ‘failure’ and ‘omission’ has been the subject matter of discussion in Pannalal Nandlal Bhandari v. CIT, (1956) 30 ITR 139 (Bom.), where the Bombay High Court held that the word ‘failure’ pre-supposes an obligation to do the thing in which there is a failure. The Court held:

“The Legislature has advisedly used two expres-sions ‘omission’ and ‘failure’ on the part of the assessee. Failure must connote that there is an obligation which has not been carried out and if there was no obligation upon the assessee to make a return, then it would not be a failure on his part to carry out that obligation. But the Legislature has also used the expression ‘omission’, and it is clear that the expression ‘omission’ does not connote any obligation as the expression ‘failure’ does.”

This observation of the Bombay High Court has been followed by the AP High Court in Mullapudi Venkatarayudu v. UOI, (1975) 99 ITR 448 (AP). Similarly in Royal Calcutta Turf Club v. WTO, (1984) 148 ITR 790 (Cal.), in a matter rendered under the Wealth-tax Act, the Calcutta High Court observed:

“The word ‘failure’ means non-fulfilment of an obligation imposed on the assessee by law or by statute. In the case of absence of obligation of the assessee, such non-filing would be an act of omission and as ‘omission’ is mentioned as an element, the result would be, whenever there is an absence of a return or an absence of disclosure, it would be unnecessary to enquire whether or not an obligation lay on the assessee to file a return or to make a disclosure.”

The word ‘failing’ is therefore to be read as non-fulfilment of a pre-existing obligation. In case no obligation exists, there can be no ‘failing’. It follows that S. 206AA(1) would come into operation only in case an obligation exists requiring the deductee to furnish PAN to the deductor. Where no obligation exists to furnish PAN, there can be no failure u/s.206AA(1). Consequently the question of deducting tax at source at higher of the tax rates mentioned therein would not arise.

Further, S. 206AA(1) applies when an obligation requiring furnishing of PAN to the person responsible to deduct tax at source exists. If such an obligation exists, furnishing PAN to a person other than the person responsible to deduct tax at source or furnishing of an incorrect PAN, whether intentionally or accidentally, would also amount to a ‘failure’ u/s.206AA(1).

Conclusion:

The four conditions stated above are cumulative in nature. It is only when all four conditions stated above are satisfied, that tax can be deducted by the person responsible to deduct at the higher of the three rates mentioned in S. 206AA(1).

Obligation to furnish PAN:

The obligation to furnish PAN pre-supposes that the deductee already possesses a PAN. In case the deductee possesses a PAN, he is bound to furnish it to the deductor. However it is possible that the deductee may not possess a PAN. Under such circumstances several important questions arise.

Question No. 1:

The primary question that arises is whether S. 206AA(1) imposes an obligation on a person to obtain PAN, if he does not possess one. This question requires an answer in the negative. S. 206AA(1) does not impose any obligation to obtain PAN. This is for the following reasons:

    S. 206AA is a part of Chapter XVIIB dealing with deduction of tax at source. No part of S. 206AA or Chapter XVIIB specifically imposes any obli-gation to obtain PAN. Therefore, no such new obligation can be read into S. 206AA(1).

    It is contrary to all rules of construction to read words into an Act unless it is absolutely necessary to do so. One may refer to decisions in Renula Bose v. Rai Manmathnath Bose, AIR 1945 PC 108; Director General, Telecommunication v. T N. Peethambaran, (1986) 4 SCC 348 and Assessing Officer v. East India Cotton Manufacturing Co. Ltd.; AIR 1981 SC 1610 in support of this principle. S. 206AA(1) employs the words ‘shall furnish’ and not ‘shall obtain and furnish’. The words ‘obtain and’ cannot be read into S. 206AA(1). No necessity exits in the context to do so.

    It is S. 139A, contained in Chapter XIV (Proce-dure for Assessment) which deals with rules for obtaining of PAN. Further, in S. 139A only Ss.(1), Ss.(1A) and Ss.(1B) mandate certain persons to obtain PAN.

U/s.139A(1), persons who meet certain income or turnover criteria and persons who are required to file S. 139(4A) returns or FBT returns are required to obtain PAN. S. 139A(1) provides as under:

“(1) Every person:

    i) if his total income or the total income of any other person in respect of which he is assess-able under this Act during any previous year exceeded the maximum amount which is not chargeable to income-tax; or

    ii) carrying on any business or profession whose total sales, turnover or gross receipts are or is likely to exceed five lakh rupees in any previous year; or

    iii) who is required to furnish a return of income U/ss.(4A) of S. 139; or
    iv) being an employer, who is required to furnish a return of fringe benefits u/s.115WD,
and who has not been allotted a permanent account number shall, within such time, as may be prescribed, apply to the Assessing Officer for the allotment of a permanent account number.”

U/ss.(1A) the Central Government is empowered to notify certain categories of persons who are required under any fiscal law to pay tax or duties including exporters and importers to obtain PAN. In exercise of its powers u/s.206AA(1A), the Central Government has notified certain persons vide Notification No. 11468, dated 29-8-2000 and Notification No. 355/2001, dated 12-12-2001. S. 139A(1A) provides as under:

“(1A)    Notwithstanding anything contained in Ss.(1), the Central Government may, by Notification in the Official Gazette, specify, any class or classes of persons by whom tax is payable under this Act or any tax or duty is payable under any other law for the time being in force including importers and exporters whether any tax is payable by them or not and such persons shall, within such time as mentioned in that Notification, apply to the Assessing Officer for the allotment of a permanent account number.”

U/s.139A(1B), the Central Government is empowered to notify certain categories of person and require them to obtain PAN to facilitate collection of information relevant and useful for the purposes of the Act. S. 139A(1B) provides as under?:

“(1B)    Notwithstanding anything contained in Ss.(1), the Central Government may, for the purpose of collecting any information which may be useful for or relevant to the purposes of this Act, by Notification in the Official Gazette, specify, any class or classes of persons who shall apply to the Assessing Officer for the allotment of the permanent account number and such persons shall, within such time as mentioned in that Notification, apply to the Assessing Officer for the allotment of a permanent account number.

Apart from the above three provisions, u/s. 139A(2), the Assessing Officer is required to al-lot PAN to assessees having regard to certain transactions undertaken by them, whether or not such transactions have any tax implications. S. 139A(2) provides as under:

The Assessing Officer, having regard to the nature of the transactions as may be pre-scribed, may also allot a permanent account number, to any other person (whether any tax is payable by him or not), in the manner and in accordance with the procedure as may be prescribed.”

In other words, there are certain categories of per-son who are mandatorily required to obtain or have a PAN, by virtue of sub-sections mentioned above. As far as assessees not covered by these sub-sections are concerned, there is no obligation to obtain or have PAN. They can at their option apply for PAN u/s.139A(3), which provides as under:

“(3)    Any person, not falling U/ss.(1) or U/ss.(2), may apply to the Assessing Officer for the allotment of a permanent account number and, thereupon, the Assessing Officer shall allot a permanent account number to such person forthwith.”

Therefore it is clear that S. 139A is a specific provision, covering all cases where obtaining or allotting of PAN is compulsory. In the presence of a specific provision in the form of S. 139A requiring persons to obtain PAN, S. 206AA(1) cannot be read as creating parallel regime requiring certain other persons to obtain PAN.

    S. 206AA(1) cannot be interpreted in isolation just by reference to the language employed therein. It has to be interpreted in the context in which it is created, keeping the entire statute in mind. The principle that a statute must be read as a whole and in its context is upheld by the Supreme Court in State of West Bengal v. UOI, AIR 1963 SC 1241, where it observed:

“The Courts must ascertain the intention of the Legislature by directing its attention not merely to the clauses to be constructed but to the entire statute; it must compare the clauses with the other parts of the law, and the setting in which the clause to be interpreted occurs.”

The Supreme Court in Gurudevdatta VKSSS Maryadit v. State of Maharashtra, AIR 2001 SC 1980, quoted the following observations of Australian Court in CIC Insurance Ltd. v. Bankstown Football Club Ltd., (1997) 187 CLR 384 with approval.

“the modern approach to statutory interpretation (a) insists that the context be considered in the first instance, and not merely at some later stage when ambiguity might be thought to arise, and (b) uses context in its widest sense to include such things as the existing state of law and the mischief which, by legitimate means — one may discern the statute was intended to remedy.”

Similar decisions have been rendered by the Supreme Court in R. S. Raghunath v. State of Karnataka, AIR 1992 SC 81 and Union of India v. Elphinstone Spinning and Weaving Co. Ltd., AIR 2001 SC 724 (Constitutional Bench). In these decisions the Court has defined the ‘context’ to include the statute as a whole, previous state of law, other statutes in pari materia, general scope of the statute and the mischief that the statute intends to remedy.

The purpose behind introducing S. 206AA(1) has been stated in the Memorandum explaining the provision of the Finance (No. 2) Bill, 2009 as under:

“d. Improving compliance with provisions of quoting PAN through the TDS regime.

Statutory provisions mandating quoting of Permanent Account Number (PAN) of deductees in Tax Deduction at Source (TDS) statements exist since 2001 duly backed by penal provisions. The process of allotment of PAN has been streamlined so that over 75 lakh PANs are being allotted every year. Publicity campaigns for quoting PAN are being run since the last three years. The average time of allotment of PAN has come down to 10 calendar days. Therefore, non-availability of PAN has ceased to be an impediment. In a number of cases, the non-quoting of PAN’s by deductees is creating problems in the processing of return of income and in granting credit for tax deducted at source, leading to delays in issue of refunds.

In order to strengthen the PAN mechanism, it is proposed to make amendments in the Income-tax Act to provide that any person whose receipts are subject to deduction of tax at source i.e., the deductee, shall mandatorily furnish his PAN to the deductor, failing which the deductor shall deduct tax at source at higher of the following rates

     i) the rate prescribed in the Act;

     ii) at the rate in force, i.e., the rate mentioned in the Finance Act; or at the rate of 20%.”

The object of S. 206AA(1) is to (a) ensure compliance with the PAN mechanism; (b) address problems associated with non-quoting (and not non-obtaining) of PAN, like processing of returns, claiming credit for TDS and granting of refund; and (c) ensure that assessee do not give reason like non-issuance of PAN as a reason for not furnishing it, keeping in mind that the PAN allotment machinery has been fully strengthened and streamlined.

The mischief sought to be remedied by S. 206AA(1) has been stated in the memorandum extracted above. The position that existed in the past was that the system for allotment of PAN had not been fully streamlined for a long time since its inception. This was one of the main excuses for non-compliance with PAN mechanism. This position ceased to exist. Now that the system for allotment of PAN had been streamlined, the law-makers have thought it fit not to accept non -quoting of PAN on the reason that the same had not been allotted. The existing law [as it stood before the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009 becoming operative] was not sufficient to enforce furnishing of PAN by those who were required to do so. Hence S. 206AA(1) has been inserted.

As stated above, S. 206AA(1) has to be read along with other provisions of the Act. Since S. 139A deals with the PAN mechanism, S. 206AA(1) has be read in conjunction with S. 139A. Consequently, purpose of S. 206AA(1) would be require persons already possessing PAN or required to obtain PAN u/s.139A to furnish the same, if they are subject to TDS. S. 206AA(1) does not create any obligation to obtain PAN independent of S. 139A.

It should also be noted that obligation of the deductee to furnish PAN to the deductor, once tax is deductible under Chapter XVIIB, already exists u/s.139A(5A) (extracted and discussed in detail below). Therefore the obligation imposed by S. 206AA(1) is not new. The scope of S. 206AA(1) as seen from the Memorandum to the Finance (No. 2 Act), 2009, is only to ensure better compliance of existing PAN mechanism. Therefore, S. 206AA(1) only has the effect of introducing an additional punitive measure for enforcing deductees to furnish/quote their PAN once TDS provisions are attracted.

In case the object of the law was to ensure every deductee liable to TDS obtains a PAN and furnishes them, provisions of S. 139A would have been amended suitably making all deductees obli-gated to obtain PAN. Since the intention was only to add an additional measure to ensure compliance with S. 139A, S. 206AA(1) has been added as a part of the TDS provisions, while S. 139A(1) has been left un-amended.

Question No. 2:

The next important question that arises is as to whether S. 206AA(1) will apply in cases where obtaining PAN is not mandatory. There are several arguments both for and against such a conclusion. The following arguments support the contention that S. 206AA(1) will apply to cases where obtaining PAN is not mandatory.

    S. 206AA(1) overrides S. 139A. This is for the reason that S. 206AA(1) starts with the words ‘Notwithstanding anything contained in any other provision of this Act’. The effect of use of such non-obstante clause is that the provisions covered by such clause, namely, ‘any other provisions of this Act’ will be overridden by provision in which the non-obstante clause is placed, namely, S. 206AA(1).

In South India Corporation (P) Ltd. v. Secy., Board of Revenue, Trivandrum, AIR 1964 SC 207; Chandravarkar Sita Ratna Rao v. Ashalata S. Guram, (1986) 4 SCC 447; P. E. K. Kalliani Amma v. K Devi, AIR 1996 SC 1963, etc., the Supreme Court observed that the presence of a non-obstante clause is equivalent to saying that in spite of the provision or Act mentioned in the non-obstante clause [the words ‘any other provisions of this Act’ in S. 206AA(1)] the enactment following it [the words ‘any person entitled to rate of 20%’ in S. 206AA(1)] will have its full operation or that the provisions embraced in the non-obstante clause will not be an impediment for the operation of the enactment.

It follows that S. 206AA(1) will have full effect in spite of other provisions of the Act. Furnishing the PAN becomes mandatory to avoid higher rate of deduction of tax at source, whether or not S. 139A or any other provision of the Act mandates that a person obtain his PAN.

    In case of conflict between the two statutes, it is generally the later law which will override the earlier law. This principle has been applied by the Supreme Court in K. M. Nanavati v. State of Bombay, AIR 1961 SC 112. While S. 206AA(1) mandates PAN to be furnished in all cases where there is a duty to deduct tax under Chapter XVIIB, S. 139A dealing with PAN does not mandate obtaining of PAN. There is an apparent conflict between S. 206AA(1) and 139A. In such circumstances, S. 206AA(1) being a subsequent legislation will override S. 139A.

    When the language of a statute is plain and clear, effect must be given to it irrespective of its consequences. This is one of cardinal principles of interpretation. The Supreme Court in Nelson Motis v. Union of India, AIR 1992 SC 1981 and Gurdevdatt VKSSS Maryadit v. State of Maharashtra, (supra) has upheld this principle. Language of S. 206AA(1) is plain and clear. There is no ambiguity in the language of S. 206AA(1). Hence it has to be given effect to irrespective of the consequences that ensue.

    By virtue of S. 206AA(2) to S. 206AA(4), persons are required to furnish/quote their PAN in applications u/s.197 or declarations in Forms 15G and 15H u/s.197A, for such applications or declarations to be valid. Persons who do not have any tax liability are eligible to give declaration u/s.197A to avoid any deduction of tax at source. Though S. 139A does not require such persons to obtain PAN, such persons are required to furnish PAN for taking benefit u/s.197 and u/s.197A. Thus obligations u/s.206AA are independent of obligations u/s.139A. Once obligation to furnish PAN arises u/s.206AA(1), it would, as a natural consequence require the deductee to obtain PAN if he does not have one.

The following arguments support the view that S. 206AA(1) will not apply in cases where there is no requirement to obtain PAN u/s.139A.

    It is not possible to decide whether a provision is plain or ambiguous unless it is studied in its context. Decisions in D. Saibaba v. Bar Council of India, AIR 2003 SC 123; Ibrahimpatnam Taluk Vyavasaya Coolie Sangham v. K. Suresh Reddy, (2003) 7 SCC 662 and UOI v. Sankalchand, AIR 1977 SC 2328 are in support of this principle. In case of S. 206AA(1), the object as gathered from the memorandum to the Finance (No.) Bill, 2009, is to ensure compliance with PAN mechanism and not to create additional situations where obtaining PAN is mandatory. A bare reading of the language of S. 206AA(1) indicates that it does not create an obligation to obtain PAN where none exists. Hence the language of S. 206AA(1) cannot be treated as plain and clear. The language therein is subject to construction.

    It has been upheld in various cases that even a non-obstante clause has to be applied based on the scope and objects of two or more provisions involved. This is more so when the non-obstante clause does not refer to any particular provision which it intends to override, but refers to the provisions of the statute generally. The decision of the Supreme Court in A. G. Varadarajulu v. State of Tamil Nadu, AIR 1998 SC 1388 is in support of restricting the operation of a non-obstante clause when it is worded generally and broadly.

In the present case, the words used in S. 206AA(1) are ‘Notwithstanding anything contained in any other provision of this Act’, which is very general in nature. Under such circumstances, the scope and object of the two provisions should be considered. While S. 139A deals with cases where obtaining and quoting of PAN is mandatory, 206AA(1)(1) deals with consequences of non-furnishing of PAN by a deductee. The two operate in different fields and hence, S. 206AA(1) cannot be said to over S. 139A. It cannot warrant a person not required to have PAN to furnish it, and in case the same is not furnished, it cannot prescribe higher rate of deduction of tax at source.

    While interpreting provisions, it is the duty of the Court to ensure that a ‘head-on’ clash between two provisions is avoided. It is the duty of the Courts to ensure, whenever it is possible to do so, to construe provisions which appear to conflict, so that they harmonise. The Supreme Court in University of Allahabad v. Amritchand Tripathi, AIR 1987 SC 57 and Venkataramana Devaru v. State of Mysore, AIR 1958 SC 255 have upheld this principle of harmonious interpretation. In case S. 206AA(1) is interpreted to operate only in cases where there is an obligation to obtain PAN or quote PAN, then both the provisions would operate without any clash. Effect could be given to both the provisions.

If so, this interpretation is to be adopted. Literal interpretation of any provision should not be adopted if it causes inconvenience, absurdity, hardship or injustice. The Supreme Court in Tirath Singh v. Bachittar Singh, AIR 1955 SC 830; K. P. Varghese ITO, AIR 1981 SC 1922; CIT v. J. H. Gotla Yadgier, AIR 1985 1698 and CWS India Ltd. v. CIT, JT 1994 (3) SC 116 approved the following observation in Maxwell Interpretation of Statutes, 11th Edition:

“Where the language of a statute, in its ordinary meaning and grammatical construction, leads to a manifest contradiction of the apparent purpose of the enactment, or to some inconvenience or absurdity, hardship or injustice, presumably not intended, a construction may be put upon it which modifies the meaning of the words, and even the structure of the sentence”.

In the present case, an assessee would have to face higher deduction of tax at source for the only reason that he does not have a PAN. On a literal reading, S. 206AA(1) does not discriminate between cases (a) where obtaining PAN is mandatory; (b) where obtaining PAN is voluntary, and (c) where obtaining PAN is exempt. In case of an assessee who falls under the categories (b) or (c), forcing the assessees to furnish PAN would lead not just to inconvenience or hardship but also to injustice and absurdity. Such a literal interpretation should be avoided and the application of S. 206AA(1) should be restricted only to the first category of cases.

 Any interpretation that renders a provision futile is to be avoided. Courts strongly lean against a construction which reduces the statute to a futility. One may refer to the decisions of the Supreme Court in M. Pentaiah v. Veera Mallappa Muddala, AIR 1961 SC 1107 and Tinsukhia Electric Supply Co. Ltd. v. State of Assam, AIR 1990 SC 123 in support of this proposition. This proposition is based on the Latin maxim ‘ut res magis valeat quam pereat’. This maxim has been upheld by the Supreme Court in CIT v. S. Teja Singh, AIR 1959 SC 666; CIT v. Hindusthan Bulk Carriers, (2003) 3 SCC 57 and D. Saibaba v. Bar Council of India, AIR 2003 SC 123.

     139A(8)(d) read with Rule 114C exempts certain persons from the provisions of S. 139A. S. 139A(8) (d), introduced by the Finance (No. 2) Act, 1998 with effect from 1-8-1998, empowers the Board to make rules providing for class or classes of person to whom the provisions of S. 139A shall not apply. Relevant part of S. 139A(8) provides as under:

“(8) The Board may make rules providing for:

d) Class or classes of persons to whom the provisions of this Section shall not apply;”

In exercise of its powers vested u/s.139A(8) the CBDT has inserted Rule 114C(1) by Income-tax (16th Amendment) Rules, 1998 with effect from 1-11-1998. Rule 114(1) lists out persons to whom S. 139A shall not apply. Clause (b) of this rule exempts non-residents referred in S. 2(30) from the application of S. 139A. Rule 114C(1) provides as under:

“(1) The provisions of S. 139A shall not apply to fol-lowing class or classes of persons, namely:

(a)    the persons who have agricultural income and are not in receipt of any other income chargeable to income-tax: Provided that such persons shall make declaration in Form No. 61 in respect of transactions referred to in Rule 114B;

    b) the non-residents referred to in clause (30) of S. 2;
    c) Central Government, State Governments and Consular Offices in transactions where they are the payers.”

In case S. 206AA(1) is interpreted literally as extending to all persons, S. 139A(8)(d) would be rendered otiose and futile. Hence S. 206AA(1) is to be inter-preted as limited to cases where obtaining PAN is mandatory.

Further, it should not be lightly assumed that ‘Parliament has given with one hand what it took away with the other’. This principle has been applied by the Supreme Court in Tahsildar Singh v. State of UP, AIR 1959 SC 1012; K. M. Nanavati v. State of Bombay, AIR 1961 SC 112 and CIT v. Hindustan Bulk Carriers, (2003) 3 SCC 57. In the present case S. 206AA(1) can-not be interpreted as having taken away the benefit granted by S. 139A(8)(d) read with Rule 114C.

It should be noted that S. 139A(8)(d) is a special provision granting exemption from obligation of obtaining PAN. A general provision in the form of S. 206AA(1) cannot override the same, even though it contains a non-obstante clause. In such cases as held by the Supreme Court in R. S. Raghunath v. State of Karnataka, AIR 1992 SC 81 there should be a clear inconsistency between the two before giving an overriding effect to the non-obstante clause. No such inconsistency would arise if both these provisions are harmoniously construed so as to restrict operation of S. 206AA(1) to cases where obtaining or quoting of PAN is mandatory. In such a situation S. 206AA(1) cannot be said to have an overriding effect.

The arguments in favour of holding that S. 206AA(1) operates in cases where obtaining and quoting PAN is not mandatory outweigh the argu-ments in favour of S. 206AA(1) operating even in cases where obtaining and quoting of PAN is either voluntary or exempted. Consequently S. 206AA(1) does not apply to cases where obtaining PAN is not mandatory.

Question No. 3:

The next question is whether S. 206AA(1) read with S. 139A(5A) imposes an obligation to obtain PAN, in case of persons, whose income is subject to TDS and who do not have PAN.

S. 139A(5A) creates an obligation similar to the one created in S. 206AA(1). S. 139A(5A) requires every person who has received any sum, amount or income which has been subjected to TDS under Chapter XVIIB to intimate his PAN to the person responsible to deduct tax at source. S. 139A(5A) provides as under:

“(5A) Every person receiving any sum or income or amount from which tax has been deducted under the provisions of Chapter XVIIB, shall intimate his permanent account number to the person responsible for deducting such tax under that Chapter:

Provided further that a person referred to in this sub -section shall intimate the General Index Register Number till such time permanent account number is allotted to such person.”

The requirement of intimating PAN u/s.139A(5A) pre-supposes that the assessee has a PAN. In case, the assessee does not have a PAN, the question for consideration is whether an obligation to obtain PAN is imposed by S. 139A(5A) independent of Ss.(1) to Ss.(1B). There are arguments to support an affirmative answer as well as a negative answer to this question. The following arguments support the view that S. 139A(A) creates an obligation to obtain PAN, where no such obligation is imposed by other provisions of the Section.

    S. 139A(5A) was introduced by the Finance Act, 2001. Purpose of S. 139(5A) can be gathered from the Memorandum explaining the provisions in the Finance Bill, 2001, (2001) 248 ITR 162 (St.). The Memorandum provides as under:

“With a view to enable processing of information contained in such returns or certificates for the purposes of unearthing undisclosed income and discovering new taxpayers, it is proposed to insert new Ss.(5A), Ss.(5B), Ss.(5C) and Ss.(5D) in S. 139A to make it obligatory for every person receiving income from which tax has been deducted or from whom tax is collectible, to furnish his PAN to the person responsible for deducting and collecting such tax, and also to make it obligatory for the person deducting or collecting tax to quote the PAN of such persons in the returns of tax deducted or collected at source prescribed u/s.206 and u/s. 206C, respectively, and in the certificates issued u/s.203 and u/s.206C(5), respectively.”

Further, the CBDT Circular No. 14 of 2001, (2001) 252 ITR 65 (St.) explaining the provisions of the Finance Act, 2001 observed in para 66 as under:

“With a view to enable processing of the information contained in such returns or certificates for the purposes of matching of information and discovering new taxpayers, the Act has inserted new Ss.(5A), Ss.(5B), Ss.(5C) & Ss.(5D) in S. 139A of the Income-tax Act to make it obligatory for every person receiving income from which tax has been deducted or from whom tax is collectible, to furnish his PAN to the person responsible for deducting or collecting such tax, and also to make it obligatory for the person deducting or collecting tax to quote the PAN of such persons in the returns of tax deducted or collected at source prescribed u/s.206 and u/s.206C, respectively, and in the certificates issued u/s.203 and u/s.206C(5), respectively. Such number will also be required to be quoted in statements of perquisites required to be furnished u/s.192 of the Income- tax Act. The requirement u/s.(5A) and u/s.(5B) will not apply in respect of certain non-residents and other persons who are not required to file returns of income.”

The intention of the law is clear. It is to bring more income-earners into the tax net. By insisting on compulsory furnishing of PAN, more people can be forced to fall in the tax net. The above object is aimed at persons who are not required to have PAN. Thus S. 139A(5A) is incorporated and aimed at creating an obligation on persons outside the tax net and not having a PAN to obtain and furnish PAN to the deductor of tax at source.

    When introduced S. 139A(5A) had two provi-sos. The first proviso has been omitted by Finance (No. 2) Act, 2004 with effect from 1-4-2005. The first proviso stood as under?:

“Provided that nothing contained in this sub-section shall apply to a non-resident referred to in Ss.(4) of S. 115AC, or Ss.(2) of S. 115BBA, or to a non-resident Indian referred to in S. 115G:”

This proviso was deleted with the intention of denying all person including non-residents from claiming credit without furnishing PAN. In this regard the Notes on Clauses to the Finance (No. 2) Bill, 2004, (2004) 268 ITR 113 (St.) 143, provides as under:

“Clause 30 of the Bill seeks to amend S. 139A of the Income-tax Act relating to permanent ac-count number.

The existing provisions contained in the first proviso to Ss.(5A) of the said Section provide that a non-resident referred to in Ss.(4) of S. 115AC, or Ss.(2) of S. 115BBA or a non -resident Indian referred to in S.?115G?shall not be required to intimate his permanent account number Ss.(a) seeks to omit the said first proviso.

After the proposed amendment, the person referred to in the omitted provisions shall be required to intimate his permanent account num-ber to the person responsible for deducting tax under Chapter XVII-B.

The amendment will take effect from 1st April, 2005.”

The CBDT Circular No. 5 of 2005, dated 15- 7-2005 explaining the provisions of the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2004 provides as under:

“All assessees, including non-residents, will be re-quired to intimate the permanent account number to the person deducting or collecting tax in the absence of which credit for TDS or TCS cannot be given. Hence, the first proviso to Ss.(5A) of S. 139A not requiring quoting of PAN by non-residents, has been omitted.”

The Memorandum Explaining the provisions in the Finance (No. 2) Bill, 2004, (2004) 268 ITR 174 (St.) 193, states the object behind S. 139A(5A) as facilitating computerisation and dematerialisation of TDS and TCS certificates. The memorandum states at under:

“De-materialisation of TDS and TCS certificates?: Under the existing provisions of the Income-tax Act, returns of income required to be filed u/s.139 are to be accompanied by TDS/TCS certificates for claiming credit of tax deducted or collected. Computerisation of TDS/TCS functions will eventually dispense with this requirement and will also pave the way for filing of returns through the internet. The Finance Bill incorporates the necessary legislative amendments required to facilitate the above process of computerisation. The bill proposes to provide that:

    i) Credit for tax deducted or collected shall be given to the assessee without production of a certificate;
    ii) returns will not be deemed to be defective if they are not accompanied by such certificates;

    iii) every person deducting or collecting tax shall be required to furnish quarterly statements to the prescribed income-tax authority who will in turn furnish an annual statement of the tax deducted or collected to the assessee;

    iv) all assessees, including non-residents, will be required to intimate the PAN to the person deducting or collecting tax as otherwise credit for TDS/TCS can be given; and

    v) penalty shall be levied in case quarterly state-ments are not furnished in time.

These amendments will take effect from 1st April, 2005.”

This indicates that S. 139A(5A) has to be interpreted as applicable to all persons, without exception, whether or not they are covered by Ss.(1) to Ss.(3) of S. 139A.

    3) It is to be noted that S. 139A(5A) was introduced after S. 139A(8)(d) and Rule 114C(1) were introduced. While S. 139A(8)(d) and Rule 114C were introduced in the year 1998, S. 139A(5A) was introduced in 2001. At the time of introduction of S. 139A(5A) by virtue of the first proviso (extracted above), as it stood then, only few categories of non-residents were exempt from application of S. 139A(5A). This implied that other non-residents were covered by S. 139A(5A). When the first proviso was removed in 2004, the intention was to cover all persons within the scope of S. 139A(5A) (as seen from the extracts cited above).

This was in spite of blanket exemption to non-residents and others under Rule 114C read with S. 139A(8)(d). This creates an apparent contradiction between the two provisions, namely, S. 139A(8)(d) and S. 139A(5A). No such conflict exists between S. 139A(8)(d) read with Rule 114C(1) and other sub-section of S. 139A, whether inserted prior to or after the insertion of S. 139A(8)(d).

Under such circumstances one cannot jump to any conclusion of S. 139A(8)(d) being impliedly repealed or rendered futile. As stated above, any interpretation which renders a provision otiose has to be rejected. Further it is an irrefutable presumption that Parliament was aware of the existing provisions, when it introduced a new provision.

In such cases, the warring provisions should be harmoniously construed in a manner to make both provisions workable. The principle of harmonious construction is described by the Supreme Court in Venkataramana Devaru v. State of Mysore, AIR 1958 SC 255 in the following words:

“The rule of construction is well settled that when there are in an enactment two provisions which cannot be reconciled with each other, they should be so interpreted that, if possible, effect should be given to both. This is what is known as the rule of harmonious construction.”

The Supreme Court has applied this principle for harmoniously construing two conflicting sub-sec-tions of the same Section. In Madanlal Fakirchand Dhudhediya v. Shree Changdeo Sugar Mills Ltd., AIR 1962 SC 1543, the Supreme Court observed that “the sub-sections must be read as parts of an integral whole and as being interdependent; an attempt should be made to construing them to reconcile them if it is reasonably possible to do so, and to avoid repugnancy.”

In the present case Ss.(5A) and Ss.(8)(d) have to be harmoniously construed. Considering that S. 139A(5A) came later, if it is read as an exception or proviso to S. 139A(8)(d), then the conflict between them ceases to exist. Both provisions would then operate in the manner intended by the law-makers. As a consequence, all persons would be bound by S. 139A(5A), irrespective of Rule 114C.

4) S. 206AA(1) employs the words ‘any person’. The Courts have defined the word ‘any’ in a wide manner to mean ‘all’ or ‘each and every’, unless such a construction is limited by the subject matter. One may refer to decisions in G. Narsingh Das Agarwal v. UOI, (1967) 1 MLJ 197 in support of this proposition. Therefore, S. 206AA(1) applies all persons including non-residents.

The following arguments support the view that S. 139A(5A) does not impose any obligation to obtain PAN where no such obligation exists under other provisions of S. 139A.

    1) S. 139A(5A) has to be read in the context and structure of S. 139A and other provisions of the Act. The structure of S. 139A clearly indicates that different sub-sections have different roles to play.

As discussed above, Ss.(1), (1A) and (1A) deal with general and special cases where obtaining PAN is mandatory; Ss.(2) deals with cases where the As-sessing Officer is bound to allot PAN in case the assessee carries out certain transactions; Ss.(3) deals with voluntarily obtaining PAN; Ss.(4) empowers the Board to notify dates within which PAN holders under the old scheme are required to obtain PAN under the new series; etc.

The role of S. 139(5A) is therefore limited to cre-ating an obligation to intimate his PAN where the assessee subject to TDS under Chapter XVIIB has a PAN. The structure of S. 139A clearly indicates that Ss.(5A) is not intended to create an obligation to obtain PAN, where no such obligation to obtain PAN exist otherwise.

    2) If the intention of the Legislature was to require every assessee subject to the provisions of Chapter XVIIB to obtain PAN, it would have created such an obligation in Ss.(1) itself. This is not the intention of the Legislature. It only requires the person who have PAN to furnish it to person responsible to deduct tax at source under Chapter XVIIB.

    3) It is for the same reason that S. 139A(5) imposes an obligation to quote PAN only in cases where PAN has been obtained or possessed otherwise. This can be gathered from the use of the words ‘such number’ in the provision. The same logic has to be extended to S. 139A(5A). S. 139A(5) provides as under:
“(5) Every person shall:

    a) quote such number in all his returns to, or correspondence with, any income-tax authority;
 b)quote such number in all challans for the payment of any sum due under this Act;

 c) quote such number in all documents pertaining to such transactions as may be prescribed by the Board in the interests of the revenue, and entered into by him:

Provided that the Board may prescribe different dates for different transactions or class of transactions or for different class of persons:

Provided further that a person shall quote General Index Register Number till such time Permanent Account Number is allotted to such person;

    d) intimate the Assessing Officer any change in his address or in the name and nature of his business on the basis of which the permanent account number was allotted to him.”

    4) S. 139A(5B) requires the deductor of tax to quote the PAN of the deductee in TDS returns and certificates. This obligation arises only when the deductee has furnished the PAN and not otherwise. This provision does not mandate a deductor to force the deductee to obtain and furnish PAN. The scope of the provision is therefore limited in nature as in the case of S. 139A(5A).

    5) Just because S. 139A(5A) is to be construed as an exception to S. 139A(8)(d), it does not mean S. 139A(8)(d) ceases to be an exception to S. 139A(1) to (1B). Persons covered by Rule 114C(1) are not obligated to obtain PAN as the S. 139A(8)(d) continues to operate. The effect of S. 139A(5A) would be that in case persons who are exempt have voluntarily obtained PAN, they would be bound to intimate the deductor, but there would be no obligation to obtain PAN if they do not have one.

In our opinion arguments supporting the second view, i.e., that S. 139A(5A) does not create any new obligation to obtain PAN, outweighs the first view. Hence S. 139A(5A) does not create any obligation to obtain PAN, where PAN is not required to be obtained. Consequently, all persons who have obtained PAN, either voluntarily or due to mandatory requirements, will be bound to furnish PAN to the deductor. Persons not having a PAN are not obliged to obtain and furnish it to the deductor, even if the amounts they receive are subject to withholding under Chapter XVIIB.

If it is assumed otherwise for the sake of argument, then it is possible to argue that the obligation to obtain and furnish PAN need not be again imposed u/s.206AA(1), once it is imposed u/s. 139A(5A), for both provisions are similar. Further, the scope of S. 139A(5A) is wider than that of S. 206AA(1), in the sense that there is no pre-condition in S. 139A(5A) that the deductee should be entitled to the income (sum or amount), for the obligation to intimate PAN to be triggered. U/s. 139A(5A), the obligation to furnish PAN is in respect of all incomes, amounts or sums, whether the deductee is entitled thereto or not. As a result, any obligation is created u/s.139A(5A) will apply even u/s.206AA(1).

However the above argument will not stand, for the reason that there is a timing difference between the two provisions. The obligation to obtain PAN, if assumed to exist u/s.139A(5A), will arise only after the tax has been deducted at source and not before. This is because S. 139A(5A) is triggered only after the tax has been deducted. Use of the words ‘has been deducted’ in S. 139A(5A) is to be noted. This obligation will not arise at the time person becomes entitled to any sum, amount or income which is subject to withholding under Chapter XVIIB, which is the event triggering S. 206AA(1). As mentioned above, S. 206AA(1) employs the word ‘deductible’.

Therefore, we are of the view that S. 206AA(1) whether independently or in conjunction with S. 139A(5A) does not create any obligation to obtain PAN, where the deductee does not have one. Both S. 139A(5A) and S. 206AA(1) will only apply to cases where the deductee has a PAN or is mandated by law to obtain one, and not otherwise.

Question No. 4:

The next question that arises is whether non-resident assessees are also bound by S. 206AA(1). There could be two views on this question. The following arguments support the view that even non-residents are bound by S. 206AA(1).

    1) S. 206AA(1) employs the words ‘any person entitled to receive any sum or income or amount’. The word ‘any’ qualifies the word ‘person’. As stated above, unless the context otherwise requires the word ‘any’ has to be understood as ‘all’. In the present case, there is nothing in the context of S. 206AA(1) which restricts the scope of the word ‘any’. Hence it is to be given its full operation. As such, the words ‘any person’ would mean ‘all persons’. This would include even the non-residents.

    2) The memorandum explaining the provisions of the Finance (No. 2) Bill, 2009 clearly states that 209AA is applies to non-residents. It provides: “These provisions will also apply to non-residents where TDS is deductible on payments or credits made to them. To ensure that the deductor knows about the correct PAN of the deductee, it is also proposed to provide for mandatory quoting of PAN of the deductee by both the deductor and the deductee in all correspondence, bills and vouchers exchanged between them.” (emphasis supplied)

    3) The CBDT has issued a press release, bearing No. 402/92/2006-MC (04 of 2010), dated 20-1-2010 which reiterates that non-residents are governed by S. 209AA. The press release states:
“A new provision relating to tax deduction at source (TDS) under the Income-tax Act, 1961 will become applicable with effect from 1st April 2010. Tax at higher of the prescribed rate or 20% will be deducted on all transactions liable to TDS, where the Permanent Account Number (PAN) of the deductee is not available. The law will also apply to all non-residents in respect of payments/remittances liable to TDS. As per the new provisions, certificate for deduction at lower rate or no deduction shall not be given by the Assessing Officer u/s.197, or declaration by deductee u/s.197A for non-deduction of TDS on payments shall not be valid, unless the application bears PAN of the applicant/deductee.” (emphasis supplied)

    4. S. 206AA(1) starts with a non-obstante clause. It overrides all other provisions of the Act, which may directly or impliedly indicate a different conclusion.

On the other hand, the following arguments support the view that S. 206AA(1) does not apply to non-residents.

    i) S. 139A(8)(d) read with Rule 114C exempts certain persons and transaction from obtaining and quoting of PAN. The CBDT in Rule 114C(1)(b) has exempted non-residents referred in S. 2(30) from the application of S. 139A.

    2(30) has defined the term ‘non-resident’ to mean ‘a person who is not a resident and for the purposes of S. 92, S. 93 and S. 168, includes a person who is not ordinarily resident within the meaning of clause (6) of S. 6’. The term ‘resident’ is defined in S. 2(42) to mean ‘a person who is resident in India within the meaning of S. 6’. Hence all non-residents under the Act are exempted from the application of S. 139A.

All arguments stated above in support of reading down of the non-obstante clause in S. 206AA(1) have to be read even in case of non -residents. As stated above, once a benefit is given by one provision, the same cannot be said to be taken away by another provision so as to render the former provision otiose. Therefore S. 206AA(1) cannot be said to apply to non-residents.

    2) S. 206AA(4) requires the applicant u/s.197 to quote his PAN for his application to be considered.
    206AA(4) provides as under:

“(4) No certificate u/s.197 shall be granted unless the application made under that Section contains the Permanent Account Number of the applicant.”

S. 197 provides for an assessee/deductee to obtain a certificate from the Assessing Officer, directing the deductor to deduct tax at a lower rate. S. 206AA(4) does not apply in respect of the deductions to be made u/s.195. U/s.195 the non-resident deductee can apply for lower deduction of tax at source. In this regard S. 195(3) provides as under:

“(3) Subject to rules made U/ss.(5), any person entitled to receive any interest or other sum on which income-tax has to be deducted U/ss.(1) may make an application in the prescribed form to the Assessing Officer for the grant of a certificate authorising him to receive such interest or other sum without deduction of tax under that sub-section, and where any such certificate is granted, every person responsible for paying such interest or other sum to the person to whom such certificate is granted shall, so long as the certificate is in force, make payment of such interest or other sum without deducting tax thereon U/ss.(1).”

S. 206AA(1) does not have provisions requiring PAN to be quoted compulsorily for applications u/s.195(3) to be processed and certificates to be issued thereunder. This indicates that S. 206AA(1) was never intended to apply to non-residents.

    As discussed in detail below, certain non-residents enjoy a fixed rate of tax on certain incomes, which rates are lower than 20 percent in certain cases. One may refer to S. 115A, S. 115AB, S. 115AD and S. 115BBA, where the gross income is subject to tax at rates of 10 percent. In such cases, it would not be permissible to deduct a higher rate of tax at source. This aspect is discussed in detail below.

This also indicates that S. 206AA(1) does not apply to non-residents.

The argument that S. 206AA(1) does not apply to non-residents outweighs the opposite view. Hence in case of non-residents, S. 206AA(1) does not create a liability to furnish PAN and failure to furnish or quote the same should not lead to a higher rate of tax.

Question No. 5:

In case S. 206AA(1) is presumed to apply to non-residents, the next question that arises is whether S. 206AA(1) overrides S. 90(2). In other words, the question is whether S. 206AA(1) is to be applied after application of S. 90(2) or before.

S. 90(2) provides the option to an assessee whose income is doubly taxed, to take advantage of ei-ther the provisions of the Act or the provisions of double taxation avoidance agreements (DTAA in short) entered into by the Central Government with Government or specified territory, whichever is beneficial. In this regard S. 90(2) provides:

“(2) Where the Central Government has entered into an agreement with the Government of any country outside India or specified territory outside India, as the case may be, U/ss.(1) for granting relief of tax, or as the case may be, avoidance of double taxation, then, in relation to the assessee to whom such agreement applies, the provisions of this Act shall apply to the extent they are more beneficial to that assessee.”

If S. 206AA(1) overrides S. 90(2), i.e., is applied after application of S. 90(2), the benefit of lower rates of tax or exemption from tax under the double taxation avoidance agreements India has entered into with other countries will be denied on non-furnishing of the PAN. The following arguments support this proposition:

    1) S. 206AA(1) contains a non-obstante provision and therefore overrides all other provisions of the Act including S. 90(2). The operation of S. 90(2) is subject to S. 206AA(1). Therefore S. 90(2) will have to be applied first, followed by S. 206A.

    2) Once S. 206AA(1) is applicable, the higher of  rates mentioned in the Act, (b) rate or rates in force, or (c) twenty percent will have to adopted as the rate of TDS. The term ‘rate or rates in force’ is defined in S. 2(37A). In clause (iii) of this definition, for S. 195 purposes even DTAA rate is considered.

The relevant part of S. 2(37A) provides as under:

“(37A) ‘rate or rates in force’ or ‘rates in force’, in relation to an assessment year or financial year, means:

    iii) for the purposes of deduction of tax u/s. 195, the rate or rates of income-tax specified in this behalf in the Finance Act of the relevant year or the rate or rates of income-tax specified in an agreement entered into by the Central Government u/s. 90, or an agreement notified by the Central Government u/s.90A, whichever is applicable by virtue of the provisions of S. 90, or S. 90A, as the case may be;”

It is clear that in applying S. 206AA(1), rates under DTAAs or S. 195 rates, whichever is beneficial is to be first computed, before comparing the same with the rate of 20%. Hence one can conclude that S. 206AA(1) will have to be applied after application of S. 90(2).

The following arguments support the view that S. 90(2) has to be applied after application of S. 206AA(1).

    i) S. 90 of the Act overrides all other provisions of the Act including charging provision u/s.4. This is, inter alia, for the reason that S. 90 aims to give effect to international fiscal agreements entered into between India and other Governments. The Constitutional mandate backing these treaties requires the provisions of the Indian tax laws to give way to the treaty law.

One may refer to decisions in CIT v. Visakhapatnam Port Trust, (1988) 144 ITR 146 (AP); CIT v. Davy Ashmore India Ltd., (1991) 190 ITR 626 (Cal.); Leonhardt Andra and Partner, Gmbh v. CIT, (200]) 249 ITR 418; CIT v. R. M. Muthaiah, (1993) 202 ITR 508 (Kar.); Union of India and Others v. Azadi Bachao Andolan and Others, (2003) 263 ITR 706 (SC) which support this view. Similar view has been upheld by the CBDT in its Circular No. 333 dated 2-4-1982, where the CBDT observed:

“The correct legal position is that where a specific provision is made in the Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement, that provision will prevail over the general provisions contained in the Income-tax Act, 1961. In fact the Double Taxation Avoidance Agreements which have been entered into by the Central Government u/s.90 of the Income-tax Act, 1961, also provide that the laws in force in either country will continue to govern the assessment and taxation of income in the respective country, except where provisions to the contrary have been made in the Agreement.

Thus, where a Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement provided for a particular mode of computation of income, the same should be followed, irrespective of the provisions in the Income -tax Act. Where there is no specific provision in the Agreement, it is the basic law, i.e., the Income-tax Act, that will govern the taxation of income.”

The Supreme Court in the Azadi Bachao Andolan case (supra) after examining the decisions referred above and the Circular issued by the CBDT observed as under:

“A survey of the aforesaid cases makes it clear that the judicial consensus in India has been that S. 90 is specifically intended to enable and empower the Central Government to issue a Notification for implementation of the terms of a double taxation avoidance agreement. When that happens, the provisions of such an agreement, with respect to cases to which where they apply, would operate even if inconsistent with the provisions of the Income-tax Act. We approve of the reasoning in the decisions which we have noticed. If it was not the intention of the Legislature to make a departure from the general principle of chargeability to tax u/s.4 and the general principle of ascertainment of total income u/s.5 of the Act, then there was no purpose in making those Sections ‘subject to the provisions of the Act’. The very object of drafting the said two Sections with the said clause is to enable the Central Government to issue a Notification u/s.90 towards implementation of the terms of the DTAAs which would automatically override the provisions of the Income-tax Act in the matter of ascertainment of chargeability to income tax and ascertainment of total income, to the extent of inconsistency with the terms of the DTAA.”

As discussed above, S. 206AA(1) is attracted only if Chapter XVIIB is attracted. Chapter XVIIB is attracted only if S. 4(1) is attracted. Since S. 90 overrides S. 4 and other provisions of the Act, it also overrides S. 206AA(1). This is in spite of absence of a non-obstante clause in S. 90(2). It would mean the rate under the Act will have to be first determined after application of S. 206AA(1) and thereafter a comparison is to be made with the rate in the DTAA.

    2) The term ‘rate or rates in force’ in S. 206AA(1) will have to be construed as rates as stated in the
Finance Act and not as rates specified in the Finance Act or rates under the relevant DTAAs, whichever is beneficial.

In support of this, one may refer to the Memorandum explaining the provisions of the Finance (No. Bill, 2009, which is extracted above. The memorandum clearly qualifies the term ‘rate in force’ to mean ‘rates mentioned in the Finance Act’ and not rates in force after applying the DTAA rates.

Hence in S. 206AA, the definition of the term ‘rate or rates in force’ in S. 2(37A) cannot be adopted in the context.

When a word has been defined in the interpretation clause, prima facie that definition governs whenever that word is used in the body of the statute. However this principle is applicable only if the context permits. In fact S. 2 where the above clause (37A) is placed, starts with the words “In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,-”. Context in which a word is used in, is therefore decisive of its meaning. One may refer to decisions in State Bank of Maharashtra v. Indian Medical Association, AIR 2002 SC 302 and Chowgule and Co. Pvt. Ltd. v. UOI, AIR 1986 SC 1176 in support of this proposition.

In the context of S. 206AA, the words ‘rate or rates in force’ cannot mean ‘rate or rates in force’ as defined in S. 2(37A). This is because S. 90(2) overrides the provisions of the Act, and rates u/s.90(2) will be applied after the final rate under the provisions of the Act is determined. S. 206AA(1) being part of the provisions of the Act, will have to be applied before DTAA rates are applied in determining the rate under the Act.

    3) S. 206AA has overriding effect by virtue of the language employed therein and S. 90(2) has overriding effect by virtue of the Constitutional and contextual mandate. Under such circumstance one cannot apply the principle that the later provision overrides the earlier. This is because S. 90(2) as it stands came in existence along with S. 206AA, by virtue of the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009. Further, an interpretation which is in line with the Constitution has to be adopted as against the one which is not in line with the Constitution.

In light of the above, the arguments in favour of the view that S. 90(2) overrides S. 206AA outweigh the other view. Hence S. 90(2) will have to be ap-plied after applying S. 206AA(1).

Question No. 6:

Assuming that S. 206AA(1) applies to all persons, the next question which requires examination is whether S. 206AA(1) will apply to cases where the ultimate tax liability on certain incomes is fixed at rates below 20%, and assessees have no income chargeable at normal rates or rates at 20% or above.

Under Chapter XII of the Act, certain incomes are taxed?at?special?rates.?While?some?provisions of this chapter?are?applicable?to?all?assessees,?some?are?applicable only to non-residents. Among these provisions, few provisions are applicable only to certain categories of resident or non -resident assessees. Further, in respect of certain specific types of incomes, the special rate of tax is below 20%.

For example?: u/s.115A, non-residents (other than companies) and foreign companies in receipt of royalty or fees for technical services is subject to tax at a fixed rate of ten percent. S. 115A is applicable to cases where royalties or fees for technical services is paid by the Indian Government or from any Indian concern under an agreement made on or after 1-6-2005. This is provided by sub-clauses (AA) and (BB) of S. 115A(1)(b). The relevant part of S. 115A(1)(b) provides as under:
“(1) Where the total income of:

    b) a non-resident (not being a company) or a foreign company, includes any income by way of royalty or fees for technical services other than income referred to in Ss.(1) of S. 44DA received from Government or an Indian concern in pursuance of an agreement made by the foreign company with Government or the Indian concern after the 31st day of March, 1976, and where such agreement is with an Indian concern, the agreement is approved by the Central Government or where it relates to a matter included in the industrial policy, for the time being in force, of the Government of India, the agreement is in accordance with that policy, then, subject to the provisions of Ss.(1A) and Ss.(2), the income-tax payable shall be the aggregate of,?:

    AA) the amount of income-tax calculated on the income by way of royalty, if any, included in the total income, at the rate of 10% if such royalty is received in pursuance of an agreement made on or after the 1st day of June, 2005;

BB) the amount of income-tax calculated on the income by way of fees for technical services, if any, included in the total income, at the rate of 10% if such fees for technical services are received in pursuance of an agreement made on or after the 1st day of June, 2005; and Explanation — For the purposes of this Section:
    i) ‘fees for technical services’ shall have the same meaning as in Explanation 2 to clause (vii) of Ss.(1) of S. 9;

    ii)     ‘royalty’ shall have the same meaning as in Ex-planation 2 to clause (vi) of Ss.(1) of S. 9;”

The following are the other incomes which suffer tax at a fixed rate lower than 20%:

    1) Short-term capital gains arising from transfer of equity shares or units of equity-oriented fund, which has suffered security transaction tax, shall be subject to tax at the rate of 15% (S. 111A)

    2) Long-term capital gains from transfer of and any other income received in respect of units purchased in foreign currency by an overseas financial organisation is subject to tax at the rate of 10% (S. 115AB)

    3) Interest on certain bonds purchased in foreign currency or dividend on certain GDRS is taxable in the hands of a non-resident at the rate of 10% (S. 115AC)
    4) Dividend and long-term capital gains from global depository receipts issued by income company engaged in specified knowledge-based industries or services issued under a scheme ESOPS notified by the Central Government is taxable in the hands of the resident employees of such companies at the rate of 10% (S. 115ACA)

    5) Long-term capital gains on transfer of securi-ties (other than those mentioned in S. 115AB) by a Foreign Institutional investor is taxable at the rate of 10% (S. 115AD)

    6) Profits and gains of a life insurance business will be taxable at a rate of 12½% (S. 115AB)

    7) Income of non-resident, non-citizen sports-person from participation in India, advertise-ment or contribution of articles in India, as well as income guaranteed to non-resident sports associations or institutions for games or sports played in India will be taxable at a rate of 10% (S. 115BBA).

In case an eligible assessee has no other income than those stated above, including royalty and fee for technical services u/s.115A, the ultimate tax liability would be lower than 20%. In such cases, the question that arises is whether the deductor can deduct tax at the rate of 20% on the ground that PAN has not been furnished. In other words, question is whether S. 206AA(1) would apply in case of deductees who have only those incomes which suffer tax at a fixed rate lower than 20%.

Two possible views could arise on this question, one affirmative and another negative. The following arguments support the view that S. 206AA(1) applies to assessees who only earn the income subject to fixed rate of tax lower than 20%.

    1) As stated above, all persons are covered by S. 206AA(1). This is due to the use of the word ‘any’, as discussed above.

    2) S. 206AA(1) cannot be applied in a discrimi-natory manner. It cannot be said that S. 206AA(1) applies to persons who have both the incomes stated above as well as other incomes taxable at rates higher than twenty percent or normal rates, while it does not apply to persons with income taxable at fixed rates lower than 20%. This may not withstand the test of reasonable classification under Article 14 of the Constitution.

    3) No harm would be caused to the assessees earning incomes enumerated above, if they are required to furnish their PAN, failing which tax is deducted at twenty percent. They are entitled under law to claim refund of the excess taxes deducted from them.

On the other hand the following arguments support the view that S. 206AA(1) does not apply to assessees whose ultimate tax liability is less than twenty percent by virtue of their income falling under the categories mentioned above.

    It is the constitutional mandate under Article 265 that “No tax shall be levied or collected except by authority of law.” The authority to collect tax as stated above is u/s.4(2). S. 4(2), as extracted above, authorises the Central Government to collect tax at source only in respect of the income chargeable u/s.4(1). Charge of income-tax u/s.4(1) is at the rate or rates specified by any Central Act and should be in accordance with and subject to the provisions of the Act. S. 4(1) provides as under:

“(1) Where any Central Act enacts that income-tax shall be charged for any assessment year at any rate or rates, income-tax at that rate or those rates shall be charged for that year in accordance with, and subject to the provisions (including provisions for the levy of additional income-tax) of, this Act in respect of the total income of the previous year of every person:

Provided that where by virtue of any provision of this Act income-tax is to be charged in respect of the income of a period other than the previous year, income-tax shall be charged accordingly.”

Therefore charge u/s.4(1) is limited to rate or rates specified in any Central Act — whether the Finance Act or the Income-tax Act itself. Where the rates are fixed by Act, the charge of income-tax cannot be beyond such rates and consequently taxes cannot be collected beyond the rates charged. Additionally, where charge of tax is restricted under the substantive provisions of the Act to a particular amount, the machinery provisions cannot collect tax in excess of such an amount.

As such, where rates of tax at which a particular income is chargeable to tax under the Act is restricted to a particular percentage as enumerated above, withholding of tax cannot exceed such percentages. It is for the same reason that where ever a special rate has been prescribed under the Act, the Finance Act in Schedule II limits the with-holding rates to the same rate.

Provision requiring deducting of taxes at a higher rate than what is charged as taxes under the Act would be in violation of Article 265 and hence bad in law. Since, any interpretation which would render any provision unconstitutional should therefore be avoided, interpretation in favour of applying S. 206AA(1) to cases where the income is charged at fixed rates lower than 20 percent should be avoided.

2)    It is not the object of law to first collect tax in excess of the charge and then refund the excess. One may refer to the decisions of the Supreme Court in Bhawani Cotton Mills Ltd. v. State of Punjab,

(1967) 20 STC 290 (SC), the Full Bench of Supreme Court observed as under:
“If a person is not liable for payment of tax at all, at any time, the collection of tax from him with a possible contingency of refund at a later stage, will not make the original levy valid; because, if particular sales or purchases are exempt from taxation altogether, they can never be taken into account, at any stage, for the purpose of calculating or arriving at the taxable turnover and for levying tax.”

Similarly, the Karnataka High Court in Hyderabad Industries Limited v. ITO and Another, (1991) 188 ITR 749 (Kar.) observed:
“The construction sought to be placed by the respondents is based on a distinction which has no substance in it. It is not understandable as to why a benefit which will not be included in the total income of a person, should be considered as ‘income’ for the purpose of deduction of tax at source at all. The purpose of deduction of tax at source is not to collect a sum which is not a tax levied under the Act; it is to facilitate the collection of the tax lawfully leviable under the Act. The interpretation put on those provisions by the respondents would result in collection of certain amounts by the State which is not a tax qualitatively. Such an interpretation of the taxing statute is impermissible.”

    3) The Department also does not consider amount deducted at source in excess of the income that accrues in the hands of the non-resident as tax. Amounts deducted at source in excess of tax liability would not be ‘tax deducted at source’ as per chapter XVIIB, but ‘amounts deducted at source’. According to the CBDT Circular No. 7, dated 23-10-2007:

“Refund to the person making payment u/s.195 is being allowed as income does not accrue to the non-resident or if the income is accruing no tax is due or tax is due at a lesser rate. The amount paid into the Government account in such cases to that extent, is no longer ‘tax’. In view of this, no interest u/s.244A is admissible on refunds to be granted in accordance with this Circular or on the refunds already granted in accordance with Circular No. 769 or Circular No. 790.”

Chapter XVIIB permits only tax to be deducted at source and does not permit any amount to be deducted at source. If tax is determined at special rates lower than twenty percent, S. 206AA(1) cannot be used to deducted amounts at source in excess of the special rates, for such excess amounts deducted at source would not be tax.

    4) If S. 206AA(1) is attracted to situations under discussion, then the assessees will be forced apply for refund. This would require them to file their return of income tax. In some of the cases discussed above, non-resident assesses are exempt from filing of returns u/s.139. In this regard S. 115A(5) provides as under:

“(5) It shall not be necessary for an assessee referred to in Ss.(1) to furnish U/ss.(1) of S. 139 a return of his or its income if:

    a) his or its total income in respect of which he or it is assessable under this Act during the previous year consisted only of income referred to in clause (a) of Ss.(1); and

    b) the tax deductible at source under the provi-sions of Chapter XVII-B has been deducted from such income.”
Similar provisions are contained in S. 115AC(4) and S. 115BBA(2). These two sub-sections are extracted below:

“(4) It shall not be necessary for a non-resident to furnish U/ss.(1) of S. 139 a return of his income if:
    a) his total income in respect of which he is assessable under this Act during the previous year consisted only of income referred to in clauses (a) and (b) of Ss.(1); and

b) the tax deductible at source under the provisions of Chapter XVII-B has been deducted from such income.”

“(2) It shall not be necessary for the assessee to furnish U/ss.(1) of S. 139 a return of his income if?: his total income in respect of which he is assessable under this Act during the previous year consisted only of income referred to in clause (a) or clause (b) of Ss.(1); and the tax deductible at source under the provisions of Chapter XVII-B has been deducted from such income.”

These sub-sections are attracted only if two condi-tions are fulfilled, namely, (1) the assessees covered by the respective Sections do not have any income which is subject to tax at the normal rates, and (2) tax has been deducted at source as per Chapter XVIIB. At the time these provisions were inserted S. 206AA was not present and the Parliament was aware that rates of withholding were the same as the special rates at which income covered by these provisions were to be charged.

These sub-sections being beneficial in nature will have to be interpreted in favour of the assessee. Therefore, even after the insertion of S. 206AA, the words ‘tax deductible at source under the provisions of Chapter XVII-B’ have to be interpreted as referring only to rates mentioned in schedule II of the Finance Acts.

If S. 206AA(1) were to be applied to such cases, then since tax would be deducted at rates higher than the charge of tax, returns would be required to be filed. This interpretation would render these three sub-sections otiose. As stated above, any interpretation which renders any provision otiose should be avoided.

Further, benefits granted by one provision cannot be lightly presumed to be taken away by another provision of the Act. Hence S. 206AA will not apply to cases whether a fixed rate of tax lower than 20% is chargeable under Chapter XII of the Act.

    It is a settled principle that one has to avoid interpretation causing hardship, injustice or absurdity. The Supreme Court in Tirath Singh v. Bachittar Singh, AIR 1955 SC 830; K. P. Varghese v. ITO, AIR 1981 SC 1922; CIT v. J. H. Gotla Yadgier, AIR 1985 1698 and CWS India Ltd. v. CIT, JT 1994 (3) SC 116 have applied the following observation from Maxwell Interpretation of Statutes, 11th Edition:

“Where the language of a statute, in its ordinary meaning and grammatical construction, leads to a manifest contradiction of the apparent purpose of the enactment, or to some convenience or absurdity, hardship or injustice, presumably not intended, a construction may be put upon it which modifies the meaning of the words, and even the structure of the sentence.”

If higher rate of 20% is deducted as tax by applying S. 206AA(1), then assessees would have to face hardship in the form of filing of returns and wait for refunds. In case the assessees are non-residents they would have to be in communication with income-tax authorities in India till refund is granted, and may have to open and operate bank accounts solely for the said purpose. Further they would not be entitled to any interest on refund by virtue of Circular No. 7 of 2007. In light of the absurdity and hardship associated with this inter-pretation, such interpretation should be avoided.

    Any interpretation which furthers the objects of the law should be adopted in favour of those which are counter-productive. One may refer to the decision of the Supreme Court in Workmen of Dimakuchi Tea Estate v. Management of Dimakuchi Tea Estate, AIR 1958 SC 353 and Ashok Singh v. ACCE, AIR 1992 SC 1756 in support of this principle. In the Dimakuchi Tea Estate case, the Supreme Court observed as under?:

“The words of a statute, when there is doubt about their meaning, are to be understood in the sense in which they best harmonise with the subject of the enactment and the object which the Legislature has in view. Their meaning is found not so much in a strict grammatical or etymological proprietary of language, nor even in its popular use, as in the subject or in the occasion on which they are used and the object to be attained.”

The object of S. 206AA(1) is to ensure compliance of PAN mechanism and to streamline the process of processing returns and granting credit. The object is not to increase the burden on the Tax Department by requiring it to process more returns and grant more refunds. Therefore the interpretation which requires assessees to claim refund towards excess tax deducted at source would not serve the purpose of introducing S. 206AA. On the other hand it would be counter-productive to the objects of introducing S. 206AA. Hence the interpretation in favour applying S. 206AA to the assessees covered by this question should be avoided.

The second view clearly outweighs the first view. S. 206AA(1) cannot be applied in cases where the total income of an assessee includes only those incomes which are chargeable to tax at fixed rates lower than 20 percent.

Conclusion:

The above article is an in depth examination of the position of law on S. 206AA(1) on first principles. It aims to lend support to any deductor or deductee in case of litigation arising out of this provision. However if S. 206AA(1) is implemented taking a pro-Department view, it is going to remain a pain both to the deductees and the deductors until either the Courts or the Parliament interferes.

Double taxation credit under MAT regime — Software companies

Finance Act, 2010

1. Background :

1.1 The Finance Minister, Shri Pranab Mukherjee,
presented the second budget along with the Finance Bill, 2010 of UPA-II
Government to the Parliament on 26th February, 2010. The Finance Act, 2010, has
now been passed by both houses of the Parliament in April-May, 2010, after a
brief discussion. There are 56 Sections amending the various Sections of the
Income-tax and Wealth Tax Acts. It appears that the number of amendments in our
direct tax laws this year are the minimal, probably because the new Direct Tax
Code replacing the present Income-tax and Wealth tax Acts is proposed to be
introduced later this year.

1.2 While presenting the direct and indirect tax
proposals in Part ‘B’ of his budget speech, the Finance Minister has stated in
para 117 to 120 and para 186 and 188 as under :

“117. While formulating them (tax proposals), I have
been guided by the principles of sound tax administration as embodied in the
following words of Kautilya :

“Thus, a wise Collector General shall conduct the
work of revenue collection . . . . . in a manner that production and consumption
should not be injuriously affected . . . . . financial prosperity depends on
public prosperity, abundance of harvest and prosperity of commerce among other
things.”

“118. I had stated last year that tax reform is a
process and not an event. The process I had outlined in the area of direct
taxes was to release a draft Direct Taxes Code along with a Discussion Paper.
In the area of indirect taxes, the reform initiative was the introduction of a
Goods and Service Tax. I have presented the developments in both reform
initiatives in Part ‘A’ of my Speech.”

“119. We have continued on the path of
computerisation in core areas of service delivery in the administration of
direct taxes. This will reduce the physical interface between taxpayers and tax
administration and speed up procedures and processes. The Centralised
Processing Centre at Bengaluru is now fully functional and is processing around
20,000 returns daily. This initiatives will be taken forward by setting up two
more Centres during the year.”

“120. As a part of Government’s initiative to move
towards citizen-centric governance, the Income-tax Department has introduced
‘Sevottam’, a pilot project at Pune, Kochi, and Chandigarh through Aaykar Seva
Kendras. These provide a single-window system for registration of all
applications including those for redressal of grievances as well as paper
returns. This year the scheme will be extended to four more cities.”

“186. My proposals on Direct Taxes are estimated to
result in revenue loss of Rs.26,000 crore for the year. Proposals relating to
Indirect Taxes are estimated to result in a net revenue gain of Rs.46,500 crore
for the year. Taking into account concessions being given in my tax proposals
and measures taken to mobilise additional resources, the net revenue gain is
estimated to be Rs.20,500 crore for the year.”

“188. This Budget belongs to ‘Aam Aadmi’. It belongs
to the farmer, the agriculturist, the entrepreneur and the investor. The
opportunity is great. The time is right. I have placed my faith in the hands of
the people who, I know, can be depended upon to rise to any occasion in
national interest. I have placed my faith in the collective conscience of the
nation that can be touched to scale undreamt of heights in the coming
years.”

1.3 The various important amendments made in the
Income-tax Act can be broadly classified as under :

(i) Slabs for tax payable by Individuals/HUF/AOP have
been revised and tax burden of persons in higher income bracket considerably
reduced.

(ii) Surcharge on income of corporate bodies, if income
exceeds Rs.1 cr., is reduced from 10% to 7.5%.

(iii) MAT on corporate bodies increased from 15% to 18%.

(iv) Threshold limits for TDS increased.

(v) Scope for certain exemptions and deductions granted
in the computation of income
widened.

(vi) Scope for certain deductions granted under Chapter
VIA enlarged.

(vii) Scope of gifts taxable as income from other sources
enlarged.

(viii) Limited concession from tax on conversion of
closely held small companies into Limited Liability Partnership given.

(ix) Powers of Settlement Commission widened.

(x) Some procedural changes made to mitigate certain
hardships faced in the procedure for assessment and resolution of tax disputes.

1.4 In this article an attempt is made to discuss some of
the important amendments made by the Finance Act, 2010, in the Income-tax and
Wealth-tax Acts.

2. Rates of taxes, surcharge and education cess :

    2. Rates of taxes, surcharge and education cess :

2.1 Exemption limit and rates of taxes : The basic exemption limit for an Individual, HUF, AOP and BOI as increased in the last budget will continue for A.Y. 2011-12. This exemption limit is Rs.2.40 lacs for senior citizens (SC), Rs.1.90 lacs for women (below 65 years) (W) and Rs.1.60 lacs for others (O). However, the tax slabs are revised for A.Y. 2011-12 as under :

The impact of these changes can be noticed from the following comparative charts :

    i) Tax payable in A.Y. 2010-11 (Account year ending 31-3-2010)

Income

Tax
on

Tax
on

Tax
on

(Rs. in lacs)

Senior Citizens

Women

Others

 

(Rs)

(below

(Rs.)

 

 

65 years)

 

 

 

(Rs.)

 

3.00

6,000

11,000

14,000

 

 

 

 

5.00

46,000

51,000

54,000

8.00

1,36,000

1,41,000

1,44,000

 

 

 

 

10.00

1,96,000

2,01,000

2,04,000

 

 

 

 

15.00

3,46,000

3,51,000

3,54,000

 

 

 

 

    ii) Tax payable in A.Y. 2011-12 (Account year ending 31-3-2011)

Income

Tax
on

Tax
on

Tax
on

(Rs. in lacs)

Senior Citizens

Women

Others

 

(Rs)

(below

(Rs.)

 

 

65 years)

 

 

 

(Rs.)

 

 

 

 

 

3.00

6,000

11,000

14,000

 

 

 

 

5.00

26,000

31,000

34,000

 

 

 

 

8.00

86,000

91,000

94,000

10.00

1,46,000

1,51,000

1,54,000

 

 

 

 

15.00

2,96,000

3,01,000

3,04,000

 

 

 

 

So far as other assessees are concerned, there are no changes and, therefore, the existing rates will apply in A.Y. 2011-12.

    iii) Rate of tax u/s.115JB (MAT) :
The rate of tax on book profits u/s.115JB — Minimum Alternate Tax (MAT) is increased from 15% to 18% from A.Y. 2011-12.

Slab
(Rs. in lacs)

A.Y. 2010-11

Slab
(Rs. in lacs)

A.Y.
2011-12

 

 

 

 

Upto 1.60 (O), 1.90 (W) and 2.40 (SC)

Nil

Up to 1.60 (O),1.90 (W) and 2.40 (SC)

Nil

 

 

 

 

1.60 / 1.90 / 2.40 to 3.00

10%

1.60 / 1.90 / 2.40 to 5.00

10%

 

 

 

 

3.00 to 5.00

20%

5.00 to 8.00

20%

Above
5.00

30%

Above
8.00

30%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.2 Surcharge on income tax : No surcharge is payable by non-corporate assessees. Hitherto, companies were required to pay surcharge at 10% of the tax if their total income exceeded Rs.1 crore. This rate of surcharge is now reduced to 7.5% of the tax from A.Y. 2011-12. Foreign companies will continue to pay surcharge of 2.5% of the tax as in the earlier years. So far as Dividend Distribution Tax and Minimum Alternative Tax (MAT) are concerned, the rate of surcharge is reduced from 10% to 7.5% of the tax w.e.f. 1-4-2010 (A.Y. 2011-12). No surcharge is payable on Tax Deducted at Source (TDS). Similarly, no surcharge is payable by a Co-operative society, Artificial Juridical Person and Firm (including Limited Liability Partnership (LLP).

2.3 Education cess : As in earlier years, Education Cess of 3% (including 1% for higher education cess) on Income-tax and surcharge (if applicable) is payable by all assessees. However, no Education Cess is to be collected from TDS or TCS from payments to all corporate and non-corporate resident assessees. If tax is deducted on payments to (i) Foreign Companies, (ii) Non-residents or (iii) on Salary Payments, Education Cess at 3% of the tax and surcharge (if applicable) is to be applied.

2.4 MAT : Rate of Tax on Book Profits u/s.115JB is increased from 15% to 18% from A.Y. 2011-12. Surcharge of 7.5% on this tax (if total income exceeds Rs.1 cr.) and Education Cess of 3% on total tax and surcharge will also be payable.

    3. Tax Deduction at Source (TDS) :
Some significant changes are made in the provisions relating to TDS. These are discussed below.

3.1  Surcharge and Education Cess on TDS :
As stated earlier, while deducting TDS, the tax deductor has not to add surcharge or education cess to the tax deducted from payments to Residents under various provisions of the Income-tax Act. Similarly, while collecting tax at source u/s. 206C from certain income, no surcharge or education cess is to be collected. There are only two exceptions as under :

    i) As regards TDS/TCS on payments/receipts from Foreign Companies, surcharge at 2.5% of tax and education cess at 3% of tax and surcharge is to be added to the amount of tax.

    ii) As regards payments made to Non-residents u/s.195, collection of tax from Non-residents u/s.206C and salary payments to employees u/s 192, only Education Cess at 3% of tax is to be added to the amount of tax.

3.2 Rates for TDS :
The rates of tax prescribed in Part II Schedule I of the Finance Act, 2010, for TDS on various payments are the same as prescribed in the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009. It may be noted that S. 206AA inserted in the Income-tax Act by the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009, has come into force from 1-4-2010. Under this Section, it is provided that wherever tax is to be deducted at source under the Income-tax Act (S. 192 to S. 196D), the tax deductor should obtain PAN of the deductee. If the deductee does not provide his/its PAN, the tax deductor should deduct tax at source at the higher of the following rates :
    i) Rate specified under the applicable Sections (192 to 196 D).

    ii) Rate specified in Part II of Schedule I to the Finance Act, 2010.

    iii) Rate of 20%.

It is also provided in S. 206AA that in the application u/s.197 for lower deduction of tax and in the declaration u/s.197A (Forms 15G or 15H), the PAN of the deductee should be given. If this is not done, this application/declaration will be invalid. Further, in all correspondence, bills, vouchers and other documents which are exchanged between the tax deductor and the deductee, the PAN should be mentioned. If the PAN provided by the deductee is invalid, for any reasons, the tax deductor will be considered to have deducted tax at lower rate if he has deducted tax at a rate lower than 20%. From this provision it is now evident that all Residents, Non-residents and Companies (including Foreign Companies) have to obtain PAN if TDS rates applicable to them is less than 20%. Otherwise, minimum rate of 20% for TDS will be applicable to them.

3.3 Threshold limits for TDS :

The threshold limits for TDS in respect of certain payments u/s.194B to u/s.194J have been revised upwards w.e.f. 1-7-2010 as given in Table 1 on the next page.

3.4 Interest on Late Payment of TDS :
S. 201(1A) has been amended w.e.f. 1-7-2010. The rates for payment of interest for delay in deduction of TDS and for delay in payment of TDS amount will be as under :
    Interest for late deduction of whole or part of TDS amount at 1% p.m. payable as at present will continue.

    Interest for late payment of whole or part of TDS amount will now be 1.5% p.m. instead of 1% p.m. as at present.


Section

Nature of payment

Present

New limit

 

 

(Rs.)

w.e.f. 1-7-2010

 

 

 

(Rs.)

 

 

 

 

194B

Winnings
from

 

 

 

lotteries or

 

 

 

crossword puzzle

5,000

10,000

 

 

 

 

194BB

Winnings
from

 

 

 

race horses

2,500

5,000

 

 

 

 

194C

Payment
to

 

 

 

contractors

 

 

 


For single

 

 

 

transaction

20,000

30,000

 


If aggregate

 

 

 

in F.Y.

 

 

 

exceeds

50,000

75,000

 

 

 

 

194D

Insurance

 

 

 

commission

5,000

20,000

 

 

 

 

194H

Commission

 

 

 

or brokerage

2,500

5,000

 

 

 

 

194I

Rent

1,20,000

1,80,000

 

 

 

 

194J

Fees
for

 

 

 

professional or

 

 

 

technical services

 

 

 

(aggregate)

20,000

30,000

 

 

 

 

    4. Exemptions and deductions :

4.1  Charitable trusts :
There are two main amendments relating to charitable trusts as under :
    i) S. 2(15) : S. 2(15) defining the expression ‘Charitable Purposes’ was amended by the Finance Act, 2008, w.e.f. 1-4-2009. Proviso to the Section added w.e.f. 1-4-2009 stated that ‘advancement of any other object of general public utility’ shall not be a charitable purpose if it involves the carrying on of any activity in the nature of trade, commerce or business, etc. Now, by amendment of this Section, a second proviso is added w.e.f. 1-4-2009 to clarify that the above first proviso shall not apply to a charitable trust if the aggregate of the receipts from trade, commerce, business, etc. is Rs.10 lacs or less in any financial year. The effect of this amendment will, therefore, be that in a particular year when the receipts from such activities are more than Rs.10 lacs, the trust will not be considered as charitable trust. Normally, figure of receipts will be known only at the end of the financial year. Therefore, the question of tax liability will be known only at the end of the year. In the meantime if the trust has not paid advance tax and it is saddled with the tax liability due to this provision, it will have to suffer interest liability u/s.234B/234C. Moreover, if the trust has accepted donations and issued S. 80G cer-tificate to donors in the hope that its receipts from the above activities will be less than Rs.10 lacs, a question will arise whether the donors will get deduction u/s.80G in respect of such donations if the trust loses its exemption for non-compliance with the proviso to S. 2 (15). Consequential amendment in S. 80G has not been made to safeguard the position of a donor who has made donation to the trust without knowledge of these facts.

    ii) S. 12AA : S. 12AA(3) grants power to CIT to cancel registration granted to a charitable trust u/s.12AA if he is satisfied that the activities of the trust are not genuine or are not being car-ried out in accordance with the objects of the trust. The Allahabad High Court in the case of Oxford Acadamy for Career Development v. Chief CIT, (315 ITR 382) held that the CIT has no power to cancel registration granted to a trust prior to 1-10-2004 u/s.12A. Similar view has been taken by the Pune Tribunal in the case of Bharti Vidyapeeth v. ITO, 119 TTJ 261. The ratio of these and similar other decisions has now been reversed by amendment of S. 12AA(3) by extending the power of the CIT to cancel registration even to trusts registered u/s. 12A. This amendment comes into force w.e.f. 1-6-2010.

4.2 S. 10 (21) :
This Section provides for exemption to income of Scientific Research Association under certain circumstances. The expression ‘Scientific Research Association’ has now been replaced by the expression ‘Research Association’ w.e.f. 1-4-2011. The amendment only clarifies that the income from research in social science or statistical research will also be considered as research eligible for exemption. Consequential amendments are also made in S. 35, S. 80GGA, S. 139 and S. 143.

4.3 S. 10AA :
In the Finance (No. 2) Act 2009, this Section was amended to clarify that exemption u/s.10AA to income of an unit established in the SEZ will be allowed on the income worked out by applying the following formula :

Profits of the business of the SEZ unit x
Export turnover of SEZ unit
_____________________________________________

Total turnover of SEZ unit

This amendment was made last year w.e.f. A.Y. 2010- Prior to the amendment the denominator was with reference to ‘Total turnover of the business carried on by the assessee’. A number of representations were made to make the above formula effective from A.Y. 2006-07 as S. 10AA was inserted w.e.f. that year. In response to these representations, the above formula is now made effective from A.Y. 2006-07. In view of this, SEZ units established in 2005 onwards will get the benefit of this amendment with retrospective effect from A.Y. 2006-07.

    5. Taxation of non-residents :
S. 9(1)(v), (vi) and (vii) provides for situations where income by way of Interest, Royalty and Fees for Technical Services shall be deemed to accrue or arise in India. For the purpose of applying deeming provision contained in S. 9(1)(vii) for tax liability on fees for technical services in India, the Supreme Court in Ishikawajima-Harima Heavy Industries Ltd. v. DIT, (288 ITR 408) held that the services should be rendered in India as well as used in India. The ratio of this decision was found to be not in accordance with the legislative intent, and, therefore, a retrospective amendment was made in the Finance Act, 2007, by adding an Explanation in S. 9(2) w.e.f. 1-6-1976. In this Explanation it was provided that interest, royalty and fees for technical services shall be deemed to accrue or arise in India even if the non-resident has no residence or place of business or business connection in India.

Subsequently, the Karnataka High Court in the case of Jindal Thermal Power Company Ltd. v. DCIT, (182 Taxman 252 and 225 CTR 220) held that even after the addition of the above explanation, income form services rendered outside India cannot be considered as accruing or arising in India. In order to reverse the effect of this judgment, the Explanation below S. 9(2) has now been amended with retrospective effect from 1-6-1976 to provide that the deeming fiction contained in the above provision shall apply whether or not the non-resident has a residence or place of business or business connection in India and whether or not the non-resident renders services in India.


    6. Business income :

Some concessions are provided by amendments of S. 35, S. 35AD, S. 40, S. 44AB, S. 44AD, S. 44BB and S. 44DA. These are discussed below :

6.1  S. 35 :
    i) S. 35(1)(ii) — At present, weighted deduction of 125% is allowable in respect of sums paid to a scientific research association or to a university, college or other institution, which is notified and approved under this Section. This deduction is now increased to 175% of the sum paid w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12.

    ii) S. 35(2AA) — At present, weighted deduction of 125% is allowed in respect of payments to National Laboratory, University or Indian Institute of Technology in respect of approved programmes of Scientific Research. This deduction is now increased to 175% of the amount so paid w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12.

    iii) S. 35(2AB) — At present, weighted deduction of 150% is allowable to companies engaged in the business of biotechnology or manufacture of articles or things, other than items mentioned in the Eleventh Schedule, in respect of scientific research expenditure (excluding cost of land or building) on an approved in-house research and development facility. This deductions has now been increased to 200% of such expenditure w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12.

    iv) S. 35(1)(iii) — At present, weighted deduction of 125% is allowed in respect of contribution for research in social science or statistical research carried out by approved university, college or institution. This benefit is extended to contribution to approved research association carrying on such research w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12.

    v) S. 80GGA — At present, deduction is allowed for donations to an approved university, college or institution for research in social science or statistical research. This benefit is now extended to donation to an approved research association undertaking research in social science or statistical research w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12.

6.2 S. 35AD :
    i) This Section was inserted by the Finance (No.2) Act, 2009, effective from A.Y. 2010-11. In the last year’s budget the Finance Minister had stated that the Government would like to replace profit-linked incentives by investment-linked incentives. Introduction of S. 35AD was the first step taken last year. The benefit of 100% deduction of specified capital expenditure (other than land, goodwill and financial instruments) in certain specified businesses was introduced last year. The scope of this Section is now enlarged by making certain amendments effective from A.Y. 2011-12.

    ii) At present, the benefit of this Section is available to specified businesses of setting up and Operating Cold Chain Facilities, Warehousing Facilities for storage of Agricultural Products and Laying and Operating a Cross-Country Natural Gas, Crude or

Petroleum Net work. This benefit is now extended to the following businesses which commence operations on or after 1-4-2010 :
    a. building and operating, anywhere in India, a new hotel of two-star or above category as classified by the Central Government.
    b. building and operating, anywhere in India, a new hospital with at least 100 beds for patients.
    c. Developing and building a housing project under the scheme for slum redevelopment or rehabilitation framed by the Central or State Government and notified by the CBDT in accordance with the prescribed guidelines.

    iii) S. 35AD(3) is amended w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12 to provide that, if deduction is claimed and allowed in respect of capital expenditure of specified business under this Section for any assessment year, then no deduction will be available under Chapter VIA (Part C) in that or any subsequent assessment year.

    iv) Simultaneously, S. 80A(7) as inserted from A.Y. 2011-12 now provides that if deduction is granted under any provisions of Part C of Chapter VIA in respect of income of any business specified u/s.35AD for any assessment year, no deduction shall be allowed u/s.35AD in relation to such specified business for the same or any other assessment year.

This makes it evident that the assessee has option to claim benefit of S. 35AD or benefit under any other provision of the Income-tax Act.


6.3 S. 40(a)(ia) :

    i) At present, in respect of expenditure on payment of any interest, commission, brokerage, rent, royalty, fees for professional services or technical services to a resident, deduction is not allowed, in computing income from business or profession, if tax is not deducted at source, as required under the Income-tax Act, and paid before the end of the relevant previous year. In order to remove hardships caused by this provision, the Section has been amended w.e.f. A.Y. 2010-11. According to this amendment, if the TDS amount is deposited with the Government before the due date for filing the return of income i.e., 31st July or 30th September, the deduction will not be denied.

    ii) Further, if the tax is deducted before the end of the relevant previous year or after that date and paid after the due date for filing the return for the relevant year, deduction for the expenditure will be allowed in the subsequent year when the TDS amount is deposited with the Government.

    iii) Since this provision is applicable from A.Y. 2010-11, assessees who have not deducted and/or deposited the TDS amount on such expenditure before 31-3-2010, can now deduct and/or deposit the same before the due date for filing the return of income for A.Y. 2010-11 (i.e., 31-7-2010 or 30-9-2010). It is possible for the assessee to take the view that this provision is applicable to earlier assessment years in view of the Supreme Court decision in the case of CIT v. Alom Extrusions Ltd., (319 ITR 306).

6.4 S. 44AB — Tax Audit :

    The existing threshold limit of total sales/ turnover/gross receipts for the purpose of tax audit u/s.44AB in the case of a person carrying on business or profession was fixed in 1984 w.e.f. A.Y. 1985-86 at Rs.40 lacs (Business) and Rs.10 lacs (Profession).

This has now been increased w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12 as under :

    Business    —    Rs.60 lacs
    Profession    —    Rs.15 lacs

    ii) Consequential amendment is made in S. 271B providing for penalty for non-compliance with the provisions of S. 44AB. At present, if an assesee fails to get his accounts audited or to furnish audit report as provided in S. 44AB, he is liable to pay penalty u/s.271B at the rate of ½% of total sales, turnover or gross receipts, subject to a maximum of Rs.1.00 lac. This limit of maximum penalty is now enhanced to Rs.1.50 lacs from A.Y. 2011-12.

6.5    S. 44AD — Presumptive taxation of business profits :
This Section was inserted in place of old S. 44AD and S. 44AF w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12 by the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009. Under this Section, an eligible assessee having business income below Rs.40 lacs, had option to be assessed on an income by applying rate of 8% of gross turnover/receipts. This Section is now amended by increasing the limit of gross turnover/receipts from Rs.40 lacs to Rs.60 lacs from A.Y. 2011-12.

6.6 S. 44BB and S. 44DA :
S. 44BB deals with computation of presumptive income from services provided to the business of exploration, etc. of mineral oils. Under this Section, it is provided that 10% of the gross receipts of a non-resident engaged in providing such services in connection with prospecting for, or extraction or production of mineral oil shall be deemed to be income of the non-resident. For this purpose, the non-resident is not required to maintain books of accounts. The Section is now amended, effective from A.Y. 2011-12, to provide that this benefit will not now be available to a non-resident rendering technical services through a permanent establishment in India. In other words, such non-resident will now be governed by S. 44DA which provides for determination of income of such assessees having income from royalty or fees from technical services through a permanent establishment of the non-resident in India. This amendment will nullify the effect of the decision of the Calcutta ITA Tribunal in the case of DCIT v. Schlumbrger Seaco Inc., 50 ITD 348. Consequential amendment is also made in S. 44DA.


    7. Income from other sources (Gifts) :

7.1    S. 56(2)(vii) :
    i) In the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009, S. 56(2)(vii) treating any sum of money received as gift from a non-relative by an Individual or HUF (specified assessee) as income from other sources was amended. Under this amendment, this concept was extended to gifts and deemed gifts received in kind on or after 1-10-2009. In other words, w.e.f. 1-10-2009, any sum of money (exceeding, in aggregate, Rs.50,000), any immovable property, (value exceeding Rs.50,000) or movable property viz. (i) shares and securities,
    jewellery, (iii) archaeological collections, (iv) drawings, paintings, sculptures or (v) any work of art (value exceeding Rs.50,000) received as gift or deemed gift from a non-relative, is taxable as income from other sources.

    ii) Under this Section, if immovable property (land or building) is received as gift by a specified assessee from a non-relative, the fair market value is to be considered as provided in S. 50C (i.e., stamp duty valuation). The amendment made last year also provided that if an immovable property was purchased by a specified assessee, from a non-relative, on or after 1-10-2009, at a price below the stamp duty valuation, the difference will be considered as a gift and taxed as income. This provision has now been reversed by amendment of this Section. It is now provided that if such immovable property is purchased on or after 1-10-2009, at a price below the stamp duty valuation, the difference will not be taxable u/s.56(2)(vii).

    iii) Further, it is now clarified that the ‘property’ received in kind on or after 1-10-2009, by an individual or HUF, should be a ‘Capital Asset’. The effect of this amendment will be that S. 56(2)(vii) will not apply if the specified assessee receives stock-in-trade, raw materials, consumable goods, personal effects, etc. as gift from a non-relative.

    iv) Another amendment in the Section provides that the property received in kind will now include ‘Bullion’ on or after 1-6-2010.

    v) It may be noted that for determination of fair market value of movable property u/s.56(2)(vii) the CBDT has framed Rules 11U and 11UA by Notification No. 23/2010 of 8-4-2010, effective from 1-10-2009.

7.2  S. 56(2)(viia) — New Section :
New S. 56(2)(viia) is inserted w.e.f. 1-6- 2010. This Section extends the concept of a gift or a deemed gift being considered as Income from Other Sources in the case of a Firm (including LLP) or a closely held non- listed company w.e.f. 1- 6-2010. The provisions of this new Section can be briefly stated as under :
(i)    The Section comes into force w.e.f. 1-6-2010.
    ii) The Section applies to any firm (including LLP) or a private limited company as well as non-listed public limited company (specified assessee).

    iii) Under this Section, if a specified assessee receives any shares of a private or public unlisted company from any person, without consideration, the fair market value of which exceeds Rs.50,000, the whole of the aggregate fair market value of such shares shall be considered as income from other sources of the recipient.

    iv) If the specified assessee purchases such shares of a private or public unlisted company from any person at a price which is less than the fair market value of such shares, and if the difference between the fair market value and the purchase price is more than Rs.50,000, such difference will be considered as income of the specified assessee under this Section.

    v) It may be noted that this Section is applicable even if shares of unlisted companies are acquired as stock-in-trade.

    vi) For the above purpose, fair market value of the shares of a private or public unlisted com-pany will have to be determined as provided in Rules 11U and 11UA notified by the CBDT by Notification No. 23/2010, dated 8-4-2010.

    vii) It may be noted that this Section will not apply to shares received by a specified assessee by way of a transaction not regarded as transfer under the following Sections :

    a) S. 47(via) — Transfer of shares in an In-dian company in a scheme of amalgama-tion between two foreign companies.
    b) S. 47(vic) — Transfer of shares in an Indian company by demerged foreign company
to the resulting foreign company.
    c) S. 47(vicb) — Transfer on reorganisation of two co-operative banks.
    d) S. 47(vicd) — Transfer or issue of shares by the resulting company in a scheme of demerger to shareholders of demerged company.
    e) S. 47(vii) — Transfer by a shareholder, in a scheme of amalgamation, of shares held by him in the amalgamating company.
    
viii) It may be noted that the above exceptions do not cover the following transactions which are not considered as transfers u/s.47 :
    a) S. 47(iv) and (v) — Transfer of shares by a holding company to a 100% subsidiary or vice versa.
    b) S. 47(vi) and (vib) — Transfer of shares in a scheme of amalgamation of two Indian companies or by demerged company to the resulting company.
    c) S. 47(xiii) and (xiv) — Transfer of shares by a firm or a proprietary concern when the firm or proprietary concern is con-verted into a company.
    d) S. 47(xiiib) — Transfer of shares on conversion of a non-listed company is converted into LLP.
    e) Transfer of shares by a firm on conversion into LLP.

In view of the fact that there is no specific exemption granted to the above transactions, the transfer of shares of private or public unlisted companies held by the transferor to a firm, LLP or private/public unlisted company under a scheme of amalgamation, demerger or conversion at a value below the fair market value may attract the provisions of S. 56(2)(viia).

7.3 It may be noted that the Assessing Officer is now given power to refer the question of determination of fair market value of any property covered u/s.56(2)(vii) or 56(2)(viia) to a Valuation Officer. For this purpose, S. 142A(1) has been amended w.e.f. 1-7-2010.

7.4 S. 49(4) is amended w.e.f. 1-6- 2010 to provide that when the specified assessee is charged to tax u/s.56(2)(viia) on the fair market value of the shares of any unlisted company received by it without consideration, the cost of acquisition of such shares in the hands of the specified assessee, for the computation of capital gain u/s.48, shall be the fair market value of such shares adopted for computation of income from other sources. Similarly, if such shares are purchased by the specified assessee at a price below the fair market value, the difference in the value treated as income u/s. 56(2)(viia), shall be added to the actual cost of such shares for computing capital gains u/s.48.

    8. Valuation rules :
As stated above, the CBDT has issued a Notification No. 23/2010 on 8-4-2010 prescribing Rules 11U and 11UA for determination of fair market value for movable properties received as gifts or purchasedat a value below the fair market value which is taxable as income from other sources u/s.56(2)(vii) or 56(2)(viia). These Rules have come into force on 1-10-2009. Briefly stated these Rules are as under :

(i)    Valuation of jewellery :
    a) The fair market value of the jewellery shall be estimated to be the price which it would fetch if sold in the open market on the valuation date. If the jewellery is purchased from a registered dealer, the invoice value of the jewellery shall be the fair market value.

    b) In any other case, the assessee should obtain a report of the registered valuer about the fair market value.

    ii) Valuation of archeological collections, drawings, paintings, sculptures or any work of art :

    a) The fair market value shall be the price which it would fetch if sold in the open market.

    b) If the assessee has purchased the asset from a registered dealer, the invoice value shall be the fair market value. In other cases, the assessee should obtain a report of the registered valuer in respect of the fair market value.

    iii) Valuation of shares and securities :
    a. In the case of quoted shares and securities, the fair market value shall be determined as under :

  •     If the quoted shares and securities are purchased through any recognised stock ex-change, the fair market value of such shares and securities shall be the transaction value as recorded in such stock exchange.
  •     If these shares and securities are purchased in a manner other than through recognised stock exchange, the fair market value of the same shall be the lowest price of such shares and securities quoted on the stock exchange on the valuation date or the lowest price quoted on the immediately preceeding date if there is no quotation as on the valuation date.


    b. The fair market value of unquoted equity shares shall be determined in the following manner :

The fair market value of unquoted equity shares =(A-L) x (PV)
                                                                               _____________  
                                                                                       (PE)
Where,
    A =  Book value of the assets in the balance sheet as reduced by any amount paid as advance tax under the Income-tax Act and any amount shown in the balance sheet including the debit balance of the profit and loss account or the profit and loss appropriation account which does not represent the value of any asset.

    L = Book value of liabilities shown in the bal-ance sheet but not including the following amounts :

    i) the paid-up capital in respect of equity shares;

    ii) the amount set apart for payment of dividends on preference shares and equity shares where such dividends have not been declared before the date of transfer at a general body meeting of the company;

    iii) reserves, by whatever name called, other than those set apart towards depreciation;

    iv) credit balance of the profit and loss account;

    v) any amount representing provision for taxation, other than amount paid as advance tax under the Income-tax Act, to the extent of the excess over the tax payable with reference to the book profits in accordance with the law applicable thereto;

    vi) any amount representing provisions made for meeting liabilities, other than ascertained liabilities;

    vii) any amount representing contingent liabilities other than arrears of dividends payable in respect of cumulative preference shares.

PV    = the paid-up value of such equity shares.
PE    = Total amount of paid-up equity share capital
as shown in balance sheet.

   c) The assessee shall obtain a report of the registered valuer or a merchant banker in respect of the fair market value of unquoted shares and securities other than equity shares in a unlisted company. Such value should be the price which such shares or securities would fetch if sold in the open market.

    9. Conversion of a Company into Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) :

9.1  New S. 47(xiiib) :
New S. 47(xiiib) has been inserted w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12 which provides that when a private or public unlisted company is converted into an LLP, exemption from capital gain on such conversion will be granted. Similarly, exemption from capital gain will also be granted on conversion of shares held by the shareholder in the company into his capital account on conversion of the company into LLP. There are, however, certain conditions for grant of such exemption. These conditions are as under :

    i) All the assets and liabilities of the company should be transferred to the LLP.

    ii) All the shareholders of the company should become partners of the LLP and their contribution as well as profit sharing ratio in the LLP should be in the same proportion in which they held shares in the company.

    iii) Shareholders of the company should not receive any consideration or benefit other than by way of share of profit and capital contribution in the LLP.

    iv) The aggregate profit sharing ratio to the ex-tent of 50% or more of the shareholders of the company should continue in the LLP for a period of 5 years.

    v) The total sales, turnover or gross receipts in the business of the company in any of the three 3 preceeding years should not exceed Rs.60 lacs.

    vi) The partners of the LLP should not withdraw the accumulated profits (including Reserves) of the company for a period of 3 years after the conversion.

9.2 S. 47A :
This is also a new Section inserted w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12 to provide that, if any of the above conditions of S. 47(xiiib) be are violated during the specified period of 3 years or 5 years (as may be applicable), the tax on capital gain exempted u/s.47(xiiib) will be payable in the year in which any of the conditions are violated. This tax will be as under :

    i) In the case of transfer of assets and liabilities of the company to the LLP, the tax on capital gain will be payable by the LLP and

    ii) In the case of conversion of shares held in the company to capital in the LLP, the tax on capital gain will be payable by the shareholder.

9.3 It may be noted that several other amendments, which are consequential to the above provisions, have been made. These provisions are as under :

    i) S. 32 : This Section is amended to provide that the aggregate depreciation allowable to the converted company and the LLP shall not exceed the total depreciation allowable in the year of conversion. Such depreciation shall be apportioned between the two entities in the ratio of number of days for which the assets are used by them.

    ii) S. 35DDA : The benefit of amortisation for VRS payments u/s.35DDA will be available to the LLP for the unexpired period.

    iii) S. 43 : It is now provided in S. 43(6) that, if the company is having depreciable assets and such a company is converted into an LLP, the WDV of Block of Assets in the case of the LLP will be the same as in the case of the company. Further, actual cost of the capital asset u/s.43(1) in the hands of the LLP shall be taken as ‘Nil’ in case deduction of the entire cost is allowed to the converted company u/s.35AD.

    iv) S. 49 : Under S. 42 of the LLP Act, share of a partner of an LLP is a transferable right i.e., capital asset. It is now provided u/s.49(2AAA) that the cost of such right of the partner in the LLP shall be the same as the cost of acquisition to him of the shares of the converted company.

    v) S. 72A : On conversion of a company into an LLP, the accumulated losses and unabsorbed depreciation in the case of the company will be allowed to be carried forwarded in the hands of the LLP and will be set off against its income. However, if any of the conditions of S. 47(xiiib) are violated in any year, the benefit allowed by way of carry forward and set-off of losses and unabsorbed depreciation will be deemed to have been wrongly allowed and will become taxable in that year.

    vi) S. 115JAA : In the case of the company, if it has paid tax on book profits u/s.115JA/115JB and the company is entitled to the benefit of carry forward of MAT Credit u/s.115JAA, it is now provided that this MAT Credit will not be available to the LLP on such conversion of the company into the LLP.

9.4 From reading the above conditions, it is evident that the condition No. (v) stated in para 9.1 above is very harsh inasmuch as the benefit of conversion of a company will not be available to all private companies and unlisted public companies. The benefit of the Section can be enjoyed only by small companies. When the LLP Act was passed, this was never the intention of the Parliament that a company having turnover or gross receipt exceeding Rs.60 lacs will be made liable to pay tax under the Income-tax Act if it is converted into an LLP. S. 56 and S. 57 read with Schedules 3 and 4 of the LLP Act already provide that if such companies have taken secured loans, they cannot be converted into LLP. This ensures that large-sized companies are not converted into LLP. By introducing a cap on the sales, turnover or gross receipts, the purpose of the LLP Act to encourage conversion of existing companies into LLP will be defeated.

9.5 In the Explanatory Memorandum attached to the Finance (No. 2) Bill, 2009, it was stated that since partnership firm and LLP are being treated as equivalent, the conversion of partnership firm into LLP will have no tax implications if the rights and obligations of the partners remain the same after the conversion and if there is no transfer of any asset or liability after conversion. It was further stated that if there was a violation of these conditions, the provisions of S. 45 will apply and capital gains will be payable. However, no specific provision has been made in the Income-tax Act granting such conditional exemption in the case of conversion of a partnership firm into an LLP in the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2009 or in the Finance Act, 2010. In the absence of such a specific provision granting exemption similar to S. 47(xiii), S. 47(xiiib) or S. 47(xiv), the existing partnership firm will hesitate to convert itself into LLP.

9.6 It appears that the Government has only made a half-hearted attempt while granting tax exemption on conversion of a company into an LLP. It has not given due consideration to the following issues :

    i) Exemption on conversion of a partnership firm into an LLP is not specifically provided.

    ii) By putting a cap of Rs.60 lacs on total sales, turnover or gross receipts, the benefit of such conversion is restricted to very tiny companies.

    iii) The benefit of exemption/deduction available to the company u/s.10A, u/s.10AA, u/s.10B, u/s.10C, u/s.35A, u/s.35AB, u/s.35D, u/s.35DD, u/s.80IA, u/s.80IB, u/s.80IC, u/s.80ID, u/s.80IE, etc. for the unexpired period has not been granted to the LLP on conversion.

    iv) Proposed S. 56(2)(viia) provides that if a firm or a closely held company receives shares of another closely held company, the difference between the fair market value of such shares and the cost in the hands of the recipient firm or company, will be deemed to be income from other sources of the recipient. Provision is made to exempt certain transfers under a scheme of amalgamation or demerger u/s.47(via), (vic), (vicb), (vid) or (vii) from the provisions of this Section. No exemption is granted to transfer of shares in closely held company when a company is converted into LLP u/s.47(xiiib), or a firm is converted into LLP or a firm or proprietary concern is converted into a company u/s. 47(xiii) and (xiv), or a holding Company transfers to 100% subsidiary or vice versa u/s.47(iv) or (v) or on transfer in amalgamation or in demerger u/s.47(vi) and (vib).

9.7 The question of levy of stamp duty on transfer of assets of the company to the LLP has also not been considered. This is an issue which will have to be considered by the State Governments. This is possible only if specific recommendation is made by the Central Government for grant of exemption from stamp duty.

9.8 Unless these and several other related issues are amicably resolved, the new provisions for LLP will not become popular. Therefore, a comprehensive study about the various issues arising from conversion of a firm or company into LLP should be made by the Central Government as well as by the State Governments if they really want the alternate business model of LLP to become more popular.

    Chapter VIA deductions :
A new S. 80CCF is inserted and following Sections are amended as under :

10.1 New S. 80CCF — Infrastructure bonds :
This new Section comes into force from A.Y. 2011-12 Under this Section an Individual or HUF will be entitled to claim deduction from total income up to Rs.20,000 invested in long-term infrastructure bonds to be notified by the Central Government. This deduction will be over and above deduction upto Rs.1 lac allowed u/s.80C. This benefit will be available for any such investment made during the accounting year 2010-11 and onwards.

10.2    S. 80D — Deduction for Health Insurance Premium :
This Section is amended w.e.f. A.Y. 2011-12. It is now provided that the benefit of deduction under this Section will now be available for any contribution made to a Central Government Health Scheme. This will be besides deduction for Medi-claim Insurance Premium within the existing limits provided in this Section. This will benefit the Government employees and retired Government employees.

10.3    S. 80IB(10) — Development of housing projects :
    i) S. 80IB(10) has been amended effective from A.Y. 2010-11 (Accounting Year 2009-10). At present, the deduction under this Section is available in respect of profits derived from developing specified residential housing project if the same is completed within a period of 4 years from the end of the financial year in which the project is approved. This position will continue in respect of projects approved between 1-4-2004 and 31-3-2005.

    ii) In respect of projects approved on or after 1-4-2005, the period for completion of the project is now extended to 5 years by amendment of this Section.

    iii) Further, the existing limit of built-up area for shops and other commercial establishments in the residential housing project is now increased from A.Y. 2010-11. At present, this limit is 5% of the aggregate built-up area of the housing project or 2500 sq.ft., whichever is less. This limit is now revised to 3% of the aggregate built-up area of the housing project or 5000 sq.ft., whichever more. The Explanatory Memorandum to the Finance Bill, 2010, states that this benefit will be available to housing projects approved on or after 1-4-2005, which are pending for completion, in respect of their income relating to A.Y. 2010-11 and subsequent years.

10.4    S. 80ID — Deduction for hotels or convention centres :
Under this Section, 100% deduction for profits derived by specified hotels or convention centres in specified places is available for a period of 5 years if such hotels start functioning or such convention centres are constructed during the period 1-4-2007 to 31-3-2010. To provide some more time for these facilities to be set up in the light of the Commonwealth Games to be held in October, 2010, the period for start of such hotels or completion of construction of such convention centres has been extended from 31-3-2010 to 31-7-2010.

    11. Settlement Commission :
The following amendments are made in S. 245A, S. 245C and S. 245D(4A) of the Income-tax Act and S. 22A and S. 22D of the Wealth-tax Act, w.e.f. 1-6-2010.

    i) S. 245A : At present, the definition of ‘Case’ excludes proceedings for assessment and reassessment resulting from search or resulting from requisition of books of account, other documents or assets. This definition is now amended to include such cases of search or requisition of books, etc. Further, it is provided that proceedings for assessment or reassessment for any relevant assessment year shall be deemed to have commenced on the date of issue of notice initiating such proceedings and concluded on the date on which assessment is made.

    ii) S. 245C : At present, an application for settlement of a case can be filed if the additional amount of Income-tax payable on the income disclosed in the application exceeds Rs.3 lacs. It is now provided that in the case of a search or requisition of books, etc. such application can only be made if the additional amount of Income-tax payable on the income disclosed in the application exceeds Rs.50 lacs. However, in other cases, the limit is increased from Rs.3 lacs to Rs.10 lacs.

    iii) S. 245D(4A) : At present, the Settlement Commission can pass order of settlement within 12 months from the end of the month in which application is made to the Settlement Commission. This time limit is increased to 18 months in cases of applications made on or after 1-6-2010.

    iv) S. 22A and S. 22D of the Wealth-tax Act : Consequential amendments as in S. 245A and S. 245D(4A) are made in the Wealth Tax also.

    12. Other amendments :

12.1    S. 203 and S. 206C — Certificate for TDS and TCS :
With computerisation in the Income-tax Department, it was proposed to dispense with the requirement to issue physical TDS/TCS certificates by tax deductor. Accordingly, it was provided in S. 203(3) and S. 206C(5) that the tax deductor/collector shall not be required to furnish certificates for TDS/TCS w.e.f. 1-4-2010. It appears that the Income-tax Department has not geared up to take up the responsibility of giving credit for TDS/TCS without verification of physical certificates. Therefore, these provisions in S. 203(3) and S. 206C(5) have now been deleted and the practice of furnishing TDS/TCS certificates by the tax deductor/ collector will continue even after 1-4-2010.

12.2    S. 256 and S. 260A — Reference/Appeal to High Court :
Various High Courts, including the Full Bench of the Allahabad High Court, in the case of CIT v. Mohd. Farooq, 317 ITR 305, and the Bombay High Court in the case of CIT v. Grasim Industries Ltd., 225 CTR 127 held that the High Court had no power to condone the delay in filing reference application u/s.256 or appeal u/s.260A. To remedy this situation, S. 256 has been amended w.e.f. 1-6-1981 and S. 260A has been amended w.e.f. 1-10-1998, giving power to the High Court to admit belated reference applications as well as appeals if it is satisfied that there was sufficient cause for delay in filing such reference applications or appeals.

Similar amendments are also made in S. 27 and S. 27A of the Wealth Tax Act granting similar power to the High Courts with retrospective effect.

12.3    S. 282B — Allotment of Document Identification Number :
Every Income-tax Authority is required  to allot computer-generated Document Identification Number (DIN) in respect of every notice, order, letter or any correspondence issued by him/received by him to/from any other Income-tax Authority or to/from assessees or to/from any other person, effective from 1-10-2010. The implementation of this provision is now postponed to 1-7-2011.

    13. Computation of income of General Insurance Companies :
The First Schedule to the Income-tax Act (Rule 5) provides for computation of profits and gains of general insurance companies. This provision is now amended as under effective from A.Y. 2011-12 :
    
i) Any gain or loss on realisation of investments would alone be taxable/deductible. This will be the position even if such gain or loss is included in the profit and loss account or not. Therefore, gain or loss on revaluation of investments will not be considered for determination of taxable income.

ii) Further, provision for diminution in the value of investments i.e., unrealised loss or loss on revaluation of investments, which is debited to the profit and loss account will be added back in computing the taxable income.

This amendment will bring welcome relief for general insurance companies as unrealised gains on investments will not be taxed from A.Y. 2011-12.

    14 . To sum up :
From the above analysis of the Finance Act, 2010, it will be noticed that about 20 important amendments have been made in the Income-tax and Wealth-tax Acts. Compared to earlier Finance Acts, this number can be considered as insignificant. As mentioned earlier, these amendments have reduced the burden of direct taxes this year by about 26,000 crores. To this extent we can give credit to our Finance Minister.

The concept of treating gifts as income of the donee is being enlarged every year and this trend has continued this year also. Further, when the concept of Limited Liability Partnership was recognised in our country as an alternate business model, by passing a separate LLP Act in 2008, it was believed that all-out efforts will be made to encourage existing partnerships and unlisted companies to convert themselves into this new business model without any tax liability. However, even after two years of this legislation, no major steps have been taken either by the Central Government for the reforms of tax laws or by the State Governments for the matter of concession in stamp duty. In the 2009 budget and in the 2010 budget, only some half-hearted steps are taken which are not likely to encourage the business community to opt for this alternate business model.

The Income-tax Act, 1961, came into force on 1-4-1962. We have lived with this Act for about 5 decades. It will complete 50 years of its existence and will celebrate its Golden Jubilee next year. During this journey of 5 decades, this Act has suffered with innumerable amendments. Many of these amendments have been made with retrospective effect. Most of these retrospective amendments were made to reverse the decisions of ITA Tribunals, High Courts and the Supreme Court. These amendments have complicated our tax structure to such an extent that the successive Governments have been promising that they would like to introduce tax reforms and enact such tax laws which lay taxpayers can understand. Several committees were appointed for this purpose and attempts were made to draft simple tax laws. None of these attempts have succeeded in the past. Now, it appears that the present Finance Minister is serious about replacing the present direct tax laws and indirect tax laws by new legislation. This is evident from paras 25 and 26 of his budget speech delivered in the Parliament on 26-2-2010. These two paras read as under :

Tax reforms :
“25. I am happy to inform the Honourable Members that the process for building a simple tax system with minimum exemptions and low rates designed to promote voluntary compliance, is now nearing completion. On the Direct Tax Code the wide-ranging discussions with stakeholders have been concluded. I am confident that the Government will be in a position to implement the Direct Tax Code from April, 2011.”

“26. On Goods and Services Tax, we have been focussing on generating a wide consensus on its design. In November, 2009 the Empowered Committee of the State Finance Ministers placed the first discussion paper on GST in the public domain. The Thirteenth Finance Commission has also made a number of significant recommendations relating to GST, which will contribute to the ongoing discussions. We are actively engaged with the Empowered Committee to finalise the structure of GST as well as the modalities of its expeditious implementation. It will be my earnest endeavour to introduce GST along with the DTC in April, 2011.”

Let us hope that new Direct Tax Code in its revised form and GST system of collecting indirect taxes are brought into force from April, 2011. For this purpose, the legislative process will have to be expedited. At the same time, all members of the Parliament will have to co-operate with the Government in passing this legislation well in time before the end of 2010. Let us also hope that with this legislation the tax laws and procedures are simplified and tax litigation is considerably reduced. The new law should be such that a lay tax-payer can understand the same and cost of the compliance is reduced. Further, the Government should ensure that no major amendments are made in this new legislation from time to time. The effort of the Government should be to provide a simple tax structure and an efficient non-corrupt tax administration.

GST : Practical approach for implementation

Lot has been said about GST and its implementation in India. We all wish implementation of GST to be :
G – Good

S – Simple

T – Transition

From various different and complex tax systems to one unified, stable and simple tax regime.

However one should consider the various practical difficulties in proper implementation of GST. The following are some of the important aspects which need consideration for effective implementation of GST in India.

(1) System upgrade :

    All over India different states have taken initiative at their own level for E-Governance and computerisation of Sales Tax or VAT-related work. As there is no proper customisation of the software developed, one cannot generate various analytical reports and information.

    Technology should be used in such a way that not only blue chip companies, but a small retailer also can use it for compliance. The system should be evolved in such a way that dealers and consultants are not required to visit offices for registration, return submission or allied work. Services of our I.T. Companies should be used in development and implementation of software for one of the finest reforms ever in India’s indirect taxation arena.

    In spite of amendments in procedural compliance in income-tax, the new system has been readily accepted by people and one is hoping the same on indirect tax front.

(2) Data transition from old tax system (VAT) to GST :

    Technology should be used for transition of data or master records of dealers from the old tax system to new tax system. It should be borne in mind that it has not been long when VAT was implemented. Exhaustive details relating to dealers have already been asked for and are available with the Department. Database of the dealer is updated on real-time basis. Since all the information of existing dealers is already available with the Sales Tax authorities, requirement of the same information again for GST would lead to duplication of work and wastage of time and energy. Dealers should be asked only to confirm the correctness of it.

    Smooth implementation of GST will bring in support and confidence of the dealers and the Department with the new tax system. They will be free from unwarranted paperwork and there would be least possibilities of commitment of any error and thereafter its rectification.

(3) Strategy for disposal of matters in old tax structure :

    At present assessments under the Bombay Sales Tax Act are still pending. Assessments for the period 1998-99 and onwards are still going at various offices. It is difficult to foresee what will happen in April 2010/or April 2011 when GST will be implemented. On implementation of GST we will have to deal with three different Acts :

    (1) Old tax system (e.g., BST in Maharashtra)

    (2) VAT (With effect from 1-4-2005 as in Maharashtra, for other)

    (3) Proposed GST

    A strategy should be developed for clearance of long pending assessments. Otherwise it would become a complex structure to deal with.

    Even at present for VAT in Maharashtra, following are the pending matters with respect to year 2005 i.e., first year of VAT implementation :

    (a) Advisory Visit

    (b) Business Audit

    (c) Refund Audit

    (d) Pending Assessments

    (e) Matters before various Appellate Authorities, Tribunal & High Court, etc.

(4) Training to staff of Departments :

    Government and bureaucrats are of the view that the dealer should be updated of various tax laws. But for proper functioning of tax system both i.e., dealer and Department staff should be well versed with the tax system.

    At the time of implementation of VAT, we have observed that the Tax Department which is supposed to answer the queries of dealers/practitioners is rather itself confused and raising so many queries.

    Aspects to be taken care of :

    Dealers and the Tax Consultants/Practitioners are required to comply with all the tax matters through the Departmental set-up.

    It has been seen in the current VAT regime that the dealer is the ultimate responsible person who needs to comply with the tax provisions, but what about the department staff. Proper training should be departed to the staff and officers of the Sales Tax Department about the Acts/Rules/Provisions.

    The officer should be fully aware of the new laws and provisions thereof. Many decisions are being taken at top level, but it is the duty of top-level management to percolate the new development to the juniors, staff and officials at various spread-out locations. It will develop the confidence of the Department in the new tax system. Accordingly advance training session should be held to groom the officers about new tax structure.

(5) Common platform :

    Just like income-tax, single software should be developed for all the states. This will help both the Government and Sales Tax authorities. Unless an appropriate model is evolved for maintaining status quo for tax administration, both taxpayer and administration will be at dilemma. The following are some of the advantages of common software platform :

    (a) Speedy data sharing from one state to another.

    (b) Control and monitor over inter-state transaction, imports and exports.

    (c) Fast cross-checking of transaction resulting in saving of time and money.

    (d) Will inculcate global business atmosphere.

    (e) Increase the free trade and movement of goods and services.

    (f) Curb the black money and off-the-record transaction.

    (g) Since PAN is the base for the registration records of all the dealers, information can easily be shared across various taxation structures such as (1) Direct Tax (2) Customs Duty (3) Excise Duty (4) Service Tax.

    This will also act as catalyst for the project undertaken by the Government of importing Unique Identification Number across the country.

    All this technological upgradation can be very well undertaken when we have the best of I.T. companies like TCS, Wipro, Infosys and many more.

(6) Collaborating with the various professionals :

Professional like, Chartered Accountants, Company Secretary, Cost Accountants, Tax Consultants, and Tax Practitioners should be made aware of the Acts, Rules, and various provisions. These are people or intermediary partners for the Government to communicate the problems of the taxation system properly to the last person of the chain in best of manner. Compliance with the requirement of income-tax has been improved because of the intermediary strong professional force. The same thing can be very well achieved on indirect taxation also. The following things can be done for this purpose :

1. Spreading awareness through various professional bodies in India like C.A., C.S., ICWAI, IIMS, educational institutes, etc.

2. Providing web-based platform for all the updates and FAQs about the tax system.

3. Organising programmes and seminars to update the masses about new tax levy, similar to the various programmes organised by the Ministry of Company Affairs (MCA) for the investor awareness programmes.

7) Uniform forms and compliance :

Dealer should have common forms to comply with the Sales Tax requirement. The same forms are available all over India for income-tax (e.g., ITR1, ITR2, and Pan Application, etc.), service tax (ST1, TR6 Challan, and STR, etc.), excise, customs and others, but this is not the case with local sales tax acts. Each state prescribes their own forms which acts as obstacle to simplification. When in case of Central Sales Tax Act we have Registration Forms, Quarterly Return Forms, C-Form, etc. of same from at all over state, then this is also possible for the local Sales Tax Act.

Along with dealers, professional, service providers, tax consultants will also be in much better position to perform their responsibilities.

For example, in some States at present we have Vat Audit Report of 2 or 3 pages and in another state like Maharashtra we have Vat Audit Report in Form 704 of nearly 80 pages.

It’s not about the number of pages but what is required is uniformity and simplicity in the compliance and procedural aspects of GST all over India.

8. Promoting awareness among public :

General public should be made aware of the new tax system to be implemented, well in advance. Sufficient time should be given to the public at large so as to understand and prepare them for the transition. Few suggestive steps for this :

(a) Advertise in print media
(b) Advertise through T.V.
(c) Advertise and propaganda through news and publications.
(d) Arranging seminars and conferences.
(e) Taking the corporate sector into confidence and sharing ideas directly with them.

Concluding :

It is recommended to the concerned authorities that hasty implementation of any tax system will hamper the future progress of tax structure. To ensure smooth transition to the new tax regime, it is necessary to assess the overall impact of the new tax structure on all facets of business and carry out requisite changes in a timely manner. Public mindset is ready for the change, only because they are thinking that something better will come in GST.

Hope the suggestions come helpful for better implementation of GST in transforming our economy from developing to developed one.

Management fees : Are you following the best practices ?

Article

1.0 Introduction :


One of the most widely contested issues by Indian tax
authorities during a transfer pricing audit is the amount paid for intra-group
services to group companies often referred to as management or intra-group
fees/charges. In fact, compensation for intra-group services has been one of the
important transfer pricing challenges globally for taxpayer and authorities
alike.

At the same time, management fees can be one of the more
important and legitimate tax planning tools for effectively lowering taxable
income in a particular tax jurisdiction, if it is structured in a proper manner.
Hence it is obvious that tax authorities look at this mechanism as a profit
extraction technique and adopt a strict posture while investigating the
inter-company affairs. Further it is imperative that the Multinational
Enterprise (MNE) group which is formulating an intra-group management fee
policy, must consider the tax implications in both the jurisdictions. It is also
equally important to consider other aspects such as withholding tax, indirect
tax levies, international tax and regulatory issues while formulating an
intra-group management fee policy.

This article (in two parts) seeks to outline certain key
aspects that need to be considered while formulating a management fee policy and
also the broad approach to be followed in this regard. The analysis here is
mainly from an Indian perspective (i.e., mainly with reference to a
foreign MNE proposing to charge management fees to its Indian group company to
which support services are rendered, and also with reference to an Indian MNE
proposing to charge management fees to its overseas group companies). At various
places, the article also highlights the practical approach currently being
followed by the Indian tax authorities and issues encountered by taxpayers based
on transfer pricing assessments recently completed.


There is no specific mention of intra-group services (though
there is for cost sharing arrangements) in Indian transfer pricing provisions [i.e.,
S. 92 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (ITA)]. The law is still emerging in India and
therefore reliance is also placed on, and useful inferences have been drawn
from, the international tax practices followed in some other developed
countries, along with the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines (OECD Guidelines)
1
and the Guidance Note of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India on
transfer pricing.


2.0 Concept of intra-group services and management fees :


An intra-group service is a service performed by one member
of a multinational group for the benefit of one or more group companies. The
intra-group services may be performed by a parent company or a sister company
for any one or more of the group companies. In a transfer pricing context, such
intra-group services become significant when they are rendered to related
parties located in different tax jurisdictions.


The OECD Guidelines state that generally every MNE group
arranges for a broad range of services to be available to its members, in
particular, administrative, technical, financial and commercial services. Such
services may include management, coordination and control functions for the
entire group.
2 In
essence, intra-group services encompass a broad range of services that can
potentially be provided by the parent/group company to another group company (or
across group companies). In general, the categories of services that could be
regarded as intra-group services include the following :




  • management services;



  • administrative services;



  • coordination, control and administrative services;



  • research and development;



  • product development;



  • technical services;



  • purchasing, marketing and distribution;



  • engineering services;



  • staff & HR related matters, such as recruitment and training;



  • financial services;



  • legal services; and



  • other commercial services that typically can be provided with regard to the
    nature of the MNE’s business.



Some of the intra-group services (basic administrative,
financial or support services) could be referred to as routine in nature. The
identification and treatment of these services are generally straightforward and
simple. However, the issue of charging for services may become complex as the
nature of services moves from routine to more sophisticated.

3.0 Broad parameters for designing a policy for charging for intra-group
services :


Considering the importance of charging arm’s-length management fees from the perspective of both the service provider and the service recipient, the basic principles involved in designing a management fee policy are discussed here. Broadly speaking, the OECD Guidelines” outline two main issues that should be addressed when evaluating intra-group services in the context of transfer pricing, namely:

  • determining whether the activities undertaken by a parent company or group service centre genuinely constitute intra-group services (i.e., whether the payer is receiving a benefit); and

  • how to determine an arm’s-length consideration for such services (in accordance with the benefit received).

3.1 Determining whether intra-group services have been rendered:

The OECD Guidelines provide a basis to determine whether a service has been rendered. The OECD Guidelines broadly state that when one group member performs an activity for one or more group members, it will be regarded as a service rendered if and only if the activity provides the respective group member with economic or commercial value that might conceivably enhance the recipient’s commercial position.’ It also provides another simple way to ensure that a legitimate service is being rendered by considering whether an independent enterprise in similar circumstances would be willing to pay for the same service conducted by another independent entity or whether it would perform that service in-house. In other words, the OECD Guidelines are based on the principle of willingness to pay for an activity from an independent enterprise vis-a-vis performing it in-house. Simply stated, if the activity is not one for which the independent enterprise would have been willing to payor perform for itself, the activity ordinarily should not be regarded as a chargeable intra-group service under the arm’s-length principle.

The US regulations u/ s.482 of the Internal Revenue Code (US regulations) are also based on the same lines. Similarly, the position of the Australian Tax Office (ATO) with regard to head office activities is that services are chargeable only when the activity has conferred a benefit to an assessee. The ATO also takes the view that where a benefit is provided to an entity by way of a service and there is a real connection between the entity’s operations and the associate, the entity would be expected to pay for the services.

This test involving a willingness to payor existence of a benefit (benefit rule), as enunciated above is, by far, the most important factor that determines whether a related-party service recipient would pay for an intra-group service and, therefore, in turn, whether the service provider can justify a charge for the provision of the intra-group services. The objec-tive of the benefit rule is not only to determine the quantum of benefit, but also the relative proximity of the benefit derived to the intra-group services rendered. Therefore, one should determine how direct or remote the benefits derived are in relation to the activity performed under the guise of intra-group services. A direct or perceived benefit from the service rendered must be identified. Conse-quently, allocations are not to be made if the prob-able benefit to other members is so indirect or re-mote that unrelated parties would not have ‘charged for similar  services.

Further, such management fee charge is to be consistent and commensurate with the relevant benefits intended for the services, based on the facts known when the services were rendered, and not based on benefits realised later on. In other words, the use of hindsight is to be avoided.

Consequently at a practical level, with a view to determining whether intra-group services have been rendered, each service must be evaluated on the basis of whether it provides a group member with economic or commercial value that enhances its commercial position in the market where it operates.

This is also relevant because certain services are not chargeable at all. The OECD Guidelines identify certain services or activities that are deemed to be non-beneficial for the recipient. As a result, those activities cannot be regarded as chargeable intra-group services. The main categories of non-beneficial services identified in the OECD Guidelines are:

  • shareholder/custodial activities;
  • stewardship  / duplicative  services;
  • services that provide incidental benefits;
  • passive association benefits; and
  • on-call services.

The same are briefly  discussed hereunder:

3.1.1  Shareholder services/Custodial activities:

Shareholder activities are regarded as activities that a group member performs solely because of its ownership interest in one or more of the group members (in its capacity as a shareholder). Such an activity may be performed by one group member for related group members, even though those members do not need the activity and would not be willing to pay for it if it were performed by an independent enterprise. Consequently, under the OECD Guidelines, this type of shareholder activity would not justify a charge to the recipient company.

On reading of OECD Guidelines, the Canadian Regulations, and the US Regulations, an illustrative list of services/ costs that are regarded as share-holder activities are mentioned below :

  • costs of activities relating to the legal structure of the parent company and include expenses associated with the issuance of stock and maintenance of shareholder relations (e.g., costs of issuing shares, share transfer expenses, meetings of shareholders and costs of the supervisory board);

  • costs relating to the reporting and legal requirements of the parent company (e.g., consolidation of financial reports, maintenance of shareholder records, filings of prospectuses and income tax returns);

  • costs incurred by a parent company to raise funds for acquisition of a new company in its own rights;

  • costs of managerial and control (monitoring) activities related to the management and protection of the investment as such in participations;

  • costs of visits and reviewing subsidiary performance on a regular basis; and

  • costs of financing or refinancing the parent’s ownership participation in the subsidiary.

However, merely because an activity has been per-formed for the benefit of the owner does not, per se, mean that it is a shareholder activity for which an allocation is not warranted. This is because there may be activities performed for the interest of the owner, which conform to the shareholder activity definition provided in the OECD Guidelines, but which could nevertheless be regarded as chargeable based on surrounding facts and circumstances of the case. In such cases, the OECD Guidelines advise that whether the activities fall within the definition of shareholder activities as defined in the OECD Guidelines is to be determined based on whether under comparable facts and circumstances, the activity is one that an independent enterprise would have been willing to pay for or to perform for itself.

3.1.2  Duplicative Services:

Duplicative services or stewardship services are those that a group member offers to any other member, which can be considered duplicate in the sense that the service is already performed by the recipient or by a third, unrelated party on its behalf. In that case, no intra-group services should be considered to be rendered by the group member.

Such stewardship or duplicative expenses are illustrated in the US Regulations in the context of a financial analysis for a subsidiary’s borrowing needs. When the subsidiary does not have personnel qualified to make the analysis, and does not make the analysis, the cost of the financial analysis done by the parent is required to be allocated to the subsidiary. If, however, the subsidiary has qualified financial staff that makes the analysis, the review of the analysis by the parent’s financial staff is duplicative and an allocation of such costs is not to be made to the subsidiary in such cases.

However, at the same time, it is also recognised that there may be some exceptions, i.e., a temporary circumstance or an opportunity to eliminate critical business risk. The instances of elimination of critical business risk would come into play, for example, while taking a second legal opinion or performing an external audit to avoid a risky or wrong business decision. In other words, when a valid business reason exists, those duplicate services may be considered intra-group services eligible for a management fee payment.

3.1.3  Services that provide incidental benefits:

The OECD Guidelines highlight another set of services which do not warrant a